Chief Architect 11 Reference Manual

Chief Architect® X1
Reference Manual
Professional Design & Drafting Software
Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
Copyright © 2007 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect,
Inc.
Chief Architect® is a registered trademark of Chief Architect, Inc.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software Inc.
The City Blueprint and Country Blueprint fonts are © 1992-1999 Payne Loving Trust. All
rights reserved.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective
owners.
Printed in the United States of America.

Contents
Contents
Chapter 1: Overview
Introduction .........................................................................................1
Chief Architect Full vs. Lite ...............................................................1
Startup Options ...................................................................................2
The Chief Architect Environment .....................................................3
Toolbars................................................................................................6
Menus....................................................................................................7
Dialogs ..................................................................................................8
The Status Bar .....................................................................................8
Preferences and Defaults ....................................................................9
Drawing a Plan ..................................................................................10
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................12
Program Updates...............................................................................15
Getting Help .......................................................................................15
i
Chief Architect Reference Manual
Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chapter Overview ............................................................................. 17
Toolbar Customization Dialog ......................................................... 18
Toolbars and Menus.......................................................................... 21
Toolbar Configurations .................................................................... 22
Restoring Toolbars ............................................................................ 24
Chief Architect’s Tools ..................................................................... 24
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons..............................................69
Toggle Buttons ................................................................................... 70
Edit Toolbar Buttons......................................................................... 71
Other Buttons .................................................................................... 77
Chapter 3: Editing Objects

Introduction ....................................................................................... 79
Architectural vs CAD Objects.......................................................... 80
Defaults and Preferences .................................................................. 80
Snap Behaviors .................................................................................. 82
Object Snaps ...................................................................................... 82
Angle Snaps........................................................................................ 84
Grid Snaps.......................................................................................... 85
Edit Behaviors.................................................................................... 86
Creating Objects................................................................................ 90
Selecting Objects................................................................................ 92
Editing Line Based Objects .............................................................. 95
Editing Arc Based Objects................................................................ 98
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects ............................................ 103
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects ......................................... 107
Editing Box-Based Objects ............................................................. 111
Editing Spline Based Objects ......................................................... 114
ii
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses ................................................118
Contents
Architectural and CAD Blocks.......................................................121
Displaying Objects...........................................................................122
Moving Objects................................................................................123
Aligning Objects ..............................................................................126
Resizing Objects...............................................................................129
Reshaping Objects ...........................................................................129
Rotating Objects ..............................................................................133
Reflecting Objects............................................................................135
Copying and Pasting Objects .........................................................136
Deleting Objects...............................................................................141
Trim and Extend..............................................................................142
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog...............................................144
Union, Intersection, and Subtract..................................................146
Converting Objects..........................................................................149
Select Same / Load Same ................................................................152
Edit Area Tools ................................................................................153
Chapter 4: File Management

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................157
Compatibility with Previous Versions ..........................................158
Creating a New Plan........................................................................159
Creating a New Layout ...................................................................159
Saving a Plan or Layout File ..........................................................160
Organizing your Files......................................................................160
Save and Save As .............................................................................161
Saving a Plan Thumbnail................................................................161
Auto Archive ....................................................................................162
Undo Files.........................................................................................164
Opening a Plan or Layout File .......................................................164
iii
Project Browser ............................................................................... 165

Project Information......................................................................... 166
Template Files.................................................................................. 167
Searching for Plans ......................................................................... 169
Closing Plans and Views ................................................................. 172
Exporting a Plan.............................................................................. 172
Exporting an Entire Plan................................................................ 173
Exiting Chief Architect ................................................................... 174
Chapter 5: Defaults & Preferences

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 175
Default Settings................................................................................ 176
Dynamic Defaults ............................................................................ 179
Plan Defaults .................................................................................... 180
Reset to Defaults .............................................................................. 182
Preferences Dialog........................................................................... 183
Appearance Panel............................................................................ 184
Colors Panel ..................................................................................... 186
Font Panel ........................................................................................ 187
Library Browser Panel ................................................................... 188
Text & Page Setup Panel ................................................................ 189
General Panel................................................................................... 190
Folders Panel....................................................................................192
New Plans Panel............................................................................... 194
Layers Panel..................................................................................... 195
Unit Conversions Panel................................................................... 195
Time Tracker Panel......................................................................... 197
Architectural Panel ......................................................................... 198
CAD Panel........................................................................................ 199
Line Properties Panel ...................................................................... 200
iv
Sun Angle Panel...............................................................................201
Contents
Edit Panel .........................................................................................201
Behaviors Panel ...............................................................................202
Snap Properties Panel .....................................................................204
Material List Panel ..........................................................................206
Report Style Panel ...........................................................................207
Master List Panel.............................................................................208
Categories Panel ..............................................................................209
Render Panel....................................................................................211
Texture Filter Panel ........................................................................213
Reset Options Panel.........................................................................214
Chapter 6: Layers
Layer Sets .........................................................................................216
Layer Set Management ...................................................................217
Active Layer Set Control ................................................................218
Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................218
Displaying Objects...........................................................................221
Select Layer Dialog..........................................................................222
Layer Tab .........................................................................................223
Layer Painter ...................................................................................224
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets ....................................................224
Layer Set Defaults Dialog ...............................................................225
Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Default Settings................................................................................228
The Wall Tools.................................................................................229
The Deck Tools ................................................................................231
v
The Fencing Tools ........................................................................... 231

Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................ 232
Foundation Walls ............................................................................ 232
Pony Walls........................................................................................ 233
Railings ............................................................................................. 233
Invisible Walls.................................................................................. 234
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks ................................................ 235
Hatch Wall ....................................................................................... 236
Break Wall ....................................................................................... 236
Deck Railings ................................................................................... 237
Deck Edge......................................................................................... 237
Fencing ............................................................................................. 237
Drawing Walls ................................................................................. 238
Connecting Walls............................................................................. 240
Displaying Walls .............................................................................. 241
Editing Walls.................................................................................... 242
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ............................... 245
Aligning Walls.................................................................................. 246
Attic Walls........................................................................................ 248
Double Walls ....................................................................................248
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................249
Wall Type Definitions ..................................................................... 251
Wall Type Definitions Dialog ......................................................... 251
Exporting Wall Definitions............................................................. 255
Importing Wall Definitions............................................................. 256
Curved Walls and Roofs ................................................................. 256
Stepped and Raked Walls............................................................... 258
Wall Specification Dialog................................................................ 259
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog .................................................... 273
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults ....................................................... 274
vi
Chapter 8: Rooms
Contents
Room Definition...............................................................................280
Room Defaults..................................................................................280
Room Material Defaults..................................................................280
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................281
Selecting Rooms ...............................................................................283
Room Types......................................................................................284
Room Labels.....................................................................................286
Decks.................................................................................................288
Editing Rooms..................................................................................290
Special Ceilings ................................................................................292
Room Polylines.................................................................................295
Room Specification Dialog..............................................................296
Chapter 9: Doors
Door Defaults ...................................................................................305
The Door Tools ................................................................................306
Displaying Doors..............................................................................308
Editing Doors ...................................................................................309
Centering Doors and Windows ......................................................311
Changing Door Swings....................................................................312
Special Doors....................................................................................314
Door Specification Dialog ...............................................................315
Door Schedules.................................................................................325
Chapter 10: Windows

vii
Window Defaults ............................................................................. 328

The Window Tools........................................................................... 328
Special Windows.............................................................................. 330
Stacked Windows ............................................................................ 331
Window Levels................................................................................. 334
Displaying Windows........................................................................ 335
Editing Windows ............................................................................. 336
Custom Muntins .............................................................................. 338
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows.......................................................... 339
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs .................................................. 341
Window Specification Dialog ......................................................... 343
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog .......................................... 359
Bow Window Specification ............................................................. 360
Window Schedules........................................................................... 361
Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults .................................................................................. 364
Working With Multiple Floors ...................................................... 365
Floor Tools ....................................................................................... 365
Adding Floors .................................................................................. 366
Exchanging Floors........................................................................... 367
Deleting Floors ................................................................................. 367
Copying Floors................................................................................. 368
The Current Floor ........................................................................... 368
Reference Floor................................................................................ 368
Chapter 12: Foundations

Foundation Defaults ........................................................................ 372
viii
Building a Foundation.....................................................................372
Contents
New Floor Dialog .............................................................................376
Displaying Foundations...................................................................376
Editing Foundations ........................................................................376
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings.................................................377
Resizing Stem Walls ........................................................................377
Deleting Foundations.......................................................................377
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations......................................378
Foundations and Room Specification ............................................378
The Slab Tools..................................................................................379
Editing Piers and Pads ....................................................................380
Slab Specification Dialog ................................................................381
Chapter 13: Roofs

Roof Defaults....................................................................................384
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs................................................384
The Roof Tools.................................................................................385
Automatically Generated Roof Styles............................................386
Some Common Roof Types.............................................................390
Roof Baseline Polylines ...................................................................391
Manual Roofs ...................................................................................393
Drawing Roof Planes.......................................................................393
Curved Roof Planes.........................................................................394
Dormers ............................................................................................398
Roof Returns ....................................................................................400
Displaying Roof Planes....................................................................401
Editing Roof Planes .........................................................................402
Editing Curved Roof Planes ...........................................................405
Editing Auto Dormers.....................................................................407
ix
Locating Roof Plane Intersections ................................................. 408

Ceiling Planes................................................................................... 409
Gable/Roof Line............................................................................... 410
Skylights ........................................................................................... 414
Gutters .............................................................................................. 415
Gable Over Door/Window.............................................................. 415
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings ....................................... 416
Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................ 416
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog ................................................ 422
Roof Plane Specification Dialog ..................................................... 424
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog ................................................. 428
Dormer Specification Dialog .......................................................... 429
Dormer Defaults .............................................................................. 432
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ....................................... 432
Roof Pitches in Degrees................................................................... 433
Chapter 14: Stairs

Stair Tools ........................................................................................ 436
Anatomy of a Staircase ................................................................... 436
Drawing Stairs ................................................................................. 437
Creating Curved Stairs ................................................................... 438
Merging Stair Sections .................................................................... 438
Displaying Stairs.............................................................................. 440
Editing Stairs ................................................................................... 441
Winders ............................................................................................ 442
Stair Landings.................................................................................. 443
Maintaining Tread Width............................................................... 447
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads .................................................. 448
Starter Treads................................................................................. 451
x
Wrapped Stairs................................................................................452
Contents
Other Special Railings & Stairs .....................................................453
Creating a Stairwell.........................................................................456
Rooms Below Staircases..................................................................457
Staircase Specification Dialog ........................................................458
Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................467
Chapter 15: Framing

Framing Defaults .............................................................................469
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing .....................................470
The Framing Tools ..........................................................................471
Blocking and Bridging ....................................................................473
Automatic Framing .........................................................................474
Build Framing Dialog......................................................................475
Framing Reference Markers ..........................................................486
Bearing Lines ...................................................................................488
Joist Direction Lines........................................................................489
Wall Framing Details ......................................................................492
Drawing Wall Framing Members..................................................493
Displaying Framing .........................................................................493
Editing Framing...............................................................................494
Keeping Framing Current ..............................................................496
Framing and the Materials List .....................................................496
Framing Specification Dialog .........................................................497
Beam Specification Dialog ..............................................................498
Post Specification Dialog.................................................................499
Chapter 16: Trusses

xi
Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 502

Roof Trusses..................................................................................... 502
Editing Trusses ................................................................................ 504
Editing Truss Shape ........................................................................ 505
Truss Details .................................................................................... 505
Truss Labels..................................................................................... 506
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing............................................... 507
Truss Base ........................................................................................ 507
Hip Trusses ...................................................................................... 511
Girder Trusses ................................................................................. 515
Scissors Trusses ............................................................................... 516
Truss Base Specification Dialog ..................................................... 516
Roof Truss Specification Dialog..................................................... 518
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog ...................................... 521
Chapter 17: Electrical

The Electrical Tools......................................................................... 524
Creating Wiring Schematics........................................................... 525
Auto Place Outlets ........................................................................... 526
Electrical Library ............................................................................ 526
Displaying Electrical Objects ......................................................... 527
Editing Electrical Objects............................................................... 527
Electrical Service Specification Dialog .......................................... 529
Electrical Defaults ........................................................................... 534
Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Corner Boards ................................................................................. 536
Corner Board Specification Dialog................................................ 536
xii
Quoins...............................................................................................537
Contents
Quoin Specification Dialog .............................................................538
Molding Profiles...............................................................................539
Symbol Moldings .............................................................................540
Molding Polylines ............................................................................541
Displaying Molding Polylines .........................................................543
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings .......................................543
Frieze Moldings ...............................................................................543
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog...........................................544
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog.....................................546
Chapter 19: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................552
The Cabinet Tools............................................................................552
Displaying Cabinets.........................................................................555
Cabinet Labels .................................................................................555
Editing Cabinets ..............................................................................556
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style ........................................559
Editing Custom Countertops..........................................................559
Joined Cabinets................................................................................560
Special Cabinets...............................................................................562
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................565
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog.................................................577
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog...............................................578
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog......................................579
Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................580
Chapter 20: Terrain

xiii
Terrain Configuration Button........................................................ 584

Terrain Tools ................................................................................... 584
Terrain Elevation Tools .................................................................. 585
Terrain Modifier Tools ................................................................... 589
Terrain Feature Tools ..................................................................... 590
Garden Bed Tools............................................................................ 592
Water Feature Tools ....................................................................... 592
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools......................................................... 593
Stepping Stone Tools ....................................................................... 593
Plant Tools........................................................................................ 594
Sprinkler Tools ................................................................................ 594
Sun Shadows ....................................................................................595
Hardiness Zones .............................................................................. 595
The Terrain Library ....................................................................... 596
Clearing the Terrain ....................................................................... 596
Displaying Terrain .......................................................................... 596
Editing Terrain Objects ................................................................. 597
Creating a Plot Plan ........................................................................ 599
Plant Image Specification Dialog ................................................... 602
Plant Specification Dialog............................................................... 606
Plant Chooser Dialog....................................................................... 608
Terrain Specification Dialog........................................................... 610
Elevation Point Specification Dialog.............................................. 613
Elevation Line Specification Dialog............................................... 616
Flat Region Specification Dialog .................................................... 616
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog ................................................... 617
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ............................. 617
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ............................................617
Terrain Break Specification Dialog ............................................... 618
Terrain Path Specification Dialog.................................................. 619
Sprinkler Specification Dialog ....................................................... 620
xiv
Importing Terrain Data ..................................................................623
Contents
Import Terrain Wizard...................................................................623
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data...........................................627
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data........................................628
Chapter 21: Roads & Sidewalks

Road and Sidewalk Defaults...........................................................629
The Road Tools ................................................................................630
Displaying Road Objects.................................................................633
Editing Road Objects ......................................................................634
Adding Road Objects to the Library .............................................635
Road Specification Dialog...............................................................635
Median Specification Dialog...........................................................637
Driveway Specification Dialog........................................................637
Road Marking Specification Dialog...............................................638
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........................................................639
Chapter 22: Other Objects

Primitive Tools.................................................................................641
Creating Primitives .........................................................................642
Editing Primitives............................................................................643
3D Box Specification Dialog ...........................................................645
Sphere Specification Dialog ............................................................646
Cylinder Specification Dialog.........................................................647
Cone Specification Dialog ...............................................................648
Solid Specification Dialog ...............................................................649
Polyline Solids ..................................................................................649
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog.................................................650
xv
Soffits ................................................................................................ 650

Special Applications for Soffits ...................................................... 651
Calculating Materials on Soffits..................................................... 652
Soffit Specification Dialog............................................................... 653
Fireplaces ......................................................................................... 656
Fireplace Specification Dialog........................................................ 657
Library Fireplaces ........................................................................... 659
Chimneys .......................................................................................... 660
Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Architectural vs CAD Blocks ......................................................... 664
Creating Architectural Blocks ....................................................... 664
Displaying Architectural Blocks .................................................... 665
Editing Architectural Blocks .......................................................... 665
Exploding Architectural Blocks ..................................................... 666
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components ................. 666
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library................................. 667
Architectural Block Specification Dialog ...................................... 667
Chapter 24: Libraries

Third Party Libraries ..................................................................... 670
Bonus Libraries ............................................................................... 670
The Library Browser ...................................................................... 670
Adding to the Library ..................................................................... 674
Editing Libraries ............................................................................. 677
Select Library Object Dialog.......................................................... 679
Replace From Library .................................................................... 680
Library Categories .......................................................................... 681
xvi
My Libraries ....................................................................................681
Contents
Architectural Blocks........................................................................681
Backdrops.........................................................................................682
Cabinet Doors and Drawers ...........................................................682
Cabinet Modules..............................................................................682
CAD Blocks ......................................................................................683
Doors.................................................................................................683
Doorways ..........................................................................................684
Electrical...........................................................................................684
Exterior Fixtures .............................................................................684
Interior Fixtures ..............................................................................685
Exterior Furnishing.........................................................................685
Interior Furnishings ........................................................................686
Geometric Shapes ............................................................................686
Hardware..........................................................................................687
Images...............................................................................................687
Line Styles ........................................................................................688
Materials...........................................................................................688
Millwork ...........................................................................................689
Moldings and Profiles......................................................................689
Plants ................................................................................................689
Sprinklers .........................................................................................690
Terrain..............................................................................................691
Windows ...........................................................................................691
Manufacturers .................................................................................692
Library Search Dialog.....................................................................692
Placing Library Objects..................................................................695
Place Library Object Button ..........................................................696
Displaying Library Objects ............................................................697
Editing Library Objects..................................................................698
Library Objects and the Materials List.........................................699
xvii
Library Object Specification Dialog.............................................. 699
Chapter 25: Materials

Creating Materials .......................................................................... 704
Mapping Patterns and Textures .................................................... 705
Managing Plan Materials .............................................................. 706
Applying Materials.......................................................................... 708
Viewing Materials............................................................................ 709
Materials Tab................................................................................... 710
Editing Materials ............................................................................. 711
Define Material Dialog.................................................................... 712
Material Defaults Dialog................................................................. 721
Color Chooser Dialog...................................................................... 722
Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Zoom Tools....................................................................................... 723
Undo Zoom....................................................................................... 724
Fill Window...................................................................................... 724
Panning the Display......................................................................... 725
Window Menu Tools ....................................................................... 725
Cascade............................................................................................. 726
Tiling Views...................................................................................... 727
Arrange Icons .................................................................................. 728
Swapping Views............................................................................... 729
Aerial View....................................................................................... 729
Closing Views ................................................................................... 731
xviii
Chapter 27: Vector Views
Contents
Defaults and Preferences ................................................................734
Vector View Tools............................................................................734
3D Tools............................................................................................735
Creating Camera Views ..................................................................736
Moving a Camera in 3D Views.......................................................737
Field of View ....................................................................................740
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View............................................740
Creating Overviews .........................................................................741
Displaying Vector Views .................................................................742
Speeding up 3D View Generation ..................................................745
Editing Objects in 3D Views...........................................................746
Delete 3D Surface ............................................................................747
Saving 3D Views ..............................................................................747
Walkthroughs ..................................................................................748
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views .......................................749
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views..........................................750
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras......................................752
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views ....................................752
Camera Specification Dialog ..........................................................753
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification.............................755
Camera Defaults Dialog ..................................................................755
3D Settings Dialog............................................................................757
Chapter 28: Render Views

OpenGL and Hardware ..................................................................764
Defaults and Preferences ................................................................764
xix
Render View Tools .......................................................................... 764

Rendering Tools............................................................................... 765
Preview vs. Final Render View ...................................................... 766
Glass House View ............................................................................ 767
Using the Contextual Menu ............................................................ 767
Editing a Camera............................................................................. 768
Materials In Render Views ............................................................. 768
Images & Backdrops ....................................................................... 769
Plan Export ...................................................................................... 770
Editing Objects in Render Views ................................................... 770
Saving a Render View Picture........................................................ 770
Printing a Render View .................................................................. 770
Rendering Tips and Tricks ............................................................. 771
Light Sources ................................................................................... 772
Light Types ...................................................................................... 773
Defining Light Types....................................................................... 777
Adjusting Lights .............................................................................. 778
Sun Angle Specification Dialog ...................................................... 778
Light Specification Dialog............................................................... 781
Cross Section Slider Dialog ............................................................ 785
Chapter 29: Raytracing

Creating a Raytrace View............................................................... 787
The Raytrace Window .................................................................... 790
Creating Materials for Raytracing ................................................ 791
Tips and Tricks................................................................................ 792
POV-Ray .......................................................................................... 794
xx
Chapter 30: Dimensions
Contents
Compatibility With Previous Versions..........................................796
Dimension Defaults..........................................................................796
The Dimension Tools.......................................................................797
Displaying Dimension Lines ...........................................................800
Editing Dimension Lines.................................................................801
Editing Extension Lines ..................................................................802
Moving Objects Using Dimensions ................................................804
Dimension Line Specification Dialog .............................................807
Dimension Defaults Dialog..............................................................809
Chapter 31: Text, Callouts and Markers

Text Defaults and Preferences........................................................818
Fonts..................................................................................................818
The Text Tools .................................................................................819
Creating Text ...................................................................................819
Text Arrows .....................................................................................819
Callouts.............................................................................................821
Editing Callouts ...............................................................................822
Markers ............................................................................................823
Editing Markers...............................................................................823
Displaying Text, Callouts and Markers.........................................823
Editing Text......................................................................................824
Text Macros .....................................................................................826
Spell Check.......................................................................................828
Text Specification Dialog ................................................................830
Callout Specification Dialog ...........................................................834
xxi
Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 837

Text Defaults .................................................................................... 838
Callout and Marker Defaults ......................................................... 838
Room Label Defaults....................................................................... 838
Arrow Defaults ................................................................................ 839
Designer Information Dialog .......................................................... 839
Client Information Dialog............................................................... 840
Chapter 32: CAD Objects

CAD Defaults ...................................................................................842
The CAD Drawing Tools ................................................................ 842
Point Tools........................................................................................ 843
Line Tools ......................................................................................... 846
Line Specification Dialog ................................................................ 850
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes .............................................855
Arc Tools .......................................................................................... 856
Arc Specification Dialog ................................................................. 858
Circle Tools ...................................................................................... 860
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog.............................. 861
Polylines............................................................................................ 863
Polyline Specification Dialog .......................................................... 863
Box Tools .......................................................................................... 865
CAD Box Specification Dialog........................................................ 867
Splines............................................................................................... 868
Displaying CAD Objects ................................................................. 869
CAD Blocks ...................................................................................... 870
CAD Block Specification Dialog .................................................... 872
Dimensions ....................................................................................... 873
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog................................................... 873
xxii
CAD Details......................................................................................874
Contents
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints.......................................................875
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog...............................................877
CAD Defaults Dialog .......................................................................878
Chapter 33: Advanced Design & Editing

Time Tracker ...................................................................................881
Time Log Dialog ..............................................................................882
House Wizard...................................................................................884
Plan Check .......................................................................................885
IRC Checklist...................................................................................886
Chapter 34: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image Objects................................890
Importing Picture Files ...................................................................890
Editing Picture Files ........................................................................891
Exporting Picture Files ...................................................................892
Picture File Box Specification Dialog ............................................893
Creating Images...............................................................................894
Placing Images .................................................................................896
Displaying Images............................................................................896
Resizing an Image............................................................................896
Adding Images to the Library ........................................................897
Image Specification Dialog .............................................................897
Creating Screen Captures...............................................................900
Metafiles ...........................................................................................901
Editing Metafiles..............................................................................902
Metafile Specification Dialog..........................................................903
xxiii
Copy Region as Picture ................................................................... 904

Walkthroughs .................................................................................. 904
Creating VRML Files...................................................................... 905
Chapter 35: Importing and Exporting

Compatibility ................................................................................... 908
DXF vs. DWG .................................................................................. 908
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................909
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 909
Additional 2D Import Information................................................ 915
Importing 3D DWG, DXF, 3DS, and OBJ Files ........................... 916
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 917
Additional 2D Export Information ................................................ 919
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format .............................. 921
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format...........................................922
Chapter 36: Create Symbol Wizard

Overview........................................................................................... 925
Importing 3D Data .......................................................................... 926
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard.............................................. 927
Selecting the Symbol Category....................................................... 927
Loading the 3D File ......................................................................... 929
2D Block ........................................................................................... 932
Cabinet Front Symbols ................................................................... 933
Symbol Options................................................................................ 935
Sizing................................................................................................. 938
Materials........................................................................................... 941
Openings........................................................................................... 943
Floor Plan View ............................................................................... 944
xxiv
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard................................................944
Contents
Symbol Specification Dialog ...........................................................945
Chapter 37: Printing & Plotting

Introduction to Printing..................................................................948
Printers and Plotters .......................................................................949
The Printing Tools...........................................................................949
Display Options and Printing .........................................................950
Printing Directly from a View ........................................................952
Printing from Layout ......................................................................952
Printing to Scale...............................................................................952
Printing Across Multiple Pages......................................................953
Printing to a PDF File .....................................................................953
Line Weights ....................................................................................954
Printing Text and Dimensions........................................................957
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes..........................................................958
Print Model ......................................................................................959
Troubleshooting Printing Problems ..............................................962
Page Setup Dialog ............................................................................963
Print Dialog ......................................................................................965
Print Image Dialog ..........................................................................967
Chapter 38: Layout

The Layout Tools.............................................................................970
Preparing for Layout ......................................................................971
Creating a Layout File ....................................................................971
The Current Page ............................................................................972
Layout Page Zero ............................................................................973
xxv
CAD and Text in Layout................................................................. 974

Images in Layout ............................................................................. 975
Sending Views to Layout ................................................................ 975
Keeping Layout Views Current ..................................................... 977
Editing Layout Views ...................................................................... 979
Rescaling Views ............................................................................... 980
Displaying Layout Views ................................................................ 981
Layout Page Display Options ......................................................... 982
Opening Layout Views .................................................................... 983
Editing Layout Lines....................................................................... 983
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................................................................ 984
Managing Layout Links.................................................................. 985
Printing Layout Files....................................................................... 988
Exporting Layout Files ................................................................... 989
Layout Box Specification Dialog .................................................... 989
Layout Defaults................................................................................ 990
Chapter 39: Schedules

Schedule Defaults ............................................................................ 992
Creating Schedules .......................................................................... 992
Editing Schedules ............................................................................ 993
Adding Columns to Schedules........................................................ 994
Schedule Specification Dialog......................................................... 995
Chapter 40: Materials Lists

Chapter Overview ......................................................................... 1003
Working With the Materials List................................................. 1004
Creating an Accurate Materials List ...........................................1005
Calculate From All Floors ............................................................ 1005
xxvi
Calculate From Room ...................................................................1006
Contents
Calculate From Area.....................................................................1006
Materials Polyline..........................................................................1007
The Master List..............................................................................1007
Editing Columns ............................................................................1009
Editing Materials Lists..................................................................1011
Displaying Objects in the Materials List .....................................1012
Components Dialog .......................................................................1014
Managing Materials Lists .............................................................1015
Exporting the Material List..........................................................1015
Appendix A: Technical Support Services

Reference and Training Resources ..............................................1017
Before Contacting Technical Support .........................................1018
Contacting Technical Support......................................................1021
Appendix B: What’s New in Version X1

Introduction ...................................................................................1023
Before You Begin...........................................................................1023
New and Improved Features by Chapter....................................1027
xxvii
xxviii
Chapter 1:
Overview
Overview
Introduction
Chief Architect allows builders, designers, Chapter Contents
architects, and other professionals in the • Chief Architect Full vs. Lite
building and interior design trades to design • Startup Options
effectively and produce plans, 3D models, • The Chief Architect Environment
and full working drawings quickly. With • Toolbars
Chief Architect, the input and modification • Menus
of design information is fast and simple. • Dialogs
Chief Architect uses parametric design • The Status Bar
technology. This means that as you draw, a • Preferences and Defaults
3D model is created and is continuously • Drawing a Plan
updated as you make changes. You can tile a • Viewing Your Plan
floor plan view next to a 3D view and watch • Program Updates
one update automatically as you draw in the • Getting Help
other.
Chief Architect Full vs. Lite

Not all features are available in the Lite
version of Chief Architect. For a list of
features that are not available, see our
website at www.chiefarchitect.com.
1
Startup Options
When Chief Architect opens, the Startup The Startup Options dialog can be
Options dialog displays, allowing you to opened at any time by selecting File>
choose how you want to begin working in the Startup Options.... .
program or access useful resources.
1
3
2
4
1 Click the New to Chief? link to launch • Click New from Template to open a
an animated tour of the program. new, blank plan based on a template that
you select. See “Template Files” on page
2 Select a File command. 167.
• Click New Plan to open a new, blank • Select House Wizard to launch a
plan. See “Creating a New Plan” on page new plan in the House Wizard. See
159. “House Wizard” on page 884.
• Choose Open Plan to work on an • Click Find Plan Wizard to search a

existing plan. See “Opening a Plan or plan database using criteria you select.
Layout File” on page 164. See “Find Plan Wizard” on page 169.
2
The Chief Architect Environment
3 Recent Files lists the names of the most Click either of the links to launch your
recently opened files. Click a name to default Internet browser and visit the Chief
open the file. You set the number of files that Architect or ChiefTalk Web sites.
display in this list in the Preferences
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 190. 35 Remove the check from Show Options
on Startup if you do not want this
34 The Help options provide access to a dialog to display when you launch Chief
variety of information resources. These Architect. Instead, a new blank plan opens.
Overview
include a list of the new features of version
To have the Startup Options dialog
X1, tutorials, and the online help. You can
display at startup again, select File> Startup
also access the electronic versions of the
Options and place a check mark at Show
Reference Manual and User’s Guide.
Options on Startup.

Classroom Design Project Training 3D Drafting
Video: The Chief Architect Interface
In Chief Architect, the entire drawing area is
Introductory Training Video: Chief laid out on a three dimensional coordinate
Architect Animated Tour system described using the X, Y and Z axes.
Architectural objects take up space in all
Object-Based Design
three dimensions and their height, width and
Chief Architect’s parametric, object-based depth can be specified in Imperial or metric
design technology means you place and edit units. In addition, the location of objects can
objects rather than work with the many be precisely defined using coordinates.
individual lines or surfaces used to represent
CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up
them.
space in two dimensions in the current view.
You can quickly select and edit the location, Their dimensions can also be specified in
size, shape, style and other properties of Imperial or metric units and their locations
objects as well as change the materials precisely defined using coordinates.
applied to their surfaces.
Use Chief Architect’s editing capabilities to Easy Access to Tools
make the objects you place in a plan match You can access Chief Architect’s features in
the objects they represent in real life. For various ways.
example, you can set up your windows and
• Menus provide access to most tools.
doors to match those available from your
supplier. • Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast
access to tools and let you customize the
interface.
• Many tools also have keyboard shortcuts.
3
• Contextual menus display with a right- • The status bar at the bottom of the screen
click of the mouse. provides tool descriptions and other
information about the current task.
Menus Child
Tools
Parent
Tools
Library &
Selected Project
Object Browser
Library
Preview
Temporary Panes
Dimension
Edit
Toolbar Reference Pointer Crosshair Status Bar
Grid Lines Lines
Using the Mouse The Right button has several uses.

Right-click to select any object. For
Classroom Design Project Training
Video: General Mouse Commands example, if the Exterior Wall
tool is active, the left mouse button allows
Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are you to select only walls. You can select other
created by clicking the left mouse button. object types such as cabinets, or stairs with
Others, such as walls, stairs and dimension the right mouse button.
lines, are created by dragging the pointer
from one end of the object to the other. Use the right mouse button to temporarily
switch to the Alternate edit behavior. See
The left button is the primary “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
button used in Chief Architect.
Unless specified otherwise, this You can also use the right mouse button to
reference manual refers to the left mouse open context sensitive menus with additional
button. editing commands.
The Middle button can be used to
Note: If you are left-handed and have re-pro- pan in floor plan view or to
grammed your mouse, reverse the instruc-
tions for left and right buttons in this manual.
4
temporarily use the Move edit behavior. See Resize handles display along the edges of the
“Edit Behaviors” on page 86. object are used to change the size. See
“Resizing Objects” on page 129.
You can also program it to work as a double-
click.
The Mouse Wheel can be used to
zoom in and out in most views. The Move handle at the object’s center lets
Overview
you move the object. See “Moving Objects”
The Back, or X1, button on 5-button mice on page 123.
can be used to temporarily enable the
Concentric edit behavior. See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 86 or the documentation
for your mouse.
The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate
The Forward, or X2, button on a 5-button the object. See “Rotating Objects” on page
mouse can be used to temporarily enable the 133.
Resize edit behavior. See “Edit Behaviors”
on page 86 or the documentation for your
mouse.
Using the Edit Handles You can cancel any edit handle operation
When you select an object, its edit handles before it is completed by pressing the Esc
display. How each handle behaves when it is key on your keyboard or by pressing any two
clicked and dragged may depend on which mouse buttons at the same time.
Edit Behavior is currently active. See The edit handles that display depend on the
“Edit Behaviors” on page 86. type of object selected, the current view, and
how far you are zoomed out.
When you pass the mouse over the edit
handles, the pointer changes to show how Edit handles do not resize as you zoom in or
you can use that handle. out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some
edit handles may be hidden so that they do
• A two-headed arrow indicates that the not stack over one another. As you zoom in,
object, corner or edge can be moved in these handles become visible again.
the direction of the arrows.
• A four-headed arrow indicates that the
selected object or edge may be moved in
multiple directions.
• A circular arrow indicates that the
selected object can be rotated.
5
Toolbars
Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest,
easiest way to access many program features.
You can move the toolbars, customize them
by adding or removing buttons, or create
your own toolbars from scratch. “Toolbar
Customization Dialog” on page 18.
The toolbars that display in a given view
depend on the view type. For example,
toolbars that control camera position display
in 3D views but not in floor plan view. You can select either Parent - Child or Drop
Down tools in the Preferences dialog. See
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
“Appearance Panel” on page 184.
button, a “tool tip” displays the name of the
tool. When you see one of these tool tips,
press F1 to get more information about that
Toolbar Configurations
item. A more detailed description displays in Toolbar configurations are sets of toolbars
the status bar at the bottom of the window. that are organized for certain tasks.
There are eight toolbar configurations in
Parent and Child Tools Chief Architect. Each can be accessed in the
Parent toolbar buttons have a blue triangle in Toolbar Customization dialog by right-
the lower right corner. When you select a clicking on a toolbar button, or by clicking a
parent button, child tools display. For button:
example, click the Window Tools parent The Default Configuration displays a
button to display its child buttons to the right. selection of architectural, file
management and display settings tools.
The Terrain Configuration displays a
selection of terrain, file management
Drop Down Tools and display setting tools.
An alternative to the Parent - Child toolbar The Space Planning Configuration
interface is Drop Down tools. Click on the displays a selection of file management
arrow to the right of a button to display a and display setting tools, as well as the
drop-down list of related child tools. House Wizard tools.
The Drafting Configuration displays
a selection of file management, display
settings, annotation and other documentation
tools.
6
Menus
The Administration Configuration The Edit Toolbar

displays a selection of project
management, file management and display When you select an object, its edit toolbar
setting tools. appears, typically at the bottom of the
program window, just above the status bar.
The CAD Configuration displays a The edit toolbar displays toolbar buttons that
selection of CAD, file management can be used to edit the selected object or
and display setting tools. objects. Which buttons display depends on
Overview
The 800x600 Configuration displays the type of object selected, the current view,
toolbars suitably sized for monitors set and how you selected the object.
at 800x600 screen resolution.
The All Tools Configuration displays
an expanded selection of architectural, The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the
terrain, file managment and display setting options in the contextual menu when you
tools. right-click on an object.
Customizable Toolbars Shortcut Keys

Since the work you are doing determines the Many commands can be invoked from the
tools you need, Chief Architect allows you to keyboard. Press Alt on your keyboard and
tailor toolbars to suit your own needs. You press the underlined letter in a menu name to
can store various toolbar configurations for access that menu.
future use. For more information about Some of the function keys also invoke
customizing toolbars, see “Toolbar commands. For example, F12 rebuilds walls,
Customization Dialog” on page 18. floors, and ceilings.
You can add toolbars to each configuration For more information on menu items, toolbar
using the Toolbar Customization dialog buttons, and shortcut keys, see “Menus and
while that configuration is active. Toolbar Buttons” on page 17.
Menus
Chief Architect uses a standard Windows An icon image after the menu path indicates
menu format. The menus are located below that a toolbar button is also available. Some
the title bar in the program window and can buttons must be added to the toolbar. See
be used to access nearly all tools in the “Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page 18.
program.
In this reference manual, menu paths are
written in this format: Build> Window> Box
Window .
7
Contextual Menus You can access contextual menus by right-

clicking on a selected object or in an empty
Contextual menus are context sensitive space in a view window.
menus that display tools relevant to a
selected.
Dialogs
Default and preference settings, object select the object and click the Open Object
specification, display settings, and many edit button.You can also double-click many
other functions are accessed through dialog
objects with the Select Objects tool
boxes.
active.
Many dialogs have a preview that shows how
You can open the specification dialog for
the changes affect the object. This preview
multiple items if they are of the same type,
updates when you click in a different field or
such as base cabinets. If you select multiple
press the Tab key on your keyboard.
objects of different types, the Open Object
Specification Dialogs edit button is usually not available. The

button may display if the objects have data in
Each object in Chief Architect has a common, but you can only edit the common
unique specification dialog where you data.
can enter size, style and other information
specific to the selected object. To access it,
The Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the main • The layer containing the selected object.
window displays information about the • The current floor.
current state of the program.
• The dimensions of the active window in
pixels.
• The current layout page.
This information depends on a variety of
conditions such as the type of object • The current default CAD layer.
selected, the current position of the pointer • The length and/or angle of the selected
and settings in the Preferences dialog. object(s).
The information may include the following:
• The current CAD coordinates of the
• A brief description of the toolbar button pointer.
or menu item highlighted by the mouse.
• The screen redraw time.
• A description of the selected object.
8
Preferences and Defaults
The number and angle styles used in the Style/Angle Style dialog. See “Number
Status Bar can be specified in the Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page 873.
Preferences and Defaults

Preference and default settings control many Defaults
Overview
aspects of the user interface and tool
behavior in Chief Architect. You can use Most objects in Chief Architect derive their
these settings to customize the program to intial properties from their respective default
suit your personal work style. dialogs.
For more information about defaults and For example, a newly placed Window
preferences, see “Defaults & Preferences” on gets its initial values from the Window
page 175. Defaults dialog and a newly placed Hinged
Door gets its initial values from the
Preferences Door Defaults dialog.
Preference settings let you change program Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial
behavior to suit your workflow. For example, properties can be overridden, but setting up
you can: your defaults before you begin drawing can
• Turn certain display elements on or off. save you considerable time as you build a
• Choose background and floor plan view model in the program.
colors. Default settings, unlike Preferences, are file
• Set frequency of autosaves, maximum specific.
number of “undos,” and file protection.
• Set default folders for various files. Dynamic Defaults
• Control the editing behaviors of objects. Dynamic defaults are values that affect
existing objects in a plan.
• Setup the material list categories, sub-
categories, and report style, as well as In specification dialogs, dynamic default
manufacturer and supplier information. values have a Default checkbox beside them
• Set rendering specifications to maximize or a [D] in their text fields. As long as this
efficiency and quality. checkbox is checked or the [D] is present,
changes made to the default affect the object.
Preference settings are global, affecting all
plan and layout files. To edit an individual object, you must delete
the [D] or uncheck the box in the
specification dialog. Objects you edit in this
way do not update if you change the default.
9
To restore a value to the default, click to Template Plans

place a check in the Default checkbox or
type a “d” into an edit box. You can set up an otherwise empty plan with
the default settings of your choice and use it
as your template for new, blank plans. See
“Template Files” on page 167.
Drawing a Plan
Classroom Design Project Training “Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults”
Video: The Plan Development on page 179.
Sequence 3. Set material defaults for roof, walls, and
When you draw a plan in Chief Architect, rooms (optional). See “Material
you are placing 3D objects that represent Defaults” on page 177.
building components. Chief Architect comes 4. Set style defaults for doors, windows,
with predefined default settings so you can molding, cabinets and other objects.
start drawing plans immediately. You should
review these default settings to be sure they Draw the Floors
match your drawing and building methods.
See “Defaults & Preferences” on page 175. 1. Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1 in a
clockwise direction. See “Drawing
Set the Defaults Walls” on page 238.
2. Adjust the perimeter shape and size as
1. Open the plan template you want to use,
required. See “Using Edit Handles” on
or choose File> Startup Options> New
page 242.
from Template to begin a new plan.
3. Place any first floor bearing walls.
2. Set the structural defaults:
• Floor Defaults. Set the default ceiling 4. Define types for special rooms such as
height for Floor 1. See “Floor garages and decks in the plan. See
Defaults” on page 177. “Room Types” on page 284.
• Foundation Defaults. Set the founda- 5. Place perimeter doors and windows. See
tion specifics such as type, footing size, “Doors” on page 305 and “Windows” on
and stem wall height. See “Foundation page 327.
Defaults” on page 177. 6. Build additional floors. See “Adding
• Framing Defaults. Set the floor framing Floors” on page 366.
specifications, including type and 7. Specify the default ceiling height for
dimensions. See “Framing Defaults” each floor as soon as it is created. See
on page 177. “Floor Defaults” on page 364.
• Default Wall Types. Specify the
defaults for walls and railings.See
10
Drawing a Plan
8. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional Add Structure and Details

floors as needed. See “Editing Walls” on
page 242. 1. Build non-structural interior walls.
9. Align edited or moved walls with below Begin on floor one and work up in mul-
where appropriate. See “Aligning Walls” tiple storey structures.
on page 246. 2. Align walls where needed such as a
chimney chase, plumbing walls, or Open
Overview
Entering Dimensions Below.
When using Imperial units, enter distances as 3. Finish the relevant interior structure
inches or feet and inches, in fractional or including interior doors, doorways, cabi-
decimal form. Millimeters are the default nets, fixtures, and fireplaces.
unit for all metric distances. See 4. Build the roof planes. If you generate the
“Dimensions” on page 795. roof automatically, remember to carry
• To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or the roof directives in the walls from the
the program assumes inches. first floor up to the top floor for multiple
storey structures. See “Roofs” on page
• In most cases, the program allows
383.
precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractions
with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are 5. Build the framing. See “Framing” on
allowed. page 469.
• The program usually converts decimals 6. Build the terrain and landscaping
to fractions. (optional). See “Terrain” on page 583.
• You can enter angles as bearings, decimal 7. Create the plot plan and plan footprint.
degrees, or degrees, minutes, and See “Plot Plans and Plan Footprints” on
seconds. See “Number Style/Angle Style page 875.
Dialog” on page 873. 8. Create any necessary views and use
CAD Detail from View to create 2D
Build the Foundation elevations and plan details. Use and
modify details from the Library, as well.
1. Derive the foundation plan from the first See “CAD Details” on page 874.
floor. See “Building a Foundation” on
page 372. Create the Layout
2. Adjust the foundation perimeter shape
as needed. 1. If one does not exist, create a Layout file
with a title block, placing the border,
3. Place interior foundation walls as
title block, and other text on page 0. See
needed for the first floor bearing walls.
“Layout” on page 969.
4. Place any other foundation walls
2. Send details to the layout, starting with
required.
layout page 1. See “Sending Views to
5. Align with Above as needed. Layout” on page 975.
11
3. Print the plan. See “Printing & Plotting”

on page 947.
Viewing Your Plan

Classroom Design Project Training rior of the model. You define the camera
Video: The Many Working Views of position and angle with the mouse. A Vector
Chief Architect Floor Camera view displays only the
current floor.
You can see your model in a variety of views.
Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model
and is most commonly used for drawing and
editing. You can only edit one floor at a time,
but another floor can be shown for reference.
Vector Full Camera View
A Vector Full Overview shows the

entire 3D model.
Floor Plan View
Vector Views
Vector Views show the 3D model with
patterns and colors instead of
materials. They can be converted into CAD
or line-based drawings. For more
information about all of the vector view Vector Full Overview
tools, see “Vector View Tools” on page 734.
A Vector Floor Overview/ shows only
A Vector Full Camera view the current floor. Ceilings are omitted
shows either the interior or exte- so you can see the interior.
12
Viewing Your Plan
A Backclipped Cross Section

includes only the objects between the
starting point and stopping point of the cross
section line. It shows the entire model from
foundation to ridge.
Overview
Vector Overview
A Vector Framing Overview displays

framing in 3D, provided that framing
has been built. Backclipped Cross Section
A Wall Elevation creates an elevation

of the current wall, either exterior or
interior.
Wall Elevation
Render Views
Vector Framing Overview
Render views are more photo realistic
A Cross Section/Elevation view is an than vector views of the 3D model.
accurate 2D view of a section cut Surfaces display materials and textures, and
through the entire model from foundation to you can include backdrops, light sources, and
ridge. Use this tool to create either exterior shadows.
and interior views.
The render camera and overview tools
function similar to the corresponding Vector
tools.
Cross Section/Elevation
13
A Final View or Final View with

Shadows creates a higher quality
image but takes longer to generate. You can
create a final view from any render view.
Render Full Camera View
Final View
A Glass House Camera view makes
all surfaces semi-transparent, so you
can see the entire model, inside and outside.
Render Full Overview
Glass House View

A Raytrace view is the most photo-
realistic of the views and usually takes
the longest to generate. You can create a
raytrace from any render view. See
Render Floor Overview
“Raytracing” on page 787.
Render Framing Overview

Raytrace View
14
Program Updates
All views can be sent to a layout or exported

as a graphic image. See “Sending Views to
Layout” on page 975.
Overview
layout
Program Updates
From time to time, Chief Architect releases Select Help> Download Program
program updates that are available for Updates... to launch your default Web
download free of charge from the browser to the Program Updates section of
Chief Architect Web site, www.chiefarchi- the Chief Architect Web site.
tect.com.
Getting Help
Classroom Design Project Training • When you move the pointer over a tool-
Video: Using the Help Functions bar button or menu item, a Tool Tip dis-
plays, offering a brief description of the
There are many forms of help available in
tool. More information displays in the
Chief Architect, including: Tool Tips, the
Status Bar at the bottom of the window,
Status Bar, online Help, product
documentation in both printed and electronic • When you see a Tool Tip in the Status
format, and Chief Architect’s official Web Bar, press the F1 key to open the online
site, www.chiefarchitect.com . Help.
All these forms of help assume you have a • Press the Help button in any of the dia-
basic working knowledge of the Windows logs to open the Help.
operating system, including how to use a • When an object is selected, edit handles
mouse, open, close and save files, copy, display. Place the pointer over these edit
paste, and right-click to access contextual handles and press F1 to open the Help.
menus. Help also assumes you are familiar • You can also access the online Help using
with Windows terms. the Help menu. Select Help> Index to
15
explore the Table of Contents or search database also contains many “how-to”
by key words. articles.
• The Reference Manual and the Getting • Other Chief Architect users have a wealth
Started Guide are accessible through the of knowledge they are willing to share.
program in .pdf format. You can view You can access the Chief Talk user forum
these documents with Adobe Reader. from the Chief Architect Web site at
Click any cross reference or page number www.chieftalk.com.
to jump to that page. Select Help> View
Reference Manual, or Help> View Get- Chief Architect strives to make our doc-
ting Started Guide to view these elec- umentation as helpful as possible for all
tronic documents. of our customers. Please send any
questions, comments, or feedback to
• Our Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com, documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
has answers to many frequently asked
technical support questions. The help
16
Chapter 2:
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
Menus &
Tools
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Toolbars tools. If you prefer, you can use Chief
and Toolbar Buttons Architect’s classic Parent - Child toolbar
arrangement. (See “Appearance Panel” on
What’s New In Version X1 Training
page 184.) In the classic Parent - Child
Video: Menus and Toolbars
toolbar arrangement, you select a “parent”
Chief Architect’s menus provide access to button to display its “child” buttons to the
most of the program’s functionality. Next to right. Parent buttons are indicated by a blue
each menu item is a graphic that matches a triangle in their bottom right corner.
corresponding toolbar button. Toolbar
buttons are shortcuts and are often more New Chief Architect users are encour-
convenient to use than menus. Chief aged to refer to the User’s Guide, which
Architect comes with a variety of toolbars features a series of tutorials designed to
introduce the basics of using the program,
that work well for most professions.
including toolbar buttons.
However, your work may require a unique
set of toolbars and toolbar buttons. Toolbars
can be customized and new toolbars can be
Chapter Contents
• Toolbar Customization Dialog
created.
• Toolbars and Menus
Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or • Toolbar Configurations
classic Parent - Child arrangement. Drop - • Restoring Toolbars
Down toolbar buttons have an arrow to the • Chief Architect’s Tools
right of the button that accesses additional
17
• Toggle Buttons • Other Buttons

• Edit Toolbar Buttons
Toolbar Customization Dialog

Classroom Design Project Training To customize a toolbar, choose Tools>
Video: Customizing the Toolbars Toolbars> Customize Toolbars. The
Toolbar Customization dialog displays.
Video: Working with the Toolbars
Tools Tab
4
1 5
Adding Toolbar Buttons 2 A description of the button you select

displays here.
1 Select the view this toolbar
customization applies to. As you select 3 Check this to sort the tools in
various views, the tools available change. alphabetical order rather than the order
they appear on the toolbars.
Select All Views to add buttons to a
toolbar that displays in all views and 4 Drag a button from the Main Toolbar
windows. Buttons or Child Buttons area and drop
it onto an existing toolbar outside of the
dialog to add the button to that toolbar.
18
Toolbar Customization Dialog
Drag a button from the “Main Toolbar To delete a tool button, drag it off the
Buttons” area and drop it away from an toolbar.
existing toolbar to create a new toolbar. The
The edit toolbar cannot have tools added or
selected button is first in the new toolbar.
removed. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on
The new toolbar is named with the current
page 71.
view followed by a number.
You can use the Empty Space button in

your toolbars as a spacer.
5 Click a button in the “Main Toolbar

Buttons” area to display its child
buttons in this “Child Buttons” area. If no
Menus &
child buttons display, the button you selected
Tools
is not a parent tool.
In the example above, the Cabinet Tools

parent button is selected under “Main
Toolbar Buttons.” All cabinet child buttons
display in the “Child Buttons” section.
Child buttons only display when their parent
buttons are clicked, however, you can add
any child button such as Soffit or Wall
Cabinets to other toolbars by dragging it
from the child buttons area dialog to the
desired location.
Child tools are permanently associated with
the parent tool. If you add the Cabinet Tools
parent button to a toolbar, it will always
display all of its child buttons whenever it is
clicked. Child buttons cannot be removed
from a parent button.
Removing Tools from Toolbars

You can remove a button from a toolbar only
when the Toolbar Customization dialog
is open.
19
Toolbar Tab
1 2
3
4
5
1 The view affected displays here. Click a 3 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
name to select another view. toolbars to their original configuration.
This button is only available if a backup
2 A list of existing toolbars for the view toolbar configuration file was created with
displays in this area. Select a toolbar by
the same name as the toolbar configuration
clicking its name. For information about the
file.
color pallettes, see “Color Palettes” on page
24.
Note: Clicking on the Reset Toolbars button
If the selected toolbar is not active, the deletes any toolbar customization you have
Activate button is available. Click Activate done.
to make the selected toolbar active.
Click Rename to rename the selected 4 Display Tool Tips - Check this to show
Tool Tips when you move the cursor
toolbar. over buttons.
Click Delete to remove the selected toolbar
from the list. A deleted toolbar is no longer 5 Lock Toobars - Check the box to lock
toolbars in their current position on
available. screen.
20
Toolbars and Menus
Configurations Tab
1 2
3
4
5
Menus &
Tools
configuration from the list but does not
The default toolbar configuration is for a delete the configuration file permanently.
screen resolution of 1024 x 768. If you
change your screen resolution, you may also 4 Copy - Use this button to create a copy
want to change your toolbar configuration. of the selected toolbar configuration.
5 Switch To - Click this button to switch

1 A list of toolbar configurations displays to the selected toolbar configuration.
here. Select a configuration before
You can also right-click any toolbar and
clicking the Remove, Copy, or Switch To
select a configuration from the menu, or
buttons.
click a Toolbar Configuration button.
2 Add - Click to browse for a toolbar Note: You should backup the toolbar configu-
configuration file and add it to the list.
ration files (*.toolbar) you are using. You can
3 Remove - Click to remove the selected access these and copy them using Windows
toolbar configuration. This removes the Explorer.
Toolbars and Menus

Classroom Design Project Training Menu items display their corresponding
Video: Choosing a Toolbar Style button images on the left. This may help you
become familiar with the location of both the
21
menu items and their corresponding toolbar Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or
buttons. Depending on your workflow, you classic Parent - Child arrangement. Drop -
may find it easier to access some of these Down toolbar buttons have an arrow to the
features using the toolbar buttons, while right of the button that accesses additional
leaving others off the toolbars completely tools.
and accessing them only through the menus.
If you prefer, you can use Chief Architect’s

classic Parent - Child toolbar arrangement.
(See “Appearance Panel” on page 184.) In
the classic Parent - Child toolbar
arrangement, you select a “parent” button to
display its “child” buttons to the right. Parent
buttons are indicated by a blue triangle in
their bottom right corner.
Chief Architect has limited space for toolbar design, including walls, windows, doors,
buttons. How many can be shown depends stairs, cabinets, etc.
on your monitor’s size and screen resolution
settings. • The Terrain Configuration displays
the buttons associated with the terrain
The toolbar configurations that come with and road tools, including the plant and
Chief Architect organize tools based on the sprinkler tools. See “Terrain Tools” on
type of work being done as well as on page 584.
monitor screen resolution.
• The Kitchen and Bath Design Configu-
• The Default Configuration displays ration displays the buttons associated
the architectural tools used for house with kitchen and bath design. See “Cabi-
nets” on page 551.
22
• The MEP Configuration displays 2. Click Add.

the buttons associated with mechanical, 3. Browse to the location of the toolbar you
electrical, and plumbing. See “Cabinets” want to import.
on page 551. 4. Click Open.
• The Space Planning Configuration
To create a custom configuration
displays the buttons associated with the
House Wizard. See “House Wizard” on You can create a custom configuration that
page 884. shows only the buttons you need.
• The Plan Detailing Configuration 1. Access the Configurations tab of the

is designed for dealing with materials Toolbar Customization dialog.
lists, time tracking, and client and
2. Select a configuration similar to the one
Menus &
designer information.
you want to create.
Tools
• CAD Configuration shows the tools 3. Click Copy.
needed for CAD drawings.
4. Give the new configuration a name. It
• The All-Tools Configuration is only should be saved to the Toolbars folder
available through the Toolbar under Chief Architect.
Customization dialog. It includes all
5. Click Save. The program switches to the
available tools.
new configuration and it appears high-
• The 800 x 600 Configuration is only lighted in the list.
available through the Toolbar
6. Drag any tools you do not want off the
Customization dialog. It is designed
toolbars.
for monitors with 800x600 resolution.
7. Drag tools you want to add out of the
To switch between toolbar configurations Toolbar Customization dialog and onto
the toolbars.
• Click a Toolbar Configuration button.
• Choose a configuration from the Config- By default, new toolbar configurations
urations tab of the Toolbar display the button. You can make your
Customization dialog. own button icon. Create a .bmp file with the
same name as the configuration and save it in
• Right click on a toolbar and select a con-
the Toolbars folder. Look at the Default.bmp
figuration from the contextual menu.
file in the Chief Architect X1 program folder
that corresponds to the Default Toolbar
To import a custom configuration
configuration for an example.
You can import an existing toolbar • Toolbar button bitmaps must be 24 x 24
configuration. pixels in size.
1. Access the Configurations tab of the • The color (R:192, G:192, B:192) maps to
Toolbar Customization dialog.
the system 3D face color.
23
• The color (R:128, G:128, B:128) maps to Color Palettes

the system 3D Shadow color.
Color palettes are available on the Toolbar
• The color (R:223, G:223, B:223) maps to tab of the Toolbar Customization dialog
the system 3D light color. in elevation views, vector views, and render
views. These are library colors which have
Placing your custom configurations in
been added to a toolbar using the Place
an “All Views” toolbar makes them
available in all views. Library Object button. You can
customize these toolbars and/or create your
own toolbar palette with custom colors. See
“Place Library Object Button” on page 696.
Restoring Toolbars
Chief Architect installs two files that affect you click the Reset Toolbars button in the
the way toolbars display. These files are Toolbar Customization dialog, the
*.toolbar and *.toolbarbak. program copies this file and saves it as
*.toolbar. If you make changes you prefer
The program updates *.toolbarbak anytime
over the original toolbar, create a copy of
you select another toolbar configuration,
your *.toolbar file and save it as
close the Toolbar Customization dialog,
*.toolbarbak. The next time you click Reset
or exit from the program.
Toolbars, the program returns to the default
The program uses *.toolbar files to settings.
remember original toolbar settings. When
Chief Architect’s Tools

Classroom Design Project Training open the Help index to information about
Video: Learning Keyboard Commands that menu item.
Chief Architect’s main menu is found under You can activate menus at any time using the
the title bar. Menu items followed by a keyboard. Press the Alt key and the
triangle ( ) open submenus. Menu items underlined letter in the menu name.
followed by an ellipsis (...) open dialogs.
Many menu items have corresponding
Move the cursor over a menu name to see a toolbar buttons. In the chart below, the
brief description in the status bar at the toolbar buttons are shown next to the menu
bottom of the screen. Press the F1 key to item they access.
24
File Menu
The File menu contains items related to
opening, closing, saving, exporting, and
printing files.
Menu Toolbar Keyboard

Effect
Command Button Shortcut
File> New Plan Ctrl + N Create a new plan file. See “Creating a New Plan”
on page 159.
File> New Layout Create a new layout file. See “Creating a Layout
File” on page 971.
Menus &
Tools
File> Open Plan... Ctrl + O Open an existing plan file. See “Opening a Plan
or Layout File” on page 164.
File> Open Open an existing layout file. See “Opening a Plan

Layout... or Layout File” on page 164.
File> Templates> Create a new plan file using a plan template. See
New Plan From “Template Files” on page 167.
Template
File> Templates> Create a new layout file using a layout template.
New Layout From See “Template Files” on page 167.
Template
File> Templates> Save the current plan as a template. See
Save Plan As “Template Files” on page 167.
Template
File> Search For Search for plans in an existing plan database file
Plans... using the Find Plan Wizard. See “Searching for
Plans” on page 169.
File> Manage Opens Windows Explorer to the archives folder
Auto Archives... for the current plan. See “Auto Archive” on page
162.
File> Startup Opens the Startup Options dialog. See
Options... “Startup Options” on page 2.
25

Effect
File> Close N/A Ctrl + W Close the current view. If you close a plan or
layout, you will be prompted to save any changes
or F4
you have made. See “Closing Plans and Views”
on page 172.
File> Close All N/A Close all windows. If you have made any changes
to the file, you will be prompted to save them. See
“Closing Plans and Views” on page 172.
File> Save Ctrl + S Save the current plan or layout file. See “Saving a
Plan or Layout File” on page 160.
File> Save As... Save the current plan or layout file, and assign file
and path names. See “Save and Save As” on page
161.
File> Save Plan Save the current view as a thumbnail for the plan,
Thumbnail which displays in the Open Plan File dialog.
See “Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on page 161.
File> Export> Export all plan files and external referenced files
Entire Plan... to an empty folder. See “Exporting an Entire
Plan” on page 173.
File> Export> Shift + F4 Exports a 2D DXF file of the current floor plan
Current View view. See “Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files” on
(DWG, DXF)... page 917.
File> Export> All Exports a 2D DXF file which includes all floors
Floors (DWG, in floor plan view. Items of different types or on
DXF)... different floors are placed on distinct layers. See
“Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files” on page 917.
File> Export> 3D Only available from a 3D view. Exports the entire
Model (DWG, model as a 3D DWG/DXF. See “Exporting a 3D
DXF)... Model in DXF/DWG Format” on page 921.
File> Export> 3D Only available from a 3D view. Exports the
Model (3DS)... model as a 3DS. See “Exporting a 3D Model in
3DS Format” on page 922.
26

Effect
File> Export> Only available from a vector or render view.
VRML (WRL)... Export the entire model in a .wrl file format
which allows you to creat real time walkthroughs
using a VRML plug-in or import into other
graphics programs. See “Creating VRML Files”
on page 905.
File> Export> Exports the entire model as a POV-Ray
POV-Ray compatible file which can then be imported into
(POV)... POV Ray. See “Raytracing” on page 787.
File> Export> Export a Windows Metafile of the current view.
Menus &
Metafile (EMF)... See “Metafiles” on page 901.
Tools
File> Export> Export any view as a picture file. See “Exporting
Picture (BMP, Picture Files” on page 892.
JPG, PNG)...
File> Export> Export the set of multi-layer wall definitions from
Wall Definitions... the current plan so they can be imported into
another. See “Exporting Wall Definitions” on
page 255.
File> Export> Export a defined layer set from the current plan so
Layer Sets... it can be imported into another. See “Exporting/
Importing Layer Sets” on page 224.
File> Import> Shift + F3 Import a 2D DXF file as CAD data. See
Drawing (DWG, “Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files” on page 909.
DXF)...
File> Import> Import a picture file (.bmp, .jpg, .png,*.gif, *.tif,
Picture (BMP, or *.pcx) into a floor plan view; layout; or cross
JPG, PNG)... section/elevation view. See “Importing Picture
Files” on page 890.
File> Import> Import a Metafile (.emf) into a floor plan view,
Metafile (EMF)... layout, or cross section/elevation view. See
“Importing Picture Files” on page 890.
File> Import> Import a graphics file into the My Backdrops
Backdrop folder of the Library Browser. See “Adding
Backdrops to the Library” on page 676.
27

Effect
File> Import> Import a file containing wall type definitions
Wall Definitions... from a different plan and merge them with the
current plan’s wall type definitions. See
“Importing Wall Definitions” on page 256.
File> Import> Import line style definitions from another plan
Line Style and merge them with the current plan's line syle
Definitions... definitions. See “Line Styles” on page 688.
File> Import> Import a defined layer set from another plan file.
Layer Sets... See “Exporting/Importing Layer Sets” on page 224.
File> Import> Import terrain data from a text file in a variety of

Terrain Data... formats. See “Importing Terrain Data” on page
623.
File> Print> Page Open the Page Setup dialog to assign
Setup... properties to the printed page. See “Page Setup
Dialog” on page 963.
File> Print> Scale Adjust the drawing scale to fit the drawing sheet.
to Fit See “Printing to Scale” on page 952.
File> Print> Center the drawing sheet relative to the model.

Center Sheet See “Center Sheet” on page 951.
File> Print> Print Alt + F2 Turn the display of the print preview on or off.
Preview See “Print Preview” on page 951.
File> Print> Ctrl + P Open the Print dialog to print your plan or layout
Print... file. See “The Printing Tools” on page 949.
File> Print> Print Print the current view as an image. Used to print a
Image... render view or a 3D view showing images, such
as trees. See “Print Image Dialog” on page 967.
File> Print> Print Opens the Print Model dialog allowing you to
Model... print plan templates for making a model of your
plan. See “Print Model” on page 959.
File> Print> N/A Open the Customize Sheet Sizes dialog to
Customize Sheet select a sheet size. See “Creating Custom Sheet
Sizes... Sizes” on page 958.
28

Effect
File> Print> Clear N/A Clear the printer information associated with the
Printer Info current page setup. See “Clearing Printer
Information” on page 965.
File> Send to Ctrl + U Send the current view to an open Layout file. See
Layout... “Sending Views to Layout” on page 975.
File> Exit N/A Exit from Home Designer Pro. See “Exiting Chief
Architect” on page 174.
Names of Plans N/A Only available after opening a plan. The number
Most Recently of plans that display in the list can be set. See
Menus &
Opened “General Panel” on page 190.
Tools
Edit Menu
The Edit menu lists options for manipulating keyboard option (noted next to the menu
items. Many of these editing options also item).
have a corresponding toolbar button and/or a

Effect
Edit> Undo Ctrl + Z Allows multiple undos of plan changes
depending on your settings in the
Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on
page 190.
Edit> Redo Ctrl + Y Redo the last Undo performed. See “General
Panel” on page 190.
Edit> Cut Ctrl + X Delete the selected item and copy it to the
clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere.
Edit> Copy Ctrl + C Copy the selected item to the clipboard so it

can be pasted elsewhere. The original item is
left unchanged. See “Copying and Pasting
Objects” on page 136.
Edit> Copy Region as Lets you select a region to be saved as a
Picture Windows metafile. You also specify the size of
the file. See “Metafiles” on page 901.
29

Effect
Edit> Paste> Paste Ctrl + V Paste the last item cut or copied. See “Copying
and Pasting Objects” on page 136.
Edit> Paste> Paste Ctrl + Alt + Paste the last item cut or copied to the same
Hold Position V position on the screen. See “Copying and
Pasting Objects” on page 136.
Edit > Paste> Paste Shift + Alt Pastes the last item cut or copied to the
Special +V clipboard, provded it is a file type Chief
Architect recognizes. See “Copying and
Pasting Objects” on page 136.
Edit> Delete Delete Delete the selected object. See “Deleting
Edit> Delete Ctrl + Opens a dialog that allows you to delete items
Objects... Spacebar of a particular type in a single room, all rooms,
or throughout a whole plan. See “Delete
Objects Dialog” on page 141.
Edit> Select Objects Spacebar Activate the tool for selecting objects. See
“Selecting Objects” on page 92.
Edit> Select All N/A Ctrl + A Selects the entire plan.

Edit> Snap Settings> Shift + F11 Toggles Object Snaps on and off. See “Object
Object Snaps Snaps” on page 82.
Edit> Snap Settings> F10 Toggles Angle Snaps on and off. See “Angle
Angle Snaps Snaps” on page 84.
Edit> Snap Settings> Ctrl + F9 Toggle Grid Snaps on and off. See “Grid
Grid Snaps Snaps” on page 85.
Edit> Snap Settings> Offers easy access to the Bumping/Pushing

Bumping/Pushing setting in the Preferences dialog. See “Snap
Properties Panel” on page 204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to the ends of lines, arcs,
Endpoint splines, and other objects. See “Snap
30

Effect
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to the midpoint of an object,
Midpoint such as a line or arc. For objects such as boxes,
you can snap to the midpoint of any side. See
“Snap Properties Panel” on page 204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to the center of cabinets,
Center fixtures, furniture, as wellas circles and arcs.
See “Snap Properties Panel” on page 204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to the left, right, top, or
Quadrant bottom of an arc or circle. See “Snap
Menus &
Tools
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to any point on the selected
On Object object, including CAD obnjects and cabinets.
Edit> Snap Settings> Allows you to snap to any temporary points
Points/Markers you have placed, as well as callouts and
markers. See “Snap Properties Panel” on page
204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to the intersection of two
Intersections objects such as lines. Also snaps extension
lines to objects or two extension lines to each
other. See “Snap Properties Panel” on page
204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to a point tangent to the
Tangent Extensions objects where the extension anchor sits. See
“Snap Properties Panel” on page 204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snapping to a point perpendicular to
Perpendicular the object where the extension anchor sits. See
Extensions “Snap Properties Panel” on page 204.
Edit> Snap Settings> Enables snappiong to a point on a 90-degree
Orthogonal axis from the extension anchor. See “Snap
Extensions Properties Panel” on page 204.
Edit> Edit Alt + Z or Toggles the default edit mode on and off. See
Behaviors> Default Alt + / “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
31

Effect
Edit> Edit Alt or right Toggles to alternate editing mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> Alternate mouse Behaviors” on page 86.
button
Edit> Edit Z, /, or Toggles to Move edit mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> Move middle Behaviors” on page 86.
mouse
button
Edit> Edit X, comma Toggles to Resize edit mode. See“Edit
Behaviors> Resize (,), or X2 Behaviors” on page 86.
mouse
button
Edit> Edit C, period Togglers to Concentric edit mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> (.), or X1 Behaviors” on page 86.
Concentric mouse
button
Edit> Edit F Toggles to Fillet edit mode. See “Edit
Behaviors> Fillet Behaviors” on page 86.
Edit> Edit Shift + F8 Toggles Edit Object Parts on and off. See “Edit
Behaviors> Edit Object Parts” on page 81.
Object Parts
Edit> Edit Activates the Rotate/Resize About Current
Behaviors> Rotate/ Point edit tool. See “Rotate/Resize About” on
Resize About Current page 133.
Point
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by clicking at the start point,
Modes> Free Form dragging to create the arc, and clicking again
Arc at the end point. See “Arc Tools” on page 856.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by clicking at the center of the
Modes> Center/ arc, dragging to define the length and radius,
Radius/End Arc then clicking at the end. See “Center/Radius/
End Arc” on page 856.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by dragging from the start point to
Modes> Start/End/On the end point of the arc, then move the mouse
Arc to adjust the curvature. See “Start/End/On
Arc” on page 856.
32

Effect
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by clicking at the start point,
Modes> Start/ thendragging to define the arc tangent at the
Tangent/ End Arc start point. See “Start/Tangent/End Arc” on
page 856.
Edit > Arc Creation Draw an arc by defining the center and then
Modes> Arc About the end points. See “Arc About Center” on
Center page 856.
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Ctrl + H Select all objects within an area to copy them
Area or Move the entire area by dragging it to a new
location. See “Edit Area” on page 153.
Menus &
Tools
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Select all visible objects within an area to copy
Area Visible them or Move the entire area by dragging it to
a new location. See “Edit Area” on page 153.
Edit> Edit Area> Group selection tool that allows you to Move
Edit Area (All Floors) or Copy all floors of an entire area.. See “Edit
Area (All Floors)” on page 154.
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Group selection tool that allows you to Move
Area (All Floors) or Copy visible objects on all floors from an
Visible entire area. See “Edit Area (All Floors)” on
page 154.
Edit> Default Set general parameters for objects and tools
Settings... used in a plan. See “Plan Defaults” on page
180.
Edit> Reset to N/A Reset a part or all of the plan to the defaults for
Defaults... roof information, floor and ceiling heights, and
wall heights. See “Reset to Defaults” on page
182.
Edit> Preferences... Shift + ~ Define the global preferences for Chief
Architect. Some of these settings are unique to
individual plans. See “Preferences Dialog” on
page 183.
Build Menu
Use the tools on the Build menu to build the
3D model in Chief Architect. Each
33
arrowhead indicates a submenu that offers

more choices. Most Build menu items have
corresponding buttons on the toolbar.

Effect
Build> Wall> Straight Shift + Q Draw straight walls using the Exterior wall
Exterior Wall type as defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
See “Exterior Walls” on page 229.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a straight wall of the Exterior wall type
Exterior Wall defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Exterior Walls” on page 229.
Build> Wall> Straight Draw walls using the Interior wall type as
Interior Wall defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Interior Walls” on page 229.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a curved interior wall of the type
Interior Wall defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Interior Walls” on page 229.
Build> Wall> Straight Draw straight foundation walls using the
Foundation Wall settings from the Foundation Defaults
dialog. See “Foundation Walls” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw curved foundation wall using the
Foundation Wall settings from the Foundation Defaults
dialog. See “Foundation Walls” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Straight Draw pony walls using the settings from the
Pony Wall Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony
Walls” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a curved pony wall as defined in the
Pony Wall Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony
Build> Wall> Straight Ctrl + Q Draw railings as defined in the Default
Railing Railing dialog. See “Railings” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Curved Draw a curved as defined in the Default

Railing Railing dialog. See “Railings” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Draw an Invisible wall to define room areas.

Invisible Wall See “Invisible Walls” on page 230.
34

Effect
Build> Wall> Polygon Open the New Regular Polygon Shaped
Shaped Room... Room dialog and define the specifications for
a regular polygonal room. See “Polygon
Shaped Rooms and Decks” on page 235.
Build> Wall> Hatch Fill a wall with a hatch pattern. See “Hatch
Wall Wall” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Break Ctrl + B Break a wall into two sections. See “Break
Wall Wall” on page 230.
Build> Wall> Fix Connect walls whose ends are within a few
Menus &
Tools
Wall Connections inches of each other but are not connected.
See “Fix Wall Connections” on page 231.
Build> Wall> Define Open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to
Wall Types create or modify available wall types. See
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 251.
Build> Decks> Draw a deck defined by straight railings. See
Straight Deck Railing “Deck Railing” on page 231.
Build> Decks> Draw curved deck railing. See “Deck Railing”

Curved Deck Railing on page 231.
Build> Decks> Draw a deck edge with no railing. See “Deck

Straight Deck Edge Edge” on page 237.
Build> Decks> Draw a curved deck edge with no railing. See

Curved Deck Edge “Deck Edge” on page 237.
Build Decks> Polygon Open the New Regular Polygon Shaped

Shaped Deck... Deck dialog and define the specifications for
a regular polygonal deck. See “Polygon
Shaped Rooms and Decks” on page 235.
Build> Fencing> Draw a straight fence. See “The Fencing
Straight Fencing Tools” on page 231.
Build> Fencing> Draw curved fencing. See “The Fencing

Curved Fencing Tools” on page 231.
35

Effect
Build> Door> Hinged Shift + E Place a hinged door into a wall. See “Hinged
Door Doors” on page 307.
Build> Door> Place a doorway into a wall. See “Doorways”

Doorway on page 307.
Build> Door> Sliding Place a sliding door into a wall. See “Sliding
Build> Door> Pocket Place a pocket door into a wall. See “Pocket
Build> Door> Bifold Place a bifold door into a wall. See “Bifold
Build> Door> Garage Place a garage door into a wall. See “Garage
Build> Window> Shift + W Place a window as defined in the Window

Window Defaults dialog. See “Standard Windows”
on page 328.
Build> Window> Bay Place a bay window into a wall. See “Bay
Window Windows” on page 328.
Build> Window> Box Place a box window into a wall. See “Box
Build> Window> Bow Place a bow window into a wall. See “Bow
Build> Floor> Build Shift + X Create a new floor in your plan. See “Adding
New Floor... Floors” on page 366.
Build> Floor> Insert Insert a new floor at the current floor and
New Floor... move all other floors up one level. See
“Adding Floors” on page 366.
Build> Floor> Delete Delete the current floor. The floor above
Current Floor moves down to take the place of the current
floor. See “Deleting Floors” on page 367.
36

Effect
Build> Floor> Exchange the current floor with the one above
Exchange with Floor it. See “Adding Floors” on page 366.
Above
Build> Floor> Exchange the current floor with the one below
Exchange with Floor it. See “Adding Floors” on page 366.
Below
Build> Floor> Build Shift + F Create a foundation level. See “Building a
Foundation... Foundation” on page 372.
Build> Floor> Delete Delete the current foundation. See “Deleting
Menus &
Foundation Foundations” on page 377.
Tools
Build> Floor> F12 Update the 3D model to include recent
Rebuild Walls/ changes. See “Automatic Rebuild of Floors &
Floors/Ceilings Ceilings” on page 416
Build> Floor> Rebuild a monolithic slab foundation based
Rebuild Slabs on the current first floor footprint. See
“Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations” on
page 378.
Build> Roof> Build Ctrl + R Specify settings for automatic roof generation
Roof... in the Build Roof dialog. See “Build Roof
Build> Roof> Roof Q Manually place roof planes in floor plan view.
Plane See “Roof Plane” on page 385.
Build> Roof> Ceiling Manually place ceiling planes in floor plan

Plane view. See “Ceiling Plane” on page 385.
Build> Roof> Truss Define a truss base on a roof plane. See “Truss
Base Base” on page 507.
Build> Roof> Gable/ Draw a gable roof in floor plan view. See
Roof Line “Gable/Roof Line” on page 385.
Build> Roof> Create a closed polyline within a roof plane

Skylight that will be defined as a skylight. See
“Skylights” on page 385.
37

Effect
Build> Roof> Auto Place a floating dormer onto a roof plane. See
Floating Dormer “Auto Floating Dormer” on page 398.
Build> Roof> Auto Place an auto dormer onto a roof plane. See
Dormer “Auto Dormer” on page 399.
Build> Roof> Delete Delete all roof planes. See “Delete Roof
Roof Planes Planes” on page 386.
Build> Roof> Delete N/A Delete all ceiling planes. See “Ceiling
Ceiling Planes Planes” on page 409.
Build> Roof> Fix Mend all broken roof edges. See “Fix Roofs”
Roofs on page 386.
Build> Structure> Place round piers under foundation walls. See

Round Pier “Piers & Pads” on page 380.
Build> Structure> Place a square pad under foundation walls.

Square Pad See “Piers & Pads” on page 380.
Build> Structure> Draw a slab at grade in floor plan view. See

Slab “Slabs” on page 379.
Build> Structure> Draw a slab with thickened footings in floor

Slab with Footing plan view. See “Slabs” on page 379.
Build> Structure> Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab to

Slab Hole create a hole. See “Slab Holes” on page 379.
Build> Structure> Draw a rectangular polyline within a slab with

Slab Hole with footings to create a hole with footings. See
Footing “Slab Holes” on page 379.
Build> Structure> Draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in
Platform Hole the above ceiling/floor platform. See
“Platform Holes” on page 380.
Build> Framing> Ctrl + Shift Display Build Framing dialog to define
Build Framing... +S framing specifications. See “Build Framing
38

Effect
Build> Framing> Manually draw a rafter. See “Rafter” on page
Rafter 471.
Build> Framing> Manually draw roof blocking. See “Joist and

Roof Blocking Roof Blocking” on page 473.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a truss. See “Roof Truss” on

Roof Truss page 471.
Build> Framing> Draw a beam in floor plan view. See “Roof

Roof Beam Beam” on page 471.
Menus &
Tools
Build> Framing> Manually draw a ceiling or floor joist,
Joist depending on the platform it is drawn over.
See “Joist” on page 471.
Build> Framing> Draw joist blocking. See “Joist and Roof
Joist Blocking Blocking” on page 473.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a floor truss. See “Floor/

Floor/Ceiling Truss Ceiling Truss” on page 472.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a floor or ceiling beam. See

Floor/Ceiling Beam “Floor/Ceiling Beam” on page 472.
Build> Framing> Manually draw a post. See “Post” on page

Post 472.
Build> Framing> Place a framing reference marker in a plan.

Framing Reference See “Framing Reference Markers” on page
Marker 486.
Build> Framing> Draw a line defining bearing areas for
Bearing Line automatic framing to break joists. See
“Bearing Lines” on page 488.
Build> Framing> Draw a line defining joist direction for
Joist Direction automatic floor or ceiling framing generation.
See “Joist Direction Lines” on page 489.
Build> Trim> Corner Click in floor plan view to place corner
Boards boards. See “Corner Boards” on page 536.
39

Effect
Build> Trim> Quoins Click in floor plan view to place quoins. See
“Quoins” on page 537.
Build> Trim> Draw a molding polyline. See “Layer Tab” on

Molding Polyline page 539.
Build> Trim> Draw a molding line. See “Layer Tab” on

Molding Line page 539.
Build> Trim> 3D Draw a 3D modling polyline. See “Layer Tab”

Molding Polyline on page 539.
Build> Trim> 3D Draw a 3D modling line. See “Layer Tab” on
Molding Line page 539.
Build> Stairs> Shift + Y Drag to create an UP stair. Hold the Alt key
Straight Stairs and drag to create a DOWN stair. See “Stair
Tools” on page 436.
Build> Stairs> Click Build a set of stairs with a single mouse click.
Stairs See “Click Stairs” on page 436.
Build> Stairs> Curve Place stairs that curve to the left. See “Stair
to Left Tools” on page 436.
Build> Stairs> Curve Place stairs that curve to the right. See “Stair
to Right Tools” on page 436.
Build> Cabinet> Base Shift + T Place a base cabinet as defined in the Base
Cabinet Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Base
Cabinets” on page 552.
Build> Cabinet> Wall Ctrl + T Place a wall cabinet as defined in the Wall
Cabinet Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Wall
Cabinets” on page 552.
Build> Cabinet> Full Place a full height or pantry cabinet as defined
Height in the Full Height Cabinet Defaults dia-
log. See “Full Height Cabinets” on page 552.
Build> Cabinet> T Place a soffit. See “Soffits” on page 553.
Soffit
40

Effect
Build> Cabinet> Place a shelf used in a closet. See “Shelves”
Shelf on page 553.
Build> Cabinet> Place a vertical partition. See “Partitions” on

Partition page 553.
Build> Cabinet> Draw a polyline to create a custom counter

Custom Countertop top. See “Custom Countertops” on page 553.
Build> Cabinet> Draw a polyline to create a hole in a custom

Custom Counter Hole counter top. See “Custom Counter Holes” on
Menus &
page 554.
Tools
Build> Fireplace Create a free-standing or built-in masonry
fireplace. See “Fireplaces” on page 656.
Build> Electrical> Place 110V outlets. See “Outlets” on page

110V Outlet 524.
Build> Electrical> Place 220V outlets. See “Auto Place Outlets”

220V Outlet on page 526.
Build> Electrical> Place default lights on walls or ceiling as

Light defined in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
See “Lights” on page 524.
Build> Electrical> Place switches in walls or cabinets as defined
Switch in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See
“Switches” on page 525.
Build> Electrical> Automatically place outlets in room. See
Auto Place Outlets “Outlets” on page 524.
Build> Electrical> Connect electrical items into circuits. See

Connect Electrical “Connect Electrical” on page 525.
Build> Primitive> Draw a box that also displays in 3D. See

Box “Primitive Tools” on page 641.
Build> Primitive> Draw a circle that is a sphere in 3D. See

Sphere “Primitive Tools” on page 641.
41

Effect
Build> Primitive> Draw a circle that is a cylnder in 3D. See
Cylinder “Primitive Tools” on page 641. See “Convert
to Solid” on page 649.
Build> Primitive> Draw circle that is a cone in 3D. See
Cone “Primitive Tools” on page 641.
Build> Primitive> Draw a polyline solid. See “Polyline Solids”

Polyline Solid on page 649.
Build> Image> Open the Image Specification dialog that

Create Image allows you to import an image. See “Creating
Images” on page 894.
Build> Image> Open the Image Specification dialog that
Create Billboard allows you to import an image. See “Creating
Image Images” on page 894.
Build> Image> Allows you to import a folder of image(s) into
Create Image Library the library. See “Converting a Folder of
Images” on page 896.
Terrain Menu

Effect
Terrain> Create Create a rectangular polyline terrain
Terrain Perimeter perimeter. See “Terrain Tools” on page 584.
Terrain> Terrain Specify how the program approximates the

Specification... terrain and draws contour lines in the Terrain
Specification dialog. See “Terrain
Specification Dialog” on page 610.
Terrain> Build Model terrain based on elevation data you
Terrain provide using points, lines and splines.
Calculate terrain data such as contour lines
and the 3D mesh. See “Building the Terrain”
on page 596.
42

Effect
Terrain> Clear Clear the plan of 3D terrain data and contour
Terrain lines. To restore information you must rebuild
the terrain. See “Clearing the Terrain” on page
596.
Terrain> Elevation Place elevation points containing data in floor
Data> Elevation Point plan view. See “Editing Terrain Objects” on
page 597.
Terrain> Elevation Draw a line containing elevation data. See
Data> Elevation Line “Editing Terrain Objects” on page 597.
Menus &
Terrain> Elevation Draw a spline containing elevation data. See
Tools
Data> Elevation “Editing Terrain Objects” on page 597.
Spline
Terrain> Elevation Draw a polyline to create a region of constant
Data> Elevation elevation. See “Terrain Elevation Tools” on
Region page 585.
Terrain> Elevation Draw a terrain break. See “Editing Terrain
Data> Terrain Break Objects” on page 597.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a raised region. See
Raised Region “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a lowered region.

Lowered Region See “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a hill. See “Terrain

Hill Modifier Tools” on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a valley. See

Valley “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 589.
Terrain> Modifier> Draw a polyline to create a flat region. See

Flat Region “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 589.
Terrain> Feature> Draw a retangular terrain feature. See “Terrain

Rectangular Feature Feature Tools” on page 590.
Terrain> Feature> Draw a spline to create a terrain feature. See

Spline Feature “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 590.
43

Effect
Terrain> Feature> Draw a kidney-shaped terrain feature. See
Kidney Shaped “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 590.
Feature
Terrain> Feature> Draw a terrain hole polyline. See “Terrain
Terrain Hole Feature Tools” on page 590.
Terrain> Garden Draw a polyline garden bed. See “Garden Bed

Bed> Polyline Garden Tools” on page 592.
Bed
Terrain> Garden Draw a round garden bed. See “Garden Bed
Bed> Round Garden Tools” on page 592.
Bed
Terrain> Garden Draw a kidney shaped garden bed. See
Bed> Kidney Shaped “Garden Bed Tools” on page 592.
Garden Bed
Terrain> Water Draw a round pond. See “Water Feature
Features> Round Tools” on page 592.
Pond
Terrain> Water Draw a kidney shaped pond. See “Water
Features> Kidney Feature Tools” on page 592.
Shaped Pond
Terrain> Water Draw a stream. See “Water Feature Tools” on
Features> Stream page 592.
Terrain> Stepping Draw a polyline stepping stone. See “Stepping

Stones> Polyline Stone Tools” on page 593.
Stepping Stone
Terrain> Stepping Draw a round stepping stone. See “Stepping
Stones> Round Stone Tools” on page 593.
Stepping Stone
Terrain> Walls and Draw a straight terrain wall. See “Terrain Wall
Curbs> Straight and Curb Tools” on page 593.
Terrain Wall
Terrain> Walls and Draw a curved terrain wall. See “Terrain Wall
Curbs> Spline and Curb Tools” on page 593.
Terrain Wall
44

Effect
Terrain> Walls and Draw a straight retaining wall. See “Retaining
Curbs> Straight Walls” on page 593.
Retaining Wall
Terrain> Walls and Draw a curved retaining wall. See “Retaining
Curbs> Curved Walls” on page 593.
Retaining Wall
Terrain> Walls and Draw a straight curb. See “Terrain Wall and
Curbs> Straight Curb Tools” on page 593.
Terrain Curb
Terrain> Walls and Draw a curved curb. See “Terrain Wall and
Menus &
Tools
Curbs> Spline Curb Tools” on page 593.
Terrain Curb
Terrain> Roads and Draw a road. See “Straight Road” on page
Sidewalks> Straight 630.
Road
Terrain> Roads and Draw a road with smooth curves. See “Spline
Sidewalks> Spline Road” on page 631
Road
Terrain> Roads and Draw a road polyline. See “Road Polyline” on
Sidewalks>Polyline page 631.
Road
Terrain> Roads and Draw a road median. See “Median” on page
Sidewalks> Median 631.
Terrain> Roads and Draw a driveway. See “Driveway” on page

Siodewalks> 631.
Driveway
Terrain> Roads and Draw a cul-de-sac. See “Cul-de-sac” on page
Sidewalks> Cul-de- 632.
sac
Terrain> Roads and Draw road markings. See “Road Marking” on
Sidewalks> Road page 632.
Marking
Terrain> Roads and Draw a road stripe. See “Road Stripe” on page
Sidewalks> Road 632.
Stripe
45

Effect
Terrain> Roads and Draw a straight sidewalk. See “Straight
Sidewalks> Straight Sidewalk” on page 632
Sidewalk
Terrain> Roads and Draw a curved sidewalk. See “Straight
Sidewalks> Spline Sidewalk” on page 632
Sidewalk
Terrain> Roads and Draw a sidewalk polyline. See “Polyline
Sidewalks> Polyline Sidewalk” on page 633.
Sidewalk
Terrain> Plant> Plant Search for plants using the Plant Chooser
Chooser... dialog. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page
608.
Terrain> Plant> Create a new plan image using the Plant
Create Plant Image... Image Specification dialog. See “Plant
Image Specification Dialog” on page 602.
Terrain> Plant> Open the Grow Plants dialog. See “Plant
Grow all Plants... Tools” on page 594.
Terrain> Plant> Display a collection of plant hardiness zone
Show Hardiness maps. See “Hardiness Zones” on page 595.
Zones
Terrain> Sprinkler> Insert a sprinkler head from the Sprinklers
Sprinkler Head library. See “Sprinkler Tools” on page 594.
Terrain> Sprinkler> Draw a sprinkler line. See “Sprinkler Tools”
Sprinkler Line on page 594.
Terrain> Sprinkler> Draw a sprinkler spline. See “Sprinkler Tools”

Sprinkler Spline on page 594.
Library Menu

Effect
46
Library> Library Ctrl + L Open the Library Browser. See “The Library
Browser... Browser” on page 670.
Library> Library Open the Library Search dialog. See

Search... “Library Search Dialog” on page 692.
Library> Refresh Refresh the Library Browser to display newly

Library Browser added library items. See “Refresh Library
Browser” on page 677.
Library> New> N/A Create a new library in the selected category.
Library See “Adding to the Library” on page 674.
Library> New> N/A Available when an unlocked library or folder
Folder is selected in the Library Browser. Creates a
Menus &
new library folder. See “The Library Browser”
Tools
on page 670.
Library> New> Available when an unlocked Materials library
Material is selected. Opens the Define Material
dialog, allowing you to add a new material.
See “Define Material Dialog” on page 712.
Library> New> N/A Available when an unlocked Images library is
Image selected. Add a new image to the library. See
“Creating Images” on page 894.
Library> New> Plant N/A Opens the Image Specification dialog,
Image allowing you to create a new image that can
be added to the library. The Library Browser
must be open and an unlocked folder selected.
See “Adding to the Library” on page 674.
Library> Copy N/A Copy the list of items in an unlocked library
Library List folder to the Windows clipboard. From there it
can be pasted into another program. See
“Copy Library List” on page 677.
Library> Delete N/A Delete Delete a library, folder or file that you have
Object created. See “Deleting Libraries” on page 677.
Library> Rename N/A F2 Rename an unlocked library, folder or file. See
Object “Renaming Libraries” on page 677.
Library> Expand All N/A Expand all folders located in a selected library
subcategory. See “Expand/Collapse All” on
page 678.
47
Library> Collapse All N/A Collapse all folders located in a selected

library subcategory. See “Expand/Collapse
All” on page 678.
Library> Open the Components dialog for a selected
Components object. See “Components” on page 678
Library> Open... Open the specification dialog for the selected

material, image or symbol in the library. See
“Library Object Specification Dialog” on page
699.
Library> Search N/A Open the Search Attributes dialog for the
Attributes... selected library item. See “Search Attributes”
on page 694.
Library> Edit Light N/A Open the Light Specification dialog for
Data... the selected unlocked light. See “Light
Library> Place N/A Place a molding profile from the library into
Molding Profile the plan so you can edit it. You can add it to
the library again after editing. See “Place
Molding Profile” on page 540.
3D Menu
The 3D menu controls most information
related to the 3D views.

Effect
3D> Create Vector G Create a camera view of all floors. See
View> Vector Full “Vector View Tools” on page 734.
Camera
3D> Create Vector Create a camera view of the current floor only.
View> Vector Floor See “Camera Views” on page 734.
Camera
3D> Create Vector H Create an overview of an entire model,
View> Vector Full including ceilings and roofs. See “Creating
Overview Overviews” on page 741.
48
3D> Create Vector Shift + G Create an overview of the current floor,

View> Vector Floor without ceilings or roofs. See “Creating
Overview Overviews” on page 741.
3D> Create Vector Create an overview of an entire model
View> Vector showing only framing. Should only be used
Framing Overview after framing has been built. See “Creating
Overviews” on page 741.
3D> Create Vector Shift + H Create a cross section view of an entire model
View> Cross Section/ when used inside the model, or an exterior
Elevation elevation view of the entire model when used
outside the model. See “Creating Cross
Section/Elevation Views” on page 749.
Menus &
3D> Create Vector Shift + F12 Create a cross section view of objects between
Tools
View> Backclipped the start and end points of the cross section
Cross Section line only. See “Cross Section/Elevation
Views” on page 735.
3D> Create Vector Create a single floor elevation view of an
View> Wall Elevation interior or exterior wall. See “Cross Section/
Elevation Views” on page 735.
3D> Create Render Shift + J Create a render view from the floor plan view.
View> Render Full See “Render View Tools” on page 764.
Camera
3D> Create Render Create a render view of the current floor only.
View> Render Floor See “Render View Tools” on page 764.
Camera
3D> Create Render Shift + K Create a rendering of an entire model,
View> Render Full including ceilings and roofs. See “Render
Overview View Tools” on page 764.
3D> Create Render Create a rendering of the curent floor, without
View> Render Floor ceilings or roofs. See “Render View Tools” on
Overview page 764.
3D> Create Render Create a rendering of an entire model showing
View> Render only framing. Build framing before using this
Framing Overview view. See “Render View Tools” on page 764.
3D> Create Render Create a glass house render view. See “Glass
View> Glass House House View” on page 767.
Camera
49
3D> Create Render Create a render view based on the current

View> Render vector view using the same camera settings.
Current Vector View See “Render View Tools” on page 764.
3D> Raytrace Create a raytrace view of the current render
Current Render view. See “Raytracing” on page 787.
View...
3D> Save Active Saves the curent camera view. See “Saving 3D
Camera Views” on page 747.
3D> Edit Active Opens the current view for specification. See
Camera “Camera Specification Dialog” on page 753.
3D> Move Camera Alt + O Allows you to rotate the camera around the
With Mouse> Mouse- current camera focal point. See “Move
Orbit Camera Camera with Mouse Tools” on page 738.
3D> Move Camera Alt + P Allows you to move the camera up, down, left
With Mouse> Mouse- and right. See “Move Camera with Mouse
Pan Camera Tools” on page 738.
3D> Move Camera Alt + D Allows you to move the camera forward,
With Mouse> Mouse- backward, left and right. See “Move Camera
Dolly Camera with Mouse Tools” on page 738.
3D> Move Camera Alt + T Allows you to tilt the camera in any direction
With Mouse> Mouse- while staying in the same location. See “Move
Tilt Camera Camera with Mouse Tools” on page 738.
3D> Move Camera Allows you to focus the camera at a particular
With Mouse> 3D point in the scene. See “Move Camera with
Center Camera on Mouse Tools” on page 738.
Point
3D> Move Camera N/A Allows you to rotate the camera using the
With Arrow Keys> arrow keys on your keyboard. See “Move
Arrow-Orbit Camera Camera Tools” on page 739.
3D> Move Camera N/A Allows you to pan the camera up, down, left
With Arrow Keys> and right using the arrow keys on your
Arrow-Pan Camera keyboard. See “Move Camera Tools” on page
739.
3D> Move Camera N/A Allows you to move the camera forward,
With Arrow Keys> backward, left and right using the arrow keys
Arrow-Dolly Camera on your keyboard. See “Move Camera Tools”
on page 739.
50
3D> Move Camera N/A Allows you to tilt the camera while staying in
With Arrow Keys> the same location using the arrow keys on
Arrow-Tilt Camera your keyboard. See “Tilt Camera Tools” on
page 739.
3D> Move Camera> F Move the camera one step forward while
Move Camera maintaining the same line of sight.
Forward
3D> Move Camera> B Move the camera one step backward while
Move Camera maintaining the same line of sight.
Backward
3D> Move Camera> L Move the camera one step to the left while
Move Camera Left maintaining the same line of sight.
Menus &
Tools
3D> Move Camera> R Move the camera one step to the right while
Move Camera Right maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> U Raise the camera vertically in space while

Move Camera Up maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Move Camera> D Lower the camera vertically in space while

Move Camera Down maintaining the same line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera> I Move the position of the camera closer to the
Move Camera In focal point along the line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera> O Move the position of the camera away from
Move Camera Out the focal point along the line of sight.
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate the camera up around its focal point.
Orbit Camera
Upward
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate camera down around its focal point.
Orbit Camera
Downward
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate the camera to the left around its focal
Orbit Camera Left point.
3D> Orbit Camera> Rotate the camera to the right around its focal
Orbit Camera Right point.
51
3D> Tilt Camera> Tilt the camera upward while keeping it in the
Tilt Camera Upward same location.
3D> Tilt Camera> Tilt the camera downward while keeping it in

Tilt Camera the same location.
Downward
3D> Tilt Camera> Turn the camera toward the left while staying
Tilt Camera Left in the same location.
3D> Tilt Camera> Turn the camera toward the right while
Tilt Camera Right staying in the same location.
3D> Overview Adjust the view direction in an overview in

Direction Tools> View the View Angle dialog. See “Creating
Angle... Overviews” on page 741.
3D> Overview Click for front view.
Direction Tools>
Front View
3D> Overview Click for back view.
Direction Tools> Back
View
3D> Overview Click for top view.
Direction Tools> Top
View
3D> Overview Click for bottom view.
Direction Tools>
Bottom View
3D> Overview Click for left side view.
Direction Tools> Left
Side View
3D> Overview Click for right side view.
Direction Tools>
Right Side View
3D> Overview Click to restore the original view position.
Direction Tools>
Restore Original
View
3D> Walkthroughs> Play back a previously recorded walkthrough
Play Walkthrough... “movie”. See “Walkthroughs” on page 904.
52
3D> Walkthroughs> Record a walkthrough “movie”. See

Record Walkthrough “Walkthroughs” on page 904.
3D> Walkthroughs> Stop recording a walkthrough movie. See

Stop Recording “Walkthroughs” on page 904.
3D> Walkthroughs> Pause recording of a walkthrough movie. See

Pause Recording “Walkthroughs” on page 904.
3D> Walkthroughs> Save a single frame to the currently paused

Save Frame walkthrough file. See “Walkthroughs” on
page 904.
3D> Materials> Plan Shift + C Open the Plan Materials dialog. See
Materials... “Managing Plan Materials” on page 706.
Menus &
Tools
3D> Materials> Open the Define Material dialog to create a
Create Material... custom material. See “Define Material
3D> Materials> N/A Convert material.dat files created in previoous
Convert Material versions of Chief Architect to library
Definition (.dat) Files materials. See “Converting Material.dat files”
on page 704.
3D> Materials> Convert textures to materials. See
Convert Textures to “Converting Textures to Materials” on page
Materials 704.
3D> Materials> Create a library of materials in the Library
Create Plan Materials Browser based on the materials being used in
Library the current plan. See “Converting Material
Template Plans” on page 704.
3D> Materials> Change a material definition by clicking on a
Adjust Material surface. See “Adjust Material Definition” on
Definition page 711.
3D> Materials> Allows you to paint a material onto objects.
Material Painter> See “Material Painter” on page 708.
Material Painter
3D> Material Allows you to paint a material onto all objects
Painter> Material of the same material on the same layer. See
Painter Component “Material Painter” on page 708.
Mode
53
3D> Materials> Allows you to paint a material onto a single

Material Painter> object. See “Material Painter” on page 708.
Material Painter
Object Mode
3D> Materials> Allows you to paint a material onto all objects
Material Painter> of the same material in a room. See “Material
Material Painter Painter” on page 708.
Room Mode
Material Painter> of the same material on a floor. See “Material
Material Painter Painter” on page 708.
Floor Mode
Material Painter> of the same material in a plan. See “Material
Material Painter Plan Painter” on page 708
Mode
3D> Materials> Load the materials applied to the surfaces of
Material other objects. See “Material Eyedropper” on
Eyedropper... page 709.
3D> Lighting> Add Click in floor plan view to place point light
Lights source. Click and drag to create a parallel
light. See “Added Lights” on page 774.
3D> Lighting> Adjust Adjust the render properties of the lights
Lights... within the plan. See “Adjusting Lights” on
page 778.
3D> Lighting> Toggle Turn on or off the light source that represents
Sunlight the sun to simulate day vs. night exterior
views. See “Sun Angles” on page 775.
3D> Render View Redraw a render view with the Final View set-
Options> Final View tings in the Preferences dialog. See
“Rendering Tools” on page 765.
3D> Render View Redraw a render view with the Final View
Options> Final View with Shadows settings in the Preferences
with Shadows dialog. See “Rendering Tools” on page 765.
3D> Render View Turn the Glass House feature on or off. See
Options> Glass House “Glass House View” on page 767.
Mode
54
3D> Render View Adjust the Glass House options. See “Glass
Options> Glass House House View” on page 767.
Options...
3D> Render View Open the Cross Section Slider dialog. See
Options> Cross “Cross Section Slider Dialog” on page 785.
Section Slider
3D> Toggle Low Toggle between low and high detail 3D view.
Detail Mode See “Low Detail Display” on page 746.
3D> Delete Surface Click surfaces in a 3D view to delete them.

Click the button again to restore deleted
surfaces. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page
747.
Menus &
Tools
3D> Remove 3D Removes all 3D views associated with the
current plan. See “Remove 3D” on page 748.
3D> Rebuild 3D Rebuilds the entire 3D model. See “Rebuild

3D” on page 748.
3D> 3D Settings... Ctrl + 1 Opens the 3D Settings dialog, where you

can control how 3D views appear. See “3D
Settings Dialog” on page 757.
CAD Menu
The CAD menu is used to access the CAD
tools. Most of these menu items are also
accessible from the CAD toolbar.

Description
CAD> Current CAD Opens the Select CAD Layer dialog and
Layer... allows you to change the current CAD layer.
See “Select Layer Dialog” on page 222.
CAD> Points> Place Click to place a temporary CAD Point. See
Point “Point Tools” on page 843.
55

Description
CAD> Points> Input Click to place a new point in an absolute
Point... location or relative to the current point. See
“Input Point” on page 844.
CAD> Points> Point Click to place a permanent point marker.
Marker See “Point Markers” on page 844.
CAD> Points> Delete Delete all temporary CAD points at the

Temporary Points same time. See “Temporary Points” on page
845.
CAD> Lines> Draw W Click and drag to create lines. See “Line
Line Tools” on page 846.
CAD> Lines> Input Draw a line in an absolute location from the

Line... origin or relative to the current point. See
“Input Line” on page 847.
CAD> Lines> Line Draw a CAD line with an arrowhead. See
With Arrow “Line With Arrow” on page 849.
CAD> Lines> Sun Draw a Sun Angle to show shadow

Angle information at specific places and times, and
to create a light source in render views. See
“Sun Angles” on page 775.
CAD> Lines> North Draw a North Pointer to define true North.
Pointer See “North Pointer” on page 849.
CAD> Arcs> Draw E Draw an arc by dragging along the desired

Arc curve. See “Arc Tools” on page 856.
CAD> Arcs> Input Draw an arc in an absolute location from a

Arc... point of origin or relative to the current
point. See “Input Arc” on page 857.
CAD> Arcs> Arc Draw an arc with an arrowhead. See “Arc
With Arrow with Arrow” on page 858.
CAD> Circles> Circle K Click and drag to draw a circle. See “Circle
56

Description
CAD> Circles> Circle Click and drag from a center point to draw a
About Center circle. See “Draw Circle About Center” on
page 861.
CAD> Circles> Oval Draw an oval. See “Ovals” on page 861.
CAD> Circles> Draw an ellipse. See “Circle Tools” on page

Ellipse 860.
CAD> Boxes & Shift + P Draw a closed rectangular polyline. See

Framing> “Rectangular Polyline” on page 865.
Menus &
Tools
Rectangular Polyline
CAD> Boxes & Click to draw a closed regular polygon. You
Framing> Regular specify the radius or side length and the
Polygon number of sides. See “Box Tools” on page
865.
CAD> Boxes & Draw a resizable box. See “Box” on page
Framing> Box 866.
CAD> Boxes & Draw a framing member. This CAD item

Framing> Framing displays in 3D views and in the Material
List. See “Framing” on page 866.
CAD> Boxes & Draw wall bridging or blocking in wall
Framing> Wall details only. See “Wall Bridging” on page
Bridging 866.
CAD> Boxes & Draw resizable box containing a cross to
Framing> Cross Box show a cross section of a framing member.
See “Cross Box” on page 866.
CAD> Boxes & Draw resizable insulation for detailing cross
Framing> Insulation section views. See “Insulation” on page 867.
CAD> Spline Click this button and drag from end to end
to draw a smooth curve passing through the
points. See “Splines” on page 868.
CAD> Dimension> Single click to draw a dimension line. Dou-
Manual Dimension ble-click to open the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See “Manual
Dimensions” on page 797.
57

Description
CAD> Dimension> Draw a dimension marking only the
End to End beginning and end points. See “End-to-End
Dimension Dimensions” on page 797.
CAD> Dimension> Use this tool to find the angular dimension
Angular Dimension between any two straight, non-parallel lines.
See “Angular Dimensions” on page 798.
CAD> Dimension> Click to draw inside room dimensions. See
Interior Dimension “Interior Dimensions” on page 798.
CAD> Dimension> Draw a dimension between any two points.

Point to Point See “Point to Point Dimensions” on page
Dimension 798.
CAD> Dimension> Draw baseline dimensions for each object
Baseline Dimension located along the line. See “Baseline
CAD> Dimension> Shift + A Automatically generate exterior dimensions as
Auto Exterior defined in Dimension Defaults dialog.
Dimensions See “Auto Exterior Dimensions” on page
799.
CAD> Dimension> Enable temporary dimensions when CAD
Display Temporary objects are selected. See “Display
Dimensions Temporary Dimensions” on page 800.
CAD> Text> Text Y Click on screen to add text. See “Creating
Text” on page 819.
CAD> Text> Text Alt + A Click and drag to draw a text line with an
Line with Arrow arrow. See “Text Arrows” on page 819.
CAD> Text> Leader Alt + L Click and drag a text line with an arrow,
Line then place a text object. See “Leader Line”
on page 819.
CAD> Text> Callout Click on screen to add a callout. See
“Callouts” on page 821.
CAD> Text> Marker Place a marker in floor plan view. See

“Markers” on page 823.
58

Description
CAD> Plan Footprint Create a basic footprint of the current plan
in a CAD Detail window. See “Plan
Footprint” on page 876.
CAD> Autodetail Click to automatically generate CAD
Details. See “Auto-Detailing” on page 751.
CAD> CAD Block V Insert a CAD block from the list of available
Management... blocks in CAD Block Management dia-
log. See “CAD Block Management” on
page 871.
Menus &
CAD> CAD Detail Shift + V Open the CAD Detail dialog to create new
Tools
Management... detail or open an existing detail. See “CAD
Details” on page 874.
CAD> CAD Detail Click to convert the current view to a CAD
From View detail. See “CAD Detail From View” on
page 751.
CAD> CAD to Walls... Ctrl + F3 Convert CAD lines into walls. See “CAD to
Tools Menu
The Tools menu offers various tools for
dimensions, text, manipulating reference
floors, and modifying toolbars.

Effect
Tools> Display ‘ Open the Layer Display Options dialog to
Settings> Display control the display of items in 2D and 3D
Options... views as well as the materials list. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 218.
Tools> Display Open the Layer Set Management dialog to
Settings> Layer Set define, copy, create, import, or export, and set
Management the default layer set. See “Layer Set
Management” on page 217.
59

Effect
Tools> Display Allows you to move objects to a layer by
Settings> Layer clicking on them in any view. See “Layer
Painter... Painter” on page 224.
Tools> Display F5 Redraw the current window to clean up extra
Settings>Refresh lines, show missing items, and correct
Display random effects caused by changes to a model.
If something displays incorrectly or
incompletely, refreshing the display often
corrects the problem.
Tools> Display F8 Toggle the color on or off. See “Color On/
Settings> Color On/ Off” on page 743.
Off
Tools> Display Shift + F9 Toggles the reference grid on and off. See
Settings> Display “Plan Defaults” on page 180.
Reference Grid
Tools> Display Toggles the display of arc centers and ends.
Settings> Show Arc See “Show Arc Centers” on page 102.
Centers and Ends
Tools> Display Turn on display of line weights for accurate
Settings> Show Line on-screen representation of line weights and
Weights styles. See “Show Line Weights” on page
951.
Tools> Display Alt + F3 Toggles the print sheet on and off. See “Show
Settings> Show Sheet Sheet” on page 951.
Tools> Reference N/A Ctrl + Shift Define the working floor and the reference
Floors> Change +G plan. See “Reference Floor” on page 368.
Floor/Reference...
Tools> Reference Shift + N Moves the floor plan view one floor up. See
Floors> Up One Floor “Floor Up/ Floor Down” on page 368.
Tools> Reference Shift + M Moves the floor plan view one floor down.
Floors> Down One See “Floor Up/ Floor Down” on page 368.
Floor
Tools> Reference F9 Superimpose the plan of another floor over
Floors> Reference the current floor. See “Reference Display” on
Display page 369.
60

Effect
Tools> Reference Opens the Layer Display Options dialog
Floors> Reference to the Reference Display layer set. See
Display Options... “Layers” on page 215.
Tools> Reference Switch so that the reference plan becomes the
Floors> Swap Floor/ working plan, and the working plan becomes
Reference the reference plan. See “Swap Floor/
Reference” on page 369.
Tools> Checks> Plan Checks for some very basic code compliance
Check issues in the floor plan. Best used when your
floor plan is near completion. See “Plan
Menus &
Check” on page 885.
Tools
Tools> Checks> Spell Opens the Check Spelling dialog, allowing
Check you to check the spelling of the selected text.
See “Spell Check” on page 828.
Tools> Checks> View Display the IRC Checklist using Acrobat
IRC Checklist Reader. See “IRC Checklist” on page 886.
Tools> Toolbars> N/A Create new toolbars or modify existing ones.

Customize Toolbars... See “Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
18.
Tools> Toolbars> N/A Toggle the toolbars on or off. See “Toolbar
Hide Toolbars Customization Dialog” on page 18.
Tools> Layout > N/A Open the Go To Layout Page dialog. See
Change Layout “Displaying Layout Views” on page 981.
Page...
Tools> Layout> Page Shift + N Move the current page in the layout file up
Up one page. See “The Layout Tools” on page
970.
Tools> Layout > Page Shift + M Move the current page in the layout file down
Down one page. See “The Layout Tools” on page
970.
Tools> Layout> Insert a page before the current layout page as
Insert Page long as there is nothing on page 1000. See
“The Layout Tools” on page 970.
61

Effect
Tools> Layout> Delete the current layout page as long as there
Delete Page is nothing on that page. See “The Layout
Tools> Layout> Edit Select and modify any line in any 3D view
Layout that has been sent to layout other than CAD
objects. See “Editing Layout Lines” on page
983.
Tools> Layout> N/A View files present and files not found in the
Layout Files... current layout file. See “Layout Files Dialog”
on page 987.
Tools> Layout> Rescale a selected floor plan view, CAD
Rescale Layout detail, wall elevation, or cross section/
View... elevation view in layout. See “Displaying
Layout Views” on page 981.
Tools> Layout> Reestablish or change the file that a layout
Relink File... view is linked to. See “Relinking Layout
Tools> Symbol> Opens the Create Symbol Wizard. See
Create Symbol... “Opening the Create Symbol Wizard” on
page 927.
Tools> Symbol> Get Place the most recently created symbol back
Last Symbol... into the plan. See “Closing the Create Symbol
Wizard” on page 944.
Tools> Symbol> Add Add objects and materials to the Library. See
to Library... “Adding to the Library” on page 674.
Tools> House Open the House Wizard that leads you

Wizard> Start House through the steps to quickly lay out a floor
Wizard... plan. See “House Wizard” on page 884.
Tools> House Build a 3D model of a house based on the
Wizard> Build House organization of Room Boxes that you
defined. Must be done for each floor of the
building. See “House Wizard” on page 884.
62

Effect
Tools> House Turn the display of Room Boxes on and off .
Wizard> Hide Room Room Boxes normally display when they are
Boxes created and hidden after using the Build
House tool. See “House Wizard” on page
884.
Tools> House Place a bathroom. See “House Wizard” on
Wizard> Bathroom page 884.
Tools> House Place a bedroom. See “House Wizard” on
Wizard> Bedroom page 884.
Menus &
Tools
Tools> House Place a closet. See “House Wizard” on page
Wizard> Closet 884.
Tools> House Place a deck. See “House Wizard” on page

Wizard> Deck 884.
Tools> House Place a dining room. See “House Wizard” on

Wizard> Dining page 884.
Room
Tools> House Place an entry. See “House Wizard” on page
Wizard> Entry 884.
Tools> House Place a family room. See “House Wizard” on

Wizard> Family page 884.
Room
Tools> House Place a garage. See “House Wizard” on page
Wizard> Garage 884.
Tools> House Place a hallway. See “House Wizard” on page

Wizard> Hallway 884.
Tools> House Place a kitchen. See “House Wizard” on page

Wizard> Kitchen 884.
Tools> House Place a laundry room. See “House Wizard”

Wizard> Laundry on page 884.
Room
63

Effect
Tools> House Place a living room. See “House Wizard” on
Wizard> Living page 884.
Room
Tools> House Place a master bedroom. See “House Wizard”
Wizard> Master on page 884.
Bedroom
Tools> House Place an office. See “House Wizard” on page
Wizard> Office 884.
Tools> House Place a porch. See “House Wizard” on page

Wizard> Porch 884.
Tools> House Place a stairway. See “House Wizard” on
Wizard> Stair page 884.
Tools> House Place a stairwell. See “House Wizard” on

Wizard> Stairwell page 884.
Tools> Plans Create a plan database for plans on your

Database> Create system. See “Find Plan Wizard” on page 169.
Plan Database...
Tools> Plans Edit an existing plan database file. See “Find
Database> Edit Plan Plan Wizard” on page 169.
Database...
Tools> Time Begin logging time for the current plan. See
Tracker> Start Time “Time Tracker” on page 881.
Logging
Tools> Time Stop logging time for the current plan. See
Tracker> Stop Time “Time Tracker” on page 881.
Logging
Tools> Time Opens the Time Log dialog. See “Time Log
Tracker> View Time Dialog” on page 882.
Log...
Tools> Schedules> Create a door schedule for one or all floors.
Door... See “Creating Schedules” on page 992.
64

Effect
Tools> Schedules> Create a window schedule for one or all the
Window... floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
992.
Tools> Schedules> Create a cabinet schedule for one or all the
Cabinet... floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
992.
Tools> Schedules> Create a fixture schedule for one or all the
Fixture... floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
992.
Tools> Schedules> Create a furniture schedule for one or all the
Menus &
Tools
Furniture... floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
992.
Tools> Schedules> Create an electrical schedule for one or all the
Electrical... floors. See “Creating Schedules” on page
992.
Tools> Materials Generate a materials list for all floors. See
List> Calculate From “Calculate From All Floors” on page 1005.
All Floors
Tools> Materials Draw a rectangle around an area to generate a
List> Calculate From materials list for that area. See “Calculate
Area From Area” on page 1006.
Tools> Materials Select a room, then this menu option to
List> Calculate From generate a materials list for the selected room.
Room See “Calculate From Room” on page 1006.
Tools> Materials Draw a rectangular polyline defining an area
List> Materials to produce a materials list from. See
Polyline “Materials Polyline” on page 1007.
Tools> Materials Ctrl + M View the master material list. Modify the
List> Master List master list by making changes to a material
list. See “The Master List” on page 1007.
Tools> Materials Open the Materials Lists dialog to edit,
List> Materials List delete, or rename saved materials lists. See
Management... “Managing Materials Lists” on page 1015.
Tools> Project Opens the Project Browser. See “Project
Browser Browser” on page 165.
65

Effect
Tools > Project Opens a box where you can enter contact
Information> information for the designer of the plan. See
Designer Information “Project Information” on page 166.
Tools> Project Opens a box where you can enter contact
Information> Client information on the client this plan was drawn
Information for. See “Project Information” on page 166.
Tools> Screen Opens a dialog where you designate the kind
Capture> Screen of screen capture you intent to do, whether
Capture Setup backdrop, image, material, or picture. See
“Creating Screen Captures” on page 900.
Tools> Screen Activates the Screen Capture tool. See
Capture> Capture “Creating Screen Captures” on page 900.
Screen
Tools> Color Chooser Accesses the Color Chooser dialog where
you can select a color and create a material
for the library. See “Color Chooser Dialog”
on page 722.
Tools> Rotate View... Open the Rotate Plan View dialog to
rotate the current floor plan view. See “Rotate
View” on page 135.
Tools> Reverse Plan Reverse your entire plan as though reflected
about a vertical line. See “Reverse Plan” on
page 136.
Window Menu
The Window menu determines what window these menu items are common to other
is active and defines how it appears. Some of Windows programs.

Effect
Window> Zoom Shift + Z Zoom in on a defined area. See “Zoom Tools”
on page 723.
66

Effect
Window> Zoom In + (Num Zoom in to center of screen by 2x. See “Zoom
Lock on) Tools” on page 723. Use the numeric keypad
for the keyboard shortcut.
Window> Zoom Out - (Num Move back to include twice as much of your
Lock on) plan or view. See “Zoom Tools” on page 723.
Use the numeric keypad for the keyboard
shortcut
Window> Undo Undo the previous zoom. See “Undo Zoom”
Zoom on page 724.
Menus &
Window> Fill Show the entire drawing in the current
Tools
Window Building window, including the drawing sheet. See
Only “Fill Window Building Only” on page 724.
Window> Fill F6 Show the entire plan in the current window,
Window including the terrain perimeter and drawing
sheet. See “Fill Window” on page 724.
Window> Pan Pan the current window without changing the
Window zoom factor. See “Panning the Display” on
page 725.
Window> Swap F7 Toggle between the current view and the view
Views that was current before it. See “Swapping
Window> Aerial View Create an Aerial View of the entire plan in the
upper left corner. Zooming within this
window adjusts the view of the main plan for
editing. See “Aerial View” on page 729.
Window> Cascade Shift + F5 A standard Windows option that displays all
open views in a row, each slightly offset from
the others. See “Cascade” on page 726.
Window> Tile Display views tiled one above the other. See
Horizontally “Tiling Views” on page 727.
Window> Tile Shift + F6 Display views tiled left to right. See “Tiling
Vertically Views” on page 727.
67

Effect
Window> Arrange A standard Windows option that lines up the
Icons icons of minimized views in a row. See
“Arrange Icons” on page 728.
Window> Next Cycles through the open views in the order
Window that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See “Window Menu Tools”
on page 725.
Window> Previous Cycles backwards through the open views in
Window the order that they appear on the bottom of the
Windows menu. See “Window Menu Tools”
on page 725.
Window> Show Select this to switch to a layout file that is
Layout currently open. See “The Layout Tools” on
page 970.
Names of Open Views N/A Select an view from this list. The view with a
check next to it is the active view.
Help Menu
The Help menu is an extremely useful but Help without resorting to other resources.
often underused resource. You can get The Help menu also provides important
assistance for most topics from the Online customer information.

Effect
Help> Contents and Open the Online Help index and show an
Index outline of all the help information. See
“Getting Help” on page 15.
68
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons

Effect
Help> Current Mode N/A F1 Display information specific to the current
mode or tool. The F1 function key accesses
this same information, but is more flexible
since it can access information specific to any
toolbar button or menu item the pointer is held
above. Most dialogs also have a Help button
that accesses information related to their func-
tions. See “Getting Help” on page 15.
Help> View User’s N/A Open the User’s Guide PDF using Acrobat
Guide Reader. See “Getting Help” on page 15.
Menus &
Help> View Open the Reference Manual PDF using
Tools
Reference Manual... Acrobat Reader. See “Getting Help” on page
15.
Help> Visit Chief Open the Chief Architect Web page using
Architect Web Site... your default Web browser. See “Getting Help”
on page 15.
Help> Download N/A Open to the Program Updates section of the
Program Updates... Chief Architect Web site. See “Program
Updates” on page 15.
Help> Download N/A Download bonus library items from the Chief
Bonus Content... Architect website. See “Bonus Libraries” on
page 670.
Help> ChiefTalk... Launch your default web browser to
www.chieftalk.com.
Help>Hardware Lock N/A Opens the hardware lock troubleshooter.
Troubleshooter...
Help> About Chief N/A Open the About dialog to view the registered
Architect... owner’s name, the serial number, and the
program’s version number and release date.
Contact information is shown on the More
Info tab.
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons

What’s New In Version X1 Training Video: Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
69
The MEP Toolbar Configuration

displays a variety of toolbar buttons Place Drain Pipe - Draw a CAD
that access line styles and symbols related to line using the D/P line style.
Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing. See Place Waste Water - Draw a CAD
“Line Styles” on page 688 and “Interior line using the W/W line style.
Fixtures” on page 685.
Place Large Gas WH - Click to
place a gas water heater.
MEP Configuration Buttons
Place Elongated Toilet - Click to
Place Gas - Draw a CAD line using place an elongated toilet.
the Gas line style. Place Single 24” - Click to place a
Place Heating/AC Duct - Draw a single 24” kitchen sink.
CAD line using the H/AC line style. Place Tub-Shower (bar) - Click to
Place Vent Duct - Draw a CAD line place a 60” tub-shower unit .
using Vent line style. Place Data - Draw a CAD line using
Place 4x8 - Click to place 1 4x8” the DATA line style.
floor vent. Place Low Voltage - Draw a CAD
Place 22” w/ Gas Upflow - Click to line using the L/V line style.
place a 22” gas furnace with upflow. Place Telephone - Draw a CAD line
Place Cold Water Supply - Draw a using the Telephone line style.
CAD line using the C/W line style. Place TV - Draw a CAD line using
Place Hot Water Supply - Draw a the TV line style.
CAD line using the H/W line style.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons access a variety of functions. Toggle Buttons
Some control how your plan appears on
screen, and others are shortcuts to preference Color On/Off - Toggle the display
settings that control the behavior of various of color. See “Color On/Off” on
objects. page 743.
By default, the toggle toolbars display on the Show Line Weights - Turn on the
right vertical frame of Chief Architect’s main display of true line weights as they
window. appear when printed. See “Show
Line Weights” on page 951.
70
Edit Toolbar Buttons
Show Sheet - Toggle the display of

the print sheet, as specified in the Display Reference Grid - Turn on
Page Setup dialog. See “Show the reference grid, as specified in the
Sheet” on page 951. Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults
dialog. See “Plan Defaults” on page
Print Preview - Display the print
180.
preview. All line weights and text
objects appear on screen as they do Grid Snaps - Enable snapping to
when printed. See “Print Preview” the grid as specified in the Plan
on page 951. Defaults/Layout Defaults dialogs.
See “Plan Defaults” on page 180.
Display Temporary Dimensions -
Show temporary dimensions when Object Snaps - Enable snapping to
objects are selected. See “Display objects as specified in the
Temporary Dimensions” on page Preferences dialog. See “Snap
Menus &
Tools
800.
Edit Object Parts - Toggle the Angle Snaps - Enable snapping to
ability to edit individual polyline allowed angles as specified in the
edges. See “Edit Object Parts” on Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults
page 81. dialogs. See “Plan Defaults” on
page 180.
Show Arc Centers and Ends -
Toggle the display of arc centers.
See “Show Arc Centers” on page
102.

Video: Editing - Sticky Mode and Other Accurate Move - Select an object,
Edit Sub Modes then click this button to move it with
more accuracy. See “Accurate
Edit toolbar buttons only display when one
Move” on page 125.
or more objects are selected. Various edit
buttons are available, depending on the Activate Camera - Opens an
object(s) currently selected. inactive camera view window. See
“Activating Views” on page 748.
If Contextual Menus are enabled (see
Add to Library - Adds a symbol,
“Appearance Panel” on page 184), right-
CAD block, or molding profile to
click an object to open a contextual menu
the Library. See “Adding to the
that lists the same options as the edit toolbar.
Library” on page 674.
71
Advanced Splines - Turns on Chamfer Two Lines - Select an

advanced splines. See “Advanced edge, click this button, and select a
Splines” on page 117. different edge to create a straight
Allowed Angles - Opens the Place bevel of specified size between
at Allowed Angles dialog. See them. Double-click to set the
“Place at Allowed Angles Dialog” chamfer size. See “Reshaping
on page 155. Objects” on page 129.
Auto Stairwell - Select a staircase Change Line/Arc - Turns the line
and click this button to create a into an arc or the arc into a line. See
stairwell. See “Creating a Stairwell “Change Line/Arc” on page 131.
Automatically” on page 456. Change Opening/Hinge Side -
Automatically Generate Change the side of a selected door
Sidewalks - Allows you to that the hinges are on. See
automatically generate sidewalks “Changing Door Swings” on page
along a selected road object. See 312.
“Using the Edit Buttons” on page Change Swing Side - Change the
634. direction that a selected door
Break Line - Single-click, or press swings. See “Changing Door
3, then click a selected item to add a Swings” on page 312.
joint-type break. Double-click and Components - Open an object’s
then click selected item to Components dialog. See
completely sever the line. See “Components Dialog” on page
“Break Line” on page 130. 1014.
Build Advanced Deck Framing - Connect Walls - Select a wall then
Build framing and planking for the click this button to form an
selected deck. See “Decks” on page intersection with a nearby wall. See
288. “Connect Walls” on page 241.
Calculate From Room - Generate a Convert Spline to Polyline -
materials list of the contents of the Change the spline into a polyline
selected room. See “Calculate From made up of straight lines. See
Room” on page 1006. “Convert Spline to Polyline” on
Calculate Materials List - Generate page 152.
a materials list of the contents of the Convert to Polyline Road/
selected Materials Polyline. See Sidewalk - Converts a selected road
“Materials Polyline” on page 1007. or sidewalk into a road polyline or a
Center Object - Center an object in sidewalk polyline. See “Using the
a wall. See “Centering Doors and Edit Buttons” on page 634.
Windows” on page 311.
72
Convert to Solid - Convert the Explode CAD Block - Click to

selected polyline solid to a explode a selected block into its
Primitive. See “Convert to Solid” on individual parts. See “CAD Blocks”
page 151. on page 870.
Convert to Spline - Convert a Explode Mulled Unit - Click to
polyline into a spline. See “Convert explode a selected mulled unit into
Spline to Polyline” on page 152. its individual parts. See “Manually
Convert Polyline - Convert a Mulled Units” on page 332.
selected polyline to a polyline solid. Explode Dormer - Explode a
See “Convert Polyline” on page 149. selected dormer into its component
Copy/Paste - Click or press Ctrl + parts. See “Exploding Dormers” on
Alt + C to make a single copy of the page 408.
Menus &
selected object(s) and enable Paste Extend Objects - Select boundary
Tools
mode. See “Copying and Pasting edge(s), click this button, then select
Objects” on page 136. CAD objects on end to extend. This
Delete - Click to delete the selected may be used with the Select/Make
object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on Fence tool as well. See “Extend
page 141. Objects” on page 143.
Delete Gable Over Opening - Fence Select - Click this button to
Select a window or door with a specify the selected object(s) as a
gable above it and click this button fence. See “Using a Fence” on page
to delete the gable when roofs are 94.
built. See “Gable Over Door/ Fillet Two Lines - Select an edge,
Window” on page 415. click this button, and select a
Expand Room Polyline - Select a different edge to create a rounded
room and click this button to enlarge fillet of specified size between them.
the current room selection to include Double-click to set the fillet radius.
all rooms that are continuous and See “Reshaping Objects” on page
only separated by invisible walls or 129.
railings. See “Room Polylines” on Flare/Curve Stair - Flare the sides
page 295. of the selected staircase. See “Flared
Explode Architectural Block - Stairs and Curved Treads” on page
Click to explode the selected 448.
architectural block into its individual Gable Over Door/Window - Place
parts. See “Exploding Architectural a gable over a door or window. See
Blocks” on page 666. “Placing a Gable Over a Window”
on page 331.
73
Intersection - Create a new polyline Make CAD Block - Available when

around the area in common between one or more CAD objects is Shift +
two polylines. See “Union, selected. Click to link selected items
Intersection, and Subtract” on page into a single unit, or block. See
146. “CAD Blocks” on page 870.
Join Roof Planes - Join two roof Make Mulled Unit - Available
planes. Also activated by pressing 2. when more than one door/window is
See “Joining Roof Planes” on page selected. Click to mull selected
403. windows/doors into a single unit.
Load Muntins - Turn a CAD block See “Manually Mulled Units” on
drawn over window or door glass page 332.
into a custom muntin design. See Make Parallel - Align a selected
“Custom Muntins” on page 338. line or polyline edge with another
Load Values To Make Same - object, such as a wall or line. See
Apply values assigned to a group of “Using Make Parallel/
objects to new objects. See “Load to Perpendicular” on page 126.
Make Same Value” on page 152. Make Room Molding Polyline -
Lock Center - Locks the center of Opens the Make Room Molding
the selected arc. See “Using Lock Polyline dialog. See “Make Room
Center” on page 102. Molding Polyline Dialog” on page
295
Lock Control Handle Angle -
Locks or unlocks the control handles Make Room Polyline - Create a
for editing advanced splines. See standard polyline that matches the
“Lock Control Handle Angle” on shape of the selected room. See
page 118. “Room Molding Polylines” on page
295
Main Edit Mode - Click to return to
the main edit toolbar from the Move to be Coplanar - Move a
currently active secondary toolbar. selected roof plane to be coplanar
with the next selected roof plane.
Make Arc Tangent - Make an arc
See “Move to be Coplanar” on page
tangent to the attached lines/arcs.
404.
See “Using Make Arc Tangent” on
page 128. Move to Framing Reference -
Position selected framing members
Make Architectural Block -
in relation to the framing reference.
Available when one or more objects
See “Framing Reference Markers”
is Shift + selected. Click to create a
on page 486.
single architectural block out of all
selected objects. See “Creating Move to Front of Group - Click to
Architectural Blocks” on page 664. move the selected item in front of
other CAD objects. See “Move to
Front of Group” on page 122.
74
Multiple Copy - Click this button, Remove Manufacturer Lock -

then drag to create copies at Remove manufacturer data
specified intervals. See “Multiple associated with the selected library
Copy” on page 139. symbol. See “Remove Manufacturer
Multiple Copy Interval - Click to Lock” on page 698.
set interval for Multiple Copy tool. Replace From Library - Replace
See “Multiple Copy” on page 139. the selected object with another
Open Object - Open the selected from the Library. See “Replace
object’s specification dialog. See From Library” on page 680.
“Specification Dialogs” on page 8. Resize Picture - Resize a selected
Open Symbol - Click to open the bitmap. See “Resizing an Image” on
Symbol Specification dialog for page 896.
Menus &
the selected object(s). See “Symbol Reverse Layers - Reverse the layers
Tools
Specification Dialog” on page 945. of the selected wall. See “Drawing
Open Wall Detail - Open a framing Walls” on page 238.
detail for the selected wall. Framing Reverse Direction - Select a line,
must be built. See “Wall Framing arrow, or polyline, then click this
Details” on page 492. button to reverse the direction. See
Paste Hold Position - Paste a copy “Reverse Direction” on page 136.
of the selection at the same Same Wall Type - Temporarily
coordinates as the original but on enable Same Wall Type edit handles.
another floor. See “Paste Hold See “Same Wall Type Edit Handles”
Position” on page 139. on page 243.
Point-to-Point Move - Move the Select Fence - Click this button,
selection from start point to the end then click on a line or polyline to
point of the move. See “Point to specify it as a fence.
Point Move” on page 125. Select Next Object - When many
Reflect About Object - Reflect objects are located in a small area,
selected objects about another select one of them and click this edit
object. See “To use Reflect About button until the desired object is
Object” on page 135. selected. See “Select Next Object”
Remove Advanced Deck Framing on page 93.
Click to turn a framed deck into a Select Same Type - Open the Select
solid deck. See “Decks” on page Similar Objects dialog. See “Select
288. Same Type” on page 152.
75
Starter Tread - Round one of the

bottom two treads of a staircase.
Must select the staircase at one of
the two bottom treads. See “Starter
Treads” on page 451.
Sticky Mode - Available after some
edit buttons are clicked. Click to
keep the selected edit mode active
and make multiple edit operations.
Straighten Spline Segment -
Straighten a segment of an advanced
spline between two points. See
“Straighten Spline Segment” on
page 118.
Subtract - Subtract one polyline
from another to create a new
polyline. See “Union, Intersection,
and Subtract” on page 146.
Transform/Replicate Object -
Click to open the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog. See
“Transform/Replicate Object
Trim Objects - Select cutting
edge(s), click this button, then select
CAD objects on end to eliminate.
This can be used with the Fence
Select tool as well. See “Trim
Union - Create a new polyline using
the entire area of overlapping
polylines. See “Union, Intersection,
and Subtract” on page 146.
Unload Muntins - Explodes
muntins into CAD lines and objects
for editing. See “Custom Muntins”
on page 338.
76
Other Buttons
Other Buttons
These buttons are not in the menus or the Layer Set Defaults - Open the
default toolbars but can be added to toolbars. Layer Set Defaults dialog. See
See “Adding Toolbar Buttons” on page 18. “Layer Set Defaults Dialog” on page
225.
Adjust Image Properties - Open
Render Current Vector View -
the Adjust Image Properties
Create a render camera view from
dialog. Available in Raytrace views.
the vector camera view. Available in
See “Adjust Image Properties” on
vector camera views. See “Render
page 790.
Current Vector View” on page 765.
CAD Default Settings - Open the
Startup Options - Open the
CAD Defaults dialog. See “CAD
Startup Options dialog. See
Defaults” on page 842.
“Startup Options” on page 2.
Empty Space - Add an empty space
Switch Default and CAD Toolbars
to your toolbar, which may be
- Switch between the Default and
helpful when customizing toolbars.
CAD toolbar configurations,
See “Toolbar Customization Dialog”
mimicking version 10 and prior
on page 18.
behavior. See “Toolbar
Floor Defaults - Open the Floor Configurations” on page 22.
Defaults dialog. See “Floor
General Wall Defaults - Opens the
General Wall Defaults dialog.
See “General Wall Defaults Dialog”
on page 274.
77
78
Chapter 3:
Editing
Objects
Objects
Introduction
Editing
Introductory Training Video: CAD Although these objects are sometimes very
Tools different from one another, the methods used
to move, rotate, resize and otherwise edit
them are similar throughout the program.
Video: Editing - Setting the Primary
Mouse Movement Edit handles allow objects to be resized,
relocated, or rotated using the mouse. Edit
toolbar buttons and the contextual menus
Video: Editing - New Edit Handles
access edit tools relevant to the selected
What’s New In Version X1 Training object(s). Most objects have a specification
Video: Editing - Discontinued Edit dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that
Commands are specific to that type of object.
What’s New In Version X1 Training The editing characteristics common to most
Video: Editing - 3D Editing objects are described in this chapter. Unique,
object-specific editing behaviors and the
specification dialogs are covered in their
Video: CAD - Editing Tools
respective chapters.
In Chief Architect, a variety of architectural
and CAD-based objects are used to create Chapter Contents
complete 3D models and working drawings. • Architectural vs CAD Objects
79
• Defaults and Preferences • Displaying Objects

• Snap Behaviors • Moving Objects
• Object Snaps • Aligning Objects
• Angle Snaps • Resizing Objects
• Grid Snaps • Reshaping Objects
• Edit Behaviors • Rotating Objects
• Creating Objects • Reflecting Objects
• Selecting Objects • Copying and Pasting Objects
• Editing Line Based Objects • Deleting Objects
• Editing Arc Based Objects • Trim and Extend
• Editing Open Polyline Based Objects • Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
• Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects • Union, Intersection, and Subtract
• Editing Box-Based Objects • Converting Objects
• Editing Spline Based Objects • Select Same / Load Same
• Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses • Edit Area Tools
• Architectural and CAD Blocks
Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in In contrast, architectural objects such as
Chief Architect: architectural objects and walls, cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs
CAD objects. display in 2D and 3D views. Architectural
objects can be created and edited in 2D and
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, and circles
3D views but not in CAD detail windows or
are 2D objects that can be created and edited
on layout pages.
in floor plan view, cross section/elevation
views, CAD detail windows, and on layout Some architectural objects, such as custom
pages but do not display in 3D camera views countertops and slabs, have some behaviors
and overviews. See “The CAD Drawing in common with CAD objects and are
Tools” on page 842. referred to as CAD-based.
Defaults and Preferences

The ways that objects in the program behave Snap Settings
as they are created and edited are affected by
a number of default and preference settings. Select Edit> Snap Settings to access
See “Defaults & Preferences” on page 175. the three categories of Snap Settings
that determine how objects snap to one
It is a good idea to be familiar with these another and whether they snap to allowed
options and how they affect drawing angles or to points on a grid, as well as object
and editing in the program. bumping and pushing behaviors.
80
Object Snaps enable snapping to distance moved by each edge is the same as
objects. See “Object Snaps” on page all other edges. See “Concentric” on page 88.
82.
The Fillet edit behavior allows you to
Angle Snaps enable snapping at add a fillet at any corner of an object.
Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps” See “Fillet” on page 89.
on page 84.
Grid Snaps enable snapping to the Edit Object Parts
Snap Grid. See “Grid Snaps” on page Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit
85. Object Parts to toggle the ability to
Bumping/Pushing enables bumping edit the individual segments of polyline-
and pushing behaviors. See “Bumping/ based objects and connected walls. See “Edit
Pushing” on page 124. Object Parts” on page 93.
Edit Behaviors Rotate/Resize About

Select Edit> Edit Behaviors to access Objects can be rotated or resized about
the six global edit behavior modes that either their own centers or the current
determine how dragging the edit handles CAD point. See “Temporary Points” on page
with the left mouse button affects a selected 845.
Objects
Editing
object and may also affect how objects are Specify which behavior is used by selecting
drawn. Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/Resize
The Default edit behavior provides the About Current Point or in the
most commonly used editing options. Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors
See “Default” on page 86. Panel” on page 202.
The Alternate edit behavior provides
an alternative to the Default behaviors Arc Creation Modes
that may be more useful in some situations. Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes to
See “Alternate” on page 87. access the five Arc Creation Modes
The Move edit behavior allows you to that control how arcs and curved walls are
move a selected object using the corner drawn.
handles and the Move handle. See “Move” Free Form Arc mode allows you to
on page 87. define an arc by clicking and dragging
The Resize edit behavior scales an along the desired path. See “Free Form Arc”
object as you drag a corner handle. See on page 855.
“Resize” on page 87. Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows
The Concentric edit behavior allows you to define the center and radius of
you to resize objects so that the an arc, and then its length. See “Center/
Radius/End Arc” on page 856.
81
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you to an arc, its tangent and its curvature. See
define the start and end points of an “Start/Tangent/End Arc” on page 856.
arc, then adjust the curvature. See “Start/
End/On Arc” on page 856. Arc About Center mode allows you to
draw an arc by defining the center and
Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows then the start and end points. See “Arc About
you to define the start and end points of Center” on page 856.
Snap Behaviors
Introductory Training Video: Under- • Grid Snaps , which snap objects to
standing Snaps points on a grid.
Classroom Design Project Training Snap behaviors can be controlled in the
Video: Understanding the Snapping Preferences dialog and in the Plan or
Functions Layout Defaults dialogs. See “Snap
What’s New In Version X1 Training Properties Panel” on page 204 and “Plan
Video: CAD - Snaps Defaults” on page 180.
There are three categories of
You can also select Edit> Snap Settings
snap behavior in Chief
to quickly access snap behavior settings.
Architect:
• Object Snaps , which snap CAD To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors

and other move restrictions, press the
and architectural objects to other objects.
Ctrl key while dragging an edit handle. See
• Angle Snaps , which snap objects “Moving Objects” on page 123.
at specific angles.
Object Snaps
Classroom Design Project Training Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or
Video: Working with Object Snaps in the Preferences dialog. See “Snap
Object Snaps allow you to position Properties Panel” on page 204.
objects precisly relative to each other; Object Snaps are indicated visually as you
for example, to position lines so that their create or edit objects and with the exception
endpoints meet or roof plane edges so that
they are colinear. of On Object snaps, have priority over
all other types of snapping in Chief
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Object Architect. Bumping/Pushing overrides
82
Object Snaps
Object Snaps. See “Bumping/Pushing” on

Orthogonal extension lines relative to it.
page 124.
Object Snap Behaviors To use extension snaps

There are many locations on an object that
other objects can snap to. In addition to snap 1. Toggle on Object Snaps and make
points located on objects, Extension Snaps sure the extension snaps are enabled.
locate points away from objects. Each type
of object snap can be toggled by selecting 2. Draw a Rectangular Polyline .
Edit> Snap Settings or in the 3. Select the Draw Line tool and move
Preferences dialog. See “Snap Properties your pointer along the edges of the
Panel” on page 204. polyline.
4. When your pointer passes over an end-
Extension Snaps point or midpoint, an extension anchor is
For some operations, it is helpful to snap to a created.
point far away from an original object, while 5. Move your pointer perpendicular edge
maintaining a relationship to a point on that displaying the anchor to create a blue,
object. For example, you may want to snap to dashed extension line.
Objects
Editing
a point exactly perpendicular to a line’s
endpoint. Extension Snaps are helpful in Only a limited number of anchors can exist at
these situations. one time; creating a new anchor removes the
oldest existing anchor. You can specify the
number of possible anchors in the
Preferences dialog. See “Snap Properties
Object Snaps Hotkeys

• Press the “1” key to clear out all current
extension anchors.
Extension anchors and lines • Hold down the “S” key to temporarily
Extension Snaps are indicated by extension disable Object Snaps. You are still able to
anchors, indicated by small blue circles. use Extension Snaps to existing anchors,
so the “S” key can be used to avoid pick-
Anchors display for Endpoint, Midpoint, and ing up unwanted extension anchors.
Quadrant snaps when these snap behaviors
are enabled. The “S”Key - Case Study
When an anchor is established, you can
In the following example, there are several
create Tangent , Perpendicular and lines. Suppose we want to start a line at the
intersection of two orthogonal extension
83
lines drawn from two lines, A and B. To To establish two extension anchors
establish an extension anchor, we need to
drag the mouse over a line A’s endpoint, but 1. Drag the mouse over the endpoint for
there are several lines between the endpoints line A to establish the first endpoint
of lines A and B. We need to establish the anchor.
two extension anchors without snapping to 2. Temporarily disable object snapping by
the intervening objects. holding down the “S” key.
3. Move the mouse to the end of line B.
A B 4. Release the “S” key to establish the sec-
ond endpoint anchor.
5. Move the mouse to the intersection of
the two extension lines and draw the
4. new object.
5.
1.
3.
The S key can help establish extension
snaps when other objects may interfere
Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be
Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or
drawn at exact angles. This can be
in the Preferences dialog.
accomplished using Angle Snaps.
Angle Snaps allow you to draw lines, walls, Angle Snap Settings
and other objects at specified Allowed
Angles. Angle Snaps also affect the way You can change Allowed Angle settings for
objects rotate, the radius of arcs, and a Angle Snaps in the Plan Defaults or
Layout Defaults dialog. See “Plan
variety of other operations.
Angle Snaps allow you to snap at either 15
degree angles or at 7.5 degree angles plus Specify 15 Degree or 7 ½ Degree angle
any additional Allowed Angles that you snaps. When 7 ½ Degree Angle Snaps are
specify. See “Plan Defaults” on page 180. selected, you can also specify Additional
Angles. These default settings are plan-
Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by specific rather than global.
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
84
Grid Snaps
Angle Snaps Intersection Snaps to snap to a point on

and Object Snaps the existing line.
Angle Snaps have a higher priority than Grid
Use both object
Snaps and On Object Snaps , but a snapping and
lower priority to all other Object Snaps. If a angle snapping to
valid Object Snap exists, the program uses create a 15-degree
that instead of an Angle Snap. Sometimes line that intersects
both Angle Snaps and Object Snaps apply. an existing line
For example, suppose a line is drawn at 15

Now suppose that we don't want the new line
degrees using Angle Snaps and another line
to end on the existing line. Hold down the
is approached. You can draw the new line at
“S” key to temporarily disable Object Snaps,
an allowed angle of 15 degrees while using
allowing only Angle Snaps. See “The
“S”Key - Case Study” on page 83.
Grid Snaps
Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps
Objects
Grid Snaps allow you to snap to points
Editing
on an on-screen grid. The display and
size of this Snap Grid can be controlled in the Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have
Plan or Layout Defaults dialog. See the lowest priority and are overridden by
“Plan Defaults” on page 180. Angle Snaps and Object Snaps.
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting Grid snaps can work well with Angle Snaps.
For example, if the grid Snap Unit is set to
Edit> Snap Settings>Grid Snaps , by 12" (1 foot), drawing a new line at an
clicking the toggle button, or in the Plan or allowed angle snaps the line length to 0",
Layout Defaults dialog. See “Plan 12", 24", and so on. This is also true of walls
Defaults” on page 180. drawn at allowed angles. See “Plan Defaults”
There are two grids in Chief Architect. The on page 180.
Reference Grid is not used for snapping and
To draw a line or wall at an Allowed
is provided to give you a visual sense of Angle but with unrestricted length, dis-
scale. The reference grid is useful for able Grid Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.
zooming in and out, or for general layout
guidelines. See “Plan Defaults” on page 180.
85
Edit Behaviors
Classroom Design Project Training Default
Video: Choosing Edit Behavior Options
The Default mode is one of the
What’s New In Version X1 Training primary edit behavior modes. It offers
Video: Editing - Choosing Edit Behav- access to the most commonly used edit
ior Options behaviors and should be selected as your
There are six Edit Behavior modes preference in most situations.
that determine how edit handles affect
When the use of a tool is described in
an object, and may also affect how objects
this manual, it is assumed that the
are drawn. The currently active edit behavior Default edit behavior mode is active.
is a global preference setting, affecting all
plan and layout files. • Drawing - Standard click and drag
Two of these modes, Default and Alternate, drawing behavior is enabled. See
are useful for most drawing and editing “Creating Objects” on page 90.
needs and can be considered primary editing • Resize/Reshape - Default allows you to
modes. Default mode, in particular, accesses adjust the angle of any corner of a
the most commonly used behaviors and is the polyline without affecting adjacent cor-
best choice in most circumstances. ners, changing the object’s shape.
The other four modes, Move, Resize,
Concentric and Fillet, offer special editing
behaviors that may be useful only in certain
situations and can be considered secondary.
You can specify which edit behavior mode is
active when the left mouse button is used in
the Preferences dialog, by selecting Edit>
Edit Behaviors , or by clicking the
corresponding toggle button, which can be
added to your toolbar. See “Behaviors Panel” Default edit behavior
on page 202. • For box-based objects, the Default mode
Each edit behavior can also be enabled using functions the same as the Alternate mode.
the different buttons on your mouse or by • Movement - Default allows you to move
pressing the keyboard keys associated with objects orthogonal, or at a right angle, to
each. See “Using the Mouse” on page 4. any of their edges.
• Rotation - In Default mode, objects snap
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
86
Edit Behaviors
You can temporarily enable the Default Angle Snaps are enabled, or orthogo-
edit mode when another mode is active by nal to any of its edges when they are not.
pressing Alt + Z or Alt + / while performing See “Angle Snaps” on page 84.
an edit or drawing operation. • Rotation - Alternate snaps objects at
Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
Alternate
You can temporarily enable the Alternate
edit mode when another mode is active
Video: Editing - Alternate Mode Edit
by pressing Alt or using the right mouse
Behaviors
button while performing an edit or drawing
The Alternate mode is the second operation.
primary edit behavior mode.
• Drawing - Continuous drawing behavior Move
is enabled. The Move mode allows you to move
• Resize/Reshape - Alternate allows you an object using edit handles that would
to keep the angle between adjacent edges otherwise be used for resizing, as well as
fixed when a corner edit handle is moved. with the Move handle.
Instead, adjacent corners move and adja- • Drawing - Standard click and drag
Objects
cent edges lengthen or shorten.
Editing
drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Move allows you to
move the selected object when any edit
handle is used.
• Movement - Move mode allows you to
move objects at Allowed Angles.
• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
You can temporarily enable the Move

edit mode when another mode is active by
Alternate edit behavior pressing Z or / while performing an edit or
drawing operation.
• Alternate allows you to drag an end han-
dle on an open polyline to change it from
a line to an arc or vice versa.
Resize
The Resize edit behavior allows you to
• Alternate overrides the Lock Center rescale an object. As you drag a corner
setting of arc-based objects. edit handle of an object, you get an exactly
• Movement - Alternate allows you to scaled version of the original. For example,
move objects at Allowed Angles when you can resize an object to 50% of its
87
original size while maintaining the same drawing operation. See “Using the Mouse”
proportions. on page 4.
• Drawing - Standard click and drag
drawing behavior is enabled. Concentric
• Resize/Reshape - Resize allows you to The Concentric mode allows you to
keep the angle between adjacent edges resize objects so that the distance
fixed when a corner handle is moved. moved by each edge is the same. For
example, you can resize an irregularly
shaped polyline so that each edge is exactly
ten feet in from the original position, which
is useful for creating site plans with setbacks.
• Drawing - Standard click and drag
drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Concentric allows you
to resize an irregularly-shaped polyline
so that each edge is moved the same dis-
tance from its original location.
Resize edit behavior
To proportionally resize an object,

always drag a corner edit handle and
not an edge handle.
• Movement - Resize allows you to move

an object orthogonal, or at a right angle,
to any of its edges.
• Rotation - In Resize Mode, objects snap
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated. Concentric edit behavior
You can temporarily enable the Resize • Concentric also allows you to move
edit mode when another mode is active by opposite edges of an object so that each
pressing X or using the X2 button on a five- edge is moved the same distance from its
button mouse while performing an edit or original location.
88
Edit Behaviors
Unit specified in the Plan Defaults dialog.

See “Grid Snaps” on page 85.
To concentrically resize an object with

no restrictions, set the Concentric Jump
value on the CAD Panel of the Preferences
dialog to zero and turn off Grid Snaps.
You can temporarily enable the Concentric

edit mode when another mode is active
by pressing C or using the X1 button on a
five-button mouse while performing an edit
• Movement - Concentric mode allows
or drawing operation. See “Using the
you to move an object orthogonal, or at a
Mouse” on page 4.
right angle, to any of its edges.
• Rotation - In Concentric mode, objects Fillet
snap at Allowed Angles as they are
rotated. The Fillet mode allows you to add a
fillet, or curve, at any corner of an
In some cases, the Concentric and Resize object. Dragging a corner edit handle adjusts
Objects
edit behaviors have the same result, such as
Editing
the fillet radius at that corner.
when a circle is resized. Usually, though, the
two behaviors are different because • Drawing - Standard click and drag
concentric resizing does not maintain the drawing behavior is enabled.
original ratio between an irregular polyline’s • Resize/Reshape - Fillet allows you to
edges. create a fillet at by dragging a corner edit
handle inward.
Resize edit Concentric

behavior edit behavior
In Concentric mode, objects resize in
Concentric Jump increments specified in
the Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors
Panel” on page 202. Fillet edit behavior
When the Concentric Jump distance is set • Movement - Move mode allows you to
at 0", objects resize according to the Snap move objects at Allowed Angles.
89
• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap You can temporarily enable the Fillet
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated. edit mode when another mode is active by
pressing F while performing an edit or
The Fillet edit behavior adjusts all the
drawing operation.
corners of a box at once. The radius of each
corner is the same.
To produce fillets or chamfers of an
exact radius, set the Fillet Chamfer
Fillet does not have an effect on circles, Radius and use the Fillet two Lines or
ovals, ellipses or arc segments. Chamfer Two Lines edit button. See “Fillet
Two Lines” on page 131 and “Chamfer
Two Lines” on page 132.
Creating Objects
In Chief Architect, there are four ways to drawing area to draw an object between your
create objects: by clicking to place an object, start and end points.
by clicking and dragging to draw an object,
Continue drawing the selected object until
by entering coordinates or by importing
another tool is selected.
custom symbols, drawings, pictures or
images. You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing
operation before it is completed by pressing
Clicking the Esc key on your keyboard, or by pressing
any two mouse buttons at the same time.
Many objects, including doors and windows,
cabinets, library symbols, terrain objects, When the Alternate edit behavior is
text, pictures and images are created by active, a continuous drawing behavior is
clicking. Select a tool or library object, or enabled, allowing you to click at the start and
import a custom symbol, picture or image, end points of line- and arc-based objects
then click in the drawing area to place the without dragging. See “Alternate” on page
object at that location. 87.
Continue clicking to place the selected object
until another tool is selected. To continuously draw by right-clicking
Clicking and Dragging 1. Select a tool that creates line- or arc-

based objects.
Other objects, including walls and railings, 2. Right-click, drag and release the mouse
straight stairs, and CAD and CAD-based button to draw the first object.
objects are created by clicking and dragging
to define either a path or an enclosed area. 3. Move the pointer to a different location
Select a tool, then click and drag in the and notice the drawing indicator that
90
Creating Objects
begins at the object’s endpoint and fol-

lows your pointer as it moves.
4. Click to create a second object begin-
ning at the first object’s starting point
and ending where you clicked.
5. Continue clicking to create additional
objects until another tool is selected, the
Esc key is pressed, or two mouse buttons
are pressed at the same time. • The Start Location, where you clicked
and began dragging, displays on the
Entering Coordinates right.
What’s New In Version X1 Training • On the left, specify the desired New
Video: Editing - Type-in Editing Location, or end point.
• Select Absolute to define the end point
Objects created by clicking and dragging can using absolute coordinates on the snap
also be drawn by entering coordinates. See grid, or:
“3D Drafting” on page 3.
• Select Relative to Start to define the
Coordinates can be either absolute or end point relative to the start point, as
Objects
Editing
relative. Absolute coordinates refer to a fixed though the start point was at (0,0).
point of origin at 0,0,0, while relative • Check Polar to define the end point of
coordinates treat the current location of the the new line by its Distance and Angle
selected object as the point of origin. from the start point rather than as X
and Y coordinates.
To use the Enter Coordinates dialog
CAD lines, arcs and points can also be
1. Select any tool that requires you to click created using the Input Line, Input Arc
and drag to create an object. and Input Point dialogs. See “Input Point”
on page 844, “Input Line” on page 847, or
2. Click and begin dragging to draw the “Input Arc” on page 857.
object.
3. Before you finish dragging and with the You can also move objects using the
mouse button pressed, press either the Enter Coordinates dialog. Click and
Tab or Enter key on your keyboard. drag the Move edit handle of an existing
object, then press the Tab key and proceed
4. In the Enter Coordinates dialog: with steps 3 and 4. See “Moving Objects” on
page 123.
Importing Objects
Pictures, images, drawings and custom
symbols can be imported into the program
and placed in the drawing area with a click.
91
See “Importing and Exporting” on page 907

and “Create Symbol Wizard” on page 925.
Selecting Objects
Classroom Design Project Training button or press the Space bar on your
Video: Selecting Objects with the Left keyboard to activate this tool.
or Right Mouse Button
You can also select objects or open context
“Select” refers to selecting an object for sensitive menus using the right mouse button
editing. An object must be selected before it when any tool is active. See “Using the
can be edited. Mouse” on page 4.
In order for an object to be selected, it must
be both unlocked and showing in the current Selecting Similar Objects
view. See “Displaying Objects” on page 221.
If a tool other than Select Objects is
When an object is selected, it displays edit active, you can only select objects of that
handles and may also display lines type using the left mouse button. For
representing its edges or surfaces. The size of
example, if the Exterior Wall tool is
the edit handles does not change as you zoom
active, you can only select walls using the
in or out and is set in the Preferences
left mouse button.
dialog. See “Edit Panel” on page 201. To
prevent them from stacking on one another, This can be useful for selecting an object
some edit handles may not display as you when many objects of a different type
zoom away from the selected object. occupy the same space in floor plan view.
When an object is selected, its edit toolbar Objects can be selected using the right mouse
also displays, typically at the bottom of the button, regardless of which tool is active.
Chief Architect program window just above
the status bar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on Selected Edge
page 7.
When you click a polyline or CAD-based
A selected object remains selected until object, the edge that you click nearest
another object is selected, a different tool is becomes the selected edge and displays an
activated, the Esc key on the keyboard is edit handle larger than those on other edges.
pressed, or any two mouse buttons are The handle on this edge may also display at
pressed at the same time. the point where you clicked to select it. See
“Using the Edit Handles” on page 108.
Select Objects
This edge can be edited on the Selected Line
With the exception of temporary CAD or Selected Arc tab of the object’s
points, any object can be selected using specification dialog, as well as using a
the Select Objects tool. Click this toolbar variety of edit toolbar buttons and the Move
92
Selecting Objects
Object Using Dimension dialog. See

“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
page 804.
Polyline segments maintain their connections

when Edit Object Parts is not selected
Sometimes a single wall or edge of a polyline

needs to be removed, breaking its connection
to adjacent segments.
When an object is drawn by clicking and

dragging, the start and end points of its
selected edge may be indicated by an S and
an E when the object is selected. See “Edit
Objects
Editing
Edit Object Parts
Polyline segments can be edited individually
Polylines objects are composed of lines when Edit Object Parts is selected
and arcs that are connected end to end.
The individual edges of open and closed Select Next Object
polylines can be selected and edited
independent of the object’s other edges when If there is more than one object in a
Edit Object Parts is enabled. particular space, it may be difficult to
select the desired object. When a
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit Object neighboring object is selected, click the
Parts to enable or disable polyline Select Next Object edit button until the
segments ability to be edited individually. desired object is selected. Pressing the Tab
key on the keyboard functions similarly. This
Edit Object Parts can also be turned on function cannot be applied to groups of
or off in the Preferences dialog. See selected objects.
“CAD Panel” on page 199.
Edit Object Parts also affects the

Marquee Select
connections between walls, railing and Multiple objects can be selected by holding
fences; but it is not available for CAD-based down either the Shift or Ctrl key when the
object such as slabs and roof planes.
Select Objects tool is active and
93
dragging a marquee around the objects to be More than one type of object can be selected
selected. using this method, but the ability to edit the
group-selected items are limited to
You can specify whether objects must be
characteristics that all selected objects have
totally contained in or intersected by the
in common.
marquee, or whether an object’s center point
must be contained in the marquee, in the To remove an object from a selection set,
Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on click it once more - again, with either the
page 201. Shift or Ctrl key pressed.
If an object is currently selected and a
selection marquee is drawn around it, that Select All
object becomes de-selected. If an object is Select Edit> Select All to select all objects
currently selected and a marquee is drawn drawn on the current floor, in the current
around other objects, the original object cross section/elevation view or CAD Detail
remains selected and the other objects are window, or on the current layout page.
added to the selection set.
When using the marquee-select method, both Edit Area Tools
CAD and architectural objects included in The Edit Area Tools allow you to
the marquee are selected. To remove an define an area of your plan and select
object from the selection set, hold down the the objects within that area for editing. See
Shift key and click it. “Edit Area Tools” on page 153.
The marquee-select method can also be used
to group-select similar object types. For Using a Fence
example, select the Base Cabinet child The Fence Select edit tool allows you
button, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl key, to group-select multiple CAD and
drag a marquee, release the mouse button, CAD-based objects in contact with the
and only cabinet objects within the marquee selected CAD line, arc, polyline or spline.
are selected.
Using a Fence to make a group-selection can
To make marquee selection easier, turn be helpful in a number of situations, for
off the display of objects you do not example:
want to include in your selection set. See • When many CAD objects must be
“Displaying Objects” on page 221. selected, particularly when they occupy
the same area.
Shift Select • When a selection marquee would be the
You can select a group of objects by adding wrong shape or include too many objects.
them to the selection set one by one. Select • When a selection group needs to be
an object, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl selected more than once.
key, and click additional objects to select
them.
94
Editing Line Based Objects
3. The originally selected object serves as a

The Fence Select edit tool cannot be
fence to select the objects it touches,
used to select architectural objects - only
while becoming deselected itself.
CAD and CAD-based objects. See
“Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page 80. 4. You can hold either the Shift or Ctrl key
and click objects to add or remove them
Fences are often used with the Trim Objects from the selection set.
and Extend Objects edit tools. See
“Trim and Extend” on page 142. You can keep all fences on their own
custom layer and turn off their display
when not needed. See “Layers” on page 215.
To Fence Select a group of objects
1. Draw a CAD line, arc, open polyline, Select Same Type

closed polyline or spline that crosses or Rooms, cabinets, windows and doors
touches all the objects you wish to on the current floor can be located
group-select. selected based on a set of attributes that you
specify using the Select Same Type edit tool.
2. Click the Fence Select edit button.
See “Select Same / Load Same” on page 152.
Objects
Editing
Objects are considered line-based when they page 309 and “Editing Windows” on page
can be edited similar to CAD lines using 336.
their edit handles.
CAD lines, framing members, straight walls
and railings, straight stairs, and straight roads
are examples of line-based objects.
Most line-based objects can be connected to
other like objects to form polylines or
polyline-based objects.
Some objects, notably walls and framing
members, have line-based editing behavior
only when selected on certain edges. See
“Editing Walls” on page 242.
Wall openings such as doors and windows
have line-based editing behavior in floor plan
view only but cannot be rotated, reversed or Other objects, such as stairs and roads, edit
converted to an arc. See “Editing Doors” on similar to CAD lines and can be connected to
form polyline-based objects but also have
95
additional edit handles that CAD lines do • Drag an end handle at an angle to the
not. selected line to change its angle. When
Angle Snaps are on, the line snaps to
Using the Edit Handles Allowed Angles.
When selected, a typical line-based object • Right-click and drag it to change the
displays four edit handles. adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
Any action performed using the edit handles See “Alternate” on page 87.
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or Adjust Width
Some line-based objects, such as stairs and
The behavior of the edit handles may
roads, have additional handles that allow the
depend on the currently active Edit width of the object to be adjusted.
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
Extend/Change Angle
Adjust Width
Move Rotate
Move • Click and drag a small, round Expand

handle to increase or decrease the
• Click and drag the Move handle to move
object’s width. By default, objects are
the object according to the currently
resized in 1" increments. This Snap Unit
active Edit Behavior . See “Edit is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Behaviors” on page 86. See “Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 181.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move Using Dimensions
restrictions can be overridden by holding Dimensions can be used to position
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See line-based objects relative to other
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 124. objects. See “Moving Objects Using
Rotate Dimensions” on page 804.
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object, either about its center or about the Using Extension Line Snaps
current CAD point. See “Rotating Extension line snaps can be useful when
Objects” on page 133. editing line-based objects. See “Extension
Extend/Change Angle Snaps” on page 83.
• Drag an end handle parallel to the
selected line to change its length.
96
Using the • Click the Transform/Replicate Object

Specification Dialog edit button to copy, move, rotate,
resize, or reflect the selected object(s).
Line-based objects can be edited using their
See “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog”
specification dialogs. See “Line
on page 144.
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button
Using the Edit Toolbar to make a series of copies at set intervals.
A selected line-based object can be edited in See “Multiple Copy” on page 139.
a variety of ways using the buttons on the • Click the Accurate Move edit button
edit toolbar. to slow down the mouse speed when
The following toolbar buttons may display using the edit handles. See “Accurate
on the edit toolbar for a selected line-based Move” on page 125.
object: • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
• Click the Select Next Object edit edit button to make the selected
button to select nearby objects instead of object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a
the selected object. See “Selecting straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
Objects” on page 92. Perpendicular” on page 126.
Objects
Editing
• Click the Open Object edit button to • Click the Point to Point Move edit
open the specification dialog for the button to accurately move the selected
selected object(s). See “Specification object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
Dialogs” on page 8. page 125.
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to • Click the Center Object edit button
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- to center an object along the edge of a
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted room or on a sink. See “Center Object”
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting on page 127.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place button to reflect the selected object(s)
edit button to create a copy of the about another object. See “Reflecting
selected object(s) at the same location as Objects” on page 135.
the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Place” on page 138. • Click the Move to Front of Group
edit button to display the selected object
• Click the Delete edit button to delete in front of other objects in the same
the selected object(s). See “Deleting drawing group. See “Move to Front of
Objects” on page 141. Group” on page 122.
97
• Click the Break Line edit button to • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
add a new corner or pivot point to the ton, then click an edge adjacent to the
selected object. See “Break Line” on selected edge to fillet the corner between
page 130. them or to join two lines. See “Fillet Two
Lines” on page 131.
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
ton to reverse the direction of the selected • Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on button, then click an edge adjacent to the
page 136. selected edge to chamfer the corner
between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
on page 132.
ton to convert the object into a special
polyline-based object. See “Convert • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Polyline” on page 149. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
intersect the selected object. See “Trim
• Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
and Extend” on page 142.
ton to change a line-based object to an
arc, or vice versa. See “Change Line/ • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
Arc” on page 131. to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
sected by the selected object. See “Trim
• Click the Fence Select edit button to
use the selected object(s) as a selection
fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 94.
Editing Arc Based Objects

Objects are considered arc-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD arcs using their
edit handles.
CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved
stairs, and curved roads are examples of arc-
based objects.
Most arc-based objects can be connected to
other like objects to form polylines or
polyline-based objects.
Some objects, notably curved walls, have
arc-based editing behavior only when
selected on certain edges. See “Editing
98
Other objects, such as curved stairs and One is located at the center of the chord
roads, edit similar to CAD arcs and can be and the other, at the arc center.
connected to form polyline-based objects but • If you would like to snap one of these
also have additional edit handles that CAD center points to another point, use that
lines do not. handle when moving the arc. See “Align-
ing Arc Centers” on page 128.
The currently active Arc Creation Mode
determines how an arc-based object is • Click and drag the Move handle to move
drawn. Once an arc is drawn, the active Arc the object according the currently active
Creation Mode does not affect it. See Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
“Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on on page 86.
page 855.
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
Using the Edit Handles restrictions can be overridden by holding
When selected, a typical arc-based object down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
displays seven edit handles. “Unrestricted Movement” on page 124.
Any action performed using the edit handles

can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
Objects
Editing
depend on the currently active Edit
Move edit handle
Rotate
Resize Reshape
(changes radius) • The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
(moves center) arc, either about its center or about the
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Move
Chord
Extend
Rotate • The end edit handles expand or contract
the arc when moved along the arc radius
or chord.
Extend Move Arc • If you follow the path of the arc, the end
(along arc or chord) Center
edit handles allow you to adjust the arc
Move length.
• Two Move edit handles allow the arc to • The angle formed by the center point of
be relocated without changing its shape. the arc and its two endpoints is referred to
as the Included Angle. If Angle Snaps
99
• If the object has a locked center, the

are on, the included angle of the arc,
Reshape edit handle does not display.
as measured in degrees, jumps at incre-
See “Using Lock Center” on page 102.
ments set in the Plan Defaults dialog.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 84. Adjust Width
• Right-click and drag it to change the Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and
adjacent arc into a line, or vice versa. See roads, have additional handles that allow the
“Alternate” on page 87. width of the object to be adjusted.
Extend edit handles
Resize Adjust Width
• Drag the small, round Resize edit handle • Click and drag a small, round edit handle
to change the radius and included angle to increase or decrease the object’s width.
of the arc while maintaining its center. By default, objects are resized according
to the Snap Unit defined in the Plan
Defaults dialog. See “Plan Defaults
Using Dimensions
Resize edit handle
Dimensions can be used to position
Reshape arc-based objects. Dimension lines
typically locate tangent extension lines and
• Drag the small triangular Reshape any extension lines that may be parallel to
handle to change the length and location those lines rather than the arc itself. See
of the center without moving the “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
endpoints. page 804 and “Extension Snaps” on page 83.
Using Extension Line Snaps

Extension line snaps can be useful when
editing arc-based objects. See “Extension
Snaps” on page 83.
Reshape edit handle
100
Using the • Click the Transform/Replicate Object

Specification Dialog edit button to copy, move, rotate,
Arc-based objects can be edited using their
specification dialogs. See “Arc Specification
on page 144.
Using the Edit Toolbar to make a series of copies at set intervals.
A selected arc-based object can be edited in a See “Multiple Copy” on page 139.
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit • Click the Accurate Move edit button
toolbar. to slow down the mouse speed when
The following toolbar buttons may display using the edit handles. See “Accurate
on the edit toolbar for a selected arc-based Move” on page 125.
object:
• Click the Point to Point Move edit
• Click the Select Next Object edit button to accurately move the selected
button to select nearby objects instead of object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
the selected object. See “Selecting page 125.
Objects
Editing
• Click the Center Object edit button
• Click the Open Object edit button to to center an object along the edge of a
open the specification dialog for the room or on a sink. See “Center Object”
selected object(s). See “Specification on page 127.
Dialogs” on page 8.
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to button to reflect the selected object(s)
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- about another object. See “Reflecting
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted Objects” on page 135.
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting
Objects” on page 136. • Click the Move to Front of Group
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place in front of other objects in the same
edit button to create a copy of the drawing group. See “Move to Front of
selected object(s) at the same location as Group” on page 122.
Place” on page 138. • Click the Break Line edit button to
add a new corner or pivot point to the
• Click the Delete edit button to delete selected object. See “Break Line” on
the selected object(s). See “Deleting page 130.
ton to reverse the direction of the selected
101
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on selected edge to chamfer the corner

page 136. between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
on page 132.
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
ton to convert the object into a special • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
polyline-based object. See “Convert ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
Polyline” on page 149. intersect the selected object. See “Trim
ton to change an arc-based object to a • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
line, or vice versa. See “Change Line/ to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
Arc” on page 131. sected by the selected object. See “Trim
• Click the Convert Arc/Circle to Poly- and Extend” on page 142.
line edit button to convert the Show Arc Centers

selected arc into a polyline. See “Convert
Arc/Circle to Polyline” on page 132. When working with arc-based objects
or circles, it can be helpful to see their
• Click the Lock Center edit button to center points. Click the Show Arc Centers
lock the selected arc-based object’s cen- and Ends toggle button on the utility toolbar
ter. See “Using Lock Center” on page to turn on their display. You can also turn on
102. their display in the CAD Defaults dialog.
See “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 878.
• Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
button to adjust the arc and attached Arc-based objects can be aligned using their
line(s) so they transition smoothly. See center points. See “Aligning Arc Centers” on
“Using Make Arc Tangent” on page 128. page 128.
Only available when a selected arc is
attached on one or both ends to another Using Lock Center
line or arc.
Click the Lock Center edit button to
• Click the Fence Select edit button to lock or unlock the selected arc-based
use the selected object(s) as a selection object’s center. When an arc’s center is
fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 94. locked, it cannot be moved except by using
one of its Move edit handles or when the
• Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
Alternate edit behavior is enabled.
ton, then click an edge adjacent to the
selected edge to fillet the corner between An arc-based object with a locked center
them or to join two lines. See “Fillet Two lengthens and shortens along its curve when
Lines” on page 131. it is resized. When this is not possible, its
radius changes. In either case, its center
• Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit remains locked in the same place.
button, then click an edge adjacent to the
102
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
Locked-center arcs do not display a Reshape

edit handle when selected. See “Using the
Edit Handles” on page 99.
When it is part of a polyline, a locked-center
arc resizes along its arc rather than its chord
when an adjacent line or arc is moved. Thus,
the radius remains constant for an unlocked
center arc, while the center does not change Unlocked center Locked center
for a locked-center arc.

Classroom Design Project Training Some objects, such as roads, edit similar to
Video: Editing CAD Polylines open CAD polylines and can be connected to
form polyline-based objects but also have
Open polyline-based objects are composed
additional edit handles that CAD lines and
of individual line- and arc-based objects that
arcs do not.
are connected at their end points.
Objects
If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking
Editing
Objects are considered open polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to open CAD on a CAD polyline edge selecst the indi-
polylines using their edit handles. vidual edge rather than the entire polyline.
See “Edit Object Parts” on page 93.
Open CAD polylines, connected walls,
stairs, and roads and sidewalks are examples Using the Edit Handles
of open polyline-based objects.
A polyline can be composed of many
segments. See “Polylines” on page 863.
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
handle, a Reshape handle at the intersection
of each segment, and an Extend handle at
each end.
Each straight, line-based segment has a
Move edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc
Based Objects” on page 98.
103
When a polyline is selected, the edge that current CAD point. Its position varies
you click nearest is called the selected edge, depending on which edge is currently
and certain operations affect only this edge. selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page
The Move handle of the selected edge is 133.
larger than that of other edges. It displays Extend
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See • Click and drag an Extend handle to
“Selected Edge” on page 92. lengthen or shorten the unconnected end
of the selected line or arc segment, or to
Any action performed using the edit handles change the radius of the selected arc. See
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or “Editing Arc Based Objects” on page 98.
• Right-click and drag it to change the
The behavior of the edit handles may adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
depend on the currently active Edit See “Alternate” on page 87.
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86. Reshape
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Move arc change the angle and/or length of the seg-
Move
segment Resize ments on either side of it, or the size of
polyline
arc the object, depending on the currently
Move line
segment active Edit Behavior .
Reshape
arc Move Line Segment
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is
Extend found on straight segments of closed
Reshape Rotate polylines and moves the straight section
polyline according to the currently active Edit
Move Behavior . Adjacent segments may
• Click and drag the Move handle to move extend or contract in their original direc-
the object according the currently active tions to maintain their connections.
Edit Behavior . Move Arc
• Movement may be limited or stopped by • Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move to change the radius and/or chord length
restrictions can be overridden by holding or position, depending on the currently
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See active Edit Behavior and whether
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 124. the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
Rotate ments may extend, contract, or change
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the angle to maintain their connections.
object, either about its center or about the Resize Arc
104
• Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle Using Extension Line Snaps
to change the radius, chord length and
chord position of the arc segment, Extension line snaps, especially tangent
depending on the currently active Edit snaps, can be useful when editing polyline
vertices. See “Extension Snaps” on page 83.
Behavior and whether the arc has a
locked center. Adjacent segments may Using the
extend, contract, or change angle to
maintain their connections.
Specification Dialog
Reshape Arc Polyline-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See “Polyline
• Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han- Specification Dialog” on page 863.
dle to change the radius of the arc without
moving its end points. Only available if
Using the Edit Toolbar
the arc has an unlocked center.
Adjust Width A selected open polyline-based object can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and on the edit toolbar.
roads, have additional handles that allow the
width of the object to be adjusted. The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for a selected open
Objects
Editing
Adjust polyline-based object:
Width
• Click the Select Next Object edit
button to select nearby objects instead of
the selected object. See “Selecting
• Click the Open Object edit button to

• Click and drag a small, round edit handle open the specification dialog for the
to increase or decrease the object’s width. selected object(s). See “Specification
By default, objects are resized in 1" Dialogs” on page 8.
increments. This Snap Unit is defined in
the Plan Defaults dialog. See “Plan • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
Defaults Dialog” on page 181. copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
Using Dimensions elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting
Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape polyline-based objects. See • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on edit button to create a copy of the
page 804. selected object(s) at the same location as
Place” on page 138.
105
• Click the Delete edit button to delete about another object. See “Reflecting
the selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on page 135.
• Click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button to display the selected object
edit button to copy, move, rotate, in front of other objects in the same
resize, or reflect the selected object(s). drawing group. See “Move to Front of
See “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” Group” on page 122.
on page 144. • Click the Break Line edit button to
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button add a new corner or pivot point to the
to make a series of copies at set intervals. selected object. See “Break Line” on
See “Multiple Copy” on page 139. page 130.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button • Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
to slow down the mouse speed when ton to reverse the direction of the selected
using the edit handles. See “Accurate object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
Move” on page 125. page 136.
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
edit button to make the selected ton to convert the object into a special
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to polyline-based object. See “Convert
another straight edge. See “Using Make Polyline” on page 149.
Parallel/ Perpendicular” on page 126. Not • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
available when the selected edge is an ton to change a line-based object to an
arc. arc, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
Arc” on page 131.
button to accurately move the selected • Click the Convert Arc/Circle to Poly-
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on line edit button to convert the
page 125. selected arc into a polyline. See “Convert
Arc/Circle to Polyline” on page 132.
• Click the Add to Library edit button
Only available when the selected edge is
to add the selected object(s) to the library.
an arc.
See “Adding a New Object” on page 675.
• Click the Lock Center edit button to
• Click the Center Object edit button lock the center of the selected curved
to center an object along the edge of a edge. See “Using Lock Center” on page
room or on a sink. See “Center Object” 102. Only available when the selected
on page 127. edge is an arc.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
button to reflect the selected object(s) button to adjust the selected curved edge
106
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
and adjacent edge(s) so they form a

• Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
smooth shape. See “Using Make Arc
button, then click an edge adjacent to the
Tangent” on page 128. Only available
selected edge to chamfer the corner
when the selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Fence Select edit button to on page 132.
• Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but- intersect the selected object. See “Trim
ton, then click an edge adjacent to the and Extend” on page 142.
selected edge to fillet the corner between
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
them or to join two lines. See “Fillet Two
to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
Lines” on page 131. Only available when
the selected edge is a line.

Objects
Editing
Video: Editing CAD Polylines
Objects are considered closed polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to closed
CAD polylines using their edit handles.
In addition, closed polyline-based objects are
composed of individual line- and arc-based
objects.
Closed CAD polylines, slabs and roof planes
are examples of closed polyline-based
objects.
Some objects, notably walls, have closed
polyline-based editing behavior only when
they are selected on certain edges in 3D
views. See “Editing Walls” on page 242.
CAD-based objects such as slabs, roof planes
and countertops can be edited in both 2D and
3D views.
107
If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking Move arc Rotate

on a polyline edge selects the individual segment
edge rather than the entire polyline. See Move Resize
“Edit Object Parts” on page 93. polyline arc
Reshape
Using the Edit Handles arc
A polyline can be composed of many

Reshape Move line
segments. See “Polylines” on page 863. segment
polyline
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate Move
handle, and a Reshape handle at the • Click and drag the Move handle to move
intersection of each segment. the object according the currently active
Each straight, line-based segment has a Edit Behavior .
Move edit handle along its length. • Movement may be limited or stopped by
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
Move handle at the center of its chord, a restrictions can be overridden by holding
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc “Unrestricted Movement” on page 124.
Based Objects” on page 98. Rotate
When a polyline is selected, the edge that • The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
you click nearest is called the selected edge, object, either about its center or about the
and certain operations affect only this edge. current CAD point. Its position varies
The Move handle of the selected edge is depending on which edge is currently
larger than that of other edges. It displays selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page
along the length of a line segment, or at the 133.
center of the chord on an arc segment. See Reshape
“Selected Edge” on page 92.
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Any action performed using the edit handles change the angle and/or length of the seg-
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or ments on either side of it, or the size of
any two mouse buttons at the same time. the object, depending on the currently
The behavior of the edit handles may active Edit Behavior .

depend on the currently active Edit Move Line Segment
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is
found on straight segments of closed
polylines and moves the straight section
according to the currently active Edit
108
Behavior . Adjacent segments may Using the

extend or contract in their original direc- Specification Dialog
tions to maintain their connections.
Closed polyline-based objects can be edited
Move Arc using their specification dialogs. See
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle “Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 863.
to change the radius and/or chord length
or position, depending on the currently Using the Edit Toolbar
active Edit Behavior and whether A selected closed polyline-based object can
the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg- be edited in a variety of ways using the
ments may extend, contract, or change buttons on the edit toolbar.
angle to maintain their connections.
The following toolbar buttons may display
Resize Arc on the edit toolbar for a selected closed
• Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle polyline-based object:
to change the radius, chord length and
chord position of the arc segment,
depending on the currently active Edit
the selected object. See “Selecting
Behavior and whether the arc has a Objects” on page 92.
Objects
Editing
locked center. Adjacent segments may
extend, contract, or change angle to • Click the Open Object edit button to
maintain their connections. open the specification dialog for the
selected object(s). See “Specification
Reshape Arc Dialogs” on page 8.
• Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
dle to change the radius of the arc without • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
moving its end points. Only available if copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
the arc has an unlocked center. dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
Using Dimensions Objects” on page 136.
Dimensions can be used to move or • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
reshape closed polyline-based objects. edit button to create a copy of the
See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on selected object(s) at the same location as
page 804. the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Using Extension Line Snaps • Click the Delete edit button to delete
Extension line snaps, especially tangent the selected object(s). See “Deleting
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline Objects” on page 141.
vertices. See “Extension Snaps” on page 83.
109
• Click the Transform/Replicate Object • Click the Move to Front of Group

edit button to copy, move, rotate, edit button to display the selected object
resize, or reflect the selected object(s). in front of other objects in the same
See “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” drawing group. See “Move to Front of
on page 144. Group” on page 122.
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button • Click the Break Line edit button to
to make a series of copies at set intervals. add a new corner or pivot point to the
See “Multiple Copy” on page 139. selected object. See “Break Line” on
page 130.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button
to slow down the mouse speed when • Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
using the edit handles. See “Accurate ton to reverse the direction of the selected
Move” on page 125. object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular page 136.
edit button to make the selected • Click the Union edit button to join
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to two or more objects. See “Union, Inter-
another straight edge by either rotating section, and Subtract” on page 146.
the selected edge or the entire polyline.
See “Using Make Parallel/ Perpendicu- • Click the Intersection edit button to
lar” on page 126. Not available when the create a new object defined by the areas
selected edge is an arc. shared by the original objects. See
“Union, Intersection, and Subtract” on
• Click the Point to Point Move edit page 146.
button to accurately move the selected
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on • Click the Subtract edit button, then
page 125. click a second object to remove the area
shared by both objects. See “Union,
• Click the Add to Library edit button Intersection, and Subtract” on page 146.
to add the selected object(s) to the library.
See “Adding a New Object” on page 675. • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Center Object edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to center an object along the edge of a Polyline” on page 149.
room or on a sink. See “Center Object”
on page 127.
ton to change a line-based object to an
• Click the Reflect About Object edit arc, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
button to reflect the selected object(s) Arc” on page 131.
about another object. See “Reflecting • Click the Convert Arc/Circle to Poly-
line edit button to convert the
110
Editing Box-Based Objects
selected arc into a polyline. See “Convert

• Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
Arc/Circle to Polyline” on page 132.
ton, then click an edge adjacent to the
Only available when the selected edge is
selected edge to fillet the corner between
an arc.
them. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page
• Click the Lock Center edit button to 131. Only available when the selected
lock the center of the selected curved edge is a line.
edge. See “Using Lock Center” on page
102. Only available when the selected
ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
edge is an arc.
• Click the Make Arc Tangent edit and Extend” on page 142.
button to adjust the selected curved edge
and adjacent edge(s) so they form a
smooth shape. See “Using Make Arc
Tangent” on page 128. Only available
when the selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Fence Select edit button to • Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
use the selected object(s) as a selection button, then click an edge adjacent to the
selected edge to chamfer the corner
Objects
Editing
on page 132.

Objects are considered box-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD boxes using
their edit handles.
In addition to the CAD Box tools, text
objects, framing members in cross section,
many library symbols, CAD blocks, pictures
and images, are box-based objects.
111
Using the Edit Handles • The four Resize handles located at each
corner are used to increase or decrease
When selected, a box-based object displays the size of the object.
ten edit handles. Unlike polylines, boxes
must always have four sides with right-
angled corners.
Any action performed using the edit handles

• The four Extend handles display along
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86. each edge. If you select an object on an
edge, the Extend handle displays at the
point where you clicked; otherwise, it
Extend Move displays at the center of the edge.
Resize
Rotate
• The triangular Rotate handle located
near the selected edge of the object is
• Click and drag the Move handle to move used to rotate it either about its center or
the object according the currently active the current CAD point. The pointer
Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” changes to a circular arrow when
on page 86. moved over this handle. See “Rotate/
• Movement may be limited or stopped by Resize About” on page 81.
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 124.
112
Using Dimensions • Click the Delete edit button to delete

Dimensions can be used to reshape the selected object(s). See “Deleting
box-based objects. See “Moving Objects” on page 141.
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 804. • Click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button to copy, move, rotate,
Using the resize, or reflect the selected object(s).
Specification Dialog See “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog”
Box-based objects can be edited using their on page 144.
specification dialogs. See “CAD Box • Click the Multiple Copy edit button
Specification Dialog” on page 867. to make a series of copies at set intervals.
See “Multiple Copy” on page 139.
A selected closed polyline-based object can
to slow down the mouse speed when
be edited in a variety of ways using the
using the edit handles. See “Accurate
buttons on the edit toolbar.
The following toolbar buttons may display • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed
Objects
Editing
polyline-based object: edit button to make the selected
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
• Click the Select Next Object edit another straight edge. See “Using Make
button to select nearby objects instead of Parallel/ Perpendicular” on page 126. Not
the selected object. See “Selecting available when the selected edge is an
Objects” on page 92. arc.
113
• Click the Move to Front of Group • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
edit button to display the selected object ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
in front of other objects in the same intersect the selected object. See “Trim
drawing group. See “Move to Front of and Extend” on page 142.
Group” on page 122.
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
ton to convert the object into a special sected by the selected object. See “Trim
polyline-based object. See “Convert and Extend” on page 142.
Polyline” on page 149.
Editing Spline Based Objects

Objects are considered spline-based when Any action performed using the edit handles
they can be edited similar to CAD splines can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
using their edit handles. See “Splines” on any two mouse buttons at the same time.
page 868.
Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline depend on the currently active Edit
terrain walls and round or kidney-shaped Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
terrain features are spline-based.
Reshape
Move
Resize
Rotate
Move
Using the Edit Handles the object according the currently active
When a spline is selected, several different Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
types of handles display. How many handles on page 86.
display depends on whether the Advanced
Splines edit button is on or not. See other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
“Advanced Splines” on page 117. restrictions can be overridden by holding
114
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See Additional edit handles, called Control
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 124. Handles, display beside each spline vertex
Rotate when Advanced Splines is enabled. See
• Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to “Advanced Splines” on page 117.
rotate the entire spline.
Control
Reshape Handles
• The Reshape edit handles display along
the spline at each vertex. Click and drag a
Reshape edit handle to change the length,
angle and curve of adjacent segments
without affecting other reshape handles.
Tangent lines
through the vertex
• Click and drag a round Control edit han-
dle to change the angle of the associated
tangent line.
Objects
Editing
Resize
• The Resize edit handles display along the
spline, between each vertex. Click and
drag a Resize edit handle to move the
adjacent vertices and lengthen or shorten • If two tangent lines pass through a vertex,
adjacent segments. the angle between them remains constant
as long as Lock Control Handle Angle
is enabled. See “Lock Control
Handle Angle” on page 118.

A selected spline-based object can be edited
in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar.
Advanced Splines
115
The following toolbar buttons may display • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
on the edit toolbar for a selected spline-based edit button to make the selected
object: straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to • Click the Add to Library edit button
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- to add the selected object(s) to the library.
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted See “Adding a New Object” on page 675.
Objects” on page 136. • Click the Center Object edit button
to center an object along the edge of a
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place room or on a sink. See “Center Object”
edit button to create a copy of the on page 127.
selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See “Copy and Paste in • Click the Reflect About Object edit
Place” on page 138. button to reflect the selected object(s)
about another object. See “Reflecting
• Click the Delete edit button to delete Objects” on page 135.
the selected object(s). See “Deleting
• Click the Transform/Replicate Object in front of other objects in the same
edit button to copy, move, rotate, drawing group. See “Move to Front of
resize, or reflect the selected object(s). Group” on page 122.
on page 144. • Click the Break Line edit button to
add a new corner or pivot point to the
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button selected object. See “Break Line” on
to make a series of copies at set intervals. page 130.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button ton to reverse the direction of the selected
to slow down the mouse speed when object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
using the edit handles. See “Accurate page 136.
116
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- Advanced Splines

ton to convert the object into a special Click the Advanced Splines edit
polyline-based object. See “Convert button to display additional edit
Polyline” on page 149. handles called Control Handles. These edit
handles allow you to reshape the spline with
• Click the Fence Select edit button to
more control at each vertex.
fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 94. Tangent line
• Click the Convert Spline to Polyline
edit button to convert the selected spline Vertex Control
into a polyline. See “Convert to Spline” Handles
on page 152.
• Click the Straighten Spline Segment The line between the vertex and the control
handles defines the tangent to the spline
edit button to straighten a segment of through the vertex.
an advanced spline. See “Straighten
• Move the control handles at the end of
Spline Segment” on page 118. Only
the line to change the direction of the
available when Advanced Splines is
spline at that point. The spline curves
turned on.
away from its tangent direction at the ver-
Objects
Editing
• Click the Extend Object(s) edit but- tex on its way to the next vertex.
ton to lengthen other object(s) until they • Change the shape of the spline by click-
intersect the selected object. See “Trim ing and dragging the control handles.

Control handle Result
• Click the Advanced Splines edit but-
ton to turn on advanced splines for the Notice that the control handles on either side
selected spline. See “Advanced Splines” of a vertex maintain their relationship to each
on page 117. other in a straight line. When one is moved,
• Click the Lock Control Handle Angle the other moves to keep the tangent line
tangent with the vertex.
edit button to maintain the relative
angle between the vertex and its control You can specify all subsequently drawn
handles. See “Lock Control Handle splines to be Advanced Splines in the
Angle” on page 118. Only available when Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel” on
Advanced Splines is turned on. page 199.
117
Lock Control Handle Angle Straighten Spline Segment

The Lock Control Handle Angle edit The Straighten Spline Segment edit
button is available when Advanced button is used to straighten a segment
Splines is enabled, and is turned on by of an advanced spline between two vertex
default, as well. This tool maintains the points.
relative angle between the vertex and its
To use, first select the spline. Click the
control handles.
Straighten Spline Segment edit button,
Click the Lock Control Handle Angle then click the spline between two vertices.
edit button to free the control of the relative That portion become straight.
edit angles between the vertex and its control
handles. The control handles can now be
adjusted individually. The opposite handle
remains unaffected by the change. Notice
that the spline adjusts so that it is tangent to
the lines between the vertex and both of its
control handles.
Click a spline segment Result
If you reselect the spline, you see that the

two control handles point toward the straight
section from each vertex point on either end
of the straight section.
Notice that the control handles are not colinear
Result
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

Objects created using the Circle Tools objects share their functionalities.
are unusual in that no architectural
118
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
Using the Edit Handles • Click and drag the Rotate handle of an
oval or ellipse to change its orientation.
When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses
display ten edit handles.
Unlike Ovals and Ellipses , a Circle

can cannot be edited into any other
shapes; it can only be a circle. A Circle
can be converted into a polyline. See “Con-
vert Arc/Circle to Polyline” on page 132.
Any action performed using the edit handles Reshape
• The eight edit handles beyond the perim-
eter are Reshape edit handles. Move them
in or out to resize and reshape an oval or
depend on the currently active Edit ellipse.
Objects
Editing
Reshape
Move
Concentric
Resize
• Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot

Rotate be reshaped. When a Reshape handle is
dragged on a circle, it is only resized.
Move
the object according the currently active
Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
on page 86.
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See Concentric Resize
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 124. • The Concentric Resize edit handle dis-
Rotate plays on the perimeter of a circle between
a corner Reshape handle and the center.
119
Click and drag this handle to resize the • Click the Delete edit button to delete
circle without moving its center point. the selected object(s). See “Deleting
• Click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button to copy, move, rotate,
on page 144.

to make a series of copies at set intervals.
A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be • Click the Accurate Move edit button
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons to slow down the mouse speed when
on the edit toolbar. using the edit handles. See “Accurate
The following toolbar buttons may display
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
on the edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval
or ellipse: edit button to make the selected
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
120
Architectural and CAD Blocks
• Click the Move to Front of Group • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
edit button to display the selected object ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
in front of other objects in the same intersect the selected object. See “Trim
drawing group. See “Move to Front of and Extend” on page 142. Not available
Group” on page 122. for ellipses.
• Click the Convert Arc/Circle to Poly- • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
line edit button to convert the to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
selected circle into a polyline. See “Con- sected by the selected object. See “Trim
vert Arc/Circle to Polyline” on page 132. and Extend” on page 142. Not available
Not available for ovals or ellipses. for ellipses.
Architectural and CAD Blocks

An architectural block is a group of objects The Explode CAD Block edit button
joined together so that they behave as a breaks a CAD block into its individual
single object. When an architectural block is components.
created, it behaves as a single object while
the components retain their own attributes. Add to Library
Objects
Editing
See “Architectural Blocks” on page 663.
Architectural and CAD blocks can be
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that added to the library by clicking the
have been joined together so that they behave Add to Library edit button. See “To add an
as a single object. Architectural objects object to the library” on page 676.
cannot be included in a CAD block. See
“CAD Blocks” on page 870. Replace From Library
Both architectural and CAD blocks can be An architectural or CAD block can be
added to the library for use in other plans. replaced by another object from the
library by clicking the Replace from
Blocking Objects Library edit button. An architectural block
Architectural objects can be group- can be replaced by an architectural object or
selected and blocked together using the block, while a CAD block can be replaced by
Make Architectural Block edit button. another CAD block. See “Replace From
The Explode Architectural Block edit
button breaks an architectural block
into its individual components.
CAD objects can be group-selected and
blocked together using the Make CAD
Block edit button.
121
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in 2D and 3D views With the exception of imported pictures,
can be controlled by layer. See “Displaying when an object is first created, it is placed in
Objects” on page 221. the Default Group. Objects in this group
display in front of or behind one another
Line style, color and weight can be
according to program-defined rules that
controlled by layer or overridden in the
cannot be modified.
specification dialogs for many objects. See
“Line Style Tab” on page 851. Once a CAD or CAD-based object is created,
though, you can control how it displays
In addition, many objects have a fill style
relative to other objects using its
that is initially based on default settings and
specification dialog. See “Line Style Tab” on
can be overridden in the objects’
page 851.
specification dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
page 864. For example, you can move an object to the
Back Group or Front Group so that it
The display of color on-screen can be
displays behind or in front of objects in the
toggled on and off in all views except render
other drawing groups.
views. See “Color On/Off” on page 743.
You can also check Move to Front of
The display of arc center- and endpoints, and
Group, which displays the object in front of
the display of circle center points can be
other objects in its drawing group, but not
enabled by clicking the Show Arc Centers
necessarily in front of objects in other
and Ends toggle button or in the CAD groups.
Defaults dialog. See “CAD Defaults
Dialog” on page 878. An object moved to the front of the Default
Group, for example, displays in front of
objects in that group and those in the Back
Drawing Groups Group, but still displays behind objects in the
Each object in a plan or layout file belongs to Front Group.
one of three drawing groups, which
influences whether it displays in front of or Move to Front of Group
behind other objects.
Click the Move to Front of Group
• The Default Group is where most edit button to move the selected
objects are placed when first created. object(s) so that it displays in front of other
• Objects moved to the Back Group dis- objects in the same drawing group. Move to
play behind those in the other two draw- Front of Group functions like the checkbox
ing groups. of the same name in the object’s specification
• Objects moved to the Front Group dis- dialog.
play in front of those in the other two
drawing groups.
122
Moving Objects
Patterns and Textures

The appearance of architectural objects in 3D
views is affected by the materials applied to
the objects’ surfaces. Material patterns
display in Vector Views, while textures
display in Render Views. See “Materials” on
page 703.
Delete Surface
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Move to Front of Group is useful for Surface, then click a surface in the
creating a sense of depth or to improve a view to temporarily remove the surface from
drawing’s clarity. For example, you can the current view. See “Delete 3D Surface” on
move a solid circle representing rebar to the page 747.
front of a foundation wall with a concrete fill
pattern in a cross section so that the rebar is
not masked by the wall’s fill pattern.
Objects
Editing
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved individually and in As an object is moved, it jumps at set
groups using a variety of methods. increments when Grid Snaps are
enabled. See “Grid Snaps” on page 85.
Using the Edit Handles
Select an object, then click the Move edit When Object Snaps are enabled, a
handle and drag it to a new location. When selected object snaps to its original location
your pointer is over the Move handle, it if it passes over that location while being
displays a four-headed arrow. moved.
The behavior of the Move edit handle varies
depending on the currently active Edit
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
86.
• If the Default , Resize , Concen-

tric or Fillet edit behavior is
active, the object moves orthogonal, or at
a right angle to, any of its edges.
123
• If the Alternate edit behavior is active, release the mouse button and then click and
the selected object(s) can be moved at drag the Move edit handle a second time in
Allowed Angles if Angle Snaps are the same direction to push.
enabled, or orthogonal to any of its edges Certain types of objects, notably roof planes,
if they are not. See “Alternate” on page and objects on locked layers can be bumped
87. but cannot be pushed. See “Layer Display
• If the Move edit behavior is active, the Options Dialog” on page 218.
selected object(s) can be moved by click-
ing and dragging any edit handle that CAD Stops Move/
would otherwise be used for resizing. See Wall Stops Move
“Move” on page 87.
CAD and CAD-based objects can be set to
stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls as
Bumping/Pushing they are being moved. See “Line Style Tab”
When Edit> Snap Settings> on page 851.
Bumping/Pushing is enabled, CAD
Some objects, such as cross boxes, framing
and CAD-based objects with CAD Stops
members and insulation, are automatically
Move and/or Wall Stops Move enabled, as
set to stop when moved against other CAD
well as architectural objects, bump into and
objects.
can push one another as they are moved.
CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move do
When an object bumps into another similar
object while it is being moved, it stops. not function if Bumping/Pushing is
Continue dragging and the selected item turned off.
resumes movement through the obstructing
object. The Maximum Bump Distance, or Unrestricted Movement
the distance you must drag to override
Many objects have restrictions placed on
bumping, is set in the Preferences dialog.
their movement by their own properties or
specification settings. Architectural objects,
Bumping/Pushing also affects objects for example, bump into other 3D objects as
when they are moved using dimensions. To they are being moved when Bumping/
override this restriction, hold down the Ctrl Pushing is enabled.
key when you click OK in the Move
CAD-based objects may be set to stop at
Object Using Dimension dialog.
other CAD objects or at walls. See “Line
Cabinets, furnishings and fixtures, wall Style Tab” on page 851.
openings, and CAD and CAD-based objects
Other move restrictions are activated by the
can push other objects of these same types
once they have bumped into them. Instead of Snap Settings . See “Snap Behaviors” on
dragging through the obstructing object(s), page 82.
124
Moving Objects
These restrictions can be overridden when To use Point to Point Move

necessary by holding down the Ctrl key
while dragging to move an object. 1. Select one or more objects that you
would like to move, then click the Point
To move an object freely
to Point Move edit button.
1. Select the object. 2. Click a point that you want to accurately
reposition.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
3. Click the point in the plan where you
3. Click the Move edit handle and drag it
would like the selected point to be relo-
to the new location.
cated when it is moved.
You can also press the Ctrl key while 4. The selected object(s) are moved so that
dragging an object’s Move handle to override they maintain their position relative to
move restrictions. the point.
Accurate Move Point to Point Move can be used with

Click the Accurate Move edit button, the Copy/Paste edit button. See “To
then move the selected object(s) at a point to point copy” on page 140.
slower speed than normal for greater
Objects
Editing
precision. Accurate Move can also be used Point to Point Move can also be used
to resize objects. with the Edit Area tools. See “Edit Area
Accurate Move is not a toggle button; it
only affects the speed of the mouse during
the next edit. The next time you want to use
Center Object
this edit tool, you need to click it again. The Center Object edit button allows
You can also slow down the movement speed you to move walls, cabinets and other
of a selection after you have started moving objects so that they are centered along the
it by pressing the Shift key. Release the Shift edge of a room or on a sink. See “Center
key to resume movement at normal speed. Object” on page 127.
Point to Point Move Move to Framing Reference

The Point to Point Move edit button Framing members can be positioned
allows a selected object or group of relative to a Framing Reference using
objects to be accurately moved. the Move to Framing Reference edit tool.
See “Framing Reference Markers” on page
486.
Using the Move Object Using Objects or the selected edges of some objects
Dimension Dialog can be moved using the Move Object
125
Using Dimension dialog. See “Moving Using the Transform/

Objects Using Dimensions” on page 804. Replicate Object Dialog
Enter Coordinates Objects and groups of objects can be
moved relative to themselves or an
Objects or the selected edges of some objects absolute location using the Transform
can be moved using the Enter Replicate Object dialog. See “Transform/
Coordinates dialog. See “Entering Replicate Object Dialog” on page 144.
Coordinates” on page 91.
Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as Using Dimensions
text boxes, walls or roof plane edges or to
align objects on different floors. There are Create a temporary or manual
several methods to choose from. dimension relative to an object such as
a wall or line, and relocate the objects to the
same dimension. See “Moving Objects
Using Snap Settings
Using Dimensions” on page 804.
With Object Snaps on, select an edge of
Text objects can be aligned using set-
an object. Drag it and visit the corresponding tings in the Text Specification dialog.
edge of another object to reveal an object See “Aligning Text” on page 825.
snap point, then release the mouse.
CAD Stops Move/
With Grid Snaps on and Angle Snaps
Wall Stops Move
off, select the left side of the object, and
drag from the center move handle. This CAD and CAD-based objects can be aligned
snaps the selected side to the grid. using another CAD object or a wall as a
guide. Check the CAD Stops Move and/or
When both Grid Snaps and Angle Wall Stops Move boxes in the objects’
specification dialogs, then move them until
Snaps on, objects snap at increments they bump into the CAD object or wall that
equal to the Snap unit specified in the Plan you wish to use as a guide for alignment. See
Defaults dialog rather than onto the grid “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
itself. This does not align objects to a grid
line unless they were already snapped to the
Using Make Parallel/
grid.
Perpendicular
See “Snap Behaviors” on page 82.
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button allows you to make a
126
Aligning Objects
selected object parallel or perpendicular to

any straight edge. Select edge
If you select an edge of a polyline-based
object, adjacent edges extend or contract to Click button
maintain contact, but other edges are remain
unchanged. The selected edge rotates about
its endpoint if selected near the end, or about Click
its center if you click within its middle third. wall
The Make Parallel edit button displays

for a selected CAD block instance when a Result
line, including a straight polyline edge, or
box edge within a block instance, is selected. You can also make the selected edge parallel
The entire block is rotated to make the by rotating the entire object. See “Make
selected line or edge is perpendicular or Parallel/Perpendicular with Polyline Based
parallel to the item subsequently clicked on. Objects” on page 134.
To use Make Parallel/Perpendicular Center Object
Objects
The Center Object edit button can be
Editing
1. Select an object such as a roof plane on
the edge that you would like to make used to center a variety of objects along
parallel or perpendicular to another the edge of a room or on a sink.
object.
• Click near the center of the edge to To use Center Object
rotate it about the center.
1. Click an object such as a cabinet.
• Click near an end to rotate the edge
about that end. 2. Click the Center Object edit button.
2. Click the Make Parallel edit button 3. Click near a wall within a room to center
the selected object relative to the portion
3. Click a straight edge such as a wall.
of that wall defining the room.
4. If the first object is within 45 degrees of
parallel to the second object, it is made The object is moved relative to the wall you
parallel. Otherwise, it is made perpen- clicked closest to.
dicular to the second object.
127
Before After
The object is centered in the room on the left
If you click outside an exterior wall instead To use Make Arc Tangent
of clicking the inside, you center the selected
object along the edge of the exterior room. 1. Select an arc-based object attached to
like objects one or both ends.
2. Click the Make Arc Tangent edit

button.
3. If the arc is attached to two objects, the
Radius of Tangent Arc dialog
opens.
The object is centered relative to the outside room
Instead of clicking near a wall, you can click 4. The radius from the center of curvature
a sink to center a selected object such as a to the middle of the arc-based object dis-
window on the sink. plays. Keep this radius or change it, and
click OK.
Using Make Arc Tangent • If the arc is attached to two perpendicu-
If a selected arc is attached on one or lar lines, this dialog opens but the Arc
both ends to another line or arc, the Radius field is not enabled.
Make Arc Tangent edit button displays. 5. The arc and attached segments adjust so
Click this button to adjust the arc and that the arc radius matches the target as
attached lines so they transition smoothly. closely as possible and the arc is made
tangent to the attached segments.
Aligning Arc Centers

The center points of circles and arc-based
objects can be aligned, even if the objects are
128
Resizing Objects
on different floors, when the Reference Aligning Objects

Display is turned on and Show Arc Centers on Different Floors
and Ends is enabled. See “Reference
Objects on different floors can be aligned
Floor” on page 368 and “CAD Defaults
Dialog” on page 878. with one another using Object Snaps
To align center points easily, it is helpful to and the Reference Display . See “Object
Snaps” on page 82 and “Reference Floor” on
turn on Object Snaps and turn off Angle page 368.
Snaps . See “Object Snaps” on page 82
and “Angle Snaps” on page 84.
Resizing Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles, To override any movement restrictions
specification dialogs, and the Transform/ caused by snap settings or the presence of
Replicate Object dialog. other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle.
Objects
Editing
Using the
Depending on the currently active Edit
Behavior , the end, corner and/or side
edit handles can be used to resize a selected Most objects can be accurately resized in
object. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86. their specification dialogs.
When the Concentric edit behavior is active, Using the Transform/

dragging an object’s corner or end handle
resizes it according to the Concentric Jump
Replicate Object Dialog
value set in the Preferences dialog. See Most objects can be resized about
“Concentric” on page 88. either their centers or an absolute point
Objects can be resized about either their using the Transform Replicate Object
center points or the current CAD point. See dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
“Behaviors Panel” on page 202. Dialog” on page 144.
Reshaping Objects
There is a wide variety of ways to reshape Using the Edit Handles
objects using the edit handles, specification
dialogs and edit toolbar buttons. Depending on the Edit Behavior in use,
the end, corner and/or side edit handles can
129
be used to reshape a selected object. See

“Edit Behaviors” on page 86. Note: The Break Line edit button is not avail-
able for box-based objects, objects created
When a line-based, arc-based, or open- with the Circle Tools, or some architectural
polyline based object is selected, you can objects such as stairs and trusses.
right-click and drag an end handle to change
a line into an arc or vice versa. This behavior
The Break Line edit tool can be used to
does not apply to closed polylines.
create two types of breaks: partial breaks and
To override any movement restrictions complete breaks.
caused by snap settings or the presence of
When a partial break is created, a new corner
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
edit handle is placed at the location of the
dragging an edit handle.
break. Partial breaks are also referred to as
joints, nodes or pivot points.
Using the Specification Dialog
A variety of CAD and CAD-based objects To create a partial break
can be reshaped by editing values on either
the Selected Line or Selected Arc tab of their 1. Click the object or edge that you want to
specification dialogs. See “Polyline break into two segments.
2. Click the Break Line edit button
once or press the 3 key.
Using Dimensions
3. Click the edge to create a new corner
Both temporary and manually drawn edit handle at that location and two sepa-
dimensions can be used to increase or rate edges on either side of that handle.
decrease the distance between the edge a
line- or polyline-based object and another, If you click and drag one of the edit handles
parallel edge or line. on either side of the partial break, the edge
moves at a right angle to itself and another
Angular Dimensions can be used to edge forms, connecting the moved edge with
adjust the angle where two polyline segments the one on the other side that does not move.
meet. See “Using Angular Dimensions” on When a complete break is created, the object
page 133. or edge is totally severed at that point.
Break Line With the exception of framing members,

complete breaks cannot be created on CAD-
The Break Line edit button can be based architectural objects. In the case of
used to break an individual line-, arc-, framing members, only complete breaks can
or spline-based object, or the edge of a be created.
polyline-based object, into two or more
segments.
130
Reshaping Objects
To create a complete break selected edge parallel or perpendicular to

another straight edge. See “Using Make
1. Click the object or edge that you want to Parallel/ Perpendicular” on page 126.
break into two segments.
Fillet Two Lines
2. Double-click the Break Line edit
button. The Fillet Two Lines edit tool allows
3. Click the edge to create a complete you to connect two non-parallel line-
break at that location. based objects using an arc of a specified
radius or to fillet the corner where two lines
You can now click either side of the location meet.
of the break and move the selected object or
edge completely independent of the object or To use Fillet Two Lines
edge on the other side of the break.
1. Click a line or polyline segment that you
When Object Snaps are enabled, breaks would like to connect to another line or
can be placed at snap locations such as segment with a filleted corner.
midpoints. See “Object Snaps” on page 82.
2. Double-click the Fillet Two Lines
If you place a complete break at a polyline
edit button to open the Fillet/Chamfer
corner, the adjacent polyline edges become
Objects
Editing
dialog.
disconnected.
Change Line/Arc
Select an individual line-based or arc-
based object or a segment of a
polyline-based object and click the Change
Line/Arc edit button to convert the selected
segement from a line to an arc or vice versa.
3. Specify the desired Fillet Radius and
click OK.
4. Click the line or polyline segment that
you want the selected line to connect to
with a fillet.
5. Continue filleting two lines by clicking
on one line, clicking the Fillet Two
Lines edit button, then clicking on
Make Parallel/Perpendicular the second line. The same Fillet Radius
is used until you open the Fillet/
The Make Parallel edit button can be Chamfer dialog again and change it.
used to reshape a polyline by making a
131
Chamfer Two Lines selected arc-based object or circle to a

polyline composed of line segments.
The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool
allows you to create a straight corner To convert arc/circle to polyline
bevel of a specified size connecting any two
non-parallel lines. It can also be used to 1. Select an arc-based object or circle.
extend an arc so that it joins to another arc.
2. Click the Convert Arc/Circle to
The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool is Polyline edit button.
used much the way as the Fillet Two Lines 3. In the Convert Arc/Circle to
edit tool. First, set the Chamfer Distance Polyline dialog, specify the number of
in the Fillet/Chamfer dialog, then select a sides you would like the converted arc to
line, click the button and click a second line have.
to chamfer the two.
Deleting Intervening Lines
Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Two

Lines can also be used to eliminate parts
of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two 4. Click OK to convert the selected arc,
non-adjacent lines that are in the same closed circle or curved polyline edge into a
polyline. polyline with the specified number of
edges.
Convert to Spline
Click the Convert to Spline edit
button to convert the selected polyline-
based object into a spline. See “Convert to
A dialog warns you that lines will be deleted Spline” on page 152.
if you proceed. Click OK to approve the
polyline edit and see the changes occur. Union, Intersection, Subtract
Closed polyline-based objects
Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline can be reshaped using the
The Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline Union, Intersection and Subtract edit
edit button allows you to convert the buttons. See “Union, Intersection, and
Subtract” on page 146.
132
Rotating Objects
Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated individually and in Rotate/Resize About
groups using a variety of methods.
Objects can be rotated or resized about
By default, an object or group of objects either their own centers or the current
rotate about the center point of the selection CAD point. See “Temporary Points” on page
set. You can instead specify that objects 845.
rotate about the current CAD point.

Select an object, then click the triangular
Rotate edit handle and drag it in any
direction. When your pointer is over the
Rotate handle, it displays a curved arrow.
You can specify which behavior is used by
The angles of line-based objects can also be
selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/
changed by dragging an end handle in a
direction other than parallel to the object. Resize About Current Point . When this
Objects
option is selected, objects rotate about the
Editing
The object rotates about the opposite end
point. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on current CAD point; when it is not selected,
page 95. object rotate about their centers.
The Rotate/Resize About behavior can also
When Angle Snaps are enabled, objects
be specified in the Preferences dialog. See
snap to Allowed Angles as specified in the
“Behaviors Panel” on page 202.
Plan Defaults dialog as they are rotated.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 84.
Entering Coordinates
To override any movement restrictions
caused by snap settings or the presence of Objects can be rotated by entering
other objects, press the Ctrl key while coordinates or a distance and angle in the
dragging an edit handle. Enter Coordinates dialog. See “Entering
Coordinates” on page 91.
Using the
Specification Dialog Using Angular Dimensions
Angular Dimensions are useful for
The exact angle of some objects such as
adjusting the angles of a variety of
lines, arcs, walls and the selected edges of
objects with straight edges.
polylines can be specified on either the
General tab, the Line Style tab, or the Arc tab
of that object’s specification dialog. See
“Line Style Tab” on page 851.
133
To change an angular dimension
1. Select CAD> Dimension> Angular

Dimension , then click and drag to
draw an angular dimension line between
the objects you want to move.
• Begin and end as close as possible to
the two objects you wish to locate.
2. Select the edge that you want to move.
6. Click OK to apply the change.
When an entire polyline is rotated using the
Set Angular Dimension dialog, it rotates
around the vertex of the angle.
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
with Polyline Based Objects
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button usually adjusts the angle of
3. Click the dimension value to open the
a selected polyline edge. See “Using Make
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
Parallel/ Perpendicular” on page 126.
• The Previous Value is indicated
degrees, minutes and seconds. To rotate the entire polyline instead, double-
click the Make Parallel edit button to
open the Make Parallel dialog.
4. Enter a value in the New Value field.

5. Select Rotate Edge to move the selected
edge when OK is clicked or select Choose to either Rotate only selected edge,
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the as before, or to Rotate entire polyline. Your
entire object the selected edge is a part setting remains until you access the Make
of, maintaining the Previous Value of the Parallel dialog again and change it.
angle. Polylines rotate according to the current
Rotate/Resize About setting. See
134
Reflecting Objects
Using the Transform/ Enter the amount of degrees to rotate the

Replicate Object Dialog floor plan view in decimal units using either
positive or negative values.
Objects and groups of objects can be
rotated to a relative or absolute angle The degrees rotated displays in ±180 degree
using the Transform Replicate Object format. For example, if you enter 270
dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object degrees, it displays as -90 degrees when the
Dialog” on page 144. dialog is reopened.
Rotate View rotates a plan relative to its

Rotate View original orientation. For example, entering
To rotate everything in floor plan view, 90 degrees twice results in a rotation of 90
including all objects on all floors, the degrees, not 180 degrees.
Snap and Reference Grids, and the drawing Text objects rotate with the plan unless you
sheet, select Tools> Rotate View... to open uncheck Rotate with plan in the Text
the Rotate Plan View dialog. Specification dialog for each object. See
“Text Specification Dialog” on page 830.
The Rotate View tool does not rotate

objects; it literally rotates your view of
Objects
Editing
those objects. As a result, it does not alter the
orientation of the plan in layout views or on
the printed page.
Reflecting Objects
There are several ways to reflect an object, • When an open or closed polyline-based
group of objects, or an entire plan about an object is used as the reflective object, the
axis or another object. Either the original edge that is clicked on acts as the axis.
object(s) or copies of the original(s) can be • When a circle or box-based object such
reflected. as a CAD box or cabinet is used as the
reflective object, the axis runs down the
Reflect About Object center of the object from back to front.
A selected object or objects can be
reflected about another object, To use Reflect About Object
regardless of its angle, using the Reflect
About Object edit tool. 1. Draw a CAD line to act as the reflection
line.
Line-based objects are often used for
2. Select the object(s) to be reflected.
reflecting a selection, but most objects have
an axis that can be used.
135
3. Click the Reflect About Object edit Reverse Plan

button. The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
4. Click the CAD line to reflect the selec- to mirror a plan so that everything is
tion about the line. swapped left to right.
5. The selection is reflected around the
CAD line, and the original is no longer Select Tools> Reverse Plan to reflect an
there. entire plan right to left, as though it were
reflected about a vertical line. Reverse Plan
To retain a copy of the selected object(s) in reverses all floors associated with the plan.
the original location, click the Copy/Paste
Reversing a plan rebuilds theentire model,
button before clicking the Reflect About affects views sent to layout and when they
Object button. are printed, and also closes any 3D views
that are currently open.
Using the Transform/
Reverse Direction
Replicate Object Dialog
Select a line-based, arc-based or
Objects and groups of objects can also
polyline-based object and click the
be reflected horizontally or vertically
Reverse Direction edit button to reverse its
using the Transform Replicate Object
direction.
dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog” on page 144. Reversing a line or polyline is useful with
certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end.
Copying and Pasting Objects

What’s New In Version X1 Training CAD objects cannot be pasted into a 3D
Video: Editing - Cut, Copy and Paste camera view or overview.
Edits
Similarly, architectural objects cannot be
Objects can be cut, copied and pasted pasted into CAD detail windows or onto a
individually and as groups. They can be layout page.
copied from one floor to another, one view
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters
window to another, and one file to another.
and camera symbols, cannot be copied.
Because copying uses the Windows
Clipboard, objects can be pasted into other
applications, as well. Cut
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that Select Edit> Cut to remove the
they cannot be created in normally. Thus, selected object(s) from the file and
save them in the Windows Clipboard. To
136
paste the selection in Chief Architect or Capture Setup dialog. See “Creating Screen
another application, select Edit> Paste or Captures” on page 900.
press Ctrl + V while in that application to
enable the Paste function. Copy/Paste
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
Copy
copy the selected object(s) to the
Select Edit> Copy to copy the selected Windows Clipboard and immediately enable
object(s) to the Windows Clipboard. To the Paste function in Chief Architect.
paste the selection in Chief Architect or
another application, select Edit> Paste or The Copy/Paste edit button activates
press Ctrl + V while in that application to Paste mode in which each available edit tool
enable the Paste function. and handle makes a copy in addition to its
primary function and four new edit buttons
Paste display on the edit toolbar.
Select Edit> Paste to enable Paste • Click the Sticky Mode edit button
mode, then left- or right-click in the remain in the current mode and place
current view to paste the selected object(s) multiple copies of the selected object(s).
previously copied to the Windows Clipboard
Objects
Editing
at that location. • Click the Point to Point Move edit
Once pasted, these object(s) are selected. button to make a copy of the selection at
Objects pasted in 3D views are selected on a specific location. See “Point to Point
their top surfaces. Move” on page 125.
If the selection being pasted consists of text, • Click the Reflect About Object edit
it is placed in a Text object. button to make a copy of the selection
reflected about another object. See
If the selection being pasted is an image, the “Reflect About Object” on page 135.
Paste Image dialog opens.
• Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
ton or press the Esc key to return to the
selected objects’s main edit toolbar.
If you paste a selection in a file other than its
original source file, when you return to the
original, Paste mode is still enabled.
The options in the Paste Image dialog and

their results are similar to those in the Screen
137
The Copy/Paste edit button can be used watching the moved distance in the Sta-
with the edit handles in either of two ways: tus Bar at the bottom of the screen.
by clicking or by dragging an edit handle.
Sticky Mode
To Copy/Paste by clicking What’s New In Version X1 Training
Video: Editing - Sticky Mode and Other
1. Select an object or objects to copy. Edit Sub Modes
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, Normally, after an action is performed
select Edit> Copy from the menu or using the edit tools or handles while in
press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the an edit mode such as Paste mode, you return
Copy/Paste icon. to the Main Edit Mode. Click the Sticky
3. If you wish to paste the copy in a differ- Mode edit button to remain in Paste mode
ent view or program window, open that and continue pasting copies of the selected
window. object(s).
4. If your cursor does not display the Copy/ To exit Paste mode and return to the main
Paste icon, select Edit> Paste from the edit toolbar for the selected object, click the
menu or press Ctrl + V. Main Edit Mode edit button or press the
5. Left- or right-click once to paste a copy Esc key on your keyboard. If you have not
of the object at that location. pasted a copy of the selected object and
immediately click Copy/Paste after
To Copy/Paste by dragging returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky
1. Select an object or objects to copy. Mode is still enabled.
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, Sticky Mode is available when the Copy/
Paste, Multiple Copy, Trim Object(s), or
select Edit> Copy from the menu or Extend Object(s) edit button is clicked. See
press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the “Trim and Extend” on page 142.
Copy/Paste icon.
3. Drag an edit handle: Copy and Paste in Place
• Drag the Move edit handle to position Click the Copy and Paste in Place edit
the copy at a new location. button to create a copy of the selected
• Drag a corner handle to create a copy in object(s) at the same location as the original.
the same location but with a different The copy remains selected so you can per-
size or shape. The result depends on form additional operations.
which Edit Behavior you use. See
“Edit Behaviors” on page 86. Because multiple walls, railing and fencing
cannot share the same space, Copy and
4. You can resize or position the copy
accurately with respect to the original by Paste in Place edit button is not avail-
able for these objects.
138
Paste Hold Position 2. Switch to the desired Chief Architect

view window and select Edit> Paste>
When copying between different floors
or view windows, you can paste a copy Paste Special .
at the same absolute position as the original 3. In the Paste Special dialog, select the
selection using Paste Hold Position. desired representation for the selection
and click OK.
To use Paste Hold Position 4. Click in the drawing area to place the
copy at that location.
1. Select the object(s) to be copied.
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button. Multiple Copy

3. Switch to the desired floor or plan file The Multiple Copy edit button makes
and select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold it easy to lay out multiple copies of any
object or group of objects, including CAD
Position .
blocks and Architectural blocks.
4. A copy is placed at the same X, Y coor-
dinates on the new floor or in the new To use Multiple Copy
plan as the original’s position.
1. Select the object(s) to copy.
Objects
Editing
Paste Special
2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
The Paste Special tool allows you to button.
choose a representation for the
selection to be pasted. 3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
you wish to make more than one set of
Selections can be pasted as:
multiple copies.
• Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF).
4. Click and drag the Move edit handle.
See “Metafiles” on page 901.
Copies of the selection are made at regu-
• Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See lar intervals between the original and the
“Importing Picture Files” on page 890. pointer’s location.
• Unformated non-unicode text (TXT). 5. Release the mouse button to place the
• Filename (a path to a file). copies. The dragged distance determines
the number of copies placed.
• Unformatted text (HTML).
• Model Objects - Chief Architect format, 6. If you clicked the Sticky Mode edit
not compatible with other programs. button, you can drag the last object cre-
ated to make additional copies.
To use Paste Special
7. Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
1. Select an object, image, text or file on ton or press the Esc key to return to the
your computer and copy it. selected objects’s main edit toolbar.
139
Separate copy intervals are used for:

• General objects button.
• Roof and floor trusses 3. Right-click and drag the Move edit han-
• Rafters dle in any direction.
• Floor and ceiling joists 4. Release the mouse button and move the
pointer in another direction.
• Studs (in wall framing details)
5. Click the left or right mouse button to
To set the copy interval for general objects or place the array of copies.
all trusses, click the Multiple Copy
button, then click the Multiple Copy Using the Transform/
Interval button to open the Multiple Replicate Object Dialog
Copy dialog. Objects and groups of objects can be
copied and pasted using the
Transform Replicate Object dialog.
See “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
page 144.
Copy Region as Picture

The Copy Region as Picture tool
allows you to copy any portion of the
screen and save it as a picture. See “Copy
Region as Picture” on page 904.
The copy intervals for rafters, joists, and Using Point to Point Move
studs are set on their respective tabs in the
The Point to Point Move edit button
Build Framing dialog. See “Build Framing
can be used in combination with Copy/
Paste to make a copy of the selected
When the Alternate edit behavior is object(s) at a specified location. See “Point
to Point Move” on page 125.
used, the Multiple Copy edit tool can
also be used to create an array of copies. See
To point to point copy
“Alternate” on page 87.
1. Select the object(s) to be copied, click
To create an array of copies
the Copy/Paste edit button, then the
1. Select the object(s) to copy.
Point to Point Move edit button.
140
Deleting Objects
2. Click at the start point and then at the Using Reflect About Object
end point.
The Reflect About Object edit button
3. An exact copy of the selected object(s) can be used in combination with Copy/
is created at the end point while the orig-
inal remains unchanged. Paste to make a reflected copy of the
selected object(s), much the way Point to
Point Move can. See “Reflect About Object”
on page 135.
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways: To use the Delete Objects dialog
• Select an object or group of objects, then
click the Delete edit button, select 1. Select Edit> Delete Objects... to
open the Delete Objects dialog.
Edit> Delete from the menu, or press
the Del key on your keyboard.
• Some architectural objects such as walls,
Objects
Editing
wall openings, and staircases are deleted
if they are resized too small.
• Entire categories of objects can be
deleted using the Delete Objects dia-
log.
If an object has a line with arrow or text
leader attached to it, the arrow or leader is
deleted if the object is deleted. To prevent the
arrow from being deleted, drag the attached
end away from the object before deleting it.
Delete Objects Dialog

Use the Delete Objects dialog to delete
all objects of one or more specified
types in one room, on the current floor, or in
the entire plan.
2. Specify the Delete Scope as Single

Room, All Rooms (current floor only),
or All Floors.
141
3. In the Delete section, check the box for

• Select Edit Object Parts . Select the
each category of objects you want to
edge and delete. See “Edit Object Parts”
delete. Click Select All to check all the
on page 93.
boxes or Clear All to uncheck all boxes.
• Drag a corner handle until it overlaps an
4. When the scope is set to Single Room:
adjacent corner handle to remove the
• Move your cursor into the drawing area edge between them and merge them into
and click in a room of the plan to delete a single handle.
objects of the selected type within that
room without closing the dialog. • Create a complete break at both ends.
Select the edge and delete. See “To create
• Continue clicking on rooms or choose a
a complete break” on page 131.
different Delete Scope.
• Click Done when all selections have • The Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer
been deleted.
Two Lines tools can be used to delete
5. If you select All Rooms or All Floors, polyline edges. See “Reshaping Objects”
you do not need to click in floor plan on page 129.
view. The OK button becomes available,
and clicking it closes the dialog and Delete Surface
delete the specified objects.
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Deleting Polyline Edges Surface, then click a surface in the
view to temporarily remove the surface from
There are number of different ways to delete the current view without permanently
individual edges of polyline-based objects: affecting the object. See “Delete 3D Surface”
on page 747.
Trim and Extend

The Extend Object(s) and Trim • Click the Select Fence edit button,
Object(s) edit tools allow you to then click an object to use it as a fence.
lengthen or shorten a variety of CAD objects See “Using a Fence” on page 94.
and framing members. See “Framing” on
page 469. • Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
When either the Extend Object(s) or Trim ton or press the Esc key to return to the
Object(s) edit buttons are clicked, its edit selected objects’s main edit toolbar.
mode is enabled and three new edit buttons If you did not do a fence selection and
display on the edit toolbar. then immediately click either Extend
Object(s) or Trim Object(s) after return-
• Click the Sticky Mode edit button ing to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky Mode
remain in the current mode and edit mul- is still enabled.
tiple objects or select multiple fences.
142
Trim and Extend
Trim Objects the cutting line(s) that you want to edit.

See “Using a Fence” on page 94.
Lines, arcs, polylines, circles and
framing items can be trimmed. The 3. Select the cutting line(s) and click the
trimming, or cutting, object may be any CAD Trim Object(s) edit button.
object, a group of CAD objects, or even a
CAD block. Select the trimming object(s) 4. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
you wish to trim objects using multiple
and click the Trim Object(s) edit button.
fences.
The Trim Object(s) edit tool can be used 5. Click the Select Fence edit button.
in three different ways:
6. Click the fence(s) to trim the object seg-
• Individually clicking on objects to be ments intersected by the fence.
trimmed.
• Selecting objects to be trimmed using a To trim using a temporary fence
• Selecting objects to be trimmed using a 1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s)
temporary fence. through the objects to be trimmed.
2. Select the cutting line(s) and click the
To trim by clicking
Objects
Editing
Trim Object(s) edit button.
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s) 3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
through the objects to be trimmed. you wish to trim objects using multiple
2. Select the cutting line(s) and click the temporary fences.
Trim Object(s) edit button. 4. Click and drag a temporary line to act as
a fence, trimming the object segments
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if intersected by it. Be sure to draw this
you wish to click multiple objects to fence on the side of the cutting object(s)
trim them. that you wish to edit.
4. Click each segment intersected by a cut-
ting line one-by-one to trim it back to Extend Objects
the cutting line. Lines, arcs, polylines and framing
items can also be extended. The
To trim using a fence boundary the items is extended to may be
any CAD object, group of CAD objects, or a
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s) CAD block.
through the objects to be trimmed.
2. Draw a fence through the object seg- As with Trim Objects , there are three
ments to be trimmed. Be sure that the ways to use Extend Objects :
fence intersects the objects on the side of
143
• Individually clicking on objects to be 3. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
extended.
Extend Objects edit button.
• Selecting objects to be extended using a
fence. 4. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
you wish to extend objects using multi-
• Selecting objects to be extended using a
ple fences.
temporary fence.
5. Click the Select Fence edit button.
To extend by clicking
6. Click the fence to extend the objects
1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s) segments intersected by the fence until
you want the objects to extend to. they meet the boundary line(s).
2. Select the boundary line(s) and click the To extend using a temporary fence
1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if you want the objects to extend to.
you wish to click multiple objects to 2. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
extend them.
4. Click an object that you would like to
extend to the boundary line(s). 3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
you wish to extend objects using multi-
To extend using a fence ple temporary fences.
4. Click and drag a temporary line to act as
1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)
a fence, trimming the object segments
you want the objects to extend to.
intersected by it.
2. Draw a fence through the objects to be
extended. See “Using a Fence” on page
94.
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog

Select any object or group of objects they are performed in the order they appear
and click the Transform/Replicate in the dialog, from top to bottom.
Object edit button to open the Transform/
Caution: Always double-check the val-
Replicate Object dialog.
ues entered in the Transform/Repli-
If multiple options are selected in the cate Object dialog. Large numbers of copies
Transform/Replicate Object dialog, or large offsets or resize factors can result in
objects that are time-consuming to create or
may be off the screen.
144
Objects
Editing
6
1 Number Of Copies - Select this • Select Relative to Current Point to

option, then specify the Number of move the object relative to the current
Copies to make. CAD point. See “Temporary Points” on
page 845. You can either specify its X
2 Move - Select this option, then specify Delta and Y Delta, or Angle and Dis-
how far or where to move the object(s).
tance, if Polar is checked.
• Select Relative to Itself to move the
object relative to its current position. 3 Rotate - Select this option, then specify
Specify the X Delta, Y Delta and Z the Angle to rotate the object(s).
Delta values, which are the object’s • Absolute Angle - Select this option to
changes in position along each axis. rotate the object so that its orientation is
• Select Absolute Location to move the at an absolute angle.
object to an absolute location. You can • Relative Angle - Select this option to
either specify its X and Y Position, or rotate the object the specified angle rela-
Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked. tive to its current orientation.
145
You can also specify the point the selected

6 Rotate/Resize/Reflect About - This
object(s) rotate about, below. section is enabled when the Rotate,
Resize and/or Reflect functions are selected.
4 Select Resize, then specify the Resize • X Position - Specify the X coordinate of
Factor in decimals. A resize factor of 2
doubles the size of the object, while a resize the point to perform the selected edit
factor of 0.5 halves the object’s size. function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
You can also specify the point the selected
object(s) is resized about, below. • Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of
the point to perform the selected edit
5 Reflect - Select this option, then function(s) about when About Absolute
specify which axis to reflect about. Point is selected.
• Horizontally - Select this option to • About Object Center - Select this option
reflect the object horizontally. to perform the selected edit function(s)
• Vertically - Select this option to reflect about the object’s center.
the object vertically. • About Absolute Point - Select this
You can also specify the point the selected option to perform the selected edit func-
object(s) is reflected about, below. tion(s) about the specified point.
• About Current Point - Select this option
to perform the selected edit function(s)
about the current CAD point.
Union, Intersection, and Subtract

New closed polyline-based results when the three are merged using the
objects and solids can be
Union edit button.
created based on existing closed polyline-
based objects of the same type or solid
objects. The Union, Intersection and
Subtract edit tools are provided for this
purpose.
Union
Use the Union edit button to combine
two or more closed polylines or solids
into a single object.
The following example shows three closed
polylines and the single closed polyline that
146
Union, Intersection, and Subtract
There are two methods of combining closed To use the group selection method
polylines or solids using the Union edit
1. Group-select two or more closed
button: the single selection and group
polylines or solid objects.
selection methods.
Begin by creating two or more overlapping 2. Click the Union edit button.
objects of the same type. If one object is a 3. If the object is a polyline, choose to
countertop, for example, the others should be retain or delete the original objects in the
countertops, as well. dialog that opens.
If the original objects do not overlap, they 4. A new object of the same type as the
will either not produce a new object or will originals is created, is selected, and is
be duplicated on top of themselves. superimposed over the originals if they
were retained.
To use the single selection method
This second method allows you to combine
more than two polylines simultaneously.
1. Select a single closed polyline or solid
object. Note: If the original objects do not overlap,
the Union edit tool duplicates them and then
2. Click the Union edit button. either deletes or retains the originals.
Objects
Editing
3. Click another closed polyline or solid.
4. If the object is a polyline, choose to Intersection
retain or delete the original objects in the Use the Intersection edit button to
dialog that opens. create a single polyline based on the
overlap area of two or more closed polyline-
based objects or solids.
The following example shows two closed
polylines and the single closed polyline that
results when the Intersection edit button
is used.
5. The new polyline of the same type as the
originals is created and is selected. Its
shape is defined by the boundaries of the
two originals and, if the original objects
were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
147
the original objects and, if the originals

were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
To use the group selection method
1. Group select two or more closed

polylines or solid objects.
2. Click the Intersection edit button.

3. If the object is a polyline, choose to
retain or delete the original objects in the
There are two methods of combining closed
dialog that opens.
polylines or solids using the Intersection
4. A new object of the same type as the
edit button: the single selection and originals is created, is selected, and is
group selection methods. The second method superimposed over the originals if they
allows you to work with more than two were retained.
objects simultaneously.
Begin by creating two or more overlapping Subtract
objects of the same type. If one object is a
Use the Subtract edit button to
countertop, for example, the others should be
subtract the area of one object that
countertops, as well.
overlaps another object of the same type to
If the original objects do not intersect, no create a third, new object.
new object is created.
This polyline
To use the single selection method selected first
1. Select a single closed polyline or solid

object.
2. Click the Intersection edit button.

3. Click another closed polyline or solid.
4. If the object is a polyline, choose to This polyline
retain or delete the original objects in the selected first
dialog that opens. Originals
5. A new object of the same type as the There is one method for using the Subtract
originals is created and is selected. Its edit button.
shape is defined by the area shared by
148
Converting Objects
To use the Subtract edit tool 4. If the object is a polyline, choose to

retain or delete the original objects in the
1. Draw two or more closed polyline-based dialog that opens.
objects or solids that overlap. One object 5. A new object of the same type as the
can be completely enclosed by another. originals is created, is selected, and is
2. Select one or more of these objects you superimposed over the originals if they
want to remove a portion from as were retained.
defined by the area shared in common
with the remaining, unselected object. Note: If the original objects do not overlap, the
Subtract edit tool duplicates the first object
3. Click the Subtract edit button and selected and then either deletes or retains it.
then click the unselected object.
Converting Objects
CAD objects and many CAD-based objects instead of architectural objects, leaving the
can be converted into a variety of other types original view intact.
of objects.
Convert Polyline
Objects
Editing
CAD to Walls
The Convert Polyline edit button lets
CAD to Walls allows you to convert a you to turn lines, arcs, polylines,
2D line drawing into a 3D model. splines, and boxes into CAD-based
Double CAD lines and arcs drawn to architectural objects such as counter tops and
represent wall layers and other structural stair landings, special polylines such as
items can be converted to actual Chief materials list polylines, and numerous terrain
Architect walls, railings, windows, or doors. objects.
See “CAD to Walls” on page 249.
To convert a CAD object into one of these
3D objects, select the object and click the
CAD Detail from View
Convert Polyline edit button to open the
Select CAD> CAD Detail from View Convert Polyline dialog.
to create a CAD drawing of the current
view. See “CAD Detail from View” on page
875.
CAD Detail from View does not truly

convert objects in the current view into CAD
objects; instead, it creates a copy of the
original view composed of CAD objects
149
Convert Polyline Dialog
1 11
2 12
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
21
1 Countertop - Convert the selected 7 3D Molding Polyline - Convert to a 3D

closed polyline to a countertop. See molding polyline. See “3D Molding
“Custom Countertops” on page 553. Polyline Tool” on page 542.
2 Slab - Convert the selected closed 8 Hole in Roof/Ceiling - Convert the

polyline to a slab. See “The Slab Tools” selected closed polyline to a roof/
on page 379. ceiling hole. Only available when the
polyline is contained inside a roof plane or
3 Foundation Slab - Convert the ceiling plane. See “Roof Hole/Skylight
selected closed polyline to a foundation
slab with footings. See “Foundation
9 Polyline Solid - Convert the selected
closed polyline to a polyline solid. See
4 Landing - Convert the selected closed “Polyline Solids” on page 649.
polyline to a landing. Only available
when the closed polyline is not a spline. See
10 Sprinkler Line - Convert to a sprinkler
“Stair Landings” on page 443. line. See “Sprinkler Tools” on page
594.
5 Material List Polyline - Convert the
selected closed polyline to a materials
11 Terrain Perimeter - Convert to the
list polyline. See “Calculate From Area” on terrain permeter. See “Terrain Tools” on
page 1006. page 584. This option is only available when:
• The polyline is closed
6 Molding Polyline - Convert to a
molding polyline. See “Molding • A terrain perimeter does not yet exist
Polylines” on page 541.
• Only one polyline is currently selected
150
Converting Objects
12 Elevation Line - Convert to an 20 Sidewalk (Perimeter) - Convert to a

elevation line. See “Elevation Lines” sidewalk polyline where the polyline
on page 586. Only available when a terrain represents the perimeter of the sidewalk. See
perimeter exists. “Polyline Sidewalk” on page 633. Only
available when a terrain perimeter exists and
13 Terrain Break - Convert to a terrain the polyline is closed.
Break. See “Editing Terrain Objects”
on page 597.
21 Sidewalk (Center Line) - Convert to a
sidewalk where the polyline represents
14 Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain the center line of the sidewalk. See “Straight
feature. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on
Sidewalk” on page 632. Only available when
page 590. Only available when a terrain
a terrain perimeter exists.
perimeter exists.
Click OK to convert the object or objects.
15 Road (Perimeter) - Convert the
selected closed polyline to a road If you then click the Open Object edit
polyline where the polyline represents the button with the converted object selected, the
perimeter of the road. See “Road Polyline” specification dialog appropriate to the newly
on page 631. Only available when a terrain converted object opens, allowing you to
perimeter exists. specify the object’s height, material and
other information.
16 Road (Center Line) - Convert to a
Objects
Editing
road where the polyline represents the
center line for the road. See “Straight Road” Convert to Plain Polyline
on page 630. Only available when a terrain
Click the Convert to Plain Polyline
perimeter exists.
edit button to convert special polylines
17 Road Median - Convert the selected to plain polylines.
polyline to a road median. This is
After a special polyline is converted into a
helpful for creating medians on curved roads.
plain polyline, it can be converted into a
See “Median” on page 631.
special of the same or different type.
18 Road Marking (Perimeter) - Convert
to a road marking where the polyline Convert to Solid
represents the perimeter of the road marking.
See “Road Marking” on page 632. Only Click the Convert To Solid edit button
available when a terrain perimeter exists and to convert the selected object into a
the polyline is closed. Primitive object, or solid, so that it can be
used with other solids to create complex
19 Road Stripe (Center Line) - Convert structures. See “Primitive Tools” on page
to a road stripe where the polyline 641.
represents the centerline of the road stripe.
See “Road Marking” on page 632. Only
available when a terrain perimeter exists.
151
Convert to Spline Convert Spline to Polyline

Click the Convert to Spline edit Click the Convert Spline to Polyline
button to convert some CAD-based edit button to convert the selected
objects such as Custom Countertops or spline-based object into a polyline.
splines that have been converted to polylines
to spline-based objects. See “Editing Spline
If you would like to convert a closed polyline
to a spline, first convert it to a custom
countertop. Then, convert it to a spline and
finally, convert it to a plain polyline again.
The spline is replaced by the new polyline
Unlike polylines, splines form smooth curves
rather than angled corners where their A curved portion in a spline is represented as
direction changes. See “Splines” on page a number of smaller straight lines. You can
868. change a spline into a normal polyline that is
made up of these straight lines using this edit
tool.
Select Same / Load Same

The Select Same/Load Same edit can be used to quickly modify multiple
tools provide a fast way to locate rooms. Click any rooms that are not
and modify rooms, cabinets, windows and highlighted to change their attributes so that
doors in your plan based on attributes that they match those that you specify.
you specify.
Load to Make Same Value
Select Same Type
The Load Values to Make Same edit
The Select Same Type edit tool allows button can be used to apply the selected
you to quickly select all cabinets, attributes, or values, to any other objects on
doors, windows, or rooms on the current the current floor that do not yet share them.
floor of your plan that share the same set of
specified attributes as the selected object. Load Values to Make Same becomes
available only after the Select Same Type
With the exception of rooms, all selected
objects can then be opened for specification edit tool has been used to select a group
and/or edited using the toolbar buttons. of objects that share the same attributes.
Although multiple rooms cannot be edited, Some attributes can only be used for
selecting objects and cannot be loaded from
the Load Values to Make Same edit tool
one object to another. These attributes
152
Edit Area Tools
display in the Select Similar Objects • The set of attributes available varies
dialog followed by an asterisk. depending on the type of object
selected.
To use Select Same/Load Same 4. All objects sharing all the specified
attributes are now selected in the draw-
1. Select a room, cabinet, window or door ing area.
with attributes that you would like to
apply to other like objects on the current 5. Click the Load Values to Make Same
floor. edit button, then click any like object
that is not currently highlighted to apply
2. Click the Select Same Type edit the specified attributes to it and add it to
button. the selection set.
3. In the Select Similar Objects dialog, 6. You can keep selecting objects to load
check the box beside any attributes that
values until the Esc key or any other tool
you want to use as search parameters
is used.
and click OK.
Edit Area Tools
Objects
Editing
The Edit Area Tools allow you to Edit Area
quickly define an area of your plan and
select the objects in that area. Once selected, Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
they can then be repositioned, copied or and draw a rectangular marquee around
deleted. Select Edit> Edit Area to view the the area of the plan to be edited.
Edit Area Tools.
Edit Area affects all objects included in
Unlike other selection methods, the Edit the selection marquee that are located on the
Area Tools cut walls, railing and fencing current floor, regardless of whether they are
where the selection marquee intersects them, displaying in floor plan view or not.
allowing you to edit only the selected portion
of these objects. Edit Area Visible
Some objects, such as cabinets, are included Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
in the selection only if more than half of the Visible and draw a marquee around the
object is contained within the marquee. area of the plan to be edited.
A few objects, notably CAD points, are not Edit Area Visible only affects visible
affected by the Edit Area Tools . objects included in the selection marquee:
objects not currently displayed in floor plan
The Edit Area tools can cause wide- view are unaffected.
spread changes across an entire plan
and should always be used with caution.
153
Edit Area (All Floors) • Click the Move edit handle to move the
entire selection set. See “Moving
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area Objects” on page 123.
(All Floors) and draw a marquee
around the area of the plan to be edited. • Click the Rotate edit handle to rotate the
entire selection set. See “Rotating
Edit Area (All Floors) affects all objects Objects” on page 133.
on all floors of the plan that are included in • Click and drag the Reshape and Resize
the selection marquee, regardless of whether edit handles at each corner and along
they display in floor plan view. each edge to adjust the size and shape of
the marquee. See “Using the Edit Han-
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible dles” on page 108.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area Adjusting the size or shape of an Edit Area
(All Floors) Visible and draw a marquee may change which objects are
marquee around the area of the plan to be included in the selection set but does not
edited. otherwise affect those objects.
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible affects all Using the Edit Toolbar
visible objects on all floors of the plan that
are included in the selection marquee. A selected Edit Area marquee and/or the
Objects not currently displaying in floor plan objects within it can be edited in a variety of
view are not affected. ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 109.
Edit Area Polyline The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for an Edit Area marquee:
If a rectangular marquee’s shape does not
allow you to define an area precisely, use a • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
closed polyline instead. copy the selection set to the Windows
Select a polyline that defines the desired area Clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere.
in floor plan view and then select one of the See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on
page 136.
Edit Area Tools . The polyline becomes
temporarily highlighted and acts as an Edit • Click the Delete edit button to delete
Area marquee. the selection set. See “Deleting Objects”
on page 141.
Using the Edit Handles • Click the Transform/Replicate Object
An Edit Area marquee displays edit handles edit button to copy, move, rotate,
that are similar to those of a closed polyline. resize, or reflect the selection set. See
See “Using the Edit Handles” on page 108. “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
page 144.
154
Edit Area Tools
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button are not at an allowed angle, the Allowed
to make a series of copies of the selection Angles edit button displays.
set at regular intervals. See “Multiple
Click the Allowed Angles edit button to
Copy” on page 139.
display the Place at Allowed Angles
• Click the Accurate Move edit button dialog.
to slow down the mouse speed when
using the edit handles. See “Accurate
edit button to rotate the Edit Area
marquee and the selection set so that the
selected marquee edge is parallel or per-
pendicular to another straight edge. See Select the first option and click OK to rotate
“Using Make Parallel/ Perpendicular” on the plan so that the largest group of off-angle
page 126. walls move to an Allowed Angle. This may
place this largest group at Allowed Angles,
• Click the Point to Point Move edit but has two disadvantages.
button to accurately move the selection
• First, other groups of off angle walls
set. See “Point to Point Move” on page
remain off angle.
125.
• Second, any walls that were at an allowed
• Click the Center Object edit button angle before move off angle. The dialog
to center the selection set along the edge shows how much (weighted by length) of
of a room or on a sink. See “Center the selected walls are in each category.
Object” on page 127. Select the second option and click OK to add
• Click the Reflect About Object edit new entries to the Allowed Angles list and
button to reflect the selection set about allow new walls to be placed at these angles.
another object. See “Reflecting Objects” Walls already at Allowed Angles remain so.
on page 135. See “Angle Snaps” on page 84.
Select the third option and click OK to do
• Click the Allowed Angles edit button
nothing, which is the same as clicking
to open the Place at Allowed Angles
Cancel.
dialog.
You may want to rotate the majority of the
Place at Allowed Angles walls to one of the normal allowed angles.
Dialog Then, use an Edit Area tool to select
everything again and select the second option
If more than one percent of the straight
to provide new angle entries to cover the
walls included in an Edit Area marquee
remaining walls.
155
156
Chapter 4:
File Management
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect uses two main document Chapter Contents
types, plan files (.plan) and layout files • Compatibility with Previous Versions
(.layout). The complete 3D model of a • Creating a New Plan
structure and surrounding terrain and any • Creating a New Layout
CAD data associated with it are stored in the • Saving a Plan or Layout File
plan file. Data used to create working • Organizing your Files
drawings and the links to various views or
Management
• Save and Save As
details are stored in the layout and files. • Saving a Plan Thumbnail
File
All commands related to opening, saving and • Auto Archive
closing plans are located in the File • Undo Files
menu.You can also open plans from the • Opening a Plan or Layout File
Startup Options window. • Project Browser
• Project Information
You should back up your plan and layout • Template Files
files externally on a regular basis to avoid • Searching for Plans
accidental loss of work. • Closing Plans and Views
• Exporting a Plan
• Exporting an Entire Plan
• Exiting Chief Architect
157
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Plans produced in the following programs Several steps are required to successfully
can all be read by Chief Architect X1: convert plans to the Chief Architect X1.
format.
• Chief Architect® 5.0 through 10.0
• Before opening a legacy plan, click
• 3D Home Architect® 3.0 and 4.0
Edit> Preferences... to open the
• Chief Architect® Home Edition 5.0 Preferences dialog.
• All Better Homes and Gardens Home • On the Font panel, select the Legacy Text
Designer™ products Conversion and Legacy Dimension Con-
• Better Homes and Gardens Landscaping version fonts needed for your plan.
and Deck Designer • On the Text & Page Setup panel, click
• Better Homes and Gardens Interior the Legacy Plan Page Setup and Legacy
Designer Layout Page Setup buttons to select the
settings needed for your plan.
• Trading Spaces® Design Companion™
• On the Layers panel, choose whether to
Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not devel-
purge unused layers in the plan and
oped by Chief Architect, Inc. Plans written whether to retain layer numbers along
using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot with the names.
be read by Chief Architect X1. • Only the .PL1, .LA1, .plan, and .layout
files from prior versions can be opened in
To continue to read plans produced in an version X1.
earlier version of Chief Architect, a Better • If you notice any problems with symbols
Homes and Gardens product, or 3D Home placed using earlier versions, delete the
Architect in that original program, be sure to symbol and replace it with a new symbol
save duplicate copies of your files before from a Chief Architect X1 library.
opening them in Chief Architect X1. Copies
that have not been opened or saved by Chief After performing these steps select File>
Architect X1 can still be read by the program Save As... to save the plan.
they were created in.
Note: Chief Architect X1 automatically

archives plans created in prior versions.
Archived files are appended with their version
number and can be found in your Archive
folder. See “Auto Archive” on page 162.
158
Creating a New Plan
Creating a New Plan

Classroom Design Project Training If no plan template has been specified in the
Video: Creating a Plan File from a Tem- Preferences dialog, a new plan is created
plate File using the system defaults. System defaults
cannot be modified.
Create a new, blank plan by selecting
File> New Plan or choosing New Plan New plan files are created in either Imperial
in the Startup Options dialog. A new, or Metric units of measurement, depending
blank plan is called Untitled.plan. Unless on the current units setting in the New Plans
this plan is named and saved, it is lost when panel of the Preferences dialog. When the
it is closed. See “Startup Options” on page 2. program is first installed, the Windows OS
setting for units determines what system is
New plan files are created as a copy of the
used. See “New Plans Panel” on page 194.
current template plan specified in the
Preferences dialog. See “Template Files” The units of measurement must be specified
on page 167. Commonly used settings and before a plan is created and cannot be
defaults are included in the template plan changed later. If you normally work in one
file. You should open this file, customize the set of units but need to create a new plan in
settings to fit your work style, and save your the other, use the File> New Plan From
changes as a separate file. See “To create Template feature to open up an
your own template plan” on page 168. appropriate template plan without changing
your Preferences.
Management
Creating a New Layout
File
Open a new blank layout by choosing See “To create your own template plan” on
File> New Layout. You can also create page 168.
a new layout on the fly from the Send to
Layout dialog. The layout file is called Note: Only one layout file can be open at any
Untitled.layout. See “Creating a Layout given time.
File” on page 971.
The new layout is created as a copy of the
current layout template specified in the
Preferences dialog. See “New Plans
You can create your own layout template
with commonly used settings, title blocks,
and any other data you use for your layouts.
159
Saving a Plan or Layout File

When you first save a new plan file, you adds the extension .layout when you save a
must give it a name. By default, a new layout layout file.
file uses the same name of the first plan file
Initially, all Open or Save As operations go
sent to it, associating the layout files with the
to the “My Documents” folder of your
plan files used. Once you understand the file
computer. After that, the path last visited is
management of Chief Architect, you should
remembered and subsequent File> Open or
decide on a naming convention that suits
File> Save As commands default to that
your needs. Select File> Save to bring up
directory. This path is saved when the
the Save Plan File dialog.
program exits. The next time Chief Architect
is launched, these defaults are used.
Archive folders are used by Chief Archi-

tect to manage prior versions of your
files.You should never explicitly save a file to
an archive folder.
This behavior can be changed to use a

In the File name text box, enter a name for specific directory every time you perform an
the plan. Chief Architect automatically Open or Save As operation. To do this,
attaches the extension .plan to plan files and modify the settings in the Preferences
dialog. See “New Plans Panel” on page 194.
Organizing your Files

You should keep plans separate from the ent inside his folder, including both the
support files needed to run Chief Architect. plan and layout files.
To keep files organized, it is helpful to create
a new folder for each project. To specify a default Save As location
Here is one way to organize your files:
1. Select Edit> Preferences> New Plans
• Create a folder on your hard drive called
“Chief Architect Plans” or another name .
you prefer. See the Windows Help for 2. Under Open and Save As, click Use this
instructions on how to create folders. Folder. The Browse button becomes
• Inside this folder, make a new folder for available.
each client. Save all the files for that cli-
160
Save and Save As
3. Browse to the folder you plan to save

your projects in. Click OK.
Save and Save As

Use File> Save As when you want to
Video: Saving and Storing Plan Files
save the plan or layout file using a different
There are two options for saving name or location on your computer.
plan and layout files: File> Save
and File> Save As. File> Save As saves any other files
needed for that specific model in the correct
File> Save saves the current state of your directory with the new name.
plan or layout file without changing its name
and should normally be used for saving your File> Save As is a good way to create
work. backups of your files. It is recommended,
however, that you avoid saving directly to a
Any previously saved cross section/elevation
usb device or server. Instead, copy your files
views and CAD Details associated with the
to such locations after you have closed the
3D model are also saved with this command.
program.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all the links to the Although the program warns you if you
various views saved in the layout, and all the try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
CAD objects added to the .layout file.
the program.
Management
You should never save a file to an
archive folder. See “Auto Archive” on
File
page 162.
Saving a Plan Thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps If thumbnails are enabled on the General
identify a file. Any view of a plan such as a panel of the Preferences dialog, the
floor plan view or render overview can be program automatically creates one when you
saved as the plan thumbnail. The thumbnail first save a new plan. You can choose to
displays in the preview window of the Open generate small or large thumbnails. See
Plan File dialog and in the Find Plan “General Panel” on page 190.
Wizard when you use the Search for Plans
To save a thumbnail for the current plan,
feature.
make sure the view you want to use is on
161
screen, then select File> Save Plan filename as the current plan with the _p.jpg
Thumbnail . file extension for plans and _l.jpg for
layouts. If a plan thumbnail already exists,
You must save the plan and give it a name the program asks if you want to overwrite the
before you can save a plan thumbnail. existing thumbnail.
Thumbnails are saved using the same
Auto Archive
When a plan is first saved, Chief Architect archiving interval is determined on the
creates an Archive folder at the same General panel of the Preferences dialog.
location as the .plan file. The Archive folder See “General Panel” on page 190.
contains Auto Save and Archive files.
Previous
Save
Daily
Hourly
Archive folder illustrating

Automatically generated archive folder all three archive options
Auto Save and Archive files should not be Plan, layout and related files from previous
viewed as a substitute for regularly saving versions of the program are automatically
moved to the archive folder when the plan is
your work by selecting File> Save or
opened and saved in Chief Archtect X1.
pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard.
Archive files are meant to be for emergency
You should never save a file to an use only. If you must access an archive file,
archive folder. open it as you would any other file. See
“Opening a Plan or Layout File” on page
Archive Files 164. As soon as the file is open, use Save As
to save this file to another location.
Every time a model is saved, internal archive
files are automatically created that keep a If you open an archive file and do not
historical archive of your plan. save it to a new location, you create a
new archive folder inside the original archive
Files can be archived by hour, day or most
folder. Path names exceeding 260 characters
recent save. They are renamed according to cannot be opened by Chief Architect.
which archive option is chosen. The
162
Auto Archive
If you Save a Chief Architect version 10

.plan file (not Save As ) Auto Archive
will create an additional archive file with
“_v10” appended. This archived file is a
copy of the original version 10 file and can
still be opened in version 10.
Manage Archives
Chief Architect offers two convenient ways Auto Save file after normal shut-down
to access Archive folders. You can enable Auto Save and set its
• Select File> Manage Auto Archives frequency in the Preferences dialog. See
to open the current plan’s Archive folder. “General Panel” on page 190.
• Click Yes in the Archived Files dialog Auto save files created as a result of an
when the program warns you that the improper program shutdown are appended
number of archive files exceeds the Auto _auto_save_bak.plan or
Archive Files value. _auto_save_bak.layout.
You can also move or delete archived files

using Windows Explorer. See your Windows
documentation for more information.
Auto Save Files
Management
As you work, Chief Architect automatically
creates Auto Save files at regular intervals
File
when changes are made to a file but not Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
saved by selecting File> Save .
If your computer shuts down accidentally,
These Auto Save files are appended you can recover some of your work by
_auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout and opening the _auto_save_bak file.
are saved in the Archive folder.
A file is auto saved only if you have
When you close a file normally, its Auto saved it previously. Auto Save does not
Save file is retained until the next time the work for unnamed files.
file is opened and the Auto Save file is
overwritten. When you reopen a file after a computer shut
down or system crash, the following dialog
displays if an Auto Save file newer than the
original file is found.
163
• Click the Save button.
• Select File> Save .

• Press Ctrl + S or F3 on the keyboard.
Even with Auto Save, you should save your
work manually on a regular basis using any
of the following methods:
Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies should clean up when Chief Architect is not
of all open plan file changes, known as undo running.
files. Undo files are stored in the Undo
The maximum number of Undo files is
Directory, which can be specified on the
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
Directories panel of the Preferences
the Preference settings. If you have Undo
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 192.
enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
By default, the undo directory is the hard drive with enough space for these files.
Windows Temporary Directory. When you
When Chief Architect is closed normally,
use Windows system cleanup features, these
any current Undo files are deleted.
files can be deleted. Because of this, you
Opening a Plan or Layout File

Select File> Open Plan to open selected, a thumbnail preview of the plan
an existing .plan file or File> displays if one is available.
Open Layout to open an existing .layout
To open files of a different type, select one
file. Chief Architect automatically browses
from the Files of type list.
to either the directory last used or to a
specific directory, depending on your current The Open Plan File and Open Layout
Preference settings. File dialogs can be resized to list more files
by clicking and dragging the lower right
In the main window, all available plans of the
corner.
chosen file type located in the current
directory display in the list. When a file is
164
Project Browser
Click on a file name and it displays in the File menu. Click a recent file to open the file
File name box. If a preview image of the file without using the Open Plan File dialog.
is available, it will display on the right side
The maximum number of recent files listed
of the dialog. Click OK to open the file.
in the File menu can be changed on the
The names of the plan files you most recently General panel of the Preferences dialog.
opened or saved display at the bottom of the See “General Panel” on page 190.
Project Browser
Management
The Project Browser is a convenient You can open files listed in the Library and
way access to all the floors, cameras, Project Browser by double-clicking them.
File
elevations, CAD Details, Wall Details, and You can rename some files by right-clicking
Materials Lists saved with the current plan. them and selecting Rename.
The Project Browser is shared with the
Library Browser in the Library and
Project Browser window. You can dock it
to the top, bottom, or sides of the Chief
Architect window or let it float freely.
To open the Library and Project
Browser directly, select Tools> Project
Browser... . You can also use one of the
many methods to open the Library Browser,
then simply click the Project Browser tab.
See “The Library Browser” on page 670.
165
1 Any CAD details you have saved with

the plan display here. Right-click a
CAD detail name to rename it.
1 2 Any vector views or render views you
2 saved with your plan display here by
floor. Save or rename cameras views within
3 the plan view by selecting and opening the
camera object. See “Saving 3D Views” on
4 page 747.
5 3 Any saved cross sections/elevations

display here. Save or rename these
views by opening the camera object. See
6 “Saving 3D Views” on page 747.
4 All the Floors in the current plan

display here. Double-click a floor to go
to the floor plan view for that floor.
5 All materials lists saved with the

current plan are listed here. See
“Materials Lists” on page 1003.
Library and Project Browser 6 Whenever wall framing is generated,

wall details are automatically created as
in a floating state (not docked) well and display here by floor. See “Wall
Framing Details” on page 492.
Project Information
Information about the current project, the which is initially populated by registered
client it is drawn for, and the registered Chief user information. See “Text & Page Setup
Architect user can be inserted into text Panel” on page 189.
objects to improve organization and clarity in
To override designer information for a
your documents. See “Text Macros” on page
particular plan, select Tools> Project
826.
Information> Designer Information to
open the Designer Information dialog.
Designer Information See “Designer Information Dialog” on page
Designer information is specified in the 839.
Default Designer Information dialog,
166
Template Files
Client Information Registered User Information

Select Tools> Project Information> Client Registered User information corresponds to
Information to open the Client the information that was given when the
Information dialog and enter data current Chief Architect installation was
regarding the client that the current plan is registered and cannot be modified without
drawn for. reinstalling and registering the program. See
“User Information” on page 10.
Template Files
When Chief Architect opens a new, If you make changes to your default
blank plan or layout file, this new file template, all subsequently drawn plans are
is actually a copy of a template created using created with the new default settings.
either metric or Imperial units of
You can designate the template directory that
measurement and with predefined default
you would like in the Preferences dialog.
settings, layer settings, wall definitions, and
See “Folders Panel” on page 192.
page setup information.
You can specify what templates the program Opening Template Plans
refers to when creating new files and can
create and customize templates for metric If you have more than one configuration that
and Imperial plans so they include the you like to use, you can create additional
settings that you regularly use. template plans and open whichever template
is needed for a project.
Management
You can specify which templates are used
when a new plan or layout file is opened in Choose File> Templates> Open Plan
File
the Preferences dialog. See “New Plans Template or Open Layout Template
to create a new plan or layout file using a
When you select a template file, the program different template than the current default
opens a copy with the name untitled.plan. specified in your preferences.
This keeps the original unchanged so it is
When opening a template plan, the program
available for use again.
browses to the Templates directory specified
Once you are familiar with the default in the Directories tab of the Preferences
settings in Chief Architect, you can create dialog.
template plan files to fit your needs, store
them in the plan templates directory, and set Note: Make sure you use the appropriate
the files of your choice as the defaults for units when you create a template plan. The
Imperial or metric units used in the new plan
new files.
are the same as when the template was
saved.
167
To create your own template plan default template whenever you select
File> New Plan . Click No if you
1. Select File> New Plan . prefer to access this template by select-
ing File> New Plan From Template
2. Select Edit> Defaults Settings...
.
and go through each item, opening the
dialogs and modifying the settings as 10. The current plan remains untitled, but a
needed. See “Default Settings” on page copy of it is saved for use as a template.
176.
To set a template plan as your default
3. Select Tools> Display Settings> Dis-
play Options and create any custom 1. Go to the Edit> Preferences> Gen-
layers, layer sets and layer settings that eral> New Plans panel.
you typically use. See “Layers” on page 2. Click Imperial or Metric Units.
215.
3. Click the Browse button for a plan or
4. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall layout.
Types and create any custom wall 4. Select a template plan from the Tem-
types that you often use. See “Wall Type plates directory or navigate to a different
Definitions Dialog” on page 251. location and select a template plan from
there.
5. Select 3D> 3D Settings and set up
your backdrop and other options for 3D
Note: You should back up any template files
views. See “3D Settings Dialog” on you are using. You can access and back
page 757. them up using Windows Explorer.
6. If you draw anything in the template
plan, it displays in all new plans created Updating Templates
with that template.
When you make a change to the settings in a
7. You can insert text macros into the tem- plan file, the template plan is not affected. To
plate. See “Text Macros” on page 826. change the default settings in your template,
8. After modifying all your default set- you must open the template file, make the
tings, select File> Templates> Save change and choose File> Templates> Save
Plan As Template... . Name the tem- Plan as Template . Select the name of
plate plan and save it in the Templates the template from the list of files in the
directory. Templates directory. When the program asks
if you want to replace the existing file, click
9. In the Change Default Template
Yes.
dialog, click Yes to use the plan as your
168
Searching for Plans
Searching for Plans

Choose File> Search for Plans... to At the bottom of each page, the number of
locate an existing plan. This command plans that match your current search
opens the Find Plan Wizard that allows parameters displays. As you modify the
you to search specific plan database files and parameters, this number increases or
define specific search parameters. decreases as matching plans are found.
On any page, click the Back button to
Find Plan Wizard modify any previously selected parameters
The Find Plan Wizard can be used to and change the search results.
search for plans using stored information Click the Next button to select the number of
about each plan, such as the style of bathrooms, size and desired price range.
construction or the number of a specified
type of room. Click the Next button to see previews of the
plans that match your current search
When you open the Find Plan Wizard, parameters. Select any of the available plans
choose a plan database to search. When you to see a preview picture of the plan, if one
first run Chief Architect, there is only one exists. See “Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on
plan database containing the sample plans page 161.
that come with the program. Click the
Browse button to select a different plan Select Next and then the Finish button to
database. You must create a plan database open the plan you selected.
before you can use the Find Plan Wizard
to locate files you created. Creating a Plan Database File
Management
Click the Next button to select the style of Select Tools> Plans Database>
File
house desired, the number of floors in the Create Plan Database to create a new
house, and the number of bedrooms. plan database file that can be used to search
for plans using the Plan Find Wizard. The
Create Plan Database dialog opens.
2
3
4
169
1 Use the Database File field to name When you click OK, the program searches
the plan database file to be created. for plan files and adds them to the plan
Click the Browse button to save this file at database file. The program must read each
the location of your choice. If you choose a plan and analyze it so this process may take
plan database file that already exists, the some time.
program asks you if you want to overwrite
You can Cancel the search process at any
the existing file.
time. If you do, your plan database will have
2 The Plan Search Path allows you to incomplete information and will not contain
specify the folder where the plans you entries for all plans in your search folder.
want included in the plan database are stored. When all plans have been found and added to
The program searches for any plan files that the plan database, the program automatically
exist in this folder and adds entries in the opens the new plan database file for
plan database for them. You can navigate to a modification.
particular folder on your machine using the
Browse button. Editing a Plan Database File
3 The Include Subfolders checkbox Once a plan database file is created, it
allows you to specify whether or not the it can be modified. Select Tools> Plans
search looks only in the Plan Search Path or Database> Edit Plan Database, then select
if it also searches any subfolders found. the plan database file you want to modify.
4 Check Use Relative Path if you Click OK to open the Edit Plan Database
anticipate moving the folder containing dialog. You can edit any of the information in
the database and plans to another location. the plan database and add and remove plans
As long as the database and the plans it from the database.
references remain in the same folder, the
folder can be moved to another location.
170
Searching for Plans
Edit Plan Database Dialog
1
6
7 13
8
9
10
11
14
12
2
3
4
5
1 Plans in the Database - All plans that Plan button, you are asked to do so before
currently have information stored in the you continue.
plan database are listed here.
6 Style - Select a plan style from the drop
Add Plan - Click this button to select a down list for the selected plan. You can
2
plan file to add to the plan database. also create a new plan style by typing in the
Management
name of the new style in the blank area.
3 Remove Plan - Click this button to
remove the currently selected plan from
7 Price - Enter the price range for this
File
the plan database. plan.
4 Select File - Click this button to relink 8 Area - The area is automatically
the entry in the plan database to a plan calculated by the program based on the
file on your system. If a plan file is been living area of the plan when it is added to the
removed, renamed, or moved on your database. You can modify this data and enter
system, the plan database does not know how your own area.
to locate it. You must then relink the plan
database to the file or remove it to keep the 9 Bedrooms - The number of bedrooms
is automatically calculated by the
plan database information accurate.
program when a plan is added to the
5 Open Plan - Click this button to open database. You can modify this data and enter
any of the plans referenced in the plan your own number of bedrooms.
database. Opening a plan closes the Plan
Database dialog. If you have not saved any 10 Baths - The number of bathrooms is
automatically calculated by the
changes you made before clicking the Open
171
program when a plan is added to the

12 Description - Enter a description for
database. You can modify this data and enter the plan, if desired. This description
your own number of bathrooms. displays when a plan is found and selected
using the Search for Plans tool.
11 Floors - The number of floors is
automatically calculated by the
13 Plan Thumbnail - You can create a
program when a plan is added to the thumbnail preview for any plan. See
database. You can modify this data and enter “Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on page 161.
your own number of floors.
14 File Path - The file path of the selected
plan displays here.
Closing Plans and Views

Choose File> Close to close the active saving. Select Cancel to close the dialog and
window. If this is the last open view for a return to the window.
plan and you did not save first, the program
Select File> Close All to close all currently
reminds you to save before closes. Edited
open windows.
cross section/elevation views also ask you to
save changes before closing. Select Yes to
save it, or No to close the window without
Exporting a Plan
The simplest way to transfer a model to another, you may see warning messages
another directory or another computer is to when you open these files on a computer that
use the Save As feature. Open the plan in does not have these referenced files. When
transferring plans to another computer that
Chief Architect, choose File> Save As , does not include the external files, it is
and save to the desired drive and folder. The usually better to use File> Export Entire
program makes sure that all plan files are
saved along with the new copy. This is a Plan . See “Exporting an Entire Plan” on
good way to create backups of your work. page 173.
Plan files can have references to other When transferring layout files, be aware that
external data files such as imported bitmaps, the plan files are also external file references
textures, images, backdrops, and pattern and are not actually contained in the layout
files. These external files are not file. Using Save As on a layout file only
automatically saved with the plan files with copies the layout file but not the referenced
the Save As command. If you transfer a plan files. You should always use the File>
set of plan files from one computer to Export Entire Plan to copy all the
172
Exporting an Entire Plan
associated files instead of Save As for You should store all files for a single job in
layout files. the same folder so all the associated files are
in a single place. If you use this strategy, it is
Individual files can also be copied or be much easier to transfer files because you
transferred manually with Windows can use Windows Explorer to copy the entire
Explorer. After transferring files manually, folder.
be sure to open the copy and look for any
error messages about missing files.
Exporting an Entire Plan

Because Chief Architect plans and layouts • Choose Export All Files to copy all
often contain many references to other plan or layout files and all externally
external files, it is sometimes necessary to referenced files such as linked plan
save or copy all the associated files to a new files, inserted picture files, custom pat-
location. This can be useful when trying to tern files, and any graphics files such
transfer plan files to another computer or as textures, images, and backdrops.
when sending them to another user. It is also • Choosing Export Plan Files Only cop-
useful for archiving plan or layout files ies all associated plan files and any
because all externally referenced or linked externally linked files and inserted pic-
files are included. ture files, but it does not copy any
graphics or pattern files. This is best
To export a plan and all associated files used when transferring a plan or layout
file to a computer that already has the
Management
Note: Always use File> Export> Entire Plan graphics files installed.
when sending files to a user of the Chief
File
Architect Client Viewer to make sure that they 2. When you click the OK button in the
have all associated data. Export Entire Plan dialog, the
Browse for Folder dialog opens.
1. To copy all associated plan or layout Here you can select the destination
files to a new directory, select File> folder for the associated plan files.
Export> Entire Plan... . The
Export Entire Plan dialog opens for
you to choose what files are copied.
173
3. Navigate to any folder on your system,

to an external storage device, or create a
new folder.
You must select an empty folder for the

Export Entire Plan feature to work. If
you select an existing folder that is not empty,
the export is cancelled.
Returning Client Viewer Files

When customers review and annotate a plans
using the Client Viewer, they only need to
return the .plan and .layout files. The
associated files do not need to be returned.
Exiting Chief Architect

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you When you exit from the program using File>
have not saved any open plans, you are Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
reminded to do so. It is better to actively save automatically deleted.
your work before exiting the program than to
save on exit.
174
Chapter 5:
Defaults &
Preferences
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Prefer- • Colors Panel
ences and Defaults • Font Panel
• Library Browser Panel
• Text & Page Setup Panel
Video: Defaults and Preferences
• General Panel
Becoming familiar with the program defaults • Folders Panel
and preferences is vital to understanding how • New Plans Panel
Chief Architect works. • Layers Panel
• Unit Conversions Panel
If you use special settings regularly, it is
Preferences
• Time Tracker Panel
a good idea to save your settings in a • Architectural Panel
template plan. See “To create your own tem- • CAD Panel
plate plan” on page 168.
• Line Properties Panel
• Sun Angle Panel
Chapter Contents • Edit Panel
• Default Settings • Behaviors Panel
• Dynamic Defaults • Snap Properties Panel
• Plan Defaults • Material List Panel
• Reset to Defaults • Report Style Panel
• Preferences Dialog • Master List Panel
• Appearance Panel • Categories Panel
175
• Render Panel • Reset Options Panel

• Texture Filter Panel
Default Settings
Classroom Design Project Training Cabinet Defaults
Video: Setting Defaults for New Plan
Files Click the + beside Cabinets or double-click
Classroom Design Project Training the Cabinet Tools parent button to

Video: Setting Defaults Before Begin- access the defaults dialogs for the various
ning cabinet types. See “Cabinet Defaults” on
page 552.
Default settings apply within a Chief
Architect plan. Setting defaults before you Select General Cabinet and click the Edit
begin drawing can save you time. If you have button to open the General Cabinet
a particular group of defaults that you use Defaults dialog. See “General Cabinet
often on many plans, you can save the Defaults” on page 580.
defaults to a template. See “Opening
Template Plans” on page 167. CAD Defaults
Access Default Settings by selecting Select CAD and click the Edit button to
Edit> Default Settings.... open the CAD Defaults dialog. You can
also use the CAD Defaults button to
access the dialog if you add it to your toolbar
using Toolbar Customization. See “CAD
Defaults Dialog” on page 878.
Camera Defaults
Select Camera and click the Edit button or
double-click the Render Tools parent
button to display the Camera Defaults
dialog. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on page
755.
Dimension Defaults
Select Dimension and click the Edit button
or double-click the double-click the Dimen-
sion Tools parent button to display the
176
Default Settings
Dimension Defaults dialog. See dialog. See “Foundation Defaults” on page

“Dimension Defaults” on page 796. 372.
Door Defaults Framing Defaults

Click the + beside Doors or double-click the Select Framing and click the Edit button or
Door Tools parent button to to access the double-click the Framing Tools parent
defaults dialogs for exterior and interior button to open the Framing Defaults
doors. See “Door Defaults” on page 305. dialog. See “Framing Defaults” on page 469.
Dormer Defaults Layer Sets Defaults

Select Dormer and click the Edit button or Select Layer Sets and click the Edit button
double-click the Auto Floating Dormer to open the Layer Sets Defaults dialog.
See “Layer Set Defaults” on page 216.
or the Auto Dormer child button to open
the Dormer Defaults dialog. See “Dormer
Material Defaults
Click the + beside Materials to access the
Electrical Defaults defaults dialogs related to materials.
Select Electrical and click the Edit button or Select General Materials and click the Edit
button to open the Material Defaults
double-click the Electrical Tools parent dialog. See “Material Defaults Dialog” on
button to display the Electrical Defaults page 721.
dialog. See “Electrical Defaults” on page
534. Select Room Materials and click the Edit
button to open the Room Material
Floor Defaults Defaults dialog for the current floor. See
“Room Material Defaults” on page 280.
Select Floor and click the Edit button,
double-click the Floor Tools parent but-
Plan and Layout Defaults
Preferences
ton to open the Floor Defaults dialog for Select Plan or Layout and click the Edit
the current floor. See “Floor Defaults” on button or double-click the Select Objects
page 364.
button to open the Plan or Laout
Defaults dialog. See “Plan Defaults” on
Foundation Defaults
page 180 and “Layout Defaults” on page
Select Foundation and click the Edit button 990.
or click the Build Foundation child
button or the Foundation Wall child
button to open the Build Foundation
177
Road, Sidewalk, & Select Window Schedule and click the Edit
Driveway Defaults button to access the Window Schedule
Defaults dialog.
Click the + beside Roads, Sidewalks and
Driveways or double-click the Road Tools Select Cabinet Schedule and click the Edit
button to access the Cabinet Schedule
parent button to access the defaults Defaults dialog.
dialogs for the various road tools. See “Road
and Sidewalk Defaults” on page 629. Select Fixture Schedule and click the Edit
button to access the Fixture Schedule
Select Road and click the Edit button, dou- Defaults dialog.
ble-click the Road Tools parent button, Select Furniture Schedule and click the
or double-click the Road child button to Edit button to access the Furniture
Schedule Defaults dialog.
open the Road Defaults dialog.
Select Driveway and click the Edit button or Select Electrical Schedule and click the
Edit button to access the Electrical
double-click the Driveway child button Schedule Defaults dialog.
to open the Driveway Defaults dialog.
Select Road Marking and click the Edit Text, Callout, &
Marker Defaults
button or double-click the Road Stripe
Click the + beside Text access the various
or Road Marking child button to open
Text Defaults dialogs. See “Text Defaults
the Road Marking Defaults dialog.
and Preferences” on page 818.
Select Sidewalk and click the Edit button or
Select Text and click the Edit button,
double-click the Sidewalk child button double-click the Text Tools parent
to open the Sidewalk Defaults dialog.
button, or double-click the Text child
Schedule Defaults button to display the Text Defaults dialog.
See “Text Defaults” on page 838.
Click the + beside Schedules or double-click
Select Callouts and click the Edit button or
the Schedule Tools parent button to
access a list of the default schedule dialogs. double-click the Callout child button to
Select the type of schedule and click the Edit display the Callout Defaults dialog. See
button. See “Schedule Defaults” on page “Callout and Marker Defaults” on page 838.
992. Select Markers and click the Edit... button
Select Door Schedule and click the Edit or double-click the Marker child button
button to access the Door Schedule to display the Marker Defaults dialog. See
Defaults dialog. “Callout and Marker Defaults” on page 838.
178
Dynamic Defaults
Select Room Label and click the Edit... Select Railing and click the Edit button or
button to open the Room Label Defaults
double-click the Straight Railing child
dialog. See “Room Label Defaults” on page
button to open the Railing Defaults
838.
dialog. See “Railing Defaults Dialog” on
Select Arrow and click the Edit... button or page 229.
double-click the Text Line with Arrow Select Deck Railing and click the Edit but-
or Leader Line child button to open the ton or double-click the Deck Railing
Arrow Defaults dialog. See “Arrow child button to open the Railing Defaults
Defaults” on page 839. dialog. See “Railing Defaults Dialog” on
page 229.
Wall, Railing, and Select Fencing and click the Edit button or
Fencing Defaults
double-click the Fencing child button to
Select General Wall and click the Edit... open the Fencing Defaults dialog. See
button or double click the General Wall “Fencing Defaults Dialog” on page 229.
Defaults toolbar button to open the
General Wall Defaults dialog. See Window Defaults
“General Wall Defaults Dialog” on page 274.
Select Window and click the Edit... button
Select Interior/Exterior Wall and click the
Edit... button or double-click the Exterior or double-click the Window Tools
parent button to open the Window
Wall or Interior Wall child button Defaults dialog. See “Window Defaults” on
open the Interior/Exterior Wall page 328.
Defaults dialog. See “Exterior/Interior Wall
Defaults Dialog” on page 276. Reset Defaults
Select Pony Wall and click the Edit button Select Edit> Reset to Defaults... to open the
or double-click the Pony Wall child Reset to Defaults dialog. Use this dialog
button to open the Pony Wall Defaults to clear special settings made in various parts
Preferences
dialog. See “Pony Wall Defaults Dialog” on of your plan. See “Reset to Defaults” on page
page 277. 182.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set Dynamic defaults are followed by either a
or changed globally throughout a model. (D) in the value field or a Default check box.
These values are found in the default You can change the value for that kind of
specification dialogs of most objects, object and all the objects of the same type
including walls, doors, cabinets and rooms. update automatically. The exception to this
179
rule is any object you edited the values for. In To reset a value back to the dynamic default,
that case, the value does not update when type the letter D in the field or click the
you change the dynamic default value. Default checkbox.
Any object that has a material applied to it is
also using a dynamic default. Materials are
almost always set to “Use Default.” If you
change a default material, many objects in
the plan may also change. See “Material
CAD objects use layers in much the same
way other objects use dynamic defaults. If
you change the layer information in the
To edit a dynamic default, delete the (D) or Display Options dialog, any object that is
remove the check from Default box and type currently using the settings “By Layer” for
the desired value. an attribute, such as line style or color,
update whenever you change those settings.
Plan Defaults
Plan defaults control basic features of the
Chief Architect environment. To open the Settings... , select Plan Defaults, and
Plan Defaults dialog, select Edit> Default
click the Edit... button, or double-click the
Select Objects button.
180
Plan Defaults
Plan Defaults Dialog
1 2
3 4
1 Warn Before Delete Selected Item - number as the living area in floor plan view.
Check this box if you want the program Remove the check from this box to disable
to require confirmation before an item is the total Living Area label.
deleted.
Enter the number of Inches Scrolled by
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize - Check Arrow Key in floor plan view.
this box to allow openings such as doors to
be moved right up to an intersecting wall. 2 Specify the Allowed Angles used when
Angle Snaps are enabled. See “Angle
Clear the box to place openings within the
specified trim width of an intersecting wall.
Preferences
• Select 15 Degrees to enable Angle Snaps
Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable - Check in 15 degree increments.
this box to allow the resizing of library
symbols in floor plan or any 3D view. When • Select 7 1/2 Degrees and additional
enabled, fixture and furniture objects can be angles to enable Angle Snaps in 7 ½
resized from 1 to 2000 inches. degree increments.
Show Pitch as Degrees - Check this box to You can also enter up to eight Additional
display the roof pitch in degrees. Angles in the fields provided. Click the
Number Style button to specify the format
Show “Living Area” - Chief Architect used to enter angles. See “Number Style/
automatically calculates the square footage Angle Style Dialog” on page 873.
of each floor in the plan and shows this
181
3 The Snap Grid allows you to snap Snap Grid Color, and whether the snap grid
objects to specific points on-screen as should Display as Dots rather than lines.
they are moved or resized. To enable grid
snapping, check Use Snap Grid/Units. 4 Choose whether to Show Reference
Grid, choose the Reference Grid Size,
Specify the Snap Unit you prefer.
and choose the Grid Color. You can also
choose whether the reference grid should
It may be helpful to change the Snap
Unit temporarily when working with cer- Display as Dots, or as lines.
tain objects such as stairs or terrain.
You can also click Grid Snaps toggle
You can snap to an invisible grid or you can button to turn on/off grid snapping or click
Show Snap Grid, a visual indicator of where the Display Reference Grid toggle
the snap points are. You can also choose the button to turn on/off the grid display. See
“Grid Snaps” on page 85.
Reset to Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the
2 Floor and Ceiling Heights - Floor and
Reset to Defaults dialog. ceiling heights for any room can be
changed in the Room Specification
This dialog allows you to clear the special
dialog. Check to reset the default values as
settings you have made in various parts of
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog. See
your plan.
“Floor Defaults” on page 364.
3 Roof Groups - You can designate a

different roof group for a room in the
1 Room Specification dialog. This builds
the roof over this room and others in the
same roof group independently from the roof
built over other parts of the plan. Check to
2 reset to the default roof group, zero. See
3 “Room Specification Dialog” on page 296.
4
5 4 Roof Directives - You can set
directives describing how a roof surface
rises from a wall into a wall using the Roof
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. All
Roof tab items are unchecked and any value,
such as the roof pitch, is reset to the default
1 The settings can be cleared for the pitch. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
current floor or for All Floors. page 259.
182
Preferences Dialog
5 Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom If your plan behaves strangely, the cur-
Heights - Wall shape and height can be
edited in cross section/elevation views. rent settings may have been brought
Check to reset wall shapes and heights. forward from a previous version and/or no
longer be appropriate. To check for this, open
your plan and reset these items to their
defaults. Rebuild floors and ceilings to see if
the plan looks better. If so, you know what the
problem is. Rather than save your plan at this
point and lose all these settings, you may
want to investigate and find the specific set-
tings causing the problem and fix only those.
Preferences Dialog
The settings in the Preferences
dialog are global; they apply to all plan
and layout files and are preserved between
sessions. Select Edit> Preferences to access
this dialog.
The Preferences dialog consists of panels.
Each panel is accessed by clicking on its
name in the category tree along the left side.
The dialog remembers what panel you last
accessed and opens to that panel the next
time. The “+” then becomes a “-”; to hide the
subcategories, press the “-.”
Preferences
The category tree structure is similar to other
Windows programs. A “+” next to a category
indicates that it has subcategories to choose
from. Click the “+” to make the
subcategories visible.
183
Appearance Panel
1 5
6
2
7
3
8
1 When Contextual Menus are enabled, A menu of general commands displays if you
you can right-click an object and a right-click in the window away from any
contextual menu displays with options that object.
are unique to the selected object. The options
in a contextual menu are usually the same as
Video: Controlling Pop-up Contextual
those on the Edit toolbar.
Menus
184
Appearance Panel
determining the effectiveness of the 3D

acceleration of your graphics card.
• Check Show Coordinates to display the
coordinates of your cursor at all times on
the right side of the status bar.
The number style for the coordinates is

controlled in the Number Style/Angle
Style dialog. See “Number Style/Angle
Style Dialog” on page 873.
3 Check Show Line Weight to have the

line weight appear on-screen. Because
of monitor DPI, lines may appear to be much
wider on screen than when they are printed.
Zooming closer may reflect a more accurate
idea of the actual line width.
The contextual menu for a base cabinet
Min Display Weight - Specify the lowest
Since Chief Architect can use the right-click
line weight possible regardless of how far
as a general select, you have the option to
you zoom out. A Minimum Display Weight
disable or limit the contextual menus.
of 0 is the same as 1. This setting is ignored
• Check Enabled to activate contextual
when printing or when in Print Preview
menus. Clear the check box to disable
mode.
contextual menus.
• Check Click Twice to Display to require The line weight for CAD objects may be
two right-clicks on an object before the defined individually through each
contextual menu displays. This allows object’s specification dialog or globally in the
the first right-click to be a general select. Layer Display Options dialog.
Preferences
2 The Status Bar at the bottom of the 4 Specify how Toolbars present child
main window displays information tools when a parent button is clicked.
about the current state of the program. See
• Choose Parent-Child to display child
“The Status Bar” on page 8.
tools as buttons at the end of the toolbar
• Check Enable to activate the status bar or where the parent button resides.
clear the check box to disable it.
• Choose Drop Down to display child
• Check Show Screen Redraw Time to tools when the drop-down arrow to the
display the number of seconds it takes to right of the parent button is clicked.
redraw the screen. This is useful for
185
5 Show Icons - Check this box to display • Check Auto Cache to save a bitmap of
tool icons next to items in the menus. the last screen draw. This bitmap is used
to refresh the screen if no changes are
6 Double Buffer Drawing - Double made to the model. This option is not
buffering means that all drawing is
available on computers running Windows
done to an offscreen bitmap and then copied
Vista.
to the screen. The result is that the screen
does not flicker, but there may be a slight
7 Obey Color On/Off Setting- Uncheck
delay before individual objects appear on this to display pictures and images in
screen. This option does not affect render or color, even if color is turned off in a
raytrace views. particular view. If you check the box,
• Check Plans and Layouts to double- pictures and images appear in grey scale
buffer in floor plan view and layouts. when color is turned off.
• Check Elevations and Vector Views to 8 Enhanced Line Drawing - This option
double buffer in cross/section elevation produces superior quality vector views,
and vector views. but slows down the process. Remove the
check mark to disable the option.
Colors Panel
1
2
3
4
5
1 Background Color - Click the color 2 Move Color - Click the color bar to
bar to open the standard Windows open the Color Chooser dialog.
Color Chooser dialog. See “Color Select the color of the lines that represent
Chooser Dialog” on page 722. Select the object(s) as they are being moved.
background color for all views except render
views. The background color for render 3 Handle Fill Color - Click the color bar
to open the Color Chooser dialog.
views is set in the 3D Settings dialog. See
Select the color for the edit handles for
“Backdrop Tab” on page 760.
selected objects.
186
Font Panel
4 Selection Fill Color - Click the color

bar to open the Color Chooser If the move color and the handle fill
dialog. Specify a color for selected objects. color are similar, it may be difficult to
The color may change to ensure that selected distinguish between active and inactive
points. The colors should be sufficiently dis-
objects arealways visible, so this may not similar to avoid confusion between active and
always be the color you expect. inactive points.
5 Use Selection Fill in Render Views -

Check this to use the Selection Fill
Color when selecting and editing objects in
render views.
Font Panel
The Font panel controls the conversion of Chief Architect Version X1 as well as the
text in legacy plans when they are opened in text used in materials lists.
1
2
3
Preferences
1 Choose Legacy Text Conversion, Materials to define the font for that use.
Legacy Dimension Conversion, or
187
Legacy Text Conversion sets the default

2 Click the arrow to select a font for the
font for text created in previous versions of specified use. The program finds the
Chief Architect. See “Sizing Text” on page fonts currently installed on the computer and
824. makes them available.
Legacy Dimension Conversion sets the
3 Select one or more font styles to apply
fonts for dimensions created in previous to the specified use.
versions of Chief Architect. See “Sizing
Text” on page 824. 4 Sample text displays the selected font
and font style.
Materials sets the default font for the
Set the size of text objects individually in the
Materials List and Master Materials List
Text Specification dialog or globally on
created in previous versions of Chief
the Text tab of the Text Defaults dialog.
Architect.
Legacy Text and Dimension Conver-

sion settings only affect plans from
previous versions when they are
opened in Version X1. You should set these
values to the default font that you used in pre-
vious versions before opening legacy plans.
Library Browser Panel

The Library Browser panel controls the
appearance of the Library Browser window.
188
Text & Page Setup Panel
1 View options control the display of the Show Names in Selection Pane - Check to
main sections of the Library Browser. display the names of the objects in the
Selection Pane.
Hide Selection Pane - Check to hide the
pane that displays objects in a selected
3 Preview Pane - Selection Pane
library or library folder. Layout - Select a radio button to
change the appearance of the Library
Hide Preview Pane - Check to hide the pane
Browser.
that shows a preview of a selected object.
Vertical - Displayed sections of the Library
Show Status Bar - Check to display the
Browser are divided vertically.
Library Browser Status Bar. See “The
Library Browser” on page 670. Horizontal - Displayed sections are divided
horizontally.
2 Selection Pane View items control the
display style of objects in the Selection Stacked - Displayed sections are divided
Pane. both horizontally and vertically.
Tiled to Fit Window - Select to display all
4 Disable Docking - Check to prevent
objects in a library or library folder. If there the Library Browser from docking to
are many objects, they appear very small. the sides of the Chief Architect window. See
“Docking the Library Browser” on page 673.
Scrollable List - Select to display all library
objects at the highlighted level on a
scrollable list.
Text & Page Setup Panel

The Text & Page Setup panel controls some
text objects behavioris as well as the Page
Setup information for legacy plan and layout
files.
Preferences
Legacy Plan and Layout Page Setup
settings only affect plans from previous
versions when they are opened in Version
X1. You should set these values to the default
font that was used in previous versions of
Chief Architect before opening legacy plans.
See “Introduction” on page 1023.
189
1 Text Specification Enter Key - Check open a layout file created in an earlier
this box to insert a new line in the Text version of Chief Architect. See “Page Setup
Specification dialog when the Enter key Dialog” on page 963
is pressed. If this is not checked, pressing
Enter closes the Text Specification 4 Default Designer Information - Click
the Define button to enter designer
dialog. See “Text Specification Dialog” on
information that applies to all plans drawn in
page 830.
Chief Architect. This default may be
2 Click the Legacy Plan Page Setup overridden for individual plans. See “Project
button to open the Page Setup Information” on page 166.
dialog. These settings apply whenever you
open a plan, elevation, or CAD detail created 5 Leader Lines- Specify the Number of
in an earlier version of Chief Architect. See Segments that text Leader Lines
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 963. have. Changes to this setting only affects
subsequently drawn Leader Lines: existing
3 Click the Legacy Layout Page Setup lines are not affected.
button to open the Page Setup
dialog. These settings applied whenever you
General Panel
The General panel contains settings that affect
file management and program updates.
190
General Panel
1 6
2 7
3 8
5 9
1 To use Auto Save, select the Enable important when more than one computer has
check box and enter a value greater access to the same set of files at the same
than zero to specify the frequency in minutes time.
that auto save files are created. Auto save
Select Use File Locking to lock files by
files are stored in the archive folder.
default.
Note: Even with auto save active, you should Select Disable File Locking to disable the
frequently save your work to the hard drive by feature. You should not disable the feature
selecting File> Save . unless you have conflicts with file locking.
In the event that your computer shuts down 3 Recent File List - Specify the
maximum number of files to list at the
Preferences
unexpectedly, you can recover your most bottom of the File menu and in the Startup
recent work by opening the auto save file Options dialog. Additional files are
created by the program. See “Auto Save included if you increase the value. You can
Files” on page 163. open any of the files in this list by selecting
them, making the list a quick way to access
2 File Locking - Choose whether or not your most recent work.
to lock files when they are open. Only
.plan and .layout files are locked. Locking a
file prevents another program or copy of 4 Undo - Click in the Enable check box
to enable Undos and Redos.
Chief Architect from opening and modifying
the same file at the same time, which is Maximum Undos - Specify how many
levels of Undo and Redo you want available,
191
from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the Select a radio button for Small or Large
Undo Directory. thumbnails. Large thumbnails provide a
higher quality image.
Record undo state only if idle longer than -
Use this setting to control how often undo
7 Auto Archive Files - Select an archive
states are recorded. If set to 0 milliseconds, option. Every time a model is saved by
an undo state is recorded every time a change clicking the Save button, selecting File>
is made to a plan. Save from the menu, or pressing Ctrl + S on
If set to a number larger than 0, an undo state the keyboard the current archive file is
is recorded if the specified amount of time overwritten. See “Archive Files” on page
has elapsed since the last change was made. 162.
Depending on the time specified and the Select Hourly to save and append archive
speed work is being done, multiple changes files based on an hourly format.
might be reversed with one undo.
Select Daily to save and append archive files
This setting can have a significant effect on based on a daily format.
the performance of the undo feature when
working with large plans. Select Previous Save to archive only the
most recently saved file, unappended.
5 Check For Program Updates- Check
Enable and specify a frequency in days 8 Auto Archive Warning - Enter the
to check for program updates. By default number of files that must be in the
Chief Architect will check for program Archive directory for the Manage Archives
updates once a day, whenever the program is warning to display. Enter 0 to disable the
launched. warning. See “Manage Archives” on page
163.
56 Check the box to Enable Thumbnail
Images. This only applies to 9 Startup Options- Check Show
automatically created thumbnails. Even if Options at Startup to open the
this option is disabled, you can still create a Startup Options dialog when Chief
thumbnail manually. Architect is launched. See “Startup Options”
on page 2.
Folders Panel
Chief Architect stores many support files in another location. To define a new default
folders. The default locations of these directory, click the Browse button to specify
directories are listed and can be redefined in a folder on your computer.
the Folders panel if necessary.
Individual plan and layout files can be saved
You do not need to change default locations to a preferred location using the File> Save
under normal circumstances, but sometimes
As function.
it may be preferable to locate certain files in
192
Folders Panel
Temporary File Directories

Although it is not recommended, differ-
By default, undo files are stored in the same ent default directories for your graphics
directory as temporary files. You must define can be specified. You should never rename
a directory on a hard drive with sufficient these directories. If you do, the Chief Archi-
space to hold these files. tect Library Browser may not be able to find
them.
You can redefine any directory, but you
should neither relocate the Temporary You can rename or add a folder to any of
Directory nor use it for anything other than these directories as well as add your own
temporary files. graphics to the library. If you add, rename, or
Preferences
move any files or folders while Chief
Graphics Directories Architect is running, you must refresh the
Graphics are stored in three locations: the Library Browser to see your changes. See
Images, Textures, and Backdrops “Refresh Library Browser” on page 677.
directories.
193
New Plans Panel
1 New Plans - Select the Imperial Units

or Metric Units radio button to Be sure that you use an imperial plan
determine the units used in your new plans. for your imperial template file and a
Once you create a new plan, the units of that metric plan for your metric template file.
plan cannot be changed. You can specify a When a new plan is created, the plan is cre-
ated in the units of the template file regard-
different set of templates for imperial plans
less of the units setting.
and metric plans.
When Chief Architect is first opened on a Plan Template - Displays the plan template
computer, it refers to the Windows system file the program uses when you start a new
settings to determine whether to use Imperial plan. Click the Browse button to select the
or metric units. new template.
If a template file is not specified or cannot be Layout Template - Displays the layout plan
found, the program starts a new plan in the template the program uses when you start a
selected units but uses the system defined new layout file. Select a new default layout
defaults for new plans. template by typing in a new file pathname or
click the Browse button to select a new file.
For information about creating templates,
see “Template Files” on page 167.
194
Layers Panel
2 Open/Save As Directory - Control Use Last Directory refers the program to the
how the program behaves when a new directory last used to save or open a plan file.
plan is opened or an existing plan is saved. Use This Directory refers the program to a
particular location specified by you.
Layers Panel
1 Layers were managed differently in the default names used in Chief Architect
earlier versions of Chief Architect. The Version X1.
options on the Layers panel determine how
If you would like your legacy plans to look
layers are treated when you open plans
like they did in previous versions of Chief
created in earlier versions.
Architect, uncheck Purge Unused Layers,
Check Purge Unused Layers to delete any check Keep All Layer Numbers, and
layers that do not have a name and contain no uncheck Reset Default Layer Names.
objects.
Note: When loading legacy plans, there may
Check Keep All Layer Numbers to keep all be a noticeable delay while converting these
layers that were on the System and User tabs layers.
in version 9 and use their layer numbers as
names.
Preferences
2 If you check Modify Name In All
Check Reset Default Layer Names to reset Layer Sets and then change the name
the names of layers that were on the of a layer in one layer set, it will be changed
Architectural and System tabs in version 9 to in all layer sets. Clear the checkmark if you
want name changes to only affect a single
layer set.
Unit Conversions Panel

In many places throughout Chief Architect,
you can choose what units are used with
195
different objects. The program automatically it. This means that if you import a drawing
calculates conversions based on the data on that is already scaled, you must convert the
this panel. units using this panel. You must add the units
here for them to be available in the Import
These conversions are also useful when you
Drawing Wizard.
import drawings. Chief Architect draws
plans in real world measurements. When you The default unit conversions are locked and
draw an object, it appears small on screen, cannot be changed, but custom conversions
but the program sees it as actual size. The can be added to the list.
drawing is only scaled at the time you print
1 List of unit conversions available. 3 Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy the unit
conversions. Certain unit conversions
2 Sample - This area shows how the are locked and cannot be edited or deleted.
selected unit converts to a sampling of
similar units. Use this to verify that any unit If you click Add, Edit or Copy, the Add
conversion you add is correct. Unit Conversion dialog displays.
1
2
3
196
Time Tracker Panel
1 Unit Name - Type the name of the unit. measurement type must be selected before
Names must be unique. the list is populated.
2 Default Unit - Check this box to To create a new unit conversion

display this unit in places that present
lists of available units. For example, if you Create a unit conversion for furlongs, a unit
have inches as units and make inches a of measurement equal to 660 feet that
default, inches appear on the list when you originated in England.
are given a choice of units, such as in the
Import Drawing Wizard. In other places, 1. Click Add on the Unit Conversions
such as the Material List, all units are listed. page of the Preferences dialog to
open the Add Unit Conversion dia-
3 Measurement Type specifies what the log.
unit measures. Select the appropriate
radio button. 2. Type Furlong into the unit name dialog.
3. Select Length in the measurement type.
4 Multiply by gives you a number to
multiply by to convert to the unit you 4. Type 660 in the Multiply by field.
select from thedrop-down list. A 5. Select ft in the combo box.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
Time Tracker Panel
Preferences
Check Automatically Start Timer on File
click the Start Time Logging button to
Open to begin logging time whenever a file
begin logging.
is opened. If this is not checked you must
197
Check Stop timer if idle for __ minutes, You can enter or change the Default User
and enter the number of minutes to stop Name.
logging time when a plan has been idle.
For more information, see “Time Tracker” on
Check Display Idle Timeout Dialog to warn page 881.
when a plan is considered idle.
Architectural Panel
The options on the Architectural panel of the
Preferences dialog control how certain
types of objects are built.
1 Select the desired default behaviors for indicators point for doors, windows, and
selected Walls. cabinets. See “Displaying Cabinets” on page
555, “Displaying Doors” on page 308, or
Check Show Same Wall Type Handles to
“Displaying Windows” on page 335.
display edit handles on selected walls that
draw new walls of the same type when
3 Check Stair Sections Move
dragged. See “Same Wall Type Edit Independently to allow stair sections
Handles” on page 243. connected by landings to move separately,
without moving the entire staircase.
Check Select Room Before Wall in 3D to
select the room defined by a wall when you
4 Select the desired Skylight Ceiling
click on the wall in 3D views. See “Selecting Hole Default behavior.
If you select Skylights Automatically
Check Reverse Opening Indicators to Generate Ceiling Holes, the program
2
change the direction that opening
198
CAD Panel
automatically generates a ceiling hole for a Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole
new skylight. Polylines to create your own ceiling holes.
CAD Panel
The CAD panel contains settings that define
how CAD blocks and other objects behave.
1 CAD Blocks - These settings determine

the default fill style behavior for CAD
blocks. See “CAD Blocks” on page 870.
• Check Always use ’By Object’ for CAD
block fill style to retain the fill pattern for
component objects when they are
blocked. If you remove the check mark,
the fill pattern is determined in the CAD
Block Specification. See “CAD Checked Unchecked
Block Specification Dialog” on page 872.
2 Options - These settings control the
Preferences
• Check Use ’By Object’ when creating editability of polylines, polyline-like
new CAD blocks to have By Object objects such as walls connected to form a
checked on the General tab of the CAD room, and splines.
Block Specification dialog. See
• Check Edit Object Parts to edit the indi-
“General Tab” on page 872. vidual components of a polyline or
polyline-like object. This functionality
can also be accessed by clicking the Edit
Object Parts button. See “Edit
Object Parts” on page 81.
199
• Check Advanced Splines to enable the

ing the Advanced Splines edit but-
advanced spline setting as the default
ton. See “Advanced Splines” on page
editing behavior for all subsequently
117.
drawn splines. You can also enable this
function for an individual spline by click-
Line Properties Panel

The Line Properties panel controls the
appearance of CAD lines.
Endcap Length (Pixels) - The beginning can be placed to eliminate this problem.
and end of CAD lines that are not solid are Specify the number of pixels for endcap
sometimes difficult to distinguish. Endcaps length.
200
Sun Angle Panel
Sun Angle Panel
Define a default Latitude, Longitude and See “Shadows” on page 776.

Time Zone used when creating Sun Angles.
Edit Panel
The settings on the Edit panel of the of the cursor and selection behavior of edit
Preferences dialog control the appearance handles.
Preferences
2

1 Use a cursor with Cross Hairs in
Video: Cursor Behaviors and Crosshair different view types and control its
Choices appearance.
201
Check Enable in Plan and Cross Section to (3 x 2=6, and 6 + 1=7). A value of 1 results
use a cross hair cursor in floor plan, cross in a handle that is 3 x 3 pixels. The allowed
section, and elevation views. This option is range is from 1 to 10. Increasing the handle
checked by default. size may make selecting objects easier.
Check Enable in Perspective Views to use a Enter a value, in pixels, for Edit Handle
cross hair cursor in perspective camera views Tolerance to specify how far close to an edit
and overviews. handle you must click in order to select it.
Click the color bar to open the Color Check (S)tart and (E)nd Indicators to
Chooser dialog and specify the color of the display an S and an E at the start and end
cross hairs. points of selected line- and arc-based objects
and on the selected edge of a polyline-based
Cross hair size is specified as a percentage of
objects. See “Selected Edge” on page 92.
window width. Specify Size (% of Window
Width) as 100% to extend the cross hairs
3 Specify program behavior when using
across the entire screen. Marquee Select. See “Marquee Select”
on page 93.
Set the Aperture Size, measured in pixels.
The aperture is the space where the cross • Select Intersect Rectangle to select any
hairs meet. A value of 0 makes the cross objects intersected by or located within
hairs meet at a point. Larger numbers leave a the marquee.
gap in the center. • Select Contained in Rectangle to select
only objects located entirely within the
2 Specify the desired Selection settings, marquee. This option provides the best
which affect how objects are selected
and their appearance. results in most situations.
• Select Center Inside Rectangle to select
Enter an Edit Handle Size in pixels. The edit
only objects whose center points are
handles are twice this number of pixels plus
located within the marquee.
one. For example, the default value is 3,
which results in a handle that is 7 x 7 pixels
Behaviors Panel
The settings on the Behaviors panel of the
Preferences dialog define basic editing
behaviors of CAD and architectural objects.
202
Behaviors Panel
1 2
1 Rotate/Resize About defines the point

an object or a group of objects rotates
or resizes about. See “Rotate/Resize About”
on page 81.
• Select Object Center to rotate or resize
the selection about its center point.
Object Center is the default setting. Concentric Resize About
• Select Current Point to rotate the object Resize Current Point
about the current CAD point instead.
Rotate Jump defines the angle an object or
group of objects jumps to when it is rotated.
It overrides the angle snaps set in Plan
Defaults. If you set this to zero, the angle
snaps set under Plan Defaults are used.
Preferences
Rotate about Rotate about
Object Center Current Point
To resize a CAD object about a current point,

select the Resize Edit Type.
This function can also be accessed by
clicking the Resize button. See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 86. Box rotating about Current
Point with Jump set to 45°
203
2 Select one of the four Edit Type 3 The Primary Movement Methods
options. For detailed information about control the directions that you can
the different edit types and how they affect move objects using their edit handles.
different objects, see “Edit Behaviors” on • Select Orthogonal to move an object
page 86. perpendicular to any of its edges.
If Concentric is selected, specify the desired • Select Polar to move an object at
Jump increment. Allowed Angles.
Snap Properties Panel

The settings on the Snap Properties panel of snaps behave and appear. See “Object
the Preferences dialog control how object Snaps” on page 82.
1 3
2
4
1 Check any combination of object Endpoint - Enables snapping to the

snapping options. You can also turn ends of lines, arcs, splines and other
these options on an off with the toggle objects.
buttons on the toolbar.
Midpoint - Enables snapping to the
midpoint of an object such as a line or
204
Snap Properties Panel
arc. For objects such as boxes, you can snap Intersection - Enables snapping to the
to the midpoint of any side of the box. intersection of two objects, such as the
intersection of a line with another line.
Intersection snapping also snaps extension
lines to objects, and allows you to snap two
Endpoint and midpoint snaps extension lines to each other.
Center - Enables snapping to the

center of cabinets, fixtures, furniture,
as well as circles and arcs.
Note: Center snapping only works for arcs

and circles if Show Arc Centers and Ends is
turned on. See.“Aligning Arc Centers” on
page 128. Intersection snaps
Quadrant - Enables snapping to the 2 Check any combination of extension

anchor options. You can also use the
left, right, top, or bottom of an object.
toggle buttons on the toolbar.
Only used for arcs and circles.
Tangent Extensions - Enables
snapping to a point tangent to the point
where the extension anchor sits.
Quadrant snaps
On Object - Enables snapping to any

point on the selected object, including
CAD objects and cabinets. Tangent extension
Perpendicular Extensions - Enables
Preferences
snapping to a point perpendicular to the
point where the extension anchor sits.
On object snaps
Points/Markers - Allows you to snap

to any temporary points you may have
placed, as well as callouts and markers.
Points/Markers snaps
205
The Snap Distance controls how far your the

cursor can be from a snap point for the snap
to occur. It is measured in screen pixels.
Check the box beside Bumping/Pushing to
enable bumping and pushing. See User’s
Guide, “Bumping/Pushing” on page 124.
Specify the Maximum Bump Distance
(pixels), which is the distance that a selected
Perpendicular extension object must be dragged to override bumping
Orthogonal Extensions - Enables and move past an obstructing object.
snapping to a point on a 90-degree axis
Check the box beside Angle Snaps to enable
from the extension anchor.
snapping to allowed angles. See “Angle
Check Snap Cabinets After Paste to make
the cabinets snap together after you paste
them.
4 Control the appearance of Snap

Indicators.
Orthogonal extension
Specify an Indicator Size in pixels.
3 Options - Specify the number of Click the color bar to select an Indicator
extension line anchors that can display
at one time by changing the Objects in Color and an Extension Color from the
History setting. Color Chooser dialog. See “Color
Chooser Dialog” on page 722.
Material List Panel

The Material List panel controls which prefixes are listed here. They are defined by
categories are included in Materials Lists. the program and cannot be changed.
The names of all categories and their ID
206
Report Style Panel
When a material is entered in the Material new material list generated. Before you hide
List, the program decides what category it a category, make sure you know what items
goes in and assigns it an ID, which is the are listed within it.
prefix followed by a number. EX1 would be
the first exterior trim piece entered in the It is usually better to remove categories
Material List for a particular plan. from individual plan lists in the Layer
Display Options dialog, rather than glo-
Include These Categories - Check the bally. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on
categories you want to to include in every page 218.
Report Style Panel

The Report Style panel specifies how the
Material List appears. This information can
also be specified individually per Material
Preferences
List by choosing Tools> Display Options
from within that Material List.
207
1 Include These Columns - Check the narrow or broaden your query when
columns that should be included in the searching the Master List.
Material List.
Grid - Choose whether or not grid
3
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons lines display in the materials list. If you
to change the order that columns appear. To want lines, choose to have horizontal,
change the order, select one or more items in vertical, or both. If the lines are turned off,
the list and click the button. The selected they do not show on-screen or in print. You
columns move up or down by one in the list. can select Solid Lines for the grids instead of
dotted lines.
For a more detailed description of Material
Lists, see “Materials Lists” on page 1003.
4 Background Colors can be set for
even and odd numbered lines.
2 When Querying Suppliers &
Manufacturers - Select an option to
Master List Panel

The Master List panel specifies how the information for materials. You can maintain
Master List(s) for materials appears. Master Multiple Master Lists, but only one may be
Lists contain price and manufacturer used at any given time.
208
Categories Panel
3
4
1 Include These Columns - Check each subsequently opened plans when a material
column to include it in the Master list is generated from any model.
material list.
3 Press Browse to select a different
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons Master List. Navigate the directory
to change the order of columns. To change structure until you find the new Master List
the order, select one or more items in the list to be used, select it, and click OK.
and click the button. The selected columns
move up or down by one in the list. See 4 Press New to create a new Master List.
Name and save it in the location of your
“Materials Lists” on page 1003.
choice. When you create a new Master List,
2 Master List File - The name and it is blank until you build a material list and
pathname of the Master List currently enter prices, supplier or manufacturer
referenced is shown. It is referenced for all information. The Master List is saved
automatically when you close.
Preferences
Categories Panel
The Categories panel allows you to expand
the scope of the materials list by specifying
additional information in subcategories
under each of the main materials list
headings.
209
1 2
To create or modify a subcategory generate schedules. Any subcategory for

these objects can appear as a column in that
1 Select a Category from the list. schedule. Name the schedule heading.
2 Existing subcategories display here. In the example above, two subcategories are
3 To Add, Edit or Delete a subcategory, added to the Windows category: GLZ
select it and click the appropriate (Glazing) and EXT (Exterior Trim). See
button. Clicking Add or Edit opens the Sub- “Editing Materials Lists” on page 1011 .
Category dialog.
Only objects with a related Components
4 In the Sub Category dialog, give the dialog can use this material subcategory
subcategory a name to appear in the capability. Additional material information
SubCat column of the materials list. This is can be added to a selected object in its
the name used to select the material when Components dialog, which is accessed by
applying it to an item, so use something
clicking the Components edit button. See
logical to you.
“Components Dialog” on page 1014.
5 Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures,
Furniture, and Electrical objects can
210
Render Panel
Render Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
The Render panel controls settings for render only affects surfaces with materials that
previews and final views. Since these have assigned textures. When textures are
settings significantly affect rendering speed, turned off, surfaces are rendered using
it is a good idea to optimize them for your the color assigned to the material, but not
system. the texture. Pattern lines seen in other 3D
views are not drawn in render views. See
Note: If you have used previous versions of “Mapping Patterns and Textures” on page
Preferences
Chief Architect and find that render perfor- 705.
mance in Version X1 is slower than in earlier
versions, compare the setting in the Render • Smooth Edges removes the jagged edges
panel with those in the older version and that sometimes result where two surfaces
make sure they are equivalent. meet, producing cleaner lines. This fea-
ture slows rendering considerably and is
1 Select the options to use when Render typically used only for final render views.
Previews and Final Views are created. This option can also be accessed from the
These options are available for both views contextual menu in a render view.
and can be selected independently. • Smooth Faces generates smooth curved
• Use Textures controls whether or not surfaces in render views. It uses new sur-
surfaces are rendered with textures. This face normals to alter the lighting effects
211
on surfaces, making them appear curved, Other Render Settings

even though it does not alter the shape of
the surfaces. This option should only These following settings affect both the
have a minimal impact on rendering Preview and Final View functions.
speed. It can also be accessed from the
contextual menu. 2 The Soft Shadows option displays
shadows with soft edges instead of hard
• Use Transparency allows transparency edges. This feature is only used when Show
effects. For some video cards, rendering Shadows and Smooth Edges are also used.
may be slowed when this feature is
selected. 3 Always Rebuild recalculates the 3D
model and render data every time the
• Show Images controls the display of view is redrawn. If this is not checked, the
Chief Architect images, such as plants, program redraws the screen without
cars and people, in render views. recalculating the model.
• Show Shadows controls whether or not When Always Rebuild is turned off, you may
shadows display. Shadows are extremely notice lighting and surfaces appear incorrect
complex to calculate and slow down ren- after multiple camera movements.
dering speed significantly. They are typi-
cally used only for Final Views. A model can be rebuilt in any view by
pressing F5 on the keyboard or clicking
Multiple lights can cast shadows at the same
time, and rendering time increases. Refresh Display .
Experiment with this feature before using it
as a default.
4 The Keep All Surfaces option makes
the renderer calculate all surfaces of a
Show Shadows can also be accessed from the model. Turning off this feature may speed up
contextual menu in render view. You should rendering because surfaces that cannot be
only set this from the contextual menu rather seen in the view are ignored, but if the
than as a preference. camera is moved and a surface that was not
originally visible comes into view, there will
• Use Triangles divides large surfaces, be a gap in the view. This feature is not
such as walls, floors, and ceilings, into needed when Always Rebuild is selected.
small triangles. This feature enhances
lighting effects when point or spot light You can also get fast performance in render
sources are used. view by checking Keep All Surfaces
clearing the Always Rebuild check box.
• Max Triangle Size controls the size of
Lighting may be wrong when the camera
the triangles modeled by the program.
moves between rooms, so use F5 to refresh
The smaller the maximum triangle size,
the screen and update the lighting.
the more triangles used. Lighting looks
better with smaller triangles, but render- 5 The Use Optimizations option directs
ing takes longer. The minimum value is your computer to save rendering data to
6". video card. On some OpenGL graphics
cards, this may cause problems if the
212
Texture Filter Panel
rendering data for your model is greater than information may be important if you are
the amount of memory on the card. If your having problems generating render views.
computer stops responding when rendering,
Notice the information following the
try removing the check from this check box.
Acceleration label. If your video card
This slows down the rendering time
supports hardware acceleration for OpenGL,
considerably, so if the problem is not solved,
this says “Installed Client Driver.” If it does
leave the check box selected.
not, it says “No Hardware Acceleration.”
6 The Surface Backdrop option There is a significant difference in speed
generates the backdrop image using between rendering with acceleration and
hardware acceleration. For some graphics without.
cards, this option improves rendering speed
The Max Lights value indicates how many
considerably.
lights you can have turned on at any given
7 Information regarding your OpenGL time when generating a render view. This
graphics card displays here. This value should be 8 or higher, depending on
your video card.
Texture Filter Panel

The options on the Texture Filter panel produce different results, but if you are not
affect the appearance of textures in render pleased with the appearance of your textures,
views. How the appearance is affected also changing these settings helps.
depends on your video card as different cards
Preferences
2
213
When a texture is applied to a surface in a

1 Magnification - Control how textures
render view, its size must be adjusted to are mapped when magnified.
accomodate the size of the surface. This
process is referred to as magnification and 2 Minification - These options apply to
textures that must be reduced to fit the
minification.
surface they are applied to.
Reset Options Panel
If message boxes have been suppressed, you

can make them appear again by clicking Resetting all preferences to default is a
Reset Message Boxes. drastic step and should be done with
extreme caution.
Click the Reset Preferences button to restore
all preferences to those that originally came
with the program.
214
Chapter 6:
Layers
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Under- customize how each layer displays in the
standing Layers Layer Display Options dialog.
Classroom Design Project Training Layers are organized into groups called layer
Video: Working with Layers and Layer sets. The layer set currently in use
Sets to Get the Views You Want determines which objects display, and how
those objects are shown. You can customize
the layer display settings for all layers in a
Video: Layers - Layers and Layer Sets
layer set without affecting other layer sets.
The concept of layers is similar to a stack of You can copy, add and delete layer sets in the
transparencies, with groups of objects stored Layer Set Management dialog. All
on each sheet. Layers are used to organize views use a unique layer set. You can specify
and manage the display of all objects in all the initial layer set that is used for a
views and the Materials List. Layers can also particular type of view in the Layer Set
be locked to prevent accidental editing. Defaults dialog.
Every object in a plan must exist on a layer.
One layer can be thought of as one Chapter Contents
• Layer Sets
Layers
transparency sheet. You can determine
which layer an object is on by looking in its • Layer Set Management
specification dialog or by selecting the object • Active Layer Set Control
and looking on the status bar. You can • Layer Display Options Dialog
• Displaying Objects
215
• Select Layer Dialog • Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

• Layer Tab • Layer Set Defaults Dialog
• Layer Painter
Layer Sets
What’s New In Version X1 Training files, add it to your template plan. See
Video: Layers - AIA Naming Conven- “Template Files” on page 167.
tion Layer Set
Layer Sets are used to control the layer Modify All Layer Sets
settings for different views. All views If you want changes made in one layer set to
associated with a plan file - including views apply to all other layer sets in the current
sent to layout - make use of the layer sets plan, check Modify All Layer Sets in the
stored in that .plan file. Layer Display Options dialog before
A layer set consists of a complete list of all making changes. The layer name and display
layers in the current plan and the display attributes are applied to all other layer sets.
settings for each. These display settings can For example, if you check Modify All Layer
be modified, and can be different for each Sets and then change the color and line style
layer set. for the Text layer of the Electrical Set, the
Any changes made to a layer set in one view same changes are applied to the Text layer of
affects all other views using the same layer the Framing Set of the same plan.
set. If this is not desired, you can create a
unique layer set for a particular view. See Layer Set Defaults
“Layer Set Management” on page 217. Whenever a particular type of view is
created, such as floor plan view or a framing
Each plan file can have an unlimited
overview, a specific layer set is activated for
number of layer sets.
that view. Which layer set becomes active
depends on the type of view created.
Layout Layer Sets
The default layer sets for nine different view
Views sent to layout use layer sets saved with types, including the Reference Display, are
the plan, rather than with the layout. See specified in the Layer Set Defaults
“Displaying Layout Views” on page 981. dialog.
Layer Sets & Templates Each of these layer sets can be edited as
needed in the Layer Display Options
Layers and layer sets are plan-specific. A dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
custom layer set that you created in one plan on page 218.
file may not be available in another. To
include a custom layer set in all new plan Normally, it is best to change the settings in
the existing default layer sets rather than
216
Layer Set Management
select different default layer sets, but you can

do so if needed. See “Layer Set Defaults
Layer Set Management

The Layer Set Management Display Settings> Layer Set Management
dialog lists the layer sets available in to open the Layer Set Management
the current plan or layout file and lets you dialog.
add and remove layer sets and modify and
copy existing layer sets. Select Tools>
Click the New... button to open the New

1 Use the Available Layer Sets options •
to manage the layer sets saved with the Layer Set Name dialog and create a
current plan or layout file. new layer set. using the system default
• Click a layer set name in the list to select settings.
it. • Click the Copy... button to open the New
• Click the Define... button (or double Layer Set Name dialog and enter a Layers
click a layer set) to open the Layer name for a copy of the currently selected
Display Options dialog and make layer set.
changes to the selected layer set. • Click the Delete button to delete the
selected layer set from the current file.
217
The Delete button is on enabled if the used in the view that was active when the
layer set can be deleted. You cannot Layer Set Management dialog was
delete the active layer set. opened. You can select a new Active Layer
Set from the drop-down list or click the
Do not delete any layer sets that are used Define... button to make changes to the
by a layout. active layer set in the Layer Display
• Click the Import... button to import layer Options dialog.
settings from a .layers file. See “Export-
ing/Importing Layer Sets” on page 224. 3 Reference Display Layer Set - Click
the drop down list to specify which
• Click the Export... button to export the layer set is used when the reference display is
layer settings in the current plan in a .lay- turned on. While the default Reference
ers file. See “Exporting/Importing Layer Display Set is usually sufficient, you can
Sets” on page 224. create as many layer sets as you like and use
any of them for the reference display. See
2 The Active Layer Set for Current “Reference Display” on page 369.
View options affect only the layer set
Active Layer Set Control

The Active Layer layer sets saved with the plan. Click the drop
Set Control drop- down list to select a new layer set for the
down list displays on the toolbar for all views current view.
and provides convenient access to a list of all
Layer Display Options Dialog

The Layer Display Options dialog and remembers its size between program
controls the display of layers in a sessions.
selected layer set. It consists of a table that
Selecting Tools> Reference Floors>
lists all available layers and the attributes for
Reference Display Options opens the
each. Layers can be added and deleted, and
Layer Display Options dialog with the
there is no limit to the number of layers that
Reference Display Set active. See
can exist in a plan.
“Reference Floor” on page 368.
From any view except the Materials List,
Selecting Tools> Dislay Options in the
select Tools> Display Settings> Display
Materials list opens the Materials List
Options... to open the Layer Display Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Options dialog. This dialog is resizeable Objects in the Materials List” on page 1012.
218
Layer Display Options Dialog
1
2
4 6
5
7
1 The Available Layer Sets options 2 Click the column header to sort all
control which layer set is affected by layers in the Layer Display Options
changes made in the Layer Display dialog by that column.
Options dialog. • In the Name column, sorting is case sen-
• The currently selected layer set displays. sitive to allow greater control over orga-
Click the drop-down list to select a differ- nization.
ent layer set. • A red + in the Used column indicates
• Click the Copy Set button to create a which layers have objects placed on them
copy of the current layer set. in the current plan. This column cannot
be edited.
• When Modify All Layer Sets is checked,
changes made in the Layer Display • A check in the Disp column indicates
Options dialog apply to all other layer which layers are set to be visible. This
sets in the plan when you click OK. controls the display of objects in 2D and
3D views.
Modify All Layer Sets is a one-time • An M in the Mat column indicates which
action. It is always unchecked when
layers are included in the Materials List.
Layers
the Layer Display Options dialog is opened.
• A yellow in the Lock column indicates
which layers are locked, preventing
219
objects on that layer from being manually display at the bottom of the dialog. If
edited. multiple layers are selected, “no change”
• The Color column shows the line color may display for attributes that are different
for each layer. You can sort this column among the selected layers.
so that like colors are listed together.
When one or more layers are selected
• The Style column shows the line style for and you click OK, the program remem-
each layer and can be sorted so that like bers your selection so that the same layers
line styles are listed together. are selected when you reopen the Layer Dis-
play Options dialog.
• The Size column displays the line weight
used by each layer and can be sorted so
that like line weights are listed together. 4 When a layer or layers is selected,
single or shared layer attributes can be
• Click the Library button to open the edited in the section titled Properties for
Library Browser to the Line Styles “Selected Layer.” Line Color, Style and Size
library. See “Line Styles” on page 688 for affect lines in floor plan view and surface
more information. edge lines in vector views.
• To change the color of lines on a selected
3 Layers are named so that similar object layer, click the Color bar to select a new
types such as Cabinets, Base and
Cabinets, Wall are listed near one another color in the Color Chooser dialog. See
alphabetically. “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 722.
Double-click a layer in the Name column to • To change the line style of a selected
rename it. layer, click the Style drop-down arrow or
click the Library button to select a line
style from the library. See “Line Styles”
on page 688.
• To change the width of lines on a selected
layer, enter a Size.
• To turn off a selected layer, uncheck
Display. See “In All Views” on page 221.
• To exclude all objects on a selected layer
from the Materials List, uncheck Include
in Materials List. See “Materials Lists”
If a layer is turned on, a checkmark is shown
on page 222.
in the Disp column. If a layer is turned off,
the column is blank. • To protect the objects on a selected layer
from accidental changes, check Lock.
Layers are selected by clicking them in the Items on locked layers display but cannot
table. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl be selected, deleted, moved, or modified.
key to select multiple layers at once. Click See “Locking Layers” on page 222.
the Select All button to select all layers in the
table. When selected, a layer’s attributes
220
Displaying Objects
5 The buttons at the bottom left of the Click the Delete button to delete the selected
dialog provide additional control of the layer. You cannot delete used layers or any of
layers in the table. the system layers used by Chief Architect.
Click the Select All button to select all layers Click the Reset Names button to revert layer
in the table at once. This allows changes to names for system layers back to the original
be quickly applied to all layers. names that installed with Chief Architect.
This does not affect layers you created.
Click the New... button to open the New
Layer Name dialog and create a new layer Click OK to close the dialog and apply your
with the unique name of your choice. changes.
Duplicate layer names are not allowed.
Click Cancel to close the dialog, ignoring
any edits.
Note: New layers are added to all layer sets.
However, newly created layers will be turned
on to display only in the current layer set. 6 Select a layer to serve as the Current
CAD Layer from the drop-down
list.This is the default layer used for new
Click the Copy button to create a copy of the CAD objects such as lines and arcs. See
selected layer. The new layer is added “Current CAD Layer” on page 869.
directly below the original layer in the table.
7 Click the size grip and drag to resize the
Layer Display Options dialog.
Displaying Objects
The display of layers in 2D views, 3D views, try to place or draw an object on a layer that
and materials lists is controlled by layer set is hidden, the program warns you and asks if
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See you want to turn the layer on.
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
218.
Note: Not all objects display in all views. For

instance, door labels do not appear in 3D
views and room labels do not appear in mate-
rials lists, regardless of the layer they are
The Color, Style, and Size attributes given to
placed on, or whether the layer is turned on
or not. the layer the object is on determines how an
object appears in floor plan view.
In All Views Layers
All layers with a check in the Disp column

display in all views. Objects that are not
displayed cannot be seen or selected. If you
221
Many objects, including all CAD and text select the object and click the Components
objects, allow you to override the line style, edit button. See “Components Dialog”
color, and line weight for an individiual on page 1014.
instance without changing its layer.
Locking Layers
Materials Lists
Objects on layers with a lock symbol in the
Layers showing an “M” in the Mat column Lock column are visible but cannot be
are included in subsequently generated selected. This prevents them from being
materials lists. This allows you to control the accidentally changed.
inclusion of objects in the Materials List on a
layer-by-layer basis.
Some default layers, such as Patterns, do not
generate materials and are not included by
default. See “Controlling Object Display by
Layer” on page 1012.
Layers with objects that have been
extensively edited and do not require further
editing are good candidates for locking.
Locking a layer does not prevent the program
from modifying the objects on that layer.
The overall content and organization of
materials lists can be controlled in the New objects cannot be drawn on a locked
Preferences dialog. See “Material List layer. If you lock a layer and then attempt to
Panel” on page 206. draw a new object on that layer, a warning
asks you to unlock the layer.
To control the components that are included
in a Materials List for a particular object,
Select Layer Dialog

When new CAD objects are drawn, Current CAD Layer to open the Select
they are placed on the Current CAD Layer dialog.
Layer. See “Current CAD Layer” on page
This dialog is also used for the Layer Painter
869. You can specify which layer is the
tool. See “Layer Painter” on page 224.
Current CAD Layer by selecting CAD>
222
Layer Tab
This dialog can only be accessed by clicking Options dialog but only allows a layer to be
selected.
the Current CAD Layer button. It is
similar in appearance to the Layer Display
Layer Tab
The Layer tab is found in the specification
dialogs for many different objects. Here you
can specify on what layer the prgram uses to
display the selected object.
Layers
Note: In some specification dialogs, layer
information is located on the Line Style tab
rather than the Layer tab.
223
1
2
3
1 Check Default to place the selected 3 Click Define to open the Layer
object on the default layer for that Display Options dialog and select,
object type. modify, or add a new layer. See “Layer
2 Click the drop down list to select from
all layers. Any object can be placed on
any layer.
Layer Painter
The Layer Painter tool allows you to Select Tools> Display Settings> Layer
move an object to any layer from any Painter to open the Select CAD
view. Layer dialog. Choose a layer, click OK, then
click objects in any view to move them to
that layer.
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

Layer sets created in one plan can be Exporting Layer Sets
exported as a *.layers file and imported into
other plans. This is a convenient alternative To export layer sets from the current plan,
to re-creating a layer set that may already click the Export button in the Layer Set
exist in another plan. Management dialog, or select File> Export>
224
Layer Set Defaults Dialog
Layer Sets to open the Save Layer

Set File dialog.
Browse to and select the *.layers file you

want to import and click Open. The Import
Layer Sets dialog opens.
Select a name and location and click Save.
The exported layer sets can be found in the
specified location as a *.layers file.
Importing Layer Sets

To import layer sets (*.layers file) into the
current plan, click the Import button in the
Layer Set Management dialog, or select
File> Import> Layer Sets to display the
Open Layer Set File dialog.
Select a layer set or hold down the Shift key

to select multiple sets and click OK.
Layer Set Defaults Dialog

The Layer Set Defaults dialog is
used to specify the initial layer sets for
different view types. Select Edit> Default
Settings to open the Default Settings
dialog, then select Layer Sets from the list
and click the Edit button. Layers
225
When a new view is created for any of the Select Use Active Layer Set to use the
specified view types, Chief Architect sets the currently active layer set for the new view
default layer set listed here as the active layer when it is created.
set. Click the drop-dpwn list to change the
Click the Define... button to open the Layer
initial layer set for each view.
Display Options dialog and change the
layer settings for the layer set. See “Layer
226
Chapter 7:
Walls, Railings,
Walls
& Fencing
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Walls using the CAD to Walls tool. See “CAD to
Walls are the single most important
building component in Chief Architect. By Another feature that can be used to generate
creating walls and defining the rooms created walls automatically is the House Wizard.
by the walls, you are telling the program how This tool allows you to define and arrange
you want the 3D model built. room spaces that the program uses to
generate walls. See “House Wizard” on page
There are several ways that walls can be
884.
created in Chief Architect. The most
common is to simply draw them with the
wall tools. Most of this chapter covers the Chapter Contents
creation and modification of walls using • Default Settings
these manual wall tools. • The Wall Tools
• The Deck Tools
Exterior walls can also be automatically • The Fencing Tools
generated when a new floor is built by using • Exterior and Interior Walls
another floor (above or below) as a model. • Foundation Walls
For more, see “Adding Floors” on page 366. • Pony Walls
In addition, walls can be created by • Railings
converting 2D CAD lines into actual walls • Invisible Walls
• Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks
227
• Hatch Wall • Attic Walls

• Break Wall • Double Walls
• Deck Railings • CAD to Walls
• Deck Edge • Wall Type Definitions
• Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks • Wall Type Definitions Dialog
• Fencing • Exporting Wall Definitions
• Drawing Walls • Importing Wall Definitions
• Connecting Walls • Curved Walls and Roofs
• Displaying Walls • Stepped and Raked Walls
• Editing Walls • Wall Specification Dialog
• Editing Straight/Curved Wall • Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Combinations • Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults
• Aligning Walls
Default Settings
Default Settings can be accessed by Wall Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Click the “+” next to Walls to display the Double-click the Exterior Wall or
walls sub-headings. Select a subheading and
Interior Wall button to open the
click the Edit... button to open the Wall
Interior/Exterior Wall Defaults dialog
Defaults dialog associated with your
and specify which wall type is drawn when
selection.
using the Interior and Exterior Wall tools.
Wall defaults can also be accessed by See “Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Dialog”
on page 276.
double-clicking the Wall Tools button.
The settings in the various wall defaults Foundation and
dialogs determine what wall types are drawn Retaining Wall Defaults
when the different wall tools are used. It is a
good idea to be familiar with these settings Double-click the Foundation Wall
and how they relate to your style of building.
See “Wall Type Definitions” on page 251. button or Retaining Wall button to open
the Foundation Defaults dialog and
General Wall Defaults specify which wall type is drawn when the
Foundation and Retaining Wall tools are
The settings in the General Wall Defaults used, the size of the footings, and other
dialog control general attributes that information used when building foundations.
apply to all wall types. See “General Wall See “Foundation Defaults” on page 372.
228
The Wall Tools
Pony Wall Defaults Deck Railing Defaults Dialog
Walls
Double-click the Pony Wall button to Double-click the Deck Tools parent
open the Pony Wall Defaults dialog and button or any of its child tools except
set the wall type used for both the upper and Polygon Shaped Deck to open the
lower portion of pony walls and other data Deck Railing Defaults dialog.
used when drawing pony walls. See “Pony
Wall Defaults Dialog” on page 277. The tabs in this dialog are the same as their
respective tabs in the Wall Specification
Railing Defaults Dialog dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 259.
Double-click either the Straight Railing
or Curved Railing button to open the
Fencing Defaults Dialog
Railing Defaults dialog and specify what
Double-click the Fencing Tools parent
type of railing is drawn when either Railing
button or either of its child tools to open the
tool is used.
Fencing Defaults dialog and specify what
The tabs in this dialog are the same as their type of fencing is drawn when using the
respective tabs in the Wall Specification Fencing tool.
dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
The tabs in this dialog are the same as their
page 259.
respective tabs in the Wall Specification
page 259.
The Wall Tools

Select Build> Straight Wall to access exterior walls in the Exterior/Interior
the wall tools. The type of wall drawn Wall Defaults dialog. See “Exterior/
by each wall tool is specified in its Interior Wall Defaults Dialog” on page 276.
corresponding defaults dialog.
The Curved Wall tools are similar to Interior Walls
their corresponding Straight Wall The Interior Wall and Curved
Tools. Select Build> Curved Wall to access Interior Wall tools draw walls
these tools. using the wall type specified for interior
walls. The interior wall type is defined in the
Exterior Walls Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults
Defaults dialog.
The Exterior Wall and Curved
Exterior Wall tools draw walls
using the default wall type specified for
229
Invisible Walls
Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an
exterior or interior wall by the program is Invisible walls are walls used to define
determined by its position in the model, not separate room areas in a plan. They can
by the tool used to draw it. See “Exterior and display in floor plan view but not in 3D
Interior Walls” on page 232. views. Floors, ceilings and roofs generate
above and below the rooms defined by these
Foundation Walls walls. You can also convert a normal wall
into an invisible wall and vice versa in the
The Foundation Wall and
Wall Specification dialog. See “Invisible
Curved Foundation Wall tools
draw foundation walls according to the
information specified in the Foundation
Defaults dialog. Foundation walls normally Polygon Shaped Room
have a footing and can be drawn on any floor What’s New In Version X1 Training
of the model, not just the foundation floor. Video: Framing Decks - The New Poly-
See “Foundation Walls” on page 232. gon Deck Tool
Pony Walls The Polygon Shaped Room tool opens

the New Polygon Shaped Room
A Pony Wall, also called a split dialog, where you can specify the exact size
wall, is defined as a wall with two and number of sides of a new polygonal
separate wall types, one for the upper portion room and then click in floor plan view to
and another for the lower portion. create that room. See “Polygon Shaped
Rooms and Decks” on page 235.
The Pony Wall and Curved Pony Wall tools
draw pony walls using the information
specified in the Pony Wall Defaults Hatch Wall
dialog. You can also convert a normal wall The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch
into a pony wall and vice versa in the Wall pattern to a wall that displays in floor
Specification dialog. See “Pony Walls” on plan views. You must click the wall that you
page 233. want to apply the hatch pattern to. You can
then select the hatch and resize it if you want
Railings to only hatch a portion of a wall. See “Hatch
Wall” on page 236.
The Railing and Curved Railing
tools create railings. The type and
height of railings drawn with this tool are Break Wall
defined in Railing Defaults dialog. See
The Break Wall tool applies a break in
“Railing Defaults Dialog” on page 229.
a wall. Once a wall is broken, the two
wall segments are separate walls that can be
modifed independent of each other. See
“Break Wall” on page 236.
230
The Deck Tools
Fix Wall Connections Define Wall Types

The Fix Wall Connections tool The Define Wall Types tool opens the
Walls
connects walls whose ends are within a Wall Type Definitions dialog,
few inches of each other but are not where wall types can be created, copied and
connected. See “Fix Connections” on page edited. See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog”
240. on page 251.
The Deck Tools

Select Build> Decks to access the Deck Edges
deck tools. The Straight Deck Railing
The Straight Deck Edge and
tool is activate by default. Curved Deck Edge draw decks
complete with framing, but without a railing.
Deck Railing No deck supports are created. See “Deck
The Straight Deck Railing and Edge” on page 237.
Curved Deck Railing tools draw
decks, complete with framing and bounded Polygon Shaped Deck
by a railing. If a foundation level exists, The Polygon Shaped Deck tool opens
supports for the deck are also created. See the New Polygon Shaped Deck
“Deck Railings” on page 237. dialog, where you can specify the exact size
and number of sides of a new polygonal deck
room and then click in floor plan view to
create that deck room. See “Polygon Shaped
Rooms and Decks” on page 235.
The Fencing Tools

Select Build> Fencing or click the outside of a building and follows the shape of
Fencing Tools to access the fencing the terrain. See “Fencing” on page 237.
tools. The Straight Fencing tool is activate
by default.
Fencing
The Fencing and Curved
Fencing tools draw fences, which
are similar to railings but by default do not
define room areas. Fencing is normally used
231
Exterior and Interior Walls

Classroom Design Project Training either tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You
Video: Finishing and Refining Interior can also draw a wall using the default type
Walls and then change the wall type in the Wall
Specification dialog.
Most walls are drawn using either the
Exterior Wall or Interior Wall tool. Whether a wall is recognized by the program
The only difference between these two tools as an actual exterior or interior wall is based
is the wall type used. You can specify the on the model, not by which tool you use to
default wall type for each tool in the Wall draw the wall. Any wall that is entirely
Defaults dialog.
surrounded by interior room areas is
considered an interior wall. Any wall
To draw a wall using a different wall type, exposed to the outside of the building is
you can change the default wall type for considered an exterior wall.
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the wall layer. See “Foundation Tab” on page
interior and exterior walls but also have 264.
a footing. Foundation walls can either be
You can select the footing in 3D views and
created automatically when a foundation
edit it’s size and shape using the edit handles.
floor is created or manually by drawing them
using the Foundation Wall tool.
You can draw a foundation wall on any floor
of a plan, not just on the foundation level.
Any wall can be specified as a foundation
wall. See “General Tab” on page 260.
The initial wall type and footing size used for
foundation walls are specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. These
values can be changed at any time in the
Wall Specification dialog.
Normally, the footing is centered on the wall,
but you can center the footing on the main
232
Pony Walls
Pony Walls
Walls
Classroom Design Project Training Pony walls are created using the wall types
Video: Creating Pony Walls for above and other information specified in the Pony
Grade Brick Wall Defaults dialog. System Default Wall
Types are the only types of wall that cannot
be specified as pony walls. See “Pony Wall
Video: Using Stepped Pony Walls for a
Daylight Basement
The height where the upper portion meets the
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a split
lower can be specified in 3D views. Because
wall, is a wall with two separate wall
the upper and lower sections of a pony wall
types for the upper and lower portions.
are linked, if either portion is modified along
the division between the two, such as raking
or the stepping of a footing, the other portion
of the pony wall adjusts to match.
You can convert a normal wall into a pony
wall and vice versa on the Wall Types tab of
the Wall Specification dialog.
Changing Wall Types

for Pony Walls
The upper and lower parts of a pony wall can
be redefined as different wall types in the
Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
Types Tab For Pony Walls” on page 266.
Railings
Railings are created and edited just like If Panels is selected on the Railing tab, you
walls. By default, newels and balusters can choose a Panel Type on the Newels/
do not display in floor plan view, but their Balusters tab. See “Newels/Balusters Tab”
display can be turned on. See “Newels/ on page 270.
Balusters Tab” on page 270.
When first drawn, railings have the No
The default type for new railings is defined Locate attribute, which prevents them from
in the Railing Defaults dialog. See being located by dimension lines. The No
“Railing Defaults Dialog” on page 229. Room Def attribute is helpful if you do not
233
want a railing to divide a room. See “General

Tab” on page 260.
Use a Doorway to produce a break in a

railing for a stairway or other access. This
keeps the railing continuous to maintain
room definition.
A doorway in a railing displays in a 3D view
as an opening, with newels or posts placed
on each side. Posts are evenly spaced
between railing ends and breaks and can be
specified at defined intervals.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or
modify room definitions, most often by
defining smaller areas within larger rooms.
See “Room Definition” on page 280. These
smaller room areas can have different floor
or ceiling materials or heights, allowing
stepped areas to be created.
Invisible walls can display in floor plan view
but not in 3D views. Floors, ceilings and
roofs generate above and below the areas
defined by these walls.
Common uses for invisible walls include
dividing the living and dining areas of a An invisible wall can be turned into a normal
single room, or separating a kitchen from an wall, or vice versa, by clicking the Invisible
adjoining nook. check box on the General tab of its Wall
Specification dialog. See “General Tab”
on page 260.
Important Notes on
Invisible Walls
• Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calcu-
lated separately for rooms divided by
invisible and normal walls.
234
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks
• Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto • Invisible walls can be drawn through a
cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
Place Outlets tool; it functions as
Walls
though they were not present. • Invisible walls do not produce a short
wall section to cover the gap where the
• Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be
level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use
moved freely through Invisible walls.
an invisible railing for this. See “Floor &
Ceiling Heights” on page 281.
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks

Select Build> Wall> Polygon Shaped To create a polygon shaped room or deck
Room to open the New Polygon
Shaped Room dialog and create a polygon 1. Click the radio button beside an option
shaped room with regular sides. to specify whether you want to Define
Polygon by Side Length, Radius to
Vertex or Radius to Side.
2. Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3. Specify the desired Side Length.
4. Specify the desired Radius.
5. Uncheck Include Railing to produce a
deck platform defined by Deck Edges.
This option is not available in the New
Select Build> Decks> Polygon Polygon Shaped Room dialog.
Shaped Deck to open the New 6. Click OK, then click once in floor plan
Polygon Shaped Deck dialog and create view to create the specified polygon
a polygon shaped deck with regular sides. shaped deck.
The settings in these dialogs are independent

of one another and are saved between
sessions.
235
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool fills any wall Another way to apply a hatch pattern to a
segment, except invisible walls, with a portion of a wall is to first use the Wall
single hatch pattern. The Hatch Wall tool
Break tool to divide the wall into two or
places a hatch pattern across all layers of the
selected wall, covering any fill styles more segments. When the Hatch Wall
specified for that wall type. tool is applied to a broken wall, the pattern is
only applied to the selected segment.
The wall hatch pattern and it’s line weight
can be specified in the Wall Hatch To select wall hatching, click the wall using
Specification dialog. See “Wall Hatch either the Select Objects or Hatch Wall
tool, then click the wall with hatching.
It may be preferable to create a wall type
definition for display purposes rather than To delete a hatch pattern from a wall, select it
use the Hatch Wall tool because and click the Delete edit button or press
multiple fill styles can be used. See “Wall the Del key. Make sure that the hatch pattern
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 251. is selected and not the wall by noting that
“Wall Hatching” displays in the Status Bar.
To apply wall hatching, click the Hatch Wall
See “The Status Bar” on page 8.
button, then click a wall. The hatch
You can resize the hatched area by selecting
pattern covers the entire length and width of
it and then dragging an end edit handle. If a
the wall.
hatch covers only part of a wall, you can
move it by dragging the center handle.
Break Wall
To divide a wall, select Build> Wall> If a break is placed near the intersection of
Break Wall and click the wall. This two walls, the break moves to the exact
places a break, creating two wall sections. intersection. Once a break is placed, click the
Select Objects tool and select the
When the Break Wall tool is active, you
original wall. If edit handles display near the
can continue to place breaks in walls. Select
break, the wall was correctly broken.
a different tool to deselect the Break Wall
tool. The Break Wall tool can be used to
create aligned walls across rooms. See
“Creating a Nook” on page 246.
236
Deck Railings
Deck Railings
Walls
Deck Railing is used to create railing. When room definition is established,
decks on the exterior of a plan. a deck is created within the area defined by
Click and drag using the Deck Railing or the perimeter railing and its Room Type is
Curved Deck Railing tool to draw deck set to Deck. See “Decks” on page 288.
Deck Edge
The Deck Edge tools are used to and drag using the Straight Deck Edge or
draw invisible railing, defining a Curved Deck Edge tool to draw deck edge.
deck room without enclosing it in rails. Click See “Decks” on page 288.
Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect is created
and modified much like railings and
walls. Fences do not create room definition
and are normally used outside a structure to
divide the terrain or detail an exterior.
Fencing automatically follows the shape of
the terrain. You can choose to have the Define the default fence style in the
fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to Fencing Defaults dialog. See “Fencing
have each segment step as it follows the Defaults Dialog” on page 229.
terrain. See “Railing Tab” on page 267.
237
Drawing Walls
Video: Drawing and Editing Walls Do not break walls and delete center
sections or draw short stub walls from
Classroom Design Project Training each side and try to line them up to create
Video: Drawing the Initial Walls and wall openings. To create an opening in a wall,
Rooms use the Door or Window tools.
Walls are drawn similar to the way CAD

lines are drawn and can be drawn in floor
Temporary Dimensions
plan view, camera views, and overviews. See Temporary dimensions will display as walls
“Draw Line” on page 846. Similarly, curved are drawn when CAD> Dimension>
walls are drawn much the way CAD arcs are.
Display Temporary Dimensions is
See “Draw Arc” on page 856.
toggled on (see “Display Temporary
Dimensions” on page 800) and Show Wall
Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direc-
tion so that the exterior surfaces face Length When Editing is checked in the
outward while interior surfaces face inward. General Wall Defaults dialog (see
“General Wall Defaults Dialog” on page 274.
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple
if you keep a few things in mind: Continuous Wall Drawing
• Draw exterior walls first to define the Just as with CAD lines and arcs, you can
building’s footprint, then draw the inte- draw walls continuously by right-clicking,
rior walls after the perimeter is in place. Alt+clicking or Alt+dragging. See “To draw
• To flip the layers of an existing wall, continuous lines” on page 846.
select it and click the Reverse Layers
edit button. See “Using the Edit
Drawing Curved Walls
Buttons” on page 244. A straight wall can be converted into a
• Do not draw short walls to represent wing curved wall and vice versa. Select a straight
walls on the sides of doors and doorways. wall and click the Change Line/Arc
Walls should be drawn to create rooms, button to change it into a curved wall.
and then doors and windows should be
placed later. Drawing a curved wall is similar to drawing
a CAD arc. As with CAD arcs, the method
• Initial wall heights are determined by the used to draw a curved wall depends on which
default floor and ceiling heights of the
current floor. See “Floor Defaults” on Arc Creation Mode is currently active.
page 364. See “Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes”
on page 855.
238
Drawing Walls
To create a room in the shape of a cir-
Walls
cle, you must draw two curved walls.
239
Center grid lines and line intersections as it is

drawn. See “Plan Defaults” on page 180.
A curved wall always has a center point. The
center displays as a small cross when you
Use Angle Snaps to draw walls at
enable Show Arc Centers and Ends . specific angles. Modify the angle of an
See “Show Arc Centers” on page 102. existing wall by specifying a new angle in
the Wall Specification dialog or by
dragging an end to a new allowed angle. See
“Angle Snaps” on page 84.
As you draw a wall, note the temporary wall
that displays. The length and angle of this
temporary wall display in the Status Bar at
the bottom of the window as it is drawn.
Drag the end of the temporary wall in a
Show Arc Center circular motion. In the Status Bar, note that
the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
Radius Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
The radius of a curved wall is measured from the length and angle last shown in the
the center to one surface or layer of the wall. information window.
The radius can be defined on the General tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. You House Wizard
may elect to define the radius to the exterior
The House Wizard allows you to place and
or interior wall layers. See “General Tab” on
arrange room “objects” that can then be
page 260.
converted into a fully editable house plan,
including walls. See “House Wizard” on
Wall Positioning page 884.
If Use Snap Grid/Units is checked in the
Plan Defaults dialog, a new wall snaps to
Connecting Walls
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing By default, walls are automatically joined
wall and the program joins them at the when their centers are within a distance
intersection of their main layers. The new defined by the larger of the two wall widths.
wall moves, extends, or contracts slightly to
meet the existing wall. Existing walls do not Fix Connections
move.
Occasionally, one or more walls do not
properly connect. To clean up most
240
Displaying Walls
connections throughout the plan, select same direction, the two walls appear to
Build> Walls> Fix Connections. If you combine into a single wall. When selected,
Walls
have only one connection to fix, the Connect the wall may consist of more than one
section, divided by breaks. See “Break Wall”
Walls edit button is faster to use.
on page 236.
Connect Walls To merge two colinear walls with the same

wall type definition, extend one of the walls
Use the Connect Walls edit button to to the other using an Extend handle. If the
complete an intersection of two walls. walls do not align yet, select one wall and
Select a wall, click the Connect Walls edit place the cursor over the center edit handle.
button, then click on the other wall to Drag the pointer over the edge of the other
connect the two. wall. Look for the On Object snap indicator
If the unconnected wall ends are sufficiently and release the mouse when it appears. For
close to one another, the tool connects them. more information, see “Object Snaps” on
If the separation is too great, extend one page 82.
towards the other and try again. If the two walls still do not merge, their
specifications are not the same. Open the
Rejoining Colinear Walls Wall Specification dialog for each wall
When the end of a wall is placed near the end and determine how they differ.
of another wall of the same type and in the
Displaying Walls
While the composition and appearance of In addition, the display of the wall layers
each wall type is controlled in the Wall specified in the Wall Type Definitions
Type Definitions dialog, the display of dialog can be controlled. If you turn off the
walls in all views is controlled in the Layer display of the layer called Walls, Layers,
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying wall types display with two lines
Objects” on page 221. representing the inside and outside surfaces.
See “Displaying Objects” on page 221.
In Floor Plan View It is often desirable to display the walls from
There are several options for controlling how a floor other than the current floor. To do
walls are displayed in floor plan view. In the this, select and display a reference floor. See
Layer Display Options dialog, you can “Reference Display” on page 369. You can
specify whether or not various types of walls also specify which layers are included in the
display. By default, walls are placed on reference display in the Layer Display
layers with “Walls” at the beginning of the Options dialog.
layer name, such as Walls, Attic. You can
place walls on any layer, however.
241
In 3D Views Displaying Pony Walls

While most objects in the program can in Floor Plan View
display in floor plan view and 3D views, a By default, the upper portion of a pony wall
few cannot. Invisible walls and wall hatching displays in floor plan view. To show the
are examples of items that do not display in lower pony wall in floor plan view instead,
3D, regardless of what layer they are placed select Show Lower in Plan View in the
on. Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony
Wall Defaults Dialog” on page 277.
Note: A window or door that is completely

contained by one part of a pony wall does not
display in floor plan view if the other part of
the pony wall is shown.
Editing Walls
What’s New In Version X1 Training Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
Video: Walls - Wall Editing Panel” on page 198.
Walls can be selected individually and as a • If the Hatch Wall tool has been used
group in all views. When a wall is selected, it to apply hatching to a wall, the hatching
displays edit handles and an edit toolbar that is selected first. Click Select Next
vary depending on the current view and the
selected edge and can be used to edit it in Objects to select the wall itself. See
various ways. See “Selecting Objects” on “Hatch Wall” on page 236.
page 92. • The Edit Area tools allow you to
select only part of a wall or walls. See
Selecting Walls “Edit Area Tools” on page 153.
• When you try to select a wall in a Cross
Section/Elevation or 3D view, the interior Using Edit Handles
or exterior room it defines may be
Depending on the type of view, a wall
selected first. Click the Select Next
displays a different set of edit handles when
Objects edit button or press the Tab selected.
key on your keyboard to select the wall
• In floor plan view, straight and curved
itself. See “Selecting Rooms” on page
walls can be edited like CAD Lines and
283.
Arcs. See “Editing Line Based Objects”
on page 95 and “Editing Arc Based
You can specify that the wall be selected
first instead of the room in the
242
Editing Walls
• In an elevation view, the vertical edges of a selected wall’s Extend edit handles in floor
straight and curved walls can be edited plan view or when the top edge of the wall is
Walls
like closed polylines. See “Editing selected in a 3D view.
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
107. Unlike polylines, only the top and Same Wall Type edit handles
bottom edges of walls can be selected and
manipulated: the side edges cannot.
• In a camera view or overview, click the
top surface of a wall to display the same
edit handles as in floor plan view, allow- Click and drag a Same Wall Type edit
ing you to rotate, move, and extend or handle at any angle to draw a new wall
shorten the length of the wall. segment of the same type as the selected
• In a camera view or overview, click an wall.
interior or exterior surface to display the
same edit handles as in an elevation view,
one at each corner and one on the top and
bottom edges.
• Moving a wall will move any cabinets
attached to that wall.
To temporarily enable the Same Wall Type
• When a wall is connected to other walls edit handles, select a wall and click the Same
and Edit Object Parts is turned off, Wall Type edit button. You can also
it can only be moved perpendicular to enable these handles globally in the
itself or, in the case of curved walls, its Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
chord using the Move edit handle. Panel” on page 198.
Unconnected walls can be moved at
Allowed Angles.
Locked vs. Unlocked Centers
• The footing of a foundation wall can be
selected in 3D views and edited using the The default for curved walls is an unlocked
edit handles. center because it is easier to draw and edit
when the center is unlocked.
• The Same Wall Type edit handles can be
enabled to allow you to draw a new wall Once walls are in place and curved walls are
segment of the same type as the selected properly aligned with straight walls, it is a
wall. good idea to lock the curved walls’ centers.
To lock the center of a curved wall, select it
Same Wall Type
and click the Lock Center edit button.
Edit Handles
See “Using the Edit Buttons” on page 244.
When the Same Wall Type edit handles are The curved wall remains selected, but its edit
enabled, two edit handles display just beyond handles change.
243
The locked status can also be changed in the As with most objects, walls can be copied,
General tab of the Wall Specification replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See “Using
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 297. the Edit Toolbar” on page 97. The following
edit toolbar buttons may display on the edit
Wall Heights toolbar for selected walls.
The height of a wall is controlled by the • Click the Select Next Object edit
ceiling height of the room(s) it defines. If the button to select nearby objects instead of
ceiling or floor height of a room is changed, the selected wall.
the height of the walls that define it also
change. • Click the Open Object edit button to
open the specification dialog for the
• The ceiling height of a single room is
selected wall(s). See “Wall Specification
controlled on the General tab of the
Room Specification dialog. See
“General Tab” on page 297. • Click the Transform/Replicate Object
• The ceiling heights for all rooms on a edit button to copy, move, rotate, or
floor are controlled in the Floor reflect the wall. See “Transform/Repli-
Defaults dialog for that floor. See cate Object Dialog” on page 144.
“Floor Defaults” on page 364.
• The top or bottom edge of any wall can to make copies of the selected wall(s) at
be adjusted independent of floor or ceil- regular intervals. See “Multiple Copy” on
ing heights using the mouse in Cross Sec- page 139.
tion/Elevation and 3D views.
Moving Walls to slow down the mouse speed for the
Using Dimensions next edit operation. See “Accurate Move”
on page 125.
Automatic, manual, and temporary
dimension lines can be used to move a wall. • Click the Components edit button to
Select a wall and click the temporary open the Components dialog for the
dimension to open the Move Object selected wall(s). See “Components Dia-
Using Dimension dialog. See “Moving log” on page 1014.
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 804. • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to align the wall with
Using the Edit Buttons another straight edge. See “Using Make
A selected wall or walls can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit • Click the Point to Point Move edit
toolbar. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on button to accurately move the selected
page 97. wall(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
page 125.
244
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations
status. See “Editing Arc Based Objects”

on page 98.
to center a wall along an intersecting wall
Walls
or room. See “Centering Doors and • Click the Reverse Layers edit button
Windows” on page 311. to flip the layers of the selected wall(s).
See “Drawing Walls” on page 238.
• Click the Change Line/Arc edit
button to change a selected straight wall • Click the Connect Walls edit button
into a curved wall or vice versa. See to complete an intersection of two walls.
“Change Line/Arc” on page 131.
• Click the Same Wall Type edit but-
• Click the Lock Center edit button to ton to enable the Same Wall Type edit
lock the center of the selected curved handles and draw a new connected wall
wall. This button appears depressed for a of the same wall type. See “Same Wall
locked-center wall and up for a normal Type Edit Handles” on page 243.
wall. Click it to change the lock center
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a If you move a straight wall connected to a
curved wall with a locked center and the curved wall the curved wall extends along its
connection cannot be maintained without curve.
changing the center of the arc, the walls lose
their connection.
When an Extend edit handle of a curved wall

with a locked center is dragged with the
Alternate Edit Behavior active, the
locked center setting will be overridden. See
“Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
245
button to open the Radius of Tangent

Curved Wall dialog.
Make Arc Tangent

If both ends of a curved wall are attached to Here you can determine which wall layer the
straight walls that are nearly tangent and the radius of the curved wall is measuring.
curved wall is selected, the Make Arc Specify a layer and click OK. For more
information about Wall Layers, see “Wall
Tangent edit button displays. Click this Type Definitions” on page 251.
Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall Creating a Nook
segments line up with one another, either on
the same floor or on the floor above or Walls can be aligned across an opening such
below. Walls may need to be aligned in a as a nook, so that they are colinear, using the
variety of situations. Break Wall tool.
Aligning Colinear Walls To create aligned walls across an opening

Colinear walls are parallel walls connected
1. Select a wall to build a nook into and
end to end and drawn on the same floor.
When colinear walls join end-to-end and click the Break Wall edit button.
Object Snaps are enabled, the walls 2. Click at a point on the wall close to one
snap. side of the nook area. Do not worry
about exact placement right now.
3. Click again near the other side of the
nook. Two short lines at each location
where you clicked indicate Wall Breaks.
246
Aligning Walls
Align with Above or Align with Below

box, then click OK.
Walls
Aligning Curved Walls
Between Floors
Curved walls are aligned between floors
using the same technique to align straight
walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
within a few inches of each other, the Align
with Floor Above/Below check boxes are
enabled on the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog for the selected wall.
Check either box and the selected curved
4. Right-click the middle section of the
wall takes on the radius and center of the
wall to select the wall section.
referenced wall as it moves into alignment
5. Click the middle Move handle and drag with it.
the wall outward.
6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back Aligning Curved Walls
to the rest of the house. With Straight Walls
7. Move these short walls using dimen- Curved walls can be drawn tangent to
sions to accurately size the nook. an existing straight wall using the
Start/Tangent/End Arc Mode. See
Aligning Walls “Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
Between Floors page 855.
Walls can be aligned between floors using If both ends of a selected curved wall
the Align With Above and Align With are connected to other walls at angles
Below checkboxes in the Wall of 45 degrees or less, the Make Arc Tangent
Specification dialog. See “General Tab” edit button is available. Click this button to
on page 260. move and resize the wall so that both ends
are tangent to the connected walls. See
To align walls between floors “Editing Arc Based Objects” on page 98.
The wall’s radius is usually changed by this
1. Select a wall that you want to align with
action and a locked center automatically
a wall either above or below it.
becomes unlocked. Once the wall is tangent,
2. Click the Open Object edit button. select it and drag its move handle until it is in
the appropriate position.
3. On the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog, check either the
247
Attic Walls
In Chief Architect, walls are built between Attic Walls are specified as such on the
the default floor and ceiling heights of the General tab of the Wall Specification
room. See “Floor Defaults” on page 364. dialog. When you Rebuild Walls/Floors/
When the program detects an open space
Ceilings , all Attic Walls in the plan are
between a wall and the roof plane above it, it
deleted and rebuilt unless Retain Attic Wall
automatically creates an Attic Wall on the
is also checked. See “General Tab” on page
floor above that wall to fill in the gap.
260.
Attic Walls are typically found above Full
Gable Walls, forming a gable or closing the If you do not want to keep a particular
top portion of a side wall beneath a shed Attic Wall in your plan, specify it as
Invisible and make sure Retain Attic Wall is
roof.
checked on the General tab of the Wall
Double Walls
Classroom Design Project Training Frame Through
Video: Creating Double Walls to Add
Furred Basment Walls Frame Through walls can be considered the
basic Double Wall type. A Frame Through
What’s New In Version X1 Training wall could be used as a double wall between
Video: Walls - Double Walls hotel rooms for sound insulation.
In some situations, such as for sound To create a pair of Frame Through walls,
insulation, furring, or where the walls of two specify both walls as such on the General tab
modular home units meet, two walls are of the Wall Specification dialog.
drawn side-by-side. In instances such as
these, specify both walls as Double Walls. Split Framing
Two walls become Double Walls when they Split Framing walls divides floor and
are parallel, touching, and both specified as ceiling platforms and any walls their ends
Double Walls on the General tab of the Wall connect to. The split occurs at the boundary
Specification dialog. See “General Tab” where the two double walls touch and is
on page 260. useful for separating modular home units.
There are three types of Double Walls: Chief Architect frames walls and platforms
Frame Through, Split Framing and Furred separately on either side of the Split Framing
Wall. wall boundary, with no framing members
crossing it.
248
CAD to Walls
You can make floor platform rim joists touch be defined as a layer of one of the walls,
each other at the boundary between Split usually the furred wall.
Walls
Framing walls or provide spacing to carry
As with Frame Through walls, Furred Walls
sheathing over them by checking Build
do not split platforms or connected walls.
platform to this layer for the appropriate
Unlike Frame Through walls, they do not
layer in the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
connect or frame to non-parallel walls like
For more information, see “Wall Type
normal walls. Instead, they connect to other
Definitions Dialog” on page 251.
Furred Walls.
To create a pair of Split Framing walls,
To create a Furred Wall, specify the primary
specify both walls as such on the General tab
wall as a Frame Through wall and the
of the Wall Specification dialog.
furred wall as a Furred Wall on the General
tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
Furred Wall
Furred Walls are placed against the inside Openings in Double Walls
of a primary wall, typically an exterior wall.
Doors and windows placed in one Double
An example is a concrete wall furred out by a
Wall extend through both walls. You can
framed wall with an air gap or insulation
specify how an opening builds through the
between them. Another example is a thick
Double Walls on the Frame and Trim tab of
wall with two framed layers.
the Door Specification dialog or the
Rooms are defined in the normal manner by Casing tab of the Window Specification
the primary wall, but the layers of the Furred dialog. See “Door Specification Dialog” on
Wall are treated by the program as though page 315 or “Window Specification Dialog”
they were added to the primary. An air gap on page 343.
between the primary and furred walls should
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls allows CAD lines to be with unique layer attributes. See “Layer
converted to Chief Architect objects. Display Options Dialog” on page 218.
This is helpful when importing drawings into
The Import Drawing Wizard is the best
floor plan view. Two or more parallel CAD
place to arrange the layers of the incoming
lines can be converted to both straight or
lines for easiest CAD to Wall conversion. If
curved walls or rails. CAD lines representing
you are importing the CAD lines from
windows and doors can also be converted.
another system, do not check “Boxes” or
All lines that you want to convert to walls “Polylines” in the Import Drawing
must be located on one layer. The same is Wizard. See “Select File” on page 909.
true for windows, doors, and rails. It is
helpful to place like items on a single layer
249
When CAD objects are located properly,

select CAD> CAD to Walls... to display
the CAD to Walls dialog.
Convert CAD to Walls Dialog
1 2
1 Specify the source layers to be width of the wall type. Typically, only two
converted to walls, windows, doors, or wall types are used in a plan and an interior
rails. and exterior wall type are specified.
2 Click Define to view the Layer Conversion works better if lines representing
Display Options dialog and select a windows and doors are on different layers,
different source layer if needed. although it should still be satisfactory if they
are on the same layer. In either case, the arc
3 Specify wall types for the new walls. indicating door swing helps to identify a door
One, two, or neither can be specified.
and should be placed on the same layer as
To convert to a specific wall type, the lines doors.
must be within one inch or 25mm of that wall
Click OK to complete the conversion.
type’s width. If two wall types are specified,
Converted items are found in the Layer
new walls are converted to the one having
Display Options dialog.
the closest width. The new wall expands or
contracts about its centerline to reach the
250
Wall Type Definitions
Wall Type Definitions
Walls
Classroom Design Project Training placed on the Walls, Normal layer of the
Video: Creating a New Wall Type with Layer Display Options dialog.
a New Assigned Material
Default (Concrete) can only be used on the
Every wall in a plan is assigned a wall type, foundation plan. When you draw a Default
and its 2D representation, default materials, (Concrete) wall, it is placed on the Walls,
and framing width are specified by its Wall Foundation layer.
Type Definition.
The program assigns materials and assume
Material information in the Wall Type certain characteristics of these walls when
Definition can be calculated for take-offs in the Material List is generated.
the Materials List or shown in 3D views.
Wall types can be viewed, edited and created User Specified Walls
in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See All other wall type definitions in the program
“Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page 251. are considered User Specified Walls. Some
Walls fall into two categories: System User Specified wall definitions are shipped
Default walls and User Specified walls. with the program and can be customized.
The 2D display qualities of user specified
System Default Walls walls are defined by the properties in the
Wall Type Defintions dialog.
There are two System Default wall types:
Default (wood frame 16" OC) and Default User Specified walls can have up to ten
(Concrete). These two wall types behave layers defined, each representing a different
differently from all other wall types and material. All of these layers can be calculated
cannot be edited. by the Materials List. Materials that are
applied to the outer layers of the wall layer
Default (wood frame 16" OC) can be used
definition also defines how the wall displays
for interior or exterior walls and railings on
in 3D views.
all floors except the foundation level and are
Wall Type Definitions Dialog

The Wall Type Definitions dialog using that wall type. Walls in other plan files
controls wall type definitions in a plan file. are unaffected.
Use it to define new wall types and redefine
existing ones. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types
to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
Changes made to an existing wall type
Clicking the Define button on the Wall Types
definition affect all walls in the current plan
tab of the Wall Specification or in most
251
Wall Defaults dialogs also opens this

dialog.
1
8
2 9
10
3 11
4
12
5
13
6
7
14
1 Click this drop-down list to display all your plan or set as plan defaults cannot be
currently available wall types. Select a deleted.
wall type from the list to display its
definition. The list always has at least one 2 Main Layer - If multiple wall layers
are defined, select a radio button to
wall type, “Default,” that cannot be
specify the Main Layer. It is usually the
modified. You can rename a wall type by
structural layer and appears wider than other
typing in a new name.
layers in the wall preview.
To create a new wall type, click New to
define a new wall type from scratch or click Note: The Framing dialog uses the thick-
Copy to copy the current wall type. The ness of the Main Layer to size the studs if a
copied wall type can then be renamed and framing material such as Fir Stud 16" OC, Fir
Stud 24" OC, Metal Stud 16" OC, or Metal
redefined.
Stud 24" OC is assigned.
To remove a wall type, select it and click
Delete. Wall types currently being used in 3 Define the Thickness for each wall
layer. Wall layers are listed in order
252
Wall Type Definitions Dialog
from exterior at the top to interior at the diagram, illustrating how the wall displays in
bottom. The numbering format can be floor plan view.
Walls
changed by clicking the Num Style button.
Check By Layer if you want the line to
4 Build platform to this layer - When a assume the attributes of the wall’s layer as
floor or ceiling platform is built, it goes defined in the Layer Display Options
to this layer. By default, the Main Layer is dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
checked. This option can only be selected for 221.
one wall layer; when you select this box for
Click the Library button to open the
any other layer, it becomes unchecked for the
Library Browser to the Line Style
previous layer it was selected for.
category. See “Line Styles” on page 688.
5 By default, dimensions are based on a
wall’s Main Layer. Select Dimension 9 Layer Material - Specify the material
calculated in the Material List and any
to this Layer to have dimensions locate to a
fill patterns that display in 2D for the
different wall layer. This option can only be
currently selected, or active, wall layer.
selected for a single wall layer.
Click either of the two material display boxes
6 Total - Displays the total thickness of and the Select Library Object dialog
the wall type definition. If you change
opens to the Materials library category.
the total thickness, the program
Specify a material for the active layer in the
automatically changes the thickness of the
wall layer definition.
Main Layer to account for the difference.
10 Click Library Material to open the
7 Click the Insert button to create a new Select Library Object dialog to the
layer directly above the active layer in
Materials library category. See “Select
the wall type definition. The arrow to the
Library Object Dialog” on page 679.
right of the wall assembly diagram points to
the active layer. Click Plan Materials to open the Plan
Materials dialog. See“Plan Materials
To insert a layer at the bottom, click near the
Dialog” on page 707 .
outside edge of the last layer until the arrow
to the left of the diagram points to the last
11 Click the Fill Style button to open the
line. Wall Layer Fill Style dialog and
specify a fill style for the selected wall layer.
Click Delete to remove the currently active
This dialog is similar to the Fill Style tab for
layer. The arrow to the right of the wall
CAD objects. See “Fill Style Tab” on page
assembly diagram points to the active layer.
864.
8 Wall Line - Define the Color, Style, Wall layer fill styles are overridden if you
and Weight for each line in the wall
type definition. Click the line to edit in the use the Hatch Wall tool on a wall in
diagram. The arrow to the left of the diagram floor plan view.
points to the active line. Any changes made
in the dialog immediately display in the 12 Show as insulation in elevation -
Check this box to have insulation
253
details generated in cross section views when • Exterior walls on different floors are
aligned by the outer edges of their Main
the Autodetail tool is used. See “Auto-
Layers.
Detailing” on page 751.
• Roof baselines are placed at the outer
13 The arrow to the right of the wall edge of the Main Layer when roofs are
assembly diagram points to the active automatically generated.
layer. To activate a layer, click the layer in
the diagram or click in the Thickness field • Roof base lines and gable/roof lines that
assigned to it. are manually drawn snap to the edge of
this layer.
The arrow to the left of the wall assembly
• Dimension lines can locate the outer wall
diagram points to the active layer surface.
surfaces, Main Layer surfaces, or wall
14 Click the Num Style button to open the centers (for interior walls).
Number Style / Angle Style
dialog. Here you can change the numbering All of this information is reliant on the
format. See “Number Style/Angle Style Main Layer, so creating your wall type
Dialog” on page 873. definitions accurately beforehand and
specifying the Main Layer is very important.
The Main Layer

iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat
The Main Layer is the structural layer of the
wall, usually the framing layer. Use the radio Two files in the Chief Architect directory
button to designate the Main Layer. The have the .dat extension and contain the
Main Layer is used for many things: default Chief Architect wall type definitions:
iwalllay.dat (Imperial units) and
• Floor and ceiling platforms and automati- mwalllay.dat (metric units). These files are
cally built foundation walls are normally referred to as .dat files.
built to the outer edge of the Main Layer.
This behavior can be modified by speci- If you open a .plan file containing fewer than
fying a different layer to build your plat- six wall types, information from iwalllay.dat
forms to. or mwalllay.dat is automatically imported,
adding new wall types to your plan file.
254
Exporting Wall Definitions
Exporting Wall Definitions
Walls
1
2
3
4
Wall type definitions can be exported from here. You may see other .dat files in this
one Chief Architect plan file into another. directory that are not wall definitions.
This is a convenient alternative to re-creating
wall types that may already exist in another 4 Give the file a short, descriptive File
name.
plan.
The wall type definitions that export from 5 Save as type should be *.dat.
your current plan are listed in the Wall Type
Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type
The File> Export> Wall Definitions...
option exports all wall type definitions in one
.dat file. This .dat file can then be read into
another Chief Architect plan file.
To export a wall type definition, select File>
Export> Wall Defintions... to open the
Export Wall Defintions File dialog.
1 The current directory displays in the

Safe in field.
2 Browse to the location where you want

to save the file.
3 All data files with a .dat extension

located in the current directory display
255
Importing Wall Definitions
2
3
To import a .dat file (wall type definitions) in your plan. Files of the same name are
into the current plan, choose File> Import> overridden.
Wall Definitions.... The Import Wall
Definitions File dialog opens. Wall definitions can be made available
for future use by following the same
1 Navigate to the folder containing the instructions and importing them into your
wall definitions files. default template plan. See“To create your
own template plan” on page 168.
2 The selected file name displays.
The imported wall type definitions are now
3 Select the .dat file type. available in your current plan and are visible
in any list of wall types which display
When wall type definitions are imported, the throughout the program. See “Wall Type
names of the wall type definitions in the
Import file are compared with those already
Curved Walls and Roofs

When roofs are automatically generated, roof roof sections are created over the curved
planes are placed over curved walls at wall.
specified increments. The Build Roof
The following illustrations show a roof
dialog allows you to specify the degree
created at two different curved increments,
increments for the roof over the curved wall.
30 degrees and 15 degrees.
Any number fro 6 to 90 degrees may be
specified. The lower the number, the more
256
Curved Walls and Roofs
Walls
Concave Curved Walls & Roofs
Concave curved walls can produce roof 2. Spanning the concave curved wall with
planes that follow them. If the concave area a straight baseline and produce a roof
is too small, simpler roof planes are pro- plane for it from that.
duced. To follow the curved wall, the section
baselines must be longer than the Min.
Alcove value on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog. If baselines are shorter, the
automatically generated roofs are simplified
by either:
1. Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls

on either side extended to their meeting
point and the roof was produced.
257
Stepped and Raked Walls

Stepped and raked walls can be easily 4. Select one of these two handles, and
created using the Break Line tool and drag up or down.
edit handles in any 3D or Cross Section/ 5. A square step is created.
Elevation view. In many cases, working in a
The vertical edges of a wall cannot be
Backclipped Cross Section is easiest broken.
and allows the greatest accuracy.
By default, a stepped foundation wall
displays an “S” symbol at the location of the
Stepped Walls & Footings step in floor plan view. The display of this
One application for pony walls is a stepped “S” is controlled in the Wall Defaults
foundation. The lower part of the pony wall dialog. See “Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults
is the concrete wall with footing, and the Dialog” on page 276.
upper part of the pony wall is a framed wall
built to the first floor platform. Raked Walls
In the illustration above, the lower pony wall
is a single layer concrete wall and the upper
part of the pony wall is faced with brick.
To create a simple raked wall:
1. Select the wall in cross section/elevation

or 3D view.
2. Click one of the corner edit handles and
To add a step to a wall drag that handle either up or down.
3. To rake a wall at a specific angle, draw a
1. Select the wall in a Backclipped Cross
CAD Line at the desired angle.
Section view.
Select the raked edge of the wall, click
2. Click the Break Line tool, then the Make Parallel edit button, and
click the top or bottom edge of the wall then click the CAD line. See “Using
to place the break. Make Parallel/ Perpendicular” on page
3. In addition to the corner handles, two 126.
handles display along the broken edge.
258
Wall Specification Dialog
Compound Raked Walls Breaks cannot be added to the vertical edges

of a wall in cross section/elevation view -
The illustration below shows two walls
Walls
only the horizontal edges.
meeting in a “V”. Both walls have three
angles across the top of the wall. To create a compound raked wall
1. In cross section/elevation view, select

the wall, click the Break Wall tool,
then click either edge to be raked.
2. The new break point displays as an edit
To create a compound raked wall, breaks handle. Click this new handle and drag it
must be added to raked edge. Each section of to create the desired angle.
the wall can then be adjusted separately.

The Wall Specification dialog controls
the characteristics of selected walls. To open
the Wall Specification dialog, select a
wall or group of walls and click the Open
Object edit button.
259
General Tab
1
2 4
3
6 5
8
7
Items on the General tab are available only

4 Specify the Wall Angle and Wall
when they apply to the selected wall or walls. Length of a straight wall. These
options are not available for curved walls.
1 The Thickness of the selected wall • Wall Angle - The current absolute angle
displays here. It can be specified when
the wall is one of the System Default wall of the wall in a floor plan view is shown.
types. This option is not available for layered Type in a new angle to rotate the wall
wall types. about its locked point.
• Wall Length - The current length is
2 Check Foundation to specify the shown. Type in a new length. The part of
selected wall as a foundation wall.
More foundation wall settings are available the wall that extends or contracts is deter-
on the Foundation tab. mined by where it is locked.
3 Select the Railing check box to specify 5 Select a radio button to Lock the
the selected wall as a railing. More selected wall at its Start, End or Center.
railing settings are found on the Railing and When the Wall Angle or Wall Length of the
Newels/Balusters tabs. selected wall is changed, this part of the wall
is locked.
260
6 Check any of the Options to modify the the selected wall is very close, but not
selected wall accordingly. In most quite directly above or below a wall on
Walls
cases, multiple options can be selected. the floor above or below. Check the
• Check Invisible to specify the wall as option to precisely align the walls.
invisible. Invisible walls are used to If both options are available, you may choose
divide rooms areas that are not separated one or the other, but not both.
by a wall or railing, such as a nook from a
kitchen, and can display in floor plan When you click OK, the wall you selected
view but not 3D views. moves until it lines up properly with the wall
above or below. Walls align to the outer
Select Railing and Invisible to place surfaces of the main layer of exterior walls,
walls where there is a vertical break in and to the centers of interior walls.
the floor or ceiling level at the invisible
wall’s location. If railing is not selected, there
Curved walls are aligned in a similar way. To
will be a gap where the levels change. align two curved walls, the center of the
selected wall is moved to coincide with the
• Select No Room Definition to display center of the other wall. The wall is then
the wall in floor plan and/or 3D views but moved radially until the main layer surfaces
not define or divide a room. and centers match as previously described.
• Select No Locate to prevent automatic • Select Lock Center to lock the center of
dimension lines from locating a wall. No a curved wall.
Locate can be used for any wall that you • Select to Retain Wall Framing for this
do not want dimensioned. Railings have wall, as seen in the wall detail view or in
No Locate selected by default. 3D framing, when the wall framing is
• Select Invisible Beam to have the wall globally rebuilt.
display as two lines in floor plan view. • Select Terrain Retaining Wall to treat
This option is included for compatibility the wall as a terrain retaining wall. See
with earlier versions and its use is not “Terrain Breaks” on page 588.
encouraged. It does not create a beam • Select Stop at Platform to have the bot-
when framing is built or in 3D views. tom of the wall stop at the top surface of a
• Select Attic Wall to prevent the wall floor platform. This is the default for
from extending through the roof above. framed wall types.
See “Attic Walls” on page 248. • Select Go Through Platform to have the
• Select Retain attic wall to prevent an bottom of the wall go through a floor
existing attic wall from being deleted platform. This is the default for concrete
when you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil- wall types.
ings . This should be selected for Whether a wall is a framed or concrete type is
walls that you have drawn. determined by the material selected for its
• The Align with Below or Align with main layer. See “Wall Type Definitions Dia-
Above check boxes are available when log” on page 251.
261
• Select Stop at Ceiling to have the top of • Radius - Displays the radius length as
the wall stop at the bottom of a ceiling defined by the above radio buttons. Mod-
platform. ify this value to change the curvature of
• Select Balloon Through Ceiling to have the wall.
the top of the wall go through a ceiling Lock Center - Select this button so that
platform. when the radius is changed, the wall center
• Default Wall Top Height and Default remains locked and the wall ends change.
Wall Bottom Height are enabled if the Lock Ends - Select this button so that when
selected wall top and/or bottom height the radius is changed, the wall ends remain
has been edited. Check these boxes to locked and the wall center changes.
restore the default heights.
8 Check Double Wall to specify the
7 Radius To - This section is only active selected straight wall as a double wall.
for curved walls and controls the Two walls become double walls when they
definition of the curved wall radius. are parallel, touching, and this box is
• Outer - Select this radio button to define checked for both. See “Double Walls” on
the radius from the center of the curved page 248.
wall to the outer surface of the wall.
This section is only active for straight walls.
• Inner - Select this radio button to define
• Select Frame Through to create a basic
the radius from the center of the curved
double wall.
wall to the inner surface of the wall.
• Select Split Framing to create a double
• Outer Main - Select this radio button to
wall that splits platform and connecting
display or modify the radius from the
walls at its boundary.
center of the curved wall to the outside of
the main layer of the wall. • Select Furred Wall to treat the selected
wall as additional layers added to another
• Inner Main - Select this radio button to
wall.
define the radius from the center of the
curved wall to the inside of the main
9 Click the Num Style button to open the
layer of the wall. Number Style/Angle Style dialog
and change the way the Wall Angle and
Wall Length values display.
262
Roof Tab
Walls
1 2
4
3
Any automatically generated roof style other • Extend Slope Downward - Select the
than a hip requires roof information to be check box to continue a roof down over a
defined in the exterior walls. Select the Roof bumpout in an exterior wall.
tab to define the portion of the roof plan that • Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Place a
rests on the wall. See “Automatic Roofs vs. check in this box and the selected wall is
Manual Roofs” on page 384. divided by any roof section that overlaps
it. The wall section below the overlap-
1 Options - Specify the shape of the wall ping roof plane is removed.
relative to the roof planes.
• Full Gable Wall - Select the check box • Combine with Above Wall - This check
to create a gable end over the wall. box is available for a selected wall with
an attic wall above it. Check this box to
• High Shed/Gable- Select the check box
frame the upper and lower portions of the
to model the high end of a shed roof.
wall together as one when automatic
• Knee Wall - Select the check box to framing is built.
define a wall as a knee wall. Only an inte-
rior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A 2 Pitch - Enter a value to define the pitch
knee wall’s height is defined by the roof of the roof plane over this wall.
plane, not the ceiling height.
263
Check Upper pitch to create a roof plane Specify the horizontal Length of the roof
with two pitches. Enter the upper pitch value. return in inches.
Specify the elevation that the upper pitch Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof
Starts at, or define the inches in from returns from the overhang.
baseline that the second pitch begins. The
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
two values are dynamic. Press Tab to update Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
the relative numbers. “Some Common Roof Types” on page 390.
Specify the Overhang of the roof plane to be
Check the boxes to Include Frieze molding
generated above the selected wall. The
and Include Gutter.
default value is set in the Build Roof dialog.
See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 416.
4 Lower wall type if split by butting
roof - Designate a wall to be split into
3 Check Auto Roof Return to generate two wall types. The upper portion is defined
roof returns on the selected wall. In
in the Wall Types tab, and the lower portion
most cases, roof returns only work for Full
specified here.
Gable Walls. See “Roof Returns” on page
400.
Foundation Tab
1
2
4
5
264
1 Specify Foundation - Check this box 4 Center Footing on Main Layer -

to turn the selected wall into a Select the check box to center the
Walls
foundation wall. This produces a footing footing on the main layer instead of the entire
beneath the wall. stem wall layer definition.
2 Thickness - Define wall thickness for Warning messages may display if the
System Default Wall types. foundation wall layer definition does not
appear to be a foundation wall type.
3 Footing Width and Height - Define
the size of the footing below the
5 Automatic Footing Bottom Height -
selected foundation walls. Check this box to restore the default
height of the selected wall’s footing. Only
The Height value will be unavailable if the
available when the footing bottom height has
bottom height of the footing has been edited.
been edited.
Wall Types Tab
1
2
1 Check Pony Wall to enable the options types. Select the desired type from the list
for pony walls. See “Wall Types Tab and a preview displays below.
For Pony Walls” on page 266.
Use the Define button to open the Wall
Wall Type - The drop-down list Type Definitions dialog to create or
2
contains all currently available wall
265
modify any existing wall types. See “Wall

3 A preview of the wall type displays
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 251. here. The exterior side of the wall is at
the top of the drawing and the interior side is
at the bottom.
Wall Types Tab

For Pony Walls
3
4
When you select a pony wall or when you Wall Type for Lower Wall - The drop-down
turn a normal wall into a pony wall, the Wall list contains all currently available wall
Specification dialog has some additional types. Select the desired type from the list for
options. the lower portion of the pony wall.
1 Pony Wall - Check this box to make 3 Select a radio button to specify which
the wall a pony wall using a separate part of the pony wall is defined in the
wall type for the upper and lower portions of diagram below.
the wall.
4 Align pony wall - Select the option to
2 Wall Type for Upper Wall - The drop- define where the Upper and Lower wall
down list contains all available wall layer definitions align.
types. Select the desired type from the list for
the upper portion of the pony wall
266
• Outer surface - Select this radio button

Note: Pony Walls can specify how the two to align wall types at their outer surfaces.
Walls
wall type definitions align. If the thickness of
the main layers of the two wall type defini- • Outer main - Select this radio button to
tions are the same, the program may align align wall types at the exterior edge of
the exterior side when the interior side is their main layers.
specified. This is okay since both sides are
• Central main - Select this radio button to
aligned.
align the centers of the main layers of
both wall types.
• No change - Select this radio button to
leave the alignment as it was when dialog • Inner main - Select this radio button to
was opened. This should be used when align the wall types at the interior side of
multiple walls with different wall layer their main layers.
definitions are selected. • Inner surface - Select this radio button
to align wall types at their interior sur-
faces.
Railing Tab
2
6
7
3
4 8
5 9
1 Specify Railing - Check this box to Railings can be also drawn directly using the
specify the selected wall as a railing
Railing or Deck Railing tools.
and enable the other options on this tab.
267
2 Railing Type - Select the radio button

for the desired railing type. A preview
of the selected type displays to the left.
The following illustrations show the results
of each option.
• Panels - Create a solid panel.
• Balusters - Create balusters.
• Solid - Create a solid, wall style railing.

3 Post Type - Select the check box for
the desired post type.
The wall is the type defined by the cur-
• Post to Rail - Create newel posts from
rent wall layer definition.
floor to rail height. This option is selected
by default.
• Open - Create a railing with only a top

rail.
• Post to Beam - Create newel posts from
floor to an overhead beam placed just
under the ceiling height. This option is
used when placing a cross beam along the
top of the railing.
• Middle Rail - Create a railing with a top

and a middle rail.
• No Rail - Eliminate rails, leaving only

pillars or posts (and overhead beam, if
selected).
268
• Post to Ceiling - Select the check box to

6 A preview of the railing displays here
change the square newel posts to round and updates as options are changed.
Walls
pillars, and to make them extend to the
ceiling. 7 Check this box to display the preview
in color.
8 Halfpost Options - Select the check

box for the desired halfpost placement.
• No Halfpost - Select the check box to
prevent a half-width post from being
placed when a railing intersects a wall.
• Square Halfpost - Select the check box
to use a square halfpost where a railing
intersect with a wall.
9 Terrain Options - Select the check box

4 Exterior Materials - Select the check for the desired fencing or railing
box to make the balusters the same behavior on terrain. These options only apply
material as the rails, instead of having them when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a
be defined separately. You have more building on top of a defined terrain.
flexibility if you define materials for each
• Step Terrain - Select the check box to
part on the Material tab.
have the railing or fencing follow the ter-
5 Shoe Options - Select the check box rain in horizontal steps between each
for the desired placement of the bottom newel.
rail, or shoe. If neither box is checked, the • Follow Terrain - Select the check box to
shoe is placed at floor platform level. have the railing or fencing follow the ter-
• Raise Shoe - Raise the shoe 3-1/2” or 87 rain smoothly.
mm off the platform.
• No Shoe - Eliminate the shoe altogether.

Balusters go right to the floor.
269
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Railing Height - Specify the railing a fence with the newels to one side of the
height. fence boards.
2 Baluster Width - Specify the width of 6 Panel Type - Only available when the
each baluster. For a library baluster, railing type has been specified as
this is its width or diameter at its widest “Panels.” Select solid, framed, or Library to
point. For a panel type railing, this specifies select a symbol to be used as a rail panel.
the thickness and can be set no larger than
the thickness shown on the General tab. 7 Baluster Type - Only available when
the railing type is not specified as
3 Newel Width - Specify the width of “Panels.” Select square, round, or Library
each newel. For a library newel, this is Balusters. Selecting Library from this drop
its width or diameter at its widest point. down list is the same as clicking the Library
button to the imediate right and allows you to
4 Newel Height - This is the height from select a symbol from the library to be used as
the ground to the top of the newel.
a baluster.
5 Newel Offset - Specify the amount
each newel should be offset from the 8 Newel Type - Select square, round, or
Library Newels. Selecting Library
center of the railing. Use this when creating
from this drop down list is the same as
270
clicking the Library button to the immediate

9 Check Default to use the Draw Newels/
right and allows you to select a symbol from Balusters setting in the Railing
Walls
the library to be used as a newel. Defaults dialog. Check Draw Newels/
Balusters to draw newels and balusters in
floor plan view.
Wall Covering Tab

Introductory Training Video: Wall Cov- Classroom Design Project Training
erings Video: Adding Wall Coverings with
Assigned Materials
1
2
When a wall covering is assigned using the Click Select to open the Library Browser and
Wall Specification dialog, it is applied to change the current wall covering.
the selected wall only.
Click Delete to remove the current wall
All wall coverings applied to the covering.
1
selected wall are listed here.
3 A preview of the current wall covering
2 Click Add New to open the Library displays here. click a preview pane to
Browser and apply a new wall open the Library Browser.
covering.
271
Enter a height from wall covering Top To Check Interior and/or Exterior to apply the
Ceiling and Floor To Bottom. The wall wall covering to the inside and/or outside of
covering’s Width can also be specified. the selected wall.
Handrail Tab
The Handrail tab is used to specify the style
and size of the handrailing on a selected
railing, deck railing, or fence.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Molding - Displays the current handrail 3 Default - Click this button to remove a
profile being used. This typically says custom handrail that has been specified
“Default Handrail” unless a custom handrail and use the default handrail.
profile has been selected.
4 Preview Pane - Displays the selected
2 Select - Click this button to open the molding profile. No preview displays
Select Library Object dialog and for the “Default Handrail” option, which is
specify a profile from the library to be used rectangular.
as a handrail.
Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
272
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
5 Width - Specify the width of the Layer Tab

railing.
For information about the Layers tab, see
Walls
6 Height - Specify the height of the “Layer Tab” on page 223.
handrail molding. Defaults to 2 inches
or 5 cm. Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 710.
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

The Wall Hatch Specification dialog Layer Tab
controls the display of the selected wall
hatch. To open the dialog, select the hatch For information about the Layer tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 223.
and click the Open Object edit button.
Fill Style Tab
1 Define the appearance of the wall • Fill Pattern - Select a pattern from the
hatch. drop-down list.
273
• Spacing - Specify the spacing between • Use Background Color - Select the
hatch pattern lines. radio button to make the hatch pattern
• Angle - Specify the angle of the hatch line color the same as the fill.
pattern. • Use Layer Color - Select the radio but-
• Line Weight - Specify the line weight of ton to make the hatch pattern line color
the hatch pattern. that of the Walls, Hatching layer.
• Transparent Pattern Fill - Select the 2 Custom Pattern File and Name - This
check box to make the background trans- section is enabled if Custom is selected
parent. in the Fill Pattern field. Browse to select a
custom pattern file, a style of the selected
• Fill/Pattern Color - Select the radio but-
pattern from the pull-down list, and a pattern
ton and click the button to open the Win-
scale.
dows Color Chooser dialog. Specify a
color for the hatch pattern lines and click
3 A picture of the hatch pattern displays
OK. changes as they are made.
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by Defaults dialog associated with your
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... selection.
Click the “+” next to Walls to display the
Wall, railing and fencing defaults can also be
walls sub-headings. Select a subheading and
accessed by double-clicking the Wall Tools
click the Edit... button to open the Walls
button.
General Wall Defaults Dialog

The General Wall Defaults dialog Defaults button can be added to the
controls the general behavior and toolbar or you can press Alt+Q on your
display attributes of all walls, railings and keyboard.
fencing. For quick access, the General Wall
274
Walls
1 2
1 Resize About - These radio buttons 3 Enter the Wall Thickness to be used
determine what part of a wall retains its for Default Wall Types. See “Wall Type
position when the wall type or wall type Definitions” on page 251.
definition is changed.
Resize About also controls how colinear
walls snap together.
• Outer Surface - Resize a wall from the
exterior surface in. The exterior surface
does not move.
• Main Layer Outside - Resize a wall
from the exterior side of the main layer
in. The outer main layer surface does not
move
• Wall Center - Resize a wall from its cen-
ter.
• Main Layer Inside - Resize a wall from
the interior side of the main layer out.
• Inside Surface - Resize a wall from the
interior surface out.
2 Check Show Wall Length When

Editing to display a temporary
dimension when a wall is drawn or edited.
Wall length only displays when Display
Temporary Dimensions is on.
275
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Dialog
3
1
1 Exterior Wall Tool - From the drop- To create or modify wall types, click the
down list, select the wall type drawn Define button to open the Wall Type
Definitions dialog.
with the Exterior Wall tool.
To create or modify wall types, click the 3 Railings, Fencing, Wood Frame and
Define button to open the Wall Type Invisible Walls - Default Thickness -
Definitions dialog.
Select a thickness for these tools and wall
types from the drop-down list.
2 Interior Wall Tool - From the drop-
down list, select the wall type drawn by
the Interior Wall tool.
276
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog
3
1
1 Upper Wall - From the drop-down list, Wall layers and windows in the upper
select the default wall type for the
upper portion of pony walls. part of the pony wall do not display in
floor plan view when Show Lower Wall in
Click the Define button to open the Wall Plan View is selected.
Type Definitions dialog and create or
modify wall types. See “Wall Type From the drop-down list, select the default
Definitions Dialog” on page 251. wall type for the lower portion of pony walls.
2 Lower Wall - Specify the structure and Click the Define button to open the Wall
appearance of the lower portion of pony Type Definitions dialog and create or
walls. modify wall types.
Height of Lower Wall - Specify the default
3 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default
height of the lower portion of pony walls. option for aligning the layers of the
upper and lower pony walls. See “Wall
Check Show Lower Wall in Plan View to
Types Tab For Pony Walls” on page 266.
display this wall type in floor plan view
instead of the upper wall type.
277
278
Chapter 8:
Rooms
Rooms
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Rooms Materials for walls, ceilings, floors and
moldings can be defined room-by-room or
for the entire model based on Room Type.
Video: Rooms - Decks, Floors and
Foundations
Chapter Contents
When walls or railings create an enclosed • Room Definition
area, a “room” is created. You can select • Room Defaults
rooms defined in this manner like other • Room Material Defaults
objects in Chief Architect and open them for • Floor & Ceiling Heights
specification. • Selecting Rooms
Rooms are assigned a Room Type. Each • Room Types
Room Type has predefined characteristics. A • Room Labels
room defined as Porch, for example, is • Decks
assigned certain attributes that are different • Editing Rooms
than a Kitchen. • Special Ceilings
• Room Polylines
Ceiling and floor heights can be defined • Room Specification Dialog
room-by-room or for the entire floor.
Baseboard, chair-rail, and crown molding
can be applied room-by-room or for the
entire floor.
279
Room Definition
Classroom Design Project Training If room is drawn within a larger structure and
Video: Room Definitions and Key none of its walls connect to the exterior
Room Properties walls, either directly or indirectly by
connecting to walls that do, the program will
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by
view this room as a separate building and
any combination of joined walls or railings,
unexpected issues may result. Connect such
visible or invisible. To be recognized as a
a room to the larger structure with an
room by Chief Architect a room must have
Invisible wall.
an unbroken perimeter.
Room definition disappears if part or all of a
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate
surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea
floor and ceiling platforms automatically.
to finalize the position of walls before
Most rooms are also automatically covered
defining rooms with names and attributes
by the roof when one is built. There are
such as floor height and ceiling height.
exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as
Decks.
Room Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by to create 3D models - particularly floor and
selecting Edit> Default Settings. In ceiling heights. Moldings can also be
the Default Settings dialog, select Floor specified in the Floor Defaults dialog.
and click the Edit button to open the Floor
Only the defaults for the first floor of a
Defaults dialog for the current floor.
building can be set ahead of time. The
The default values for rooms are specified in program uses the setting from the first floor
the Floor Defaults dialog for the current to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor
floor. The Floor Defaults dialog contains is built, its floor defaults can be changed. See
important information that the program uses “Floor Defaults” on page 364.
Room Material Defaults

The default materials used for rooms are • Decks
specified based on the type of room. There • Garage, Porches.
are four separate room types that can have
their default materials specified: The Room Material Defaults dialog is
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
• General Rooms
• Kitchens, Baths, and Utility Rooms Settings... . Expand the Materials
category, select Room Materials, and click
280
Floor & Ceiling Heights
Edit.. Click the room type you want to edit to Above Floor’s Platform for Ceiling is
open the Room Material Defaults dialog unchecked in the Floor Defaults dialog.
for that room type. This dialog is similar to See “Floor Defaults” on page 364.
the Materials tab found in many specification
dialogs. See “Materials Tab” on page 710. Wall Materials
If a room type is assigned, the room uses one There are several ways that materials can be
of the four defaults for its materials. If a assigned to walls, depending on how the
Rooms
room type has not been assigned, the room rooms and walls have been defined.
uses the General Rooms default materials.
When you create a room, the wall surfaces
use the default material specified in the Wall
Floor and Ceiling Materials
Type Definition dialog. See “Wall Type
Introductory Training Video: Custom Definitions Dialog” on page 251.
Flooring
You can change a room’s wall material on the
Specify floor materials and subfloor material Materials tab of the Room Specification
for the entire floor in the Room Material dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 710. To
Defaults dialog or for individual rooms in restore the default Wall Type material, click
the Room Specification dialog. Plan Materials and select Use Default from
the list. See “Plan Materials Dialog” on page
You can specify three separate ceiling
707.
materials for a ceiling.
In addition, you can change the surface
Normally, only the Floor Covering and the
material of an individual wall in the Wall
Ceiling Covering display in 3D views. If the
Specification dialog. If you select Use
covering is specified as No Material, the
Default as the material, the program refers to
material below is visible. If no floor or
the material specified in the Room
ceiling material has been assigned, then the
program displays the default material for the
floor or ceiling. When neither the wall nor the room has a
material assigned to it, the program refers to
All floor and ceiling materials are used for
the general material for walls in the
the calculation of the materials list.
Material Defaults dialog. See “Material
You can only assign unique ceiling materials Defaults Dialog” on page 721.
to individual rooms when the checkbox Use
Floor & Ceiling Heights

Introductory Training Video: Vaulted including the foundation. Use the Floor
and Custom Ceilings Defaults dialog to change these values on a
floor-by-floor basis.
Default floor and ceiling heights are defined
in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor,
281
Use the Room Specification dialog to set definition. To create room definition without
floor heights on a room-by-room basis. You enclosing an area with solid walls, use
can use these settings to create split levels,
Railings .
sunken living rooms, bi-levels, and dropped
garages, for example.
In 3D views you can adjust the default floor
and ceiling height for the entire floor, the
floor and ceiling height for an individual
room, or the floor and ceiling height for an
individual wall. See “In 3D Views” on page
290.
The Room Specification dialog controls
ceiling heights by room. Different rooms on Using Invisible Using an
the same floor can have unique ceiling Railings Invisible Wall
heights, cathedral ceilings, coffered ceilings,
or no ceiling at all. See “Room Specification Visible or invisible, railings work well to
Dialog” on page 296. create room definition because they put a
railing where the two rooms meet and fill in
the vertical space between with a short wall.
An invisible wall does not fill in the vertical
space between the two levels.
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated.
Changing the floor or ceiling height in one
room can affect floor and ceiling heights
above and below.
• If a room’s floor is lowered, its ceiling
height is increased while the ceiling
below that room drops.
All floor and ceiling heights are measured • If the floor is raised, the ceiling height
relative to zero, which is the default floor decreases while the ceiling below that
height for Floor 1. Unlike other default floor room is raised.
and ceiling heights, the default floor height
• If a ceiling is lowered or raised, the floor
for Floor 1 cannot be changed, but the floor
above is lowered or raised as well.
heights of rooms on Floor 1 can be edited
individually. If the rooms above a particular room have
more than one floor height, the room’s
In order to raise or lower a room’s floor or
ceiling is stepped.
ceiling height, you must give it a room
282
Selecting Rooms
In the following example, the lowest floor

height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
at 96 inches. An overview and cross section/
elevation view are shown.
Rooms
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can
be used to cover any “steps” made by
different floor heights on the floor above. See
“General Tab” on page 297.
Split Levels
A split level can be created by raising or
lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
various areas of the plan.
Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can
confirm that a room has room definition by
using the Select Objects tool to select it.
When a fully-enclosed room is selected, the
room highlights.
Note: The selection color can be specified in

the Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel”
on page 186.
The room at left is selected
As with many other objects in the program,

rooms can be group-selected, as well.
283
The Exterior Room In 3D Views

You can also select the exterior of a model. Click the floor of a room or on a wall surface
This allows you to control the building’s inside the room in a 3D or cross section view
exterior wall coverings and materials using
using the Select Objects tool. If you
the Room Specification dialog.
select another object instead of the room,
Click just outside an exterior wall using the click Select Next Object edit button or
Select Objects tool to select the Exterior press the Tab key until the room is selected.
Room. When it is selected, a highlighted The status bar indicats which object is
band around the plan’s exterior displays. currently selected.
This band represents the selection area for Click the exterior surface of an exterior wall
the Exterior Room. to select the Exterior Room. Click Select
Next Object if needed. For more, see “In
3D Views” on page 290.
Using Select Same Type

Click a room to select it, then click the
Select Same Type edit button and use
it to group-select rooms with shared
attributes. See “Select Same / Load Same”
on page 152.
The Exterior Room is selected
Room Types
Classroom Design Project Training You can edit the text of a room label in floor
Video: Assigning Room Types and plan view, but the type of room originally
Running a Plan Check assigned remains until it is changed in the
Room Specification dialog. See “Editing
Once your floor plan is laid out, each room
Room Labels” on page 287.
should be assigned a Room Type on the
General tab of the Room Specification
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 297. Available Room Types
When you assign a room type, a label with There are three categories of room types:
the room name displays in floor plan view. Interior, Exterior and Hybrid.
The Room Type applies appropriate Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen,
structural and display properties to the room. Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm,
284
Room Types
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, • Walls that define the garage have a foun-
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, and Utility dation under them defined by the
Foundation Defaults dialog with a
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony
concrete slab at the top of stem wall or
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, grade beam.
Attic • The garage floor displays in 3D with the
foundation floor, not the first floor.
Effects of Room Types
Rooms
• Defining a room as Slab causes the floor
The program applies specific structural and platform thickness to equal the slab thick-
display properties to rooms depending on the ness value in the Foundation Defaults
assigned Room Type. dialog.
Living Area • Courts, decks and balconies do not gener-
• All interior type rooms are included in ate foundations.
Living Area calculations; exterior and Doors and Windows
hybrid rooms are not. • A window placed in a wall between an
Ceilings and Roofs exterior room and an interior room
always faces out toward the exterior.
• Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof
above them unless specified otherwise. • Windows placed between interior rooms
generate a warning message.
• Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to
the outside and do not generate a roof • Door placed between interior and exterior
above them. type rooms display threshold lines.
• Attic rooms are ignored by the program’s • Interior doors do not display thresholds.
automatic roof generator. • Open Below rooms are treated as interior
• Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated rooms for window and door placement.
like exterior rooms in all cases except Electrical
that they generate a ceiling and a roof
above them. • The Auto Place Outlets tool adds
Floors and Foundations outlets automatically to all interior rooms
except bathrooms. Only one outlet over
Classroom Design Project Training each sink is added for a bathroom.
Video: Indicating Room Floor Cover-
ings in Plan • The Auto Place Outlets tool places
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms.
• Open Below is a unique type of interior
room. It has no floor platform and can be • The Auto Place Outlets tool does
used for defining stairwell openings. not place outlets in Porch rooms.
• Exterior walls of rooms default to create
the foundation type specified in the • The Auto Place Outlets tool does
Foundation Defaults dialog. not place outlets in exterior type rooms.
285
• The Auto Place Outlets tool does • Baseboards and chair rails are not drawn
not place outlets in Open Below rooms. in Open Below rooms, but crown mold-
ing does.
• Any outlet manually placed in an exterior
room automatically becomes a water- Plan Check
proof outlet designed for exterior use. • Plan Check uses the room type and
Trim and Molding its characteristics for basic plan checking.
• Moldings are not automatically drawn in For example, a closet does not need a
exterior rooms. smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
“Plan Check” on page 885.
Room Labels
Room labels are based on the Room Types “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
assigned in the Room Specification 218. You can specify how the area of rooms
dialog. You can move or delete a room label is calculated by the program by turning on
in floor plan view without affecting the room the display of one of these layers:
type. See “Room Types” on page 284. • Rooms, Standard Area is measured
There are two parts to each room label: the from center of interior walls to either the
room type, which is similar to a standard text outside surface of exterior walls or exte-
object, and the room area, which is not a rior wall framing, depending on the Liv-
standard text entry and cannot be edited. ing Area to setting in the Floor
Defaults dialog. It is rounded to the
Room labels can move about or even nearest square foot or mm and does not
disappear when room entries are revali- include the area within bay, box and bow
dated. windows.
• Rooms, Interior Area is measured from
Room Label Defaults the inner surfaces of all the room's walls.
The initial settings that control the size, It is rounded to the nearest square foot or
font, color and other aspects of room mm and includes the area within bay, box
label appearance are controlled in the Room and bow windows.
Label Defaults dialog. See “Room Label • Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also
Defaults” on page 838. measured from the inner surfaces of the
room walls. It is rounded to the nearest
Displaying Room Labels inch or mm and does not include the area
within bay, box and bow windows.
The display of room labels is controlled in
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
286
Room Labels
of the room label, but you can turn the area

Rooms, Standard Area can be mea- and dimensions on or off separately in the
sured to either the exterior main wall Layer Display Options dialog.
layer surface or to the exterior wall surface.
Specify which method you prefer on the Gen- The Interior Area room area calculation
eral tab of the Floor Defaults dialog. See includes the areas within bay, box or bow
“Floor Defaults” on page 364. windows, while the Standard Area and
Interior Dimensions calculations do not.
Editing Room Labels
Rooms
You can also insert room areas and
Room labels are similar to standard text dimensions into text objects as Text Macros.
entries and can be changed, moved and See “Text Macros” on page 826.
resized like any other text object.
Although the text of a room label can be Living Area
edited, the program recognizes the specified The Living Area label displays the area of
room type until you select another in the the floor platform for living areas in a plan. It
Room Specification dialog. The program is found near the bottom center of the plan as
determines the type of the room from this soon as a room area is defined by walls and/
selection, not from the text that the label or railing. The area is recalculated every time
contains.
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .
Before editing a room label, try to assign the
room type most similar to the room’s actual The Living Area displays for an individual
use. For example, it is reasonable to change building if half or more of that building's area
the “Bedroom” label to “Guest Room,” since is living area. For example, a living area
these rooms have similar uses. Defining a label would not display for a detached garage
closet as a “Living Room” and then editing that contains a bathroom or small shop.
its label to say “Closet” may cause problems. You can choose not to display this label by
The program still considers it a living room clearing the Show “Living Area” check box
because this is the specified room type. in the Plan Defaults dialog or by turning
If you delete the room label, the room type off the display of the Room Labels layer in
remains in the Room Specification the Layer Display Options dialog.
dialog. To restore the label, check the Show The Living Area label can be moved or
Room Label check box in the Room deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area
label, select Tools> Plan Check . You
on page 297.
can click the Done button immediately,
without actually completing Plan Check.
Room Area
Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area Living Area vs. Footprint
and dimensions are not standard text entries
The Living Area should not be mistaken for
and cannot be edited or changed. The room
the footprint of the house. Only true livable
area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest
287
areas are included in the Living Area

2. Click the Make Room Polyline edit
calculation. Exterior and hybrid room types
button. This creates a polyline surround-
such as Garage, Deck, and Porch are not
ing the plan from the exterior wall sur-
included. Neither is any room labeled Open
face.
Below or Attic. See “Available Room Types”
on page 284 of the Reference Manual. 3. You can edit the polyline shape if you
want to measure portions of a home.
Living Area is measured from the outside
surface or main layer surface of exterior 4. Select the Polyline and click the Open
walls, and to the center of walls or railings Object edit button. A Polyline Area
separating the living area from exterior or displays in the Polyline
hybrid room types. Specification dialog. If no area is
shown, the polyline is not closed.
To find the footprint of a floor
1. Click outside a plan, near an exterior

wall. This selects the exterior “room”
surrounding the plan.
Decks
Introductory Training Video: Patios To create a deck without a railing, click the
Introductory Training Video: Decks Straight Deck Edge tool or the Curved
Classroom Design Project Training Deck Edge tool, then click and drag to
Video: Generating Deck Planking and draw the perimeter of the deck.
Framing You can also create a regular, polygon-
Classroom Design Project Training shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped
Video: Extending a Deck with the Poly- Deck tool. See “Polygon Shaped Rooms
gon Deck Tool and Decks” on page 235.
You can define a room as a Deck on the A room does not have to be defined by Deck
General Tab of the Room Specification Railing to be specified as a “Deck”. See
dialog. “Room Types” on page 284.
To draw a deck, click the Deck Railing By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
tool, then click and drag to draw a railing. want to have a roof over your deck, check
Once room definition is established, the area Roof over this room on the Structure tab of
defined by the deck railing is assigned the the Room Specification dialog. Select the
“Deck” room type. Post to Beam option on the Railing tab to
give the roof a visible means of support. See
“Railing Tab” on page 267.
288
Decks
Deck Stairs You can frame deck rooms two ways in Chief
Architect: Standard deck framing or
Classroom Design Project Training Advanced Deck Framing.
Video: Drawing Stairs for a Deck
If Advanced Deck Framing has not been
There are two ways to create stairs from a built, the program creates standard deck
deck down to the terrain. framing when you generate floor framing
using the Build Framing dialog. If you
To create stairs using the Click Stair tool
Rooms
have a deck on your second floor, you must
go to the 1st floor tab and select framing for
1. Select the Click Stair tool. the platform above to generate standard deck
2. Click within 12 inches of the deck rail, framing. See “Floor Tabs” on page 475.
outside the deck. Normally, standard decks appear as solid
platforms in all 3D views. Standard deck
To draw a down stairway from a deck framing displays in 3D views if you create a
framing overview. You can change the deck
1. Select Build> Stairs in floor plan materials that displays in 3D views on the
view. Materials Tab of the Room Specification
dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 710.
2. Place the pointer at the edge of the deck,
hold down the Alt key (or click with the You can create Advanced Deck Framing
right mouse button) and drag in the details that also include posts, support
direction of the stairs. Holding the Alt beams, and deck planking using the Build
key produces a stairway that goes down Advanced Deck Framing edit button. If
instead of up. a foundation level exists, the program also
3. Place a doorway in the railing at the top creates supports for the deck. You do not
of the steps. need to build any other framing using the
Build Framing dialog to create and display
The only time you should ever draw the Advanced Deck Framing.
stairs from an upper level down is when
you are going from a floor platform such as a Any standard deck framing is deleted when
deck to the ground or finished grade. When Advanced Deck Framing is generated.
stairs are drawn between two floor platforms,
they should be drawn from the lower floor
If you want to remove the Advanced Deck
platform to the upper floor platform. Framing, select the deck room and click the
Remove Advanced Deck Framing edit
Deck Framing button. Normally, the advanced framing deck
display in all 3D views.
Video: Framing Decks - New Planking
and Framing Options Deck Planking
The display of the deck planking is
controlled by the Framing, Deck Planking
289
layer in the Layer Display Options Framing edit button. If Advanced Deck
dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” Framing has already been built, click
on page 218. Remove Advanced Deck Framing first.
You can customize the planking overhang, Once created, the individual planking and
width, spacing and border on the Deck tab of framing objects created by the Advanced
the Room Specification dialog. See
Deck Framing tool can be edited like
“Deck Tab” on page 301.
CAD objects. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
After setting these specifications, select the Based Objects” on page 107.
deck room and click the Advanced Deck
Editing Rooms
Once a room is defined by walls or railings, 2. Click the exterior surface of a wall to
its structure and appearance can be edited select the exterior room. The status bar
using the edit buttons or the Room indicates when the exterior room is
Specification dialog. Floor and ceiling selected.
heights, floor platform structure, moldings, 3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top
wall coverings and an array of materials can wall edge to adjust the default ceiling
all be specified in the Room height, or the edit handle on the bottom
Specification dialog. See “Room edge to adjust the default floor height.
Specification Dialog” on page 296. Temporary dimensions display.
In 3D Views To adjust room heights in 3D

The floor and ceiling heights for floors,
rooms, and individual walls can be edited 1. Create a floor camera view of your plan.
using edit handles in render and vector Although walls can be edited in any 3D
camera views and overviews. Lowered view, cross sections, elevations, floor
ceilings cannot be edited in 3D. The default camera views, or floor overviews are
floor and ceiling heights for an entire model best for editing walls.
can be edited in a 3D view by selecting the 2. Click the surface of a wall that faces the
exterior room. room to select it. When the room is
selected in 3D:
To change default floor heights in 3D
• The room highlights
1. Create a floor camera view of your plan. • The Status Bar says “Room.” See “The
Although walls can be edited in any 3D Status Bar” on page 8.
view, cross sections, elevations, floor • Two edit handles display on the top and
camera views, or floor overviews are bottom edges of the highlighted wall.
best for editing walls.
290
Editing Rooms
3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top Using the Edit Buttons
wall edge to adjust the room ceiling
height, or the handle on the bottom edge A selected room or rooms can be edited in a
to adjust its floor height. Temporary variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
dimensions display. toolbar.
4. As you drag a handle, notice that all The following edit toolbar buttons may
walls defining that room are affected. display on the edit toolbar for selected
rooms.
Rooms
To adjust the height of a wall in 3D
• Click the Select Next Object button
to select nearby objects instead of the
1. Create a floor camera view of your plan.
selected room, particularly the wall it is
Although walls can be edited in any 3D
placed in.
view, cross sections, elevations, floor
camera views, or floor overviews are • Click the Open Object button to
best for editing walls. open the specification dialog for the
2. Click a surface of the wall that faces. By select room(s). See “Room Specification
default, the room selects first. You can Dialog” on page 296.
change this behavior on the Architec-
tural panel of the Preferences dialog. See • Click the Select Same Type button to
“Architectural Panel” on page 198. select all rooms that have attributes set
the same as the original room. This can
3. Click the Select Next Object edit be useful to quickly see which rooms on a
button to select the wall. The Status Bar floor share the same attributes.
says “Wall.” See “The Status Bar” on
page 8. • Use the Load Values to Make Same
button to load the selected attributes into
4. Click and drag the edit handles. Tempo-
any rooms that do not currently have the
rary dimensions display in elevation
same values. See “Select Same / Load
views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
Same” on page 152.
• Click the Make Room Polyline but-
Note: Any rooms that do not update when the ton to create a polyline that follows the
default floor or ceiling height is changed are
surfaces of the selected room. See “Room
not using the default values. To use the
default values for a specific room, open it for Polylines” on page 295.
specification and check Default for any of the • Click the Make Room Molding Polyline
room height values. See “Room Specification
Dialog” on page 296. button to create a room molding
polyline. See “Room Molding Polylines”
on page 295.
• Click the Expand Room Polyline

button to create a room polyline that
291
ignores invisible walls and railings. See contents of the selected room, not includ-
“Expand Room Polyline” on page 296. ing walls. See “Calculate From Room”
• Click the Calculate Materials for Room on page 1006.
button to create a materials list of the
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling Ceiling planes behave like roof planes except
platform on top the wall plates of a room. that whereas the top of a roof plane is viewed
More varied and complex ceilings are made from outside the house, the bottom of a
using settings in the Room Specification ceiling plane is viewed from inside the
dialog and the Ceiling Plane tool. house. See “Ceiling Planes” on page 409.
Lowered Ceiling Height

You can define a Lowered Ceiling height to The illustration below, the default ceiling
model a dropped ceiling without affecting height for the entire floor is 120", and the
the wall plate height. See “General Tab” on room on the right has a Lowered Ceiling
page 297. height of 96". The dashed line in the dialog
preview represents the lowered ceiling.
292
Special Ceilings
Rooms
Cathedral Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling can be created using the Structure tab, clear the check box for
underside of the roof above or by drawing Ceiling Over This Room.
ceiling planes in floor plan view. 3. To create a ceiling pitch different from
the roof’s, select Build> Roof> Ceiling
To create a cathedral ceiling
Plane and draw ceiling planes. See
1. Draw the roof planes. “Ceiling Planes” on page 409.
2. When the roof is in place, individually 4. Select each ceiling plane and assign a
select every room affected, and open the lower pitch See “Ceiling Plane Specifi-
Room Specification dialog. On the cation Dialog” on page 428.
293
Tray Ceilings
Tray ceilings are usually based on a hip-style the Room Specification dialog, the new
roof. If you use a hip roof and uncheck Ceil- ceiling follows the entire hip roof line.
ing Over This Room, on the General tab of
Hip roof with cathedral Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling Tray ceiling from floor plan
ceiling over. height raised and ceilings view. Note dashed lines for
rebuilt. changed ceiling direction.
Generally, only the lower part of a tray Other Special Ceilings

ceiling follows the roof line, with the rest
remaining flat. In this case, the ceiling needs Soffits can be used in various ways to
to remain checked for that room and the enhance the 3D model. Soffits’ ability to
ceiling height adjusted instead. follow the slope of the roof offers unlimited
possibilities, such as exposed beams or
The roof must be built before adjusting the
trusses and coffered ceilings.
ceiling height for a coffered ceiling. Any
attempt to rebuild the roof after adjusting the
ceiling height results in the roof itself being
raised to match the new ceiling height.
For this example, a hip roof is based on 8’
ceilings. After the roof is built, the Ceiling
Height is raised to 10’. The resulting ceiling
follows the roof pitch for 2’, then becomes a
flat ceiling. Polyline solids, framing members and locked
roof trusses can also be used for similar
Dashed lines in floor plan view show where
purposes.
the ceiling changes from sloped to flat. This
line is located on the Walls/Beams layer in
the Layer Display Options dialog.
294
Room Polylines
Room Polylines
Click the Make Room Polyline edit Make Room Molding
button to create a standard polyline that Polyline Dialog
follows the surfaces of the selected room.
Room polylines and room molding polylines
are not affected when the room is altered.
Rooms
Room Molding Polylines
1
To create a molding polyline that
follows the interior surfaces of a room, 2
select the room and click the Make Room 3
Molding Polyline button on the edit toolbar.
Room molding polylines can be edited just
like other molding polylines. Their shape and
height can be altered and the molding profile
can be changed. Additional molding profiles
1 Select the type of molding to convert to
a molding polyline.
can also be assigned. See “Molding
Each option is only enabled if the selected
Polylines” on page 541.
room has that type of molding applied to it.
Use a room molding polyline to wrap a
When you convert a molding type to a mold-
molding around an object the molding ing polyline, the room molding turns off. See
would not normally wrap around. You can “Moldings Tab” on page 302.
also remove a portion of an existing room • Base Molding - Select to convert the
molding by removing an edge of the polyline.
room’s base molding into a molding
See “Edit Object Parts” on page 93.
polyline.
• Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert
the room’s chair rail molding into a mold-
ing polyline.
• Crown Molding - Select to convert the
room’s crown molding into a molding
polyline.
2 Blank Molding - Select to generate a

blank molding polyline at the specified
height. The polyline follows the room
perimeter and has blank sections where the
polyline crosses windows and doors if these
objects are at the polyline height.
295
3 Height - Specify the height of the blank 2. Click the Expand Room Polyline
molding. edit button.
Expand Room Polyline 3. Click the Make Room Polyline or
The Expand Room Polyline edit Make Room Molding Polyline edit
button to create a polyline that follows
button displays when you select a room
the interior surfaces of walls, ignoring
separated from other rooms by invisible
invisible walls and railings.
walls or railings and creates a polyline that
ignores those invisible walls and railings. The Expanded Room Polyline tool does not
create a new room that can be opened for
To use the Expand Room Polyline tool specification; it only allows you to generate a
larger room polyline or room molding
1. Click in a room defined by at least one polyline.
invisible wall or railing.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog controls A value with Default checked is referenced
the structural characteristics and appearance from the Floor Defaults dialog. To return a
of a selected room. To open the Room value to the default, replace the check mark.
Specification dialog, select a room and
click the Open Object edit button.
296
General Tab
1
2
Rooms
3
12
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
The General tab shows a cross section of the determines which of the the rooms display as
room, showing the various heights and the floor below.
platform thicknesses, including foundations,
for the floors below the room you selected. 1 Select the Room Type. This affects
some of the room characteristics.
The room in the above example has a
foundation below.
2 Show Room Label - Select the check
box to display the room label in floor
What appears in the cross section depends on
plan view.
the current floor and the location of the
pointer when you selected the room. Only
3 Floor Height - Specify the height of
two floors at a time display in the Room the subflooring above or below the
Specification dialog. If one large room on default first floor height of zero.
the current floor is positioned over a couple
of smaller rooms, the position of the pointer 4 Ceiling Height - Specify the ceiling
height relative to the room’s floor
relative to the smaller lower rooms
297
height. Ceiling height is measured from the If the material for the current room floor is
top of the subflooring to the bottom of the Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been
ceiling framing. rebuilt since it was set to this, the Platform
thickness defaults to the Slab thickness in the
5 Lowered ceiling - Specify the height Foundation Defaults dialog, unless is
for a lowered ceiling, measured from
was explicitly set in the Structure tab.
the top of the subflooring to the bottom of the
lowered ceiling framing.
10 The thickness of the slab on the floor
below (if any) is shown here, but
6 Stem Wall Height - If the room below cannot be edited.
is the foundation, specify the distance
from the bottom of the floor framing to the
11 Roof Group - Specify a roof group for
top of the footing. the room. The program builds a
complete roof plan for each set of rooms with
7 Floor Above Height - Specify the the same Roof Group number. This roof plan
height of the subfloor for the floor
is not influenced by any other parts of the
above, measured from the top of the current
structure where the rooms are in different
floor’s subfloor.
roof groups. This number is nearly always
8 Ceiling Below - The ceiling height for left zero. Change this number to break off a
the floor below is shown. It may be structure so that the program does not
defined here, or in the specification for that automatically combine its roof system with
room. The values are linked. the main building.
9 Platform Thickness - The thickness of 12 A diagram of the room is shown. The

the floor platform assembly, including arrows indicate what part of the
the subfloor and joists, displays here but structure moves if you make changes in the
cannot be edited. The platform thickness can corresponding box.
be changed on the Structure tab.
298
Structure Tab
1 9
2
Rooms
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 If Ceiling Over This Room is checked, This option is only available if there is no
the room has a flat ceiling. If room or foundation room under the selected
unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside room.
of the roof or ceiling planes.
4 Floor for This Room is Supplied by
2 If Roof Over This Room is checked, a the Foundation “Room” from the
roof automatically generates over the Floor Below - Check this box to make the
room. If unchecked, no roof generates. current room similar to an Open Below
room, deleting its own floor platform. The
3 Slab Foundation for This Room - floor of the room below, which is often a
Check this box to change this room’s
room on the foundation floor, then supplies
floor platform into a concrete slab. This slab
the floor of the current room. While the same
gets its thickness from the Foundation
thing could be accomplished by naming the
Defaults dialog. See “Building a
current room Open Below, this method
Foundation” on page 372.
allows the current room to retain its normal
299
designation as Living, Garage, etc. This is

7 Floor Structure Type - Select the type
often used in situations where framed walls of floor structure. Check Default to use
are built above concrete curb walls, such as the structure type specified on the
in garages. appropriate floors tab of the Build Framing
dialog.
5 Subfloor Thickness - Set the thickness
of the subfloor under this room. The
8 Frame Lowered Ceiling - Check this
default value for this is set in the Build box if you want the program to frame a
Framing dialog on the Floor tab for the lowered ceiling. Specify the thickness.
current floor (subfloor for floor “x”). Along
with the Floor Structure Thickness, this 9 Insulation (cross sections only) -
Check these boxes to generate
determines the depth of the platform under
insulation details in cross section views when
this room.
the Autodetail tool is used. See “Auto-
When viewing framing, this Subfloor
Detailing” on page 751.
Thickness may be represented by a gap. To
remove this gap, change the value to zero Insulation Above Ceiling - Check this box
and rebuild the appropriate framing. to generate insulation details above the
ceiling in cross section views when the
6 Floor Structure Thickness - Set the Autodetail tool is used.
thickness (or depth) of the selected
structure under this room. Together with
Insulation Under Floor - Check this box to
Subfloor Thickness, this determines the
generate insulation details under the floor in
depth of the platform under the room.
cross section views when the Autodetail
tool is used.
300
Deck Tab
1
2
Rooms
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
The options on the Deck tab are only the outside edge of the deck and may not be
available for rooms designated as decks. parallel with the rest of the deck planking.
Border planks generate as long as the length
1 Specify how far the deck planking of the inside edge is greater than 0”.
Overhangs the rim joists.
Border planks are not generated for curved
2 Enter the Width of the deck planking. deck edges.
3 Specify the width of the Gaps between
the deck planks. 6 Check No Border Against Walls to
prevent border planking from being
4 If you want to enter a Plank Direction, generated along any walls defining the deck.
remove the checkmark from Default.
Check Herringbone to produce a
Enter the direction as degrees.
herringbone pattern where the border planks
5 Specify the Number of Border meet.
Planks. These are planks that follow
301
7 Enter the depth of the joists that support 10 Specify the depth of the beams that
the deck. support the deck joists.
8 Specify the distance between joists. 11 Enter the width of the beams that
The default is 16” O.C. support the deck joists.
9 If you want to specify joist direction, 12 Enter the spacing between the beams
uncheck Default. Enter the direction as that support the deck joists.
degrees.
Moldings Tab
2
3
4
5
Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be

1 Previews of the selected Crown
assigned to a selected room on the Moldings Molding, Chair Rail and Base Molding
tab. Moldings are placed around the wall display in these panes. If no profile is
surfaces of a room. They continue around the selected, a flat profile is used.
surface of any soffit that is attached to the
wall at the molding height.
302
2 Click the Library button under each Wall Covering Tab

type of molding to open the Select
Library Object dialog and browse the The Wall Covering tab of the Room
Moldings and Profiles library and select the Specification dialog contains the same
molding desired profile. See “Select Library elements as the Wall Covering tab of the
Object Dialog” on page 679. Wall Specification dialog. When a wall
covering is assigned using the Room
3 Click the Clear button under a molding Specification dialog, that wall covering is
type to remove the selected profile from applied to all walls in the selected room only.
the room. Unless the molding Height is set at See “Wall Covering Tab” on page 271.
0”, a flat profile is still used.
Wall coverings can be applied to exte-
4 Specify a Height for the selected rior rooms as well by selecting the exte-
molding profile. If no profile is rior room and opening it for specification. See
specified, a flat profile is used unless the “Selecting Rooms” on page 283 for informa-
Height is set at 0”. Molding heights can be tion about selecting exterior rooms.
specified in 1/16”or 1 mm increments.
A (D) following any value signifies that it is Fill Style Tab
a default value set in the Floor Defaults For more information about the Fill Style tab,
dialog. If a value is not followed by a (D), see “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
replace it with “d” to reset it to the default.
Materials Tab
5 Specify a Distance Above Floor for
the molding type. Crown molding and
For more information about the Materials
chair rail are measured to the top of the
tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 710.
profile while base molding is measured to the
bottom of the profile.
303
304
Chapter 9:
Doors
Doors
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Windows
and Doors
Video: Doors and Windows Chapter Contents
• Door Defaults
Chief Architect comes with tools for creating • The Door Tools
a wide variety of interior and exterior doors. • Displaying Doors
In addition, the library offers a full line of • Editing Doors
specialty doors and doorways including • Centering Doors and Windows
hinged, sliding, pocket, bifold, garage, and • Changing Door Swings
manufacutrer specific products. • Special Doors
• Door Specification Dialog
• Door Schedules
Door Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by sub-headings. Select a subheading and click
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... the Edit... button to open the defaults dialog
Click the “+” next to Doors to show the door associated with your selection.
305
Interior and Exterior Door defaults can also placed. Settings for interior and exterior
be accessed by double-clicking the Door doors are similar and should both be defined.
Tools parent button or Hinged Door The Interior Door Defaults and
child tool. Exterior Door Defaults dialogs look
nearly the same as the Door Specification
dialog. See “Door Specification Dialog” on
page 315. There are only two differences:
• The rough opening increase size is not
specified in the Door Defaults dialog.
Rough opening defaults are set on the
Openings tab of the Framing dialog. See
“Openings Tab” on page 479.
• Since default settings are specified here,
“Use Default” is not an option on some
drop-down lists as it is in the Door
The values in the Door Defaults dialog are
initial values for interior or exterior doors. Some default settings, like the casing width
Individual doors can be edited by selecting on the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic and
and opening them for specification. Changes update globally when a new value is entered.
made to individual doors after they have When you change a dynamic default,
been placed do alter the default settings. existing doors in the model update. See
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 179.
It is a good idea to go over the settings in the
Door Defaults dialog before doors are
The Door Tools

Classroom Design Project Training places an exterior door based on the default
Video: Placing Doors settings for exterior doors. If the wall is an
interior wall, the program places an interior
door based on the default settings for interior
Video: Adding a Doorway and Door
doors. See “Door Defaults” on page 305.
Panel from the Library
Doors can also be placed in curved walls.
To place a door, select the type you
See “Curved Options” on page 318.
want from the Build> Door submenu.
Once placed, any door may be changed into
With a door tool activated, click a wall to
any other type of door using the Door
place a door in the wall. If the wall is an
Specification dialog. See “Door
exterior wall or a wall that separates an
interior from an exterior room, the program
306
The Door Tools
Hinged Doors Bifold Doors

Select Build> Door> Hinged Door Choose Build> Door> Bifold Door
and click a wall where you want to and click a wall where you want to
place a hinged door. Hinged doors can be place a bifold door.
placed on interior or exterior walls. A hinged
The default interior single bifold door is 2’-
door becomes a double door when its width
6” x 6’-8”. A bifold door becomes a double
is four feet or greater.
bifold door if its width is greater than three
feet.
Doorways
Bifold doors always display closed in all 3D
Choose Build> Door> Doorway and views.
click a wall to place a doorway (an
opening without a door). Doorways can be
Garage Doors
placed on interior or exterior walls, or in
Doors
railings and fences to provide an opening. Choose Build> Door> Garage Door
You can insert doors from the library into and click a wall to place a garage door.
doorways.
The default garage door is 8’-0” x 7’-0” high.
A garage door must be at least two feet wide
Sliding Doors
Garage doors can only be placed in exterior
Select Build> Door> Sliding Door walls. A dashed line in floor plan view shows
and click a wall where you want to the space occupied by the garage door when
place a sliding door. Sliding doors can be open.
placed on interior or exterior walls. If placed
in an exterior wall, the door is glass; if placed A garage door cuts the stemwall provided the
in an interior wall, it is a solid slab. room is designated as a garage before the
door is inserted.
The default sliding door dimensions are
5’-0” x 6’-8” with a 12” bottom frame and a
The Doorway Library
6” frame on the sides and top. A sliding door
must be at least four feet wide. Select Library> Library Browser and
expand the Doorways category to
Pocket Doors access a library of special entryways and
doorways. Select a doorway and click a wall
Select Build> Door> Pocket Door to place it.
and click a wall where you want to
place a pocket door.
The default pocket door dimensions are 2’-6”
x 6’-8” high. A pocket door becomes a
double pocket door if its width is four feet or
greater.
307
To add a door to the doorway, select a Door 5. Continue clicking other doorways until
Type other than Doorway from the drop- all changes have been made.
down list in the Door Specification
dialog. or click the Library button and select The Doors Library
a door style from the Doors library. See
“General Tab” on page 316. The Doors library can be accessed by
selecting Library> Library Browser .
You can also select a custom door from the
The Door library contains a variety of
library and drop it into a doorway in floor
customized interior and exterior doors, and
plan view or any 3D view.
doors offered by specific manufacturers. The
Doors library also contains garage doors and
To place a library door in a doorway:
gates that can be used with Fencing .
1. Go to floor plan view or any 3D view.
2. Open the Library Browser. Creating Your Own Doors
3. Navigate through the Doors library cate- Use the Create Symbol Wizard to
gory until you find the custom door style create custom doors and doorways and
desired. save them in your own library for use in
4. Select the door in the Library Browser, future plans. See “Create Symbol Wizard” on
then click the doorway in your view. The page 925.
selected door replaces the original if one
has already been placed.
Displaying Doors
The display of doors, door sizes, opening The size displays in the format “3068”,
indicators and headers is controlled in the which is width by height in feet and inches.
Layer Display Options dialog. See A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide
“Displaying Objects” on page 221. and six feet, eight inches high. Metric door
dimensions format is “900x2100,” where the
If the Doors layer is turned off, doors and
first number is the width in mm.
their casing do not display but openings in
the walls where they are located are visible. Customized labels can also be specified for
individual doors in the Door
In Floor Plan View Specification dialog. See “Label Tab” on
page 325.
If the Doors, Labels layer is set to display,
labels are centered on the doors that they
Threshold Lines
represent. Label size is controlled in the
Door Schedule Specification dialog. Doors in exterior walls and doors that open
See “Label Tab” on page 1000. to exterior type rooms such as a garage,
308
Editing Doors
porch, or deck, have a threshold line across

the opening in floor plan view.
Threshold
Line
In 3D Views
To display opening indicator arrows in vector
views, turn on the Cabinet & Door Opening
Indicators layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
Doors
Door showing opening indicator
Reverse door opening indicators on the

Architectural panel of the Preferences
dialog. See “Architectural Panel” on page
198.
Editing Doors
Classroom Design Project Training Blocked units are made up of individual
Video: Developing a Sliding Glass doors and windows. Select a blocked unit by
Door and Storing it in the Library clicking it in floor plan or 3D view.
Classroom Design Project Training To select a door that is a component of a
Video: Applying Selected Attributes of blocked unit, click at the location of the com-
One Door to Several ponent in question, then click the Select
Before a door can be edited, it must be Next Object edit button or press the Tab
selected. To select a door, click it when the key. See “Manually Mulled Units” on page
332.
Select Objects tool or any of the Door
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows Doors can be edited using the edit handles,
can also be group selected and edited. See edit toolbar buttons, and in the Door
309
When you select a door in floor plan view, In the Specification Dialog
the door size label indicates the width
followed by the height. For example, a 3068 Doors can be extensively customixed in the
door is 3’-0” wide by 6’-8” high. Door Specification dialog. See “Door
Using the Mouse
In floor plan view, click either of the two end Using the Edit Buttons
handles and drag along the wall to change the A selected door or doors can be edited in a
width. The label showing the size updates as variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
the handles are dragged. Release when the toolbar. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on
desired size is reached. page 97.
In 3D views, a selected door has five edit As with most objects, doors can be copied,
handles: the Move handle at the center and a replicated, moved, and deleted. The
Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag following edit toolbar buttons may display
an edge handle to resize the door. on the edit toolbar for selected doors.
Using the edit handles, a door resizes • Click the Select Next Object button
according to the currently active Edit to select nearby objects instead of the
Behavior . See “Defaults and selected door, particularly the wall it is
Preferences” on page 80. placed in.
A door or window moved against an • Click the Open Object edit button to
intersecting wall temporarily stops when the open the specification dialog for the
casing meets the intersecting wall. You can select door(s). See “Door Specification
continue to drag and it resumes movement Dialog” on page 315.
past or onto the intersecting wall. Place a
check in the Ignore Casing for Opening • Accurate Move slows down the
Resize check box in the Plan Defaults move speed when using the edit handles.
dialog to turn off this behavior. See “Plan See “Accurate Move” on page 125. Not
Defaults” on page 180. available for component doors.
Using Dimensions • Click the Components button to

open the Components dialog for the
Individual doors can be moved using selected door(s). See “Components Dia-
the Move Object Using log” on page 1014.
Dimension dialog. See “Moving Objects
Using Dimensions” on page 804. • Click the Point to Point Move but-
ton to accurately move the selected
door(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
page 125. Not available for component
doors.
310
Centering Doors and Windows
• Click the Make Mulled Unit edit Windows” on page 311. Not available for
button to block the selected door(s) and/ component doors.
or window(s) into a mulled unit. See • Click the Reflect About Object
“Manually Mulled Units” on page 332. button to reflect the selected door(s)
• Click the Explode Mulled Unit edit about another object. See “Reflecting
button to explode the selected mulled unit Objects” on page 135. Not available for
into its individual components. component doors.
• Click the Add to Library button to • Click the Select Same Type button to
add the selected door(s) to the library. See locate all objects that have specific
“Adding a New Object” on page 675. matching attributes. These objects can
then be modified as a group using the
• Click the Replace from Library but- Load Values to Make Same tool.
Doors
ton to replace the selected door with a See “Load to Make Same Value” on page
symbol from the Doorways library. See 152.
“Replace From Library” on page 680.
• Gable Over Door/Window - Create
• Click the Center Object button to a gable over the selected door(s) the next
center doors along a wall or over cabinets time an automatic roof is built. See
or fixtures. See “Centering Doors and “Placing a Gable Over a Door” on page
314.
Centering Doors and Windows

The Center Object edit button allows • Click inside a room to center the door
you to center the selected object along on that room.
a wall within a room. • Click outside the house (on the exterior
room) to center the door along an exte-
To center a door or window rior wall.
Doors and windows can also be centered to
1. Select a door or combination of win-
sinks and appliances. Select a door or
dows and doors in floor plan view.
window and click the Center Object
2. Click the Center Object edit button tool, then click a cabinet positioned against
then choose from one of the following the wall that contains a sink or cooktop.
options:
• Click the wall that contains the door to
center it along that wall. Openings can
also be centered along curved walls.
311
Changing Door Swings

Door swing direction and hinge side can be
changed using the Change Opening/Hinge
Side and Change Swing Side edit buttons.
Hinged Doors
In addition to using the edit buttons, hinged
doors’ hinge side and swing direction can be
changed using the triangular Rotate edit
handle. 2. Drag the pointer along the path of the
new arc to change the hinge side and/or
To adjust the angle of swing: swing direction.
1. In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular handle.
2. Drag to change the amount of swing.
3. Release the mouse.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the

3. Release the mouse. swing as it appears in floor plan view has no
affect on the 3D view. See “Options Tab” on
If you drag near the closed position, the door page 317.
snaps to a closed position.
To change the swing using edit buttons:
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the
swing as it appears in floor plan view has no 1. In floor plan view, select the door.
affect on the 3D view. See “Options Tab” on
page 317. 2. To change the hinge side, click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
To change the swing using edit handles: button.
1. In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular handle.
312
Changing Door Swings
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the

door, click the Change Swing Side edit
button.
3. To change the swing direction, click the Pocket Doors

Change Swing Side edit button. To change the direction of a pocket door,
Doors
select it and click the Change Opening/
Hinge Side edit button.
Sliding Doors
To change the side of a sliding door that is Note: There must be enough room for the
fixed, select the sliding door then click the entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit door does not change.
button.
Bifold Doors
To change the side of a bifold door that is
fixed, select it then click the Change
Opening/Hinge Side edit button.
313
To change the hinged side of the door, click

the Change Swing Side edit button.
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings Specification dialog to a width greater
than the length of the railing. The opening
Wrapped resizes to the maximum width possible for
openings of that space. The illustration has two doorway
various shapes openings placed into the rail. These openings
are available in are noted by arrows.
the Doorway
Library .
You can also
create a wrapped
opening by
placing a
doorway in the
wall and
checking
Suppress Casing in the Frame and Trim tab Transoms Above Doors
of the Door Specification dialog. Note
that the base molding wraps around the Transom windows above doors are created
opening. the same as other stacked windows. See
“Stacked Windows” on page 331.
Openings in Railings
Placing a Gable Over a Door
Use a doorway to open a railing for a
stairway or other access. To open a railing Click the Gable Over Door/Window
across an entire section, redefine the opening edit button to produce a gable roof over
size of the doorway in the Door the selected door(s) the next time automatic
314
Door Specification Dialog
roofs are built. See “Gable Over Door/ units containing doors can be treated as
Window” on page 415. either windows or doors for materials list and
schedule generation. See “Manually Mulled
You can manually edit or delete this gable
Units” on page 332.
line at any time. Your changes take effect
when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
can also be used with group selected doors. Making a Passthrough
To create a passthrough, place a doorway in
Custom Muntins the wall at the desired location. Create a
camera view and select the doorway. Click
Like windows, doors with glass can have
the bottom edit handle and drag the doorway
custom muntins. Custom muntins are created
up to the correct height for the passthrough.
from CAD lines. See “Custom Muntins” on
You can drag the top and sides to the correct
page 338.
dimensions, or set them in the Doorway
Doors
Blocked Doors and Windows
To remove the casing, open the doorway for
Combinations of doors and windows can be specification. On the Frame and Trim tab,
blocked. Blocked units are mulled together check Suppress Casing.
and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked

The most precise method of editing an
individual door or group of doors is to use
the Door Specification dialog. Door type,
size, casing, materials, shape, and more can
all be specified in this dialog.
If a group of doors is selected, changes made
in the Door Specification dialog are
applied to all the selected doors. If interior
doors must be different from the exterior
doors, they must be selected and edited as a
separate group.
Select one or more doors and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Door
Specification dialog for the selected
door(s).
315
General Tab
1
2
4
5
6
7
1 Door Style - Define the door as slab, The default is four. This option is only
glass, panel, or louvered, or select a available for garage doors.
door style from the library. Select use
default to use the default door style set in the 5 R.O. - Specify the total amount added
to the width and height for the door’s
Door Defaults dialog. See “Door Defaults”
rough opening. The default value is set in the
on page 305.
Build Framing dialog. See “Openings Tab”
Select Library from the list to open the Door on page 479.
Library. Once a library door is selected, that
door is added to the Door Style list. 6 Enter a value to adjust the Swing Angle
of the selected door in floor plan view.
Door Type - Specify doorway, hinged, This is an absolute value. A swing angle of
2
slider, pocket, bifold, or garage door. 90° points to the top of the screen and a
swing angle of 0° points to the right. If Draw
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not
Closed is unchecked on the Options tab, the
allowed as exterior door defaults.
swing angle displays in 3D views.
3 Specify the Width, Height, and
Thickness of the door. 7 Check Show Color to show the door in
color in the preview.
Vert Panels - Specify the number of
4
panels to be placed on garage doors. 8 Specify which side of the door to view
in the preview.
316
Options Tab
Doors
1 Single Door - Check this box to force Draw Closed - Check this box to show the
the selected door to be a single door, door closed in 3D views. If unchecked, the
regardless of its width. Swing Angle set on the General tab displays
in 3D views.
Double Door - Check this box to force the
door to be a double door, regardless of its You may choose to add an Interior Plinth
width. Block and/or an Exterior Plinth Block to
the default door style. Plinth blocks do not
Hinged, pocket and bifold doors default to
display in 3D views, but are counted in the
Single Door when less than four feet (1200
Material List.
mm) wide. If the width is greater than four
feet, Double Door is the default. These Recessed - Check this box to recess the door
options are not editable as default settings, to the main wall layer.
but can be set individually in the model.
A door placed in a brick, concrete block, or
Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing stone wall may be recessed into the exterior
Only to allow only the left or right side of a of the wall. If the wall is a single layer and is
double door to swing. thicker than a typical stud wall, this box is
normally checked. It can only be set for
Check Double Swing to allow a door or both
individual doors, not in the defaults.
sides of a double door to swing both
directions.
317
To Sheathing Layer - Check this box to surface, or with the sheathing over that
recess the door to the sheathing layer. surface. The door, along with its casing, is
considered recessed into any additional
Doors cannot be recessed in a single layer
exterior wall layers. For a framed wall, the
wall. If it can be recessed, it is apparent in
door is then recessed through any brick or
both floor plan and 3D views.
stone veneer to the framing layer or the
By default the exterior of a door frame is sheathing that covers it.
flush with the exterior main layer wall
Curved Options
If a door is placed in a curved wall, some • Parallel - A vertical sur-
additional options are available on the face that would be per-
Options tab. pendicular to a straight
wall remains parallel to
2 Casing - Door and window casing and the line from the wall Parallel
jamb can be constructed three ways in
center through the open-
curved walls:
ing center.
• Straight - Both the door
and casing are straight. Door - Doors in curved
This can be used where walls can be specified as
the wall’s curvature is Curved or Straight for any
Straight of the Casing options. Radial with
not too sharp and the
opening is not too wide. Curved
Door
• Radial - A vertical sur-

face that would be per-
pendicular to a straight
wall has its plane pass Radial
through the wall's center
of curvature.
318
Frame & Trim Tab
2
3
Doors
4
5
1 Frame - If you specified a Door Style and flat casings if no custom profile is
of glass or panel on the General tab, defined. Specify default by entering “d” for
you may specify the dimensions of the rail the value, which uses the value in the Door
and stiles here. Defaults dialog.
Frame Width includes the stiles and top or • Width defines the width of the side or
middle rails. vertical casings.
Frame Bottom specifies the bottom rail. • Top Width defines the width of the top
casing (only available when using lin-
2 Specify Interior or Exterior casing. tels).
These radio buttons switch all the
• Reveal is the starting point of the casings
values below and the door preview. These
from the edge of the operable door.
options are not available for interior doors,
which use the same values for both sides.
4 Lintel - Check this box to specify a butt
joint between the sides and the top
3 Casing - Specify the size and casing instead of a mitre joint.
configuration of the casings with these
values. The active side (interior or exterior) • Extends defines the amount the top cas-
is indicated by the active radio button. The ing extends past the side casings.
view of the door updates with the current • Wrap returns the top casing to the wall.
side. The width defines any custom molding
319
5 Sill - Check this box to create a sill. Enlarged - If this radio button is selected,
casing is provided only for the wall the door
Suppress Casing - Check this box to
is inserted in. The opening on the other wall
prevent casing from being created.
is enlarged to accomodate the casing.
6 Double Wall - This section is enabled Double - Select this radio button to place a
if the door is placed in a Double Wall.
second door in the Double Wall opposite the
See “Double Walls” on page 248.
selected door. This second door cannot be
Through - Select this radio button to create a selected. Casing is produced as with the
single jamb running through both Double Through type window.
Walls. This option is selected by default.
Lites Tab
The options on this tab are only available for
glass doors. See “General Tab” on page 316.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Special Type - Choose the style of Diamond, Prairie and Craftsman styles are
divided lites from the list. Normal, available.
320
4 Muntin Width - Specify the width of

the muntins used to divide the lites.
5 Round Top - Ray Count If the door is

defined as round top or one of the arch
tops on the Arch tab, you may specify up to
10 rays. The rays specify the number of
Normal Diamond Prairie Craftsman radial muntin bars; there is one more pane of
glass than the number of rays specified.
Normal style is the most common, with the If rays are added, any Lites Across and Lites
muntin bars going horizontally and Vertical are confined to the part of the
vertically. window below the circle top or arch top.
Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to
divide the lites.
Doors
Prairie style is based on the normal style,
but with all the central muntin bars removed,
leaving only the two outside muntin bars
both horizontally and vertically. To be
effective, both the Lites across and the Lites
vertical should be set between 6 and 8.
Craftsman style is based on the normal
style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical 6 Concentric - In round top doors only,
rays may be defined as concentric. If it
muntin bars above it. To be effective, both is not checked, the rays start at the center
the Lites across and the Lites vertical should point of the arch and fan out. If concentric is
be set between 4 and 8. checked, the rays start from the innermost
concentric muntin bar. You must have at least
2 Lites Across defines the number of three lites across for this to be used.
horizontal divisions for the glazed area.
In a normal style of divided lites, Lites
Across specifies the horizontal number of
evenly sized panes of glass. This value must
be between one and eight.
3 Lites Vertical defines the number of

vertical divisions for the glazed area. In
a normal style of divided lites, Lites Vertical
specifies the number of evenly sized panes of
glass vertically. This value must also be
between one and eight.
321
Arch Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Specify the Type of arch desired. 2 Height - For most arches, a height must
be defined. This is the dimension of the
top of the arch defined by the height of the
door down to the base of the arch.
3 Radius - Some arches also need their

radius defined.
4 Reflect - Checking this box reflects the

Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat arch top to bottom. This is rarely used
Top Top for doors, but can be specified for windows
to create unique configurations.
5 A half-arch door is specified by

checking either Arch on Right or Arch
on Left.
Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear

gonal
322
Hardware Tab
2
3
4
5
6
7
Doors
8
9
1 Handle - Specify a handle to be used 4 Up From Floor - Specify the distance

on the door. If use default is chosen, from the bottom of the door where the
the default handle specified in the Door handle are to be located.
Defaults dialog is used.
5 Int Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
Library - Click this button to open the the interior of the door. If use default is
Select Library Object dialog and specify chosen, the default lock specified in the
a handle from the Library. Door Defaults dialog is used.
2 Ext Handle - Check this box to specify Library - Click this button to open the
a different handle for the exterior of the Select Library Object dialog and specify
door. If unchecked, the handle specified at a lock from the Library. This is the same as
(1) is used. selecting Library from the drop down list.
Library - Click this button to open the
6 Ext Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
Select Library Object dialog and specify the exterior of the door. If use default
a handle from the Library. is chosen (in the Door Specification
dialog), the lock specified as the default in
3 In From Door Edge - Specify the the Door Defaults dialog is used.
distance from the edge of the door
where the handles are to be located. Library - Click this button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and specify
323
a lock from the Library. This is the same as Library - Click this button to open the
selecting Library from the drop down list. Select Library Object dialog and specify
a hinge from the Library. This is the same as
7 Up From Floor - Specify the distance selecting Library from the drop down list.
from the bottom of the door where you
want the lock(s) to be located. Locks are
9 In From Top/Bottom - Specify the
usually located above the handles. The locks distance from the top and bottom of the
assume the same distance from the door edge door to the hinge center.
as the handle at (3).
Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
8 Hinges - Specify a hinge to be used on have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the inte-
the door. If use default is chosen, the rior, or hinge side, door casing. If this is not
default lock specified in the Door Defaults provided the hinge carves out a portion of the
dialog is used. Two hinges are placed for casing.
interior doors, and three for exterior doors.
Moldings Tab
2
3
On this tab, you can apply custom moldings

1 A preview of the selected molding
to doors for casings and lintels. Once a profile.
custom molding is applied, it is sized from
the values on the Frame & Trim tab. 2 Click Library to open the Select
Library Objects dialog. Choose a
324
Door Schedules
molding to view your selection in the Door Layer Tab

For information about the Layers tab, see
Click Clear to return the casing to a flat “Layer Tab” on page 223.
3
profile.
Materials Tab
4 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
button to specify which side of the door For information about the Materials tab, see
receives the molding. The door preview “Materials Tab” on page 710.
changes to reflect your selections.
New moldings can be added to the library. Label Tab
See “Moldings and Profiles” on page 695.
For information about the Label tab, see
“Label Tab” on page 576.
Doors
Door Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
door schedule. See “Creating Schedules” on
page 992.
325
326
Chapter 10:
Windows
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Windows • Window Defaults
Windows
and Doors • The Window Tools
• Special Windows
• Stacked Windows
Video: Doors and Windows
• Window Levels
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of • Displaying Windows
windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, • Editing Windows
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window • Custom Muntins
styles can all be created with the standard • Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
window tool, and even set as the default. The • Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
shape of a window can be angled or made • Window Specification Dialog
into a round top or other arch styles. Chief • Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog
Architect can create bay, box, and bow • Bow Window Specification
windows at the click of a button. In addition, • Window Schedules
the library contains many mulled window
combinations and manufacturer-specific
products.
Once windows have been placed in the
model, the program can automatically
generate a window schedule. See “Creating
Schedules” on page 992.
Chapter Contents
327
Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by 1. Dynamic Defaults: These values affect
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... all existing and new windows that are
Select Window from the Default Settings still set to the default specification. See
dialog, or double-click the Window Tools “Dynamic Defaults” on page 179. These
button to open the Window Defaults settings are:
dialog. • Window Type
• Sash Width
The settings in the Window Defaults
dialog specify what style of window is • Sash Depth
created when a window initially placed in a • Casing Width.
plan. 2. Initial Values: These only affect new
In the Window Defaults dialog, define the windows, and changing the value has no
type of window that represents the majority affect on existing windows. These are:
of windows in your model. As with doors, • Width, Height
any window or group of windows can be • Floor to Top
customized in the floor plan or 3D views. • Default Level
The tabs in the Window Defaults dialog 3. Editing Limits: This affects both the
are similar to those found in the Window creation of new and the modification of
Specification dialog. See “Window existing windows/doors. There is one
Specification Dialog” on page 343. only:
There are three types of values set in the • Min. Separation
Window Defaults dialog:
The Window Tools

Classroom Design Project Training as bay, box, bow, corner or blocked. All these
Video: Placing Windows special types are made up of multiple
standard windows.
To place a window, select the desired
window type from the Build> Window A standard window that is part of a special
submenu. Click on a wall using a Window window is called a component window.
Tool to place a window at that location.
Bay Windows
Standard Windows
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and
A standard window is a single window Bow Windows. These windows should
that is not one of the special types such therefore be placed before the roof is built.
328
The Window Tools
A Bay Window is composed of three Bow windows can be composed of between

wall sections, each with a single two and twenty sections. The number of bow
component window. The two side walls are window components can be changed in the
at an angle to the main wall. Select Build> Bow Window Specification dialog. See
Window> Bay Window and click a wall to “Bow Window Specification” on page 360.
produce a bay window.
The component windows are specified in the
When initially placed, bay windows measure Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes
2’-2” across at the front, 4’-2” across at the adjust to fit the available space.
back, and are 1’-0” deep. The component
The 5-section bow below has a 4’-10” radius
windows are specified in the Window
centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving an
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
opening 5’-10” across and a depth of 11½”.
the available space.
Box Windows
Windows
A Box window is a bay window with Note that for a bow with an odd number of
side angles set at 90 degrees. Select sections, the radial dimension is from the
Build> Window> Box Window and click a center of the arc to an outside corner where
wall to produce a box window. two window sections join. The depth (11 ½”)
is measured to the flat area of the center
Box windows initially measure 4’-2” wide section, not to a corner. As a result, the radius
with a depth of 1’-6”. The component is a bit greater than the sum of the depth and
windows are specified in the Window the distance from the center of the bow’s
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
curve to the exterior of the wall.
the available space.
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are
not included in the living area or in room stan-
dard area calculations. They are included in
room interior area calculations.
Bow Windows Windows Library

A Bow Window is a group of identical Select Library> Library Browser,
wall segments that form a segmented then browse the Windows category to
curve. Select Build> Window> Bow access a selection of special windows. Select
Window and click a wall to produce a 5- the desired window, then click on a wall to
section bow window. place the window at that location.
329
Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created
using multiple standard windows, the edit
tools or custom symbols.
Creating Manual Bay, Box

and Bow Windows
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and
bow windows manually than to use the
automatic tools. Bays created using walls can
have more than one window per section, To create a corner window, first create the
which is not possible using a bay window desired window on each side of the corner.
unit. The header height and the sill height of both
Bear in mind that moving a manually created windows must be the same.
bay, box or bow window is generally more
To move a window all the way into a
difficult than moving a unit created with one corner, check Ignore Casing for
of the Window Tools since it is Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults dia-
composed of individual walls. log. See “Plan Defaults” on page 180.
Corner Windows Slant top, or shaped windows can be

components of corner windows as long as
Corner windows are produced when each their heights are equal at the corners.
window has one edge at or past the interior Windows with single or two segment tops
side of the adjacent wall. can be used, but windows with three cannot.
If a two segment window is used, the
segment nearest the corner must be flat.
330
Stacked Windows
Once the corner window is formed, its selected window(s) the next time automatic
components and corner post size can be roofs are built. See “Gable Over Door/
adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked Window” on page 415.
units can also meet at a corner this way.
You can manually edit or delete this gable
line at any time. Your changes take effect
Creating Your Own Windows when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
Use the Create Symbol Wizard to can also be used with group selected
create custom windows and save them windows.
in your own library for use in future plans.
See “Create Symbol Wizard” on page 925. Stained Glass
A selection of solid stained glass materials is
Placing a Gable available in the Materials> Glass library.
Over a Window See “Materials” on page 688.
Click the Gable Over Window edit
button to produce a gable roof over the
Stacked Windows
Windows
Classroom Design Project Training Because doors are always on Level 0 and
Video: Creating a Group of Blocked because these line colors affect printouts, it is
Windows best to keep the Default Level at 0. If you do
change the Default Level, remember to
Windows can be stacked to create a wide
change it back before printing.
variety of custom configurations.
The door and windows in the illustration
Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D
below were organized have been placed on
views, particular Cross Section/Elevation
different levels. See “Window Levels” on
views, using their edit handles.
page 334.
To help organize their display in floor plan
view, you can place them on different
window levels.
In floor plan view, windows on the Default 2
Level display the line color and style of the 1
layer they are on. They also display size
labels if the Windows, Labels layer is turned
0
on.
Windows on other levels appear light gray
and do not display labels, even if the
Windows, Labels layer is turned on.
331
To create this entry, set the two windows on windows can be to each other. Define a value
either side of the door to level zero. A door is that specifies the desired width for the shared
always on level zero. The three windows casing.
above the door are placed on level one, and
the round top window is placed on level two.
If you select a window in floor plan view by
clicking the stacked windows using the
Window tool, you select the window that is
on the same level as your current Default
Level setting. For example, if the Default
Level is set to 2, you select the round top
window shown in the illustration.
Notice how the windows and door in this
example are separate, with a thin wall
showing between them. The next section
explains how the same door and six windows
can be organized into a mulled unit. The Manually Mulled Units
casing connects the windows and door so Mulling windows and doors together
that no wall surface shows between them. gives you added flexibility. This
process creates a combination of objects that
Automatically Mulled Units move and copy as a single unit. It allows you
To form a mulled group of windows and/or to list the doors and windows in the Material
doors, move them close enough together so List either as a single unit or as the
that their casings touch. Once the casings components and it enables you to define a
touch, the windows are mulled together with single opening or separate openings in the
one casing between the two of them. wall framing for the blocked unit.
The sill of each window in the group must be To create a mulled unit
at the same level for them to share the middle
casing. The casing tops do not have to be at 1. Group-select several openings, doors
the same level. The casings are modeled as if and windows that are on the same wall
they are one unit but the windows remain and within 24 inches (side-to-side or top
separate objects for dimensioning and the to bottom) of each other.
Material List.
2. Click the Make Mulled Unit edit
Windows can be automatically mulled to button to create a block.
doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of 3. Once doors and windows are combined
the door. in a block they can be moved and copied
as a single unit.
The Min. Separation value in the Window
Defaults dialog specifies how close mulled
332
Stacked Windows
Group selection can be done in floor plan A second method would be to first block the
view or any 3D view. Floor plan views work door and its two sidelights as one unit, and
well for blocking windows that are side-by- then block the three rectangular windows
side, but a camera or elevation view is above the door as another unit. These
needed to block vertically stacked objects. blocked units, along with the top half-round
Once the unit is formed, the components may window, can be mulled together, top to
not be moved relative to each other without bottom, to complete the final unit. Since this
first unblocking and repositioning them unit was blocked together horizontally first,
before blocking them again. the horizontal mullions extend continuously
to the outside edges of the entire unit, while
In one blocking operation, you can block
the vertical mullions are interrupted by the
windows and doors that are either side-by-
horizontal mullions.
side or above and below each other. You
cannot simultaneously block both In order to block doors and windows, the
horizontally and vertically. Complex units component edges that are to be in contact
are formed by mulling several blocks must be straight and parallel to each other.
together. Unlike automatic mulling, they do not need
to be the same length. Openings with
To create a blocked unit from windows and
adjacent sides that are curved cannot be
doors on various levels you must use a 3D
blocked.
Windows
view to select the many different
components. The blocked unit moves as a single standard
window in both floor plan and 3D views.
1. In a cross section/elevation view, select While blocked the unit cannot be resized, it
the door and the windows on level 1 and can be unblocked, its components resized,
2 above it, then click the Make Mulled and blocked again. The components on the
Unit edit button. lowest level display in floor plan view.
2. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the To explode a mulled unit

right and the window above it.
3. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the 1. Select the block.
left and the window above it.
2. Click the Explode Mulled Unit edit
4. Group select the three vertically joined button.
units and click the Make Mulled Unit
edit button to join them side to side. Selecting Components
If you form a blocked unit by first blocking of Mulled Units
objects vertically, the vertical mullions To select a component window of a blocked
extend continously from the bottom to the unit, click at the location of the component in
top of the entire unit. The horizontal question, then click the Select Next Object
mullions are interupted by the vertical
mullions. edit button or press the Tab key. Only the
component you clicked is selectable using
333
this method. If you need to select a different can change its parameters in the Window
component, click it and repeat the process. Specification dialog.
The selected component may be on any level If the component is not itself a blocked unit
in the blocked unit. If you have multiple and has no components above it, its Height
levels, it is easiest to select the components and Arch parameters can be changed.
in a 3D view. When you have selected an Changing the Height causes the component
individual component of a blocked unit, you top to move. The bottom remains stationary.
Window Levels
Window levels are used to organize and
control the display of stacked windows in
floor plan view. At the same location on a
wall and on one floor level, you can place
and define windows at varying levels.
Window levels do not define the height of a
window, just the appearance and editing of a
window in floor plan view.
The Default Window Level is zero, which
contains all doors, all bay, box and bow
windows, and is the first level of standard
windows. Unless the Default Level setting
in the Window Defaults dialog is
changed, all windows are placed on Level 0.
The first row above on the same floor is
represented by Window Level 1 and contains
any windows stacked above a single window When you place a window in floor plan view
or door. The second row is represented by on a level greater than zero, the program
Window Level 2 and contains all windows attempts to locate it over windows on lower
stacked above two stacked windows, etc. levels. Once placed, it can be moved to the
desired height in a 3D view or in the
Window Specification dialog.
When you specify the default level to a value
other than zero, the initial window type
changes to fixed glass and no Sill is created.
The Width of the window matches your
default Window Type and the Height is 12".
Once the window is placed in the plan, its
parameters can be changed.
334
Displaying Windows
In floor plan view, windows on the Default windows on the current default level are
Level use the line color specified in the selected first.
Layer Display Options dialog. Windows
Always reset the Default Level to zero
on other levels appears dimmed.
before printing. Otherwise, the doors and
If window and door labels are set to display, some windows may print in a light gray color
the sizes show only for windows and doors and window and door sizes are not those for
on the Default Level. level zero.
The Default Level also defines which of the Instead of using levels to manage stacked
stacked windows are selected first when you windows, you may want to combine them
click the windows in floor plan view. The into blocked units. See “Manually Mulled
Units” on page 332.
Displaying Windows
The appearance of windows, window labels,
openings, and headers in floor plan and 3D
Double Hung
views can be controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Windows
Objects” on page 221. Left Sliding
If the Windows layer is not set to display,
window casing, lites and other window Triple Casement
components are not visible, but the openings
in the walls where they are located are
visible.
Window types in floor plan view
In Floor Plan View If the Windows, Labels layer is set to display,

Some window types, notably Sliding and window labels show in floor plan view,
Double and Triple Casement windows, are centered on the windows that they represent.
distinguishable in floor plan view. Label format and size is specified in the
Window Schedule Specification
dialog. See “Label Tab” on page 1000.
Window labels indicate the width, height and
window type. For example, a 3040 DH label
describes a 3’-0” wide by 4’-0” high double
hung window. The format of metric window
dimensions is “900x1200”, where the first
number is the width in mm and the second,
the height in mm.
335
Customized labels for individual windows

can also be specified in the Window
Specification dialog. See “Label Tab” on
page 358.
In 3D Views
To show opening indicator arrows in vector
views, turn on the Cabinet & Door Opening
Indicators layer in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
Windows showing opening indicators
You can change the direction of indicator

arrows on the Architectural panel of the
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be Using the Mouse
selected. Click a window when the Select
• In floor plan view, click either of the two
Objects tool or any of the Window end handles and drag along the wall to
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows change the width. The label showing the
can also be group selected and edited. See size updates as the window is resized.
“Selecting Objects” on page 92. • In 3D views, a selected window has five
edit handles: the Move handle at the cen-
To select a window that is part of a blocked
ter and a Resize handle on each edge.
unit, click the component window, then click
Click and drag an edge handle to resize
the Select Next Object edit button. See the window.
“Selecting Components of Mulled Units” on
• Using the edit handles, a window resizes
page 333.
according to the currently active Edit
Windows can be edited using their edit Behavior . See “Defaults and Prefer-
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and the ences” on page 80.
When you select a window in floor plan Note: Using the edit handles is the only way
view, the window size label displays the to resize bay, box and bow window systems.
width followed by the height. For example, a
3036 window is 3’-0” wide by 3’-6” high. • A single window or a group of windows
can be moved with the center edit handle.
336
Editing Windows
• A door or window moved against an select window(s). See “Window

intersecting wall temporarily stops when Specification Dialog” on page 343.
it is the casing distance from the inter-
secting wall. You can continue to drag • Accurate Move slows down the
and it resumes movement past or onto the move speed when using the edit handles.
intersecting wall. Place a check in the See “Accurate Move” on page 125. Not
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize available for component windows
check box in the Plan Defaults dialog
• Click the Components button to
to turn off this behavior. See “Plan
selected window(s). See “Components
Using Dimensions
Individual windows can be moved using the • Click the Point to Point Move but-
Move Object Using Dimension dialog.
ton to accurately move the selected win-
See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on dow(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
page 804. page 125. Not available for component
windows.
In the Specification Dialog • Click the Make Mulled Unit edit
Windows
Windows can be edited extensively in the button to block the selected window(s)
Window Specification dialog. See and/or door(s) into a mulled unit. See
“Window Specification Dialog” on page 343. “Manually Mulled Units” on page 332.
• Click the Explode Mulled Unit edit

Using the Edit Buttons button to explode the selected mulled unit
into its individual components.
A selected window or windows can be edited
in a variety of ways using the buttons on the • Click the Add to Library button to
edit toolbar. As with most objects, windows add the selected window(s) to the library.
can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted, See “Adding a New Object” on page 675.
etc. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 97.
• Click the Replace from Library but-
The following edit toolbar buttons may ton to replace the selected window with a
display on the edit toolbar for selected symbol from the Windows library. See
windows. “Replace From Library” on page 680.
• Click the Select Next Object button • Click the Center Object button to
to select nearby objects instead of the center windows along a wall or over
selected window, particularly the wall it cabinets or fixtures. See “Centering
is placed in. Doors and Windows” on page 311. Not
• Click the Open Object edit button to available for component windows.
337
• Click the Reflect About Object Load Values to Make Same tool.
button to reflect the selected window(s) See “Select Same Type” on page 152 and
about another object. See “Reflecting “Load to Make Same Value” on page
Objects” on page 135. Not available for 152. Not available for bay, box or bow
component windows. windows.
• Click the Select Same Type button to • Gable Over Door/Window - Create
locate all objects that have specific a gable over the selected window(s) the
matching attributes. These objects can next time an automatic roof is built. See
then be modified as a group using the “Placing a Gable Over a Window” on
page 331.
Custom Muntins
Design your own muntins for the glazing of a 2. Use the Draw Line and Draw Arc
window or door. Muntins are formed from a
CAD block composed of lines and arcs tools to design the desired muntins.
drawn over window or door glass in a cross Try to make them start and end as close
section/elevation view. The CAD block to the edge of the glass as possible.
should cover at least half the glass 3. When the muntin design is complete,
horizontally and one quarter of the area group-select all lines and arcs and click
vertically, but should not overlap it in either
the Make CAD Block edit button.
direction by more than five percent.
See “Selecting Objects” on page 92.
Creating Muntins 4. Select the door or window and click the
Custom muntins are created by Load Muntins edit button to

drawing their pattern using the CAD convert the CAD block into custom
tools, blocking the pattern to create a CAD muntins.
block, and then selecting the window and If your window has more than one sash (a
clicking the Load Muntins edit button. double-hung window, for example, has two),
you must create a separate CAD block for
To create custom muntins each pane. When you click Load Muntins
, all CAD blocks are loaded.
1. Create a Cross Section/Elevation
view of the wall the window or door is Custom muntins move with the opening and
in and Zoom in on the window or copy with their opening. They also stretch or
door. compress when the glass area is resized. This
stretching may not be perfect for non-rectan-
gular glass areas that are resized by a large
amount.
338
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
Custom muntins can be created for the cross section/elevation view and clicking the
components of Bay Windows and Box Unload Muntins button on the Edit
Windows , and mulled units. toolbar. The muntins disappear and the
original CAD block takes their place. You
Removing Muntins may explode and edit these blocks and reload
them.
Remove custom muntins from a door
or window by selecting the opening in
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

Bay, box and bow windows
are created much the way
regular windows are: select a tool, then click
a wall to place that window type.
Chief Architect automatically builds a
foundation under bay/box/bow windows Depth edit handle on a bay window
placed on floor 1 unless they are raised from
Windows
their original position. That section of the Bay, box and bow windows can also be
foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but edited in their respective specification
without windows. If the foundation was dialogs. See “Bay/Box Window
generated before the window is placed, the Specification Dialog” on page 359 or “Bow
foundation must be rebuilt or edited Window Specification” on page 360.
manually.
Displaying Bay, Box
Editing Bay, Box and Bow Windows
and Bow Windows
The display of bay, box and bow windows is
Bay, box and bow windows are edited controlled in the Layer Display Options
similar to regular windows, with one dialog. Bay, box and bow window width and
exception: in floor plan view, a diamond- radius dimensions, which display in floor
shaped Depth edit handle displays on the plan view, are placed on the Dimensions,
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to Manual layer. See “Displaying Objects” on
increase the depth, or inward to decrease the page 221.
depth of the unit. See “Editing Windows” on
page 336. Components
A component window within a bay, box or
bow window can be resized like any other
standard window. To select a component
339
window, click at the location of the compo- Both the top and
nent in question, then click the Select Next bottom heights of these
Object edit button or press the Tab key. window units may be
Only the component that was clicked on is adjusted from a 3D
selectable using this method. If you need to view.
select a different component, click it and Use the following
repeat the process. techniques for
In a bow window, all components are modifying any bay, box, or bow window.
identical, so only one component can be
selected. Changing this component changes Lowering the Ceiling
them all. To lower the ceiling and the wall heights,
select the window in a 3D view. When the
Resizing Components window is selected, grab the top handle and
An individual component window can be drag toward the floor. The ceiling is lowered,
resized by dragging a side edit handle, by which lowers the height of the walls. Any
changing settings in the Window roofs that are subsequently built are affected.
Specification dialog, or by using the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog. Creating a Bench Seat
An individually resized component window To create a bench seat or garden window,
retains its size when the bay is resized. If the follow the same step for lowering the ceiling
bay is decreased in size to the extent that the except this time drag the lower handle
component becomes too large to fit, the toward the ceiling.
component returns to its default size based When you raise the bottom of the window to
on the bay size, and resumes automatically create a bench seat, the exterior walls that
resizing as the bay or bow window is resized. create the window do not reach the ground.
When you build a foundation, the foundation
Ceilings is not produced under a window unit that has
When originally bench seats.
created, the ceiling
within a bay, box, or
bow windows is the
same height as the
default ceiling for that
floor.
340
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs

Several different roof styles are available for
bay, box and bow window units.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof is built above the unit when roofs are
automatically generated.
For this roof style to work successfully, the

ceiling heights of the window unit and the
room containing it must be the same. This
does not work if you have lowered the
ceiling for the window unit.
Windows
If a header is desired over the bay, box or
bow window, first build the roof correctly,
If a different style of roof is desired, the Bay then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
or Bow Window Specification dialog window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered,
can be used to change the style of roof that is select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .
be generated over a bay, box or bow window. This fills in the area between the header and
See “Bay/Box Window Specification the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes, if you
Dialog” on page 359. do, a lower hip roof over the window unit is
created.
Place Under Roof Slope
Use Existing Roof
To have the main roof plane extend down
over the window unit while following the To generate a standard roof with no
shape of the unit, select Extend Existing allowances made for bay, box, or bow
Roof Over. Rebuild the roofs to see the windows below, check Use Existing Roof.
changes. With this option the bay, box, or bow
windows is tucked under the roof eave.
341
Rectangular Hip Roof

To create a rectangular hip roof, select only
Rectangular roof over, then rebuild the
roof.
Place Under Roof - Rectangular

To extend the roof plane down over a bay,
box or bow window with a rectangular roof,
ignoring the shape of the unit, select both
Extend existing roof over and Rectangular Gable Roof
roof over in the specification dialog. The
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
Rectangular roof over option does not work
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
in combination with Use existing roof since
window. A gable can be created by manually
the existing roof does not cover the window
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
unit.
automatically created. See “Manual Roofs”
See the previous section for directions on on page 393.
extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow windows. To create a gable over a bay window
1. Select each side hip sections on the front
angled edge. Grab the front ridge corner
handle and drag the roof section forward
until the fascia is straight and let it snap
to the edge of the front hip section.
2. Delete the front hip section.
3. Select each side roof plane at the gable
end and drag it out to set the overhang.
4. Once the roof planes are shaped prop-
erly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia, Gutters option
to complete the roof. Do not select Build
Roof Planes.
342
Window Specification Dialog
To create a gable roof over a normal

window, use the Gable Over Door/Win-
dow edit button. See “Gable Over Door/
Window” on page 415.

The program models new windows placed in
a plan according to the settings in the
Window Defaults dialog. See “Window
Windows
Once placed, a window can be edited with
the Window Specification dialog. You
can use this dialog to define unique features
for a single window or group of windows.
To open the Window Specification
dialog, select a window and click the Open
Object edit button or double-click the
window using the Select Objects or
Window tool.
343
General Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Window Type -Select the type of the list is the Default type set in the
window from the list. The first entry in Window Defaults dialog.
Window Types
2 Width and Height - Enter values that specify a rough opening dimension for the
represent the overall dimension of the window.
window unit, including frame. You can also
R.O. - Specify the total amount added to the
width and height for the window’s rough
344
opening. The default value is set in the Build

4 Default Level - Specify the current
Framing dialog. See “Openings Tab” on window level new windows should be
page 479. placed on. Unless you are placing windows
over already existing windows, leave the
Floor to Top - Specify the height to the top
Default Level set to 0.
of the window as measured from the
subfloor. This falls under the bottom of the Windows on the default level appear black,
header by two thirds of the rough opening and windows on other levels are grey.
amount.
Note: The window that is on the default level
Movable Size - If applicable, define the is the one selected when you select a window
dimension (in inches or mm) of the movable from a set in floor plan view.
portion of the window. A value of 0 defaults
the movable size to whatever is normal for
that type of window. 5 Show Color - Select the check box to
display the window in color in the
dialog preview.
3 Level - The Level value is used to
define what row the window appears on Check Interior or Exterior to change the
if there is more than one row of windows in a side shown in the dialog preview.
stacked set. Enter a number to change the
level the window is on.
Windows
Options Tab
345
1 Interior Corner Block - Select the to the right is recessed, so the brick wraps the
check box to count interior corner opening. The window on the left is not
blocks in the materials list. These do not recessed, so the casing is outside the brick.
display in 3D views.
To Sheathing Layer - Select the check box
Exterior Corner Block - Select the check to recess the window to the sheathing layer.
box to count exterior corner blocks in the The wall layers in the following illustration
materials list. These do not display in 3D have been exaggerated to show how the
views. different options display in floor plan view.
Egress - Select the check box to specify the
window as an egress window in the Window
Schedule and materials list. The letters eg are
appended to the value in the Size column. Not Recessed
The Egress check box can designate that the
entire area of the window is used for egress,
not just the movable section. To use this
specification on an undersized window, most Recessed (to Main Layer)
or all the window's total area should be able
to open for escape in case of fire.
The Plan Check calculations for egress

are only an approximate guide. Consult Recessed to Sheathing Layer
your local building and fire code authorities
for your regional egress window require- Curved Options
ments.
If a window is placed in a curved wall, some
Recessed - Select the additional options are available on the
Typical
check box to recess the Options tab.
casing inward to the
main, or framing layer 2 Casing: Window casing can be
constructed three ways in curved walls:
of the wall. This check
box is available only if • Straight: Both win-
the window is in a dow and casing are
multi-layered wall. A straight.
window or mulled unit Because the casing is Straight
placed in a brick, straight, it does not
concrete block, or stone properly fit in the wall
wall is often recessed opening if the window is
into the wall’s exterior. too wide or the curve of the wall is too
In the illustration above, extreme. In these cases use one of the other
Recessed
a 3D view, the window two window types described below.
346
• Radial: The sides of

3 Sash: Window sash
the casing or jambs are can be curved or
inserted in the wall at straight for the radial and Radial
an angle that passes Radial parallel casing options. & Curved
through the center of Normally, a parallel cas-
the curve. ing has a straight sash. A
• Parallel: The sides of radial casing is more like
the casing are inserted traditional curved win-
in the wall at a right dows, and may have a curved sash.
angle to the line tan- Parallel
gent to the curved wall
at the center of the
window.
Options Tab for Mulled Units

The Mulled Window Specification The settings in this dialog similar are to those
dialog is available when a blocked unit is in the Window Specification dialog, but
opened for specification. a number of the options cannot be edited.
Windows
On Options tab, three options become
available.
1
2
3
1 Treat as door - This option is available the Window schedules and materials list
when the selected mulled window unit category.
contains a door. Check the box to include the
mulled unit in door schedules and the Door 2 Single label - Select the check box to
treat the blocked unit as a single object
category of the materials list rather than in
for labeling in floor plan view. It produces a
single entry in the Material List and window
347
schedule. Uncheck box to produce labels and The Sash & Frame tab only defines the
entries for each component of the mulled casing surrounding the blocked unit. It does
unit. not affect the casing between components.
To display a Single label for a component, The Arch tab defines the overall shape of the
click in the middle of the component in an blocked units top. If you intend to arch the
elevation view, press the Tab key until the top of a blocked unit, the top components
component is selected, and then open the should be constructed with rectangular top
Window Specification dialog. openings whose tops are at the same height.
3 Single wall hole - Select the check box The Molding tab specifies the surrounding
to produce a single opening with a casing, sill and lintels. It does not affect the
single header for the entire blocked unit. casing between components.
Clear the check box to model studs between,
Settings made on the Material tab for a
and individual headers for, the components
blocked unit apply to all components of the
of the blocked unit.
blocked unit. The settings override any
settings made for individual components of
For rendering purposes, Single wall
hole should be checked for any mulled the blocked unit.
unit with a rectangular shape. This decreases
drawing time by decreasing the number of
surfaces.
Sash & Frame Tab
2
3
4
6
7
348
The (D) notation that follows some values

3 Inset - Enter the distance between the
indicates that they are default values taken frame and the outermost sash. If there is
from the Window Defaults dialog. These no frame, then the inset is measured from the
values can be changed individually by typing outer surface of the wall’s main layer.
in a new number or globally by changing the
settings in the default Window Defaults 4 Component Opens - Select from the
available hinge options. The preview in
dialog. To reset any value to its default
the dialog updates as options are changed.
setting, type a “d” in the field. If a warning
Must have Double Casement or Triple
results, that setting has no default value.
Casement selected on the General tab.
1 Sash Width - Enter the width for all
four sides of the window sash. 5 Frame Width - Enter
the Side, Top and
Increasing the size of the sash decreases the
Bottom widths of the
size of the glass.
window frame. When these
The Side value sets the width of all vertical are set to the default, zero,
sash members, those at the window sides and the frame does not appear.
central members for casement and sliding These values are usually left
windows. It also sets the width for the top at zero unless you are
portion of the window when any arch is replacing older windows
Windows
specified. with new windows, and you
intend to simply drop a new, framed window
The Top and Bottom values set the width for
into the original window’s jamb.
the top and bottom sash of all windows,
except that the Top value is not used if the
6 Enter the Frame Depth. If this value is
window has an arch. set to zero, the wall’s main layer
thickness is used as the frame depth.
The Mid value sets the width for horizontal
components between the top and bottom sash
7 Inset - Enter the distance that the
in double hung, double and triple awning and window frame is inset from the exterior
double and triple hopper windows. It does of the main wall layer. Normally, the outer
not affect casement and sliding windows. surface of the frame is at the outer surface of
If any sash width is set to zero, no sash is the main wall layer. A non-zero Frame Inset
produced. The window has no glass and does value moves the frame into the wall.
not support divided lites. Since there is no
glass, the window is transparent even when
the rest of the windows are set to be opaque
from the exterior.
2 Sash Depth - Enter the thickness of the

sash stock measured from the exterior
to the interior.
349
Sash & Frame Tab for Mulled Units
1
2
1 Inside - Specify the depth of the 2 Outside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the interior of the house. mullion on the exterior of the house.
350
Casing Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Windows
Changes made on the Casing tab can onlybe setting affects both sides and top. This also
seen in 3D views. affects the bottom if no sill is used and the
width of the apron if one is being used.
1 Mfr. Offset - This section refers to the
construction of the window itself, not Top Width - If Lintel is also checked, enter
the casing. This is most often left at zero. A the width of the Lintel casing.
positive value in these fields decreases the
Reveal - Enter the dimension from the
size of the window, but does not change
outside edge of the frame, or sash if no frame
either the nominal size or the rough opening
is present, to the inside edge of the casing.
size specified on the General tab. The Side
value is used for both sides, and also for the
Note: Unless the selected window(s) have a
top if an arch type window. different size casing or reveal than the rest of
the windows in the model, the three values in
2 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio the Casing section should be changed in the
button to choose whether you are
Window Defaults dialog.
defining the values for the inside or for the
outside of the window. The picture to the
right also switches to show the window from
the selected side.
3 Width - Enter the width of the casing.

Unless a separate Lintel is defined, this
351
4 Lintel - Select the check wrapped sill even with the outer edge of the
box to place a separate casing.
casing across the window top.
Wrap - Select the check box to miter the sill
Its width is set in Top Width.
ends and return them to the wall. Clear the
This creates a butt joint
check box to cut the ends of the sill square.
between the side casings and
the lintel.
6 Apron - Clear this
check box to
Extends - Enter the amount
remove the apron. Select
the top casing extends on
this box to add an apron
either side. The default value
below the sill. The
of 1 inch (25mm) usually
Extends value extends
extends it to the edge of the
the sill and apron
vertical casing.
together.
Wrap - Check this box to
model the head casing with 7 Suppress Casing- Check this box to
create a window with no trim details.
returns at the ends. Thus
The sill remains if you have specified one. If
the ends of the top casing
casing and sill are both suppressed, only the
can be cut square, or
frame and sash remain.
mitered to return to the
wall. The affects of Wrap
8 Double Wall - This section is enabled
are seen only if a custom if the window is placed in a Double
molding is specified for the Wall. See “Double Walls” on page 248.
top casing, as shown in this
Through - Select this radio button to create a
illustration.
single jamb running through both Double
Walls. This option is selected by default.
5 Sill - Check this box
to specify a sill. Clear Enlarged - Select this radio button to enlarge
the check box to remove the the opening on the Double Wall opposite the
sill, causing the specified window to accomodate casing, which is
Side casing to be used for the produced only for the wall the window is
bottom of the window. placed in.
Extends controls the amount Double - Select this radio button to place a
the sill extends to either side. second window in the Double Wall opposite
One inch (25 mm) usually the selected window. This second window
makes the ends of a non- cannot be selected. Casing is produced as
with a Through type window.
352
Lites Tab
1 3
2 4
Windows
The Lites tab allows you to add muntins to either one or both of the sashes to have
various window styles and shutters. There divided lites.
are four possible styles of muntin bars for
regular windows, plus two additional options
for arch top or round top windows. A
window that has been modified using the
Shape tab cannot have divided lites or
shutters added.
A maximum of 8 lites can be specified in
Lites in fixed Lites in moveable
either direction for any of the Special Types.
1 Lites Across - Enter the number of Note: All the window types default to 1 lite
horizontal lites in each sash. across and 1 lite vertical, in both movable and
the fixed. Because the fixed window in a Tri-
Lites Vertical - Enter the number of vertical
ple Sliding window is twice the size of the
lites in each portion of the sash. movable windows, the fixed section has a
Muntin Width - Specify the width of the vertical muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the
Lites in fixed check box.
bars that divide the panes of glass.
Lites in Fixed and Lites in Moveable - Shutters - Check this box to place
Select or clear these check boxes to specify 2
working shutters on the exterior of the
353
window. These are each half of the windows an example of the normal style.
width, excluding the casing. If one side of the • Diamond style uses angled
window does not have enough room for the muntin bars to divide up the
shutter (such as when a window is close to lites. French windows are an
another window or corner), that side has no example of the diamond
shutter. Default shutters resize with the style.
window.
• Prairie style is based on the
Set Width by Window - Check this box to normal style, but with all the
make the shutters half as wide as the window central muntin bars
so they meet in the middle when shut. removed, leaving only the
Specify Width - Enter the width for two outside muntin bars both
decorative shutters. A minimum of 4 inches horizontally and vertically.
(100 mm) applies. To be effective, both the Lites across and
the Lites vertical should be set between 6
Outside Casing - Select the check box to and 8. Federal or Federation windows are
place the shutters at the outside edge of the an example of the Prairie style.
side casing. Normal operating shutters
• Craftsman style is based on
overlap the casing except for the innermost
the normal style, but only the
one inch. Decorative shutters usually attach
topmost horizontal muntin bar
to the house outside the casing.
is kept with all the portions of
Rectangular Shutters - Select the check box the vertical muntin bars above
to match the geometry of the shutters to an it. To be effective, both the
arched window. Lites across and the Lites ver-
tical should be set between 4 and 8.
Louver - Select the check box to place
louvers in the central portion of each shutter.
4 Round top - This section becomes
Clear the check box to model shutters with active only when the window is defined
solid panels. If Outside Casing is checked, with a round top on the Arch tab.
the louvers are positioned to shield the sun
Ray Count - Enter the number of radial
when the shutters are closed. When the
muntin bars. A round or arch top window
shutters are shown open, the louvers appear
may have up to 10 rays. If rays are added,
backwards.
any Lites across and Lites vertical that are
3 Special type - Select a configuration of specified are confined to the part of the
lites from the list. When selected, a window below the arc of the window.
preview of each displays in the dialog.
Concentric - In round top windows only,
• Normal style is the most rays may also be defined as being concentric.
common, with muntins Select the check box to start the rays from the
going horizontally and verti- innermost concentric muntin bar.
cally. Colonial windows are
Following is an example of a 3040 fixed
glass window. In all cases, Lites across = 3,
354
and Lites vertical = 3. The round top window

is shown first with no rays, then with regular
and concentric rays. There is also a 3040
fixed glass arch top window (arch height 12)
with regular rays. The arch top window
cannot have concentric rays. If the window
height is changed to half the width for round
top windows, or changed to match the arch
height for arch top windows, many styles of
transom windows may be created. It is
possible to stack windows above other
windows or doors. All these transoms have
had the sill removed.
Shape Tab
Windows
1 6
2
3
4
5 7
Any type of non-symbol window may be

2 Left Height - Enter the height of the
shaped. All “shaped” windows are defined as left upper corner. Unless changed, this
fixed glass on the General tab. matches the window height.
1 Window Width is shown. It may be 3 Right Height - Enter the height of the
changed in the General tab. upper right corner.
355
4 Top Left Corner -Select the check box

to add an inside left corner or single
center peak to the window.
Height - Enter the height of the inside left
corner, and its distance From the left side.
5 Top Right Corner - Select the check

box to add an inside right corner to the
window. The above illustration shows the window
with and without Raise bottom specified.
Height - Enter the height of the right inside
corner, and its distance From the left side - Examples of Shaped Windows
not from the right side.
On a shaped window, there
6 Match Roof - must be two vertical sides.
Click to have the They may be as short as 1/4”.
program match the The diagram shows solid
angle of the top of the black circles where the left
window to the pitch of and right heights are, and
the roof on a gable open circles where additional
end. The window maintains the angle even A
corners have been placed.
when resized and repositioned. Top Left
Corner and Top Right Corner must be A has different left and right
unchecked for this to work. This option does heights with no corner added.
not work for curved roofs. B B has matching left and right
Revert - Select the check box to restore the heights with an added corner.
window to its original window type and C is the same as B, except
special arch type settings. Both the left and C
that the left and right heights
right heights are reset to the same value, have been shortened to 1/4”.
which is the higher of the two sides before it
was restored. D D is the same as B except it
has two added corners.
7 Raise Bottom - Enter a value to raise E is the same as A except
one bottom corner of the window by
that amount. that Raise Bottom at right has
been defined.
Select At Left or At Right to specify the
corner to raise.
356
Arch Tab
1
2
3
4
5
Windows
1 Type -Select a type of arch from the 3 Radius - Enter the radius for the Tudor
drop-down list. Arch or the Double Arch.
Reflect - Select the check box to
4
reflect the arch from top to bottom.
Reflect can be used to create circular and
octagonal windows from square windows. It
can also be used for decorative fixed glass.
Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat 5 Check Arch on Left to restrict the
Top Top shape of the arch to the left side of the
window. The right leg is straight.
Arch on Right - Select the check box to
restrict the shape of the arch to the right side
of the window. The left leg is straight.
Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear Treatments Tab

gonal
The Treatments tab of the Window
2 Height - Enter the arch height. All Specification dialog is similar to the
types except Round Top and Octagonal Hardware tab of the Door Specification
Arch require a height value. dialog. See “Hardware Tab” on page 323.
357
Moldings Tab
2
3
1 A preview of the selected molding Layer Tab

profile displays.
For information about using the Layers tab,
2 Click Library to open the Select see “Layer Tab” on page 223.
Library Objects dialog. Choose a
molding to view your selection in the Materials Tab
For information about using the Materials
3 Click Clear to return to a flat profile. tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 710.
4 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
button to specify the side of the window Label Tab
to receive the molding. The window detail in
For information about using the Label tab,
the dialog changes to reflect your selections.
see “Label Tab” on page 576.
New moldings may be added to the library.
See “Creating a Molding Profile” on page
539.
358
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog

To open the Bay/Box Window Many options in this dialog can be set for the
Specification dialog, select a bay or box individual object. They cannot be set as
defaults. Many of these same options are
window and click the Open Object edit
available for Bow windows.
button.
General tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Windows
9
10
11
12
13
1 Bay Angle - Enter the angle of the side 5 Rectangular Roof Over - Check this
components of the bay window in box to create a roof over the bay
degrees. Enter 90 degrees to create a box window that is square across the end instead
window.. of following the profile of the roof. See “Bay,
Box, Bow Windows & Roofs” on page 341.
2 Has Component Windows - Uncheck
this box to remove the component
6 Suppress Dimension - Check this box
windows of the bay/box window unit. to suppress the dimensions that are
automatically placed to the Bay window.
3 Use Existing Roof - Check this box if
the existing roof needs no changes to
7 No Labels - Check this box to suppress
accomodate the bay window. the label in floor plan view and to
prevent the Bay window from being included
4 Extend Existing Roof Over - Check in the materials list or Window Schedule.
this box to extend the existing roof
plane to cover the bay window below.
8 Single Label for Entire bay - Check
this box to create one label to list the
359
Bay window in the Material List and is first created. When the bay as a whole is
schedules. moved and resized, its components auto-
matically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
9 No Trimmers for Components - A
normal window has two framing studs
12 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
on either side. The trimmer stud is against to recess the components to the
the window and ends where it butts to the sheathing layer instead of the outside layer
bottom of the header. Check this box to (typically brick) as in item 11.
eliminate the trimmer stud for bay
components, which allows the component 13 Connect Outer Casing - Check this
box to have the exterior casing
width to increase.
surround all three bay component windows
10 No Framing Between Components - together, not separately, on the exterior.
Check this box to remove both studs Mullions are provided between components.
between the bay components. This is how casing is always done for the
interior.
11 Components Recessed - Check this
box if the window is placed in a brick
wall and you want to recess the exterior Layer Tab
casing to produce a brick molding. For information about using the Layer tab,
Bay window components default to a size see “Layer Tab” on page 223.
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
Bow Window Specification
1
2
3
4
360
Window Schedules
Many of the options in this dialog are the

3 Suppress Standard Dimension -
same as the Bay/Bow Window Check this box to suppress the
Specification. See “Bay/Box Window dimensions showing width and depth of the
Specification Dialog” on page 359. bow.
1 Define the Number of sections to 4 Suppress Dimension to Center -

increase or decrease the number of Check this box to suppress the radial
components in the window. dimension.
2 Has Component Windows - Uncheck

this box to remove the component
windows of the bow window unit.
Window Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
window schedule. See “Creating Schedules”
on page 992.
361
362
Chapter 11:
Multiple Floors
Chapter Overview
Multiple
Floors
Introductory Training Video: Floors Only one floor can be active at a time. This
floor is referred to as the current floor. One
additional floor can be shown (but not
Video: Rooms - Decks, Floors and
edited) for reference in the same view.
Foundations
Chief Architect allows for multiple floors in Chapter Contents
a plan. Floors that are based on the first floor • Floor Defaults
footprint can be easily added at any time. • Working With Multiple Floors
Floors can also be deleted and moved at any • Floor Tools
time. • Adding Floors
Chief Architect also support special floors • Deleting Floors
for foundations and attics. Only one • Copying Floors
foundation level and one attic can exist in a • The Current Floor
plan. • Reference Floor
363
Floor Defaults
In addition, the Floor Defaults button
Video: Checking the Second Floor
can be added to a toolbar for quick access to
Defaults
the Floor Defaults dialog. See “Toolbar
The defaults for the current floor can Customization Dialog” on page 18.
be accessed by selecting Edit> Default
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the
Settings, then choosing Floor from the
Room Specification dialog, but controls
category tree in the Default Settings
the default settings for all rooms on the
dialog. The Floor Defaults dialog can also
current floor. See “Room Specification
be opened by double-clicking the Floor
Tools button.
Floor Defaults Dialog
1
2
3
364
Working With Multiple Floors
Three settings on the General tab of are

2 Default to no ceiling - Check this box
unique to the Floor Defaults dialog. to have newly defined room have no
ceiling above them.
1 Use Above Floor’s Platform for
Ceiling - Check this box to create a
3 On Floor 1 only, define the wall layer
single ceiling platform for the entire floor, that you would lik to calculate the
which prevents unique materials from being Living Area To. See “Living Area” on page
assigned to the ceiling in individual rooms. 287.
This box is normally left unchecked.
Working With Multiple Floors

Classroom Design Project Training The Current Floor is the active floor. There
Video: Deleting, Rebuilding and can be only one active floor at a time.
Exchanging Floors
The Reference Floor is a single floor, other
When Chief Architect starts, it opens a blank than the current floor, that can be shown for
plan. The plan name is Untitled 1.plan. If reference, similar to an overlay. The
you draw walls and save the plan, the current reference floor is visible but not editable.
floor becomes the first floor. Objects snap to the reference display, helping
align items with other floors.
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar
displays filename:Floor Plan, indicating: All other floors can be shown in 3D views
• The active drawing file is filename. but not floor plan view.
• The .plan file is open. To view more than one floor of your plan
Multiple
• The active view is the floor plan view. at a time, open the plan file again. This
Floors
creates a new editable window of the same
Any model can have up to 30 floors, plus a file that can show any floor. Changes made in
foundation and attic. Floors can be added, this new window are also reflected in the orig-
deleted, copied, and swapped. All floors and inal window.
the foundation are visible in most 3D views.
Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the floor from scratch. See “Adding Floors” on page
tools. 366.
Select Build> Build New Floor to build Select Build> Insert New Floor to insert
a new floor. A new floor can be generated a new floor below the current floor. See
based upon the perimeter of the floor below “Adding Floors” on page 366.
or a blank floor can be created and drawn
365
Choose Build> Delete Current Floor to build a foundation floor using these settings.
remove the current floor from the plan. For See “Building a Foundation” on page 372.
more information, see “Deleting Floors” on
Select Build> Delete Foundation to
page 367.
remove the foundation from the plan. For
Select Build> Exchange With Floor Above more information, see “Deleting
Foundations” on page 377.
to move the current floor up one floor
and the floor above it down. See Choose Build> Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
“Exchanging Floors” on page 367.
ings to force Chief Architect to
Choose Build> Exchange With Floor recalculate the relationship between the
walls, floors, and ceilings in your model. See
Below to move the current floor down
“Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings”
one floor and the floor below it, up. See
on page 416.
“Exchanging Floors” on page 367.
Select Build> Rebuild Slabs to force rebuild
Choose Build> Build Foundation to of any slabs in the plan.
open the Foundation Defaults dialog and
Adding Floors
Classroom Design Project Training This option creates an upper floor with
Video: Building the Second Floor exterior walls (of the same type) gener-
ated over the exterior walls of the floor
New floors can be added in floor plan view
below. These walls can be edited. Inte-
and 3D views.
rior walls are not duplicated.
To create a new floor • Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
floor - This option is typically selected
1. Select Build> Floor> Build New Floor if none of the exterior walls are directly
above the existing walls on the floor
to open the New Floor dialog and below. This creates a blank floor above
build an additional floor. Two options the current floor. If you choose this
are available. method, it may be helpful to turn on
reference layers in order to align walls
with bearing walls below. Items snap to
the reference floor display.
2. Once you have made a selection, click
OK. A new floor is added based on the
settings in the Floor Defaults dialog.
• Most often, Derive new 2nd floor See “Floor Defaults” on page 364.
plan from the 1st floor plan is used. 3. The new floor becomes the current floor.
366
Exchanging Floors
4. Repeat this process to create additional Select one of the two options available and
floors. click OK. The existing floor is moved up,
(with all floors above it) and a new floor is
Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor, created below.
the foundation/basement, below the first floor.
Keep this in mind when you begin an as-built Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st
or plan for a multi-story building. floor plan - Select this option to insert a new
floor, based on the exterior walls of the
Adding Floors Between current floor. Click OK to create a new floor.
Any existing floors above are moved up and
Existing Floors
the new floor is inserted.
Floors can be inserted between two existing
floors. To insert a floor, select Build> Make new (blank) plan - Select this option
to insert a blank floor. The current floor and
Floor> Insert New Floor . The Insert all floors above are moved up.
Floor dialog opens.
Adding a Foundation
To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
Build Foundation . See “Building a
Foundation” on page 372.
Exchanging Floors
Multiple
With Floor Below to swap the current
Floors
Video: Deleting, Rebuilding and
floor with the floor above or below. The floor
Exchanging Floors
that was moved becomes the current floor at
Select Build> Floor Exchange With Floor its new location. You can easily move a floor
up or down several floors by using either one
Above or Build> Floor> Exchange
of these buttons repeatedly.
Deleting Floors
Click Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor
to remove the current floor from the plan.
If there is a floor above, it becomes the
current floor; if there is no floor below, the
floor beneath becomes the current floor.
367
Copying Floors
If you want to make a copy of an existing You can also copy floors by selecting all,
floor to be used on a new floor, the Edit then using Copy and Paste, Hold Position.
Area tools can be helpful. See “Edit
Area Tools” on page 153.
The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given
button, which can be found between the
time. The active floor is referred to as the
Current Floor, and is the only floor that can Down One Floor and the Up One Floor
be edited. buttons.
If you want to edit two different floors at the You can also select Tools> Reference
same time, you can open the plan again. This
opens a second window on the current open Floors> Up One Floor or Down One
plan that has the same editing abilities as the Floor to switch from one floor to
first. Only one of these windows can be another. Floors become available once they
active at any given time. have been built. The Attic plan and the
foundation are also accessible using these
Floor Up/ Floor Down tools.
If you are working with more
than two floors, use the
Change Floor
toolbar to change between them. You can If there are multiple floors, select
change the current floor in floor plan view Tools> Reference Floors> Change
and most 3D views. The current floor Floor/Reference to open the Change
displays on the Change Floor/Reference Floor/Reference dialog. See “Reference
Floor” on page 368.
Reference Floor
Classroom Design Project Training shown as the Reference Floor along with the
Video: Using the Reference Floor and current floor.
its Layer Set
When the Reference Display is turned on, the
When there is more than one floor in a reference floor is visible and objects on the
model, it is often helpful to see how different current floor can snap to objects on reference
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be
368
Reference Floor
floor; however, objects on the reference floor

cannot be selected or edited.
1
Reference Display 2
To show the reference floor, select
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
Display or press F9 on your keyboard. The
reference floor can also be toggled on or off
quickly in floor plan view by clicking the
Reference Display toggle button on the
utility toolbar. 3
Note: If the current floor and the reference
floor have edges that line up, the reference
floor may be difficult to see on screen. When 1 The Reference Floor currently used for
reference is highlighted here. You can
lines of two different colors are superimposed
select another floor.
upon each other, discoloration may result.
2 The Current Floor is highlighted here.

The display of objects in the reference You can select another floor to make it
display is controlled by layer set. The layer the current floor.
set being used for reference can be changed
in the Change Floor/Reference dialog or 3 The Reference Display Layer Set,
which controls which layers are visible
in the Layer Set Management dialog.
in the reference display, shows here. The
See “Layer Set Management” on page 217.
Reference Display Set is active by default.
If the reference display is on when a floor Select another layer set from the drop-down
Multiple
Floors
plan view is sent to layout, the reference list to use it for the reference display.
display is always on in that layout view and
cannot be turned off. While any layer set can be used as
the Reference Display Layer Set, for
The reference display settings are also best results you should use the default
preserved if the reference display is on when Reference Display Set or create a new
a view is printed. See “Display Options and layer set specifically for reference display
Printing” on page 950. purposes. See “Layer Sets” on page 216.
By default, the floor below the current floor

is the reference floor, but any floor can be
Swap Floor/Reference
referenced using the Change Floor/ If one floor is defined as the current
Reference dialog. To open the dialog, click floor and another floor is defined as the
the Change Floor/Reference button. If reference floor, use the Swap Floor/
the Reference Display was on or off, it Reference button to switch the status of
remains so. the two floors.
369
Reference Display Options when the reference display is turned on. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
Select Tools> Reference Floors> 218.
Reference Display Options to control
what objects display and how they appear
370
Chapter 12:
Foundations
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Base- drawn on upper floors using the Foundation
ments and Foundations Wall tool.
Video: Rooms - Decks, Floors and Always consult registered geotechnical
Foundations and civil engineers for information
Foundations
regarding the proper foundation for your site.
There are three foundation types in Chief
Architect: footing, slab, and piers. All three Chapter Contents
can be generated automatically or manually. • Foundation Defaults
The foundation type can be specified in the • Building a Foundation
Foundation Defaults dialog when the • New Floor Dialog
foundation is built. • Displaying Foundations
There can be only one foundation level in • Editing Foundations
your plan, Level 0. Foundation walls can be • Aligning Stem Walls and Footings
• Resizing Stem Walls
• Deleting Foundations
371
• The Slab Tools • Editing Piers and Pads

• Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations • Slab Specification Dialog
Foundation Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by The Foundation Defaults dialog allows
selecting Edit> Default Settings... . you to specify stem wall height, footing size,
slab thickness, presence of treated sill plates,
There can be only one foundation floor per
and other characteristics of the foundation.
plan. Because the settings in the Founda-
These values determine how a new
tion Defaults dialog determine foundation
foundation is built and the sizes for
type, this dialog opens automatically when
foundation walls, slabs and footings added to
Build> Floor> Build Foundation is an existing foundation.
selected.
Building a Foundation
Classroom Design Project Training Once a foundation is generated, you can add
Video: Building the Basement Founda- walls, piers, and slabs to customize it.
tion
To build a foundation, select Build> Floor>
Foundations built automatically are based on
Build Foundation to open the
the placement of walls on the first floor. At
Foundation Defaults dialog.
least one room must be defined on the first
floor for a foundation to be automatically The Foundation Defaults dialog defines
generated. the general parameters of the foundation.
Three foundation types are available. They The Foundation Defaults dialog
are piers, footings and monolithic slab. The cannot be used to edit the foundation
first two options are composed of walls; the after it has been built. The foundation must
last creates a slab with footing polyline. be deleted and rebuilt. See “Deleting Founda-
tions” on page 377.
372
Foundation Tab
1
2 8
3 9
4 10
5 11
6
12
7
13
Three types of foundations can be created in feet (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated
Chief Architect: footing, monolithic slab, above the footing and a Basement ceiling
and piers. Select the radio button next to the height notation displays, showing the
name of the desired type. Each type has distance from the top of the slab floor to the
different settings, options, and behaviors. basement ceiling. This ceiling height is the
The following settings apply to most Minimum Wall Height minus the Slab
foundation types: Thickness. Adjust these values to get the
desired Basement Ceiling Height. The
1 Wall Thickness - If the Foundation ceiling height can be changed later. See
Wall Type is set to Default (wood
“Room Specification Dialog” on page 296.
frame 16"OC), this field is enabled and
defines the thickness of the stem wall. When To delete the slab, specify the “rooms” in the
Foundations
the foundation wall is built, the wall type is basement as Open Below in the Room
Default (concrete) with the thickness you Specification dialog.
assign.
3 Slab Thickness - Defines the thickness
If the foundation wall type is not set to of the slab produced above the footing
Default, the thickness of the foundation wall or at the top of the stem wall.
is determined by the wall type. See “Wall
Specification Dialog” on page 259. Footings
2 Min. Wall Height - Defines the stem Spread footings are used in conjunction with
wall height, including the treated sill stem walls. The footing is typically wider
plate. If the minimum wall height is at least 6
373
than the stem wall and runs continuously

8 Foundation Wall Type - Select the
under the base of the wall. wall type for the foundation walls from
this drop-down list.
4 Footings - Select the radio button to
generate a foundation system with a Click the Define... button to open the Wall
stem wall centered on a spread footing. Type Definitions dialo and change the
Footings automatically center beneath the definition of the wall type selected from the
stem wall, but individual footings can be drop-down list. See “Wall Type Definitions
located differently. See “Foundation Tab” on Dialog” on page 251.
page 264.
If the Default (wood frame 16"OC) wall
5 Slab at top of Stem Wall - Check this type is selected, the thickness can be defined
box to raise the slab floor so its top is by the Wall Thickness field to the left. The
flush with the top of the stem wall. thickness of any other wall type is defined by
the wall definition.
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all
rooms on the first floor are automatically set
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall
to Floor for this room is supplied by the into a pony wall, a wall type other than
foundation room from the floor below, as Default (concrete) must be selected.
noted in the Structure tab in the Room
Specification dialog. See “Structure Tab”
on page 299. 9 Check Show “S” Markers on Step
Foundation to include an “S” symbol
in floor plan view anywhere a step in a
6 Footing Size - Specify the Width and foundation is located.
Height of the footing. To generate a
foundation with a stem wall and no visible
footing, set the footing width to the same Monolithic Slab
dimension as the stem wall.
10 Monolithic Slab - Select this option to
Initially, the bottom of the slab rests on the build a slab foundation with a perimeter
top of the footing. The footing can be footing. This foundation is the floor platform
subsequently lowered by increasing Stem for the first floor. It is visible in the
Wall Height for the first floor room above the foundation plan and can be selected and
foundation. edited with the Slab Specification dialog.
7 Treated Sill Plate Size - Enter a Width Note: Monolithic slabs are rebuilt whenever
and Height for the treated sill plate, you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
also commonly referred to as a mudsill. If
either value is set to zero, no sill plate is Piers
produced. A sill plate is only produced if the
main layer of the wall above is a framing 111 Piers - Select this option to generate a
type. pier and grade beam foundation. The
floor framing rests directly on top of the
grade beam.
374
The height of the grade beam is defined by the grade beam is sized according to the Wall
the Minimum Wall Height. The thickness of Thickness and the Minimum Wall Height.
the grade beam is defined by the Wall
Thickness. The size and spacing of the piers 12 Specify the Diameter, Depth and
Maximum Separation of the piers.
are specified in the Piers section of this tab.
If a wall type is selected, only the Minimum 13 Basement Ceiling Height - The ceiling
height for the basement displays here if
Wall Height is used to size the grade beam,
the Minimum Wall Height is defined at 72
and the thickness comes from the wall layer
inches or greater.
definition. If you select Default (concrete),
Materials Tab
1 2 3
4
5
The Materials tab determines what the slab. If piers are used, specify how many
information is used when you build a rebar are used per pier. Rebar does not
Foundations
materials list. Unlike the Materials tabs on display in cross section/elevation views, but
most other dialogs, none of this data affects is added to the Material List.
the 3D model.
2 Course Spacing - Define the Wall
The Materials tab applies to any foundation Horizontal and Wall Vertical spacing
type, but some options may be unavailable for the rebar in the stem wall. If using rebar
depending on the type selected. is a slab instead of mesh, the spacing applies
to both directions.
1 #bars/course - Specify the number of
rebar in the Footing, the number of
3 Bar size - Define the rebar size in 1/8th
Horizontal and Vertical rebar courses in the inches. 4 represents 4/8, or ½ inch.
stem walls, and the number of rebar layers in
375
Use Mesh - Select the check box to

4 5 Select either Foam Seal, Termite
reinforce the slab floor with mesh Flashing or both. These options are
instead of rebar, or uncheck it to use rebar. added to the Material List, but do not display
in the model.
New Floor Dialog

Once you have specified the correct settings
1 Select Derive new Foundation plan
in the Foundation Defaults dialog, click from the 1st floor plan and click OK
OK to open the New Floor dialog. to build a foundation based on floor 1.
2 Select Make new (blank) plan for the

1 Foundation and click OK to create an
empty foundation level where you can
2 manually draw foundation walls or slabs.
Displaying Foundations
In floor plan view, footings are drawn with The appearance of foundation walls, footings
dashed lines and walls with solid lines. and piers is controlled in the Layer Display
Automatically generated piers are drawn Options dialog on the Walls, Foundation
using a dashed line and are centered on the and Footings layers. The Footings layer
grade beam. The grade beam is represented controls the display of footings and
by two solid lines. It aligns with the wall foundation piers. The Foundation layer
above unless specified otherwise. controls the display of foundations in 3D
views.
Editing Foundations
Foundation walls can be moved and edited Monolithic slab foundations can be edited
like other walls. See “Editing Walls” on page manually or changed by editing the footprint
242. of the floor above then rebuilding walls,
floors, and ceilings.
Footing size can be changed on the
Foundation tab of the Wall Specification Other slabs are edited in 2D and 3D views
dialog. See “Foundation Tab” on page 264. like closed polylines. See “Editing Closed-
Polyline Based Objects” on page 107.
376
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings

By default, the exterior surface of the main of the main layer of the walls line up. The
layer of the stem wall aligns with the exterior footing is centered on the stem wall unless
surface of the main layer of the wall above. If unchecked on the Foundation tab of the Wall
there is only one layer for both the stem wall Specification dialog. See “Foundation
and the first floor wall above it, the outsides Tab” on page 264.
Resizing Stem Walls

When a foundation plan is created, the In 3D Views
foundation is built with a specified stem wall
height measured from the bottom of floor Individual stem walls can be selected and
framing to top of the footing. Once built, this edited in 3D views to move the footing up or
height can be set individually by room and down.
can also be set independent of the basement
floor height.
If adjacent rooms have stem wall

heights that differ by at least 1/16 of an
inch, the stem wall separating them uses the
larger of these two values.
To set stem wall height individually, select a

room and click the Open Object edit
button to open the Room Specification
dialog. On the General tab, enter a value in
the Stem Wall Height field to redefine the
height of the foundation stem wall the next
This method should only be used for detailed
Foundations
time you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
changes or for stepping the bottom of the
. foundation wall. See “Stepped Walls &
Footings” on page 258.
Deleting Foundations
Once built, the foundation plan is Use the Rebuild Slab tool to rebuild
separate from the first floor plan. If you foundation slabs automatically. To update
change the position of exterior walls on the walls, you must either edit them in the
first floor plan, the foundation is not updated.
377
foundation plan or delete the foundation and

Foundation . The Foundation
rebuild them.
Defaults dialog opens, allowing you to set
Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation general parameters for the new foundation
plan.
to delete the current foundation. Rebuild
the foundation to match the new first floor
Note: You must delete and rebuild the foun-
plan by selecting Build> Floor> Build dation if you decide to change the foundation
type.
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations

If you built a monolithic slab foundation or dialog. Click Rebuild Slabs to delete all
define a room to have a slab foundation and existing slabs and rebuild them to match the
then modify the footprint of the walls current footprint of the walls.
defining the slab, you can update the slabs by
If you have manually edited the slab and
selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs changed it, these changes are lost when the
to open the Rebuild Monolithic Slabs slab is rebuilt.
Foundations and Room Specification

When a foundation plan is created, rooms Two options on the Structure tab of the
included in the Living Area calculation Room Specification dialog affect the
generate a spread footing, grade beam, or foundation: Slab foundation for this room
slab foundation below it. Garages generate if the foundation is a monolithic slab, and
foundations, but exterior rooms do not. This foundation ‘room’ supplies the floor
for the room above if the foundation is
Note: To remove the concrete slab or part of composed of footings or piers. See
the slab in the basement area, select a base-
“Structure Tab” on page 299.
ment room and define it as Open Below in
the Room Specification dialog.
378
The Slab Tools
Garages These settings create a 4" slab to sit on top

of the footings, with a short stem wall around
A room labeled Garage on the first floor the garage. Stud walls are placed on top of
produces automatic footings or pier the stem wall when framing is built.
foundation with a slab floor.
If Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
To produce this foundation, the following Foundation “Room” from the Floor Below
options are checked on the Structure tab of
the Room Specification dialog for the is selected, a Floor Overview of the
foundation “room” under a Garage: foundation plan includes the slab. A Floor
• Ceiling over this room is not checked. Overview on the 1st floor shows no
garage floor.
• This foundation ‘room’ supplies the
floor for the room above is checked. The floor height of the garage and the top of
stem wall must be properly defined relative
On the Structure tab of the Room
to the zero level of the first floor. Typically,
Specification dialog for the Garage itself,
the garage area in the foundation must be
“Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
selected and the floor height or slab to stem
Foundation ‘Room’ from the Floor
wall top raised if it is to be less than 24"
Below” should be checked.
below the zero level of the main floor.
The Slab Tools

Select Build> Structure to access the To edit its height and thickness, select the
Slab Tools. slab in floor plan or 3D views and use the
edit handles or click the Open Object
The Slab Tools are designed for more
edit button to open the Slab Specification
generic purposes than foundations and
dialog. See “Slab Specification Dialog” on
should not be substituted for a foundation
page 381.
plan. The settings in the Foundation
Defaults dialog do not affect slabs created
Foundations
with the Slab tools. Slab Holes
A hole can be placed in a slab or in
Slabs the floor of a foundation slab with
footings. Select Build> Structure> Slab
Select Build> Structure> Slab or Hole or Build> Structure> Slab Hole With
Build> Structure> Slab With Footing, then click and drag within an
Footing, then and click and drag in floor existing slab to create a hole.
plan view to create a slab. Slabs can be
edited as a polyline. See “Editing Closed-
379
Piers & Pads hole in a ceiling or floor platform above the

current floor. A platform hole drawn on
Piers and pads can be manually Floor 0 will produce a hole in the floor
placed under walls, railings, or platform for the first floor.
beams on any floor. Select Build>
Structure> Round Pier or Build> You can add this button to your toolbar. See
Structure> Square Pad and click in floor “Adding Toolbar Buttons” on page 18.
plan view to place a pier or pad.
The pier or pad placed uses the specified in
Slabs and the
the Foundation Defaults dialog. Materials List
For information about editing Piers and Pads, If the slab material type is specified as
see “Editing Piers and Pads” on page 380. Concrete or Volume, the materials list
calculates the total volume of the slab and all
Platform Holes footings. See “Define Material Dialog” on
page 712.
Select Build> Structure> Platform
Hole and draw a polyline to place a
Editing Piers and Pads

Click an existing pier or pad at the wall to Dimension and drag a dimension
select it. Three edit handles allow the pier or parallel to the wall containing the pier, within
pad to be moved and resized. two feet of the wall. Select the pier or pad,
• Resize the selected pier or pad by drag- then click the dimension to open the Move
ging in or out from either of the two side Object Using Dimension dialog. See
handles. To resize a pier or pad if one side “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
is all the way against an outside wall page 804.
intersection, select the pier or pad, drag
using the inside handle. If you move a foundation wall or beam,
any piers or pads it contains move with
• Move the selected pier or pad by grab- it.
bing the center handle and dragging it
along the wall. It stops automatically Delete a pier or pad by selecting it and
underneath an exterior corner.
clicking the Delete edit button or
Move any pier or pad using a dimension that pressing the Delete key.
locates an edge. If no such dimension exists,
Select CAD> Dimension> Manual
380
Slab Specification Dialog
Slab Specification Dialog

Select a slab and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Slab Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Hole in Slab - Check this box to Polyline Tab

convert the selected slab into a slab
hole. A slab hole must be contained within a
larger slab.
Foundations
2 Top Height - Set the top height of the
selected slab.
3 Thickness - Set the thickness of the

selected slab.
4 Has Footing - Check this box if you

want the slab to have footings. Set the
height and width for the selected slab. The perimeter, total area, and volume of the
selected slab displays here. The volume is
the amount of concrete required to pour the
slab.
381
Selected Line Tab Fill Style Tab

For information about using the Selected For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Line tab, see “Polyline Specification Dialog” “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
on page 863.
Materials Tab
Line Style Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to
For information about the Line Style tab, see the terrain surface in 3D views. This material
“Line Specification Dialog” on page 850. is not calculated in the Material List.
382
Chapter 13:
Roofs
Chapter Overview
Classroom Design Project Training • Roof Baseline Polylines
Video: Introduction to Roofs • Manual Roofs
• Drawing Roof Planes
Chief Architect’s roof tools allow you to
• Curved Roof Planes
draw almost any roof style manually. Many
• Dormers
roof styles can also be generated
• Roof Returns
automatically.
• Displaying Roof Planes
Proficiency with the roof tools can be • Editing Roof Planes
attained only through practice, but mastering • Editing Curved Roof Planes
these tools saves you time and effort in plan • Editing Auto Dormers
development. • Locating Roof Plane Intersections
• Ceiling Planes
Verify that all roof planes join as • Gable/Roof Line
intended. The program does not con- • Skylights
firm correct geometry between manually • Gutters
designed or edited roof planes. It is possible
• Gable Over Door/Window
to design and edit roof planes with hips and
valleys that do not meet properly. • Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
• Build Roof Dialog
• Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
Chapter Contents
• Roof Plane Specification Dialog
• Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs
Roofs
• Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
• The Roof Tools
• Dormer Specification Dialog
• Automatically Generated Roof Styles
• Dormer Defaults
• Some Common Roof Types
• Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
383
• Roof Pitches in Degrees
Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to open Default settings for framing, which control
the Default Settings dialog for a the depth of roof planes, as well as the depth
variety of drawing tools, several of which of floor and ceiling platforms which
directly affect roof generation. influence roof plane heights, are specified in
the Framing Defaults dialog. See
While not listed in the Default Settings
“Framing Defaults” on page 469.
dialog, the Build Roof dialog also functions
as the roof defaults dialog. Many, but not all, The initial heights of floors and ceilings,
initial default values for both automatically which influence roof heights, can be
generated and manually drawn roofs are set specified in the Floor Defaults dialog for
in this dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on each floor. See “Floor Defaults” on page 364.
page 416.
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs

Chief Architect can create just about any roof Any deviations from the default hip roof can
style. Most common roof styles such as hips be specified on the Roof tab of the Wall
and gables can be automatically generated Specification dialog for any exterior wall.
quite easily. More complex roof styles can be Here, you can specify a different overhang,
created manually. The manual roof tools pitch, a second upper pitch, and the elevation
allow you to create any roof system that can where the upper pitch begins for the roof
be represented using roof planes. plane that rests on the selected wall. You can
also specify a Full Gable Wall, High/Shed
Automatically Gable Wall, or other options instead of a
Generated Roofs default hip roof. See “Wall Specification
There are several ways to produce a roof for
Roofs can also be automatically generated
your plan. The quickest and easiest is to using roof plane baselines. When roof plane
automatically generate a roof. In the Build baselines are used, information that
Roof dialog, specify the Pitch and Roof determines where and how roof planes are
Overhang, check Build Roof Planes and generated is contained on the Roof Baseline
click OK to automatically generate a roof. tab of the Roof Baseline Specification
By default, a roof plane is generated over dialog, which is similar in appearance to the
each exterior wall, creating a hip roof. The Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
program automatically joins the roof planes For more about roof plane baselines, see
at ridges and valleys. “Roof Baseline Polylines” on page 391.
384
The Roof Tools
Bay, bow, and box windows also produce process and limiting the possibilities only to
roof planes automatically. For information your imagination.
about these windows and the roof styles that
can be used with them, see “Bay, Box, Bow Using Both Automatic and
Windows & Roofs” on page 341. Manual Techniques
Manually Drawn Another option is to start with an
automatically generated roof and use manual
Roof Systems
design techniques to finish it. Using both
Any roof system that can be created automatic roof generation and the manual
automatically can also be created manually. roof drawing techniques, you can quickly
Each roof plane is drawn and edited design highly customized roof systems.
individually, offering full control over the
The Roof Tools

Select Build> Roof to access the Roof Gable/Roof Line
Tools.
Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof Line
to draw a gable line that generates a
Build Roof
gable when roofs are automatically
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to generated. See “Gable/Roof Line” on page
open the Build Roof dialog and 410.
specify the settings for automatically
generated and manually drawn roofs. See The Gable/Roof Line tool is most
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 416. commonly used to define the location of a
gable along a longer wall. A gable/roof line
Roof Plane can also be used to place a gable within a
roof plane or to extend a continuous roof
Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane to when there is no wall below.
draw a roof plane manually. Double-
click the Roof Plane button to open the
Skylights
Build Roof dialog.
Select Build> Roof> Skylight and
Ceiling Plane drag over an existing roof plane to
create a skylight. The skylight, skylight
Select Build> Roof>Ceiling Plane to shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling exists) are
draw a ceiling plane manually. Ceiling drawn at the same time. See “Skylights” on
Roofs
planes are drawn and behave much like roof page 414.
planes. See “Ceiling Planes” on page 409.
385
Auto Floating Dormer Fix Roofs

Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating Select Build> Roof> Fix Roofs to
Dormer and click within an existing remove breaks where a single edge of
roof plane to place an auto floating dormer. one roof plane meets the broken edge of
See “Dormers” on page 398. another in a ridge or valley. See “Aligning
Roof Edges” on page 403.
Auto Dormer
Delete Roof Planes
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click within a roof plane to place a Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof
dormer. See “Dormers” on page 398. Planes to delete all roof planes in the
plan. See “Deleting Roof Planes” on page
405.
Automatically Generated Roof Styles

Introductory Training Video: Automati-
cally Generating Roofs Walls can be group selected and edited
simultaneously. Select the first wall,
Classroom Design Project Training hold down the Shift key, click additional walls
Video: Building an Entire Roof at Once to add them to the selection set, then click the
Open Object edit button.
When roofs are automatically generated, a
roof plane is created over each exterior wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof.
Auto Rebuild Roofs
To generate a roof plane using values other When Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
Build Roofs dialog, any changes made to
than the defaults or to not generate a roof
plane at all (gable roofs, shed roofs, etc.), the position of an exterior wall or to its roof
directives will automatically prompt the roof
change the settings in the Wall
to regenerate to reflect the changes. See
Specification dialog before a roof is
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 416.
generated.
Changes made to floor heights, ceiling
Select a wall and click the Open Object heights, or floor or ceiling platform
edit button to open the Wall Specification thicknesses may also cause the roof to be
dialog. The Roof tab controls how the roof automatically rebuilt.
plane above the selected wall is
automatically generated.
386
1
2
4
5
Many common roof styles can be generated also be used for gable ends that have a
automatically using the Roof tab of the Wall raked wall. See “High Shed/Gable Wall”
Specification dialog. on page 390.
• Knee Wall - Check this to define an inte-
Note: Pitch settings on the Roof tab of the
Wall Specification dialog override the rior wall whose height is defined by the
Pitch setting in the Build Roof dialog. roof plane above it, not the ceiling height.
Knee walls are usually found next to top
floor attic areas.
1 Any automatically generated roof style
other than a hip requires one of the • Extend Slope Downward - Check this to
Options to be checked. extend the roof plane downward over a
• Full Gable Wall - Check this to create a bumpout, instead of creating additional
gable above the entire wall. This places a roof planes. The two connecting walls
ridge over the middle of the selected that create the bumpout must be Full
wall(s). See “Gable Roof” on page 390. Gable walls.
Roofs
• High Shed/Gable Wall - Check this for In the bottom image below, the outer
the wall under the high side of a shed bumpout wall has the Extend Slope Down-
roof. It can produce ridges, but it may ward check box selected. The two short
387
connecting walls have the Full Gable Wall • Pitch - Specify the pitch for the roof
check box selected. plane above this wall if different from the
default roof pitch set in the Build Roof
dialog. If a roof plane is specified with
two pitches, this field controls the pitch
of the lower roof plane.
• Upper Pitch - Check this to define the
pitch for a second roof plane above this
Before wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull wing and
half-hip are examples of roof styles that
use two pitches.
• Starts at - Specify either the height or
Full Gable the distance in from baseline where the
Wall second roof plane begins.
To determine either of these values from an

Extend Slope elevation view
Downward
1. Create the model.
2. Generate the roof using only the first
pitch. Be sure to define all the roof infor-
mation for each wall (gable, hip, first
pitch, etc.).
After 3. Using the Cross Section/Elevation
tool, generate a cross section of the
• Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Check this house that includes the roof plane that
to have the bottom of the selected wall will have the second pitch.
clipped by the roof plane below, as where
4. Using the CAD tools, place a temporary
a floating dormer wall meets the main
point near the location where you want
roof plane.
the second pitch to start.
Pitch • Using the End-to-End Dimension
tool, drag a dimension line from the
2 Any exterior wall can define the pitch first floor 0'-0" to the temporary point.
of the roof plane built above it.
If the Pitch value is followed by a [D], the • Using the End-to-End Dimension
value is the default pitch for the entire tool, drag a dimension line from the
building. The default pitch is set in the Build baseline to the vertical plane of the
Roof dialog. The minimum pitch is ¼” in temporary point.
12” or 20 mm in 1000 mm.
388
Note: Normally hip roof planes are built over

bay, bow, and box windows. You cannot edit
the wall segments making up these windows
as described above. Instead, select one of
the windows, open it for specification, and
select one of the roof generation options.
3 Overhang - Specify the overhang of

the roof plane to be generated above the
5. Enter either of these values in the Wall selected wall. The default value is set in the
Specification dialog. You can press Build Roof dialog. See “Build Roof
the Tab key to update the other value. Dialog” on page 416.
Click OK to close the dialog.
4 Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting
Roof - Designate a wall to be split into
a pony wall. It is split by roof planes that
abut its outside surface. The upper portion
retains the same type. This is defined on the
Wall Types tab of the Wall Specification
dialog, and the lower portion specified here.
See “Wall Types Tab” on page 265.
Auto Roof Returns
6. Open the Build Roof dialog, check 5 Check Auto Roof Return to generate
roof returns on the selected wall. In
Build Roof Planes and click OK to
most cases, roof returns only work for Full
rebuild the roof.
Gable Walls.
Specify the roof return’s horizontal Length.
Enter a value to Extend the roof returns from
the overhang.
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return and
whether the roof return is Sloping or Flat.
See “Roof Returns” on page 400.
Check the boxes to Include Frieze molding
and Include Gutter along eave edges. Roofs
389
Some Common Roof Types

Most common roof types can be created 4. On the Roof tab check Full Gable Wall.
easily using the Options on the Roof tab of Be sure both walls are specified the
the Wall Specification dialog. same.
Hip Roof 5. Double-click the Roof Tools button

to open the Build Roof dialog, check
Build Roof Planes, and click OK to
regenerate the roof.
Full Gable
Wall
By default a roof plane is generated over

each exterior wall, creating a hip roof. Hip
roofs can be applied equally to all walls
without causing conflict. To define a wall
with a hip roof, make sure all Options are
unchecked.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is produced if the two opposite
walls, or roof plane baseline segments, are
defined as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. High Shed/Gable Wall
The High Shed/Gable Wall is often
1. Draw four walls to create a one room interchangeable with Full Gable Wall, but
house. should be used when raked walls are desired.
2. Group select two end walls. If three adjacent walls are defined as High
Shed/Gable wall, the building is modeled
3. Click the Open Object edit button with a shed roof. The High Shed/Gable wall
to open the Wall Specification dia- is the tall side.
log.
390
Roof Baseline Polylines
High Shed
Walls
Gable Wall
Roof Baseline Polylines

Typically the program models the roof plan Just as roof information can be defined in
based on the default settings in the Build individual walls, roof information can also
Roof dialog and the settings on the Roof tab be defined in each roof baseline edge. When
of the Wall Specification dialog. The roofs are built using roof plane baselines, the
program takes this information and the settings in the roof plane baselines override
layout of the exterior walls and generates a the settings in the corresponding walls.
roof. If you want a roof plan that diverges
To create the new roof using the modified
from the footprint of your building, you can
roof baselines, check Use Existing Roof
use roof baselines to lay out the roof plan
Baselines in the Build Roof dialog and
instead.
click OK.
You can generate roof plane baselines in the
Build Roof dialog. Check Make Roof Editing Roof
Baseline Polylines (this also checks Build Baseline Polylines
Roof Planes) and click OK. The automatic
roof generation process stops short of Roof baselines can be edited and used as the
building the roof planes. A continuous set of basis for the generation of a new roof plan.
roof baselines is created along the outside They can be reshaped in 2D like CAD
edge of the main layer of the exterior walls. polylines. Like walls, edges can have roof
information defined in them. When edited,
Once created, roof plane baselines can be attached roof plane baselines stay at the same
edited like a CAD polyline. See “Editing baseline height. If roof planes exist at more
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page than one baseline height, each height
107. When reshaped, new roofs built from generates its own set of roof baseline
these roof plane baselines follow the new
Roofs
polylines.
shape even if that shape no longer follows
the exterior walls.
391
Roof baselines always form a closed area. An Example

They cannot be severed, but can have
additional joints or corners added. For a simple example of roof plane baseline
editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a
In addition to length and direction, each rectangular roof. The inner part of the ’L’ is a
segment of a roof plane baseline has patio that is covered under the same roof.
embedded roof information that the program
uses when modeling roof planes. This is the
same information that can be set for walls on
the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
dialog.
To set roof information for roof plane

baselines
1. Select the roof plane baseline at one

edge.
On the left is the roof plane baseline as it was
2. Click the Open Object edit button originally produced and the roof plan it
to open the Roof Baseline creates.
3. The settings in the dialog apply only to To model the roof plan shown on the right
the selected baseline edge. Specify one
of the following options: 1. Select the roof plane baseline by the bot-
tom segment.
• Full Gable Wall
• High Shed/Gable Wall 2. Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
• Knee Wall ton. See “Reshaping Objects” on page
• Extend Slope Downward 129.
• You can specify that a particular base- 3. Click the leftmost segment to fillet the
line ends Against Wall, which means two lines.
that the high edge of a roof plane butts 4. A message box displays informing you
into a wall that continues upward. that “The system must delete interven-
4. Click OK to close the dialog. Roof infor- ing lines (those on the inside of the L) to
mation is shown along the roof plane join the two selected lines.” Click OK.
baselines. Abbreviations used are: V - 5. You should see the roof line shown in
vertical (against wall), G -gable/shed, K the right side.
- knee wall, and L - lower (extend slope
downward). 6. Open the Build Roof dialog and select
the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing
Roof Baseline check boxes to model the
roof plan shown at right.
392
Manual Roofs
Manual Roofs
Introductory Training Video: Drawing • The orientation of the roof plane can be
Roofs Manually edited in 3D. As a roof plane is stretched
and reshaped in 2D, the program main-
Before automatically generating roofs, it is
tains the 3D orientation of the plane
important to understand how the manual roof
being edited. The location of this plane
editing tools can be used to create and edit
can be redefined using the Roof Plane
roof planes. The manual roof editing tools
Specification dialog. See “Roof Plane
take advantage of the parameters of
Specification Dialog” on page 424. This
neighboring roof planes and walls to partially
dialog allows the roof plane location and
automate the process of drawing a roof plan.
direction to be adjusted.
Creating a roof plane is a simple task. Once
An understanding of these two concepts
created it can be edited in two ways.
allows you to design almost any kind of roof.
• The shape of the roof plane can be
changed. The shape of a roof plane is
edited in 2D just like a CAD polyline.
Drawing Roof Planes

What’s New In Version X1 Training 4. Click at point 3 to build the roof plane.
Video: Roofs - Draw and Edit Roof Point 3 defines the upslope direction of
Planes the roof plane.
Roof planes are essentially 3D CAD
polylines. They are created and edited
like polylines, and have pitch, elevation and
structural properties.
To draw a roof plane Line 1 - 2 is the baseline
1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane . The Baseline

2. As in the following example, click and The baseline displays an upslope tick in the
drag a baseline from point 1 to point 2. middle of the line. The upslope tick indicates
the direction the roof plane slopes upward.
3. Release the mouse button at point 2 and
You cannot redefine the direction of the
move your cursor in the upslope direc-
Roofs
slope. If the upslope tick is pointing the
tion. As you move the cursor, a preview
wrong direction, either rotate the roof plane
outline of the roof plane displays.
or delete it and draw another.
393
The baseline can be used by the program as • The height of a baseline is determined by
the pivot point for the roof plane. In a cross the following formula:
section, the baseline is the point where the
outside main layer surface of the wall would Height of baseline = elevation top plate +
extend upward to intersect the top of the roof the vertical depth of the rafter - the verti-
framing member. cal depth of the rafter’s birdsmouth cut.
When drawing the baseline of a roof plane, • The elevation of the top plate is defined
here are some things to consider: by the ceiling height in the room.
• A baseline does not have to be drawn • If a baseline is drawn over the top of any
over a wall, although it often is. other roof plane, the baseline height
equals the height of the existing roof
• The roof plane overhangs in the down-
plane at the point where you started
slope direction from the baseline.
drawing.
• A baseline drawn along a wall should be
drawn over the outer edge of the wall’s
main layer. It tries to snap to that layer.
Curved Roof Planes

Any roof plane can be turned into a curved view and a cross section/elevation view
roof plane in the Roof Plane may be helpful.
One way to produce a barrel roof is using a
single roof plane that starts out flat (zero
pitch) and covers the entire building.
Curving a Single Roof Plane

4 in 12 pitch Shed roof
To curve a roof plane
2. Select the roof plane in floor plan view
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x and click the Open Object edit but-
24', set three of the walls as High/Shed ton to open the Roof Plane
Gable walls on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog for that roof
Specification dialog and automati- plane.
cally generate a roof. The initial pitch
does not matter. Tiling the floor plan 3. Change the Pitch from 4 in 12 to 0 in 12
to flatten the roof.
394
Curved Roof Planes
4. On the General tab, check Curved

Roof. Notice that the angle values are
currently at zero.
5. Change the Angle at eave from zero to 7. Change the Radius to roof surface to a
15 and press the Tab key. Notice that the smaller number, such as 50.
other values update. All three values are
interrelated and dynamic. Changing one
changes the others. In order to maintain
the underlying 0 in 12 pitch (the chord
of the curved roof), the other end of the
roof plane must compensate.
A radius of 50 could not be achieved unless

the walls were closer together. The curved
roof plane accepts the minimum radius,
6. Change the Angle at Ridge from -15 which is 116.5.
degrees to -45 degrees.
Curving Two Roof Planes
You can also create a barrel roof using two
roof planes. We’ll use the same basic 24' x
18' plan we used before, designate the two
Roofs
opposite walls as gable walls, and generate a

gable with a 12 in 12 (45 degree) pitch. The
12 in 12 pitch often underlies curved roofs
395
because it allows the curved roof to be nearly

vertical at the eave and nearly flat at its peak.
To curve two roof planes
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 12 in 12 pitch.
4. In floor plan view, select both roof

planes and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Roof Plane
2. Select one of the roof planes in floor
plan view and click the Open Object 5. Set the Angle at ridge to 0 and click
OK.
edit button to open the Roof Plane
Specification dialog for that roof
plane.
3. Check Curved Roof and notice that the
values are the same. Change the Angle
at ridge from 45 to 0. This makes the
roof plane nearly flat at the ridge. The
eave edge has to compensate to maintain
the 12 in 12 pitch.
Notice that the program changed the Angle at Similar results can be achieved using two
Ridge from 0 to 1 so that the eave does not roof planes instead of one. Because the
become vertical at 90°. Curved roofs are not curvature can be set independently for each
allowed to be vertical or inverted. roof plane, using two roof planes allows
more variation.
396
Curved Roof Planes
Compound Curved
Roof Planes
Compound roof planes consisting of two or
more roof planes that merge together can be
defined using curved roofs. To illustrate this,
we’ll produce a flared “Thai” style roof eave
that is almost flat at the eave edge and
merges into an 8 in 12 pitch roof.
To create a compound curved roof
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x

24', set the two end walls as Gable 4. To create the high roof plane, use the
Walls, and automatically generate a roof Roof Plane tool and draw the base-
at a 4 in 12 pitch. line of the roof plane along the top, or
2. Turn on Display Temporary Dimen- ridge edge of the curved roof plane in
floor plan view. The bottom edge of the
sions , select one of the roof planes
new roof plane snaps to the top of the
in floor plan view at its ridge edge and
curved plane.
pull it back so that it is 4 feet from the
wall. Do the same to the other roof 5. Select the two new roof planes, open
plane. them for specification and change their
pitch to 33.6901. Viewed in 3D, the
planes appear to join together into one.
3. Select both roof planes in floor plan

view and check Curved Roof in the
Roof Plane Specification dialog.
Set the Angle at Ridge to 33.6901, Upper roof planes with pitch set (using
which is the same as 8 in 12. Notice that degrees) to match the ridge edge pitch
the Angle at Eave is almost flat. of the lower curved roof planes
Roofs
397
Dormers
Introductory Training Video: Customiz- extend completely through the width of
ing Dormers the wall.
What’s New In Version X1 Training • Polylines can be converted into a Hole in
Video: Roofs - Dormers Roof/Ceiling that allows walls to extend
above or below the roof line. See “Con-
Dormers can be drawn manually or placed vert Polyline Dialog” on page 150.
automatically using the Auto Dormer tools.
Automatic dormers reside by default on their Auto Floating Dormer
own layer, “Auto Dormers”. See “Layer
Introductory Training Video: Auto
Floating Dormers
Manually Drawn Dormers Classroom Design Project Training
Video: Creating and Copying Auto-
Classroom Design Project Training matic Dormers
Video: Preparing a Roof for Dormers
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating
Once you are familiar with Chief Architect’s Dormer and click the roof plane where
roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be you would like to place the center of the
quite simple. There are several different dormer's front wall.
ways to draw dormers; some methods work
better in certain applications. A variety of All the walls of a floating dormer are cut off
resources are available at www.chiefarchi- at their bottom by the underlying roof plane.
tect.com with information about drawing To produce such a dormer manually, check
dormers manually. There are a few things to Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for the dormer
keep in mind. walls on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. A floating dormer is
• Walls extend upward until they meet an
really a complex skylight, since it sits atop a
overlying roof plane.
hole in the roof just as a skylight does.
• A wall can also be cut by underlying roof
planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is Usually no room is defined by the walls of
checked on the Roof tab of the Wall this type of dormer. The pictures below show
Specification dialog. For this to work both the outside and inside of a typical
properly, the edge of the roof plane must floating dormer.
398
Dormers
Auto Dormer
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click the roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet a knee wall on either side on the
back of the dormer. This knee wall must run
parallel to the underlying roof plane.
• If you are creating a (non-floating) auto
dormer, a knee wall must already exist.
The dormer side walls run back to the
knee wall and the knee wall is broken
where the dormer walls meet it.
• The knee wall does not have to be desig-
nated as such on the Roof tab of the Wall
A floating dormer can be placed in floor plan Specification dialog unless you are
view on the same floor where its underlying generating an automatic roof.
roof plane displays, or it can be placed on the
floor above. Which floor it should be on does • A non-floating dormer must always be
not depend on which floor the underlying created on the same floor as the knee
roof plane is on, but you must always click walls.
within this roof plane in floor plan view to
create the dormer. Normally it does not
matter what floor the dormer is on, but it may
need to be on a certain floor so that the
dormer walls do not interfere with walls or
railings in the room below it. To do this, it
may help to display the underlying roof plane
on the appropriate floor using the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See “Roof
Plane Specification Dialog” on page 424.
If the dormer is defined on the floor above
and the room below has a flat ceiling, then
defining a room, which is automatically
Open Below, causes a hole to be produced in
Roofs
the ceiling under the dormer.
399
buttons or via the Default Settings dialog.

See “Dormer Defaults” on page 432.
Editing Dormers
Auto dormers are like other objects in Chief
Architect. They can be selected and edited in
a variety of ways. See “Editing Auto
Dormers” on page 407.
Dormer Defaults
The initial width, height, roof style and other
parameters for Auto Dormers are set in the
Dormer Defaults dialog, accessed by
double clicking either of the Auto Dormer
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane The first two are called Gable and Hip
that connects to the low side of a gable roof returns, since the return itself ends in a gable
overhang and extends below the upper or a hip. The third is called a Full return
triangular portion of the gable wall. The because it extends under the entire gable,
pictures below show examples of the three connecting both sides.
styles of roof returns that can be produced
automatically.
400
Displaying Roof Planes
Gable Return Hip Return Full Return
It is not difficult to manually draw roof Specification dialog only if roofs are
returns using small roof planes, but it is automatically generated. See “Roof Tab” on
quicker to produce them automatically. page 263.
The Roof tab of the Wall Specification These roof return settings are also found in
dialog contains the settings that generate auto the Dormer Specification dialog for
roof returns on gable walls. A gable wall is gable roof dormers and function similarly.
specified on the Roof tab of the Wall See “General Tab” on page 430.
Displaying Roof Planes

Roof planes are drawn on the Roof Planes
layer by default. In addition, you can also
choose to display roof baseline polylines,
frieze molding, gutters, gable lines, the
overhang area, roof openings, and valley 1
truss bases. See “Layer Display Options
Following is a portion of a hip roof shown in 2
floor plan view: 3
4
5
Roofs
401
1 The eave is represented by a dashed 4 This is the upslope mark, which

line. displays with the baseline and marks
the “up” direction for this roof plane. The
2 The distance from the outer main layer angle of the slope is controlled by the pitch
of the wall to the end of the eave is the
defined in the Build Roof dialog.
overhang. It is defined in the Build Roof
dialog.
5 Roof planes are drawn on the Roof
Planes layer in the Layer Display
3 The baseline of the roof plane is Options dialog. See “Layer Display
normally located over the outer main
Options Dialog” on page 218.
layer of the wall. Typically the line is green.
If the Roof Planes layer is turned off and
When you automatically generate roofs, the
Auto Rebuld Roofs feature is turned on,
program constructs the baselines.
changes made to the plan that cause the roof
The baseline is defined as the line across the to rebuild will not automatically turn on the
top of the rafters, directly above a wall’s display of the roof planes. See “Auto Rebuild
outside main layer. It can be used as pivot for Roofs” on page 386.
the roof plane as you alter the pitch.
Editing Roof Planes

heights can be specified or locked and used
When the roof plan is correct, roof as a pivot point. Pitch determines the slope
planes can be locked to prevent acci- of the roof plane. See “Roof Plane
dental changes. The Build Roof dialog has a Specification Dialog” on page 424.
Lock Roof Planes check box to prevent acci-
dental rebuilding. You can also protect roof The shape of a roof plane can be edited with
planes from accidental changes by locking the mouse in the same way that a CAD
the Roof Planes layer in all layer sets. See polyline is edited. See “Editing Closed-
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page 218.
A selected roof plane can be edited in 2D and
3D using edit handles, edit toolbar buttons,
Adding a Step to an Edge
and the Roof Plane Specification dialog. You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a
In the Roof Plane Specification dialog, roof plane by selecting it, clicking the Break
the 3D orientation of a roof plane is defined Line edit button and then clicking on the
by three height values and one pitch value. roof edge. See “Break Line” on page 130.
The Ridge/Top, Baseline, and Fascia Top
402
Editing Roof Planes
When Bumping/Pushing is enabled and

CAD Stops Move is checked in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog, a roof plane
will bump against another roof plane, CAD
or CAD based object as it is moved. Roof
planes cannot push these objects, however.
See “Bumping/Pushing” on page 124.
Joining Roof Planes

Video: Drawing and Connecting Roof
Planes
Aligning Roof Edges
Two roof planes can be joined at
After moving a corner edit handle, it may be adjacent edges in both 2D and 3D
difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave using the Join Roof Planes edit button. To
or a wall. Use the Make Parallel/ use this tool, you must first identify which
Perpendicular edit button to align a roof edges of the roof planes can extend to meet at
plane edge with a wall, another roof plane a ridge, hip, or valley. The program will try
edge, or another object with a straight edge. to join the two planes along the line where
See “Using Make Parallel/ Perpendicular” on they intersect whenever possible.
page 126.
To use Join Roof Planes
If opposite sides of a roof section are
parallel, selecting one edge automati- 1. Select a roof plane on the edge to be
cally gives you a dimension line. If you do not joined to another plane.
see that dimension line, the sides are not par-
allel.
2. Click the Join Roof Planes edit but-
ton or press the 2 key.
Sometimes, what appears to be a single,
straight roof plane edge may actually be 3. Click on a second roof plane on the edge
broken into two or more edges, which can that should join to the selected edge of
affect your ability to align the edge properly. the first plane.
A single edge will have three edit handles; if If the roof planes are not close enough, or
more than three display, more than one edge their shape is not correct, you may need to
is present. An extra handle can be removed align their edges, remove extra edges, or
removed manually by dragging it into an move them closer.
adjacent handle. You can also use Build>
Roofs
When roof planes adjust, the program joins
Roof> Fix Roofs . See “Fix Roofs” on the planes at the proper location and the
page 386. adjacent edges extend or contract to remain
connected. If the joining of the two will
403
completely eliminate or reverse an adjacent Change Roof Pitch

edge, the connection cannot be made. or Height Dialog
Move to be Coplanar
1
The Move to be Coplanar edit button
allows you to move the selected roof
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with
the next selected roof plane. You can use this
tool in both 2D and 3D views. The results 2
can be easily seen in a cross section view.
The two roof planes must have parallel
baselines for this to work.
3
Raising/Lowering 4 6
Roof Planes 5
Roof planes can be raised or lowered in the This warning dialog displays when you
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Begin attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a
by locking the Pitch, then change the value roof plane near the edge of another roof
of the Baseline Height. See “General Tab” plane that does not match vertically. The
on page 424. Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog
You can also raise or lower roof plane gives you the option to move the roof plane
heights in the Transform/Replicate vertically, or pivot it about a point and
Object dialog. See “Transform/Replicate change the pitch.
Object Dialog” on page 144. In this case, the current roof plane would
have to raise its pitch or height in order to
meet the second roof plane at the corner that
you moved.
1 The amount of vertical displacement

between the two roof planes.
Pivot Roof Plane About - Select
2
which part of the roof plane to use as
pivot point when pitch is adjusted to meet the
other roof plane.
3 Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this

option to maintain the current pitch and
raise or lower the entire plane to connect the
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the
walls below.
404
Editing Curved Roof Planes
4 To prevent this dialog from displaying,

check Don’t show again during this If the roof plane baseline is moved in
session. The dialog does not display again floor plan view, its height does not
until you have terminated and restarted the change. This means that moving a roof plane
program. baseline toward the ridge lowers the roof
plane.
5 Click Yes to make the selected change
so the roofs meet. The roof plane either The baseline angle can be set in the Roof
changes pitch or is raised or lowered. Plane Specification dialog. See “Roof
Plane Specification Dialog” on page 424.
6 Click NO to leave the roof plane
unchanged. The roof planes will not
meet vertically. You should usually choose Deleting Roof Planes
No unless you have a specific reason to Delete the entire roof quickly by clicking the
adjust the roof plane this way.
Delete Roof Planes tool.
Changing the You can also select any roof plane or group
Baseline Angle of roof planes, then press the Delete key or
A roof plane baseline can be selected like click the Delete edit button to delete it
any line and edited. If the baseline coincides from the plan.
with a roof edge then select that roof edge The Delete Objects dialog allows
and press the Tab key to select the baseline. you to delete all roof planes at once.
The status bar tells you when the roof plane See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 141.
baseline is selected.
Editing Curved Roof Planes

Classroom Design Project Training all four planes and curve them by the same
Video: Drawing and Connecting Roof amount. Since the distance from the eave to
Planes the ridge and the pitch is the same for all
planes, the newly curved planes still join to
Curved roof planes can be joined with
each other in 3D.
flat roof planes and other curved roof
planes using the Join Roof Planes edit
button.
Often it is not necessary to join curved roof
planes if the underlying normal planes were Roofs
already joined. A simple four wall
rectangular house is a good example. On a
default hip roof, all flat roof planes are
correctly joined at hip ridges. Group select
405
To join curved and flat roof planes
1. Select one of the roof plane edges to be

joined.
2. Click the Join Roof Planes edit but-

ton and click the joining edge of an adja-
cent roof plane. The roof plane edges
If one of the planes is curved differently from join into a curve, showing where the
the others or is flat, it no longer joins with the curved and flat roof planes must meet.
other planes in 3D, although it may display
to in floor plan view. This can be easily seen
if one of the four roof planes remains flat.
This is called the curved join edge for each

roof plane. Notice that a flat roof plane can
406
Editing Auto Dormers
have a curved join edge if it is joined to a

2. Click Join Roof Planes .
curved roof plane.
3. Click anywhere in the plan, away from
Curved Join Edges any roof plane. The curved edge returns
to straight, and is selectable and edit-
A roof plane with one or more curved join able.
edges is less editable than one without them.
The curved edges and corners adjacent to
them can be selected, but not moved. If you
move an edge adjacent to a curved join edge,
the curved join edge extends or contracts
appropriately to maintain the corner.
Before curving roof planes or joining the
edges of any curved plane, make sure all flat
roof planes are joined as well as possible.
After this you can curve the roof planes and
then make any curved join edges.
The Join Roof Planes tool can be used

to update curved join edges that have been
changed in some way.
To remove a curved join edge
1. Select the curved join edge.
Editing Auto Dormers

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that Move handle displays over the front wall and
behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it allows you to relocate the dormer. Two resize
displays edit handles you can use to resize handles display on the side walls and allow
and relocate it. you to change the width of the dormer.
If you click the Explode Dormer edit

button, the dormer’s individual components
can be edited. Roofs
Using the Mouse

When selected in floor plan view, an auto Move Resize
dormer displays three edit handles. The
407
There are some things to keep in mind when its width stays fixed. If a change to the
editing auto dormers and auto floating dormer makes its front wall too short to hold
dormers using the mouse. the window, the window reverts to auto
• Dormers move at 90 degree angles unless width.
the Ctrl key is pressed before moving
them. Using the
• The dormer must be contained within one Specification Dialog
underlying roof plane. Auto dormers can be selected, opened for
• Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond specification, and edited. See “Dormer
the required knee wall. Specification Dialog” on page 429.
Editing the Window Exploding Dormers

Dormer windows can be selected, edited, Click the Explode Auto Dormer edit
deleted and replaced just as other windows button to explode the auto dormer into
can. See “Editing Windows” on page 336. its component parts. The dormer walls, roof
You can place several windows in the front planes, window, and hole in the roof/ceiling
wall. can be edited individually.
Unless the dormer's window has been edited The program treats roof planes over an
or changed in the Window Specification exploded anto dormer as though they were
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its manually drawn, allowing you to protect
width changes automatically to fill the front them from being rebuilt in the Build Roof
dormer wall. If the window has been edited, dialog. See “Build Tab” on page 417.
Locating Roof Plane Intersections

When roof planes of differing slopes To find a roof plane intersection
meet,they create a ridge, hip, or valley. While
1. Select the roof plane you would like to
the Join Roof Planes edit button is
place meeting points on.
normally used to move edges to make the
planes meet, these edges can also be moved 2. Click the edge of another roof plane to
by placing snap points where the ridge, hip project this edge forward in space and
or valley should be. Once you know where place an “X” where it would meet the
the planes will meet, you can drag edges or selected roof plane.
corners to those points, joining the roof 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the ridge edge
planes. and both fascia edges. You should have
three points located on the larger roof
plane, the “tie-in” points.
408
Ceiling Planes
roof plane
intersections
marked with
an “X”
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are similar to roof planes.
They are drawn the same way and edited
using the same tools. They are useful for
creating custom sloped ceilings.
To draw a ceiling plane
1. Open the Build Roof dialog and reset

the Pitch using a shallower angle. A
newly drawn ceiling plane takes its ini-
Ceiling planes
tial pitch from this setting.
2. Select Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane .

3. Click and drag along the baseline.
4. Click upslope to place the ceiling plane.
Cross Section showing ceiling planes.
There are a few things to remember when

Roofs
drawing ceiling planes.
• The baseline of a ceiling plane should be
drawn along and directly on top of the
409
outer surface of the wall main layer. This • Ceiling planes can be curved, just like
allows the ceiling plane to extend over roof planes. See “Curved Roof Planes”
and be supported by the wall. on page 394.
• The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling • Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
plane should butt to the inside of the wall.
Object edit button to access the
• Ceiling planes act independent of the roof Ceiling Plane Specification dialog.
planes above. See “Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog”
• Normally the pitch of a ceiling plane on page 428.
should be lower than the pitch of the cor-
responding roof plane. Displaying Ceiling Planes
• Ceiling planes can be joined together Ceiling planes have their own layer in the
using the Join Roof Planes edit but- Layer Display Options dialog. The
ton. display settings can be set here by layer. The
ceiling planes layer can also be locked to
• Ceiling planes should be created over prevent editing. See “Displaying Objects” on
rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room page 221.
unchecked in the Room Specification
dialog. If this is unchecked, ceiling
Deleting Ceiling Planes
planes must be present in order to build
roof trusses in this area. Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes
to delete all ceiling planes in the current plan.
Gable/Roof Line
The Gable/Roof Line tool has a used to draw a line that defines the width of
variety of uses. Its primary purpose is the gable.
to mark the location of a partial gable
condition along a wall. It can also be used to Note: You can break a wall and define only
ignore alcoves when automatically part of it as gable. This produces similar
generating roofs. results to using the Gable/Roof Line tool. If
this method is used, once the roof is correct
and locked, the wall should be restored as
Creating Gable Walls one continuous wall. Chief Architect functions
and Gable Dormers better if long walls are single units instead of
broken into multiple components.
If an entire wall supports a gable end, the
wall should be defined as a Full Gable wall
on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification The Gable/Roof Line tool can also be
dialog. If only a portion of the wall is a gable, used to place a small gable within a roof
plane, as in the case of a dormer. This
then the Gable/Roof Line tool can be process can be automated using the Gable
410
Gable/Roof Line
Over Door/Window edit button. See

“Gable Over Door/Window” on page 415.
Gable lines should be outside the wall,
within the first 18" (450 mm). If the gable
line is placed on the wall it does not work.
Position a gable line of the correct length to
represent the portion of wall that supports a
gable roof. The length of the gable line
determines the gable width at the wall main
layer, not at the overhang. At the roof edge, a
gable roof is wider than the gable line by To get the right length, draw gable
twice the overhang distance. lines over existing exterior walls,
Since the gable line is a CAD line, it can be snapping ends to the wall main
selected and modified using the Line layer. It can then be moved so that
the gables on each side match.
Specification dialog. See “Line
partial gable wall
gable dormers
Gable/roof lines drawn to create

Before, with default roof generation gable wall and two small gables
Roofs
411
Before, with default roof generation
Result, after automatic roof generation

Gable/roof lines drawn to extend roof planes
Covering Alcoves
A gable line can also be used to maintain a
roof plane baseline where there is no wall
below. For example, a house may have a
large alcove and you want the roof plane to
extend across the alcove, rather than wrap
into it. A gable line drawn across the alcove
causes roof planes to span across the alcove
when roofs are automatically generated. The
program models a hip in that area. When
extending roof planes across alcoves, the
gable/roof line must be drawn inline with the
wall’s main layer. Result, after automatic roof generation
412
Gable/Roof Line
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy and Transform/
Replicate Object edit buttons allow you
to make multiple copies of a selected gable
line at defined increments, as shown in the
following illustration. The leftmost gable
line was created, then three copies were
made at 8 foot increments.
Before, with default roof generation

original copies
With roof lines added
Creating Roof Lines
The Gable/Roof Line tool can also be

used to create roof lines where there are no
walls or railings. A roof line is created the
same as a gable line, but has a different name
because of its usage. A roof line drawn
across space generates a hip roof. If several
roof lines are combined, they must be
attached to each other, forming a non-closed
Roofs
polyline in order to automatically produce Result, after automatic roof generation
one set of roof plane baselines. Both free
ends of the roof line or polyline must meet a
wall at the main layer to produce roof planes.
413
Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting Editing Skylights
Build> Roof> Skylight and drawing a
rectangular polyline within a single roof Select the skylight and click the Open
plane. This single operation places a flat Object edit button to open the Roof
panel skylight into a roof hole, produces a Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. See
hole in the flat ceiling platform below, and “Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog”
automatically generates the skylight shaft on page 432.
between these two holes.
The polyline that defines the shape of the
Note: If Ceiling Over This Room is skylight can be moved and reshaped like a
unchecked in the Room Specification standard polyline, but it must remain
dialog and a sloping ceiling plane is present contained by one roof plane. If you clear the
under the roof plane, then a second hole in Skylight check box in the Roof Hole/
this ceiling plane is automatically produced. Skylight Specification dialog, the curb
This hole is visible, and may be located and glass for the skylight is removed but the
directly under the roof hole. It can be moved
opening remains.
and edited separately.
By default, the flat ceiling hole does not
display separately, but it can be edited
separately, and even deleted from the roof
plane entirely. See “Roof Hole/Skylight
Specification Dialog” on page 432. If the
roof plane is deleted, any holes it contains
are also deleted.
The system maintains the opening as a closed
polyline. The Break Line edit button
forms a joint in an edge of the roof opening
just as it would in a roof plane edge, but does
not sever the edges at the joint.
414
Gutters
Gutters
Gutters can be added to roof planes. They are Gutters go on the “Roofs, Gutters” layer that
generated whenever Build Fascia, Gutters, is locked and not visible in plan view by
Frieze is checked in the Build Roof dialog. default. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
on page 218.
You can select the profile used for gutters on
the Gutter tab of the Build Roof dialog. See
“Gutter Tab” on page 421. Open polylines
should be used for gutter profiles. The start
of the profile should be where the gutter
connects to the roof.
The material used for gutters can be set on
the Material tab of the Build Roof dialog.
See “Materials Tab” on page 422.
Gable Over Door/Window

Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to add a gable line over one
or more selected windows or doors the next
time automatic roof planes are built. The
Gable/Roof line displays in floor plan view,
about 12 inches (300 mm) from the wall and
extending a foot to either side of the opening.
When automatic roofs are built, a small gable
dormer is generated over the window or
door. Once produced, the gable line can be
moved, stretched, and edited.
The Gable Over Door/Window edit

button also places a gable over a group of
Roofs
selected windows and doors, provided they

are all in the same wall and contain no bay or
bow windows. For more information on
415
building roofs over Bay, Bow, and Box To remove the gable line, select the window
windows, see “Bay, Box, Bow Windows & or door and click the Delete Gable Over
Roofs” on page 341.
Opening edit button, or select the gable
A gable line produces a gable only in an area line and click the Delete edit button.
where an eave would otherwise appear. Do
not add this gable line to a wall already If you move or resize the window, the gable
designated as a Gable Wall on the Roof tab line does not update automatically. You can
of the Wall Specification dialog. If a draw a new gable line using the Gable Over
gable is already present, some roof planes Door/Window edit button. This
may fail to produce properly when you automatically deletes the old gable line if it is
generate the roof automatically. If this is the still near the window. If the window has been
case, select the gable line and delete it. relocated significantly, the old gable line
must be selected and deleted manually.
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings

Floor and ceiling platforms do not move or If you do not want the program to rebuild
resize immediately when walls are moved or floors and ceilings automatically, clear the
room floor and ceiling heights are changed. Auto Rebuild Floors & Ceilings check box
When you make a change to your plan that on the Options tab of the 3D Settings
requires the floors and ceilings to be rebuilt, dialog. This may speed up plan view editing
the system detects it. The next time you for very large plans. When you want to
generate a 3D or section/elevation view, rebuild floor and ceiling platforms, you can
floors and ceilings are rebuilt. click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
button or press the F12 key.
Build Roof Dialog

To open the Build Roof dialog, select Use the Build Roof dialog to automatically
Build> Roof> Build Roof. produce roof planes and roof plane baselines.
It also contains initial settings for manually
You can also double-click the Roof Tools drawn roof planes.
button or the Roof Plane button.
416
Build Roof Dialog
Build Tab
1 9
2 10
3 11
4
5 12
6 13
14
7 15
16
8
17
18
19
1 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings - the exterior wall layout. See “Roof Baseline

Check this to construct the floor and Polylines” on page 391.
ceiling platforms of your model. It is
independent of Build Roof Planes. 5 Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze - Check
this to regenerate fascia, gutters, and
2 Build Roof Planes - Check this to build frieze boards. This option also controls the
a new roof structure over the entire generation of automatic roof returns. If you
model. Unless you specify otherwise, the have edited roof planes, you may need to
program discards the existing roof planes select this option to clean up them up. This
and produces new ones. function is automatically invoked after you
manually edit roof planes or draw new roof
3 Make Roof Baseline Polylines - Check planes if Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
this to delete any existing roof and to
ings is checked on the Options tab of the 3D
create roof plane baselines (based on the
Settings dialog.
exterior wall layout and roof information
defined in those walls). Roof baselines can Gutters, fascia, and frieze boards display in
then be edited like CAD polylines to 3D views and the material list. If you do not
customize the roof plan. See “Roof Baseline want gutters built, open the Build Roof
Polylines” on page 391. dialog, select Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze
and then uncheck Gutters on the Options
Roofs
4 Use Existing Roof Baselines - Check tab. The fascia and frieze is rebuilt, but not
this to produce a roof plan based on
the gutters. Any existing gutters are deleted.
your edited roof plane baselines instead of
417
To delete a gutter for a specific roof plane, These values function as the default
select the roof plane. Click the Open Object Overhang for all automatically generated
roof planes. You can override the default
edit button to display the Roof Plane
overhang for a specific roof plane in the
Specification dialog. Clear Gutters and
click OK.
The next time Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze
is selected, the gutter does not display. If you 9 Auto Rebuild Roofs - If you check this
option, the program automatically
delete a roof plane, the gutter remains in 3D
rebuilds the roof if you make a change that
views until you rebuild fascia and gutters.
affects the generation of roofs.
6 Allow Low Roof Planes - This should
nearly always be checked. If 10 Lock Roof Planes to lock the existing
roof plan. This prevents accidental
unchecked, the roof plan underside (soffitt)
selection Build Roof Planes, resulting in the
may not generate correctly. The only case
loss of manual editing.
where you may need to uncheck it is the rare
circumstance when an upper floor overhangs When Lock Roof Planes is selected, roofs
roof planes below. cannot be automatically generated. You must
clear Lock Roof Planes before you can
7 Pitch - Enter a value to describe the select Build Roof Planes.
pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all
newly built roof planes. It does not update Checking Lock Roof Planes automatically
existing roof planes. For a conversion to locks the roof planes layer in the Layer
degrees, see “Roof Pitches in Degrees” on Display Options dialog.
page 433.
11 Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof
8 Roof Overhang - The overhang is Planes and/or Retain Edited Roof
measured from the exterior main layer Planes to retain manually drawn and/or
wall surface horizontally to the end of the top edited roof planes, including roof planes over
of the rafter. It does not include frieze exploded dormers, when the roof planes are
thickness, gutters, sheathing or siding. automatically generated. They are not
deleted, but automatic roof planes may be
Normal is the overhang at the eaves. This is
superimposed on the same area. Select the
always the overhang for a roof plane having
redundant roof planes and delete them.
the default Pitch specified above. If the pitch
for a particular roof plane is set differently in
Once a roof is correct, do not build roof
an exterior wall, its overhang may try to planes again. From that point forward,
maintain its fascia at the same height. only Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings, and per-
Overhang can be greater for a shallower haps Fascia, Gutters, Frieze to keep the
pitch, lesser for a greater pitch. plan updated.
Gable is the overhang dimension at gable

ends or rake walls. 12 Ignore Top Floor - Check this to
ignore the top floor when roofs are
automatically generated. Roofs are generated
418
Build Roof Dialog
as if the floor were attic having no permanent .

walls. This is most useful in producing a roof Note: If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off
for a house that has only dormers for its top Plate is set to zero, the program generates a
floor windows, such as a cape style house. birdsmouth cut. To eliminate the birdsmouth
cut, you must set Raise Off Plate to at least 1/
16” (1 mm).
13 Check Trusses to have the roof raised
so that the bottom edge of the truss top
chord (rafter) is flush with the top of the 15 Same Roof Height at External Walls -
wall. You must Build Roof Planes after When you change the pitch of a roof, it
checking Trusses for this change to take pivots on the baseline at the outer surface of
effect. the wall. This means that if you have a plan
with roof pitches that vary, you must choose
Incorrect--Trusses between having the same roof height over the
is not checked.
top plate or having the same overhang all
around.
Check Same Roof Height at External
Correct--Trusses Walls to keep the walls the same height and
is checked. change the amount of overhang. It ignores
any overhang values you entered on the Roof
tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
Uncheck this option to allow some roof
planes to raise off the plate. All overahngs
When Trusses is checked, the size of the roof
are then the same unless they are set to the
rafter framing is the Top Chord size from
value entered in the Roof Tab of the Wall
the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog.
When Trusses is cleared, the size of the roof
framing is the Rafter size from the Roof tab 16 Same Height Eaves - The eave edges
of an independent roof plane meet
the Framing dialog. If trusses are laid out
gables at both ends, or they are part of a set
without selecting the Trusses box, the roof
of adjacent roof planes with the same pitch
uses the rafter size instead. The “Incorrect”
that meet gables at both ends. In order to
diagram shows this problem.
have the correct overhang and the correct
14 Raise Off Plate - Enter a positive value height over the plate, the vertical distance
in this field to produce the trusses with between the eave edge and the top plate can
an energy heel to allow for more insulation. vary for these planes.
The dimension is measured from the top
Check Same height Eaves to keep this
plate up the outside main layer of the wall to
vertical distance the same for all roof planes,
the bottom side of the top chord.
independent or not. This only affects
Roofs
independent roof planes. Other planes will

all have the same eave to plate top vertical
distance.
419
17 Segment Angle at Curved Wall - Following is an example showing this

Enter the maximum angle for a roof difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" wide
segement that covers a curved wall. This alcove requires a change in the roof line.
value is only used when roofs are Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the
automatically generated. A smaller angle right, the alcove is less than the 36"
produces more roof planes. minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
18 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum

width of an alcove (depression into an
otherwise straight exterior wall). Any alcove
less than the specified width is treated as
though the exterior wall continues straight
across. Alcoves that measure wider than this
value are not roofed over; they cause a
change in roof planes. 19 Click the Num Style button to change
the way numbers display in the dialog.
Changes made here do not affect the plan.
Options Tab
1 5
2
3
1 Show all ridges - Select the check box planes forming the conical roof above a
to display a line along all ridges and curved wall.
valleys in elevations and vector 3D views.
This includes the hip ridges between roof 2 Boxed eaves - Select the check box if
you want to create horizontal soffits at
420
Build Roof Dialog
the eaves. You can also change this for an

4 Fascia Width (at gable or rake walls),
individual roof plane in the Roof Plane Eave Fascia Width - Enter values to
Specification dialog. define the width of the material that displays
in 3D views. This value does not go to the
3 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select Material List.
either option to determine how the
rafter tails are cut. This change displays only
5 This section defines whether or not
after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof these items are calculated for the
planes can have this defined in their own material list. Selecting the check box does
Roof Plane Specification dialog. not control the display in 3D except for Gut-
ters.
Gutter Tab
1 Click the Select button to open the or bottom of the gutter profile. See
Library Browser to the Moldings and “Moldings Tab” on page 545.
Profiles library and select a gutter profile.
Click Default to use the default gutter
profile.
2 Set the Height, Width, and Offset

Roofs
from the top of the fascia for the gutter.

Select From Top or From Bottom to specify
whether the Offset is measured from the top
421
Frieze Tab
1
2
3
1 Click the drop-down list to select from 3 The current molding profile displays
the moldings used in the current plan. here. Set the Height, Width, and
Offset from the top of the fascia for the
2 Click the Add New button to select a frieze molding.
new molding profile from the Library
Browser. Select From Top or From Bottom to specify
whether the Offset is measured from the top
Click the Select button to replace the current
or bottom of the frieze profile. See
molding with another molding from the
“Moldings Tab” on page 545
Library Browser.
Click the Delete button to remove the curent Materials Tab
molding.
For information about using the Materials
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog

Like walls, each line of a roof baseline Select any edge of a roof baseline polyline
polyline contains roof directives that affect click the Open Object edit button open
automatic roof generation. the Roof Baseline Specification dialog.
422
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
Roof Baseline Tab
3
1
2 4
1 The first four checkboxes, Full Gable Check Display One Floor Up/Down for
Wall, High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee Editing to display the selected roof baseline
Wall, and Extend Slope Downward are the on an adjacent floor. An upper or lower floor
same as the first four items in the Roof tab of must be present to enable this option.
the Wall Specification dialog.
5 Click the Num Style button to change
2 Against Wall - Check this if the roof the way numbers display in the dialog.
plane rising from this baseline butts Changes made here do not affect the plan.
against an exterior wall. This is similar to
checking High Shed/Gable Wall. Polyline Tab
The Pitch, 2nd Pitch and Starts at entries are For information about the Polyline tab, see
the same those in the Wall Specification “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
page 387. Selected Line Tab
3 Pitch - Change the pitch for the For information about the Selected Line tab,
selected roof plane baseline. This see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
overrides the default pitch set in the Build
Roof dialog. For a conversion to degrees,
Line Style Tab
see “Roof Pitches in Degrees” on page 433.
For information about the Line Style tab, see
4 Baseline height holds the height of the “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
baseline. This is the top of rafter height
where it crosses the baseline. Changing the
Roofs
pitch or secon dpitch affects the line that was Fill Style Tab
selected in the baseline. Changing the height For information about the Fill Style tab, see
affects all lines in the baseline polyline. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
423
Roof Plane Specification Dialog

What’s New In Version X1 Training Select one or more roof planes and click the
Video: Roofs - Automatic Overhangs Open Object edit button to open the
for Different Pitch Roof Planes Roof Plane Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 4
5
3
1 Locking any one of the first three If you lock the pitch and change one of the
values defines that value as the pivot other values, the roof plane moves vertically,
point for the plane. Each of these dimensions keeping the same slope. It does not pivot.
is measured from the first floor default
For a conversion to degrees, see “Roof
elevation of 0' - 0".
Pitches in Degrees” on page 433.
424
2 There are four values that define the 4 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth
height, or 3D orientation of a roof for the selected roof plane. The default
plane: Ridge/Top, Baseline, Fascia Top and rafter depth for the roof is set in the
Pitch. These values are interrelated. When Framing dialog. To set the rafter depth to
one value changes, others change as well, the default, type a “d” in this field.
unless locked.
Birdsmouth Depth - The plumb or vertical
Changing these values does not affect the 2D depth of the birdsmouth cut is shown for
representation of the roof plane. reference; it cannot be edited directly. To
change it, move the roof plane up or down or
Define a new value for the Ridge/Top of the
change the pitch. For example, if you lock
selected roof plane.
the pitch and raise the roof plane by one inch,
Define a new Baseline height. you decrease the birdsmouth depth by one
inch.
Define a new height for the Fascia Top.
The birdsmouth width is determined by the
Change the Pitch for the selected roof plane.
width of the top plate
This overrides the default pitch set in the
Build Roof dialog. Birdsmouth is zero if this roof plane was
automatically gernated and the Trusses (No
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch
Birdsmouth) check box was checked in the
value in degrees. Values between -80 and 80
Build Roof dialog.
degrees are acceptable.
The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined by
3 Set the baseline angle. A positive value measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The
makes the baseline tilt upward from its
degree of pitch affects this value. The greater
start point. A negative value causes it to tilt
the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth.
downward. The wall top under this baseline
tilts with it. Top of Plate is shown for reference. It is
defined by the ceiling height for the room.
Roofs
The baseline height is specified at the start or
end of the baseline using the Start and End Overhang from Baseline is shown for
radio buttons. In floor plan view, the baseline reference and cannot be edited here.
direction is clockwise around the house.
425
5 Check Curved Roof to curve the values are interrelated and dynamic.
selected roof plane(s). Changing one changes the others. In order to
maintain the underlying pitch (the chord of
A flat roof plane oriented horizontally has an
the curved roof), the other values must
angle of zero at both the ridge and the eave.
compensate.
It also has a radius of zero. You can enter the
Angle at eave, the Angle at ridge, or the
6 Click the Num Style button to change
Radius to roof surface and press the Tab the way numbers display in the dialog.
key to update the other values. All three Changes made here do not affect the plan.
Options Tab
1
4
2 5
6
3
1 Specify the rafter tails to be Square Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected roof
Cut or Plumb Cut here. This overrides plane contains more than one eave, check
the setting on the Options tab of the Build this box to box the higher eaves as well. You
Roof dialog. can specify the Length of the boxed eaves or
check Default to Overhang to extend the
2 Boxed Eave - Specify boxed or sloping boxed eave from the edge of the roof to the
eaves. This overrides the setting on the
exterior main layer of the wall, covering the
Options tab of the Build Roof dialog.
overhang area.
426
rebuild roofs from the Build Roof dialog,

check Retain Edited Roof Planes to prevent
these marked planes from being deleted.
Checking Mark as Edited also marks a roof
plane, even if it has not been edited. Edited
planes can also be unmarked.
Polyline Tab
With Boxed Eave checked
For information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 863.
Selected Line Tab

For information about the Selected Line tab,
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
Line Style Tab

With Higher Eaves Boxed checked “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
3 Display this Plane One Floor Up/ Fill Style Tab

Down - Check one of these to change
the floor where this roof plane displays in For information about the Fill Style tab, see
floor plan view. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
4 Gable Fascia - The width of a fascia on Materials Tab

a gable end. The default is 7 1/2”. If
you want to change this value, remove the For information about the Materials tab, see
checkmark from Default. To return to “Materials Tab” on page 710.
default, replace the checkmark.
Eave Fascia Width - The width of fascia on
the eaves. The default is 7 1/2”. If you want
to change this value, remove the checkmark
from Default. To return to default, replace
the checkmark.
5 Gutter - Uncheck this to remove

gutters from the selected roof plane.
Roofs
6 Mark as Edited - When you select a

roof plane and move or reshape it, the
system marks it as “edited.” When you
427
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Ceiling
Plane Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 3
The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog Bottom at ridge - Set the highest point on
is similar to the Roof Plane the underside of the ceiling plane.
Inside Bottom - Set the height of the ceiling
plane underside at the inside surface of the
1 There are four values that define the wall main layer. If the bottom of the plane
height, or 3D orientation of a ceiling does not rest on a wall, this is the underside
plane: Bottom at Ridge, Inside Bottom, height at the lowest point on the ceiling
Outside Bottom and Pitch. These values are plane.
interrelated. Changing one changes the
Outside Bottom - This is available only if
others. Select one radio button to the right to
the ceiling plane was drawn over a wall. This
lock that value. Each of these dimensions is
value is of the height the ceiling rafter lower
measured from the first floor elevation of 0' -
edge would have at the outer main layer of
0". Changing these values does not affect the
the wall if it were not clipped. This value
2D representation of the ceiling plane.
428
Dormer Specification Dialog
plus Clip End should be within 1/16" of the distance from the baseline to the inside main
Top of Plate value. layer surface. Typically this is the thickness
of the main wall layer.
Pitch - Change the pitch for the selected
ceiling plane. For a conversion to degrees, Clip End - This shows the amount the
see “Roof Pitches in Degrees” on page 433. ceiling rafter must be clipped at its lower end
to rest on the wall top plate. It is available
Pitch in degrees - Select the check box to
only for ceiling planes drawn over a wall.
display the pitch value in degrees.
2 Check Curved Roof to curve the Polyline Tab

selected ceiling plane(s).
A flat ceiling plane oriented horizontally has “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
an angle of zero at both the ridge and the
eave. It also has a radius of zero. You can Selected Line Tab
enter the Angle at eave, the Angle at ridge,
or the Radius to roof surface and press the For information about the Selected Line tab,
Tab key to update the other values. All three see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
values are interrelated and dynamic.
Changing one changes the others. Line Style Tab
3 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth For information about the Line Style tab, see
for the selected ceiling plane. “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Vertical Rafter Depth - This is defined by
measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The Fill Style Tab
degree of pitch affects this value; the greater For information about the Fill Style tab, see
the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Top of Plate - This is shown for reference. It
is defined by the ceiling height for the room. Materials Tab
Overhang from inside bottom - This is For information about the Materials tab, see
available only when the ceiling plane was “Materials Tab” on page 710.
created over a wall. It is the horizontal

Select a dormer and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Dormer
Roofs
429
General Tab
1 6
2 7
3 8
9
10
4
11
1 Specify the Roof Type above this Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel,
dormer. You can choose from Hip, Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow.
Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved Eave,

Hip Curved Eave, and Eyebrow dormer roof types
2 Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof Initially, the default dormer pitch matches the
planes. roof pitch for all dormer roof types except
430
Shed, which has a default 3 in 12 pitch. For flat. The top dormer window casing is
Gambrel and Mansard types, this applies to usually close to this height.
the lowest, or eave, roof planes.
Unlike other dormer types, shed dormer
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch height is measured from the same bottom
in degrees. point to where the underside of the dormer
rafter meets the dormer front wall interior.
3 The Second Pitch specifies the upper
roof of a Gambrel, Mansard, curved
8 Height to Reach Existing shows the
eave, and hip curved eave. Specify the difference between the dormer height
Distance In from the lower roof plane eave where the inside of the wall meets the
to where the upper roof plane starts. underside of the roof and the ceiling of the
room behind it.
4 Plumb or Square cut eaves can be
specified for dormer roof planes, as
9 Width is measured between the outside
well as Gutters and Boxed Eaves. surfaces of the dormer side walls.
Check Include Frieze to include frieze Form Room Inside Dormer is used only for
boards on this dormer. floating dormers and creates a flat ceiling in
the dormer. If you check this option, you
5 Overhang, Fascia Depth for gable should define the dormer on the floor above
fascia, Eave Fascia Depth and Rafter
the room it is positioned over. If this room
Depth can also be set.
has a flat ceiling, checking this option makes
6 The Wall Type for the dormer walls is a hole in the ceiling under the dormer. This
set here. option should normally be left unchecked.
7 The Height is measured from where the 10 If Set Inside Window Trim Width is
top of the underlying roof plane meets checked, the inside casing width for
the dormer front wall exterior to where the dormer windows defaults to the Inside
underside of the dormer rafter meets the Window value entered below. Dormer
dormer side wall interior. windows can appear too narrow on the
outside due to the space required for the
inside casing to clear the inside surfaces of
the side walls. This value sets the width for
the inside casing of the dormer window.
Dormer
height 11 Roof Returns can be specified only for
gable dormers. See “Roof Returns” on
page 400.
Dashed line indicates
interior dormer side wall. Line Style Tab
Roofs
This top height is called the dormer ceiling For information about the Line Style tab, see
height, even if the ceiling in the dormer is not “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
431
Dormer Defaults
The settings in the Dormer Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings... to open
dialog determine the initial settings for
the Default Settings dialog. Select
dormers and are the same as those in the
Dormer and click the Edit... button to open
Dormer Specification dialog. See
the Dormer Defaults dialog.
“Dormer Specification Dialog” on page 429.
You can also double-click either of the Auto
Dormer tools to open the Dormer
Defaults dialog.
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

General Tab 2 Frame Width and Frame Height -
Define the width and height of the
frame or curb of the skylight.
3 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines

1 the shape of the skylight well where it
2 passes through the roof plane.
Square Sides - The framing for the skylight
is square to the pitch of the roof.
Plumb Sides - The framing for the skylight
3 is plumb.
Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is plumb,
the top edge square.
4
5 4 Skylight Automatically Generates
Ceiling Hole- Select this option to
automatically generate and maintain the
skylight hole in a flat ceiling.
1 Skylight - Check this box to specify Note: Holes automatically produced in a

this polyline as a skylight. If you sloping custom ceiling plane by a new sky-
uncheck this box, the curb and glass for the light must be manually maintained.
skylight are removed but the opening
remains. 5 Manually Edit Ceiling Hole Polyline -
Select this option to edit the flat ceiling
hole polyline manually. Click OK to return to
432
Roof Pitches in Degrees
floor plan view and edit the ceiling hole Line Style Tab
polyline. When this option is selected, the
ceiling hole polyline and the skylight can be For information about the Line Style tab, see
selected separately in floor plan view. “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Polyline Tab Fill Style Tab

For information about the Polyline tab, see For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 863. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Selected Line Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Selected Line tab, For information about the Materials tab, see
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Roof Pitches in Degrees
433
434
Chapter 14:
Stairs
Stairs
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Stairs
Local building and fire authorities must
What’s New In Version X1 Training be consulted for specific stair construc-
Video: Stairs tion codes and access requirements.
Staircases can be composed of one or more
straight or curved stair sections and landings Chapter Contents
in any combination. Stair sections can be • Stair Tools
edited individually or as a group. Starter • Anatomy of a Staircase
treads can be defined, stair sections can be • Drawing Stairs
flared, treads can be wrapped, and curved • Creating Curved Stairs
sections can be turned into winders. • Merging Stair Sections
• Displaying Stairs
Landings can be created automatically or • Editing Stairs
manually and their shape customized. You • Winders
can edit an existing landing, or create a • Stair Landings
landing from a closed CAD polyline. • Maintaining Tread Width
Landing heights can be defined or you can let • Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
them automatically adjust as needed. • Starter Treads
Stairwells can be created automatically or • Wrapped Stairs
manually and can be seen in all 3D views. • Other Special Railings & Stairs
Stairs can be drawn, selected and edited in • Creating a Stairwell
3D views. • Rooms Below Staircases
• Staircase Specification Dialog
• Stair Landing Specification Dialog
435
Stair Tools
Select Build> Stairs to access the Stair same floor with a single click of the mouse.
Tools. Click the low side, within a few feet of where
the floor changes height.
Straight Stairs
Curved Stairs
To draw a straight staircase select
Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then Select Build> Stairs> Curve to
click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view. Left or Curve to Right and click
once in floor plan view to place a curved
staircase. For more information about creat-
Click Stairs ing curved stairs, see “Creating Curved
Select Build> Stairs> Click Stairs to Stairs” on page 438.
create stairs between levels on the
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and Rise - The height of a riser.
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", and
Riser - The vertical member of stairs
the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans,
between the treads.
rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run about 250
mm. Run - The width of a stair tread.
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
A good rule of thumb is that rise plus center of the staircase.
run should equal 18" for a comfortable
stair step. Any rise over 7 1/2” is considered Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the
steep regardless of the run. landing floor, that anchors the balusters at
landings.
Balusters - The vertical members that run
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
between the handrail and the treads.
staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on
Tread - The horizontal member of a stair the
the exposed side of stairs below each tread.
foot is placed on.
Landing - The platform connecting two stair
Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used
sections.
where curved or angled stairways change
Newels - The end post of a stair railing direction.
located at landings and the beginnings and
endings of new stair sections.
436
Drawing Stairs
Drawing Stairs
Stairs
Classroom Design Project Training play. See “Reference Display” on page
Video: Creating a Staircase 369.
Classroom Design Project Training • If a stairwell room has been defined on
Video: Drawing Stairs for a Deck the floor above, the top of the stairs can
be dragged until it stops at the railing or
Stairs can be drawn in floor plan and 3D wall defining the stairwell.
views but not in cross section/elevation
views. Stairs can be drawn from the current floor
level downward, however, stairs drawn
To draw straight stairs downward are only aware of the floor height
where they begin. As a result, drawing stairs
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs downward may be useful only for drawing
stairs from a porch or deck down to the
. ground. It is not recommended for drawing
2. Click and drag to create straight stairs. stairs between floors.
To draw stairs going downward
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs
Stairs drawn on one floor in the UP direction .

begin at that floor level and automatically adjust 2. Hold down the Alt key or the right
rise and run to connect with the floor above. mouse button.
3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
There are a few things to keep in mind when
drawing stairs. If the finished grade is known, you can also
create a “room” outside the structure using
• Before stairs are created, make sure that
invisible walls and establish the floor height
the heights for both the lower and upper
for that area to match the finished grade.
floors are correctly defined.
Click Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
• Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should
calculate the floor platform at the lower
be drawn from the lower of the two floors
elevation, then draw a normal staircase in an
they connect.
upward direct from the lower platform up to
• Stairs adjust their riser and tread dimen- the upper platform. The program correctly
sions to connect two floor heights if pos- links the two heights.
sible. The rise and run are calculated so
that the steps are consistent in size.
• If you have the Reference Display

turned on, stairs snap to the reference dis-
437
Creating Curved Stairs

Curved Stairs can be created using the
Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Curve
to Right . Click in your plan to place a 90
+ Alt
degree curved stair section that can then be
edited.
Curved stairs can also be created from a
straight stair section. Once a stair section is
curved, it can be manipulated and edited to
the correct size and position.
To create curved stairs from straight stairs
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs

You can also create curved stairs by drawing
and drag to create a straight stair
section of any length. Straight Stairs against a curved wall.
2. With the stairs selected, hold down the
Alt key (or use the right mouse button)
and drag the end edit handle.
You can also use this method to change
curved stairs to straight stairs.
Straight stairs drawn along a curved wall
Merging Stair Sections

Any combination of straight or curved stair stairs drawn in the UP direction may be
sections can be merged to create a single stair merged, and multiple stairs drawn DOWN
section. The resulting stair section is made may be merged, but combinations of UP and
up of subsections and, if there are no DOWN stairs do not merge.
landings, functions as a single unit.
Stair subsections merge at the center points
Stair subsections must be created in the same of their upper and lower risers.
direction if they are to be merged. Multiple
438
Merging Stair Sections
To merge stair sections
Stairs
1. Position the sections so they are in the
desired relationship to each other.
2. Select either stair section so that its edit
handles display.
3. Click the Extend handle on the end to be
merged and drag it to the point where the Caused by
misalignment
two stairs are to meet.
Merging unaligned stair sections
The recommended method for joining stair

sections at different angles are to use curved
stairs and create winders. See “Winders” on
page 442 and “Curved Stairs” on page 436.
Locked Tread Width

When dragging an Extend handle to lengthen
or shorten a stair section with Lock Tread
Merging parallel stair sections Width selected on the General tab of the
Staircase Specification dialog, the
A staircase consisting of merged subsections length expands or contracts one tread at a
resembles a single stair section in floor plan time. If Lock Tread Width is checked, it can
view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming be difficult to merge the section to another
a single direction arrow. section or landing. If this is a problem, you
When a subsection is clicked, the entire can temporarily uncheck Lock Tread
staircase is selected. Most of the edit handles Width, then after the stairs are merged the
display within the boundaries of the selected tread width can be locked again. See
subsection. See “Using the Mouse” on page “General Tab” on page 459.
441.
Subsections can be joined into a single stair Curved Subsections
section without being aligned. If the stair Stair subsections attached at both ends by
sections are parallel, the selected section other sections do not have a free end that can
moves so that it joins properly with the other. be dragged into a curve. In this situation,
It is possible to merge stair sections that are change the middle sub-section to a curve
not parallel, but they may not merge properly using the Change Line/Arc edit button.
if they are not precisely aligned.
439
If the selected stair section is straight, this 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit
tool makes it curved, and vice versa. button. The center section turns into a
curved stair section.
To curve an enclosed stair subsection
1. Draw three straight stair sections and

connect them end to end.
2. Select the middle subsection.
After using Change Line/Arc
If the curved section does not flow smoothly

into the straight sections, you may need to
make it tangent to its neighboring stair. See
“Using Make Arc Tangent” on page 128.
Select the middle stair subsection
Displaying Stairs
The display of stairs in all views is controlled Although stairs span between two floors,
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See they can only belong to one floor. As a result,
“Displaying Objects” on page 221. only multi-floor views show the upper floor
with the platform opening and the lower
In floor plan view, stairs display on the floor
floor with the staircase simultaneously.
they were drawn on and are only visible from
the floor above if there is a stairwell. To see the center of a stair section curve,
Stairs have an UP arrow on the floor they click Show Arc Centers and Ends . See
were created on and a DN arrow when “Show Arc Centers” on page 102.
viewed from the floor above.
440
Editing Stairs
Editing Stairs
Stairs
Staircases can be selected and edited in floor As with most other objects stairs can be
plan view and 3D views. See “Selecting copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc.
The following edit toolbar buttons may
display on the edit toolbar for selected stairs.
Using the Mouse
When a staircase is selected edit handles open the Staircase Specification
display. These edit handles can be used to dialog. See “Staircase Specification
customize the staircase in many ways. The Dialog” on page 458.
edit handles for stairs are similar to those of
other objects. See “Editing Objects” on page • Click the Components edit button to
79. open the Components dialog for the
selected stairs. See “Components Dialog”
• Straight stair sections are edited like
on page 1014.
lines. They have additional edit handles
for resizing the width of the stair section. • Click the Make Parallel edit button
See “Editing Line Based Objects” on to align the tops, bottoms and sides of
page 95. straight stair sections with another
• Curved stair sections edited like arcs and straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
also include edit handles for resizing the Perpendicular” on page 126.
stair’s width. See “Editing Arc Based
Objects” on page 98. • The Center Object edit button
allows you to center stairs and openings
• When stair sections are merged, the edit
along a room edge. See “Moving
handles display a little differently
depending on what subsection is
currently selected. See “Merging Stair • Stair sections can be flared and treads can
Sections” on page 438. be curved using the Flare/Curve Stairs
• When moving merged stair sections, all edit button. See “Flared Stairs and
merged stair sections also move. Curved Treads” on page 448.
• Several additional edit handles display on • Starter treads can be created using the
a staircase if the Flare/Curve Stairs Starter Tread edit button. See
edit button was used. See “Flared Stairs “Starter Treads” on page 451.
and Curved Treads” on page 448.
• Click the Auto Stairwell edit button
to create a stairwell automatically. See
Using the Edit Toolbar “Creating a Stairwell” on page 456.
A selected staircase can be edited in a variety
of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
441
• Click the Lock Center edit button to Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an
lock the center of selected curved stairs. existing curved wall by aligning their
centers, much the same way that curved
• If a curved stair section is merged with stairs on different floors can be aligned. See
straight sections on both ends, you can “Aligning Objects” on page 126.
use the Make Arc Tangent edit If there is no curved wall, the radius of a stair
button to join the curved section section can be aligned to a CAD arc or circle.
smoothly to the straight sections and also
specify its radius. See “Using Make Arc To align curved stairs to an object
Tangent” on page 128.
1. Align the centers of the CAD object and
Adjusting the Radius the staircase. See “Aligning Objects” on
page 126.
of Curved Stairs
2. Select the curved stairs and move the
The easiest way to match the radius of a stair side nearest to the arc or circle edge
section to the radius of a curved wall is to using the Resize edit handle.
draw a staircase near one side of the curved
Finally, restore the stair width by dragging
wall using the Straight Stairs tool. The from the other side handle or using the Stair
stairs snap to the wall, and the radius of the Specification dialog.
new staircase is defined.
Winders
Classroom Design Project Training To create winders
Video: Drawing Winder Stairs with
Walls Beneath 1. In an enclosed room area, place and con-
nect the stair sections that you want to
Winders are steps located where a staircase
be winders.
turns and are narrower on the inside of the
turn than they are on the outside. A staircase 2. Select any subsection of the stairs and
defined as a winder expands to fill in any click the Open Object edit button to
gaps between the side of the stairs and open the Staircase Specification
nearby walls. Curved stair sections are dialog.
typically used to create winders, although
straight stairs can also be used. 3. On the General tab, place a check in the
box beside Winder and click OK.
442
Stair Landings
Winders must be in a room with valid
Stairs
room definition. You cannot create
winders in an area composed of only 2 corner
walls. If this configuration is needed, enclose
the area in with Invisible walls so that a room
area is defined.
Winders extend to nearby walls
Tight Winders
4. The steps nearest the wall corner adjust
their shapes and extend into the corner Winders cannot be created in a staircase with
after the stair is changed to a winder. too tight a curve. The inside edge of the
curved treads must be greater than zero. If a
staircase curves too tightly, select the winder,
click the Make Arc Tangent edit button,
and increase the radius so that it is greater
than half of the width of the staircase. See
“Editing Arc Based Objects” on page 98.
Stair Landings
Video: Creating a Stair Landing
Stair landings are platforms between stair
sections and can be created in either of two
ways.
To create a landing between stair sections:

Creating a stair landing
1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They
can be at any angle. Up to five stair sections can be connected to
2. Click between the two sections using the one landing. For example, two or three stair
sections might meet at a landing with a single
Straight Stairs tool to create a land- stair section continuing to the next level.
ing. Notice that only one direction arrow
displays after the sections are joined by To be linked by a landing, all sections must
a landing. be drawn in the same direction (UP is
preferable) and the top of one section should
be near the bottom of the next.
A landing formed between two stair sections
having less than a 90 degree angle between
443
them are created with a short edge not less dialog. See “Stair Landing Specification
than 6” (150 mm). This is because most Dialog” on page 467.
building codes require the shortest tread to be
at least 6” wide. This edge can be manually
edited to less than 6” if needed. Landing Height
Landing height can be either user-defined or
controlled by the program. A landing with a
Custom Shaped Landings
program-controlled default height is
Landings can be edited like CAD polylines. unlocked. The height of an unlocked landing
You can add or remove edges, convert an adjusts as the stairs attached to it are
edge from straight to curved, or vice versa. A modified.
curved landing creates curved railings.
If you specify a height for a landing, that
You can also create a stair landing out of landing is locked. A locked landing
closed polyline created with the CAD tools maintains that height no matter how you
using the Convert Polyline edit button. adjust the stairs connected it.
See “Convert Polyline” on page 149.
Unlocked Landings
To convert a polyline into a landing
By default, a new stair landing is unlocked,
1. Draw a closed polyline. so the stair sections attached to it determine
its height. If the entire stair system forms a
2. Select the polyline and click the
single path from the lower to the upper floor
Convert Polyline edit button to with each landing connecting only two stair
open the Convert Polyline dialog. sections, the program can set landing heights
3. Select the Landing radio button and without any difficulty.
click OK to open the Stair Landing
4. Define a Height and Thickness for the
landing. If the Height is defined, the end
of any connecting stairs adjust height to
meet the landing. If you type a “d” in the
Height value, the height is determined
by connected stairs.
5. To connect a stair section to the landing, In this example, two stair sections of the
drag the end handle of a stair section to same length are located within a stairwell
the edge of the landing. You can also and connected by a landing. Both stair
move the edge of a landing to the end of sections have seven treads. Because the
a stair section. Either method makes the landing height is set automatically according
landing or stair section end height as set to the number of treads, all treads have the
in the Stair Landing Specification same tread width and riser height.
444
Stair Landings
Since both stair sections are the same length, Locked Landings
the landing height is a half of the total height
Stairs
between the two connected floors. A locked landing has a specifically defined
height that does not adjust automatically
when there are changes in the attached stairs.
Instead, the stairs adjust to the landing.
For example, start with the same staircase
used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one
change: the landing height is now defined at
75 inches (190 mm).
7 treads 6 treads
in each
section 8 treads
Unlocked landing Landing locked at 75"

An unlocked landing maintains consistent stairs
Notice that a tread is subtracted from the top
A change to either stair section affects the and added to the bottom. The program makes
height of the connected landing and the other this adjustment to keep the riser heights
stair section. The program tries to maintain within a reasonable range.
the connection to the floor above, and the The stair sections no longer relate to each
landing adjusts in height so that the entire other when they are attached to a locked
stair system has the same riser height, landing. Changes to one stair section do not
regardless of how many stairs are placed on affect the other.
each side of the landing.
If more than two stair sections meet at a
landing, the relationship between them
becomes more complex. In this situation, you
may want to define the exact height of the
landing instead of letting the program define
it for you.
Stair sections connected with a landing also
move together unless Stair Sections Move
Independently is checked in the
445

You can use a locked landing to break up a
complex network of stairs and landings into
smaller pieces with known starting and
ending heights.
To lock a landing
1. Select the landing and click the Open

Object edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog.
2. The Height value displays with a “[D]”,
indicating that the landing height is
defined by the stair sections.
Locked landings produce 3. Remove the “[D]” and enter the desired
independent stair sections
height.
In this example, each set of stairs is adjusted
so it bridges the height from the floor to the
landing. Since the landing height is above the
4. The landing moves to that height. Once
halfway mark, the upper stair section has
you have defined a height for the land-
very shallow (5") riser height, and the lower
ing, all stairs that meet that landing are
section has a steeper (7-1/2") riser height.
redefined.
When a locked landing is used, the
Staircase Specification dialog shows To unlock a landing
only the selected stair section and those
connected to it by unlocked landings, rather 1. Select the landing and click the Open
than the entire stair system.
Object edit button to open the Stair
When a stair section is moved, all unlocked Landing Specification dialog.
landings and any stair sections connected to 2. Enter a “d” in the Height field and press
those landings move as well. A locked the Tab key. The current default height
landing, does not move when attached stairs reappears with “[D]” after it. Then land-
are moved. To move a stair section ing changes to the appropriate height
independently, select this option in the when you close the dialog. See
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 179.
446
Maintaining Tread Width
Maintaining Tread Width
Stairs
Most building codes require staircases to Lock Tread Width
maintain consistent tread width.
The first way to maintain tread width is to
Lock Tread Width to a specified value on
Walk Line the General tab of the Staircase
By default, Chief Architect measures the
on page 459.
length and tread width of a stair section along
a walk line. The walk line is typically located Once locked, any changes to the length of the
12" or 30 cm from the edge of the stair stair section are made in full tread
section. On curved stairs, it is measured from increments, maintaining the specified tread
the inside edge of the curve. width. A stair section consisting of multiple
subsections must have the tread width locked
The walk line distance from the staircase
so the tread width of each subsection is set to
edge can be specified on the Style tab of the
the same value.
Staircase Specification dialog. The
walk line feature can also be turned off and
tread width measured at the tread center. See Ignore Subsection
“Style Tab” on page 461. Boundaries
Uniform tread width can also be maintained
by selecting Ignore Subsection Boundaries
on the General tab of the Staircase
Specification dialog. This maintains a
consistent tread width throughout a stair
section without regard to subsection
boundaries. The tread width value may
Walk Line at 12" Center Line change when the stair section is edited, but
remains consistent throughout all
When the walk line is used on a curved stair subsections. See “General Tab” on page 459.
section, the number and/or width of treads in
Because the program is ignoring the
a section or subsection changes when the
boundaries where one stair section merges
inner edge is moved because the walk line is
with another, the treads where a straight
measured from this inner edge. You should
section joins a curved section may angle to
set the stair section width to its final value as
accomodate the adjustment.
early as possible.
There are two ways to keep tread width even
throughout a stair section made of multiple
subsections.
447
These are the subsection boundaries. Check Ignore Subsection

Note that they are straight, exactly as Boundaries to have the
created. The walk line around the program adjust all the treads
center treads is too narrow. of a stair system so that they
maintain consistent width along
the walkline. Note that it
adjusted the boundary lines to
accomodate the walk line along
the center stairs.
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads

Any stair section can be flared and/or
treads curved using the Flare/Curve
Stairs edit button.
Only exposed sides of a stair section can be
flared. If one side of a stair section is against
a wall or wrapped (see “Wrapped Stairs” on
page 452), only the exposed end can be
flared.
Flaring, curved treads, and special

treads should be the last changes that
you make to any stairs.
Creating a Flared Stair

Flared stairs grow wider near one end,
typically sweeping outward at the bottom.
Stairs can also be flared at the top or on both To create flared stairs
ends.
1. Create the stairs and connect them to a
landing, floor platform edge, or another
stair section.
2. Specify the section width, tread width,
and any other needed information.
448
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
3. Select the stairs and click the Flare/ Adjusting the Flare Radius
Curve Stairs edit button. New Flare
Stairs
After a flared staircase has been created, you
edit handles display on all four corners may want to soften the radius of the flare.
of the stairs.
4. Drag one of the corner handles to flare
that corner. As you drag the flare, the
Status Bar shows the distance the side
handle moves. This allows you to move
the opposite handle the same amount.
Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar
Creating flared stairs

The four handles at the sides and the four
5. When you are finished editing the flare, handles at the corners flare the stair section
click the Main Edit Mode to restore when dragged outward. The two handles in
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool- the center of the section move the starting
bar buttons. point for flaring along the stair section.
To adjust the flare radius

Symmetrically Flared Stairs First, adjust the curvature of the flared
Use the dimension information that displays section.
in the Status Bar as a reference to create
symmetric flares on both sides. 1. Select the flared stair and click the
Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to
Flare
dimensions
access the flare handles again.
display in the 2. Select the handle along the flared edge
Status Bar of the stair. Drag this handle outward
very slightly. This forms a more gradual
flare.
Creating symmetrically flared stairs
449
To curve the edges of flared treads
1. Select the flared stair and click the

2. Drag a corner edit handle upward one
tread width or less.
Adjusting the flare curvature
Then, adjust the starting point of the flare:
1. Select the flared stair and click the

2. This time, drag the lower of the two cen- Curving the edges of flared treads
tral handles upward. The handle above it
moves with it. This moves the start point 3. When you are finished editing the curve,
for the bottom flare from the middle of click the Main Edit Mode to restore
the section toward its top, making the the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
flare even more gradual. bar buttons.
This type of tread curving works only on
flared edges and concentrates the curvature
at that edge.
Flared treads can also be curved using the
Curve edit handle, which curves the treads
more uniformly.
Adjusting the flare’s starting point Curving the Treads

When treads are curved, all treads in the
Treads Perpendicular to Flare section show some degree of curvature.
Flared stairs often look best when the treads Treads close to the curved end have a greater
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to curve than those at the opposite end, but both
the radius. ends can be curved.
450
Starter Treads
2. Drag the edit handle at the center of the

bottom edge a small distance to curve
Stairs
the treads.
Creating curved stair treads
3. When you are finished editing the curve,

To curve stair treads
click the Main Edit Mode to restore
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
1. Select the staircase, then click the Flare/
bar buttons.
Curve Stairs edit button.
Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a
staircase can be turned into starter
treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit
button. Starter treads extend to the side of the
staircase, have rounded edges and are
common on traditional staircases.
A starter tread can be added only to open
sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair
section is against a wall or wrapped (see
“Wrapped Stairs” on page 452), only the
exposed tread end can become a starter tread.
451
To create starter treads 6. Drag either of the two square handles

upward to increase the width of the
1. Click a staircase to select it. rounded ends of the tread.
2. Click the Starter Tread edit button.

An edit handle displays on each end of
both the first and second treads.
7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread

outward from the stair section to create a
second starter tread.
3. Drag either of the handles on the first
tread outward from the stair section. If
the stair section is against a wall, only
one handle displays on the side opposite
the wall.
4. As you drag, the ends of the tread
8. To make changes to existing starter
become rounded.
treads, select the stairs, click the Starter
Tread edit button and repeat the
above steps as needed.
9. When you are finished editing the starter
treads, click the Main Edit Mode to
5. Two additional edit handles display on
restore the stairs’ regular edit handles
each side of the tread, along the back
and toolbar buttons.
edge.
Wrapped Stairs
Check Allow Wrap on the Style tab of the To wrap stairs around a landing
Staircase Specification dialog and the
selected stairs can be wrapped around the 1. Draw two perpendicular stair sections.
corner of a deck or landing. Curved stairs 2. Click between them to create a landing.
and stairs with multiple subsections cannot
be wrapped. 3. Rotate one stair section 180°.
Edits made to any of the wrapped stair

sections apply to all adjacent (wrapped)
sections.
452
Other Special Railings & Stairs
To wrap stairs around a deck
Stairs
1. Draw a deck if you have not already
done so.
2. Hold down the Alt key and drag stairs
away from the edge of the deck using
the right mouse button.
3. Draw a second set of stairs on the other
edge of the deck the same way.
4. If necessary, move the stair sections
toward the corner of the deck. The two
4. The stairs wrap around the corner. sections merge to form wrapped steps.
Notice that the Up arrow displays on the
most recently edited stair section.
Partial Railings
A staircase can be enclosed on one side by a
combination of wall and railing.
453
rior wall is 4" thick, setting this value to

4" should be sufficient.
5. On the Style tab, increase the Stringer
Bottom value to enclose the area under
the stairs with railings. The best value
depends on the design of your stairs.
6. On the Newels/Balusters tab, remove the
check from either Right or Left Railing
at Wall, depending on the position of
the stairs and wall in your plan.
7. Click the Object Snaps toggle but-

ton to temporarily turn off Object Snaps.
Partial railings can be created by specifying See “Object Snaps” on page 82.
the stairs as winders and increasing the Max 8. Select the stairs and use the side edit
Tread Contraction on the Style tab of the handle to move the edge of the stairs to
Staircase Specification dialog. approximately the middle of the wall.
The Max Tread Contraction defines the
largest distance that any section of the stair
system is allowed to move inward when the
stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
the edge of the stairs would have to move
inward more than this defined amount in
order to locate the surface of the wall, the
stairs do not contract and snap to that wall.
To create a partial stair railing
1. Create a staircase and draw an Interior

Resizing stairs to the middle of the wall
Wall against, but not underneath, the
stairs. 9. You may need to Zoom in on the
2. Select the stairs and click the Auto stairs and wall to move the stair edge.
Stairwell edit button to create a
stairwell. Solid Railings
3. On the General tab of the Staircase To create a solid rail along a staircase, create
Specification dialog, check Winders.
the solid rail against, but not underneath, the
4. On the Style tab, define the Max Tread stairs. The solid railing recognizes the
Contraction (for Winder). If the inte- adjacent stairs and climbs alongside them.
See “Railing Tab” on page 267.
454
Steel Stringer
Stairs
To make a steel stringer with concrete
treads:
1. On the Style tab of the Staircase

Specification dialog, set the Tread
Thickness to 2 inches or more.
If any balusters show beyond the railing, 2. Select the Single Stringer check box.
eliminate them by unchecking Left railing
or Right railing on the Style tab of the 3. On the Materials tab, set the Tread
Staircase Specification dialog. material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim
material to steel.
Concrete Stairs
Masonry Stairs
To make a solid concrete staircase:
1. On the Style tab of the Staircase To make a set of masonry stairs:

Specification dialog, set the Tread
Overhang to zero. 1. Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
2. Set the Tread Thickness to zero. 2. Set the Tread Thickness to the thick-
ness of the masonry material.
3. Remove any check from Open Risers.
3. On the Materials tab, set the Tread
4. On the Materials tab, set the Tread and material to the masonry material and the
the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete. Riser/Trim material to concrete.
455
Creating a Stairwell
An interior staircase must be located in a 3. Select Tools> Reference Floors>
stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A Reference Display to show the Ref-
stairwell is an Open Below room type on the erence Floor, including the stairs. If the
floor above. stairs do not display with the reference,
If you create a stairwell away from other make sure the Reference Display Set is
walls so the Open Below is created in the selected in the Layer Display
center of another room, connect a wall of the Options dialog. See “Displaying
Open Below room to another wall using an Objects” on page 221.
invisible wall.
4. On the upper floor, use the Railing
tool to create a room around the stairs.
Creating a Stairwell Use the edit handles to position the rail-
Automatically ings as needed.
To create a stairwell that matches the
perimeter of the staircase, create a
floor above the staircase if one does
not exist. Select the staircase and click the
Auto Stairwell edit button.
Auto Stairwell automatically creates a

room on the floor above enclosed by railings,
5. Select the railings one at a time and drag
defined as Open Below in the Room
them into position.
Specification dialog, and given a Stair-
well room label. This room can be selected 6. When the railings are positioned prop-
and edited like any other room. erly, click the Reference Display
toggle button to turn off the display of
Creating a Stairwell Manually the Reference Floor.
Stairwells can also be created manually. 7. Click inside the room using the Select
Objects tool to select it, then click
To create a manual stairwell
the Open Object edit button.
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the 8. On the General tab of the Room
staircase on the first floor. Specification dialog, select Open
2. Make the second floor the Current Below from the Room Type list. Click
Floor and the first floor the Reference OK to close the dialog.
Floor. See “Reference Floor” on page
368.
456
Rooms Below Staircases
log. If the doorway is specified larger

than the railing, the door maximizes to
Stairs
fit the space available.
9. Place a Doorway in the railing at

the top step for an opening.
10. Select the doorway and define a large
width in the Door Specification dia-
Rooms Below Staircases

Classroom Design Project Training 3. Reposition the walls as needed, making
Video: Drawing Winder Stairs with sure that each is entirely under the stairs.
Walls Beneath 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should
Rooms such as closets or storage areas are be placed no closer to the bottom than
commonly located beneath staircases. the second step.
5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.
To create a room below a staircase
1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the

Open Object edit button to open the
Staircase Specification dialog.
• If Winders are specified for this stair-
case, set Max Tread Contraction to 2"
on the Style tab to allow walls to be
built entirely under the staircase.
• On the Fill Style tab, select None
(Transparent) so the walls and other
objects under the stairs can be seen.
2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw
the Interior Walls under them, fol-
lowing their shape.
457
Staircase Specification Dialog

Staircases can be defined with the greatest Staircase Specification dialog for the
accuracy using the Staircase entire stair system.
If more than one stair section attaches to an It is important that all floor heights, ceil-
unlocked landing, information about all the ing heights, floor and ceiling thick-
linked stair sections is available in the nesses be established correctly before using
the Staircase Specification dialog.
specification dialog.
If a stair section is composed of multiple To open the Staircase Specification
subsections, the complete section may be dialog, select a stair section and click the
adjusted as a unit, or by defining each of its
Open Object edit button or double-click
individual subsections. Any section or
subsection can be used to open the a stair section using the Straight Stairs
or Select Objects tool.
458
General Tab
Stairs
1 4
5
2
6
1 The comment line tells whether or not expands if the number stair sections and
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it subsections increases.
does not, the Make Reach button displays.
A stair section can be modified as a complete
Click this button to add risers to the stairs.
unit or by subsection.
The stair jack extends, raising the bottom
edge of the stair section until the staircase Five values can be changed. To change
reaches the next floor. Tread Width or Riser Angle, click the
column title to activate the fields below.
2 This section lists information about the
staircase. This information cannot be A change in one value usually affects other
edited directly, but updates with changes values in the same row. You may need to
made in the dialog. reposition the staircase after the changes.
If you modify a value, press the Tab key to Section # - Identifies the stair sections. If
update this information. Retain # Tread in Subsections is checked,
subsections are also identified.
3 The specifications for each stair section
can be edited here. This section
459
Length - Define the run, or length, of each check Retain # treads in either Sections or
section measured along the Walk Line. The Subsections to lock the value.
length is equal to the number of treads
Sec. Width - Define the width of a section.
multiplied by the tread width and can be
Only one width can be defined for a section;
defined with a specific value.
all subsections in the same section have the
Before you change the length, you may want same width.
to first select Retain # Treads.
Rise Angle - Define the steepness of the stair
When the length of a section changes, all section.
other stairs and landings connected to it also
The maximum angle is 42 degrees. To
move. If you change the length of the section
exceed the 42 degree limit, decrease Length,
you originally selected, the end of that
Tread Width and/or # Treads.
section nearest where you clicked moves,
along with any unlocked landings and Winders - Check this box to specify the
sections connected to it. selected section as winders. This affects the
section as a whole, even if it is defined by
Tread Width - Click the column title, then
subsections. If multiple sections are
specify the run of each individual tread. To
separated by landings, each section can be
lock this value, check Lock Tread Width.
individually specified as winders.
If you do not specify the tread width of each
subsection, the tread width for the whole 4 Click the Revert button to restore all
values as they were when the dialog
section is the same.
was first opened. Revert only works within
If a landing is created by clicking between the same editing session.
two stair sections and one of them has locked
If you select and then clear one of the Retain
tread width, the staircase formed from them
# treads in check boxes, the settings also
has locked tread width. Any landings and
revert.
sections connected to this new staircase
adjust to meet it and then have locked tread
5 Best riser height of ___ inches (mm)
width as well. requires ___ risers to reach ___
inches to next floor. This area describes the
ideal rise and run for the selected staircase.
Note: You cannot both Lock Tread Width
Note the number of inches (mm) to the next
and Retain # Treads in the same staircase. If
a landing is created between two stair sec- floor; this value includes the ceiling height of
tions and one has locked tread width, the the room plus the platform thickness of the
entire staircase has locked tread width. floor above.
If a landing is locked, its height is used to
# Treads - Define the number of treads in a calculate this information. See “Locked
stair section or subsection. If you enter a Landings” on page 445.
value and want to prevent it from changing,
6 These options control the behavior of
the stair sections.
460
Lock Tread Width - Check this box to lock tion of treads throughout the different sub-
the tread width value. If subsections are not sections, and does not include landings.
Stairs
shown, the tread width for each section is the
Retain # treads in: Subsection - Check this
average of all subsections. Check Lock
box to specify the number of treads in each
Tread Width or Ignore Subsection
subsection.
Boundaries to ensure that the tread width
shown is the true tread width throughout the If either check box is selected, any change in
entire section. See “Lock Tread Width” on the length of a stair section is evenly
page 447. distributed among the treads in that section
or subsection. No new treads are added.
Ignore Subsection Boundaries - Check this
box to maintain tread width throughout a All stair sections linked by unlocked
stair section composed of merged landings to a selected stair section display in
subsections, regardless of subsection the lower part of the dialog. If you select
boundaries. See “Ignore Subsection Retain # treads in: Subsection, all
Boundaries” on page 447. subsections display as well.
Retain #treads in: Sections - Check this box
7 Num Style - Click this button to access
to lock the number of treads in stair sections the Number Style/Angle Style
as a whole. This does not define the distribu- dialog. For more information, see “Number
Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page 873.
Style Tab
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
6
461
The settings on the Style tab affect all stair Specify the height of the Stringer Top when
sections and subsections. Stringer at Wall or Closed Stringer is
selected. This is measured along the plane of
1 Stringer at Wall - Check this box to the riser face from the top of a tread to the
produce a raised stringer top baseboard
top of the stringer. It cannot be less than 2
trim at the sides of the stair sections against
inches (5 cm).
walls. This baseboard follows the slope of
the stair. Specify the height of the Stringer Bottom.
This is measured from the top back corner of
Single Stringer - Check this box to form a
a tread down to the bottom edge of the
single 5-inch (125-mm) thick stringer in the
stringer. It must be equal to or greater than
center of the staircase.
the riser height.
Checking Single Stringer automatically
checks the Open Risers box and clears the 2 Runner - Check this box to add a
carpet runner to all sections connected
Closed Stringer and Stringer at Wall
by unlocked landings. Specify the Runner
boxes. You may want to increase the tread
Width. The default value of 0 does not create
thickness when this is checked.
a runner.
Closed Stringer - Check this box to raise
Runner not Tucked - Normally, carpet
each exposed stringer to cover the sides of
runners are tucked under the tread overhang.
the treads. If this is checked, no central
Check this box to have the runner span
stringer is applied to open riser stairs. This
directly from the tread front tothe bottom of
setting only affects those stringers that are
the riser below.
not against a wall.
Large Stringer Base - Check this box to 3 Use Walk Line - By default, Chief
Architect calculates the tread width
widen the stringer at the foot of the staircase.
based on a walk line. Specify how far from
This is helpful when walls are created below
the edge of the stairs the Walk Line is
the stairs.
measured. This is normally 12 inches.
Uncheck the box to disable this function.
Show Walk Line - Check this box to show
the Walk Line in floor plan view.
For more information, see “Walk Line” on
page 447.
Large Stringer Base shown at right
4 Open Underneath - Uncheck this box
Extend Stringer Top - This box is checked to add a skirt below the staircase along
by default. This option extends a triangular the two sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but it
portion of the stringer under the landing or has only a single face. Base molding does not
platform at the top of the stairs. generate along the bottom of the skirt, and
doors cannot be placed in it.
462
The recommended way to enclose the area Riser Surface at Top Landing - Check this
beneath stairs is to use walls. See “Rooms box to produce a riser surface against the
Stairs
Below Staircases” on page 457. platform edge at the top of the stairs.
Checking this allows stair risers to match all
Open Risers - Check this box to eliminate
the way to the top of the platform. Landing
the riser face under each tread and expose the
edges are not affected.
stringers. If Closed Sides is also selected, no
central stringer is supplied.
10 Allow Wrap - This box is checked by
default and must be checked to produce
5 Show Arrow - Check this box to show wrapped stairs. For more information, see
the UP arrow or DN arrow in floor plan
“Wrapped Stairs” on page 452.
view.
6 Use Exterior Materials - Select the

check box to have the entire staircase
use the same material as the railing.
Materials can be defined for the individual
parts of a staircase if this is not checked.
7 Max Tread Contraction (for Winder)

- Define the amount a tread may
contract to create a winder. See “Partial
Railings” on page 453.
8 Tread Overhang - Specify the distance

that the tread overhangs the riser.
Tread Thickness - Specify the tread
thickness.
8
8
Tread Overhang, Tread Thickness, Stringer Top
9 Nosing at Top Landing - This option

produces tread nosing attached to
platform edge at the top of stairs. Landing
edges are not affected.
463
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
6
2
3
1 Rail Height - Specify stair and landing • Baluster Width - Specify the width of
rail height. each baluster. For Library balusters, this
• Stair Rail Height defines the height from is the width, or diameter, at its widest
tread surface directly over the riser to point.
railing top. • No Shoe for Rail - This option applies
• Landing Rail Height defines the height only to landing rails. Uncheck this box to
of the landing rail top from the landing place a low rail on the landing surface
surface. that receives the baluster bottoms.
• Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally
2 Check Draw Newels/Balusters to has two to three balusters, growing
display newels and balusters in floor
longer toward its back. The default is to
plan view. This displays the Newels and
use the same baluster and cut it off at the
Balusters only for the selected stair section.
bottom to shorten it toward the tread
3 Baluster specifications. front. Check this box to cut the balusters
• Baluster Type - Select Square, at the top instead.
Round, or Library balusters. Selecting
Library from the drop down list is the 4 Newel specifications.
same as clicking the Library button to Newel Type - Select Square, Round,
the right and allows selection of a balus- or Library newels. Selecting Library from
ter from the library. the drop down list is the same as clicking the
Library button to the right and allows
selection of a newel from the library.
464
Newel Width - Specify the width of each

newel. For Library newels, this is the width,
Stairs
or diameter, at its widest point.
Newel Height - Specify the height from the
landing surface to the top of the newel. This
is used only when Rail passes over Newel is
unchecked.
Newels at First Tread - Check this box to
place a newel where the rail starts at the base
of the stairs. A newel is placed only on a side
of the stairs not against a wall.
• Railing Transitions - Check to specify
Rail Passes Over Newel - Adjust the newel the placement of “gooseneck” connec-
height to reach the bottom of the rail that tions between stair and landing railings.
passes over it. Checking this causes the
Newel Height to be ignored.
5 Bracket - Click the Library button to

apply a 1/4 inch thick bracket to the
side of the stringer under each riser. Brackets
are applied only where the side of the stairs is
not against a wall. The stringer on that side is
moved in 1/4 inch to accomodate the bracket.
6 Railing specifications.
• Railing - Select either or both check Checking both Railing Transitions and
boxes to specify placement of railings on Smooth Transitions produces a handrail like
stair sections and landings where they are this:
not against a wall.
• Railing at Wall - Check to specify the
placement of wall railings.
465
• Smooth Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of smooth connections
between stair and landing railings.
Handrail Tab
1
2
3
4 5
1 Molding - Shows the current handrail 4 Preview Pane - Shows the selected
profile. This says “Default Handrail” molding profile. No preview displays
unless you select a custom handrail profile. for the Default Handrail option, which is
rectangular.
2 Select - Click this button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and
choose a profile from the library. Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a
specified handrail and use the default.
5 Width and Height - Specify the width
and height of the railing.
466
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
Line Style Tab Materials Tab
Stairs
For information about using the Line Style For information about using the Materials
tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 851. tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Fill Style Tab

For information about using the Fill Style
tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 862.
Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Select a landing and click the Open Object Polyline Tab
edit button to open the Stair Landing For information about the Polyline tab, see
Specification dialog. “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
General Tab Selected Line Tab

1 Line Style Tab

2 For information about the Line Style tab, see
3 “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Fill Style Tab

1 Height - Specify the height of the For information about the Fill Style tab, see
landing. Enter a “D” to unlock the
landing height and use the default height. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
The default height is determined by corrected
stair sections when you exit the dialog. See
Materials Tab
“Locked Landings” on page 445.
2 Thickness - Enter a thickness for the “Materials Tab” on page 710.
landing. Enter a “D” to use the default.
3 No Rail on Selected Edge - Suppress

railing on the edge nearest to where you
clicked when selecting this landing.
467
468
Chapter 15:
Framing
Framing
Chapter Overview
Classroom Design Project Training Chapter Contents
Video: Introduction to Framing • Framing Defaults
What’s New In Version X1 Training • Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing
Video: Framing Walls, Floors, Ceilings • The Framing Tools
and Roofs • Blocking and Bridging
• Automatic Framing
In Chief Architect, framing can be produced • Build Framing Dialog
both manually and automatically, and can be • Framing Reference Markers
calculated in the materials list. • Bearing Lines
Manual framing members are drawn by • Joist Direction Lines
clicking and dragging, like drawing a wall. • Wall Framing Details
Automatic framing is produced in the Build • Drawing Wall Framing Members
Framing dialog. Both automatically • Displaying Framing
generated and manually drawn framing • Editing Framing
members can be selected and edited using • Keeping Framing Current
edit handles in 2D and 3D views. • Framing and the Materials List
• Framing Specification Dialog
Trusses are covered in their own chapter, • Beam Specification Dialog
“Trusses” on page 501. • Post Specification Dialog
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings... to Both automatic and manual framing is
access the Default Settings dialog. generated according to the settings in the
Framing Defaults dialog. If automatic
469
framing needs to be edited, change these

default settings and regenerate framing using As with other default settings, it is best
the Build Framing dialog. to set up framing defaults for all major
components before building your model.
The Framing Defaults dialog is nearly Framing defaults control structural elements,
identical to the Build Framing dialog. See which in turn determine floor, ceiling and roof
“Build Framing Dialog” on page 475. heights.
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing

Introductory Training Video: Auto- Framing is not built until the Build
matic and Manual Framing Framing dialog is opened and the check
box on each tab that says Build next to it is
selected. For example, Build Wall Framing
Video: Introduction to Framing
is found on the Wall tab, and Build Ceiling
Platform, roof, and wall framing can be Framing, on the different floor tabs (1st,
produced manually or automatically. In most 2nd, etc). Once framing is built, changes can
cases, automatically-generated framing is be made to individual components. Framing
preferable. If you want a framing member members can be added, deleted, resized and
that is not affected by automatically repositioned within the model.
generated framing, then a manually drawn
When changes are made to the model that
framing member is desirable. See “The
affect framing, the Build Framing dialog
Framing Tools” on page 471.
must be opened and any affected framing
In most plans, both types of framing are must be rebuilt. For example, if a window is
used. The framing for roof planes and floor moved or resized, the wall framing must be
platforms is automatically generated, and rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged, the wall
additional framing is created manually. framing and any roof or platform framing
that is affected must be rebuilt.
Wall/Floor/Ceiling
Framing Roof Framing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs of the Rafters, trusses, or a mixture of the two can
Build Framing dialog determine how wall be used for roof framing. Trusses are
framing is automatically generated. It is a manually drawn and are covered in their own
good idea to set up framing specifications in chapter, “Trusses” on page 501.
the Build Framing dialog before drawing. Rafters can be manually drawn or produced
Although these settings can be changed, automatically on the Roof tab in the
finalizing them as early as possible saves Framing dialog.
time.
470
The Framing Tools
If you are going to have both truss and

automatically produced stick framing,
draw the trusses first and then use the
Framing dialog to produce stick framing.
The stick framing is only placed in areas not
supported by trusses, and is cut and butted to
the trusses where appropriate.
Framing
The Framing Tools
Framing members can be generated Roof Truss
automatically or drawn manually. In
either case, the default settings for framing Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss
members are derived from their respective and click and drag in floor plan view
tabs in the Build Framing dialog. within one or more roof planes to manually
draw a roof truss. Roof planes must be
As a general rule, horizontal framing present before a roof truss can be drawn. See
members are referred to as "joists" “Roof Trusses” on page 502.
(floor/ceiling platform framing); vertical fram-
ing members are referred to as "studs" (wall Roof Beam
framing); and sloped framing members are
referred to as rafters (roof framing). Select Build> Framing> Roof Beam
and click and drag in floor plan view to
Rafter manually draw a roof beam. Roof beams are
normally be drawn across and placed directly
Rafters are assigned at a pitch and under the rafters. Beams can be selected and
elevation so that they fit inside the roof opened for specification. See “Beam
plane in which they are drawn. Specification Dialog” on page 498.
To draw a rafter manually, select Build>
Framing> Rafter , then click and drag in
Joist
floor plan view to draw a rafter. Joists can be automatically generated
If the rafter is drawn within a roof plane, its for multiple floors at once in the Build
height, depth and pitch are set so that it fits Framing dialog. See “Floor Tabs” on page
under the roof plane that contains it. 475.
Rafters are edited like other framing Joists can only be manually drawn on the
members, except that you cannot set the current floor. See “Floor Up/ Floor Down”
height. If a rafter is moved, its height and on page 368. Whether a floor or ceiling joist
slope are automatically reset to fit under the is drawn when the Joist tool is used is
roof plane at its new position. determined by the presence of a floor above.
If there is no floor above, a ceiling joist is
471
drawn. If there is a floor above, a floor joist

is drawn. To draw a joist on the first floor Beams should be placed before joists
subfloor, the current floor must be the are produced by automatic framing. If
foundation. With Joists is specified, the joists are cut by
and butted against the beam. If Under Joists
To manually draw a ceiling joist, select is specified, the joists are automatically
Build> Framing> Joist and click and drag butted or lapped over the beam.
to draw a joist of the desired length.
Post
Joists can be edited just like manually drawn
framing members. See “Editing Framing” on Select Build> Framing> Post and
page 494. click in floor plan view to place a post.
Placing a post on the lowest level of a plan
Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters also creates a footing. Posts can be selected
have their own layers. Proper layer and opened for specification. See “Post
assignment maximizes display and materials Specification Dialog” on page 499.
flexibility.
Framing Reference Marker

Floor/Ceiling Truss
Select Build> Framing> Framing
Select Build> Framing> Floor/ Reference Marker and click in floor
Ceiling Truss and click and drag in plan view to place a framing reference
floor plan view to draw a floor/ceiling truss. marker.
See “Floor and Ceiling Trusses” on page
502. A Framing Reference Marker is a
shortcut tool that saves the step of opening a
Floor/Ceiling Beam marker to specify its type. See “Markers” on
Select Build> Framing> Floor/ page 823 and “Framing Reference Marker”
Ceiling Beam and click and drag in on page 472.
floor plan view to draw a floor/ceiling beam.
Beams can be selected and opened for Bearing Line
specification. See “Beam Specification Select Build> Framing> Bearing
Dialog” on page 498. Line and click and drag on floor plan
On the Posts/Beam tab of the Build view to create a bearing line. See “Bearing
Framing dialog you can set two ways a Lines” on page 488.
beam can be drawn:
• Under Joists places the beam underneath Joist Direction
the joists so the joists can bear on it. Select Build> Framing> Joist
• With Joists places the top of the beam Direction and click and drag in floor
even with the tops of the joists it sup- plan view to create a joist direction line. See
ports. The joist then butts against it. See “Joist Direction Lines” on page 489.
“Posts/Beams Tab” on page 482.
472
Blocking and Bridging
Blocking and Bridging

Blocking can be drawn manually for floor
and ceiling platforms. Wall bridging can be
When the Rafter button is double-
created manually or automatically. Both clicked to open the Build Framing
blocking and bridging can be selected and dialog, the Rafter tool is active. Be sure that
edited an a variety of ways.
Framing
the Joist Blocking or Roof Blocking
The Joist Blocking and Roof Blocking tool is active before drawing blocking.
buttons are not on the default toolbar but
can be added. See “Toolbar Customization Create a framing overview to view your
Dialog” on page 18. blocking in 3D. Rafter blocking is tilted in
3D to be perpendicular to the roof plane. The
floor plan view position corresponds to the
Joist and Roof Blocking
top of the rafter blocking.
Blocking for floor and ceiling
joists and rafters can be manually Wall Bridging
drawn in floor plan view.
Bridging for walls can be created when
To add Joist Blocking or Roof Blocking wall framing is built or rebuilt. Select
Exterior or Interior and In Line or Stagger
to your plan, first generate the framing bridging on the Wall tab of the Build
for that platform. See “Build Framing Framing dialog to define both manually and
Dialog” on page 475. automatically drawn bridging. See “Build
Once framing is displayed, select Build> Framing Dialog” on page 475.
Framing> Joist Blocking or click the Joist Automatically-created wall bridging can be
Blocking button and click and drag to viewed in a Wall Detail and edited just as
draw blocking. joist blocking is edited in floor plan view.
See “Wall Framing Details” on page 492.
Blocking must be drawn perpendicular to
and across joists or rafters. Bridging can also be drawn in a Wall Detail
by selecting CAD> Boxes & Framing>
One run of blocking behaves as a single
object in floor plan view. Choose between In Wall Bridging . Wall bridging must be
Line, Stagger blocking, and Cross bridging drawn perpendicular to the studs; it is
on each numbered Floor tab of the Build therefore always horizontal in a Wall Detail.
Framing dialog. Bridging should start and end at a stud
surface.
473
Automatic Framing
Automatic framing is built by selecting the of floor joists are set below the floor height
Build check box on the appropriate tabs of by a distance equal to the subfloor sheathing
the Build Framing dialog. thickness. The subfloor thickness is detailed
on each numbered Floor tab of the Build
The settings in the Build Framing dialog
Framing dialog, but it can be overridden for
are the same as those in the Framing
individual rooms in the Room
Defaults dialog. They control the type of
framing, its size and spacing, and other
on page 299.
details for the major components of the 3D
model.
Joist Orientation
The major components of framing are floor
platforms, ceiling platforms, walls, and roof • If a Joist Direction line exists some-
assemblies. Information specified in this where in the platform, it dictates the
dialog is used when automatic framing is direction of the floor or ceiling joists
generated. when automatic framing is generated.
When automatic framing is built, any • If there is no Joist Direction line,
previously existing automatically produced automatically generated joists run per-
framing of the same type for the same floor is pendicular to and across any Floor/Ceil-
deleted and replaced with new. Manually
drawn framing remains with the newly ing Beam or Bearing Line you
produced automatic framing. have drawn.
Depending on settings on the General tab of • If there are no Floor/Ceiling Beam

the Wall Specification dialog, wall
or Joist Direction lines, automati-
framing can be specified to stop at or frame
cally generated joists run across the
through floor and ceiling platforms. See
shortest distance on a platform.
Mixing Rafters
Joists and Rafters
and Trusses
Joists and rafters can be automatically
produced in ceiling and floor platforms and If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters
roof planes. Select the Build Framing check and/or ceiling joists, you can save time
box on the appropriate tabs in the Build laying out framing by:
Framing dialog. See “Build Framing • Check Trusses in the Build Roof dialog
Dialog” on page 475. before checking Build Roof Planes in
the Build Roof dialog to automatically
The height and depth of automatically
build a roof. This also affects positioning
produced joists are defined on these same
tabs of the Build Framing dialog. The top
474
Build Framing Dialog
of manually drawn roof planes if their • Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a
baseline is drawn over a wall. drop hip truss. See “Drop Hip” on page
• Draw and position all roof trusses before 514.
using the automatic framing generator to • Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable
produce rafters and ceiling joists. See truss. See the graphic in “Truss Base” on
“Floor and Ceiling Trusses” on page 502. page 507.
Some other important things to remember: • When rafters are parallel to trusses, the
Framing
tops of the rafters are placed in line with
• Rafters and joists that are parallel to a
the tops of the trusses. Since the depth of
roof truss are not generated closer than 14
a rafter is normally greater than that of a
inches (350mm) to the truss.
truss's top chord, the lower rafter edge is
• Automatically produced rafters and joists below the top plate of the supporting
do not cross an existing truss, but do gen- wall, requiring a birdsmouth cut into the
erate from the eave inward until they butt rafter. If the truss is raised to provide
into a truss. space for insulation, the rafter may not
need to be cut at all. If the truss is raised
too much, the rafter may not rest on the
top plate at all.

Automatic framing can be generated by The number of tabs in the dialog varies
selecting Build> Framing> Build depending on how many floors are in your
Framing to open the Build Framing model. There is be a tab called “1st” for the
dialog. This dialog can also be accessed by first floor, “2nd” for the second floor, and so
double-clicking either the Framing Tools on.
button or the Rafter tool.
Floor Tabs
The Build Framing dialog opens at the generated. For example, the floor framing
framing tab for the current floor, such as information for Floor 2 is found on the 1st
Foundation, 1st or 2nd. Each tab specifies tab, while the floor framing for Floor 1 is
framing for specific floors or assemblies. found on the Foundation tab.
Switch between tabs to define all settings. To automatically generate the floor framing
The floor framing information for a given for Floor 1, a foundation on Floor 0 must be
floor is found on the Floor tab for the floor present. If a Floor 0 has not been built, the
below it, because that is where the framing Build Floor Framing check box on the
will display in floor plan view when it is Foundation tab will not be available.
475
Each Floor tab is divided into two halves: floor in question is the top floor of the
• The right half is for floor framing specifi- plan.
cations, and applies to the model when If there is living space above the floor
the floor above is living space. corresponding to a particular Floor tab, the
• The left half is for ceiling framing speci- Build Floor Framing check box will be
fications, and is relevant only when the available. If there is no living space above
the floor, the Build Ceiling Framing check
box will be available instead.
1
2 9
10
3 11
4 12
5
6
7
1 Build Ceiling Framing - Check this locations, so that joists are placed on either
box and ceiling framing is regenerated side of the framing reference locations.
when the OK button is clicked.
4 Use Framing Reference - This applies
2 Spacing - Enter a value for the spacing to ceiling framing only. The Framing
of joists. If the platform is a floor Reference Marker is the starting point for
assembly, you can specify a rim joist with framing layout. If a reference is placed, the
the check box. center of the first joist is placed at this point
and spacing goes from there. If joists are
3 Specify if the framing members lap or lapped, the surface is placed at this point.
butt over a bearing wall. The lap is
eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the If the check box is cleared, the program
support. attempts to position ceiling joists so that they
overlap rafters. Be sure to build the roof
When the Framing Reference Marker is used
framing first if you are doing this.
and butt over support is checked, the joists
are placed at reference spacing. If lap over A Framing Reference Marker is not usually
support is checked, the surface where the used for both ceiling joists and nearby rafters
joists lap is placed at the reference spacing
476
that run the same way because one is placed Stagger produces blocking that alternates on
on top of the other. either side of the line you draw.
For floor joists, the starting point for a joist Cross produces cross bridging that looks like
layout is always the Framing Reference in line blocking in floor plan view, but shows
Marker. See “Framing Reference Markers” as cross bridging in 3D views and the
on page 486. materials list.
5 The Joist width field specifies the 9 Specify the floor joist Spacing.
Framing
joist's actual thickness.
10 Rim Joist - Check this to automatically
6 The Joist depth field specifies the produce a rim joist across the ends of
joist's vertical depth, which affects the the floor joists. If this is not checked, line
thickness of the floor or ceiling platform. blocking across the ends of the floor joists is
usually drawn in later.
This is a default depth that can be overridden
per room by specifying Floor Structure
11 Specify if the framing members lap or
Thickness on the Structure tab of the Room butt over a bearing wall. The lap is
Specification dialog. See “Structure Tab” eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the
on page 299. support.
7 Type - Select the type of joist from the When the Framing Reference Marker is used
drop-down list. The list includes and butt over support is checked, the joists
lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, are placed at reference spacing. If lap over
lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type support is checked, the surface where the
does not affect how framing is placed, but it joists lap is placed at the reference spacing
does change its appearance in cross section locations, so that joists are placed on either
and 3D views and in the Material List. side of the framing reference locations.
This is a default type that can be overridden
12 Subfloor thickness - This is the
per room by specifying Floor Structure thickness of the floor sheathing and
Type on the Structure tab of the Room applies to floor framing only.
The program adds the joist depth to the
on page 299.
subfloor thickness to determine the default
platform thickness in the Floor Defaults
8 Blocking / Bridging specifies how
blocking is manually drawn after joists dialog. This is a default thickness that can be
have been placed. A run of blocking displays overridden by specifying it in the Structure
as separate pieces cut by the joists, but is tab of the Room Specification dialog.
produced, moved and edited as a single
When viewing framing, Subfloor Thickness
object.
may be represented by a gap. To remove this
In Line produces blocking pieces that align gap, change the value to zero and rebuild the
with each other. framing. See “Structure Tab” on page 299.
477
If the material Concrete is applied to the Foundation Defaults dialog. See

floor, platform thickness is specified in the “Building a Foundation” on page 372.
Wall Tab
1
7
2 8
3
4
9
5 10
11
6
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all specified in the Define Material dialog of
referenced by the program to determine how the framing material selected for each wall
walls are framed. The settings on these three type. Uncheck this box to use the thickness
tabs define how automatic framing generates and spacing values below for all wall types.
and how wall framing is calculated for the See “Define Material Dialog” on page 712.
Materials List.
3 Specify the Stud Thickness for all
walls in the plan. As long as its material
You can still make changes to your plan
once you have framed your model. If is set to a framing material type, stud depth is
your changes affect framing, if a wall or ceil- set by the wall's main layer thickness.
ing were moved for instance, rebuild framing
to update the model. 4 Specify the Stud Spacing for all walls
in the plan. This spacing starts from the
framing reference mark, if one is present.
1 Build Wall Framing - Check this box
to build wall framing for the entire
model. Framing is only built in walls whose
5 Build Wall Framing Details from
Exterior - Check this box to show wall
main layer materials type is framing. See framing details from the exterior.
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 251.
Check Use wall framing material to
6 Bridging - Specify how and where
2 bridging is produced. Bridging displays
use the stud thickness and spacing as separate pieces divided by the studs, but is
478
actually produced as a single object for each

7 Specify the Number of Top Plates. A
wall and can be moved and edited in a Wall single bottom plate is always provided.
Detail view as if it were a single object. See
“Wall Framing Details” on page 492. 8 Specify the Thickness of top and
bottom plates.
• Check Exterior to automatically produce
bridging on external walls when wall 9 Mitre Plate Ends - Select the check
framing is built. box to mitre the ends of the top and
bottom plates and corners that are not right
Framing
• Check Interior to automatically produce angles. If cleared, the top and bottom plates
bridging on internal walls when wall butt together.
framing is built.
• In Line produces bridging pieces that 10 Rotate End Studs - Select the check
box to have the studs closest to the
align with each other. This applies to
mitre end be rotated to the angle of the mitre
automatically produced or manually
cut. If it is cleared, the studs remain
drawn bridging in the wall detail.
perpendicular to the angle of the walls.
• Stagger produces bridging that alternates
on either side of a center line along the 11 Horizontal Frame Thru - Select the
wall. This applies to automatically pro- check box to specify the horizontal
duced or manually drawn bridging in the walls in floor plan view to frame through,
wall detail. butting vertical walls against them.
Otherwise, walls that are vertical in floor
plan view frame through.
Openings Tab
2 3
479
1 Specify the default amount to Add for determined by the Double Trimmer At and
Rough Opening to the nominal sizes of Triple Trimmer At values used above.
wall openings.
A bay window with a top lower than the top
These settings define the default rough of the wall it is placed in usually contains a
openings values on the General tabs of the header spanning the entire bay. Trimmers are
Window and Door Specification usually not needed for this header since the
dialogs, and can be overridden on an object- studs in the wall support it. The same is true
by-object basis. See “Door Specification for most bow windows.
Dialog” on page 315 and “Window
Bay Component Thickness - Enter the
dimensions for a thinner trimmer which is
The specification dialogs show these values used if a standard trimmer does not fit. The
differently in that they show the total amount default for this value is 3/4 inch or 20mm.
added to the opening for both height and
Space can be tight in a bay or bow window,
width. The width, if defaulted, is twice the
and a desired component window size may
Each Side value in the Build Framing
not fit into the bay or bow if standard size
dialog, and the height is the sum of the Top
trimmers are used. If this is the case, the
and Bottom values.
trimmers are omitted and a metal bracket or
Top - Specify the space to allow from the top other means of supporting the header is
of the opening to the bottom of the header. needed.
Bottom - Specify the space to allow from the Bay window components default to a size
bottom of the opening to the top of the sill that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
plate. is first created. When the bay as a whole is
moved and resized, its components
Each Side - Specify the space to allow from
automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
each side of an opening to the side of the
trimmer or stud nearest it. If you select the bay and use the Tab key to
select the individual component window on
2 Specify when to build more than one which you clicked, you can resize that
Trimmer, or supporting header, based component either by selecting it and
on wall opening width. dragging from a side handle, or by selecting
Double Trimmer At - Openings as wide as it and clicking the Open Object edit
this value have two trimmers on each side. button in order to modify it using the
Window Specification dialog. You can
Triple Trimmer At - Openings as wide as
resize it larger until there is only room for the
this value have three trimmers.
thinner trimmer or for no trimmer at all.
Max Bay Trimmers - Trimmers for a bay or Once a component is resized in this way, it
bow window may be suppressed by entering retains its size if at all possible while the
zero into Max Bay Trimmers. Enter “1” to overall bay is moved or resized. If the bay is
have one trimmer on each side, and a greater resized in such a way that the component
number to have the number of trimmers becomes too large to fit, the component
480
resumes its default behavior, resizing as its Thickness - Specify the thickness for the sill.
containing bay window is resized.
Double Sill - Check this box to specify a
3 Specify the construction of the window double sill for all windows.
Sills, which refer to the framing below
the window rather than the finished sill.
Headers Tab
Framing
1 3
4
5
6
2
If this is unchecked, the Material List

Chief Architect does not calculate loads produces a total footage for all headers.
or bearings. It is dependent upon user When checked, each different length of
input and does not attempt any structural precut header is listed separately. Note that
analysis. Always consult your local building
the total number of headers is twice the
authorities and contact a licensed engineer
for structural calculations. number of openings if Count is set to 2.
3 Thickness - Specify header thickness.

1 Specify the header depth dependent on
the opening width. These values should 4 Count - Enter the Count of boards
be set so that the wider the opening, the required to make the header. Using this
deeper the header. number, the program generates a count of
header stock for you in the Material List.
2 Precut - Select the check box to show When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches,
precut headers in the Material List.
Precut headers are shown only if the walls headers are usually doubled or laminated, so
have been framed.
481
the default number of boards making up a the building of short cripple studs between
header in Count is 2. the top of the header top and bottom of the
plate. The default of 12 1/16 inch works well
5 Max Depth - If the top of the rough for 6’8” headers in 8’0” walls.
opening is closer to the top plate than
the value in Max Depth, a solid header is
6 Type - Specify the type of material
produced to fill the entire area. This disables used for headers.
Posts/Beams Tab
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8 10
11
9
Posts and beams are drawn manually. They

4 Under Joists/With Joists - A beam can
are not produced with the automatic framing. be drawn under the joists or up in the
floor platform with the joists. If the joist
1 Depth - Enter the vertical depth of depths and subfloor thickness have been set
beams in the plan.
in the Build Framing dialog, the beam
2 Thickness - Enter the beam thickness, height is properly positioned even if the
which appears as width in floor plan joists have not yet been produced. If With
view. Joists is specified the beams should be
drawn before framing is automatically
3 Type -Select the type of beam from the produced. Then the joists are broken and
drop-down list. The list includes
butted to the beam.
lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber,
lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type
5 Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a
can affect how the beam appears in cross beam is drawn along and over an
section and 3D views and in the material list. exterior wall, its outer surface snaps to either
482
the wall’s outer layer or outer main layer, as can affect how the post appears in cross
specified here. section and 3D views and in the material list.
Posts are produced manually by clicking in
8 Top (from floor) - When a post is
floor plan view where a post is desired using created on the lowest floor of a plan, a
the Post tool. footing for it is automatically produced. The
top of this footing is this distance below the
6 Dimension - A post is created initially bottom of the floor platform.
Framing
square with each side having this
dimension. It can be subsequently edited to 9 Width - Width of the automatically
have a rectangular shape with any produced footing under a new post.
dimensions.
10 Height - Height of the automatically
produced footing under a new post.
7 Type - Select a type of post from the
drop-down list. The list includes
lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber,
11 Square/Round - The new footing is
created either square or round in floor
lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type plan view.
Roof Tab
1 7
2
3
4
5
1 Build Roof Framing - Check this box automatically producing rafters. It also sets
once roof planes have been built to the initial offset value for laying out rafters
build roof framing for the entire model.
using the Multiple Copy edit button.
Spacing - Specify the rafter spacing.
2
This spacing is used when
483
Use Framing Reference - Select the roof plane, angled headers are produced
3
check box if you want to use a defined regardless of the state of the check box.
starting point for rafter layout.
5 Rafter Type - Select the type of rafter
from the drop-down list. The list
Note: Use Framing Reference is useful
when framing a gable roof, but not necessar- includes lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered
ily for a hip roof. When the Framing Refer- lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. This
ence is used, common rafters on either side changes the type for rafters, but not for
of a hip rafter do not meet in the same place. ridges or fascia. These can be changed
If the Framing Reference is not used, the manually after the roof framing is produced
automatic framing utility starts common rafter if desired.
spacing from each end of the horizontal
ridges, which results in common rafters on Changing the type does not affect how the
either side of hip jacks meeting each other. rafters are placed, but it does change how
they appear in cross section and 3D views
4 If Angled and the Materials List entries for this
Dormer Hole is framing.
checked, a gable roof
dormer creates a five 6 Blocking/Bridging - specifies how
sided hole in a roof blocking is manually drawn after the
plane, with the two top rafters have been placed. Blocking is
edges formed by the produced as a single object, but displays as
valleys of the dormer. separate pieces chopped up by the rafters, but
An angled double- it is moved and edited as if it were a single
header runs between framing object.
the doubled rafters on Blocking is produced perpendicular to the
one side to the ridge. roof plane, so blocking as seen in floor plan
On the opposite side, a shorter angled view represents the position of the top of the
doubled header frames the other valley. blocking.
If the Angled Dormer In Line produces blocking pieces that align
Hole check box is with each other.
cleared, a rectangular
hole is framed to Stagger produces blocking that alternates on
contain the dormer either side of the line you draw.
area, with its double Cross produces cross bridging that looks like
headers placed where in line blocking in floor plan view, but shows
the peak of the dormer as cross bridging in 3D views and the
roof meets the main materials list. Cross bridging is seldom used
roof plane. Rafters are with rafters.
placed within this hole at the top along the
valleys formed by the dormer roof sections. 7 The Width and Depth for Rafter,
If the top cross headers do not fit within the Ridge, Fascia, Eave Fascia and
Lookouts may all be set in the Roof tab.
484
Trusses Tab
1
5
Framing
2
3
6
4
The parameters set in this tab apply to any If this is not checked, a vertical member may
subsequently drawn trusses. They can be still be supplied, depending on what is
overridden for any selected group of trusses needed to support the chords at or closer than
using the Truss Specification dialog. The the specified maximum spans.
program uses these values to model trusses
for graphic representation only. 5 Under Maximum Span, set the
maximum length between junctions of
the supporting webbing to the Top Chord
Chief Architect does not engineer
trusses. Always consult an engineer or and Bottom Chord. Changing these values
truss company to have your trusses may cause different truss configurations such
professionally designed. as kingpost, queenpost, fink, howe, fan,
double fink, or double howe to be
represented. Experiment to see what type of
1 Top Chord - Specify the depth of the
Top Chord. trusses are possible.
These distances are measured horizontally
2 Bottom Chord - Specify the depth of
the Bottom Chord. for both rafters and joists. In some
circumstances, especially with more
3 Webbing - Specify the depth of the complex trusses, making these spans equal
Webbing.
may result in the webbing appearing more
normal or standard. See “Trusses” on page
4 For triangular trusses, check Require
Kingpost to require a vertical member 501.
from the roof peak to the bottom chord.
485
6 Roof and Floor/Ceiling - Specifies Materials Tab

whether the settings apply to Roof
trusses or Floor/Ceiling trusses. The Material tab sets the default materials
used for framing objects in 3D and render
views. These material specifications are not
Truss Spacing
used for material take-offs. Materials List
To set the truss spacing, select any truss, information, is derived from the structure
framing object, or CAD object in floor plan type of each framing object.
view, then click the Multiple Copy edit Changes made on the Materials tab of the
button. The Multiple Copy dialog opens if Build Framing dialog only effect
subsequently created framing, whether it is
the Multiple Copy edit button is clicked
automatically generated or manually drawn.
again. This dialog sets the truss spacing and
spacing for CAD objects. The spacing for The Materials tab of the Build Framing
joists, rafters and wall studs are noted but dialog is the same as the Materials tab on
cannot be set in this dialog. These spacings many other specification dialogs. See
are set in the Build Framing dialog. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Framing Reference Markers

Framing Reference Markers are If no framing reference marker is found on
reference points that specify how to lay the floor being framed, the closest framing
out automatically-produced framing. Layout reference marker on the first floor is used.
for wall, ceiling and floor framing starts at Normally, a single framing reference marker
the closest framing reference marker on the first floor plan is used for the entire
measured from the center of the area to be house.
framed.
486
Framing Reference Markers
Using Framing References

Note: It is a good idea to place at least one
framing reference marker on Floor 1. If no Manually drawn joists, rafters, trusses
framing reference markers exist in your plan, and studs can be moved a proper
the point at 0, 0 is used as the framing refer- distance from a framing reference marker.
ence marker location. This point may not be
located near your plan. Any selected group of framing objects that
are all parallel to each other can be moved
Framing
Wall framing and automatically-produced using the Move to Framing Ref button.
floor joists are always positioned by the These should have proper spacing relative to
program using the framing reference marker. each other before the move. Only one of the
You can elect to not use the framing objects is compared to the framing reference
reference marker for positioning rafters and and moved; the remaining objects are simply
ceiling joists in the Build Framing dialog. moved the same amount as the first object.
Placing Framing To move framing objects to a framing

Reference Markers reference marker
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select
1. Group select the framing objects.
Build> Framing> Framing Reference
Marker . Click in floor plan view to 2. Click the Move to Framing Ref edit
place the framing reference marker. A corner button.
of the first framing member snaps to this 3. The framing members are moved to the
point and all other framing members are laid nearest Framing Reference Marker.
out from there.
Framing reference markers snap to CAD The Move to Framing Ref button
objects first, and then to a wall main layer references the on-center spacing distance set
surface or corner if possible. in the Build Framing dialog, when it
positions a joist relative to the framing
To accurately position a marker, first reference marker. The first joist is this
position a CAD point then create the distance from the reference marker.
marker on top of it. See “Input Line” on page
847.
The spacing that is used for moving any
framing object can be viewed by selecting
the object and double-clicking the Multiple
Framing Reference Markers can be
modified just like other markers. See Copy edit button. The Copy Layout
“Markers” on page 823. Distances dialog shows the spacing for
each framing object type. The initial spacing
for floor and ceiling joists depends on the
platform containing them. The default
spacing for a platform is set in the Build
Framing dialog. A spacing specific to a
487
particular floor or ceiling platform is set in a platform. See “Joist Direction Lines” on
joist direction Line contained within the page 489.
Bearing Lines
Bearing Lines direct the program to Bearing lines snap to the center of nearby
lap or butt joists and/or rafters where parallel walls when framing is built.
they cross the line instead of framing across
it to the next wall.
Select Build> Framing> Bearing Line ,

then click and drag to draw a bearing line as
you would draw a CAD line. Bearing lines
are edited just like CAD lines or polylines, as
well. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 95 or “Editing Open Polyline Based
If a bearing line exists, the program laps or
butts the joist and/or rafters over the line, Joists butting over a Bearing
depending on the option selected in the Line and interior wall
Build Framing dialog. See “Floor Tabs” on
A platform can be split into two by a bearing
page 475.
line, and the joist direction and/or depth can
be specified separately on each side of the
bearing line. Each platform takes on
properties given by the joist direction line it
contains. See “Joist Direction Lines” on page
489.
Placing a Floor/Ceiling Beam in a plan

also can also have the same effect as a
Bearing Line when Bearing Beam is
checked in its Beam Specification
Joists lapping over a Bearing Line
dialog. See “Beam Specification Dialog” on
page 498.
A bearing line should start outside the floor
or ceiling platform and end outside of it,
Note: Always rebuild framing after drawing
passing completely through the building. the Bearing Line in order to update the model
using the new information.
488
Joist Direction Lines

A Joist Direction Line defines the The text along the joist direction line states
direction joists are laid out. Every floor the joist size and spacing for the platform.
platform can have its own joist direction. If a Unless the individual joist direction line is
direction line is not specified, the joists are edited, these values reflect the settings
run the way that makes them shortest. specified on the appropriate floor tab of the
Framing
Build Framing dialog.
Select Build> Framing> Joist Direction
and draw a joist direction line as you
would draw a CAD line.
Joist Direction
The Joist Direction Line controls the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor
or ceiling platform containing it.
To change this information, click a joist
direction line to select it and click the Open
Object edit button. The Joist
Direction Specification dialog opens.
489
• Define the joist Spacing for the platform.

• Define the Depth for these joists. In most
instances, this is not the recommended
method for specifying joist depth. You
should instead use the Floor Structure
Thickness and Subfloor Thickness
boxes in the Structure tab of the Room
Specification dialog for the rooms
over these platforms.
Ceiling Platform Floor Platform
The Joist Direction Line changes the joist
specification for the entire platform, but does
not affect the settings in the Build Framing Normally, the program produces a floor
dialog. Settings in the Joist Direction platform under the second floor living area
Specification dialog affect subsequently and a ceiling platform under the eave area,
produced framing only in the platform that which is not a room area.
contains the selected joist direction. This is fine if the first floor has supporting
walls or a large beam under the second floor
Note: For the Depth value to take effect, kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to regen- should extend to the first floor outside
erate the platform with the proper thickness.
supporting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
Using Joist Direction Lines Use joist direction lines to define separate
floor platforms under the second floor living
Two Joist Direction Lines, one on either area and ceiling platforms under the attic
side of a Bearing Line, can split a platform eave area or one continuous framed platform
into two for the purpose of defining different across both spaces.
framing specifications for each area.
To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a
A less common application would be to use a single platform, draw a Joist Direction Line
single joist direction line across two separate
that crosses the boundary between them.
platforms in order to define a single framing
specification for both platforms. This is Following is a diagram of the original
illustrated by the following example: framing with the new Joist Direction Line
spanning the knee wall area.
A 1 1/2 story house is shown in cross section
in the diagram.
490
New Joist
Direction Line
Knee Wall on 2nd

Floor shown in
Framing
Original
reference
Framing
The 3D view of the framing also reflects the

(Note: Several framing members have been change.
deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line
more visible.)
Although the framing of the 2nd floor
platform is being edited here, the joist
direction is drawn on the first floor. In Chief Floor and Ceiling
Architect, floor platform framing displays Joists combined
with the floor below, so its joist direction
information must be placed there, as well.
You must click the Rebuild Walls/ Floors/
Ceilings button after placing a Joist
Direction Line before the changes take
effect.
Next, rebuild the floor framing for the
second floor and the ceiling framing for the
first floor. The floor framing now spans into
the area which was previously framed using
ceiling joists.
491
Wall Framing Details

Wall framing is produced when the Build Wall tab of the Build Framing dialog. See
Wall Framing check box on the Wall tab of “Wall Tab” on page 478.
the Build Framing dialog is selected. Wall
Wall framing details for interior walls are
framing displays in floor plan, 3D, and cross
displayed from the inside as well. Select a
section/elevation views. A Wall Detail for
wall and look for the S (Start) and E (End)
each wall in the model is also created when
indicators to determine which is the inside
framing is built.
edge. Temporarily change the line color of
Wall Details are special elevation views of the bottom line for the interior wall type in
the wall framing for individual walls. Unlike the Wall Type Definitions dialog, and the
CAD details, a wall framing detail cannot be inside edge becomes obvious in floor plan
opened from the CAD Details dialog. view. To display the wall detail from the
opposite side for any interior wall, select the
To open a Wall Detail from floor plan view,
wall, open it and select Flip Layers on the
select a wall and click the Open Wall Detail
General tab of the Wall Specification
edit button. If no framing has been dialog. Rebuild wall framing and the wall
produced for a particular wall, the Open framing detail is now shown from the
Wall Detail edit button is not available opposite side.
when the wall is selected. Most framing objects occupy the entire
A wall framing detail is comprised of a thickness of the wall main layer. Some, such
polyline that forms the boundary of the wall as a component of a doubled header or a
and the framing members within the wall. corner sheetrock nailer, may be turned flat
and oriented to one side of the wall.
The framing members of a wall are the studs,
plates and headers. These are standard Doubled headers display one behind the
framing objects and are placed on the other in the wall framing detail. Access
Framing, Wall layer in the Layer Display doubled objects by clicking one, then
Options dialog. See “Layer Display pressing the Tab key or Next edit button
Options Dialog” on page 218. to select the other.
When you open a detail, inspect it and The boundary of a wall detail is a polyline
carefully compare the framing layout to your that marks the boundary of the wall framing.
model. The polyline is placed on the Wall Polyline
A wall framing detail shows the wall as it layer in the Layer Display Options dialog
would appear if viewed from the inside. and is not typically displayed. You may find
Change this interior view to an exterior view it helpful to display it for reference if you are
by selecting the Build Wall Framing extensively editing the wall. The layer
Details from the Exterior check box on the should remain locked.
492
Drawing Wall Framing Members
If any wall framing has been produced, the Any edits made to wall framing in the wall
framing objects in each wall are included in detail are lost if you rebuild the wall framing
the Material List, listing an accurate from the Build Framing dialog. To prevent
accounting of each type, amount, and length this for a particular wall or group of walls,
of the required framing objects. select them, open the Wall Specification
dialog, and check Retain Wall Framing on
Note: When a wall or an opening is modified, the General tab.
the framing detail is not be automatically
Framing
updated. Rebuild wall framing to show the
changes. If wall framing has not been built, it
is only estimated for the Material List.
Drawing Wall Framing Members

Draw a framing member by dragging as you
Before building any framing, review the would a line or a wall. By default, a framing
settings on all tabs of the Build object measures1 1/2 inches or 38mm thick.
Framing dialog. The depth is determined by the width of the
wall’s main layer.
In a Wall Detail, select CAD> Boxes and
When drawn in a wall detail, the framing
Framing> Framing to draw studs and member is placed in the wall.
plates. Although uncommon, you can also
use it to draw a general framing object in If you draw a general framing member in
floor plan view. floor plan view, the top of the framing
member is placed at height 0.
Displaying Framing
The display of framing members is In Floor Plan View
controlled in the Layer Display Options
dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page Joists and rafters are represented in floor plan
221. view by CAD objects that are essentially
long, thin rectangles. By default, framing
In the CAD Defaults dialog you can polylines have a solid white fill, and new
specify new framing members to be drawn members display in front of older ones. See
with a white fill. This helps distinguish new “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 878.
framing members from previously drawn
framing members. See “CAD Defaults” on Framing and trusses can be represented by a
page 842. single line instead of as a polyline by
checking Use line for framing on the Line
Properties panel of the Preferences
493
dialog. See “Line Properties Panel” on page In Cross Section/

200. Elevation Views
In 3D Views To display framing in a cross section/
elevation view, make sure the framing layers
The easiest way to view framing in 3D is to are checked in the default layer set for Cross
use either the Vector Framing Overview Sections. See “Layer Set Defaults Dialog” on
or Render Framing Overview tool, page 225.
which displays the model using the 3D You can also use the Delete View Surface
Framing Set layer set.
tool to temporarily delete the surfaces of
Framing objects can display in other 3D and wall layers or other objects that block the
cross section/elevation views, although by view.
default they are not set to do so. If you wish
to see framing in other views, turn on the In cross section/elevation views, framing
framing layers in the appropriate layer set. objects that are cut by the cross section plane
display as boxes containing an ’X’.
To reveal framing covered by other objects
or wall layers, use the Delete View Surface
tool.
Editing Framing
Classroom Design Project Training Box-Based Objects” on page 111. Also, in
Video: Editing Framing Cross Section/Elevation views headers can
be edited like closed polylines. See “Editing
Framing members can be individually
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
selected in all views. Some framing members
107.
can be group selected. Once selected,
framing members can be edited using the edit In a camera view or overview, the handles
handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the that display on a framing member depend on
Framing Specification dialog. See where it is clicked for selection and your
“Framing Specification Dialog” on page 497. current zoom factor.
• Click the top surface to display the same
Using the Edit Handles edit handles as in floor plan view, allow-
Framing members can be drawn, edited and ing you to rotate, move, and extend or
moved much the way CAD lines can. See shorten the length of the member.
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 95. • Click a side surface to display the same
edit handles as in an elevation view, one
In Cross Section/Elevation views, joists and
at each end and one at the center.
rafters cut by the cross section and displaying
a cross box can also be edited. See “Editing
494
Editing Framing
• Zoom in and click on the appropriate drawing group. See “Move to Front of
edge to display edit handles that control Group” on page 122.
the width and depth of framing members.
• Click the Break Line edit button to
Using the Edit Toolbar add a complete break to the selected
object. See “Break Line” on page 130.
A selected framing member can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Framing
edit toolbar. As with most objects, framing ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
members can be copied, replicated, moved, intersect the selected object. See “Trim
deleted, etc. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on and Extend” on page 142.
page 97.
Wall framing cannot be copied in Wall Detail to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
windows but not in floor plan view. sected by the selected object. See “Trim
to make a series of copies at set intervals. • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
See “Multiple Copy” on page 139. ton to created a mitered joint. See “Fillet
Two Lines” on page 131.
to slow down the mouse speed when • Click the Move to Framing Reference
using the edit handles. See “Accurate edit button to move the selected
Move” on page 125. object to a framing reference. See “Fram-
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular ing Reference Markers” on page 486.
edit button to make the selected fram-
Mitered Joints
ing member parallel or perpendicular to
another straight edge. See “Using Make Mitered joints can be created using the Fillet
Two Lines edit button. Click on the end
• Click the Center Object edit button edge of a framing member such as a joist,
to center most objects along the edge of a click the Fillet Two Lines edit button,
room or on a sink. See “Center Object” then click on the end edge of another nearby
on page 127. joist to extend one framing item to another
framing item and join them with angled cut.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit See “Fillet Two Lines” on page 131.
button to reflect the selected object(s)
about another object. See “Reflect About
Wall Details
Object” on page 135.
In a Wall Detail, the length, width and
• Click the Move to Front of Group location of any wall framing member can be
edit button to display the selected object changed using the edit handles. See “Wall
in front of other objects in the same Framing Details” on page 492.
495
Roof and Floor Trusses Deleting Framing

Roof and floor trusses cannot be edited like Individual and group-selected framing
regular framing members can and are members can be deleted the way other
discussed in their own chapter. See “Editing objects in the program are. See “Deleting
Truss Shape” on page 505. Objects” on page 141.
Categories of framing, such as wall framing
Because framing does not update when
a plan is modified, it is best to wait until or floor and ceiling framing, can also be
your design is final before editing framing. deleted in the Delete Objects dialog. See
“Delete Objects Dialog” on page 141.
Keeping Framing Current

When you modify your plan, move walls, When wall framing is rebuilt, all objects in
raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof, each Wall Detail are deleted and regenerated
any framing present in the plan does not unless Retain Wall Framing is checked in
update to reflect your changes. In order for the General tab of the Wall Specification
the framing to be updated, you must dialog for that wall.
regenerate automatically produced framing
and either edit or delete and replace manual Manual Framing
framing.
Any manually drawn framing objects and
copies of them are retained when framing is
Automatic Framing
rebuilt.
When floor, ceiling or roof framing is
If a plan is not final, do not spend a lot of
regenerated, all automatically produced
time altering or copying automatically
framing objects and any copies of them are
produced framing objects. It is best to wait
deleted and new framing is calculated.
until your design is final before doing
manual framing work.
Framing and the Materials List

Each framing member created in the plan is Depending on the type of framing member, it
counted in the Materials List. This list is as may show as R (Roofing), SF (Sub Floor), or
accurate as the framing in the plan that F (Framing – general).
produces it. See “Materials Lists” on page
R (Roofing) contains trusses, rafters and
1003.
sheathing .
SF (Sub Floor) contains all floor and ceiling
framing joists including sheathing.
496
Framing Specification Dialog
F (Framing – general) contains all wall 2. If framing objects exist, then the framing
framing and the framing members created by members are counted instead of esti-
a CAD framing box. mated for the Material List.
It is important to note that the Materials List Roof framing is treated the same way.
can be produced either of two ways.
1. If no roof framing objects are found, an
1. If no framing has been produced in the estimation is done.
Framing
model, then the amount of framing that 2. If even one rafter is created, the program
would be produced is estimated as accu- assumes roof framing has been produced
rately as possible. Total lineal footage and the Material List produces a count
for various depths of rafter and joist of the rafters found in the model.
material is given, rather than a quantity
of specific lumber lengths and sizes.
Framing Specification Dialog

Select a floor joist, ceiling joist, or rafter and open the Framing Specification dialog
for the framing member type selected.
click the Open Object edit button to
General Tab
5
6
1
2
3
4
1 Changing one of the following three one of the following three objects prevent
objects can cause changes in the other that object’s value from changing.
two. Checking the radio button in front of
497
Top Height is the height of the top of the

5 Set the framing member’s Thickness,
framing object. This is an absolute height, which appears as its width in floor plan
where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter this is view.
the top height at its low end.
6 Type - Select the type of joist from the
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of drop-down list. The list includes
the framing object. This is an absolute lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber,
height, where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type
this is the bottom height its low end. does not affect how the framing is placed, but
it does change how it appears in cross section
Depth is the depth of the framing object. For
and 3D views and the Material List entries
a rafter this is the depth measured
for this framing.
perpendicular to the roof plane.
Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower 7 Manual Rafter Height - This
checkbox is only available for rafters.
the framing object from its current position.
Normally, the height of each end of a rafter is
Once a value is entered, the other controls
reset after any move or edit so that it is
are disabled. The amount is added to both the
located just under the roof surface. Check
top height and the bottom height when you
this box to allow the height of the rafter to be
click OK, and does not affect the depth.
changed.
2 Length of the framing object. For a
rafter this length is measured along the Line Style Tab
top of the rafter, and so is greater than the
length measured in floor plan view. For information about the Line Style tab, see
Changing this expands or contracts the “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
framing object about the location specified
by the radio buttons described below. Fill Style Tab
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
3 Angle of the framing object in floor “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
plan view. Changing this rotates the
object about the location specified by the
radio buttons described below. Materials Tab
4 Specify the point the framing object For information about the Materials tab, see
expands or rotates around. Start refers “Materials Tab” on page 710.
to the location from which you started
drawing the framing object.
Beam Specification Dialog

Select a beam and click the Open Object Specification dialog.
edit button to open the Beam
498
Post Specification Dialog
General Tab Line Style Tab

The General Tab of the Beam For information about the Line Style tab, see
Specification dialog is similar to the “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
General Tab of the Framing
Specification dialog for joists. See Fill Style Tab
“Framing Specification Dialog” on page 497.
Framing
When Bearing Beam is checked, the beam “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
behaves like a Bearing Line, and joists break
above it. See “Bearing Lines” on page 488. Materials Tab
Note: If a beam structure type is specified as For information about the Materials tab, see
concrete, the beam does not appear as such “Materials Tab” on page 710.
in the materials list. Instead, the amount of
concrete required for all such beams and for
all such posts is listed. In addition, the square
footage required for beam forms, and for post
forms is also listed.
Post Specification Dialog

General Tab
4
1
1 Lock - These four values are for one of these values prevent thats value
interrelated. Selecting the radio button from changing.
499
2 Top Height is the height of the top of 3 Post Width 1 & 2- Specify the post
the post. This is an absolute height, width in each dimension.
where 0 is the first floor.
Specify the Angle of the post’s rotation.
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of
the post. This is an absolute height, where 0 4 Type - Select a type from the drop
down list. Choices include lumber, I-
is the first floor.
joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I
Total Height - The height of the post, or the and steel box. Changing the type does not
difference between the top height and the affect how the post is placed, but it does
bottom height. change how it appears in cross section, 3D
views, and Material List entries.
Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower
the post from its current position. Once a
Note: If a concrete Type is specified, the post
value is entered, the other controls are is not listed as such in the Materials List.
disabled. The amount is added to both the top Instead, the amount of concrete required for
height and the bottom height when you click all concrete beams and posts is listed. The
OK, and does not affect the total height. square footage required for beam forms, and
for post forms is also listed.
500
Chapter 16:
Trusses
Trusses
Chapter Overview
There are two basic ways to frame a roof. Chapter Contents
The first is commonly called “stick framing,” • Floor and Ceiling Trusses
or sometimes “handstacking” or “cut-and- • Roof Trusses
stack.” This type of roof incorporates • Editing Trusses
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling • Editing Truss Shape
joists. See “Framing” on page 469. • Truss Details
The other method is to use prefabricated, • Truss Labels
engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect • Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
allows you to design and display a wide • Truss Base
variety of trusses. • Hip Trusses
• Girder Trusses
• Scissors Trusses
Disclaimer
• Truss Base Specification Dialog
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses. • Roof Truss Specification Dialog
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are • Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
for illustrative purposes only. They can show
how trusses are used in your plan, and help
you communicate to the licensed engineer
who produces your final truss design where
you want your trusses and how you would
like them to work.
Always have your truss designs

approved by a licensed engineer.
501
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses can be used Roof trusses seek an exterior wall and adjust
instead of joists to frame platforms. As their length automatically. Floor trusses do
with manually-drawn floor and ceiling not, but if you start or end your truss close to
framing, the room type above determines a wall surface or CAD object, the truss snaps
whether a floor or ceiling truss is drawn. For to the surface or object.
example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a
The Trusses tab of the Build Framing
single story home will be a ceiling truss,
dialog contains default settings for floor and
while a truss drawn on the first floor of a
ceiling trusses. See “Trusses Tab” on page
two-story building will be a floor truss for
485. These default settings can be overridden
the 2nd floor.
by the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss
To place a floor or ceiling truss in your plan, Specification dialog. See “Floor/Ceiling
select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog” on page 521.
Truss . Click and drag to create a truss in
floor plan view.
Roof Trusses
Roof trusses can only be built after roof contract based on the roof and ceiling planes
and ceiling planes are modeled. Select that define it.
Build> Framing> Roof Truss, then click
Trusses can end on interior walls. You can
and drag in floor plan view within one or
draw a truss that partially crosses the
more roof planes to manually draw a roof
building by starting and/or ending it within
truss.
two feet (600mm) of the interior wall. The
Draw a truss as you would a CAD line, by truss extends over the wall’s main layer. Its
dragging from the start of the truss to the end lines up with the main layer surface on
end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable the far side of the wall.
end wall or at the ridge end of a hip roof. The
A roof truss can exist only between roof and
program shapes the truss so that it fits
ceiling planes. You cannot draw a roof truss
properly between the roof and ceiling planes.
above an area where you have unchecked
One or both ends of the truss may be Ceiling over this room in the Room
truncated if they come against existing roof Specification dialog. If this check box is
trusses. If a truss is drawn across another cleared, you must manually draw a ceiling
truss, it terminates exactly on the surface of plane before a roof truss can be drawn over
the existing truss, producing a girder truss. that area. See “Structure Tab” on page 299.
If the roof or ceiling planes vary, so do the The placement of webbing in a newly drawn
trusses. The ends of a truss expand or truss is controlled by the Top Chord and
502
Roof Trusses
Bottom Chord settings under Maximum room, such as in a cape cod style home. The
Span on the Trusses tab of the Framing following is a typical cross section view of a
dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on page 485. building with attic trusses:
If you intend to use roof trusses, select the
Trusses (no birdsmouth) check box in the
Build Roof dialog. When this is selected,
the rafter depth that determines the roof
plane thickness is taken from the Top Chord
depth on the Trusses tab of the Framing
dialog. If it is not checked, the roof plane
thickness is determined by the rafter Depth
setting on the Roof tab. Certain conditions should be met before an
attic truss can be built.
When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is selected
Trusses
and Raise Off Plate is zero, the bottom edge • Building should be of sufficient width to
of the top chord bears on the top of the allow for attic space.
exterior supporting wall at the outside edge • The pitch, designated in the Build Roof
of the main layer. No birdsmouth is provided. dialog, should provide appropriate ceiling
height for storage or living space. The
The truss top chord can be raised by entering
goal is to create a continuous plane from
the distance from the top plate to the bottom
the roof’s ridge to the first story baseline.
of the chord in Raise Off Plate in the Build
Typical pitches for such a condition range
Roof dialog.
from 8 in 12 to 12 in 12, or greater.
If the program does not have enough
Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is
information to model the trusses, a warning
ready to be designated as an attic truss.
message displays. For example, a truss that is
under the roof overhang but not over a
1. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
ceiling produces this message:
and click the Open Object edit
“Roof and ceiling surfaces too close
button to display the Roof Truss
together or cannot be found, so cannot
make truss.”
2. Select the Attic Truss check box and
The incorrect truss may still display in floor click OK. See “Roof Truss Specification
plan view with a label of the form “TR-*”. If Dialog” on page 518.
it does, it should be deleted or moved. See
“Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 504. The final product can be scrutinized in a
framing overview or as a CAD detail, see
Attic Trusses “Truss Details” on page 505.
Attic trusses, a useful variation of roof

trusses, can be drawn if a plan contains an
attic area to either side and above an upstairs
503
Editing Trusses
Trusses can be selected like other objects in • If drawn along an exterior wall, it snaps
Chief Architect. See “Selecting Objects” on so that its outer surface is flush with the
page 92 for more information. outer surface of the wall's main layer.
Once selected, trusses can be edited using • The center line can snap to the edge or
dimensions, their edit handles, the edit corner of a nearby roof plane. To prevent
toolbar buttons, or by opening them for this, zoom in closer while moving it or
specification. toggle Object Snaps off.
Trusses can be deleted all at once in the When selected in Cross Section/Elevation
Delete Objects dialog. See “Delete views and 3D views, trusses edit like closed
Objects Dialog” on page 141. polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
Using Dimensions
Like joists or rafters, trusses can be selected
Trusses can be relocated precisely using and moved in 3D views. The only difference
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using is that the Lock Truss and Webbing setting
Dimensions” on page 804. in the Roof Truss Specification dialog
prevents the truss from moving back to
Using the Edit Handles between the roof and ceiling planes the next
time it is edited or otherwise changed.
When selected in floor plan view, trusses edit
like lines. See “Editing Line Based Objects”
on page 95.
When a truss is moved, its shape updates to A selected truss can be edited in a variety of
conform to the roof and ceiling plane ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
positions in its new location. As with most objects, trusses can be copied,
replicated, moved, and deleted. See “Using
If a truss has been locked, the size does not the Edit Toolbar” on page 97.
update if the truss is moved, but maintains its
original settings. See “Roof Truss The following edit buttons may display on
Specification Dialog” on page 518. the edit toolbar for selected trusses.
The width and depth of truss chords can be • Click the Select Next Object button
changed in the truss’s specification dialog, to select nearby objects instead of the
but not using the edit handles. selected door, particularly the wall it is
placed in.
When a roof truss is moved, it snaps to two
things: • Click the Open Object edit button to
open the truss for specification. the truss
specification dialogs are covered at the
end of this chapter.
504
Editing Truss Shape
• In floor plan view, an individual truss or a

3. Click the Multiple Copy edit button
selected group of trusses that are all
again to open the Multiple Copy dia-
parallel to each other can be moved the
log. See “Multiple Copy” on page 139.
proper distance from a framing reference
marker using the Move to Framing Ref 4. Enter the correct spacing in the All
Trusses box. Once set, click OK.
edit button. See “Framing Reference
Markers” on page 486. 5. Select the truss and use the Move edit
handle to drag it perpendicularly. The
Copying Trusses pointer becomes a four-headed arrow
when it is over the Move handle.
When a truss has been edited to suit your
6. New trusses appear as you drag. Drag as
needs, use the Multiple Copy edit tool to far as necessary to produce all desired
create duplicates at specified intervals. The trusses. Each truss is created according
Trusses
copies conform to the roof and ceiling plane to the particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss
positions in their new location. Base planes above and below it.
To use Multiple Copy If copied trusses become different from the

original as a result of the roof/ceiling planes
1. Select the truss to be copied in floor plan around them, their labels are different from
view. that of the original. See “Truss Labels” on
page 506.
button.
Editing Truss Shape

When a truss is viewed at a 90 degree angle The Lock truss and webbing attribute is set
in a cross section/elevation view, its shape after editing so that the truss does not reshape
can be edited. Click on the truss to select it itself back between the roof and ceiling
and edit handles display on a surrounding planes the next time it is edited or otherwise
polyline. Change the shape of this polyline changed. See “Roof Truss Specification
and the truss regenerates inside it. Use this Dialog” on page 518.
function to change overhang or truss end
details rather than the overall truss shape.
Truss Details
When you draw the first truss, the program selecting CAD> CAD Detail Management
automatically creates a CAD detail named and selecting it from the list.
Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by
505
truss type in floor plan view and in the

Materials List. The quantity of each type is
also listed.
Note: The Truss Detail is for display of

trusses only. Editing the members that make
up the trusses in the Truss Detail is not rec-
ommended.
To restore an edited Truss Detail
1. Delete any new members you have

drawn in the detail view.
2. In floor plan view, select the truss and
All the trusses used in your plan are
open the Roof Truss Specification
displayed in the Truss Detail. If several
dialog.
trusses are identical, only one diagram is
drawn. The label at the lower left of the 3. Click OK and the truss regenerates
diagram gives a number that designates this along with its Truss Detail diagram.
Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in floor conditions are different, the copied truss is
plan view in the format TR-xx. The xx are built differently and displays a different
numbers following the consecutive order in label.
which each distinct truss configuration or
Truss labels are centered on the truss that
type was created.
they represent. If the truss is moved or
For example, the first truss type created is deleted, the label is moved or deleted as well.
labeled TR-1; the second, TR-2; and so on. Truss labels cannot be selected by
Truss labels also display in the Truss Detail themselves. Truss labels are selected when
and the Materials List. Floor and ceiling the truss is selected. Truss labels are located
trusses are labeled FTR-xx. on their own layer, so their display can be
A copied truss has the same label as the
dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
original if the conditions at the location of
on page 218.
the copy are the same as the original. If
506
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing

After you have laid out all the trusses for The framing produced is extended or
your roof, the Build Framing dialog can be truncated where it runs into a truss. The
used to create roof framing that fills in areas exception to this truncation is that hip ridges
not framed by the trusses. and common rafters at the end of a hip roof
can pass over a drop hip truss.
Open the Framing dialog and check Build
Roof Framing on the Roof tab. Be sure that Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass
the on-center spacing of the rafters is correct. over a truss at the gable and end at the next
truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are
chopped into blocking between the trusses.
Trusses
Truss Base
A Truss Base defines the boundary
separating the tops of normal roof
trusses and valley fill roof trusses that lie
across and above them.
To define a truss base, select Build> Roof>
Truss Base . . Create the truss base as you
would a roof plane or ceiling plane. No
overhang is produced.
The truss base is similar to a roof plane in its
creation and definition. If you select it and
click the Open Object edit button, the
Truss Base Specification dialog will
open. See “Truss Base Specification Dialog”
on page 516.
Truss bases are used to create valley fill
trusses. The best way to understand valley
fill trusses is the example of an “L” shaped
house with a gable roof. The wider wing of
this house is trussed through from end to end
with normal trusses. Starting at its outside
end, the narrow wing is trussed with normal
trusses until the wider wing is reached.
507
Where the valley begins, valley fill trusses Only three valley fill trusses, TR-2, TR-3,
are placed over the top of the main roof until and TR-4, are used in the following example.
the peak of the narrow wing's roof is reached.
Truss Base (triangular - shown hatched)
Valley Fill Trusses (shown darker)
Normal Trusses
Valley Fill trusses climb up roof made using normal trusses
The truss base defines the footprint of the The purpose of a truss base is to form a
valley fill trusses on the main roof. In order boundary separating normal trusses below
to model the trusses correctly, you must draw from the valley fill trusses above. You
the truss base. already know that trusses are built between
roof planes and ceiling planes. A truss
If drawn correctly, a truss base should be in
passing through a truss base is placed below
the same plane with, and its baseline should
the plane of the base if it is more
be collinear with its surrounding roof plane.
508
Truss Base
perpendicular to the baseline of the truss

base. It is built above the plane of the base if 2. Click here
it is more parallel to the baseline.
To create a truss base
1. Create an L-shaped house with the roof

plan shown below.
1. Draw Truss Base baseline
Trusses
3. Move the pointer and click on the point
where the gable intersects the main roof.
4. The program creates a rectangular truss
base. Use its edit handles to change its
shape as needed.
In the image below, the truss base has a
diagonal hatch pattern.
The triangular area of overlap between the

main roof and the gable must be defined as a
Truss Base.
2. Choose Build> Roof> Truss Base ,

then draw a baseline along the outside
edge of the wall from valley to valley.
The baseline is darkened in this diagram.
509
Once the truss base is created, lay out the

trusses.
5. Draw the first truss.
6. Select the truss and click the Multiple
Copy tool.
7. Drag from the Move handle to create
copies at the defined intervals.
The trusses placed for the main roof generate
right through the truss base, stopping on top
of the wall, eliminating the overhang in that Select the truss
area.
10. Drag the normal truss up into the truss

base. Copies of the truss appear as you
drag the pointer.
Note: Trusses that run perpendicular to the

Note: No overhang in this area. baseline of a Truss Base go under the Truss
Base. Trusses that run parallel to the base-
line of the Truss Base climb the Truss Base.
8. When the main trusses are in place, draw
the first truss on the gable in a position
As you drag, the truss copies appear to all be
where it will be full length.
full length.
9. Select the truss and click the Multiple
Copy edit button on the Edit toolbar.
510
Hip Trusses
valley trusses that are darker in the dia-

gram below.
Drag the truss
Trusses
11. Release the mouse button, the copies are
clipped by the truss base. Note the three
Hip Trusses
Hip roofs with various truss applications can sub-girder hip trusses, and drop hip or
be modeled, including step down hip trusses, California trusses.
Step Down Hip

Step Down hip roofs are the quickest style of
hip truss framing to produce.
In the illustration below, the flat-topped
trusses are called hip trusses. Alternating hip
trusses are colored differently to improve
visibility.
511
Step Down Hip Roof
Jack Trusses
Hip Trusses (4)

Hip Jack
To create a step down hip truss system 3. Stop when the height of the hip truss
reaches a reasonable minimum.
1. First, draw a Roof Truss at the apex 4. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw hip
of the triangular hip roof plane. It will jacks along the hip ridge from the last
snap exactly into position. truss out into the overhang.
2. Select the truss; click the Multiple
5. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw a
Copy edit button; and click and drag jack truss from the intersection of the
the Move handle down into the hip to last hip truss and the hip jack to the eave.
create copies at regular intervals. See
“Copying Trusses” on page 505. 6. Select the jack truss; click the Multiple
Copy edit button; and lay out jack
trusses up to the other hip jack.
Subgirder Hip
Subgirders are the partial trusses that butt truss has one face colored dark gray, and
into the doubled truss at the end of the main several subgirders are colored light gray.
run. In the following illustration, the double
512
Hip Trusses
Subgirder Hip
Trusses
Double Truss
Subgirder Trusses (11)
To create a subgirder truss system 4. Select it and using the Multiple Copy
edit button, make copies in both
1. Draw a Roof Truss where the hip directions. Stop when the height of the
apex meets the ridge. subgirders reach a reasonable minimum.
2. Double it by drawing a second truss on 5. Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses
the far side from the hip section. as in a step down hip system.
3. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw the

first subgirder from the hip apex out to
the eaves.
513
Drop Hip
A Drop Hip, or California Hip, system uses Two of the drop hip trusses are colored gray
drop hip trusses to support stick frame hip to help distinguish them. Notice that the
ridges and common rafters. common rafters are supported by the drop
hip trusses.
Drop Hip (or California Hip)
Common Rafters
Drop Hip Trusses (4) (deepen the joist
for this truss)
To create a drop hip truss system Specification dialog; and select the
Drop hip truss check box.
1. Start a drop hip truss system as you 3. Use the Build Framing dialog to pro-
would a step down hip system. duce the common rafters, and the short
2. When the hip trusses are drawn, group joists at the hip end.
select them; open the Truss
514
Girder Trusses
Advantages and
Disadvantages of
the Different Hip Systems
Each of hip roof method has its advantages.
With both the Step Down hip and the
Subgirder hip systems, you can get almost
everything you need from the truss company.
You will need to get small corner jack and
Spacing is larger down the roof
end jack trusses in addition to the larger
sections on either side of the hip.
trusses.
With the Step Down hip, if the hip trusses
are placed according to your standard on Subgirder Hip
Trusses
center spacing, the space measured down the
hip between the trusses is larger than the The Drop Hip system eliminates the spacing
standard. problems because the roof sheathing is nailed
to common rafters that pass over the drop hip
trusses. The disadvantage to this system is
that it requires the rafters in addition to the
trusses, and with a shallow pitch roof the
drop hip truss may not be deep enough to
give sufficient strength.
The first two methods normally require
blocking along the hip ridges. The third uses
a continuous hip ridge rafter as well as
Spacing is larger down the hip common rafters that run over the drop hip
Step Down Hip trusses. Blocking and rafters can be drawn in
manually, but are often supplied by the
With the subgirder system, spacing automatic framing generator. See “Mixing
measuring down the roof sections on either Trusses with Stick Framing” on page 507.
side of the hip, near the hip is too large.
Girder Trusses
Girder trusses provide support for trusses In the program, trusses may not cross each
that are cut short, for example, by a reverse other. If a truss is drawn past another truss
gable or a skylight. They are often doubled- crossing its path, the system automatically
or tripled-up for strength. shortens it so that it butts into the existing
truss.
515
end jack truss; or draw a truss between two

trusses, forming a girder. This may be
necessary for a large opening, such as a
skylight.
Draw a new truss from an existing truss to

the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn over sloping ceiling planes are Below is an example of a room with a 6 in 12
called Scissor trusses. Draw ceiling planes pitch gable roof and 3 in 12 pitch ceiling
as you would manual roof planes by planes.
selecting Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane .
Truss Base Specification Dialog

The Truss Base Specification dialog is are not the same as roof planes, Chief
almost identical to the Roof Plane Architect handles the positioning of the two
Specification dialog. Although truss bases in a similar manner.
516
Truss Base Specification Dialog
General Tab
6
7
1 8
2
3
4
5
Trusses
Four values define 3D orientation of a truss
2 Baseline - Define a new base line
base: Ridge/Top Height, Baseline Height, height.
Fascia Top Height, and Pitch. These values
are related; if one is changed, the others 3 Fascia top - Define a new height for
the lowest point of the truss base.
change as well.
Usually, this is the same as the Baseline.
These values are measured from the first
floor elevation of 0’ 0". Baseline Height and 4 Pitch - Change the pitch for the
selected truss base.
Pitch should be set identical to those for the
roof plane that surrounds the truss base. If you lock the pitch and change one of the
other values, the truss base moves vertically
Click the radio button to the right of a value
keeping the same slope. It does not pivot.
to define it as the pivot point for the truss
base and prevent it from being changed.
5 Select the Pitch in degrees check box
to display pitch in degrees rather than
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
run-and-rise units.
representation of the truss base.
1 Ridge/Top - Define a new value for the

highest point of the selected truss base.
517
6 Select the Up or Down check boxes to Polyline Tab

display the truss base one floor up or
down from the floor it is currently on. For information about the Polyline tab, see
7 Rafter Depth - The truss base is a
plane used by the program to place Selected Line Tab
trusses, so it has no rafters. This value should
be the same as that for the surrounding roof For information about the Selected Line tab,
plane in order to align the truss base with it. see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
8 Vertical Rafter Depth, Top of Plate Line Style Tab

and Overhang from Baseline are
shown for reference. For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Specification Dialog” on page 850.
Options Tab
Fill Style Tab
Click Up to display the truss base up one
floor, or click Down to show it on the floor For information about the Fill Style tab, see
below. If no higher or lower floor exists, the “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
option is not available.
Roof Truss Specification Dialog

Select a roof truss or group of roof trusses only individual trusses, such as gable trusses,
while others affect the whole group.
and click the Open Object edit button to
open the Roof Truss Specification The shape or volume of a roof truss is
dialog. controlled by the roof planes above it and the
ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
The Roof Truss Specification dialog from this dialog.
allows you to redefine parts of an existing
truss or group of trusses. Some settings affect
518
Roof Truss Specification Dialog
General Tab
10
1
2
3
11
4 12
5
6 13
7 14
8
Trusses
9
Top Chord - Specify the depth.

1
Bottom Chord - Specify the depth.
2
Webbing - Specify the depth.
3
Check Require Kingpost to require a Kingpost
4
vertical webbing member from the roof
peak to the bottom chord.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may
still be supplied, depending on what is
needed to support the chords at or closer than 5 End Truss - Select the check box to
replace the webbing with vertical
the specified maximum spans. members positioned and spaced on center the
Following is a truss detail. The lower truss same as the wall studs below. The framing
was a copy of the upper truss, with Require reference is used for this exactly as it is for
Kingpost checked. wall studs. If an end truss is in the same
position as a gable attic wall, it replaces the
framing that would otherwise be produced
for that wall.
519
6 Drop Hip Truss - Select the check box 7 Energy Heel - Select the check box to
to lower the flat top of a truss in the hip model a truss with an energy heel,
area of a roof. which removes the bottom chord from the
overhang area. For this to be modeled, the
The flat top is lowered so that common
Raise Off Plate value in the Build Roof
rafters and hip ridges can pass over and be
dialog must be equal to or greater than eight.
supported by it. The amount that the top
chord is lowered is derived from the rafter To provide more space for ceiling insulation
Depth on the Roof tab of the Framing at the exterior walls, roofs are sometimes
dialog. Because both common rafters and hip raised off of the top plate with an energy
ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge heel. When a truss is built for such a roof, a
depth should be set equal to that of the rafter vertical member is added over the supporting
depth. For an illustration of a Drop Hip truss, wall to prevent the bottom chord from extend
see “Drop Hip” on page 514. ing into the overhang area as far as the end
of the rafter, or until it intersects the rafter.
Without Energy Heel
With Energy Heel
8 Reduce Gable - Select the check box to that lookouts may pass over the truss. Any
lower the top chord of the gable truss so overhang is removed from a reduced truss.
520
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
You can supply this overhang with short

11 Thickness - Select the thickness, or
rafters drawn at the ends of the truss. truss width in floor plan view. This
setting overrides default settings.
12 Maximum Height - Specify the

maximum height of selected truss.
13 Force truss rebuild - Select the check

box to update trusses with the new
settings in this dialog when you click OK.
14 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this

box to lock size and configuration of
Reduce Gable truss. A locked truss which has been
End Truss relocated will maintain its original settings,
Trusses
and may no longer fit properly if the new
Lookouts roof and ceiling conditions are different from
the original.
9 Attic Truss - Check this box to specify Line Style Tab

an attic truss
For more information about the Line Style
10 Maximum Span - Specify the tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
maximum horizontal distance between
supports along the Top Chord and along the
Bottom Chord. If these are equal, the truss Fill Style Tab
webbing often appears more regular. For more information about the Fill Style tab,
The placement of webbing inside a newly see “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord
and Bottom Chord settings under Maximum Materials Tab
Span in the Trusses tab of the Framing
For more information about the Materials
dialog. The webbing is for representational
purposes only, not for engineering.
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog

Floor trusses can be created whenever walls
define one or more rooms.
To open the Floor Truss Specification
dialog, select a floor truss in floor plan view
521
1 5
2
3 6
7
8
9
4
Top Chord - Specify the depth.

1 7 Webbing Thickness - Specify
thickness for the webbing.
Bottom Chord - Specify the depth.
2
Webbing - Specify the depth. 8 Force Truss Rebuild - Check this box
3 to update existing trusses with the new
Vertical Supports - Check this box to settings in this dialog.
4
use vertical supports.
9 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
5 Maximum Span - Specify the box to lock the size and configuration
maximum horizontal distance between of the truss. A locked truss which has been
supports along the Top Chord and Bottom relocated will maintain its original settings.
Chord.
Line Style Tab
Top Chord Vertical Support
Fill Style Tab

Bottom Chord Webbing “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
6 Overall Thickness - Specify the Materials Tab

overall floor truss thickness.
522
Chapter 17: The Electrical Tools
Electrical
Chapter Overview
Electrical
Introductory Training Video: Electrical
Objects Building requirements vary throughout
the country and around the world. It is
The electrical plan shows the location of all your responsibility to comply with local codes.
electrical objects such as lights, switches,
outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic Chapter Contents
wiring diagrams show which objects share • The Electrical Tools
circuits and the locations of the controlling • Creating Wiring Schematics
switches. • Auto Place Outlets
The display of electrical objects can be • Electrical Library
controlled in 2D and 3D. Some electrical • Displaying Electrical Objects
symbols such as lights also affect rendering. • Editing Electrical Objects
See “Electrical” on page 684. • Electrical Service Specification Dialog
• Electrical Defaults
Electrical objects can be selected, deleted,
copied, moved, rotated, reflected, and added
to the library like other objects.
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last
additions to a plan since the position of most
electrical objects is determined by the
location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
523
The Electrical Tools

Introductory Training Video: Electrical In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath,
Objects Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI)
outlets are placed. If outlets are placed prior
to defining the room as a Bath, the standard
Video: Placing Electrical Symbols and
outlets must be replaced with GFCI outlets to
Circuits
meet code.
Select Build> Electrical to access the
Outlets placed outside the building or in an
Electrical Tools.
exterior area such as a deck or porch are
Click in floor plan view to place an electrical labeled WP, or Water Proof.
object. Some can only be placed against
Outlets placed on the wall behind a base
walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and
cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink are
some automatically change as needed. If you
placed at the normal 12" (300 mm) above the
click within 12" of the wall, the selected
floor. If an outlet is placed above a cabinet,
object is placed on the wall.
the Above Cabinet Default Height are used
Electrical objects are placed according to the instead. See “Electrical Defaults” on page
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. 534.
See “Electrical Defaults” on page 534.
Other types of outlets, such as floor outlets,
Outlets are available in the Electrical Library .
Select Build> Electrical> 110V

Lights
Outlet to place 110 volt duplex
outlets in walls or on the floor. Select Build> Select Build> Electrical> Light to
Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220 volt place light fixtures as specified in the
outlets. Outlet type and height are controlled Electrical Defaults dialog. Depending on
by the outlet height in the Electrical where you click in floor plan view, the light
Defaults dialog. may be mounted on the ceiling or on a wall.
All lights placed in a plan also serve as light
Outlet locations are measured from their
sources in render and raytrace views.
centers in floor plan view. Individual outlet
heights can be specified in the Electrical Click away from any wall to place a light on
Service Specification dialog. the ceiling. Click near a wall to place the
light in the wall. Specify the height of an
Certain room types and situations cause
individual light in the Electrical Service
various types of outlets to be placed. To take
advantage of the program’s capabilities,
define room types properly before placing If you place a light in a vaulted ceiling, a
electrical objects. See “Room Types” on ceiling light is placed at the ceiling height
page 284.
524
Creating Wiring Schematics
perpendicular to the floor as though it were default switch type. See “Electrical Defaults”
attached to a flat ceiling. on page 534.
Many lights are available in the Electrical
If you connect two or more switches in a
Library . All library lights create light circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
sources in render and raytrace views. switches automatically.
Switches placed from the Electrical Library

Light Render Data
do not automatically update by default, but
The rendering characteristics of individual can be specified to do so. See “Electrical
lights can be specified. Select the light and Service Specification Dialog” on page 529.
click the Open Object edit button to If two or more switches or outlets are close
open the Electrical Service enough, they merge.
Specification dialog. Adjust the settings
on the Light Data tab to specify how the light
appears in render or raytrace views. See
“Light Data Tab” on page 531.
Switches
Electrical
In floor plan view, zoom in to move two
Select Build> Electrical> Switch to
switches or outlets close enough together to
place wall switches as specified in the
overlap. The switches or outlets must be
Electrical Defaults dialog. Like outlets,
within 9 inches, at the same height on the
the height of switches is measured from the
wall, and of the same dimensions. Up to 32
floor to the center of the object and is set in
switches can be merged together. Switches
the Electrical Defaults dialog, along with
and outlets are listed separately in the
materials list.
Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in two this tool, you can show which lights and
outlets are attached to any given switch.
ways. Using the Connect Electrical tool
is quick and easy, but if you need detailed To create a new circuit or to add to an
schematics, you can create your own wiring existing circuit, click one electrical object
diagrams using the CAD tools.
while using Connect Electrical tool,
drag to the next object and release.
Connect Electrical
Connections created with the Connect
Select Build> Electrical> Connect
Electrical to illustrate circuits. Using Electrical tool can be edited like splines.
525
See “Editing Spline Based Objects” on page More than one switch can control an object
114. or group of objects. Two switches controlling
the same objects are referred to as three-way
Remove an electrical object from a circuit by
switches. Three switches controlling the
selecting it and clicking the Delete edit same objects are called four-way switches.
button. See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page The number of “ways” is one more than the
141. number of switches in the same circuit. This
number displays with the switch symbol in
floor plan view.
Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place
Auto Place Outlets requires a room to
Outlets and click in a room tool to
have a door before outlets are automatically
place outlets, usually 110 volt, around the
placed and does not work in any room
entire room at intervals not greater than
defined as an exterior room. Exterior rooms
twelve feet so that no wall position is farther
require that the outlets be placed individually
than six feet (1800mm) from the nearest
outlet. using the 110V Outlets tool or from the
Outlets are placed based on settings in the Electrical Library .
Electrical Defaults dialog. See
Railings and invisible walls do not separate
“Electrical Defaults” on page 534. It is
important that the room type be defined rooms for Auto Place Outlets : If Auto
before using Auto Place Outlets so that Place Outlets is used in a room defined
outlets are placed appropriately in each room by railings or invisible walls, outlets are
type. automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
that share these wall types with that room.
Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as
ranges, washers, and dryers each have their Any outlet can be moved, deleted, or merged
required 110 volt or 220 volt outlets placed with other outlets or switches. See
automatically. Lights are always placed “Switches” on page 525.
above sinks.
Electrical Library
Select Library> Library Browser to Browse for electrical objects such as bath
accesses a library of various electrical vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent
symbols. The Electrical library category is lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector,
divided into subcategories. thermostat, and much more. Select a symbol,
526
Displaying Electrical Objects
then click in your plan to place it on a wall, You can also assign electrical objects from
floor, or ceiling. the library to toolbar buttons for easy access
and placement to frequently-used library
You can create electrical symbols and save
objects. See “Place Library Object Button”
them to the library. See “Create Symbol
on page 696.
Displaying Electrical Objects

The display of electrical objects and • The layer Electrical, Labels layer is
connections is controlled in the Layer turned on.
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying • An electrical schedule exists in the plan.
• Show Labels is checked and a label
Electrical labels display in floor plan view shape is specified in the Electrical
when these coditions are met: Schedule Specification dialog. See
“Label Tab” on page 1000.
Electrical
Editing Electrical Objects
Electrical objects can be selected in floor Using the Edit Handles
plan view, cross section/elevation views, and
3D views. The edit handles for electrical objects vary
depending on the location of the object. Wall
An electrical object can be selected and mounted electrical objects cannot be rotated,
modified using its edit handles, edit toolbar so only the Move edit handle displays.
and specification dialog.
Moving Electrical Objects

Using Dimensions
Electrical objects can be moved precisely
using manual dimensions. See “Moving
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 804. Wall-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
First, dimensions must be checked on the
Locate Objects tab of the Dimension Electrical objects placed on floors and
Defaults dialog. See “Dimension Defaults ceilings can be rotated.
527
• Click the Components edit button to

selected cabinet(s). See “Components
• The Accurate Move button slows down
Ceiling-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
the mouse so you can place electrical
Electrical connections edit like splines. See objects more precisely. See “Accurate
“Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 114. Move” on page 125.
edit button to make the selected
object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a
straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
Perpendicular” on page 126.

Using the Edit Buttons button to accurately move the selected
electrical symbol. See “Point to Point
A selected electrical symbol can be edited in Move” on page 125.
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar. As with most objects, electrical • Click the Replace from Library edit
symbols can be copied, replicated, moved, button to replace the selected electrical
deleted, etc. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on symbol with one from the library. See
page 113. “Replace From Library” on page 680.
display on the edit toolbar for selected
to center the selected electrical symbol
electrical symbols.
along the edge of a room. See “Center
• Click the Select Next Object edit Object” on page 127.
the selected electrical symbol.
button to reflect the selected cabinet(s)
• Click the Open Object edit button to about another object. See “Reflecting
open the specification dialog for the Objects” on page 135.
selected electrical symbol. See
“Electrical Service Specification Dialog” Adjusting the Height
on page 529. of Electrical Objects
• Click the Open Symbol edit button The heights where electrical objects display
to open the Symbol Specification in 3D views are initially based on settings in
dialog. See “Symbol Specification Dia- the Electrical Defaults dialog.
log” on page 945.
528
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
In floor plan view, an outlet placed where a specification and type the desired height in
base cabinet meets a wall is placed above the the Electrical Service Specification
counter unless the cabinet contains a fixture dialog.
or appliance other than a bathroom sink. If
Electrical objects placed in 3D views are
the fixture requires electricity, the outlet
placed wherever you click a wall, regardless
remains behind the cabinet at normal wall
of the height. In 3D views, the position of an
height, where it can supply power to the
electrical object can be adjusted using its edit
fixture or appliance. See “Electrical
handles.
Kitchen sinks are assumed to require Deleting Electrical Objects
electricity since they often contain a garbage
disposal. Dishwashers are not considered to An electrical object can be deleted by
require electricity since they are usually selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is button or by pressing the Delete key.
needed above a cabinet containing a kitchen
All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or
sink, place the outlet before adding the sink,
in the entire plan can be deleted as a group
or move the outlet up.
using the Delete Objects dialog. See
To change the height of an electrical object in “Deleting Objects” on page 141.
Electrical
floor plan view, open the object for

Select an electrical object and click the Open Depending on the type of symbol selected,
only some of the tabs are available. Only the
Object edit button to open the
Service Data, Layer and Material tabs are
Electrical Service Specification
available for switches and outlets.
dialog. This dialog varies, depending on the
object you select.
The Electrical Service Specification
dialog consists of four tabs:
• The Service Data tab specifies the loca-
tion of individual electrical objects.
• The Light Data tab specifies how lights
appear in render views.
• The Layer tab specifies the layer the
object is placed on.
• The Materials tab allows you to change
materials on electrical objects.
529
Service Data Tab
1
2
3
4
The items on this tab vary, depending on the Offset From Ceiling - This option is
type of object selected. available for for electrical objects placed on
the ceiling.
1 Name - This is the name that is sent to
the Materials List.
3 Dist From Wall - Specify the switch,
outlet or light’s distance from the wall.
2 Height to Center - Specify the height
to the center of the switch, outlet or Check this box to Automatically
4
wall light. Change Switch Type When Wiring.
This option is only available for switches.
Offset From Floor - This option is available
Switches placed from the toolbar have this
for electrical objects placed on the floor.
box checked by default; switches placed
from the Electrical library do not.
530
Light Data Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
7
8
9
12
10 13
14
Electrical
15
The Light Data tab of the Electrical determines what options are enabled on this
Service Specification dialog is similar tab. Each type behaves differently, but all
to the Light Specification dialog. See have some rendering properties in common.
“Light Specification Dialog” on page 781. See “Defining Light Types” on page 777.
The enabled options on this tab vary
3 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
depending on the type of light source to have the program set intensities for
selected. each light source in render views. When you
select Auto Intensity the program provides
1 Light Source - Each fixture can have an average intensity to render with
multiple light sources. Select a current
reasonable lighting effects. Clear the check
light source to be modified. Click Add Light
box to enable the slider bar and text box and
or Delete Light to add or delete light sources
control how bright the light appears in the
from the list. See “Light Sources” on page
render view.
772.
Lights with an intensity of 0% are turned off.
2 Type - Select a light source Type. It is possible to have too much light. If you
Available types are Point Light, Spot
have multiple lights in a room all set to
Light, and Parallel Light. The type selected
531
maximum intensity, colors and textures can Enter a value up to 360 degrees. If you enter
turn white. a negative value, the program uses zero.
4 Color - Click the button to define the 8 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
color of the illumination being controls the angle of the cone of
modeled. Colored lights alter the material illumination for Spot Lights only. A cone
and texture colors and can be used to achieve angle of 180 degrees creates a spot light that
special effects. shines on one side of the light source,
representing a half sphere. A small cone
The default color of light is pure white,
angle, say 10 degrees, creates a very narrow
which has the least affect on the material
cone of light. The cut off angle should
colors and textures.
always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
5 Attenuated - Check this box to control
how quickly the intensity of the 9 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
the intensity of illumination drops off
illumination drops as a result of the distance
from the center of the cone to the outside
from the light source. Only Spot and Point
edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
Lights have attenuation.
The default drop off value is 7.5, which
The three edit values represent the three
means the light drops off fairly quickly. Do
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression
not set this value too low because there are
1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance
limitations in the OpenGL lighting model
from the light source. Increasing any of these
that result in jagged circles of light when
values results in the light intensity dropping
they are shining on large flat surfaces.
faster (the light does not travel as far).
Appearances can be improved by decreasing
Decreasing any value results in the light
the Maximum Triangle Size and increasing
intensity dropping slower (the light travels
the Drop off Rate.
farther). Small changes in these coefficients
can have significant impact on lighting
10 Offset Position gives you control over
effects. You may need to experiment to fully the location of the light source relative
understand how to use them. to the fixture.
6 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle controls the From Base controls how far the light source
angle of the illumination with respect to is from the fixture base. The fixture base is
the horizon. A value of -90 degrees means determined by the surface that it is attached
that the light is pointing straight down and a to (i.e. wall, floor, or ceiling).
value of 90 degrees means that the light is
Offset in X/Offset in Y allow you to
pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
position the light source relative to the center
the horizon.
of the fixture, along the floor/ceiling.
7 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along. 11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This sets
how a light source casts soft shadows in
Zero degrees is measured horizontally
a Raytrace view. Setting the Light Size
pointing to the right. Positive values rotate in
determines how big the illumination appears.
a counter-clockwise direction from there.
532
Zero indicates a true point light source, while Layer Tab

a size of 3 indicates a larger source such as a
lightbulb. The Softness setting determines For information about the Layer tab, see
how many iterations the raytracer should go “Layer Tab” on page 223.
through to soften the light. This value
determines the quality of the raytrace, but Materials Tab
also slows it down. You should not use For information about the Materials tab, see
values greater than 2 or 3, unless the Light “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Size is very large.
12 On - This controls whether or not the

light source is used in render or raytrace
views. The default is On.
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or

not the light source casts shadows when
Shadows are turned on in a render view.
You should only use one or two light sources
to casts shadows at a time. Shadow
calculations can slow rendering significantly.
Electrical
14 Show Position in Render View -
Check this box to indicate where a light
source is actually positioned in a render
view. The light position indicator is only
drawn when the light is on and only for
positional lights such as point or spot lights.
This tool can be used to determine if your
light source is positioned correctly.
15 Use in Real -Time Rendering/Use in

Raytracing/Use in Both - Use these
options to specify whether a light source is
used only in a raytrace view, only in a render
view, or used in both views. Raytrace views
can handle many more lights than render
views, and some fixtures may have four or
five lights in a raytrace view while only one
in a render view. The more lights you use in
either view, the slower the time to generate
that view.
533
Electrical Defaults
Default Settings for electrical objects Default heights of individual objects can be
can be accessed by selecting Edit> overridden in the Electrical Service
Default Settings from the menu or by Specification dialog. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 529.
double-clicking the Electrical Tools
button.
2
3
4
5
6
1 Default Library - These are the items can be specified for individual objects. See
used when electrical items are “Electrical Service Specification Dialog” on
automatically generated or placed from the page 529
toolbar. Select an item from the list to see a
preview to the right. 4 Outlet - Specify the Default Height for
outlets, phone jacks and television
2 Library - Select an object type in the outlets.
Default Library list and click the
Library... button to open the Library Browser 5 Switch - Specify the Default Height for
switches, doorbells and thermostats.
to the Electrical category and select a new
default library object. See “Electrical” on
6 Above Cabinet - Specify the Default
page 684. Height for switches and outlets placed
above most cabinets in floor plan view. See
3 Use Default Heights - Check this box “Adjusting the Height of Electrical Objects”
to apply Default Heights to electrical
on page 528.
objects placed in floor plan view. Heights
534
Chapter 18:
Trim & Molding
Chapter Overview
Molding
Trim &
What’s New In Version X1 Training Chapter Contents
Video: Trim and Moldings • Corner Boards
Chief Architect offers a wide selection of • Corner Board Specification Dialog
trim and molding options. Corner boards, • Quoins
quoins, and frieze moldings can be added to • Quoin Specification Dialog
a building’s exterior. Molding polylines and • Molding Profiles
3D molding polylines can be edited as 2D • Symbol Moldings
CAD objects using the CAD editing tools, • Molding Polylines
then extruded to display in 3D for a variety • Displaying Molding Polylines
of powerful applications. • Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
• Frieze Moldings
• Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
• 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
535
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building Corner boards extend from the top plate
exterior in any view by selecting down to the bottom of the floor platform of
Build> Trim> Corner Boards. the floor on which it is placed, but do not
extend to other floors. You must add corner
boards to all floors of the building that you
want to have corner boards.
A selected corner board or boards can be
moved, but only to another wall corner or
corners. In 3D views, corner boards can be
lengthened or shortened using the edit
handles. Corner boards can be copied,
deleted and resized similar to other objects
Click at a wall corner where you want to add using the edit toolbar or the Corner Board
trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall Specification dialog.
surfaces meet. If you click where the inside The default material for corner boards is
surfaces meet, corner trim will be created defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the
inside the room. Material Defaults dialog. See “Material
Corner Board Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 5
2 6
3
4
1 Width - Specify the width of the 2 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

selected corner board(s). the selected corner board.
536
Quoins
3 Set Top - Specify the height of the top corner boards. This does not change the
of the corner board. If this box is thickness of any existing corner boards.
unchecked, the top of the corner board auto-
The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are
matically extends to the top plate.
not saved with the plan file and are reset the
4 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the next time you run the program.
bottom of the corner board. If
unchecked, the bottom of the corner board Layer Tab
automatically extends to the bottom of the
floor platform. For information about the Layer tab, see
5 Initial Width - Specify the initial width
of all subsequently created corner Materials Tab
boards. This does not change the width of
any existing corner boards. For information about the Materials tab, see
6 Initial Thickness - Specify the initial
thickness of all subsequently created
Quoins
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any The size of quoins in floor plan view is
view and click at a wall corner where relative on their size in 3D.
you want to place quoins.
Initially, quoins use the same material as the
default material of the wall surface they are
placed against. This material is specified in
Molding
Trim &
the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See
“Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page 251.
A selected quoin or quoins can be moved,

but only to another wall corner or corners. In
3D views, quoins can be lengthened or
shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can
be copied, deleted and resized similar to
other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.
537
Quoin Specification Dialog
7
1
2
3
4
8
5
9
6 10
1 Width - Specify the long dimension of ically extends to the bottom of the floor plat-
one quoin. The dimension along the form.
other wall is half this value when they are
staggered or mirrored. 7 Initial Values - Each of the above
values can be set for all subsequently
2 Thickness - Specify the amount that produced quoins. Changing these values
the quoin protrudes from the exterior does not change the settings for any existing
surface of the wall. quoins.
3 Height - Specify the height for all 8 Staggered - Produce quoins that have
quoins. one long side and one short side
staggered on opposite sides of the corner.
4 Gap - Specify the distance between
successive quoins. Swap Start Block - Switch the starting order
for staggered quoins.
5 Set Top - Specify the height of the top
of the quoin. If the check box is Uniform - Produce quoins that are of
9
unchecked, the top of the quoin automati- equal length on both sides of the corner.
cally extends to the top plate.
10 Mirrored - Produce quoins that
6 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the alternate having either two long sides or
bottom of the quoin. If the check box is two short sides.
unchecked, the bottom of the quoin automat-
538
Molding Profiles
Staggered Mirrored Uniform
Layer Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Layer tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 223. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Molding Profiles
A molding profile is a closed polyline that • Moldings can be drawn in either floor
represents a 2D cross section of a particular plan view or in a CAD Detail window.
style of molding. A molding profile does not • Draw the molding profile at its actual,
display in 3D on its own; it must be applied unscaled size.
to a room or molding polyline. See
“Moldings Tab” on page 302 or “Molding • The profile must be drawn with the
Polylines” on page 541. proper orientation. The back of most pro-
Molding
Trim &
files, or the side facing the wall, must be
The Moldings and Profiles library contains a drawn as a vertical edge on the left side
selection of moldings, as well as curbs, of the polyline.
gutters and handrails. You can customize
• Similarly, curbs are drawn with the back
library molding profiles and add them to the
of the profile as a vertical edge on the left
library. You can also create your own custom
side of the polyline.
profiles and add them to the library. See
“Adding to the Library” on page 674. • In the case of handrail profiles, the bot-
tom edge must be drawn on the left side
Creating a Molding Profile of the polyline.
You can easily create custom molding

profiles using the line and arc CAD Tools by
following a few basic guidelines. The object
is to draw a polyline, closed or not.
539
3. Give the new molding a name.

4. Click OK.
Place Molding Profile

An existing molding profile can be placed in
floor plan view or a CAD Detail, edited, and
added to the library as a new profile.
Select a profile from the the Moldings and
Base molding profile - Handrail profile - Profiles category of the Library Browser,
back edge faces left bottom faces left then select Library> Place Molding
Profile. Move your pointer into the drawing
To add a new profile to the library
area and click once to place a closed polyline
identical to the selected profile at that
1. Select the profile.
location.
2. Click the Add to Library edit but-
ton. The Add to Library dialog opens Note: Place Molding Profile cannot be used
to apply a molding profile to a room or to a
to the Molding and Profiles category.
molding polyline
Symbol Moldings
Symbol Moldings are 3D symbols that are to create the molding shown in the
repeated along a path to form molding. illustration above, make an object that looks
Molding symbols are different from molding like this:
profiles because they are replicated 3D
sumbols instead of extruded 2D shapes.
Creating a Symbol Molding

Begin by opening a new, blank plan and
creating a single instance of the molding
When you are satisfied with its appearance,
symbol using the Primitive Tools . See export it as a 3D symbol. See “Importing and
“Primitive Tools” on page 641. For example, Exporting” on page 907.
540
Molding Polylines
To import a molding symbol • In the Completing the Create Symbol

Wizard window, check the box beside
1. Select Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol Add to Library.
from the menu. See “Create Symbol 3. Save the symbol in an unlocked library.
Wizard” on page 925. See “Adding a New Object” on page
2. Proceed through the wizard as normal, 675.
with the following recommendations:
• In the 3D window, specify the Origin Symbol moldings work best if you make
as 0,0,0 and rotate the symbol as them symmetrical.
needed so that it faces you in the pre-
view image. Symbol moldings are center aligned. Both
ends have a 45° miter, so the end instances
• In the Select Symbol Category win-
may be chopped.
dow, click the button beside Molding.
Molding Polylines
A molding polyline is a 3D path a 2D and then clicking and dragging in floor plan
molding profile is extruded or series of view.
molding symbols is repeated along. Molding
polylines can be used to create custom room Molding Polyline Tool
moldings and decorations anywhere in your
3D model. Select Build> Trim> Molding Poly-
line to open the Library Browser.
The Molding Polyline tools are Select a profile from the Moldings and
Molding
accessed by selecting Build> Trim
Trim &
Profiles category, then click and drag to draw
from the menu. a rectangular molding polyline that will serve
There are four types of molding polylines: as a path for the selected molding profile or
symbol.
• Molding Polylines
Molding Line Tool
• Molding Lines
Select Build> Trim> Molding Line to
• 3D Molding Polylines open the Library Browser. Select a
molding profile from the Moldings and
• 3D Molding Lines Profiles category, then click and drag to draw
Molding polylines can also be created using a path for the selected molding profile or
symbol. Multiple molding lines can be
the Make Room Molding Polyline and connected to make an open polyline path.
the Convert Polyline edit buttons, or by
selecting a profile from the Library Browser
541
Floor Plan View
Cross Section/
Elevation View
Molding polyline and molding line in
(selected)
Floor Plan View and 3D overview
3D Molding Polyline Tool 3D Overview
Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding

Polyline to open the Library Browser. 3D Molding polyline and 3D molding line
Select a molding profile from the Moldings as they appear in three different views.
and Profiles category, then click and drag to
draw a rectangular 3D molding polyline that Editing Molding Polylines
will serve as a path for the selected molding
profile or symbol. Molding polylines can be edited much the
way CAD polylines are. See “Editing Open
3D molding polylines extrude a profile in Polyline Based Objects” on page 103 and
three dimensions rather than two and can be “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
created and edited in floor plan and cross page 107.
section/elevation views.
All molding lines and polylines can be
selected and opened for specification. See
3D Molding Line Tool “Molding Polyline Specification Dialog” on
Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding page 544 and “3D Molding Polyline
Line to open the Library Browser. Specification Dialog” on page 546.
Select a molding profile from the Moldings
and Profiles category, then click and drag to Moldings and Profiles Library
draw a path for the selected molding profile
or symbol that can travel in all. Multiple In the floor plan view, open the Moldings
molding lines can be connected to make an and Profiles category of the Library Browser
open polyline path. and select a molding profile. The Molding
Polyline tool becomes active, allowing
you to select a profile and draw a molding
polyline with that profile applied to it.
Converting Room Molding

Select a room and click on the Make Room
Molding Polyline edit button. This
opens the Make Room Molding Polyline
542
Displaying Molding Polylines
dialog, allowing you to select which type of Converting a CAD Polyline

room molding to convert to a molding
polyline. See “Room Polylines” on page 295. Select a CAD polyline and click the
Convert Polyline edit button to covert
it into a molding polyline or a 3D molding
polyline. See “Converting Objects” on page
149.
Displaying Molding Polylines

As with other objects, the display of molding By default, molding polylines are placed on
polylines in 2D and 3D views is controlled in the Moldings layer.
“Displaying Objects” on page 221.
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings

In 3D views, select a molding profile or
symbol from the Library Browser and the
pointer changes to indicate that a molding
profile has been selected. Click on a molding
polyline, 3D molding polyline, room
molding, cabinet molding, door molding, or
window molding to change the current
Molding
molding profile. This is the same as changing
Trim &
the molding profile in the specification
dialog for the object.
Click on a molding in 3D view to change it
Frieze Moldings
Frieze moldings (also known as freize Creating Frieze Moldings
boards) are mounted below the eaves of roof
planes and can be generated automatically To create automatic frieze moldings, specify
using the Build Roof dialog. a molding profile on the Frieze tab of the
Build Roof dialog; check Build Fascia,
Gutters on the Build tab of the Build Roof
dialog; and click OK. See “Build Roof
543
Frieze moldings below the eave of automatically generated roof planes
Displaying Frieze Moldings Editing Frieze Moldings

By default, frieze molding displays in 3D Like other 3D Molding Polyines, frieze
views but not in floor plan view and its molding can be edited much the way CAD
default layer, Roofs, Frieze Moldings, is polylines are in floor plan and cross section/
locked. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” elevation views. See “Editing Molding
on page 218. Polylines” on page 542.
Frieze molding can also be edited in the 3D
Selecting Frieze Moldings Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
To select a frieze molding, its layer must first See “3D Molding Polyline Specification
be unlocked and turned on. See “Locking Dialog” on page 546.
Layers” on page 222. In floor plan or cross If you edit a frieze molding, you may want to
section/elevation view, select a wall and click uncheck the Automatic Frieze property on
the Next edit button or press the Tab key the 3D Molding Polyline Specification
until the frieze molding is selected. When the dialog to avoid losing your edits if fascia is
frieze molding is selected the status bar says recalculated.
“3D Molding Polyline.” See “The Status
Once Automatic Frieze is unchecked, it
Bar” on page 8.
cannot be checked again.To restore the
automatic updating behavior of frieze
molding, it must be regenerated.
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

To open the Molding Polyline polyline or group of molding polylines and
Specification dialog, select a molding
544
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
General Tab Polyline Tab

Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected segment of the molding polyline is a
line, as opposed to an arc. For information
about the Selected Line tab, see “Selected
Specify the Height of the polyline.
Line Tab” on page 864.
Select No Molding on Selected Edge to
create blank section in the molding polyline Arc Tab
along the selected line segment.
The Arc tab displays when the selected
segment of the 3D molding polyline is an
arc, as opposed to a line. See “Arc Tab” on
page 859.
Moldings Tab
1
2
Molding
Trim &
3
1 Molding - Select the molding to edit. Select - Click to remove the currently
selected profile and replace it with a new one
2 Add New - Click to open the Select from the Select Library Object dialog.
Library Object dialog and add a new
molding profile or symbol to the molding Delete - Click to delete the currently selected
polyline. See “Select Library Object Dialog” profile.
on page 679.
545
3 Height - Specify the molding profile

height. It must be greater than 0.
Width - Specify the width. This option is
not available for molding polylines created
from default room moldings. This value must
be greater than 0.
Offset - Specify the offset from the molding
polyline height to the top or bottom of the
molding profile. A positive offset always Molding extruded outside (Inside unchecked)
moves the molding up and a negative offset
always moves the molding down. Line Style Tab
To Top - Click to specify that the top of the For information about the Line Style tab, see
molding is at the polyline height plus the “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
offset.
Fill Style Tab
To Bottom - Click to specify that the bottom
of the molding is placed at the polyline For information about the Fill Style tab, see
height plus the offset. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Inside - Click to extrude the molding profile
on the inside or right side of the polyline. Materials Tab
Clear to extrude the molding profile on the For information about the Materials tab, see
outside or left side of the polyline. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Molding extruded inside
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

Select a 3D molding polyline and click the
Open Object edit button to open the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
546
General Tab
1
2
1 Uncheck Molding on Selected Edge to 1

turn off the display of the specified
molding on the edge of the 3D molding
polyline that was selected when the dialog
was opened. For more information about the
selected edge, see “Selecting Objects” on
page 92. 1 The Length/Angle section in the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification
2 Automatic frieze is enabled when a dialog is different other Selected Line tabs.
frieze molding is selected (see
“Selecting Frieze Moldings” on page 544). Length specifies the 3D length of the
selected line of the 3D molding polyline.
When Automatic Frieze is checked, the
frieze molding is updated whenever you Angle in XY Plane specifies the counter-
check Build Fascia, Gutters on the Build clockwise angle that the selected line makes
Roof dialog and click OK. with the positive X axis when viewed from
above, as in floor plan view.
Once Automatic Frieze has been
unchecked, it cannot be checked again.To Angle from XY Plane specifies the angle
Molding
that the selected line makes with the
Trim &
restore the automatic updating behavior of
the frieze molding, it must be regenerated. horizontal XY plane when viewed from the
See “Creating Frieze Moldings” on page side, as in a cross section/elevation view. A
543. positive value means that the line slopes up;
a negative value means that it slopes down.
Selected Line Tab For more information about using the
The Selected Line tab is available when the Selected Line tab, see “Selected Line Tab”
selected segment of the 3D molding polyline on page 864.
is a line as opposed to an arc.
Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is an arc as opposed to a line.
547
1 5
6
3
7
4
1 The Lock options specify how selected arc, and are editable when either
changing one value affects other values. Lock End or Lock Arc are selected.
Select Start to keep the start and center of
3 The End options specify the
the arc fixed and move the end. coordinates of the end point of the
selected arc, and are editable when either
Select End to keep the end and center of the
Lock Start or Lock Arc are selected.
arc fixed and move the start.
Select Center to keep the center of the arc 4 The Chord options specify the length
and angle of the selected arc and are
fixed and move the start or end.
editable when either Lock Start or Lock
Select Arc to keep the arc geometry fixed End are selected. The Chord Angle is also
and translate the arc. editable when Lock Arc is selected.
Select Chord to keep the start and end fixed • Chord Length - the 3D distance between
and change the radius. arc start and end.
• Chord Angle - the angle created by the
2 The Start options specify the arc chord and the positive X axis.
coordinates of the starting point of the
548
5 The Arc options specify radius, angle Materials Tab

and length values of the selected arc:
• Radius - the distance from the arc to the “Materials Tab” on page 710.
arc center.
• Start Angle - the angle created by a line
from the arc center to the start and the
positive X axis.
• End Angle - the angle that a line from the
center to the end
• Arc Angle - the angle created by a line
from the arc center to the start and a line
from the center to the end.
• Arc Length - the length of the arc.
6 The Center options specify the

coordinates of the center point of the
selected arc and are editable when Lock Arc
is selected.
7 The Normal options specify the

coordinates of the normal for the plane
that the arc exists in. The normal is a vector
that is parallel to that plane and is expressed
as a line between two points: (0,0,0) and the
point defined in the dialog.
Molding
Trim &
In plan view, the arc direction is counter
clockwise if the normal has a positive value
on the z axis (0,0,1) and clockwise if the
value on the z axis is negative (0,0,-1).
Moldings Tab
For information about the Moldings tab, see
“Moldings Tab” on page 545.
Line Style Tab

549
550
Chapter 19:
Cabinets
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Cabinets The appearance of cabinet objects in floor
plan and 3D views is controlled in the
Video: Cabinets - Improvements for
Working with Cabinets
Chapter Contents
With Chief Architect’s cabinet tools you can • Cabinet Defaults
create base, wall, and full height cabinets as • The Cabinet Tools
well as soffits, shelves, partitions, and
Cabinets
• Displaying Cabinets
custom countertops. These objects are very • Cabinet Labels
versatile, allowing for a wide range of • Editing Cabinets
customization. • Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style
Chief Architect also has many customized • Editing Custom Countertops
cabinet symbols and cabinet groups available • Joined Cabinets
in the library. Cabinets you have customized • Special Cabinets
can be saved to your own library for future • Cabinet Specification Dialog
use. • Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
• Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
• Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
551
• Cabinet Defaults
Cabinet Defaults
Access default settings for each cabinet The Cabinet Defaults dialogs can also be
type by selecting Edit> Default accessed by double-clicking the Cabinet
Settings, then clicking the + beside
Tools , then clicking the appropriate
Cabinets.
button in the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
Each type of cabinet has default definitions Double-clicking any of the Cabinet tools also
for size, style, materials and much more. opens the corresponding defaults dialog.
General cabinet settings and the default
To allow the maximum range of sizes, set the
settings for Base Cabinets, Wall Cabinets,
General Cabinet defaults so that Minimum
Full Height Cabinets, Shelves, and Partitions
Width is 1" and Width Increment is 1/16".
are defined here.
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 580.
The Cabinet Tools

Classroom Design Project Training Wall Cabinets
Video: Placing and Merging Kitchen
Cabinets Classroom Design Project Training
Video: Adding Wall Cabinets and Sof-
Select Build> Cabinet to access the fits
Cabinet tools.
To place a wall cabinet, select Build>
A cabinet placed adjacent to another of the Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click near
same type that faces the same direction a wall in any view. Click directly over a base
merges with it. If a cabinet is created at the cabinet to place a wall cabinet above it. The
back of another of the same type, the two base cabinet does not interfere with the
cabinets merge back-to-back. When cabinets placement.
are merged, the toe kick, back splash, and
countertop are continuous. Full Height Cabinets
Base Cabinets To place a full height cabinet, select
Build> Cabinet> Full Height and
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet click in your plan in any view. A full height
and click near a wall in any view to cabinet cannot be placed on top of a base or
attach the cabinet to it. Base cabinets wall cabinet. Full height cabinets generate a
generate a countertop and toe kick by toe kick by default.
default.
552
The Cabinet Tools
Soffits Specification dialog and specify its

dimensions, position, and material. See
Introductory Training Video: Soffits “Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog” on
Classroom Design Project Training page 578.
Video: Adding Wall Cabinets and Sof- Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on
fits each wall, then moving or stretching them
Soffits typically fill the space between until they touch.
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can
also be used to create any object than can be Partitions
modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit,
Select Build> Cabinet> Partition
Select Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in
button and click in any view to create a
any view.
vertical partition. Once created, partitions
Soffits can display in both floor plan and 3D can be modified. Select the partition and
views. They can be assigned materials that
are calculated in the Materials List; by
open the Partition Specification dialog
default, they use the material assigned to
and specify the partition’s dimensions,
interior walls in the General Materials
position, and material. Partitions can be used
dialog. Like cabinets, soffits can have
with shelves to create complex storage
custom molding profiles specified for them.
systems.
Unlike the other Cabinet tools, soffits do not
have default dialogs. Soffits are sized to be Custom Countertops
the same width as and 1" (20mm) deeper
than the default wall cabinet. Their heights Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
adjust automatically to fill the space between Countertop, then click and drag a
the ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets, rectangle to draw a countertop. Custom
but individual soffits can be selected and Countertops can be drawn in any view except
edited. cross section/elevation views and can be
edited to any shape. See “Editing Custom
Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m). Countertops” on page 559.
Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
If a sink or built-in appliance is added to the
Cabinets
For more detailed information about soffits, cabinet, a hole for the fixture is automatically
see “Other Objects” on page 641. cut in the custom countertop.
Cabinets generate their own countertop as
Shelves defined in the Cabinet Specification
Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and dialog. When a custom countertop covers
click in any view to create a shelf. any portion of a base cabinet, it overrides the
Once created, shelves can be modified. default countertop. See “Cabinet
Select a shelf and click the Open Object
edit button to access the Shelf
553
A custom countertop takes its thickness and Cabinet Door and

height from the base cabinet below. If there Drawer Library
is no base cabinet below, its thickness is
based on the base cabinet defaults. See In the Library Browser, expand the Cabinet
“Cabinet Defaults” on page 580. Doors and Drawers category to access a
library of special cabinet doors and drawers.
The countertop initially takes its material Select a library object, then click an existing
from the default base cabinet. Define the cabinet to place the door or drawer from the
height, position, and material in the Custom library onto that cabinet. See “Cabinet Doors
Countertop Specification dialog. See and Drawers” on page 682.
“Custom Countertop Specification Dialog”
on page 579. Use the symbol development tools to create
cabinet doors and save them in your own
Custom Counter Holes library for use in future plans. See “Adding
to the Library” on page 674.
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
Counter Hole, then click and drag a Built-In Appliances
rectangle entirely within a custom countertop
to create a hole in the countertop. Custom Appliances and fixtures can be found in the
Counter Holes can be drawn in any view Library Browser in the Fixtures, Interior
except cross section/elevation views and can category. Some appliances, such as
be edited to any shape. See “Editing Custom refrigerators, can be placed directly into a
Countertops” on page 559. plan as stand-alone symbols. Many kitchen
fixtures and appliances, such as sinks,
Cabinet Modules Library dishwashers, and garbage disposals, must be
placed into an existing cabinet. See “Interior
Classroom Design Project Training Fixtures” on page 685.
Video: Blocking Cabinets and Adding
Them to the Library Place range tops and sinks into cabi-
nets early, so that any resizing can be
In the Library Browser, expand the Cabinet done before too many cabinets are placed.
Modules category to access a list of cabinets.
Select the library object you want, then click To install an appliance into a cabinet, select
in any view to place it in the plan. Once the appliance for placement in the selection
placed, library cabinets can be edited. See pane of the Library Browser and click a
“Cabinet Modules” on page 682. cabinet. There must be enough space in the
You can add single cabinets or blocked units cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
to the library. See “Adding to the Library” on selected appliance. See “The Library
page 674 and “Architectural Blocks” on page Browser” on page 670.
663. Fixtures can be added to both the top and
front of the same cabinet. The fixture on top
can be selected by clicking the cabinet and
pressing the Tab key or clicking the Select
554
Displaying Cabinets
Next Object edit button. The fixture on

In the real world, some appliances can
the face can be deleted on the Front tab of the share a cabinet, while others cannot. It
Cabinet Specification dialog. When a is up to you to determine which appliances
cabinet has fixtures on both its top and front, can be effectively and safely combined.
the Open Symbol edit button opens the
specification dialog for the fixture on the Electrical Objects
front. If a cabinet has only one fixture, the Electrical objects such as switches and
Open Symbol edit button opens it for outlets can be placed on cabinets in most
specification. views. See “The Electrical Tools” on page
524.
Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet types, By default, cabinet module lines, the lines
labels, module lines, door opening indicators between individual cabinets, do not display
and labels is controlled in the Layer when cabinet modules are merged. To show
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying them in floor plan view, set the Cabinets,
Objects” on page 221. Module Lines layer to display.
In Floor Plan View In 3D Views

If the Cabinets, Labels layer is turned on, To show opening indicator arrows in cross
cabinet labels are centered on the cabinet section/elevation views, turn on the Cabinet
they represent. Label size is controlled in the & Door Opening Indicators layer in the
Schedule Specification dialog. See Camera View layer set in Layer Display
“Label Tab” on page 1000. Options dialog.
Cabinet Labels
Cabinets
Cabinet labels display in floor plan view Cabinet labels do not show fractional
when the Cabinets, Labels layer is turned on. information. The label for a 30 3/8 inch wide
See “Displaying Objects” on page 221. base cabinet displays as BD30. The
fractional width shows in a dimension line
Label size is controlled in the Cabinet
that marks the cabinet’s sides.
Schedule Specification dialog. See
“Label Tab” on page 1000. The format for a cabinet label is the same as
the Material List entry. Example labels are:
Select a cabinet to see the label edit handle.
This can be used to move the label. • BDR24: Base cabinet, twenty four inches
wide, one right opening door, one drawer.
555
• B30-4: Base cabinet, thirty inches wide, [B|P]{B|U|W}

four drawers.
B U BB PW
• W3030: Wall cabinet, thirty inches wide,
thirty inches high. The five parts are:
• BLPW3318x24: Blind peninsula wall 1. [ [BL] [P] | [P] R | [R] E | C ]

cabinet, thirty three inches wide, eighteen
high, twenty four inches deep. BL: blind P: peninsula R: radius E: end
C: corner
Labels consist of letters designating a type or
Examples of allowed combinations are
style, and numbers for dimensions or drawer
“blind peninsula” or “radius end.”
counts. Objects are omitted if they are
standard values, which are: 2. { B [D | S] | U [D] | W} [L | R]
• Standard number of drawers is one for a B: base U: utility (full height) W: wall
base cabinet, none for full height or wall. D: door(s) S: sink L: left R: right
• Standard depth is twenty-four inches for L and R can display only if D (door) dis-
base and full height, twelve for wall. plays, and it does not display for double
• Standard height for base cabinets is doors.
thirty-six inches, including countertop. 3. Width [height] [x depth]
• Wall cabinets are assumed to have doors, 4. [ OV | RF ] [G]
so the (D) is not listed, but the R or L is
OV: oven RF: (built in) refrigerator G:
still included for a right or left door.
glass doors
A cabinet label can have up to five parts; the 5. [PO] [CB] [-drawers [D]]
second and third parts are always present.
The other parts are optional. These can be PO: pull out shelves CB: cutting board
diagrammed with the aid of brackets (“[ ]”), D: double drawers
braces (“{ }”) and bars (“|”). Something drawers: number of drawers
enclosed in braces is required. It is optional if
Cabinet labels can also be specified
enclosed in brackets. Choose one of a list of
individually. See “Label Tab” on page 576.
objects that is separated by bars.
Editing Cabinets
Introductory Training Video: Custom Cabinets can be selected individually and as
Cabinets a group in 2D and 3D views and edited using
the edit handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialog. See “Cabinet
Video: Adding Drawers to a Cabinet
Front
556
Editing Cabinets
Using the Mouse Multiple Cabinets

Cabinets can be edited like CAD boxes. See When cabinets are selected as a group, they
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 111. can be modified as a group in the Cabinet
Depending on the type of view, the edit Specification dialog. Any specifications
handles a cabinet displays when selected that the selected objects share in common
vary. can be edited.
When a cabinet is selected in floor plan view When you group select cabinets of different
or from the top, up to ten edit handles types, some options are not available in the
display. They are the Move handle at the Cabinet Specification dialog. For
center, the Rotate handle just outside the example, you cannot redefine the crown
cabinet front (indicated by a V) and a Resize molding on a full height cabinet if it was
handle on each edge and at each corner. selected with a base cabinet that does not
have crown molding.
Soffits, shelves, and partitions can be group
selected and edited using their corresponding
specification dialog. It is important that only
soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be
a part of the selection set in order to access
the needed specification dialog.
See “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page
565.
Using the Edit Buttons

If labels are turned on (see “Displaying
Objects” on page 221), an edit handle for the A selected cabinet or cabinets can be edited
label also displays when the cabinet is in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
selected. edit toolbar. As with most objects, cabinets
can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted,
When a cabinet is selected on a side in a
etc. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page
cross section/elevation or 3D view, it shows
113.
Cabinets
five edit handles: the Move handle and a
Resize handle on each edge. In 3D views, The following edit toolbar buttons may
Cabinets can be selected on any surface: display on the edit toolbar for selected
front, side, back or top. cabinets.
Cabinets cannot be concentrically resized, • Click the Select Next Object edit
even when the Concentric edit behavior is button to select nearby objects instead of
enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86. the selected cabinet.

557
selected cabinet(s). See “Cabinet about another object. See “Reflecting

Specification Dialog” on page 565. Objects” on page 135.
• Click the Open Symbol edit button • Click the Select Same Type edit
to open the Symbol Specification button to locate all objects that have
dialog. See “Symbol Specification Dia- specific matching attributes. These
log” on page 945. This tool is only avail- objects can then be modified as a group
able for cabinets that contain library using the Load Values to Make Same
symbols such as sinks or dishwashers and
edit button. See “Select Same / Load
allows you to modify the properties of the
Same” on page 152.
fixture symbol.
• Click the Components edit button to Add to Library

open the Components dialog for the Cabinets can be saved in the Library
selected cabinet(s). See “Components Browser. Select a cabinet and click the
Dialog” on page 1014. Add to Library edit button. The Add to
• Click the Point to Point Move edit Library dialog displays, allowing you to add
button to accurately move the selected the cabinet or cabinet components to specific
cabinet(s). See “Point to Point Move” on libraries under Cabinet Modules, Cabinet
page 125. Doors and Drawers, Fixtures (Interior) or
the My Libraries category.
• Click the Make Architectural Block • If the cabinet is added to the Cabinet
edit button to block the selected cabi- Modules category, the cabinet is saved
net(s) together. See “Creating along with the cabinet door and any drop-
Architectural Blocks” on page 664. in appliance.
• Click the Replace from Library edit • If you select a library in the Cabinet
button to replace the selected cabinet Doors and Drawers category, only the
with a symbol from the library. See cabinet door is saved.
“Replace From Library” on page 680. • If the cabinet contains a drop-in appli-
ance, the Fixtures (Interior) category is
• Click the Center Object edit button available. If a library from this category
to center the selected cabinet(s) along a is chosen, only the drop-in appliance is
wall or over cabinets or fixtures. See saved to the library. See “Adding to the
“Centering Doors and Windows” on page Library” on page 674.
311.
• If the cabinet is added to the My Librar-
• Click the Reflect About Object edit ies category, only the cabinet door is
button to reflect the selected cabinet(s) saved.
558
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style

There are several ways to specify the cabinet Specification dialog. See “Cabinet
door and drawer style. Specification Dialog” on page 565.
If the desired cabinet style is known before You can also apply a door/drawer style to a
cabinets are placed, the door style can be set cabinet directly from the Library Browser.
up in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Select a door or drawer style in the library,
“Cabinet Defaults” on page 580. then click a cabinet to apply the selected
style to that cabinet. If you are in a 3D view,
Once cabinets are placed, group select them
the view updates. Continue clicking cabinets
and click the Open Object edit button to or select a different tool to stop using this
choose a new door style from the Cabinet function.
Editing Custom Countertops

Custom Countertops and Custom Using the Edit Toolbar
Counter Holes can be selected in 2D As with most objects, custom countertops
and 3D views and edited using the edit can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted,
handles, the edit toolbar and their etc. The following edit toolbar buttons may
specification dialogs. See “Custom display on the edit toolbar for a selected
Countertop Specification Dialog” on page custom countertop.
579.
open the Custom Countertop
Specification dialog. See “Custom
Countertop Specification Dialog” on
page 579.
Cabinets
Cabinet button to select nearby objects instead of
modules (3) the selected countertop.
Custom countertop • Accurate Move slows down the

move speed when using the edit handles.
Using the Mouse See “Accurate Move” on page 125.
Custom countertops are considered to be • Click the Reflect About Object
CAD-based objects and are edited the way button to reflect the selected countertop
closed polylines are. See “Editing Closed- about another object. See “Reflecting
Polyline Based Objects” on page 107. Objects” on page 135.
559
• Click the Move to Front edit button • Convert straight edges to curved or vice
to display the selected countertop in front versa using the Change Line/Arc
of other objects in floor plan view. See edit button. See “Change Line/Arc” on
“Move to Front of Group” on page 122. page 131.
• Click the Point to Point Move but- • Convert an arc or circle into a polyline by
ton to accurately move the selected coun- clicking the Convert Arc/Circle to Poly-
tertop(s). See “Point to Point Move” on line edit button. See “Convert Arc/
page 125. Circle to Polyline” on page 132.
• Click the Center Object button to • Use the Fillet and Chamfer edit
center a countertop along an intersecting tools to curve or angle the corners. See
wall or room. See “Centering Doors and “Reshaping Objects” on page 129.
• Click the Make CAD Block edit but-
• Add edges using the Break Line edit ton to include the countertop and any
tool. See “Break Line” on page 130. other selected objects in a CAD Block.
See “CAD Blocks” on page 870. Not
• Click the Convert to Spline edit but- available if only countertop holes are
ton to convert the selected edge to a selected.
spline. See “Convert to Spline” on page
132. • Click the Make Architectural Block
edit button to include the countertop and
• Use the Polyline Union , Polyline any other selected objects in an architec-
tural block. See “Architectural Blocks”
Intersection , and Polyline Subtract
on page 663. Not available if only coun-
edit buttons to create or modify countertop holes are selected.
tertops using multiple custom counter-
tops. See “Union, Intersection, and • Click the Add to Library edit button
Subtract” on page 146. to add the countertop to the library. If the
countertop is part of a CAD block, you
• Click the Convert to Plain Polyline can add it to the CAD Blocks library
edit button to change the selected coun- cocreator; if it is part of an Architectural
tertop into a polyline. See “Convert to block, you can add to the Architectural
Plain Polyline” on page 151. Blocks library. See “Adding to the
Joined Cabinets
Introductory Training Video: Cabinet
Groups and Kitchen Islands
560
Joined Cabinets
Merged cabinets show a gap in the

Cabinet Module line.
Cabinet faces are

marked with a “v”.
Cabinets of the same type and height Pilasters, Countertop Overhang, Closed Toe
automatically join when placed side-to-side Kicks, and Legs all behave differently when
or back-to-back. When attached, the groups of cabinets are joined:
countertop is continuous in 3D views. • If multiple cabinets are joined together,
Cabinets merge when two of them face the only exposed end (outside) cabinets have
same direction, meet at an angle, and touch at corner pilasters, closed toe kicks, coun-
only two corners. When angled cabinets are tertop overhang, and cabinet feet.
merged, fillers are added so the cabinets are • If multiple joined cabinets have both
continuous in 3D views. Front Pilasters and Corner Pilasters
Fillers appear on screen but are not included specified, the exposed end cabinets
in the materials list. include corner pilasters and inside cabi-
nets have front pilasters.
If the side or back of a cabinet moves against
• If multiple cabinets are joined, inside
another cabinet side or back, or against a
cabinets share Front Pilasters.
wall, it attaches to that object.
• Corner pilasters are eliminated on the
Exposed End Cabinets back if the cabinet is against a wall, and
on either side if it’s joined with another
When multiple cabinets are joined together cabinet.
the exposed end cabinets are the cabinets on
• For more information see “Cabinet Spec-
the outside.
Cabinets
ification Dialog” on page 565.
Kitchen Island
To form a kitchen island, attach several
cabinets back-to-back and side-to-side.
Match the widths so that each cabinet back or
Exposed End Cabinets side meets the back or side of only one other
cabinet. If this is not done, the lines
separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
561
Two cabinets cannot merge with the same Moving Walls with
side of another cabinet. The picture shows Cabinets Attached
two instances when cabinets are placed back-
to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces When a wall is moved, all attached cabinets
are shown. move with it. Moving a wall to an unattached
cabinet does not attach the cabinet to it; the
cabinet must be moved to the wall. It can
also be attached to the wall when Plan
Check is done.
When wall layers are resized or the wall
layer definition redefined, the cabinets may
become unattached. To reattach, select them,
drag them away, and then drag them back
again.
Special Cabinets
Introductory Training Video: Special Normal Cabinets
Shaped Cabinets
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
and click in floor plan view to place a normal
Video: Working with Special Cabinet
base cabinet.
Types
There are several special cabinet shapes that
can be specified. Certain requirements must
be met before some special cabinet types can
be specified.
Normal (default) cabinet
Corner Cabinets
To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
the inside wall corner as possible in using
either the Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinet
, or Full Height cabinet tool. A
562
Special Cabinets
corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when

it is moved, edited or copied.
Turn an existing cabinet into a corner
cabinet by selecting Corner Cabinet from the
Special drop-down list in its specification
dialog.
Corner cabinet with curved door
End Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
End Cabinet from the Special drop-down list
to create an end cabinet.
Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
• Before a corner cabinet can be specified

in the Cabinet Specification dialog,
the cabinet’s Width must be greater than
its Depth.
• The Left Side Width and the Right Side
Width can be set independently for corner
Right End Cabinet
cabinets. See “General Tab” on page 566.
• You can specify a Diagonal Door on cor- • End Cabinets have an angled front and
ner cabinets to create an angled corner side.
cabinet. See “Front Tab” on page 569. • The cabinet width must be no greater
than its depth for an end cabinet to be
specified.
Radius End Cabinets
Cabinets
Right Radius End or Left Radius End from
the Special drop-down list to create a radius
Corner cabinet with diagonal door end cabinet.
• The diagonal door on corner cabinets can

be curved by entering a negative value in
the second Right Side Width field. See
563
Radius End cabinets have a ninety-degree arch Angled Front Cabinet

As you’re facing a cabinet, a right radius end • The length of the left and right side of an
cabinet curves to the right, and a left radius Angled Front cabinet can be defined by
end cabinet curves to the left. changing the Depth/Bow Depth value.
See “General Tab” on page 566.
Left Right Bow Front Cabinets

Radius Radius
End End Open a cabinet for specification and select
Bow Front from the Special drop-down list
Peninsula Radius Cabinets to create a bow front cabinet.

Peninsula Radius from the Special drop-
down list to create peninsula radius cabinet.
Bow Front Cabinet
• The bow depth of a Bow Front cabinet

can be defined. See “General Tab” on
page 566.
Peninsula Radius Cabinet • The bow depth cannot exceed half the
cabinet width.
The radius can be adjusted by changing the
Depth/Bow Depth value. See “General Tab” • The doors and drawers on a Bow Front
on page 566. cabinet automatically match the curva-
ture of the cabinet.
Angled Front Cabinets
Fillers
Angled Front from the Special drop-down Chief Architect models a continuous
list to create an angled front cabinet. countertop and fillers if two cabinets meeting
in a corner are separated from each other by
564
Cabinet Specification Dialog
nine inches or less. Where two walls meet at Blind Cabinets

an inside corner, a countertop often flows
continuously across base cabinets on one Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,
wall to those attached to the next. A filler is one is partially hidden by the other. The
used to separate the front of one of these portion of the cabinet covered by the other
cabinets from the one it meets so that cabinet's side cannot be seen and is called a
drawers and doors have room to operate. “blind” cabinet. Blind cabinets are handled
the same as other cabinets that meet in a
corner.
Two base cabinets and the filler between them
To allow a continuous countertop, wall and

full height cabinets also attach to each other
in this way.

Select a cabinet and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cabinet
If the selected cabinet is a cabinet symbol

created using the Create Symbol Wizard,
the Cabinet Symbol Specification
dialog opens instead and has fewer options
than the Cabinet Specification dialog.
Cabinets
See “Create Symbol Wizard” on page 925.
The Cabinet Specification dialog allows
you to customize cabinets individually and in
groups. The options in the dialog are similar
to the Cabinet Defaults dialog.
565
General Tab
1
2
3 7
6
8
9
1 A number of Special cabinets are Note: Height defines the height of the entire
available from the drop-down list. See
“Special Cabinets” on page 562. cabinet. The height of the cabinet face, coun-
tertop and the toe kick are all included in this
2 Specification - A variety of cabinet value. If you change either the Countertop
Thickness or the Toe Kick Height, the cabinet
dimensions can be specified here.
Fractional cabinet widths, depths, and face height is altered. This changes the
heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch. heights of your face objects.
Height (Including Counter) - This is the Width - This is the dimension across the
measurement from the bottom to the top of cabinet as you view it in elevation. This does
the cabinet. For base cabinets, this dimension not include the countertop overhang.
includes the Counter Thickness, but not the
height of the backsplash. Depth - This is the dimension from front to
back on the cabinet. This does not include
566
the thickness of 3/4” for overlay doors or the

4 Backsplash - The dimensions and style
countertop overhang. of the backsplash are specified here.
For Special type Bow Front cabinets, specify Specify the Backsplash Height. The
the Bow Depth in inches. Up to half the backsplash is only available when the cabinet
cabinet width is allowed. is against a wall.
For corner cabinets, the Width and Depth/ Backsplash Thickness - Specify the
Bow Depth fields become Right Side thickness of the backsplash material.
Width and Left Side Width. If a corner
Check Always Present to display the
cabinet is assigned a diagonal door on the
backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a
Front tab, the second Right Side Width field
backsplash is present only when the cabinet
specifies the bow depth: a positive number
is against a wall.
creates a bow and a negative number, an
inside bow. Side - Check this box to have the same
height backsplash added to the side of a base
Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance. For
or wall cabinet that is against a wall or taller
base and full height cabinets, this is usually
cabinet.
0. Increase this value by at least 1/16” to
eliminate the toe kick. If a toe kick height has Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a
been changed from the default values, raising backsplash defined. The backsplash for a
a cabinet off the floor does not remove the wall cabinet extends from the bottom of the
toe kick. cabinet down to the base cabinet. The
backsplash for a base cabinet is measured
Follow Terrain - If the cabinet is outside a
from the countertop up.
room, check this box to place the cabinet
relative to the terrain height. Wall cabinets offer a check box for
Backsplash to Base Below. If a backsplash
3 Counter - Specify the dimensions and is added to a wall cabinet, it completely
style of the counter here.
covers the wall from the bottom of the
Counter Thickness and Counter Overhang cabinet to the countertop or backsplash
- Specify these values for base cabinets. The below.
Counter Overhang is used for any side of a
If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have
Cabinets
cabinet that is not against a wall or another
a backsplash, the backsplash from the wall
cabinet. Changing the counter thickness does
cabinet extends down to the top of the base
not alter the cabinet height but it does affect
cabinet backsplash.
the height of face items.
Electrical switches or outlets that are placed
Flat Sides can be added to base cabinets.
within the backsplash area display in front of
Checking Flat Sides eliminates the counter
the backsplash in a 3D view when electrical
overhang on the cabinet’s exposed ends.
items are turned on in the Layer Display
Check Flat Back to eliminate the overhang Options dialog.
on cabinets with an exposed back.
567
5 Toe Kick - The dimensions and style of pilasters that do not extend to the floor are
the toe kick are specified here. specified, checking this places a support
block under them at exposed corners.
Toe Kick Height and Depth - Specify these
values for base or full height cabinets. If a
6 Corner - Specify angled or rounded
Toe Kick Height or Depth is defined, it corners for the selected cabinet(s).
becomes part of the cabinet and is not deleted
Corner Width - Enter a value to create a flat
if the cabinet is raised off the floor.
corner plane of the specified width. This also
If the Toe Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth is applies to the countertop.
set to use the default “(D),” the toe kick is
Check Rounded to eliminate the 45 degree
only available when the cabinet is resting on
plane and round the cabinet corners.
the floor. Delete the “(D)” and enter a
positive value to display a toe kick on a
7 The preview of the cabinet updates as
cabinet that is raised off the floor. the cabinet changes.
Changing the Toe Kick Height does not alter
8 Show Color - Check this box to show
the cabinet height but it does affect the height the cabinet preview in color.
of face items.
9 The automatic Cabinet Label displays
Flat Sides can be added to base and full below the dialog preview.
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides
The cabinet label defines the type and size of
eliminates the toe kick area on the exposed
the cabinet. It is not editable, but you can
end of the cabinet.
specify a custom label on the Label tab.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on
The labels display in floor plan view if
cabinets with an exposed back. This does not
Cabinet Labels are turned on in the Layer
eliminate the toe kick on the cabinet front.
Display Options dialog. They also display
Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet in the Materials List.
sides to cover the sides of the toe kick area. If
568
Front Tab
1
2
The cabinet’s door, drawer and shelf front. The drawer must be at least 6
configuration is specified on the Front tab. inches for the frame and panel to display.
• Select Library to select a cabinet door or
1 Click a face item in the preview drawer front from the library. See “Cabi-
diagram to select it. The selected item
Cabinets
is highlighted, and the Item Number, Item net Doors and Drawers” on page 682.
Type and Item Height identify the part Click the Library button to select from the
selected. Cabinet Doors and Drawers library
category. Once a door style is selected from
2 Select the Door Style and Drawer the library, it displays in the drop down list.
Style from the drop-down lists.
See “Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer
• Select Plain Doors or Drawers to apply
Style” on page 559.
a flat drawer or door front.
• Select Framed Doors or Doors to apply 3 Item Number - The item number
a drawer with a frame and flat panel currently selected displays here. Click
the drop-down list to select a face item. Item
569
numbers start at the top of the cainet and go • When the height of a cabinet is changed,
down the face. Item number 1 usually or the height of a face item is changed,
identifies the top face frame rail (separation). the height of the lowest face item is
altered to make up the difference.
Item Type - Click the drop-down list to
select from the available face items. • If you modify the lowest item, the item
directly above is adjusted. Set the coun-
Items that display in the front of a cabinet tertop height and the toe kick height first,
such as doors, drawers and appliances are and then work from the top to the bottom
called front items. when adjusting face items.
Each front item is usually separated by a • If the height of an appliance has been
frame piece, the exposed portion of which is altered, entering “d” restores its default
defined as the separation. At the top, bottom height.
and sides of the face frame, a separation
represents the cabinet rails and stiles. Specify Shelves - Click this button to open
the Cabinet Shelves Specification
Note: The program makes sure that the dialog and specify the shelf configuration for
heights of the front items equal the total cabi- a door or opening face item. See “Cabinet
net face height. When necessary, a blank Shelf Specification Dialog” on page 524.
area is inserted at the bottom or the lowest
face item is deleted when there is not enough Click Add New to add a new face item
room. This means you should start editing directly below the currently selected item.
face items at the top and work down. • When you click Add New, the New
Cabinet Face Item dialog displays.
• A cabinet can have any number of front Define the Item Type, Item Height and
items, but there is a limit to the number of click OK.
items that can actually fit on a given cabi-
net’s front.
• Cabinet fronts may be composed of any
combination of face items.
• When a Panel (false front) is specified, it
assumes the appearance of the drawer
style assigned to that cabinet.
• Appliances cannot be added from the • If you click Add New with no face item
Item Type list, but are included once selected, the program adds the new item
they have been added from the library. at the bottom of the cabinet face.
See “Built-In Appliances” on page 554. • When a face item is added to the cabinet
front, the program attempts to reduce the
Item Height - Define a value for the selected
height of the lowest item on the cabinet
item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights
front to make room for the new item.
are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
570
Click Delete to remove the currently selected • Stile Between Doors - Select the check
item. When a face item is deleted, usually the box to have double doors and double
height of the lowest item is increased to drawers separated by a stile. This has no
make up the difference. effect on other item types.
Click Move Up to move the currently • Lazy Susan - This option is only avail-
selected item up one position, switching able for corner cabinets. These do not
places with the item directly above. show, but are reflected in the cabinet
label and how the cabinet is drawn in
Click Move Down to move the currently floor plan view.
selected item down one position, switching
places with the item directly below. • The Reverse Appliance check box is
available if a sink, appliance or other fix-
Note: The program tries to maintain a single ture is placed into the cabinet. Select
separation between all face items. When you Reverse Appliance to reverse the fixture
add or delete a face item, separations are from left to right. This feature can be
usually added or deleted with them. used to change a left hand door on a built-
in refrigerator to a right hand door.
4 Certain Options are available • Check Double Face to replace the cur-
depending on the type of cabinet
rent cabinet face with two faces, each
selected.
approximately half as wide.
• Inset Doors may be selected for all cabi-
• Check Triple Face to replace the cabinet
nets. This option makes all door and
face with three faces.
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
instead of overlaying it. Bevel - Type in a value to apply beveled
• Doors On Back may be selected if the edges to plain drawers and doors. This does
cabinet back is not attached. The back not affect framed or library doors. The bevel
matches the front. width, as viewed from the front has a
maximum value of 3”.
• Glass Doors may be defined for any cab-
inet that doesn’t use a library door. When Enter a Side Overlap value to apply an
selected, the door panel is created using overlap to doors and drawers. A value of 1
the glass material. The entire door is inches creates an overlap of one inch on
Cabinets
glass on plain doors. either side.
• Diagonal Door - This option is only Enter a Vertical Overlap value to apply a
available for corner cabinets. Check this vertical overlap to doors and drawers. A
box to create a diagonal door instead of a value of 1 inches creates an overlap of one
double door at right angles. inch on top and bottom.
Separation - Defines the width of the face
If Diagonal Door is checked in the frame between doors, drawers, and face
Cabinet Defaults dialog, corner cabi- items. A European style cabinet typically has
nets have a diagonal door by default. a 3/4” separation.
571
Left and Right Stile - Define the frame

5 Appliance Front Offset - This option
width to the left or right of all face items. is available for cabinets with top-
These can be set independently if necessary. mounted fixtures, such as sinks and
When set to default ([D]), the program uses cooktops. Enter a value to adjust the depth of
the separator width for the left and right the counter surface between the counter edge
stiles. and the fixture.
Fill Tab
2
3
The options on this tab control how a cabinet

2 Uncheck both boxes and click the Plan
displays in floor plan view. Fill color bar to open the Color
Chooser and specify a custom fill color.
1 Check No Fill to display the selected See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 722.
cabinet(s) with a transparent fill,
showing only the cabinet border.
3 Appliance Fill - These items are
enabled when the selected cabinet
Check Use Default to use the default fill
contains a fixture or appliance.
style assigned to the corresponding cabinet.
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 552.
572
Check No Fill to give the selected appliance Uncheck both boxes and click the Plan Fill
a transparent fill. color bar to open the Color Chooser and
specify a custom fill color for the appliance.
Check Use Original Plan Colors to use the
original colors for the fixture inserted into
the cabinet.
Hardware Tab
Cabinets
1 Select a Door Handle from the drop- Select a Drawer Handle from the drop-
down list or select a Library handle down list or select a Library handle from the
from the Select Library Object dialog. Select Library Object dialog. Entering a
Specify the location of the handle In from value In from Drawer Edge creates two
Door Edge and Down from Door Top. For handles the specified distance from the
Wall Cabinets, this value is Up From Door drawer edge. Specify the location of the
Bottom. handle Down from Drawer Top. A value of
0" centers the handle on the drawer.
573
Hinges - Select from the list of available library, or None. Adjoining cabinets share
styles or select a Library hinge from the cabinet legs.
Select Library Object dialog. Specify
the location of the hinges Up/Down from
Door Edge. Two or three hinges are placed,
depending on the door height.
2 Front Pilaster - Select the default front

pilaster, a Pilaster from the library, or
None.
Corner Pilaster - Select the default corner
pilaster, a pilaster from the library, or None.
Specifying a corner pilaster automatically
creates a flat corner surface and overrides the
Flat Corner setting on the General tab.
The Width applies to both front pilasters and
corner pilasters.
Check Extend to Floor to extend front
pilasters and corner pilasters to the floor.
Removing the Toe Kick on the General tab
also extends the pilasters to the floor.
Base cabinet with front pilasters and legs
3 Cabinet Feet - Select the default
cabinet leg, a cabinet leg from the
574
Moldings Tab
1
2
Multiple moldings for each type of cabinet Moldings and Profiles library category.
can be specified. For example, you may want Browse and add a new molding to the list.
a wood edge around countertops of base
Select - Click here to open the Moldings and
cabinets and a crown molding that ties
Profiles library category. If you select a
together the tops of the wall cabinets and full
Cabinets
molding using the Select button, you replace
height cabinets.
the current molding in the list. This option
1 Molding - Select a molding for the substitutes one molding for another; it does
cabinet. This list has items only if you not add a new molding to the list.
assigned moldings to your default cabinet.
Delete - Click here to delete the selected
These moldings are stored with individual
molding from the cabinet.
cabinets in all other cases.
3 Molding Specification - Use this
2 Add New - If no moldings are selected section to modify the molding profile
or if you want to add a new molding to
for the selected cabinet.
the list, click the button to open the
575
Height - This is the vertical dimension of the that type of object. See “Label Tab” on page
molding profile. This value is initially set in 1000.
the selected molding profile but can be
Cabinet labels can also be controlled on the
adjusted.
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Width - This value can be used to resize the “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
molding profile horizontally. 218.
Offset - This value defines the distance the
molding is offset from the top or bottom of
the cabinet. Where it is measured from
depends on which option is selected below.
You can enter positive or negative values in
this field. The molding does not display if it 1
2
is completely above or below the cabinet. 3
4
Once an offset is defined, select From Top
or From Bottom to specify a reference point.
• From Top is measured from the cabinet
top and the molding top. 1 Suppress Label - Check this box to
suppress the selected object’s label.
• From Bottom is measured from the
molding bottom and the cabinet bottom. 2 Automatic Labels - Select this option
to control labels through either the
default schedule or the schedule that the
Layer Tab
cabinet is currently in. See “Cabinet Labels”
For information about the Layer tab, see on page 555 for more information on how
“Layer Tab” on page 223. automatic labels are generated.
Materials Tab 3 Use Component Code -Replace the

default label for this object with the
Some material options may be disabled if the component code. See “Components Dialog”
selected cabinet is a manufacturer symbol. on page 1014.
For more information about the Materials 4 Specify Label - Replace the default
tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 710. label for this object with whatever you
type into the text field.
Label Tab
Note: If you choose a label shape in the
An object’s label displays in floor plan view Cabinet Schedule Specification dia-
if Show Labels is checked on the Label tab log Label tab, it overrides these options and
of the Schedule Specification dialog for displays the schedule label instead.
576
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog

From the Front tab of the Base Cabinet, and click the Specify Shelves... button to
Wall Cabinet, or Full Height Cabinet open the Cabinet Shelf Specification
Specification dialog, select a door or dialog. See “Front Tab” on page 569.
opening face item in the preview diagram
Cabinets
Automatic door or opening. If a cabinet is resized after
shelving has been manually edited, the
1 By default, cabinet shelves are specifications are maintained, but all shelves
specified automatically. The default may not be display in all situations.
number of shelves, shelf type, thickness,
spacing, and depth display here. The Number of Shelves can be specified.
Equal Spacing is checked by default.
Manual
3 The shelf type, thickness, spacing, and
depth can be specified on a per shelf
2 Select the Manual radio button to basis or for all shelves at once. To determine
specify cabinet shelving for the selected
577
which, select the shelf number or All Shelves Enter a shelf Thickness in fractions or
from the drop down list. decimals.
Changing the Spacing From Previous
Note: If All Shelves is selected after
changes have been made to any one shelf, unchecks Equal Spacing above.
“no change” displays, indicating that all You can select Full, Half or Specify the shelf
shelves are not the same.
Depth manually.
Specify the shelf Type from the drop down 4 The preview shows shelf numbers,
list. thickness, depth, and spacing. Press the
Tab key to update the preview as changes are
made.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the Open Specification dialog or Partition
Object edit button to open the Shelf
General Tab
Specify the Height, Width, Depth, and the want the shelf or partition to follow the
distance from the Floor to Bottom of the terrain.
shelf or partition. Click the check box if you
578
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
Fill Tab Layer Tab

For information about the Fill tab, see “Fill For information about using the Layer tab,
Tab” on page 572. see “Layer Tab” on page 223.
Moldings Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Moldings tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Moldings Tab” on page 545. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Select a custom countertop and click the
3 Check Set Height From Cabinet to
Open Object edit button to open the allow the Countertop Height to be
Custom Countertop Specification determined by the cabinet below.
dialog. Top Height - Specify the height of the top of
the custom countertop independent of the
General Tab cabinet below. Set Height From Cabinet
must be unchecked.
4 Check Set Thickness From Cabinet to

allow the Countertop Thickness to be
1 determined by the cabinet below.
2 Thickness - Specify the thickness of the
3 countertop independent of the cabinet below.
Set Thickness From Cabinet must be
unchecked.
4
Polyline Tab
Cabinets
1 Check Hole in Countertop to convert “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
the polyline into a countertop hole. The
selected polyline must be contained within a Selected Line Tab
custom countertop.
Check No Molding On Selected Edge see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
2
to turn off molding on the selected
edge. Moldings Tab
For information about the Moldings tab, see
“Moldings Tab” on page 545.
579

For information about the Line Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 851. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Fill Style Tab

“Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Cabinet Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by Most of the values in the various Cabinet
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... Defaults dialogs are initial values. Once
Click the “+” next to Cabinets to access the placed, cabinets can be edited individually or
cabinets sub-headings. Select a subheading in groups by selecting and opening them for
and click the Edit... button to open the specification. Changes made to cabinets after
defaults dialog associated with your they have been placed do not alter the default
selection. settings. You should review the settings in
the Cabinet Defaults dialogs before
Cabinet defaults can also be accessed by
cabinets are placed.
double-clicking the Cabinet Tools
button. Most cabinet defaults are not dynamic. The
following values are dynamic and change
existing cabinet objects whenever the default
cabinet is changed: Separation, Splash
Height and Thickness, Countertop
Overhang and Thickness, Toe Kick Height
and Depth, and all Materials. See “Dynamic
General Cabinet Defaults

Click General to access the General
Cabinet Defaults dialog.
580
Cabinet Defaults
that is 20 inches wide, your default cabinet is

24 inches, and the minimum width increment
is 6 inches, the program places an 18 inch
1 cabinet. If you have a space that is 8 inches
2 and your minimum cabinet width is 9 inches,
no cabinet is placed.
You can set these values specifically for

particular manufacturers. This helps
you place and resize cabinets with your
mouse quickly.
1 Set the Minimum Cabinet Width. The other Cabinet Default dialog buttons
2 Specify whether cabinets should Use access the default dialogs for each cabinet
Grid Snaps or a designated Resize type. When finished with each, you return to
Increment when resizing. Set the Width this dialog.
Increment that new cabinets snap to. The
smallest allowed Minimum Cabinet Width Base, Full Height,
is 1/16th of an inch (1 mm) and the minimum Wall, Shelf, Partition
Width Increment is 1 inch (10 mm).
The default dialog for each cabinet type is
If you try to place a cabinet into a space that
similar to its corresponding specification
is too narrow, the program attempts to place
dialog and can also be opened by double-
a smaller cabinet that is a multiple of the
clicking the appropriate tool or by selecting
minimum width increment. If the space is
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinets.
narrower than the minimum width
increment, the program does not place a Descriptions of the settings in the Cabinet
cabinet. For example, if you have a space Specification dialogs begin on page 565.
581
582
Chapter 20:
Terrain
Chapter Overview
Classroom Design Project Training • Water Feature Tools
Video: Building a Terrain Model • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
• Stepping Stone Tools
• Plant Tools
Video: Terrain and Landscaping
• Sprinkler Tools
Chief Architect allows you to model the • Sun Shadows
terrain around a house. Begin by specifying • Hardiness Zones
elevation data that creates the surface • The Terrain Library
contours, and then add surface features. • Clearing the Terrain
Chief Architect builds a three dimensional • Displaying Terrain
map of the terrain. The more information • Editing Terrain Objects
provided, the better the terrain models. • Creating a Plot Plan
• Plant Image Specification Dialog
Once the terrain is modeled, shadows that
• Plant Specification Dialog
follow the terrain can be created using the
• Plant Chooser Dialog
Sun Angle tool. The road and sidewalk tools
• Terrain Specification Dialog
are covered in the next chapter. See “Roads
• Elevation Point Specification Dialog
& Sidewalks” on page 629.
• Elevation Line Specification Dialog
• Flat Region Specification Dialog
Chapter Contents • Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
• Terrain Configuration Button • Raised / Lowered Region Specification
• Terrain Tools Dialog
Terrain
• Terrain Elevation Tools • Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
• Terrain Modifier Tools • Terrain Break Specification Dialog
• Terrain Feature Tools • Terrain Path Specification Dialog
• Garden Bed Tools
583
• Sprinkler Specification Dialog • Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data

• Importing Terrain Data • Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
• Import Terrain Wizard
Terrain Configuration Button

Access to the terrain and road tools is • Garden Bed Tools
centralized through the Terrain menu.
Select Terrain to display the following • Water Feature Tools
terrainand road parent tools: • Stepping Stone Tools
• Terrain Tools • Terrain Walls and Curb Tools
• Terrain Elevation Tools • Roads and Sidewalks Tools
• Terrain Modifier Tools • Plant Tools
• Terrain Feature Tools
• Sprinkler Tools
Terrain Tools
There are many tools available for creating
terrain. All tools are accessible through the
Terrain menu.
Select Terrain> Terrain Perimeter to
create a terrain perimeter.
Introductory Training Video: Creating a
Terrain Perimeter
Terrain Perimeter
584
Terrain Elevation Tools
If you do not add any terrain elevation data

within the terrain perimeter, the terrain
remains flat at the elevation 0' - 0".
The terrain perimeter contains a variety of
properties that can be customized. Many of
these properties affect how the terrain
displays when modeled in 3D. See “Terrain
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a render view
Click the Terrain Specification button
The terrain perimeter is a closed polyline to open the Terrain Specification
defining the boundary of the terrain that dialog. The Terrain Specification dialog
generates in 3D views. If the terrain controls how terrain is generated and how it
perimeter does not display on the screen, displays in 3D views. See “Terrain
click the Fill Window button. Specification Dialog” on page 610.
If you create a terrain perimeter after you Select Terrain> Build Terrain to
have drawn a building or walls, the terrain generate the terrain surface based on
perimeter encompasses everything in floor the provided elevation data. See “Building
plan view. the Terrain” on page 596.
It can be resized and edited like other Select Clear Terrain to remove
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline contour lines and 3D surfaces
Based Objects” on page 107. generated by the program based on the
provided elevation data. Elevation data
A CAD polyline can be converted into a entered manually remains. See “Clearing the
terrain perimeter. See “Editing Terrain Terrain” on page 596.

Introductory Training Video: Adding surface of your site and is represented by
Elevation Information for Sloped Lots contour lines in floor plan view and a curved
surface in 3D.
Select Terrain> Terrain Elevation
Tools to access the various tools.
Elevation Points
Elevation data can be specified using
Elevation Points contain absolute
Elevation Point , Elevation Line , elevation data for one location. Chief
Terrain
Elevation Spline , Elevation Region Architect requires many points to make an

accurate approximation of your site. They
and Terrain Break tools. When terrain
is generated, this data is used to calculate the
585
should be used in addition to Elevation

Lines and Elevation Splines .
Even small sites with a slope may require
over a hundred points to generate an accurate
model of the terrain. For the sake of
illustration, the following image shows only
a few elevation points.
To place an elevation point, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Elevation Points and
click in floor plan view. The Elevation Contour lines after terrain generation
Point Specification dialog opens. Enter
an elevation value and click OK. Click Elevation Lines
somewhere else in floor plan view and the
Elevation Point Specification dialog An Elevation Line contains absolute
opens again with the last elevation value elevation data for many points at a
entered. See “Elevation Point Specification constant elevation. Elevation lines can be
Dialog” on page 613. connected to create a polyline with many
straight sections. For the sake of illustration,
single-section elevation lines were added to
the following image.
To place an elevation line, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Elevation Line and
click and drag in floor plan view. At first, an
elevation line is at elevation 0' - 0". It must
be opened and assigned an elevation.
120"
Elevation Points before terrain generation
To generate the terrain, select Terrain>

Build Terrain . Chief Architect gathers
the elevation data provided, fills in the gaps
where elevation data has not been provided,
and generates contour lines. See “Building 0"
the Terrain” on page 596.
Elevation Lines before terrain generation
586
60"
36"
0"
Contour lines after terrain generation Elevation splines before terrain generation
Render view (Low Detail) after terrain generation
Elevation Splines
Elevation Splines can be used to form Contour lines after terrain generation
complex curves and shapes. Like
elevation lines, elevation splines contain Elevation lines and elevation splines are
absolute elevation data for many points along created and edited just like CAD lines and
a constant elevation. splines. See “The CAD Drawing Tools” on
To place an elevation spline, select Terrain> page 842.
Elevation Data> Elevation Spline and Elevation Regions

click and drag multiple sections in floor plan
view. Elevation splines are initially placed at An Elevation Region contains
elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and absolute elevation data for an enclosed
assigned an elevation. region and is ideal for creating a flat surface
for your building site. Avoid specifing any
other elevation data within an elevation
Terrain
region.
To create an elevation region, select
Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation
587
Region and then click and drag a

rectangular polyline in floor plan view. Once
the elevation region is drawn, it must be
opened and assigned an elevation value.
Elevation regions are created just like
rectangular polylines. See “Rectangular
Render Full Overview after terrain generation
240" Terrain Breaks

A Terrain Break creates a division
along the terrain surface that effects
120"
terrain generation. Elevation data on one side
of the terrain break does not affect the terrain
generation on the other side, allowing you to
create immediate drops in terrain.
0" To place a terrain break, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Terrain Break and
Elevation lines used to create a terrain grade, click and drag a line in floor plan view.
elevation region used to create building pad.
• If the terrain break divides the terrain
perimeter into two separate pieces, the
terrain data on either side is calculated
independently and smoothed separately,
resulting in sharp terrain contours.
• If the terrain break does not extend com-
pletely from one side of the terrain perim-
eter to the other, the areas near each end
of the terrain break are blended.
Contour lines after terrain generation
588
Terrain Modifier Tools
240"
120"
84" Render full overview after terrain generation

18"
The Retaining Wall tool creates a
0"
similar effect and adds a retaining wall that
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation
rests against the terrain break. By default, the
region creates the building pad, and the terrain height of the retaining wall matches the
break (dashed) creates a vertical drop. terrain on the high side of the break and the
bottom matches the low side. Height can also
be specified independent of the terrain
elevation. See “Retaining Walls” on page
593.
Contour lines after terrain generation
Terrain Modifier Tools

Select Terrain> Modifier to access surface generated from the elevation data
these tools. provided in your plan.
The terrain surface can be modified using the To add a terrain modifier to your plan, select
one of the tools from the menu or toolbar and
Raised Region , Lowered Region ,
click and drag a closed polyline in floor plan
Hill , Valley , and Flat Region view. The polyline can then be selected and
Terrain
tools. These tools allow you to modify the edited in a variety of ways. See “Editing
existing elevation data by drawing a closed Terrain Objects” on page 597.
polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain
589
A Raised Region creates a raised area

Elev. Line
(240") that is flat on the top like a plateau, and a
Raised Lowered Region creates a depression

Hill
Region
Elevation that is flat on the bottom. The Hill and
Region (120")
Valley tools create similar terrain shapes
Flat Valley that come to a point instead of flattening at
Region
their highest or lowest elevations. A Flat
Lowered Region
Elev. Line
(0") Region adjusts to the surrounding terrain
to maintain a flat elevation.
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation region
creates the building pad, and the terrain Terrain modifiers can be blocked with
modifiers create terrain shapes relative to the images and stored in the library for
elevation data. future use. See “Creating Architectural
Blocks” on page 664.
Render Full Overview after terrain generation
Terrain Feature Tools

Introductory Training Video: Terrain
Spline Feature , Kidney Shaped
Features
Feature , and Terrain Hole tools.
Terrain features are bounded areas that
follow the contours of the terrain rather Use terrain features to highlight landscape
than modify them. They can have a specified elements. For example, if the entire terrain is
height and material and can also clip other using a grass material, a flower bed can be
terrain features. Terrain features can be created within the terrain by specifying a
drawn in 2D and 3D views. terrain feature that uses a dirt material.
Terrain features are also useful for creating
You can create a variety of terrain feature
walkways using the height property.
shapes using the Rectangular Feature ,
590
Terrain Feature Tools
Terrain features were used to create the

• Rectangular Features and Terrain
following image. Positive or negative
Holes are created just like rectangular elevation values were assigned to each, as
polylines. were special materials such as sand, water,
and soil. The volleyball net, flowers, and tree
• Spline Features are created just like are all objects found in the Library Browser.
standard CAD closed splines. See
“Splines” on page 868.
• Kidney Shaped Features are created

by dragging from one end of the kidney
to the other. See “Rectangular Polyline”
on page 865.
Terrain features can also be converted from
closed 2D polylines or splines using the
Convert Polyline edit tool. See “Convert
For information about adding height and
material information to terrain features, see
“Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on
Terrain features in floor plan view
page 617.
Terrain features in a final render view
Terrain Holes as creating a terrain feature and checking

Terrain
“make hole” in the Terrain Feature
A Terrain Hole is a region that cuts a Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
hole in the terrain. Using this tool is the same Specification Dialog” on page 617.
591
The Terrain Hole tool is useful for

Terrain features can be blocked with
manually clipping the terrain around a images and stored in the library for
foundation that does not match the footprint future use. See “Creating Architectural
of the first floor. For more information on Blocks” on page 664.
clipping, see “General Tab” on page 610.
Garden Bed Tools

Use the Garden Bed tools to place Kidney Shaped Garden Bed
garden beds in your plan. You have a
choice of shapes. You can draw a kidney shaped garden
bed with this tool. Once you have
placed it with the orientation you prefer, you
Polyline Garden Bed
can select it and then resize, rotate, and
This tool draws a square or retangular reshape it using the edit handles.
garden bed.
Set the height of raised garden beds in the
Terrain Feature Specification. Place a garden
Round Garden Bed
bed, select it, and click Open Object to
Use this tool to draw round or oval access the dialog. See “Terrain Feature Spec-
garden beds. ification Dialog” on page 617.
Water Feature Tools

The Water Feature tools allow you to then select it to resize, rotate, and reshape it
add ponds or a stream to your plan. using the edit handles.
You can set the atttributes of these beatures
in the Terrain Feature Specification. See Stream
“Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on
page 617. You can draw a stream with this tool.
Normally streams are irregular in
shape. Select the stream and click Advanced
Round Pond
Spline on the edit toolbar. This gives you
Use this tool to draw a round or oval
handles to reshape the stream. See
pond.
“Advanced Splines” on page 117.
Kidney Shaped Pond A stream follows the terrain. This can result
in it appearing to run uphill if the terrain is
This tool draws a kidney shaped pond. not modeled correctly.
Place it with the orientation you prefer,
592
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

The Terrain Wall and Curb Tools The Straight Retaining Wall tool
allow you to draw landscaping walls draws a straight wall.
and curbs.
Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool
to draw a curved wall that holds back
Terrain Walls earth.
Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to The height of the retaining wall is
draw a wall that sits on top of and determined by the elevation on each side. By
follows the terrain. This wall is made of default, the height of the wall matches the
concrete by default. You can assign terrain on the high side of the break and the
alternative materials. bottom matches the low side. If you insert a
Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw a retaining wall into flat terrain, it looks like a
curved terrain wall. This wall is drawn concrete strip in 3D views.
the same way as a CAD spline. See “Splines”
on page 868. Terrain Curbs
To specify the height of either straight or Use the terrain curb tools to draw
curved terrain walls, select the wall and landscaping curbs.
Open Object . On the General tab of the Use the Straight Curb tool to draw a
Terrain Path Specification, indicate the straight curb.
wall’s height. See “Terrain Path Specification
Use the Spline Curb tool to draw a
curved curb. This curb is drawn the
same way as a CAD spline. See “Splines” on
Retaining Walls page 868.
The Retaining Wall tools function similarly
to terrain breaks, but include a wall. See
“Terrain Breaks” on page 588.
Stepping Stone Tools

Use the stepping stones tools to place a Polyline Stepping Stone
walkway made of individual stepping
stones. By default, these steps are concrete, This tool draws retangular or square
but you can change their material and other stepping stones.
Terrain
attributes in the Terrain Feature

Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
593
Round Stepping Stone

You can draw round stepping stones
with this tool.
Plant Tools
Select Plant tools to add plants to your
plan.
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser

to open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
“Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 608.
Click and drag the slider bar and select a
Select Plant> Create Plant Image to growth period from zero to twenty years.
create a plant image. See “Plant Image This only works for plants that have a mature
Specification Dialog” on page 602. Once a height and mature age set. See “Plant Image
plant image is created, it can be added to the Specification Dialog” on page 602.
library for future use. See “Adding to the
Library” on page 674. Select Plant> Show Hardiness Zones
to access regional climate zone maps. See
Choose Plant> Grow All Plants to open “Hardiness Zones” on page 595.
the Grow Plants dialog.
Add Fencing to your terrain, complete
with gates from the Doors Library.
See“Fencing” on page 237 and “Doors” on
page 683.
Sprinkler Tools
Use the Sprinkler Tools to design a Sprinkler lines are drawn and edited just like
sprinkler system in your plan. CAD lines. See “Line Tools” on page 846.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Sprinkler Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Sprinkler
Head to open the library and choose a Spline to draw curved sprinkler lines in
sprinkler type. Sprinklers can be selected and your plan. Sprinkler splines are drawn and
opened for specification. See “Sprinkler edited like CAD splines. See “Splines” on
Specification Dialog” on page 620. page 868.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Sprinkler Line The appearance of sprinkler lines and splines
can be controlled in the Layer Display
to draw sprinkler lines in your plan.
594
Sun Shadows
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects”

on page 221.
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the Sun Shadow and the terrain is not up-to-date,
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter the terrain automatically rebuilds. You can
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain. turn off the automatic rebuild. See “Sun
Angle Specification Dialog” on page 778.
The Sun Shadow is automatically rebuilt
whenever terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show Hardiness Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the drop-
down list to select various regions.
Zones... to view the regional
Terrain
595
The Terrain Library

The Library Browser contains a even the terrain perimeter itself and send
collection of terrain objects that can be them to the library as one unit. This library
placed in a plan. object can then be placed into any plan. Once
placed into a plan, each object is independent
You can create your own objects and save
and is no longer part of the group. See
them to the library. Select any combination
“Adding to the Library” on page 674.
of elevation points, elevation lines, terrain
features, roads, sidewalks, road markings, or
Clearing the Terrain

To remove the generated terrain, select Terrain> Clear Terrain deletes all
Terrain> Clear Terrain . When components required to model the terrain,
the terrain is cleared, it does not display in including the generated 2D contours.
3D views and contours do not display in Clearing the terrain does not remove the
floor plan view. The terrain can be terrain perimeter, elevation data, or terrain
regenerated at any time by selecting features from the model. These objects can
Terrain> Clear Terrain only be removed by deleting the terrain
perimeter or if they are selected and deleted.
Displaying Terrain
How terrain objects display in 2D and 3D Contour lines are generated at intervals
views is determined by the active layer set. specified on the Contours tab of the Terrain
See “Layer Sets” on page 216. Specification dialog. If elevation data is
added to the model at 24 inch intervals and
How each layer displays in the active layer
the contour line interval is set to 12 inches,
set is controlled in the Layer Display
generating terrain creates one additional
Options dialog. See “Layer Display
contour line between each piece of elevation
data. See “Contours Tab” on page 612.
Building the Terrain A terrain perimeter with no additional
elevation data generates a terrain that is flat
When terrain is generated, Chief at the elevation 0' - 0".
Architect gathers all terrain data that
has been added to the model and creates a By default, the terrain is automatically built
terrain surface. The program interpolates the before a 3D view is generated. This process
data to fill in the gaps. takes a variable amount of time, depending
596
Editing Terrain Objects
on the amount of elevation data and number Rebuild the terrain manually by selecting
of terrain features. The Building Terrain
Terrain> Build Terrain .
progress dialog displays as terrain is
generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating Many tools are available to help you adjust
the progress. the angle of your view in 3D. See “Moving a
Camera in 3D Views” on page 737.
Terrain & 3D Drawing Time

Terrain requires many triangles to generate,
which has an effect on the drawing time of
3D views. The length of the delay is
determined by the quality of the terrain and
the number of terrain features present.
The program automatically rebuilds the
The terrain adjusts trees and images to the
terrain when a 3D view is open. To turn off
terrain when a 3D view is created.
the automatic rebuild, select 3D> 3D
Lights and symbols from the Symbol Library
Settings... to open the 3D Settings
can be placed outdoors and included in 3D
dialog. Clear the Auto Rebuild Terrain
views when the terrain is generated. When
check box on the Options tab and click OK.
placed outdoors, lights and symbols follow
the terrain surface.
Editing Terrain Objects

Terrain objects can be selected in 2D and 3D • An elevation point can be moved in floor
views. See “Selecting Objects” on page 92. plan view using the center edit handle.
Any time elevation data is changed, the • Elevation Lines and Elevation
terrain must be regenerated. This occurs
automatically when a 3D view is open. It can Splines and Terrain Breaks are
also be done manually by selecting Terrain> edited like lines and splines. Elevation
lines can be connected into polylines.
Build Terrain . You should be familiar with editing these
types of objects before spending too
Edit Handles for much time modeling terrain. See “Line
Terrain Objects Tools” on page 846, “Polylines” on page
863, and “Splines” on page 868.
• The shape of the terrain perimeter can be
Terrain
edited like a CAD polyline in floor plan • The shape of a Raised Region ,
view and 3D views. See “Editing Closed-
Polyline Based Objects” on page 107. Lowered Region , Hill , Valley
597
Feature Specification Dialog” on page

, or Flat Region can be edited like
617.
a normal polyline. See “Polylines” on
page 863. • Terrain objects created with the Terrain
• Terrain features are edited just like Modifier tools can be selected and
standard lines, splines, and polylines. See opened for specification. The Raised /
“Editing Objects” on page 79. Lowered Region Specification, the
Hill / Valley Specification, and the
Opening Terrain Objects Flat Region Specification dialogs
for Specification contain area information for the polyline
and control the relative height of the ter-
• Select Terrain> Terrain Specification... rain object and how it displays in floor
or select the terrain perimeter and plan view. See “Hill / Valley Specifica-
tion Dialog” on page 617.
open the Terrain Specification dia-
log. Here you can control many of the Edit Toolbar Buttons
variables that determine how the terrain for Terrain Objects
is modeled, as well as how the terrain Depending on the type of terrain object
perimeter displays in floor plan view. See selected, a variety of edit toolbar buttons are
“Terrain Specification Dialog” on page available on the edit toolbar. The edit toolbar
610. buttons for terrain objects are the same as
• The Elevation Point Specification those available for CAD objects. For more
dialog is used to assign height values and information about the edit toolbar buttons,
provides a more accurate method for see “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 71.
relocating elevation points. See “Eleva-
tion Point Specification Dialog” on page • If you click the Delete edit button
613. when the terrain perimeter is selected,
you delete all terrain objects.
• The Elevation Line Specification
dialog is used to assign height values. • There are a few different tools and tech-
You can also to change the way elevation niques available for copying and replicat-
lines and splines display in floor plan ing terrain objects. For a complete
view. See “Elevation Line Specification description, see “Copying and Pasting
Dialog” on page 616. Objects” on page 136.
• Use the Terrain Feature Note: If you copy from one plan to another,
Specification dialog to assign different you cannot view the pasted objects in 3D
height values, control how terrain fea- unless a terrain perimeter exists.
tures display in floor plan view, and
select the material that is applied to the • Use the Polyline Subtract tool to
terrain feature in 3D views. See “Terrain create holes in terrain features. When this
method is used the underlying terrain, or
598
Creating a Plot Plan
whatever lies beneath the terrain feature Moving Terrain Objects

defines the height and material of the Using Dimensions
hole. See “Subtract” on page 148.
If dimensions display when a terrain object is
selected, the object can be moved using the
Move Object Using Dimension dialog.
For more information see “Moving Objects

Classroom Design Project Training location of the current point. See “Input
Video: Creating a Site Plan Line” on page 847.
A plot plan is essentially a map of a 6. Click Num Style and in the Number
property’s legal description. Plot plans Style/Angle Style dialog, select Deci-
usually have a North Pointer and can also mal Feet for the Number Style and
include other features such as the location of Bearing for the Angle Style. See
buildings and setback lines. “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
page 873.
To create a plot plan polyline 7. Click OK to return to the New CAD
Line dialog
1. Open a newChief Architect plan.
8. Select Relative to Start Point and
2. Select CAD> Points> Input Point check Polar (CCW to horz.).
to open the New CAD Point dialog. 9. Enter the length of the first side of your
See “Input Point” on page 844. property boundary’s legal description in
3. Select Absolute Location and define the Distance field, and the angle of that
the point’s position at (0,0) and click line in the Angle field.
OK. This is the current point that serves
as the Start Point for the first line of the
plot plan. See “Temporary Points” on
page 845.
4. Select CAD> North Pointer , then

click and drag to create a north pointer.
See “North Pointer” on page 849. Terrain
5. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line to
open the New CAD Line dialog. 10. Click Next and enter the Distance and
Notice that the Start Point is at (0,0): the Angle of the next property line.
599
11. Continue until all property lines are 2. If necessary, use the triangular Reshape
entered, then click OK to close the New edit handle to make the arc concave or
CAD Line dialog. The property line convex.
created should be closed, with the end
point of the last line the same as the start 3. Click the Open Object edit button
point of the first. to open the Arc Specification dialog.
4. On the Arc tab, click the Lock Chord
To correct an error radio button, then specify the length of
the Radius and click OK.
1. If a line is entered incorrectly, click OK
to close the New CAD Line dialog. A curved property line can also be cre-
ated by entering data in the New Arc
2. Click the Edit Object Parts toggle dialog. See “Input Arc” on page 857.
button to edit individual line segments
To display line length, bearing and radius
within a polyline.
3. Click the incorrect line to select it, then
1. Select Edit> Preferences to open
click Delete . the Preferences dialog.
4. Place a CAD point at the end of the last 2. On the Line Properties panel, check Dis-
correct line using the Place Point play Line Length as Decimal Feet and
tool to create a new current point. Display Line Angle as Bearing, then
click OK. See “Line Properties Panel”
5. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line on page 200.
and continue entering data in the New
CAD Line dialog.
6. Click the Edit Object Parts toggle

button again to turn it off.
To create a curved property line

3. Click the plot plan polyline to select it,
1. Click a property line to select it, then
then click the Open Object edit but-
click the Change Line/Arc edit button.
ton to turn this line into an arc.
4. On the Line Style tab of the Polyline
Specification dialog, check Show
Length, Show Angle, and All Angles.
600
3. Click the plot plan polyline to select it,

then click the Copy/Paste edit but-
ton.
4. Place your cursor over a corner edit han-
dle, then click and drag towards the cen-
ter of the polyline. When a second, inner
polyline appears, release the mouse.
5. Select the inner polyline and click the
Polyline Specification dialog.
6. On the Line Style tab, select a dashed
line style from the drop-down list,
uncheck Show Length and Show
Angle, then click OK.
To convert to a terrain perimeter
1. Select the plot plan polyline and click

the Convert Polyline edit button.
2. In the Convert Polyline dialog, select
Convert To: Terrain Perimeter, then
click OK.
3. Make any needed changes in the
Terrain Specification dialog and
click OK. See “Terrain Specification
To create setback lines
1. On the CAD panel of the Preferences

dialog, select the Concentric Edit Type To accurately position a building
radio button. See “CAD Panel” on page
199. 1. Place a CAD Point at a reference
2. In the Jump field, type in the setback point along the perimeter of the prop-
Terrain
distance required by your local planning erty, such as at a corner. Or use the start-
department, such as 10’, and click OK. ing point for your plot plan polyline,
(0,0), as a reference.
601
2. Select CAD> Points> Input Point 5. When you click OK, a point is created at
to open the New CAD Point dialog. the specified location. Use this point as a
reference to accurately position a wall or
3. If you are using (0,0) as your reference corner of the building.
point, select Absolute Location and
specify the distance that the building
should be from this point in the X Posi-
tion and Y Position fields.
4. If you have placed a CAD Point at a dif-
ferent location, select Relative to Cur-
rent Point and specify the desired
distance from that point. Unless you
want to specify the location in distance
and bearing, Polar (CCW from horz)
should remain unchecked.
Plant Image Specification Dialog

Select a plant in a floor plan or 3D view and dialog. This dialog can also be accessed by
selecting Terrain> Plant> Create Plant
open the Plant Image Specification Image .
602
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
5
1 Image File - The path and name of the 3 Height - Enter a height for the image.
selected image file displays here. Click The width adjusts proportionally.
Browse to specify the path for the image that
represents the plant in 3D views. 4 Width - Enter a width for the image.
The height adjusts proportionally.
2 2D Plant Symbol - A number of CAD Check Do not rotate in render view to
blocks are available to mark the
prevent the plant image from rotating with
location of the image in floor plan view.
the camera.
Select one from the drop-down list or click
the Library button to choose a CAD block 5 Location - Precisly position the
from the Library Browser. selected plant image in reference to the
plan coordinates by specifying its X
Terrain
If you change the CAD block that represents Coordinate and Y Coordinate.
an image, you may want to save the new
image to the library. See “Adding to the Height Above - Specify the height of the
Library” on page 674. plant image above the ground.
603
Transparency Tab
For information about the Transparency Tab,
see “Transparency Tab” on page 899.
Plant Information Tab
1 6
2 8
3 9
4
This tab lists useful information about the

3 Leaf Color of the plant is shown here.
plant. You can edit this information. Use the
Plant Chooser to search for plants based on 4 This section indicates the Bloom Time
when you can expect the plant to
these attributes.
produce flowers.
1 The Common Name, Scientific Name 45 The boxes with checks show the
or Variety Name for the plant. A
Special Charcteristics of this plant.
Pronunciation guide is also provided.
6 Plant Size information at maturity. An
2 This shows the Flower Color of the average mature height range can be
plant.
entered using the drop down lists. This is
604
used with the Grow Plants feature. See

8 The check boxes indicates the Type of
“Plant Tools” on page 594. plant.
7 The special needs of this plant are 99 The Sub-Type of the plant is shown by
shown here.These include the Sun, the checked box.
Water, Soil pH, and Hardiness Zone range.
See “Hardiness Zones” on page 595.
Plant Description Tab
1
2
1 A detailed Description of the plant 3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given

displays in this pane of the window.. here.
2 Lighting Comments give more

Terrain
information about the light Layer Tab
requirements of the plant. For information about the Layer tab, see
605
Plant Specification Dialog

Select a 3D plant symbol and open it for You can also view data for 3D plants by
specification to open the Plant choosing Open Symbol for the plant.
General Tab
1 The Specification section indicates the 2 Click the Reset button to return to the
default Height, Width, and Depth for default values if they have been edited.
the plant. Edit these values if you want the
plant to be larger or smaller. 3 A preview of the plant displays on this
side of the window. Remove the check
If you want the plant to sit on a table rather mark from Show Color to see the image in
than the floor, edit the Floor to Bottom black and white.
value.
606
Plant Specification Dialog
Options Tab
1 Check this box to reverse the plant Label Tab

horizontally.
The Label Tab is similar to that of the Base
2 A preview of the plant displays on this Cabinet Specification dialog. See
side of the window. To see the image in “Label Tab” on page 576.
black and white, remove the check mark
from Show Color .
Fill Tab
“Fill Style Tab” on page 864..
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Materials Tab Terrain

Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
plant in 3D views. These materials are not
calculated in the Material List. See
607
Plant Chooser Dialog

Introductory Training Video: Plant the button at the bottom of the Library
Chooser Browser window.
Plant Chooser searches the library for
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser
plant images and plant symbols that meet
to open the Plant Chooser dialog or click
your search parameters. You can search
using any or all of the options in this dialog.
Plant Information Tab
1 6
2 9
3 10
4
5
11
1 Enter the Common Name, Scientific 5 Check the boxes to show the Special
Name or Variety Name for the plant. A Charcteristics of this plant.
Pronunciation field is also provided.
6 Enter Plant Size information at
Enter the Flower Color of the plant. maturity. An average mature height
2
range can be entered using the drop down
3 Specify the Leaf Color here. lists. This is used with the Grow Plants
4 Indicate when the plant produces feature. See “Plant Tools” on page 594.
flowers in the Bloom Time field.
7 Special needs are shown here.These
include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, and
608
Plant Chooser Dialog
Hardiness Zone range. See “Hardiness

9 Check the boxes to indicate plant Type.
Zones” on page 595.
6 Check a box to specify the Sub-Type.
10
8 When you have entered all the
parameters, click Search. The search 11 Highlight a plant in the list and click the
View Item button to see a preview.
results display in this pane of the window.
Specify whether you want the common or
scientific names listed.
Plant Description Tab
1 4
1 Enter a Description to search for here.

2 Enter Lighting Requirements to
search for in this field.
3 Hardiness zone comments go here.

4 When you have entered all the
parameters, click Search. The search
results display in this pane of the window.
Terrain
Specify whether you want the common or
scientific names listed.
609
Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog can be The Terrain Specification dialog
accessed two ways: controls how your terrain is modeled, as well
• Select Terrain> Terrain Specification... as how it displays in floor plan view.
. When all changes are complete, click OK to

store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
• Double-click the terrain perimeter using
the Select Objects tool.
General Tab
3 5
Chief Architect builds 3D terrain surfaces by Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /
splitting them into triangles. Increasing the Number of Triangles
triangle count decreases triangle size.
There is no upper limit to the number of
Smaller triangles representing less area yield
triangles you can specify, but smaller
more detailed contour lines and a better 3D
triangles demand longer terrain generation
approximation of the terrain. Triangle size is
time, increased memory requirements, and
computed roughly as follows:
increased drawing time. If you select a large
610
Terrain Specification Dialog
number of small triangles for a large site, you This value does not change existing elevation
may wait a long time for the calculation. data and does not alter elevation contours.
Elevation lines are sampled less frequently The program always defines the first floor
when the surface triangle size is larger, elevation at 0’-0”. While this is desirable for
speeding up terrain generation when there adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it
are many elevation lines in the plan. leads to misrepresentations in relation to real
world elevations. Finished grade can be
The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High
measured relative to the finished floor, but to
(4000) values work well for an average lot
measure elevation in the real world, building
area of 20,000 square feet. If your terrain
pads are rarely at 0’-0” sea-level.
perimeter varies greatly from this, consider
defining the number of triangles using the For example, if a structure is placed in the
Custom setting or the Triangle Size setting. middle of a terrain sloping evenly from a
height of 100.00 feet to a height of 112.00
1 Triangle Count - Specify the number feet, entering a value of 106.00 feet for the
of surface triangles.
building pad elevation places the structure at
Triangle Size - Specify the maximum the correct height in 3D views.
triangle size in the terrain surface.
4 Hide terrain intersected by building -
2 Smoothing - Control the amount of Check this box to cut out the portion of
rounding applied to terrain edges. A the terrain that is intersected by the first floor
low value for smoothing produces terrain footprint. Checking this box prevents the
that has sharp peaks and abrupt changes in generation of contour lines inside the house.
slope. A high value results in terrain that
If your foundation footprint differs from your
continuously flows from point to point.
first floor footprint you may need to use the
3 Flatten Pad - Check this box to flatten Terrain Hole tool for custom clipping
the area beneath your building.
instead. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
Auto Calculate Elevation - Check this box 590.
to automatically calculate the building pad
elevation value during terrain rebuild. Chief 5 Skirt - Define the thickness of the skirt
added to the terrain. The skirt is only
Architect takes the center of the building visible in 3D views and gives the viewer a
footprint and finds the terrain elevation at sense of depth when viewing the terrain.
this point. This elevation is added to 8, 12, or
18 inches to calculate the building pad Flat specifies that the skirt be flat at its base.
elevation. 8 inches is used for a slab Chief Architect determines the lowest point
foundation, 18 is used if a foundation floor is in the terrain and then offsets this value by
present, and 12 is used otherwise. the user specified thickness value. The Terrain
resulting value is used as a uniform elevation
Building Pad Elevation - Enter a value to for the base of the skirt.
offset terrain from floor 1. The default value
of 12 inches results in floor 1 being 12 inches Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base
above any terrain at an elevation of 0 inches. maintains a consistent distance below the
611
terrain. The distance is obtained from the

thickness value you provide.
Contours Tab
The program identifies two types of contour generated at the elevations 5’, 15’, 25’, 35’,
lines, Primary and Secondary. The two types etc. Most often, this value is set to 0.
are drawn on different layers, so you can
Primary Contour Every__Contours -
control how they display in floor plan view.
Specify the interval for primary contours. A
1 Interval - Define the change in value of 1 produces only primary contours,
elevation between contours. If the while a value of 5 defines every fifth contour
interval is set to twelve inches (one foot), a line as a primary contour.
contour line is computed for each elevation
change of twelve inches. 2 Specify the Font and Character
Height information for terrain
Offset - Specify an offset value for contours. contours. See “Text Specification Dialog” on
For example, if the offset is set to 5 feet and page 830.
the interval is set to 10 feet then contours are
612
Elevation Point Specification Dialog
Check Label Secondary Contours to label Selected Line Tab

secondary contour lines with their elevation
data. Primary Contour lines are labelled with For information about the Selected Line tab,
their elevation data automatically. see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
3 Contour Line Units - Specify the units Line Style Tab

that contour labels use. The label units
can be in inches or feet (millimeters or For information about the Line Style tab, see
meters for metric.) “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
4 Smoothing - If contour smoothing is Fill Style Tab

turned on, Chief Architect attempts to
remove sharp bends and jagged sections For information about the Fill Style tab, see
from the 2D contour lines. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Passes - Specify the number of passes to
perform when smoothing. The more passes, Materials Tab
the smoother the contour lines become, but Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
contours become less accurate. terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views.
These materials are not calculated in the
Polyline Tab Material List. See “Materials Tab” on page
710.

To open the Elevation Point
Specification dialog, select an elevation
point or group of elevation points and click
the Open Object edit button, or double-
click an elevation point using the Select
Objects tool.
Use the Elevation Point Specification
dialog to define the selected elevation point
and control its appearance in floor plan view.
When all changes are made, click OK to
Terrain
store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
613
General Tab
1 Location - Specify the exact location of • Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordinate of

the elevation point. the elevation point.
• Elevation - Enter the height of the eleva-
tion point in inches and/or feet (mm for 2 Text - Enter notes, such as elevation, in
this box. This text displays beside the
metric). For example entering 5’6 (with elevation point in floor plan view.
the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an
elevation of 66 inches. 3 Marker Radius - Enter the radius in
inches (or millimeters).
• X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of
the elevation point.
614
Attributes Tab
1 Layer - Define the Layer the elevation Character Height - Define the character
point should be placed on. See “Layer height of the text.
Tab” on page 223.
Version 9 Compatible Size -In Version 9,
2 Color - Click the color bar to open the text size was based on sizing information
Windows Color dialog and select the stored in each font rather than actual
color of the elevation point and character dimensions. Check Version 9
accompanying text. See “Color Chooser Compatible Size to use this information for
Dialog” on page 722. text sizing. See “Sizing Text” on page 824
By Layer - Check this box to use the line Transparent - Check this box to make the
color of the layer the elevation point is background of the text transparent.
located on.
Rotate with Plan - Check this box to allow
3 Click the drop-down list to specify the the text to rotate when the plan is rotated.
Font of any accompanying text. Check
the boxes to apply text options. Terrain
4 Specify the Size of any text

accompanying the elevation point.
615
Elevation Line Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an
Specification dialog, select an elevation elevation of 66 inches.
line/spline or group of elevation lines/splines
2 Interior is Flat - When the Elevation
and click the Open Object edit button or Line Specification dialog is opened
double-click the elevation line/spline using for an Elevation Region, this option is avail-
the Select Objects tool. able. Check Interior is Flat to maintain a
flat elevation at the specified height.
The Elevation Line Specification
dialog defines the selected elevation line and 3 Interpolate Tangent to Edge - This
controls its appearance in floor plan view. options is available for closed elevation
polylines. Check this option to flatten the ter-
When changes sre complete, click OK to rain surface as it approaches the elevation
save the changes or Cancel to ignore them. region.
Elevation Tab Polyline Tab

Selected Line Tab

1
2 see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
3
Line Style Tab
1 Elevation - Enter the elevation of the
Line/Spline in inches and/or feet (mm For information about the Line Style tab, see
for metric). For example entering 5’6 (with “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Flat Region Specification Dialog

The Flat Region Specification dialog is dialog. See “Polyline Specification Dialog”
similar to the Polyline Specification on page 863.
616
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

Spline Tab
For information about the Spline tab, see
“Spline Tab” on page 869.
1
Selected Line Tab
Hill / Valley Tab For information about the Selected Line tab,
1 Height - Enter a height for the selected
Hill or Valley. This height is relative to Line Style Tab
the terrain surface that is generated from the
elevation data in your plan. For information about the Line Style tab, see
Polyline Tab
Fill Style Tab
“Polyline Tab” on page 863. For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

The Raised / Lowered Region Valley Specification dialog. See “Hill /
Specification dialog is similar to the Hill / Valley Specification Dialog” on page 617.
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog, select a terrain
feature or group of terrain features in and
The Terrain Feature Specification
defines the selected terrain feature and
controls its appearance in floor plan view. Terrain
When your changes are complete, click OK
to store the changes Cancel to ignore them.
617
General Tab
1 Height - Specify the height of the Selected Line Tab

terrain feature above or below the
terrain surface with a positive or negative For information about the Selected Line tab,
number. see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
The program bridges any gap between the Line Style Tab
terrain and the raised or lowered terrain
feature. For information about the Line Style tab, see
Make Hole - Check this box to make a
terrain hole. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on
Fill Style Tab
page 590.
2 Clipping - Check this box to remove “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
sections of the terrain feature that
intersect other terrain features at a lower
height. Clipping is also useful for creating Materials Tab
features that contain other features such as For information about the Materials tab, see
planters or swimming pools. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Polyline Tab
Terrain Break Specification Dialog

The Terrain Break Specification dialog distance from the edge of the terrain break to
contains a setting on the General tab for where the break stops affecting the terrain.
Transition Distance, which defines the
618
Terrain Path Specification Dialog
Selected Line Tab

Line Style Tab

Polyline Tab For information about the Line Style tab, see
For information about the Polyline tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Terrain Path Specification Dialog

The Terrain Path Specification controls Double click any of these items to access the
Streams, Terrain Walls, and Sidewalks. dialog.
General Tab
1 Enter the Width of the item and the start or the end of the path should be flared
Height. If you enter a negative number by checking the appropriate box.
for the height, the item sinks into the terrain
that distance. Polyline Tab
Terrain
2 When one terrain path joins another, For information about the Polyline tab, see
you can flare the intersection. Enter a “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
radius for the flare and indicate whether the
619
Spline Tab Fill Style Tab

If the selected item is a spline path, this tab is For information about the Fill Style tab, see
available. For more information, see “Spline “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Tab” on page 869.
Materials Tab
Selected Line Tab
For information about the Selected Line tab, “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Line Style Tab

Sprinkler Specification Dialog

Select a sprinkler and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Sprinkler
620
Sprinkler Specification Dialog
General Tab
1 Enter the Height, Width, and Depth,

or thickness, of the sprinkler.
Enter a Floor to Bottom value to define the
distance from the bottom of the sprinkler to
elevation 0 of floor one.
Check Follow Terrain to make the sprinkler
follow the surface of the terrain.
Check Follow Terrain and enter a Floor to
Bottom value to set the elevation of the
sprinkler relative to the terrain surface. For
example, a value of -6 recesses the sprinkler
head 6 inches below the surface of the
terrain.
The elevation of a sprinkler can be

Terrain
edited in cross section/elevation view.
2 Click Reset to return the sprinkler

values to the defaults.
621
Options Tab
1 Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the Spray Fill Tab

sprinkler from left to right.
The Spray Fill tab controls how the area
2 Set the sprinkler Spray Angle and within the sprinkler’s reach displays in floor
Spray Radius. plan view and is similar to the Fill Style tab
found in many dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab”
Fill Tab on page 864.
For information about the Fill tab, see “Fill
Tab” on page 572. Materials Tab
Fill Style Tab “Materials Tab” on page 710.
“Fill Style Tab” on page 864. Label Tab
The Label Tab of the Sprinkler
Layer Tab Specification dialog is similar to that of
the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.
See “Label Tab” on page 576.
622
Importing Terrain Data
Importing Terrain Data

Terrain data can be added to a plan using the point. Each point must be on a separate line
tools and techniques described earlier in this of the text file. Importable text files can
chapter or it can be imported from a file. come from surveyors, other software
programs, or you can create your own using
Chief Architect is capable of importing text
a GPS system.
files (.txt) and DWG/DXF files (.dwg, .dxf).
If your terrain data is not in one of these file
formats, there are third party programs DXF/DWG Files
available that can convert to these formats. If you have a model of your terrain created
on another program that contains contour
Text Files lines and elevation data, that information can
be imported directly as elevation data into
Text files contain elevation terrain data based
Chief Architect as a .dxf or a .dwg file. See
on x, y, and z coordinates where x and y
“Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data” on
define the location of a point on a Cartesian
page 627.
grid, and z defines the elevation for that
Import Terrain Wizard

The Import Terrain Wizard allows
you to import text (.txt) files
containing terrain elevation information into
your model.
Select File> Import> Terrain Data to

open the Import Terrain Wizard. Click
Next.
Terrain
623
Select File
1 Select File to Import -Enter the name followed by the X coordinate, the Y
of a text file, or Browse to locate a file coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
on your computer.
#XYZ Description - Information in this
2 Select the Organization of the Data - format begins with a number that belongs to
You need to know how the data in your each data point followed by the X
text file is organized. Each data point con- coordinate, the Y coordinate, the Z
tains information about its X-axis (East to coordinate, and a description.
West location), Y-axis (North to South
YXZ - Information in this format begins with
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
the Y coordinate followed by the X
also contain a brief description.
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
Elevation information can come in one of six
#YXZ - Information in this format begins
different sequences, and is separated by
with a number that belongs to each data point
either a comma (comma delimited) or a
followed by the Y coordinate, the X
space (space delimited).
coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
XYZ - Information in this format begins with
#YXZ Description - Information in this
the X coordinate, followed by the Y
format begins with a number that belongs to
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
each data point followed by the Y
#XYZ - Information in this format begins coordinate, the X coordinate, the Z
with a number that belongs to each data point coordinate, and a description.
624
Import Terrain Wizard
Filter Data
1
2
3
1 This is the number of points your data

contains. Building terrain with too
many elevation points may take a long time,
depending on your processor speed and
memory. If you import more than 1000 or
2000 elevation points, the Linear Smoothing
option in the Terrain Specification
dialog is recommended.
2 Use Every __ Points - Reduce the data

imported by skipping data points.
Specifying every 2 points reduce thes data by
50%; specifying every 10 points reduces the
data by 90%.
3 Restrict the Data to the Ranges

Below - Another way to restrict the data
used is to define a range. Data within these The outer box in this diagram and the points
ranges is imported, while data outside these within it represent all of the data contained
ranges is not. within a given text file. If you are only
interested in a small area represented in the
text file, a subset of this information could be
used instead by defining a range, which is
represented by the smaller box in this
Terrain
diagram. To do this you must define the
range using X, Y, and Z coordinates. The
same effect is accomplished by deleting
625
unwanted data from your text file before it is

imported.
Scale Data
1
2
3
4
1 This describes the total number of data 3 Units - Select the units of measurement
points to be imported and the range of used in your data for each axis. The
the coordinates of those points. units in the drop down lists are a subset of the
units in the Edit Preferences dialog. Only
2 Translate - Accurately position the linear default units display. For more
terrain beneath your plan. You need to
information on specifying default units, see
know where the origin is located in your
“Unit Conversions Panel” on page 195.
plan, and where that origin is located relative
to the geographical data in your text file. The
4 Scale Coordinates - Multiply the
coordinates of the data point that correspond coordinates of each axis by a specific
with the origin point in Chief Architect number to decrease or increase the relative
should be entered here. size or relief of your terrain.
To find the origin point in your plan, 5 Rotate Coordinates - Accurately

rotate terrain data counterclockwise
open the Move Point dialog, enter
around the Z axis.
absolute coordinates X=0, Y=0, and click
OK to move the point to the (0, 0) location.
See “Moving CAD Points” on page 845.
626
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
Elevation data in DXF/DWG format can be • If an imported line has vertices with the
imported using the Import Drawing same Z values, an elevation line is cre-
Wizard. ated.
• If the vertices have differing Z values, an
1. Select File> Import> Drawing (DWG/ elevation point is created for each vertex.
DXF)... to open the Import • Imported points are converted to eleva-
Drawing Wizard. tion points.
2. Check the Terrain Elevation Data box. • Other imported entities (solids, faces,
(See Arrow.) etc.) are imported normally.
3. Continue with the import process
described in the section titled “Select Only import layers containing elevation
File” on page 909. data when using the Terrain Elevation
Data option. To import other layers as normal
Imported lines and points are converted to CAD, run the Terrain Import Wizard
elevation lines or elevation points, again with this option turned off.
preserving the elevation data stored in the If a terrain perimeter does not already exist, a
Terrain
DWG/DXF file. perimeter that surrounds the data is
generated.
627
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data

CAD lines can be selected and Select a CAD line, spline, or polyline in floor
converted to terrain data, allowing the plan view and click the Convert Polyline
CAD lines of an imported file to be edit button to access the Convert
converted into terrain data and used for Polyline dialog.
terrain generation.
Convert Polyline
The Convert to Polyline dialog allows 2 A terrain perimeter must exist before
you to convert the selected polyline(s) to a any of these terrain objects can be
variety of special CAD objects. See created. Click OK to complete the
“Converting Objects” on page 149. conversion of the selected polyline.
1 Terrain Perimeter - This option is Roads and road objects are covered in
only available when a terrain perimeter “Roads & Sidewalks” on page 629.
does not exist and only one closed polyline is
When the conversion is complete, the terrain
selected.
data is at elevation 0’-0”. For information
Click OK to convert the selected polyline to about how to add elevation data to your
a terrain perimeter. converted CAD lines, see “Editing Terrain
628
Chapter Overview
Chapter 21:
Roads
Roads & Sidewalks
Chapter Overview
Roads and sidewalks can be created in Chief Chapter Contents
Architect using the road tools. Roads and • Road and Sidewalk Defaults
sidewalks are modeled in 3D like other • The Road Tools
terrain objects. Because they have much in • Displaying Road Objects
common with terrain objects and rely upon • Editing Road Objects
terrain data to be viewed in 3D, you should • Adding Road Objects to the Library
be familiar with terrain modeling before • Road Specification Dialog
using the road tools. See “Terrain” on page • Median Specification Dialog
583. • Driveway Specification Dialog
• Road Marking Specification Dialog
• Sidewalk Specification Dialog
Road and Sidewalk Defaults

Default Settings can be accessed by Defaults, and Sidewalk Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... dialogs determine the initial settings when
the road and sidewalk tools are used. It is a
The settings in the Road Defaults,
Driveway Defaults, Road Marking
629
good idea to check these settings before To access the Road Marking Defaults
placing any roads or sidewalks in your plan.
dialog, double-click the Road Marking
To access the Road Defaults dialog, select button. The settings in the Road Marking
Edit > Default Settings> Roads Sidewalks Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
and Driveways, or double click the Road Road Marking Specification dialog.
See “Road Marking Specification Dialog” on
Tools button. The settings in the Road
page 638.
Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
Road Specification dialog. See “Road To access the Sidewalk Defaults dialog,
double-click the Sidewalk button. The
To access the Driveway Defaults dialog, settings in the Sidewalk Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Sidewalk
double click the Driveway button. The
Specification dialog. See “Sidewalk
settings in the Driveway Defaults dialog
are the same as those in the Driveway
Specification dialog. See “Driveway
The Road Tools

Road objects cannot be placed until a
terrain perimeter exists. See “Terrain
When road objects are first placed into your
plan, their initial dimensions and properties
are controlled by their default settings. See
“Road and Sidewalk Defaults” on page 629.
Once road objects have been placed, they can
be edited individually or as a group. See
“Editing Road Objects” on page 634.
Roads created with the Road tools have a Straight Road
consistent width that can be defined in the To place a road without any curves,
Road Specification dialog.
select Terrain> Roads and
The elevation of a road is flat along its width, Sidewalks> Straight Road and click and
which makes it an ideal tool for creating drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
roads on terrain with relief. Multiple road sections can be connected
together.
630
The Road Tools
Roads are edited alone their center line like

CAD lines and polylines. See “Line Tools”
Roads
on page 846.
Spline Road
Use Terrain> Roads and Sidewalks>
Spline Road to draw a curved road.
Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
splines. See “Splines” on page 868.
Road Polyline
A polyline can be used to model roads To place a median select Terrain> Road>
of any shape. It is ideal for creating
Median and click and drag to draw a
parking lots and other non-linear road
rectangular polyline in floor plan view. Road
surfaces. Roads created with the Polyline
median polylines must be contained within a
Road tool conform to the surface of the road.
terrain beneath them.
Road medians are edited just like CAD
To place a road polyline select Terrain> polylines. See “Polylines” on page 863.
Roads and Sidewalks> Polyline Road Polylines can be converted to road medians.
and click and drag to draw a rectangular See “Converting Objects” on page 149.
polyline in floor plan view.
Road Polylines are edited alone their center Driveway
line like polylines. See “Polylines” on page
A driveway is a road without a curb. A
863.
driveway cuts out a curb wherever it
meets a road or a road polyline. Like a road,
Median the elevation of a driveway is flat across its
A median is a polyline that can be used width.
within a road. The median is made of To place a driveway select Terrain> Roads
the same material as the terrain beneath it
and Sidewalks> Driveway and click
and has a curb if the road that encompasses it
and drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
has one.
Multiple driveway sections can be connected
together.
Driveways are edited alone their center line
like CAD lines and polylines. See “Line
631
Cul-de-sac To place a road marking select Terrain>

Road> Road Marking and click and
A Cul-de-sac is a road polyline in a
drag to draw a rectangular polyline within a
predetermined shape. A cul-de-sac
road in floor plan view.
follows the surface of the terrain beneath it.
Road markings are edited like CAD
To place a cul-de-sac select Terrain> Roads
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 863.
and Sidewalks> Cul-de-sac and click a
road end where you would like a cul-de-sac. Straight Sidewalk
Culs-de-sac cannot be placed on road
polylines. Use the sidewalk tools to model
sidewalks on a building site.
Culs-de-sac can be edited just like CAD
Sidewalks have a consistent width that can
be defined in the Sidewalk Specification
dialog. Sidewalks cut out curbs and gutters
Road Stripe wherever they meet a road or a road polyline.
The Road Stripe tool allows you to The elevation of a sidewalk is flat across the
its width.
paint lines on a road surface.
To draw a sidewalk with no curves, select
Terrain> Roads and Sidewalks> Straight
Sidewalk and click and drag to draw a
line in floor plan view. Multiple sidewalk
sections can be connected together.
Sidewalks are edited alone their center line
like CAD lines and polylines. See “Line
Tools” on page 846..
To place a road stripe select Terrain> Roads
and Sidewalks> Road Stripe and click
and drag to draw a line within a road in floor
plan view. Multiple road stripes can be
connected together.
Road Stripes are edited like CAD lines. See
“Line Tools” on page 846.
Road Marking
A Road Marking paints polylines on a
road surface, allowing any shape to be
created.
632
Displaying Road Objects
Spline Sidewalk Auto Generate Sidewalks
Roads
Use the Spline Sidewalk tool to create Select a road or median and click the Auto
a curved sidewalk.Select Terrain> Generate Sidewalk edit button to open
Roads and Sidewalks> Spline Sidewalk. the Auto Generate Sidewalks dialog.
Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
splines. See “Splines” on page 868.
Polyline Sidewalk
1
Use the polyline sidewalk tool to 2
create a sidewalk of any shape.
3
Sidewalk polylines conform to the surface of
the terrain beneath them.
To place a sidewalk polyline select Terrain> 1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one
or both boxes to generate a sidewalk on
Road> Sidewalk Polyline and click and the selected road object.
drag to draw a rectangular polyline in floor
plan view. 2 All Connected Roads - Check this box
to generate a sidewalk along all other
Sidewalk polylines are edited just like CAD roads connected to the selected road object.
3 Offset From Road - Specify a gap
between the generated sidewalk and the
selected road object.
Displaying Road Objects

Roads and sidewalks are displayed in floor Roads and sidewalks display in 3D views
plan and 3D views based on the settings for with the terrain.
their layers in the Layer Display Options
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
dialog.
when road objects are added, removed or
To change the display properties of roads, edited. If it does not, select Terrain> Build
center lines, curbs, road markings or Terrain .
sidewalks, select Tools> Display Options
to open the Layer Display Options
dialog. See “Layers” on page 215.
633
Editing Road Objects

Before a road object can be edited, it must be Using the Edit Buttons
selected. To select a it, click on it when the
A selected road object can be edited in a
Select Objects tool or any of the Road variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
Tools are active. See “Selecting Objects” toolbar. As with most objects, road objects
on page 92. can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted,
etc. See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 97.
Road objects can be moved precisely using
the dimensions that display in floor plan The following buttons may display on the
view when they are selected. See “Moving edit toolbar for selected road objects.
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 804.
open it for specification. See “Road
Using the Mouse
• Straight Roads , straight Driveways
• A Road Polyline can be concentri-
, straight Road Stripes , and cally resized and converted into a median
Straight Sidewalks are edited along using the Convert Polyline button. See
their centerline like a line or polyline. See “Concentric” on page 88.
“Line Tools” on page 846. • Click the Convert to Polyline Road/
• Spline Roads and Sidewalk Splines Sidewalk button to convert it into a

Polyline Road or a Polyline Sidewalk
are edited along their centerline like
standard splines. See “Splines” on page and edit the object perimeter as a
868. polyline. See “Editing Road Objects” on
page 634.
• Road Polylines , Cul-de-sacs ,
• Click the Auto Generate Sidewalks
Medians , Road Markings and button to open the Automatically
Sidewalk Polylines are edited along Generate Sidewalks dialog. The
their perimeter, like standard polylines. options that are available depend on the
The width is determined by the polyline’s type of road object selected. See “Auto
shape. See “Polylines” on page 863. Generate Sidewalks” on page 633.
• Medians are edited like polylines.

See “Polylines” on page 863.
634
Adding Road Objects to the Library
Adding Road Objects to the Library
Roads
You can create your own road objects and When a group of terrain objects from the
save them to the library. Select any library is placed into a plan, each object
combination of elevation points, elevation becomes independent and can be edited
lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road individually. See “Adding to the Library” on
markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself page 674.
and send them to the library as one unit.
Road Specification Dialog

Select a straight road, spline road, polyline Object edit button to access the Road
road or cul-de-sac and click the Open Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 Size the road using this section. 2 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
and the End when they intersect with
Width - Enter a width for the selected
other road objects. Check one or both boxes.
road. This option is not available for a cul-
de-sac or non-centerline road. Radius - Enter the flare radius.
Height - Enter a Height above the terrain for Flaring is not available for culs-de-sac or
the selected road. non-centerline roads.
635
Curb Tab
2
3
4
1 Has Curb - Check the box if you want Specifying a smaller angle makes the spline
the selected road to contain a curb. smoother. Specify a larger angle to draw the
spline faster. See“Splines” on page 868.
Width - Enter a width value for the curb.
Height - Enter a Height value for the curb. Selected Line Tab
2 Cut Curb for Driveways and This tab is the same as the Selected Line tab
Sidewalks - Check this box to cut the of the Polyline Specification dialog. See
curb for driveways and sidewalks. “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
3 Select Curb Profile - Click this button Line Style Tab

to select another curb profile.
The Line Style tab of the Road
4 Default Curb Profile - Click this Specification dialog is the same as the
button to use the default curb profile.
Line Style tab of the CAD Line
Polyline Tab Specification dialog. See “Line
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and
volume of the road. Fill Style Tab
Spline Tab The Fill Style tab of the Road
Specification dialog is the same as the Fill
Use this tab to specify the angle between line Style tab of the CAD Polyline
segments that are used to draw the spline.
636
Median Specification Dialog
Specification dialog. See “Fill Style Tab” The Materials tab of the Road
on page 864. Specification dialog is the same as the
Roads
Materials tab on many other specification
Materials Tab dialogs. See “Materials Tab” on page 710.

the road in 3D views. This material is not
calculated in the Material List.
Median Specification Dialog

The Median Specification dialog is
similar to the Road Specification. See
“Road Specification Dialog” on page 635.
Driveway Specification Dialog

Select a driveway and click the Open Object
edit button to display the Driveway
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Width - Enter a width for the driveway. 3 Flare - Driveways can be flared at the
Start and the End when they intersect
2 Height - Enter a Height above the with roads or other driveways. Check one or
terrain.
both boxes.
637
Radius - Enter the flare radius. Style tab of the CAD Polyline
Specification dialog. See “Fill Style Tab”
Line Style Tab on page 864.
The Line Style tab of the Driveway

Materials Tab
Specification dialog is the same as the
Line Style tab of the CAD Line Use this tab to select a material to apply to
Specification dialog. See “Line the driveway in 3D views. This material is
Specification Dialog” on page 850. not calculated in the Material List.
The Materials tab of the Driveway
Fill Style Tab Specification dialog is the same as the
The Fill Style tab of the Driveway Materials tab on many other specification
Specification dialog is the same as the Fill dialogs. See “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Road Marking Specification Dialog

Select a Road Marking and click the Open Selected Line Tab
Object edit button to display the Road For information about the Selected Line Tab,
Marking Specification dialog. see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
General Tab Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style Tab, see
1 Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style Tab, see
1 Width - Enter a width value for the Materials Tab

selected Road Marking.
Polyline Tab the Road Marking in 3D views. This material
For information about the Polyline Tab, see is not calculated in the Material List.
“Polyline Tab” on page 863. For information about the Materials Tab, see
638
Sidewalk Specification Dialog
Sidewalk Specification Dialog
Roads
Select a Straight Sidewalk, Spline
the Open Object edit button to display
Sidewalk, or Polyline Sidewalk and click
the Sidewalk Specification dialog.
General Tab
1
2
3
1 Width - Enter a width for the selected Fill Style Tab

sidewalk.
For information about the Fill Style Tab, see
Height - Enter a height above the “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
2
terrain for the selected sidewalk.
Materials Tab
3 Flare - Sidewalks can be flared at
either end, check one or both boxes. Use this tab to select a material to apply to
Radius - Enter the flare radius. the sidewalk in 3D views. This material is
not calculated in the Material List.
Polyline Tab For information about the Materials Tab, see
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area, and “Materials Tab” on page 710.
volume of the sidewalk.
Selected Line Tab

For information using the Selected Line Tab,
Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style Tab, see
639
640
Chapter 22:
Other Objects
Objects
Other
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect has several additional objects • Cone Specification Dialog
that can be used to customize your design. • Polyline Solids
• Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
Chapter Contents • Soffits
• Primitive Tools • Special Applications for Soffits
• Creating Primitives • Calculating Materials on Soffits
• Editing Primitives • Soffit Specification Dialog
• 3D Box Specification Dialog • Fireplaces
• Sphere Specification Dialog • Fireplace Specification Dialog
• Cylinder Specification Dialog • Library Fireplaces
• Chimneys
Primitive Tools
Classroom Design Project Training Objects made with the Primitive Tools are
Video: Creating 3D CAD Objects included in material list calculations,
although it is best that their specified
The Primitive Tools allow you to create
materials are either Concrete or Volume
basic solid geometric shapes, which
material types. See “Define Material Dialog”
can be combined to create a wide variety of
on page 712.
custom solid objects. Select Build>
Primitive to display the Primitive Tools.
641
Box Cone
Select the Box tool, then click and drag Select the Cone tool, then click and
to draw a solid 3D box. drag to draw a solid 3D cone.
Sphere Polyline Solids

Select the Sphere tool, then click and Select the Polyline Solid tool, then
drag to draw a solid 3D sphere. click and drag to draw a polyline solid.
Despite their name, polyline solids are not
Cylinder true solids; however, they can be converted
into solids. See “Polyline Solids” on page
Select the Cylinder tool, then click and 649.
drag to draw a solid 3D cylinder.
Creating Primitives
Primitives are drawn similar to the way CAD Initially, the bottom surface of boxes,
boxes and circles are. Depending on the view cylinders and cones, and the center point of
in which they are created, however, the spheres, are all set at 0” on the Z axis. See
method may differ somewhat. “Entering Coordinates” on page 91.

In floor plan view, primitives are drawn In 3D views, the height of boxes, cylinders
much the way boxes and circles are. Select a and cones can be defined as they are drawn.
tool, then click and drag to define an area.
• To create 3D Box , Cylinder or
• To create 3D Box , click and drag in Cone , click and drag to define the
any direction other than vertical or hori- width and depth of the box’s base, then
zontal to define the width and depth of drag upward or downward to define its
the box’s base. Its initial height is 1”. height.
• To create a Sphere , Cylinder or • Drag upward to set the height of the bot-
Cone , click and drag in any direction tom surface at 0”, or drag downward to
to define the radius. set the top surface at 0”.
• As it is drawn, the height of a Cylinder • To create a Sphere , click and drag in

or Cone is equal to its radius. any direction to define its radius.
Unlike polyline solids, primitives cannot be
created in cross section/elevation views.
642
Editing Primitives
Convert to Solid slab into a solid so that it can be used with

other solids to create complex structures.
Click the Convert To Solid edit button
to convert the selected polyline solid or
Editing Primitives
Objects
Primitives can be selected individually and
Other
as a group and edited using the edit handles,
to center the selected primitive(s) along a
the edit toolbar and their respective
wall. See “Centering Doors and
specification dialogs.
Using the Mouse • Click the Move to Front edit button
Primitives can be edited similar to CAD to display the selected primitive in front
boxes or circles. When selected, a primitive of other objects in floor plan view. See
displays six edit handles: a Move handle, a “Move to Front of Group” on page 122.
Rotate handle and a Resize handle on each • Click the Reverse Direction edit
edge. Unlike CAD boxes or circles, button to reverse the direction of the
primitives do not have corner Resize edit selected primitive’s line style. See
handles. “Reverse Direction” on page 136.
Using the Edit Buttons • Click the Union edit button to join
two or more primitive objects. See
A selected primitive or primitives can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
page 146.
on the edit toolbar. See “Using the Edit
Toolbar” on page 109. • Click the Intersection edit button to
As with most objects, primitives can be create a new primitive defined by the
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. The areas shared by the original primitives.
following edit toolbar buttons may display See “Union, Intersection, and Subtract”
on the edit toolbar for selected primitives. on page 146.
• Click the Open Object edit button to • Click the Subtract edit button, then
open the specification dialog for the click on a second primitive to remove the
selected primitive(s). area shared by both primitives. See
• Click the Make Architectural Block page 146.
edit button to block the selected primi-
tive(s) together. See “Creating
Architectural Blocks” on page 664.
643
Creating Complex Structures

with Primitives
Primitive objects can be manipulated and
combined to produce complex structures.
Use the Union , Intersection and
Subtract edit tools to create unique 3D
shapes and combine shapes into Architec-
tural Blocks . See “Architectural Blocks”
on page 663.
A fireplace, for example, can be created by
arranging 3D Boxes .
A detailed model truck can be created using

A custom chimney can be designed using 3D
3D Boxes and Cylinders and the
Boxes and Cylinders and the Union
Union , Intersection and Subtract
and Subtract edit tools.
edit tools.
644
3D Box Specification Dialog
Decorative stone columns can be modeled When a primitive has been manipulated
using 3D Boxes and the Union , and using the Union , Intersection and
Subtract edit tools. Subtract edit tools, it is no longer a
primitive that can be resized or reshaped
using the edit handles or specification dialog.
Instead, it is a considered a solid. See “Solid
Objects
Other
A structure created using the Primitive Tools
can be exported as a 3D model and then
imported to create a custom 3D symbol. See
“Importing and Exporting” on page 907 and
“Create Symbol Wizard” on page 925.
3D Box Specification Dialog

Select a 3D box and click the Open Object When you first draw a 3D box, the origin of
edit button to open the 3D Box the box is the point where you start drawing
it; the width of the box is the X axis
dimension.
1 2
645
1 Dimensions - Use this section to Angle in XY Plane - Enter a number from 1

specify the size of the box. to 360 to control the rotation of the box on
the X axis.
Enter the Width, Length, and Height of the
box. Angle From XY Plane - This number
controls the rotation of the box on the Y axis.
2 Origin - Use these settings to position
the origin of the box in relation to the Angle Around Width Vector - Enter the
origin point of your plan. See “Entering number to specify the rotation of the box on
Coordinates” on page 91. the Z axis.
Enter the X, Y, and Z delta coordinates for
the box. Line Style Tab
3 Width Vector - A width vector is an “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
invisible line that runs the width of the
box. Use the width vector settings to
precisely control the rotation of the box in Materials Tab
free space. For information about the Materials tab, see
Sphere Specification Dialog

Select a sphere and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Sphere
1
2
3
4
1 Radius - Specify the radius of the 3 Center Y - Enter the position of the
sphere. sphere center relative to the Y axis.
2 Center X - Specify the exact position 4 Center Z - Enter the position of the
of the sphere by entering the location of sphere center relative to the Z axis.
the center on the X axis.
646
Cylinder Specification Dialog

For information about the Line Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 851. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Cylinder Specification Dialog
Objects
Select a cylinder and click the Open Object
Other
edit button to open the Cylinder
1 2
1 Dimensions - Use these settings to default, this axis is vertical. Use the Axis
specify the size of the cylinder. settings to control the rotation of the cylinder
in free space.
Radius - Enter the radius of the cylinder.
Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
Height - Specify the height of the cylinder.
control the rotation on the X axis. Because
2 Center - Locate the cylinder precisely the cylinder is round, it only changes
with these settings. appearance if you also enter a number in
Angle From XY Plane.
X - Enter the location of the cylinder center
on the X plane. Angle From XY Plane - This number
controls the rotation of the cylinder on the Y
Y - Enter the location of the cylinder center
axis.
on the Y plane.
Z - Enter the location of the cylinder center Line Style Tab
on the Z plane.
Axis - The axis is an invisible line that “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
3
runs the length of the cylinder. By
647
Materials Tab
Cone Specification Dialog

Select a cone and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cone
1 2
1 Dimensions - These setting specify the Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
size of the cone. control the rotation on the X plane. Because
the cone is round, it only changes appearance
Radius - Enter the radius of the cone.
if you also enter a number in Angle From
Height - Enter the height of the cone. XY Plane.
2 Center - You can locate the cone Angle From XY Plane - This number
precisely relative to the origin using controls the rotation of the cone on the Y
these settings. plane.
X - Specify the X position of the cone center.
Line Style Tab
Y - Specify the Y position of the cone center.
Z - Enter the Z position of the cone center. “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
3 Axis - The axis is an invisible line that Materials Tab

runs the length of the cone. By default,
this axis is vertical. Use the Axis settings to For information about the Materials tab, see
control the rotation of the cone in free space. “Materials Tab” on page 710.
648
Solid Specification Dialog
Solid Specification Dialog

Select a solid created using the Union , Line Style Tab
Intersection and Subtract edit tools, For information about the Line Style tab, see
or by converting a slab or polyline solid into “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
a solid, and click the Open Object edit
Objects
button to open the Solid Specification
Materials Tab
Other
dialog. For information about the Materials tab, see
Polyline Solids
Classroom Design Project Training Polyline solids can be edited the way other
Video: Creating 3D CAD Objects closed polyline-based objects are. See
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
page 107.
Video: Creating New 3D Objects by
Merging and Subtracting 3D Solids
Converting CAD Polylines
Polyline solids are polyline shaped 3D
objects with a specified thickness. A closed CAD polyline can be converted into
They can be oriented either horizontally or a polyline solid in floor plan and cross
vertically and are useful for creating custom section/elevation views using the Convert
details anywhere in your 3D model. Polyline edit button. See “Convert
Creating Polyline Solids
A horizontal polyline solid can be created in
Convert to Solid
floor plan view or any 3D view by selecting You can convert a polyline solid to a
Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid , then primitive in order to build complex
clicking and dragging to draw a rectangle. solid structures. Select the polyline solid you
want to convert and click Convert to Solid
A vertical polyline solid can be created in a on the edit toolbar.
cross section/elevation view by selecting
Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid , then
clicking and dragging to draw a rectangle.
The polyline solid is placed in front of any
objects visble in the view. If no objects are
behind, the polyline solid is placed one foot
in front of the camera.
649
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog

To open the Polyline Solid grow upward (horizontal) or toward the
Specification dialog, click on a polyline to elevation/cross section camera (vertical).
select it, then click the Open Object edit
button. Polyline Tab
General Tab “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
Selected Line Tab

1 see “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
2 Line Style Tab

3
1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to
convert the polyline solid into a hole in
a surrounding polyline solid. Fill Style Tab
2 Height - Specify the height of the top “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
of the polyline solid. This property is
not available for vertical polyline solids.
Materials Tab
3 Thickness - Specify the thickness for For information about the Materials tab, see
the polyline solid. Increasing the
thickness will cause the polyline solid to “Materials Tab” on page 710.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between (20mm) deeper than the default wall cabinet.
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but they The soffit height automatically adjusts to fill
are very versatile and can be used to create the space between the ceiling and the top of
almost any other object that can be modeled the wall cabinets..
as a 3D box.
Placing Soffits
Soffit Defaults
Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D
The default size for soffits cannot be views. They can be assigned materials that
changed. Soffits are the same width as and 1" are calculated in the Materials List, but by
650
Special Applications for Soffits
default they use the material assigned to the When a soffit is created, it is automatically
default wall. Like cabinets, soffits can have placed on the Cabinets, Soffits layer. See
custom molding profiles specified. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
“Moldings Tab” on page 575. 218.
Special Applications for Soffits
Objects
Other
Anything that can be represented by a three
dimensional box of any size or angle can be
represented by a soffit. They can be resized
to as small as 1/16"x1/16"x1/16"
(1mmx1mmx1mm) or as large as 135 feet
(32m).
Note: For free form shapes, polyline solids

may be better suited for the job. See “Polyline
Solids” on page 649.
For a box that can be rotated around any
side, a 3D box may be better suited. See
“Box” on page 642.
Soffits automatically stop at the floor
platform when moved downward. To place a
Soffits can have materials applied to them to
soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
represent simple mirrors, beams in exposed
ceilings, posts, fences, chimneys and so on. Section/Elevation view looking straight
at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
Following are illustrations showing some
the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
possibilities.
middle handle, and drag it down past the
floor so that it covers the floor platform edge
Masonry Veneer as well.
On exterior walls, create a brick or stone
veneer that extends only halfway up the wall Tile Surrounds
using four inch (100mm) deep soffits placed
around the base of the house. A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to one or more soffits applied to the
walls above tubs or in showers.
651
Calculating Materials on Soffits

The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes addition to the front, if these surfaces are
or other materials applied to a soffit is not attached to a wall or other soffit.
calculated using the following rules: However, only those portions of the
• If the soffit depth is less than the larger of sides, top and bottom remaining after
4 inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the mate- subtracting twice the material thickness
rial thickness, then only the front area of are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bot-
48"x48”x4” thick, and the Dark Red tom surface areas cannot contribute to the
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8” brick count unless the soffit depth is
mortar joint) the front of the soffit is greater than 8 inches.
48"x48”=2304 square inches. Including • If surface materials such as brick are
the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/ applied to a large soffit, the soffit center
8” x 8 3/8” = 28.26 square inches. 2304 is assumed to be hollow, with only a sin-
sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick gle layer of the material applied to each
gives 81.5 bricks. applicable face.
• If the soffit depth is greater than both 4 • For shingles and shakes, the overlap
inches (10 mm) and 1 ½ times the mate- amount should be subtracted from the
rial thickness, then the surface areas of height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
the soffit back, sides and top are used in the joint width is added to the size.
652
Soffit Specification Dialog
• For materials in the area category, the • For materials in the volume, concrete or
soffit area calculation above is used, with earth categories, the true volume of the
the material thickness treated as zero. soffit is used.

To customize a soffit using the Soffit
Objects
soffit and click the Open Object edit
Specification dialog, double-click on the
Other
button.
soffit using the Soffit tool or select the
General Tab
1
2
3 6
4
5
1 Height - Define the vertical height of 4 Floor to Bottom - Enter the Floor to
the soffit. If you are using the soffit to Bottom distance. This is often more
represent a beam, this will be the depth of the easily defined by dragging the soffit in a 3D
beam. view until it is properly positioned.
2 Width - Enter the width of the soffit. 5 Follow Terrain - Check this box to
make a soffit placed outside a building
3 Depth - Define the depth, the distance adjust its height to the height of the terrain.
between the front and the back of the
soffit. When selected in floor plan view, the
6 A preview of the defined soffit displays
front of a soffit has a “V,” and the back of the here.
soffit has a triangular rotation handle.
653
7 Show Color - Select the check box to

have the picture of the soffit show the
defined material.
Options Tab
1
2
3
1 Sloped Soffit - Select the check box to roof. The soffit moves up and the top of the
slope the soffit vertically. soffit is in the same plane as the roof, at the
same pitch as the roof. Be sure to place the
The front of the soffit is indicated by a “v” in
front of the soffit toward the high side of the
floor plan view. Soffits slope from back up
roof.
towards the front.
When you define a sloped soffit, the General 3 Place Under Ceiling - Select the check
box to move the soffit vertically until
tab includes additional options for specifying
the top contacts the ceiling plane.
the soffit. You must define a height for the
front of the soffit and a height for the back of
the soffit. The front value should be greater Moldings Tab
than the back if the soffit is sloped. For information about the Moldings tab, see
To change an angled soffit back to a “Moldings Tab” on page 545.
horizontal soffit, clear the Sloped Soffit
check box. Layer Tab
2 Place Under Roof - Select the check “Layer Tab” on page 223.
box to have a soffit slope to follow the
654
Materials Tab Label Tab

Use this tab to select a material to apply to For information about the Label tab, see
the soffit surface in 3D views. If a material is “Label Tab” on page 576.
applied, the Material List reflects the change.
Sloped Soffits
Objects
Other
When a soffit is turned into a sloped soffit, of the soffit updates when new values are
the General and Options tabs of the Soffit entered in the fields. This is a side view with
Specification dialog change. The preview the back of the soffit to the left.
Elevation View
Floor Plan View

3D view
Front
The three inset diagrams show how the slope, this measurement is not the actual
dialog relates to the sloped soffits. length of the soffit. It cannot, for example, be
used to determine the length of a sloped
Thickness is measured perpendicular to the
beam.
slope of the soffit.
For sloped soffits, both the front and back
Width is measured left to right across the
heights must be defined.
soffit.
Horizontal Length is measured from back
to front in floor plan view. Since it is at a
655
Height at Back is measured from the Height at Front is measured from the
finished floor to the lowest point at the back finished floor to the underside of the soffit at
of the soffit. the upper end.
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in Select the fireplace to display four edit
or away from a wall by selecting handles located along the wall.
Build> Fireplace and then clicking in the
drawing area.
• If created in a wall, it is considered an
opening and can be moved or resized like
a window or door.
• If created away from a wall, it moves and Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and
resizes similar to a cabinet. drag toward the outside of the wall. The
fireplace will stop when the firebox front is
Standard, corner and see-through
flush with the inside edge of the wall.
prefabricated metal fireplaces are also
available from the Fixtures (Interior) library
category. These can be framed in with
standard walls.
The display of fireplaces is controlled in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls
Fireplaces are edited, moved, resized, and display five edit handles: a Resize handle
deleted similar toother objects. See “Editing along each edge and a Move handle at the
Objects” on page 79. center.
Built into a Wall Fireplaces always face the interior when

placed on an exterior wall. If a fireplace is
To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select created on an interior wall, click on the edge
Build> Fireplace and click on a wall. A of the wall to specify which way the fireplace
fireplace is created with the outside of the should face. The fireplace is created with the
fireplace flush with the outside of the wall. firebox on the same side as the wall edge you
clicked on to create it.
656
Fireplace Specification Dialog
Freestanding Free-standing fireplaces can be selected and

replaced with a symbol from the library by
To place a free-standing masonry fireplace,
clicking the Replace From Library edit
select Build> Fireplace and click in an button. See “Replace From Library” on page
open area from a wall. 680.
Fireplace Foundations
Objects
Other
If a fireplace is added on the first floor before
building the foundation plan, a foundation
will be generated under the fireplace when
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, free- the foundation is built.
standing fireplace have ten edit handles when
selected and may be rotated, resized, or The fireplace foundation is the same material
moved in any direction, similar to the way type as the original fireplace, but will not
CAD boxes can. See “Editing Box-Based have a firebox or a hearth. This fireplace
Objects” on page 111. foundation may be edited or deleted as
desired. A firebox and hearth may be added
in the Fireplace Specification dialog.
Fireplace Specification Dialog

Select the masonry fireplace and click the
Open Object edit button to display the
Fireplace Specification dialog.
Dimensions entered here must be whole
inches. Fractions and decimals are not
accepted.
657
General Tab
1 Specify the dimensions of the fireplace Hearth Height - Specify the Hearth Height.
and hearth. This is the height of the hearth above the
floor in that room.
Height - Specify the Height of the fireplace.
Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance
Width - Specify the Width of the fireplace.
between the floor and the hearth bottom.
Depth - Specify the Depth of the fireplace.
2 Suppress Dimensions - This option is
Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth Depth. available for fireplaces placed in walls.
This is measured from the front of the Check this box to turn off dimensions when
fireplace out into the room. To eliminate the this fireplace is selected.
hearth altogether, enter a zero for this value.
658
Library Fireplaces
Firebox Tab
1
2
Objects
Other
3
1 No Firebox - Select the check box to from the center. A value of 0 centers the
eliminate the firebox from the fireplace. firebox in the fireplace.
This is often used in the foundation plan to
Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset the
provide a solid matching base for the
firebox to the left or to the right.
fireplace on the first floor.
2 Set the dimensions of the firebox. Layer Tab

Height/Width - Enter the height and For information about the Layer tab, see
width of the firebox. “Layer Tab” on page 223.
Depth - Enter the depth of the firebox.
Materials Tab
3 Offset - Enter the number of inches (or For information about the Materials tab, see
mm) to offset the firebox, measured
Library Fireplaces
A variety of different fireplace symbols are
available in the Fixtures (Interior) library Always check the manufacturer’s prod-
category. See “Interior Fixtures” on page uct information for the framing and
685. The fireplaces in the Library behave just clearance requirements of the fireplace unit
you plan to use, and design your plan accord-
like other Library objects.
ingly
659
Placing a Library Fireplace can also project the fireplace and enclosing
walls into the room.
Library fireplaces can be placed in floor plan
and 3D views. Select the desired symbol in
the library, then click in your drawing area to
place it at that location. See “Creating
Flush fireplaces, found in Fireplaces> Open
Front> Without Stovepipes, are designed to
snap to a wall surface.
Other Open Face fireplace symbols can be
positioned to project through a wall. Once
the fireplace is located, you can draw walls Open Front Library fireplace
to enclose the back of the fireplace and use projecting through a 4" wall
dimensions to place them accurately. You
Chimneys
Chimneys for • Place a soffit in position over the chim-
Masonry Fireplaces ney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit using the same method as
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace extending the masonry fireplace in the
3D view.
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. • If the chimney chase is drawn with walls
2. Hold down the Ctrl key, click on the top- on the exterior of the house, you can con-
most edit handle and drag the chimney tinue the chase using walls on the floors
up through all the floors and the roof above. Align walls with the chase on
until it is to the desired height. The Ctrl each subsequent floor. The chimney
key prevents the chimney from stopping chase “room” on the uppermost floor
when it reaches the ceiling height. should have a much higher ceiling
defined in the Room Specification
3. When the chimney is approximately the dialog. It should also be set to have no
correct height, select the fireplace, click roof by unchecking Roof over this room
the Open Object edit button, and in the Structure tab of the Room
type in the exact height. Specification dialog. Rebuild floors
and ceilings and the roof, if needed.
Chimney Chases & Caps Chimney caps can be made using soffits,
Chimney chases can be extended by a couple polyline solids, or other primitive objects.
of methods.
660
Chimneys
661
662
Chapter 23:
Architectural
Blocks
Architectural
Blocks
Chapter Overview
Architectural blocks are built from groups of Chapter Contents
3D objects. When an architectural block is • Architectural vs CAD Blocks
created, the block behaves as a single object • Creating Architectural Blocks
while the components retain their own • Displaying Architectural Blocks
attributes. • Editing Architectural Blocks
The display of architectural blocks in floor • Exploding Architectural Blocks
plan view can be controlled by layer. • Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and
Components
The display of architectural blocks in • Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library
materials lists and schedules can be turned • Architectural Block Specification Dialog
off completely. The block can appear as a
single unit or its sub-objects and components
can display separately.
663
Architectural vs CAD Blocks

Just as there are two types of objects in Chief architectural or CAD blocks. Knowing the
Architect, architectural and CAD, there are differences between these two types of
two types of blocks. See “Architectural vs blocks helps you decide which type of block
CAD Objects” on page 80. can best meet your needs.
Architectural objects such as cabinets and A CAD block can include and also be nested
fixtures can be included in architectural in a larger block with CAD objects, text and
blocks, while CAD objects such as lines, dimensions, but cannot include or be blocked
arcs, text and dimensions can be included in with architectural objects.
CAD blocks. See “CAD Blocks” on page
An architectural block can include and also
870.
be nested in a larger block with architectural
Some objects, such as custom countertops objects, but cannot include or be blocked
and slabs, are referred to as CAD-based with CAD objects, text or dimensions.
objects and can be included in either
Creating Architectural Blocks

An architectural block is created by • Primitives and Polyline Solids
group-selecting a set of architectural • Molding Polylines
objects and then clicking the Make
Architectural Block edit button. • Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks
• Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers
The following is a list of objects that can be
included in architectural blocks: Once blocked, the set of blocked objects is
• Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height) contained in a bounding box, indicating that
they are now an architectural block.
• Soffits, Shelves, Partitions
• Fixture/Furniture Symbols
• Hardware Symbols
• Millwork Symbols
• Geometric Shape Symbols
• Electrical objects
• Images
Architectural blocks can be created in any
• Custom Countertops & Counter Holes
view.
• Slabs & Foundation Slabs
664
Displaying Architectural Blocks
The Library access the architectural blocks. Choose a

block and click in the plan to place it.
Open the Library Browser and expand
the Architectural Blocks category to You can create your own architectural blocks
and save them to the Library. See “Adding to
the Library” on page 674.
Displaying Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks are visible in all views. You can control the appearence of the
bounding box by changing the layer
The display of architectural blocks, including
properties for the architectural block.
their bounding box, is controlled in the
Architectural
Layer Display Options dialog. See The label for an architectural block in floor
Blocks
“Displaying Objects” on page 221. plan view can be generated automatically,
created manually, derived from the
The components of the block can use the
component code, or suppressed. See “Label
layer attributes assigned to their current layer
Tab” on page 668.
or the layer attributes assigned to the
architectural block. See “General Tab” on
page 668.
Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural block can be selected and Using the Edit Handles
edited in 2D and 3D views. See “Selecting
Objects” on page 92. A selected architectural block displays a
Move handle and a Rotate handle. If the
Note: Moving an architectural block in 3D block has a label, it also has its own Move
view regenerates the view. Moving an archi- handle.
tectural block that contains terrain objects
causes the terrain to be rebuilt.
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but
the individual objects in the block can be.
To edit a component of an architectural Select the block and tab to the object you
block, first select the architectural block by want to resize. Change the size using the edit
clicking on the component, then press the handles, or by opening the specification
dialog for that object. You can also explode
Tab key or click the Select Next Object the block before resizing. See “Exploding
edit button. The selection marquee switches Architectural Blocks” on page 666.
focus to the individual object. The ability to
edit the object as part of a block may be more
restricted than if the object were
independent.
665
Using Edit Buttons • Architectural blocks can be moved pre-

cisely using the Point to Point Move
edit button. See “Point to Point Move” on
open the Architectural Block
page 125.
Specification dialog. See “Architec-
tural Block Specification Dialog” on • Architectural blocks can be selected and
page 667. added to the library for future use by
• An architectural block or group of blocks clicking the Add to Library edit
can be edited in a variety of ways using button. See “Adding Architectural Blocks
the Transform/Replicate Object to the Library” on page 667.
edit button. See “Transform/Replicate • Click the Explode Architectural Block
Object Dialog” on page 144. edit button to explode the block into
its individual objects. See “Exploding
Architectural Blocks” on page 666.
Exploding Architectural Blocks

You can break an architectural block to the architectural block and click the Explode
make its objects independent. Select Architectural Block edit button.
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components

An architectural block consists of a group of Editing Sub-Objects
objects blocked together. These sub-objects
often contain additional parts called Certain attributes of an architectural block
components. For example, a kitchen island can be edited at the object level. An object
can be created by blocking together cabinets, can be edited by accessing the specification
appliances, and a custom countertop. Each of dialog either of two ways:
these sub-objects may contain components. • Explode the architectural block; select
For example, the cabinet(s) may contain a the sub-object; and click the Open
countertop, hinges, and drawer glide.
Object edit button.
Architectural blocks can be treated as a • Select the sub-object while it is part of
single unit in materials lists, ignoring sub- the architectural block (see “Editing
objects and their components. See “General Architectural Blocks” on page 665) and
Tab” on page 668.
Some attributes may not be editable
while the object is part of a block.
666
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library
You can view and/or modify the components To open the Components dialog, select an
of an architectural block (or group of blocks) architectural block and click the
through the Components dialog. The
Components edit button. See
Components dialog lists all the sub-
objects that comprise an architectural block,
as well as the components that make up each
sub-object.
Adding Architectural Blocks to the Library

You can create your own architectural blocks Select the architectural block and click the
and save them in the Architectural Blocks
Architectural
Add to Library edit button. The Add
Library . Once in the library, to Library dialog opens, allowing you to
Blocks
architectural blocks can be copied to any add the object to a specific library under the
other category. See “Editing Library Architectural Blocks category. See “Adding
Objects” on page 698. to the Library” on page 674.
Note: If you open a plan hat was created in

the Full of Chief Architect in the Base version
and select an architectural block, you cannot
unblock it or edit its components.
Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The Architectural Block
Specification dialog controls the way
architectural blocks display in floor plan
view and in materials lists and schedules.
Select an architectural block or group of
architectural blocks and click the Open
Object edit button to open the
Architectural Block Specification
dialog for the selected block(s).
667
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Display Bounding Box - check this to 4 Block Schedule - Specify which

show the bounding box of the objects in schedule the architectural block appears
the architectural block. The box uses the in when Ignore Sub-Objects is checked.
Architectural Blocks Layer settings.
Select None to exclude the architectural
2 Display Sub-Objects Using Block block from all schedules.
Layer - Check this box to apply the
display properties for the architectural block Note: "Other" must be checked in the Sched-
layer as specified in the Layer Display ule Specification dialog for the architectural
Options dialog to all of the sub-objects. block to appear in the schedule. See “Text
Tab” on page 996.
If this box is not checked, all the sub-objects
display according to the display properties Layer Tab
set for their current layer. See “Displaying
Objects” on page 221. For information about the Layer tab, see
3 Ignore Sub-Objects - Check this box
to treat the architectural block as a Label Tab
single unit in materials lists and schedules.
This also turns off sub-objects in floor plan For more information about the Label tab,
view, displaying only the bounding box. see “Label Tab” on page 576.
Note: Labels for architectural blocks only dis-

play in floor plan view.
668
Chapter 24:
Libraries
Chapter Overview
Libraries
Introductory Training Video: Finding
and Placing Library Objects
Chief Architect’s library contains thousands Chapter Contents
of symbols, materials, and images that can • Third Party Libraries
enhance any plan. Anything that you want to • Bonus Libraries
incorporate in your building design that • The Library Browser
cannot be made with Chief Architect’s • Adding to the Library
architectural and drafting tools can be found • Editing Libraries
in the library or created in the Create Symbol • Select Library Object Dialog
Wizard and saved in the library for future • Replace From Library
use. • Library Categories
• Library Search Dialog
New libraries and library enhancements are • Placing Library Objects
created by Chief Architect on a continuing • Place Library Object Button
basis. There are also third party developers • Displaying Library Objects
who have created their own libraries for • Editing Library Objects
Chief Architect that are available for • Library Objects and the Materials List
purchase. • Library Object Specification Dialog
669
Third Party Libraries

If you have any third-party libraries created automatically copied into the Chief Architect
for Chief Architect 7.0, you should copy X1.0 Libraries folder.
them into your Chief Architect X1.0
New third-party libraries can be added to the
Libraries folder. The next time you open
Library Browser as well. See “Adding a
Chief Architect, the program will
Third Party Library” on page 675.
automatically convert those libraries for you.
Updated information on available libraries
If you have any third-party libraries for Chief
can be found at www.chiefarchitect.com.
Architect 8.0, 9.0, 9.5 or 10.0,, they are
Bonus Libraries
Chief Architect periodically posts new and • Select the Manufacturers category in the
updated libraries for download. Library Browser and click the link that
displays in the preview pane.
To see what bonus libraries are available
• Select Help> Download Bonus Content
from the menu.
The Library Browser

What’s New In Version X1 Training To open the Library Browser:
Video: Library and Project Browser
• Select Library> Library Browser .
The Chief Architect Library Browser is
a repository of prebuilt components, • Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard.
symbols, and images that can be used in a The Library Browser window has three
plan. Explore the contents, find what you’re adjustable sections: library directory pane,
looking for, and place it in your plan. selection pane, and preview pane. To adjust
The Library Browser allows you to add your the height or width of a section, place the
own objects, organize them into your own pointer over the split bar you want to move.
libraries within existing categories, and save When the double-headed arrow displays,
them for use in future plans. See “Adding to click and drag.
the Library” on page 674. The Library Browser can also be docked to
any side of the screen. See “Docking the
Library Browser” on page 673.
670
The Library Browser
1
5
2
6
3
4
1 Select the Library Browser tab to view 3 The toolbar beneath the tree view aids
Libraries
the Library Browser. in navigating and displaying windows.
Select the Project Browser tab to view the Click the Library Search button to
Project Browser. See “Project Browser” on open the Library Search dialog. See
page 165. “Library Search Dialog” on page 692.
2 The library directory displays here. The Click the Plant Chooser button to
overall structure is: open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
• Library Category “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 608.
Click the Online Content button to
• Library 1 launch your default web browser to the
• Library Folder 1 Chief Architect web site, where links to third
party content developers can be found.
• Library Subfolder
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
• Library Object 1 button to toggle the Selection window
on and off.
• Library Folder 2
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
• Library 2 ... and so on. button to toggle the Preview window
on and off.
Navigate the hierarchy using the tree view,
by clicking in the view window, or by using Click the Preferences button to open
the keyboard. the Library Browser panel of the
671
Preferences dialog, where properties of Using the Menus

the Library Browser are controlled. See
“Library Browser Panel” on page 188. The Library menu contains all commands
related to the library. Which menu items are
4 The status bar at the bottom of the enabled depends on the type of item
Library Browser is divided into three currently selected in the Library Browser.
sections. To view them all, you may need to
resize the Library Browser.
• The first displays the name of the
selected category, library, folder or
object.
• The second section displays the total
number of folders and objects contained
within the selected item.
• The third section displays copyright
information for copyrighted symbols.
5 The Selection pane shows thumbnails

for the highlighted portion of the tree
view.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
preference settings, a scroll bar is present at
the bottom of the selection pane. See
“Library Browser Panel” on page 188.
6 The Preview pane displays a 3D or For information about these commands,

alternate view of the selected object.
when they are available, and what they do,
Select an object by clicking on the desired see “Library Menu” on page 46.
object in the Selection pane, then click in the
Right-click on an item in the Library
plan to place it. Once placed, the object can
Browser to open a contextual menu
be selected, moved, or edited. All placed
displaying options related to that item. This
objects are saved with the plan.
menu corresponds to the items found in the
You can work on the plan with the Library Library menu when the same library object is
Browser open. To close the Library Browser selected. See “Library Menu” on page 46.
click the Close button or double-click the
object in the selection pane.
672
The Library Browser
Docking the
Library Browser
The Library Browser can be relocated by
Libraries
clicking and dragging the title bar.
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of
your screen it automatically docks in a
vertical or horizontal orientation, depending
on its location.
• Disable Docking in the Preferences
dialog prevents the Library Browser from
docking to the side of the screen. See
“Library Browser Panel” on page 188.
• Holding down the Ctrl key prevents the
Library Browser from docking while
moving.
• If you close the program with the Library
Browser docked, it displays in the same
position the next time the program is
opened.
673
Adding to the Library

New libraries, folders, and library objects example, is located at the top of the Materials
can be added to the Library Browser. Library category tree. Additional unlocked libraries
objects are always placed in alphabetical can be added to any category, allowing you
order within their heirarchy. to customize the organization of the library.
Most libraries shipped with Chief Architect
Adding a New Library
are locked and cannot be edited, indicated
by a small padlock on the folder; however, To create a new, unlocked library, open the
each library category does include a single, Library Browser, select a library category
unlocked library which can be edited. in the tree view, and choose Library> New>
Library. A new library initially named
The names of these unlocked libraries begin
“Untitled Library 1” is added to the currently
with “-My,” followed by the name of the
selected category.
category. The My Materials library, for
674
Adding to the Library
5. If Chief Architect is running when you

perform this task, select Library>
Refresh Library Browser .
6. The third party library may be listed in
the My Libraries library category.
Inserting a New Folder

Click on an unlocked library or folder
in the tree view, then select Library> New>
Folder. A new folder initially named
You can also right-click any current library in “Untitled” is added to the currently selected
the tree view and select New Library from library or folder.
the contextual menu. See “Using the Menus” You can also right-click any unlocked library
on page 672. or folder in the tree view and select New
A new library can also be created from Folder from the contextual menu. See
within the Add to Library dialog. See “Using the Menus” on page 672.
“Adding a New Object” on page 675.
Libraries
Adding a Third Party Library
In Chief Architect, libraries are stored using
the .ALB file format. Some manufacturers
and third party symbol resources provide
library content in this file format that can be
added to the Chief Architect library.
To add a third party library
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to the Adding a New Object

.ALB file saved on your computer. Any object previously placed in a plan from
2. Right click and select Copy from the the Library Browser or using the Create
contextual menu. Symbol Wizard can be added to an
unlocked library. See “Create Symbol
3. Browse to the Chief Architect Libraries
directory, typically located at C:\Pro-
gram Files\Chief Architect Inc\Chief In addition, some Chief Architect objects
Architect X1 Full\Libraries. that are not symbols, such as cabinets,
4. Select Edit> Paste to paste a copy of the windows, doorways, CAD blocks, molding
.ALB file in the Libraries directory. profiles, architectural blocks, and terrain
675
objects can be added to the library. See Adding Materials and Images
“Symbols vs. Native Objects” on page 698. to the Library
To add an object to the library Chief Architect can use materials and images
in a variety of file formats and provides
1. Select the symbol and choose Tools> several means of adding new material and
image files to the library. For more
Symbol> Add to Library or click information, see “Creating Materials” on
the Add to Library edit button to page 704; “Managing Plan Materials” on
open the Add to Library dialog. page 706; “Creating Images” on page 894;
and “Adding Images to the Library” on page
897.
Adding Backdrops
to the Library
Backdrops are images that can be selected to
display in 3D views. See “Backdrop Tab” on
page 760. A backdrop can be added to the
library by importing an image file from
anywhere on your computer.
2. In the Choose window, select the 1. Select File> Import> Backdrop to

unlocked library or folder that you want open the Import Backdrop File dia-
to add the object to. The symbol is added log, which is similar to the Import
at the selected directory level. Picture File dialog. See “Import Pic-
ture File Dialog” on page 890.
3. If you want to add a new library, click
2. Browse to an image file on your com-
New Library button at the top right puter, select it, and click Open. This
of the dialog. backdrop can now be found in the My
4. In the Object field, give the object a Backdrops library.
name. Names are case sensitive.
Multiple backdrops can be added to the
5. Click OK to save the object into the library simultaneously by copying them into
selected folder. The OK button is dis- the My Backdrops folder using Windows
abled until you enter an object name and Explorer.
select a library or folder.
You can also create a new backdrop by first
Folders in the Backdrops category can- copying an image to the Windows Clipboard,
not have the forward slash “/” character. then navigating to a Chief Architect window
and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from
the menu or by using the Screen Capture
676
Editing Libraries
tools. See “Paste” on page 137 and “Creating Refresh Library Browser
Screen Captures” on page 900.
If you add a new library or graphics file
For information about how to use a backdrop by copying the file in Windows
in render views, see “Images & Backdrops” Explorer, it does not automatically display in
on page 769. the browser. Select Library> Refresh
Library Browser to refresh the Library
Browser and display the added file.
Editing Libraries
Most libraries in the Library Browser are Deleting Libraries
locked and cannot be deleted, moved,
renamed, or modified. User-created libraries Unlocked libraries and the folders and library
and library objects, however, can be moved, objects within them can be deleted. To delete
copied, deleted, and renamed. a library object, select it in the Library
Browser and choose Library> Delete
Object; right-click on it and choose Delete
Copy Library List
from the contextual menu; or press the
Libraries
To make a copy of the list of all library Delete key on your keyboard.
objects, select a folder in tree view and
choose Library> Copy Library List, then Modifying or deleting library objects is
paste the entire library heirarchy as text into permanent and immediate. You cannot
undo these changes, so use care when modi-
a text program such as Notepad or Text
fying your libraries. You should create back-
Editor. ups of all your library files (*.alb) before
making any modifications.
Copying Folders and
Library Objects Renaming Libraries
To copy a Folder or Library Object , Unlocked Libraries, including the Folders
right-click on it in the Library Browser and and library objects within them, can be
select Copy from the contextual menu. renamed.
Highlight a new location in the tree view and To rename a library, folder, or library object,
select Edit> Paste to paste a copy in the new open the Library Browser and select the
location or right-click and select Paste from library object to be renamed. Choose
the contextual menu. Library> Rename Object, press F2 on your
You can also copy items by dragging and keyboard, or right-click on the library object
dropping them into an unlocked library and select Rename Object from the
folder. contextual menu. The keyboard command
Ctrl+R also allows you to rename a library
Libraries cannot be copied. object.
677
Library names can contain up to 63 To open the Symbol Specification

characters. Library names are also case- dialog, click on a symbol name in the tree
sensitive. For example, “OakCabinet” will view of the Library Browser and select
not overwrite “Oakcabinet.”
Library> Open . See “Symbol
Expand/Collapse All
When a Folder level item is selected in the Preferences
tree view of the Library Browser, Expand
All and Collapse All are available in the Click the Preferences button at the
Library and contextual menus, allowing you bottom of the Library Browser directories
to expand or contract its contents in the tree panel to open the Library Browser panel of
view. the Preferences dialog, where display
properties for the Library Browser are
Components controlled. See “Library Browser Panel” on
page 188.
The display of library objects in the
Materials List is controlled in the Moving Folders and
Components dialog. Select Library>
Library Objects
Components when any unlocked symbol
is highlighted in tree view. See “Editing Unlocked folders and library objects can be
Library Objects” on page 698. The moved to new locations in the Library
Components dialog opens, allowing you
Browser provided that the destination is an
to change the information that included in the unlocked library. Like libraries, folders and
Material List. library objects are organized alphabetically
within each hierarchy.
Terrain objects, CAD blocks, moldings,
images, backdrops, and materials do not To move an unlocked folder or file to a
appear in the Materials List. See different location, open the Library Browser
“Components Dialog” on page 1014. and click the library object. Click and drag
the object to the new location.
Open Symbol
Any image, material, plant image,or symbol
in an Unlocked library can be edited from
the Library Browser menu.
Individual library objects from locked

libraries can be edited after being cop-
ied into unlocked libraries.
Folders able to accept additions highlight as
the file is moved. Release the mouse button
to relocate the selected library object.
678
Select Library Object Dialog
Keyboard Commands switches focus between the tree view and the
selection pane. Use your mouse to select an
The Library Browser can be navigated using object for placement. See “Library Browser
the arrow keys on your keyboard. The right Panel” on page 188.
and left arrow keys expand and collapse
folders, and the up and down keys change If you have Tiled To Fit Window checked in
which library object is currently selected. your preference settings, pressing the Tab
key switches focus between the tree view and
Unlocked library objects can be deleted the selection pane. You can then use the
using the Delete key on your keyboard. arrow keys to select a library object within
If you have Scrollable List checked in your the selection pane.
Preference settings, pressing the Tab key
Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a
modal version of the Library Browser that is
accessible from object specification dialogs
that display the button. Click it to
Libraries
open the Select Library Object dialog
and select and apply items from the library to
the object currently opened for specification.
To make your selection, highlight the desired

The Select Library Object dialog only object and click OK, or simply double-click
displays categories that are related to the on the object in the selection pane to close
opened object. For example, this is how the the Select Library Object dialog.
Select Library Object dialog displays The Select Library Object dialog can be
when accessed from the Cabinet
Specification dialog. resized ; display the preview and
selection panes; and can initiate a
Library Search .
If the Select Library Object dialog is
opened by clicking the Library Material
button on the Materials tab of any
679
specification dialog, three additional options

• Click the Open Item button to open
are available:
the Define Material dialog for the
• Click the New Library button to cre- selected custom material in the library.
ate a new library in the Materials cate- See “Define Material Dialog” on page
gory. 712.
These three options are also found in the
• Click the New Material button to New submenu of the contextual menu that
open the Define Material dialog and displays when you right-click on the My
create a new material. Materials library in the Library Browser.
Replace From Library

The Replace From Library edit Select Replace Identical Objects in Room
button displays on the edit toolbar to replace all objects that are in the same
when most objects are selected. Click this room as, and are identical to, the currently
button to open the Replace From Library selected object.
dialog and replace the selected object, and
Select Replace Identical Objects on Floor
others like it if you choose, with an object of
to replace all objects that are on the same
the same type from the library.
floor as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
A few things to remember about Replace
1 From Library :
• Works in floor plan and 3D views.
2 • The replacement option Replace
Identical Objects in Room is not avail-
able for doors and windows.
Replace From Library is available for

1 Click the Library button to open the any object that can be stored in the Library
Library Browser and select an object to
use as a replacement. The object that is Browser and can be selected, including:
currently selected as a replacement is listed electrical objects, image objects,
above. architectural objects, and architectural
blocks. Objects that cannot be replaced using
2 Select one of the Replacement this feature include materials, backdrops, and
Options. objects placed within other objects, such as
Select Replace Selected Object to replace cabinet doors.
only the currently selected object.
680
Library Categories
Library Categories
There are many library categories, and each • Electrical
one may contain any number of libraries. • Exterior Fixtures
• Interior Fixtures
The selection pane always represents the
• Exterior Furnishing
items selected in the tree view. If you select a
• Interior Furnishings
category or object in the selection pane, the
• Geometric Shapes
corresponding item is selected in the tree
• Hardware
view and the 3D picture displays in the
• Images
preview pane.
• Line Styles
Here are the library categories: • Materials
• My Libraries • Millwork
• Architectural Blocks • Moldings and Profiles
• Backdrops • Plants
• Cabinet Doors and Drawers • Sprinklers
• Cabinet Modules • Terrain
• CAD Blocks • Windows
• Doors • Manufacturers
Libraries
• Doorways
My Libraries
The My Libraries category is a central for you to save items in. These unlocked
repository that can be used to store libraries directories all have the word “My” at the
containing any and all kinds of objects. This beginning of their names, and are found at
is a good place to store third party libraries the top of their library category when
and libraries that you have created yourself. opened. The My Materials library, for
example, is located at the top of the Materials
In addition, Chief Architect’s Library
category tree.
Browser has unlocked libraries and folders
Architectural Blocks
Architectural blocks are a combination of
objects that are grouped together. Once
blocked, they can be edited as a single object
and stored for future use. See “Architectural
681
Backdrops
The Backdrops library category contains Backdrops can be specified from the 3D
many images that can be used for backdrops Settings dialog; or they can be dragged and
in render and raytrace views. dropped directly from the Library Browser.
See “Creating Backdrops” on page 761.
Cabinet Doors and Drawers

The Cabinet Doors and Drawers category These door styles can be selected and
contains many door styles, organized into dropped onto existing cabinets in floor plan
directories, that can be used with Chief and 3D views to change the door style for
Architect’s standard cabinets. that cabinet.
Cabinet Modules
The Cabinet Modules library category Cabinet Specification dialog. Cabinets
contains cabinet modules that can be placed from the library can be selected and moved
in your plan from the Library Browser or the around in the model.
682
CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks
The CAD Blocks library category contains
2D CAD blocks that can be placed into any
floor plan or cross section/elevation view,
CAD Detail window or layout page.
The CAD Blocks library category includes a
Libraries
wide variety of CAD objects such as product
specific CAD details, commonly used plan
notations, and CAD images. See “CAD
Doors
The Doors library category contains custom
door styles that can be assigned to doors in
the 3D model. These doors can be selected
and dropped into any doorway to change the
door style for that doorway.
The Doors library category also contains
custom doors that can be placed in walls.
683
Doorways
The Doorways library category contains
doorway configurations for grand entries,
interior archways, and garage door frames.
Electrical
The Electrical library category contains views and may also produce a light source in
electrical symbols that can be placed in floor render views.
plan or 3D views to create electrical plans.
All of these symbols have a 3D object
associated with them that will display in 3D
Exterior Fixtures
Introductory Training Video: Furniture
and Appliances
The Fixtures (Exterior) library category
contains symbols for many outdoor objects
commonly found on the exterior of a home.
Barbecues, plants, playground equipment,
hot tubs, mailboxes, doghouses, automobiles,
and a variety of road accessories are just
some of the objects found in the Exterior
Fixtures library category.
Sunrooms
The Fixtures (Exterior) library category
includes a Sunrooms library containing a
variety of sunroom components that can be
used to create many different styles of
684
Interior Fixtures
sunrooms. Following are some of the

individual library objects assembled as a
sunroom unit.
Only one side of each section is provided. To
get the corresponding unit for the opposite
side, check Reverse Item in the specification
dialog for that sunroom section.
If a short wall is needed under the sunroom,

use solid railings. Change the Floor to
Bottom value from zero to the height of the
solid railing.
Interior Fixtures
Libraries
Introductory Training Video: Furniture The MEP Toolbar Configuration
and Appliances includes a selection of toolbar buttons that
Classroom Design Project Training place objects from the Fixtures (Interior)
Video: Adding Appliances library. See “Toggle Buttons” on page 70.
The Fixtures (Interior) library category
contains a variety of interior fixtures such as
appliances, indoor stoves, fireplaces, HVAC,
surveillance cameras, and fire extinguishers.
Exterior Furnishing
Introductory Training Video: Furniture
and Appliances
The Furnishings (Exterior) library category
contains outdoor furniture such as benches,
swings, planters, tables, and chairs.
685
Interior Furnishings
Introductory Training Video: Furniture • A wall object attaches to the wall.
and Appliances
The Furnishings (Interior) library category is
very large, containing a broad range of
furniture organized into directories.
There are three types of furniture objects:
• A stand-alone object is placed and
moves like a base cabinet. Most furniture
objects are stand alone.
• A table object, such as a table lamp or
portable TV, is placed on top of a table,
countertop, or other object.
Geometric Shapes
The Geometric Shapes library category con-
tains cylinders, boxes, wedges, spheres,
cones, and other basic shapes that can be
resized and combined with many other
objects for a variety of applications.
686
Hardware
Hardware
The Hardware library category contains
accessories that can be applied to doors and
drawers for commercial or residential use.
Images
Image objects contain information and individual objects such as trees, flowers,
attributes about the represented object. They cars, or people. They are marked in floor
display in 3D views. See “Picture Files vs. plan view with a 2D CAD block and are
Pictures and Image Objects” on page 890. visible in 3D views. When placed on a
Libraries
Image objects are extremely important for terrain or terrain feature, the images are
the appearance of rendered views and file placed at the correct elevation.
export. Images are bitmap files that represent
687
Line Styles
What’s New In Version X1 Training 2. Click and drag in a 2D view to produce a
Video: CAD - Line Styles and Line CAD line with the selected style.
Weights
Additional line styles can also be imported
The Line Styles library contains line styles into the library.
that be applied to objects individually in their
specification dialogs or by layer in the To import line styles
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Line
Style Tab” on page 851 and “Layer Display 1. Locate a line style and copy its file to a
Options Dialog” on page 218. convenient location on your hard drive.
These files have the extension .lin. Pre-
You can also draw a line with a selected style
vious versions of Chief Architect used
directly from the library or apply line styles
the .dat format, which also works.
to the Select Library Object button.
2. Select File> Import> Line Style Defi-
The MEP Toolbar Configuration nitions.
includes a selection of toolbar buttons that 3. Browse to the location where you saved
access line styles from the library. See the .lin file.
“Toggle Buttons” on page 70.
4. Click Open to add the line style to the
To draw a line style from the library library.
1. Select a line style in the selection pane

of the Library Browser.
Materials
Classroom Design Project Training they are independent and can be edited
Video: Storing Materials in the Library without changing the original material from
the library.
The Materials library category contains
materials that display in 3D and raytrace Materials can be used in plans without
views. existing in the Library Browser. They can be
added to the Library Browser individually or
Materials can be applied to objects directly
all at once. See “Managing Plan Materials”
from the Library Browser. See “Applying
on page 706 and “Converting Material
Materials” on page 708. Like other library
Template Plans” on page 704.
objects, once materials are used in a plan,
688
Millwork
Millwork
The Millwork library category contains
objects such as door surrounds, balusters,
newels, corbels, mantels and cupolas. These
objects can be applied to other objects in the
program such as railings, fences, and stair
brackets.
Moldings and Profiles

The Moldings and Profiles library category polyline. See “Molding Polylines” on page
contains a collection of molding, handrail, 541.
Libraries
curb and gutter profiles that can be applied to
a variety of objects. Molding is typically
applied to an object or room on the Moldings
tab of its specification dialog. See “Moldings
Tab” on page 302.
Molding profiles can also be extruded along
a path in floor plan view using a molding
Plants
The Plant library category consists primarily
of images of plants and trees. See “Plant
Image Specification Dialog” on page 602.
In addition to images, the 3D Plants library
contains 3D plant symbols. See “Plant
By default plants reside on their own layer.
See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
218.
689
Sprinklers
The Sprinklers library category contains irrigation systems. See “Sprinkler Tools” on
different kinds of sprinklers that can be used page 594.
with the Sprinkler Tools to detail
690
Terrain
Libraries
Terrain
The Terrain library category contains road crosswalks, etc. See “The Terrain Library”
markings that can be used in parking lots, on page 596.
Windows
The Windows library category contains
windows with custom muntin patterns as
well as windows with custom shapes.
These windows can be placed in a model just

like other windows and can be resized like
other library objects.
691
Manufacturers
When various manufacturers produce Chief Architect website. When you
libraries of their products for use in Chief download and install these libraries, they
Architect, these libraries are available on the display under the Manufacturers category.
Library Search Dialog

The Library Search button is found
Click the Library Search button to open
in the Library Browser window and the
the Library Search dialog.
Select Library Object dialog. You can
also access the search by selecting Library>
Library Search.
Basic Search Tab
1
2
1 Enter text to be used for the search. Substrings are not included. For example,
searching for the word “cabinets” does not
692
Library Search Dialog
produce “cabinet” as a search result.

2 Click any of the items in the search
Searching for the word “cabinet” does results area to find that item in the
produce “cabinets” as a search result. Library Browser and select it for placement.
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the
search results.
Advanced Search Tab
1
2
Libraries
3
4
5
1 Search Text - Enter a word or words to Match Entire Word - Check this box to
use in your search for a name in the match the entire word or words with the
library. complete name of the object.
Match Keyword - Check this box to match Include Folders - Check this box to include
the entered word with an object’s search folders in your search.
attributes. See “Search Attributes” on page
Match Case - Check this box to make your
694.
search case-sensitive.
693
2 Search Categories - Check the box for

each category you want to include in
your search.
Select All - Click this button to select all of
the categories.
Clear All - Click this button to clear all of
the categories.
3 Check a style (or styles) to restrict the

search results to objects of that style. If
no styles are checked, search results will not
be restricted. See “Search Attributes” on
page 694.
4 Search - Click this button to begin This dialog lists the keywords and styles
searching.
associated with the library object.
Close - Click this button to cancel the search
and close the Library Search dialog. To associate keywords with unlocked library
objects
5 When the search is complete, the
results display here. Select a folder or
1. Right click an unlocked object in the
library object to open the Library Browser to
library.
that item.
2. Select Search Attributes from the con-
The Find Library Objects dialog textual menu.
remembers the search information of 3. Any search words already associated
the last valid search whenever it is accessed
with the object display in the list. Type
from the Library Browser, the main toolbar, or
the menu. in any additional words.
4. Click any styles you want to associate
Search Attributes with the object.
Right-click an object in the tree view of the 5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply
Library Browser and select Search your changes.
Attributes from the contextual menu to open You can use the search words find the
the Search Attributes dialog. symbol using Match Keyword. See
“Library Search Dialog” on page 692.
If you selected styles, those styles can be
used when performing a Library Search. See
“Library Search Dialog” on page 692.
694
Placing Library Objects
Placing Library Objects

Click on an object in the tree view or Place Library
selection pane of the Library Browser to Object Button
select it for placement. See “The Library
Browser” on page 670. Most libraries The Place Library Object button can
contain 3D objects that can be selected from be added to your toolbar and used for
the Library Browser and placed directly in a quick access and placement of frequently
2D or 3D view. A few libraries, such as used library items. See “Adding Toolbar
materials, contain objects that cannot. Buttons” on page 18.
Once an object has been selected, the pointer Up to 100 Place Library Object buttons
may change its appearance, indicating which can be dragged onto the same toolbar, each
library category the object came from. For assigned a different object. See “Place
example, select an object from the exterior Library Object Button” on page 696.
fixture library and the pointer changes to an
arbor. Once a library object has been assigned,
click the button and then click in a view to
To place an object selected from the Library place the assigned object.
Browser into the model, click in a floor plan
Libraries
or 3D view. You can continue to click and Moldings and Profiles
place the selected library object until another
library object or tool is selected. If you click on a molding profile in the
selection pane of the Library Browser the
Once a library object has been placed, it can
program enters molding polyline mode,
be edited in a variety of ways. See “Editing
allowing you to create a molding polyline
Library Objects” on page 698.
that can be used in floor plan view only. See
Specification Dialogs
Some objects, such as moldings and cabinet Materials
doors, can be applied through the
Materials on objects can be changed or added
specification dialogs of their containing
whenever an object is open for specification.
objects. For example, to place a cabinet door
The Materials tab of every specification
on a particular cabinet, select the cabinet,
dialog allows you to access the Select
open it for specification, and click the
Material dialog and change the material.
Library button on the General tab. See
“Select Library Object Dialog” on page 679. You can also change materials on objects in
3D views using Material Painter. See
“Material Painter” on page 708 .
695
Placement Restrictions Doors must be placed into a wall or

doorway. They can also replace a door that
A library object comes with placement has been placed in a wall.
restrictions based upon typical real-life
placement. Library windows, for example, Doorways must be placed into a wall.
must be placed in a wall just like standard Electrical objects from the library come with
windows, library doors must be placed in an a variety of placement restrictions. Some
existing doorway, and some appliances must objects, such as ceiling fans, track lighting,
be placed in cabinets. and smoke detectors attach to the ceiling.
Library symbols have placement restrictions Others, like switches, outlets, and jacks,
that are determined when the symbol is mount on walls. Some electrical objects fit
created but can be changed later. See under wall cabinets or directly on a floor.
“Symbols vs. Native Objects” on page 698 If an Interior Fixture drops into the top or
and “Symbol Specification Dialog” on page front of a cabinet, you must have a cabinet
945. module large enough to contain it. If you
Most library objects require that there be attempt to place a fixture into a cabinet
enough space to contain it, but some library module that is too small, an error message
objects require special considerations. If displays. Click OK, resize the cabinet to
error messages display when placing library accommodate the fixture, then place the
symbols, they indicate where the object must fixture in the cabinet again.
be placed. Objects from the Millwork library attach to
Cabinet Doors must be placed within walls, doors, drawers and cabinets.
existing cabinets. They cannot be free
Library Windows must be placed into an
standing.
existing wall.
Place Library Object Button

If the Place Library Object button has
Video: Building Toolbars to Place
not yet been assigned a library object, click it
Library Objects
once to open the Library Object Button
The Place Library Object button can be Specification dialog.
added to your toolbar and used for quick
access and placement of frequently used Double-click a Place Library Object
library items. button that has been assigned a library object
to open the Library Object Button
696
Displaying Library Objects
object. See “Select Library Object Dialog”

on page 679.
2 When a library object has been

1 selected, assign a button icon. Choose
from two automatically generated button
2 icons or click Browse to browse your
computer for a different icon.
1 Click the Library button to open the

Select Library Object dialog and
assign a library object to the button. If a
library object has already been assigned,
click this button to assign a new library
Libraries
Displaying Library Objects
All library objects except materials and the Furniture Schedule Specification
backdrops display in floor plan view. Library and Fixture Schedule Specification
objects are represented by 2D CAD blocks dialogs. See “Label Tab” on page 1000.
that resemble the size and shape of the object
All library objects except CAD blocks
when viewed from above. To learn how to
display in 3D views. By default, images
change the 2D block that represents an
rotate to face the camera in 3D views. For
object, see “2D Block” on page 932.
information about turning off image rotation,
As with other architectural objects, the see “Image Specification Dialog” on page
display of library objects in floor plan view 897.
Is controlled by layer in the Layer Display
Terrain objects can be viewed in 3D only
Options dialog. Each library category has
when a terrain perimeter exists. See “Terrain
its own layer. See “Layer Display Options
Library Fixtures and Furniture labels display
in floor plan view when the Cabinets, Labels
layer is set to show in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Label size is controlled in
697
Editing Library Objects

Library objects can be selected individually drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other
or as a group, like other objects in Chief face items in the Cabinet Specification
Architect. For more information, see dialog. See “Front Tab” on page 569.
Once selected, library objects can be edited Using Edit Handles
like box-based objects in a variety of ways Most library symbols can be edited like CAD
using dimensions, using the edit handles, and boxes. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on
the edit toolbar buttons. For more page 111. Depending on the type of view and
information, see “Editing Objects” on page the surface selected, the edit handles a
79 and “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page symbol displays will vary.
111
To resize Fixtures and Furniture, you must
check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enabled in
Symbols vs. Native Objects
the Plan Defaults dialog. When this option
A symbol is an object that is based on a 3D is checked, these library objects have edit
.dxf, .dwg, .obj, or .3ds file that has been handles when selected and can be resized
imported into Chief Architect. like other objects. See “Plan Defaults” on
page 180.
Native objects are those placed into the plan
using Chief Architect’s standard tools, such When a furnishing or fixture symbol is
selected in floor plan view or on the top
as Hinged Doors , and Cabinets .
surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles
Native objects do not have a 3D .dxf, .dwg,
display. They are the Move handle at the
.obj, or .3ds file associated with them and
center, the Rotate handle just outside the
are not symbols.
cabinet front (indicated by a V) and a Resize
handle on each edge and at each corner.
Remove Manufacturer Lock
When a symbol is selected on a side in a
Manufacturer symbols are limited in cross section/elevation or 3D view, it
the ways that they can be edited. After displays five edit handles: the Move handle
such a symbols is placed in a plan, select it and a Resize handle on each edge.
and click the Remove Manufacturer Lock
edit button to remove the manufacturer data Symbols cannot be concentrically resized,
so that it can be edited like other symbols. even when the Concentric edit behavior is
enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
Deleting Built-in Fixtures The labels of library cabinets, electrical,
and Appliances furnishings and fixtures, when displayed,
have a separate Move edit handle that
A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
displays when the object is selected.
becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
698
Library Objects and the Materials List
Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are moved. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
subject to bumping/pushing behavior when 124.
Library Objects and the Materials List

Library objects are counted in the Materials as well as any comments added to the
List. The Materials List does not reflect any Components dialog for a library object.
changes to the size or materials of any fixture See “Components” on page 678.
or furniture object. It lists the library object
Library Object Specification Dialog

The Fixture Specification; Furniture name of the dialog is determined by the type
Specification; Geometric Shapes of object currently opened for specification.
Specification; Hardware
For example, selecting a library object from
Specification; and Millwork
the Furniture (Exterior) library category and
Specification dialogs all display the same
options and are referred to as the Library clicking the Open Object edit button
Libraries
Object Specification dialogs. The actual opens the Furniture Specification
dialog.
General Tab
1
2
699
1 Name - Displays the name of the Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance from
selected object. the floor to the bottom of the object. A value
of zero makes the object rest on the floor.
2 Specification - Define size and height
above the floor of the object. Follow Terrain - Check this box if you want
the object to follow the surface of the terrain
Height - Enter the height for the object.
when it is placed outside a building.
Width - Enter the width of the object.
3 Reset - Click to reset to the original,
Depth - Enter the depth of the object. unmodified size.
Saving a symbol that has been resized 4 A preview of the library object displays
in both the Fixture Specification here and updates with changes.
dialog and the Symbol Specification
dialog to the library may result in inconsistent 5 Show Color - Check this box to display
the preview of the object in full color.
symbol properties. Symbols should be
resized in one or the other, not both.
Options Tab
1 Reverse Symbol - Select the check box Fill Tab

to reverse the library object. This turns
a right-hand refrigerator into a left-hand For information about the Fill tab, see “Fill
refrigerator, etc. Style Tab” on page 864.
700
Library Object Specification Dialog
Layer Tab Label Tab

For information about the Layer tab, see For information about the Label tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 223. “Label Tab” on page 576.
Materials Tab
701
702
Chapter 25:
Materials
Chapter Overview
What’s New In Version X1 Training customize the materials provided or create
Video: Materials your own.
The objects used in Chief Architect have a Learning how to create, manage, apply, and
variety of 3D properties. These objects - edit materials saves time and adds that
walls, windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes, professional touch to your designs.
lot perimeters etc. - can have materials
assigned to them so that they look realistic in Redefining only the visual properties of
Materials
3D views. These materials can also be used a material may create unexpected
to generate materials lists that can help with results. For example, changing the image of
a brick material to represent siding does not
cost estimations.
cause the material to be considered as siding
Designing with objects that look correct in during material calculations.
3D and calculate properly in a material list
requires that you use realistic material Chapter Contents
definitions and apply them appropriately to • Creating Materials
objects in your plan. • Mapping Patterns and Textures
• Managing Plan Materials
Chief Architect comes with many materials
• Applying Materials
that are ready for use. From siding, roofing,
• Viewing Materials
flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling, to road
• Materials Tab
surfaces, grass, water, and wood materials,
• Editing Materials
Chief Architect has materials for every
• Define Material Dialog
application, inside and out. If you cannot find
• Material Defaults Dialog
a material that suits your needs, you can
• Color Chooser Dialog
703
Creating Materials
Introductory Training Video: Creating Using Paste Image
Materials and Colors
You can create a new material by first
Chief Architect comes with many materials copying an image that will serve as its
that are ready for use. They are found in the texture to the Windows Clipboard, then
Materials category of the Library Browser. If navigating to a Chief Architect window and
you cannot find a suitable material, you can selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the menu.
edit an existing material or create a new See “Paste” on page 137.
material. See “Editing Materials” on page
711. You can also use the Screen Capture tools to
create a new material texture and add it to the
Once you have a suitable material, it can be library. See “Creating Screen Captures” on
applied to objects. See “Applying Materials” page 900.
on page 708.
Converting
Note: Adding a material to a plan is not the
same as adding it to the library. If you want a Textures to Materials
new material to be available for use in other An entire folder of textures can be
plans, add it to the library.
converted into a library of materials.
When converted, the folder of materials
From the Library Browser assumes the same file structure in the
A material can be created from and added Materials category of the Library Browser.
directly to the Library Browser, making it Select 3D> Materials> Convert Texture to
available for use in other plans. See “The Materials and then browse to a folder of
Library Browser” on page 670. textures on your computer.
In the directory pane of the Library Browser,
select an unlocked folder or sub-folder in the Converting
Materials category and select Library> Material.dat files
New> Material . Or, right-click on the Material.dat files, which were used in prior
folder and select New> Material from versions of Chief Architect, can be converted
the contextual menu. to materials and saved directly to the Library
Browser by selecting 3D> Materials>
In the Define Material dialog, you can Convert Material Definition (.dat) Files.
create a new material in the selected
unlocked folder. See “Define Material Converting Material
Template Plans
Select 3D> Materials> Create Plan
Materials Library to create a library
704
Mapping Patterns and Textures
of materials based on the materials used in command creates a new library in the
the current plan. This is useful for converting Materials category using the same name as
material template plans, a common way to the plan. Adding materials to the library
store material definitions in prior versions of individually allows you to store the material
Chief Architect, into a materials library. This within the existing directory structure.
Mapping Patterns and Textures

In Chief Architect, materials have two assigned to. When an object is moved, the
attributes that determine what they look like pattern or texture maintains its absolute
in 3D views: patterns and textures. position and may not look right. It is a good
• Patterns are composed of CAD lines and idea to assign pattern or texture origins only
a fill style and are visible in Vector after the position of the object has been
finalized.
Views . See “Vector Views” on page
733. If you have multiple objects using the
• Textures are created using special image same material, they all share the same
origin. Duplicate materials can be created if
files that tile seamlessly when applied to
you want different origins specified for the
surfaces and are seen in Raytrace same texture or pattern.
and Render Views . See “Render

Views” on page 763 and “Raytracing” on Determining the Origin
page 787. Before a new origin can be specified, the
Patterns and textures are assigned origins, display of coordinates in the status bar
Materials
which determine where the pattern or texture should be enabled. See “The Status Bar” on
begins on an X/Y axis. By default, this origin page 8.
is 0,0. To determine origin coordinates on the
Depending on the placement of a particular horizontal plane, place your cursor over the
object relative to this origin, a material origin location in floor plan view. When the
applied to it may not look right in 3D. You pointer is in the position you want to
can address this by specifying a new origin establish as the material origin, take note of
for the material’s pattern and/or texture. the coordinates that display in the Status Bar.
The origin for patterns can be set on the To determine origin coordinates on the
Pattern tab of the Define Material dialog. vertical plane, place your cursor over the
The origin for textures can be set on the origin location in a cross section/elevation
Texture tab of the Define Material dialog. view.
See “Define Material Dialog” on page 712. Once you have taken note of the new origin
A texture or pattern origin is a property of the coordinates, enter them on either the Pattern
material and not of the object the material is or Texture tab of the Define Material
705
dialog. See “Pattern Tab” on page 717 and

“Texture Tab” on page 718.
The pointer’s current coordinates display in the status bar
Managing Plan Materials

Use the Plan Materials dialog to
All materials that come with Chief Archi- manage only those materials that are
tect are stored in the Library Browser. used in the current plan. To access the Plan
You can also create your own materials and Materials dialog, select 3D> Materials>
save them in the Library Browser. The Library
Browser offers complete material editing Plan Materials .
capabilities. See “Editing Materials” on page
711.
706
Managing Plan Materials
Plan Materials Dialog
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 This is the list of materials in your plan. 6 Purge removes unused materials from
Select a material to preview it to the your plan.
right.
7 Delete removes a material from the list
If an X displays in the In Use column, the of plan materials. If the material is used
material is used by an object in your plan or in the model, you cannot delete it.
is defined as a default material for one or
more objects in your plan. 8 Click Add to Library to add the
selected material to the Library
Materials
2 Click OK to close the dialog and save Browser, making it available for use in other
any changes, Cancel to delete any plans. See “Adding to the Library” on page
changes made during this session in the 674.
dialog and return to the current view, or Help
The preview window on top shows how the
for more information about materials.
material appears in vector and cross section
3 Edit opens the Define Material views.
dialog for the selected material.
The bottom preview shows how the texture
New opens the Define Material appears in render views. If the words “No
4
dialog to create a new material. Texture” display, either a texture has not
been assigned to the material or the texture
5 Copy creates a copy of the selected file could not be found on your system. In
material and opens the Define
either case, the material displays in render
Material dialog where you can make
views as a solid color.
changes to the copied material.
707
Applying Materials
Introductory Training Video: Applying To use the Material Painter tool
Materials, Colors and Textures
1. Select 3D> Materials> Material
Materials are stored in the Materials library
in the Library Browser. They can be applied Painter and select the desired Mate-
to objects in a variety of ways. rial Painter Mode from the submenu.
2. Select 3D> Materials> Material
Object Specification Dialog
Painter> Material Painter .
Select an object (or a group of similar 3. Select a material from the Select
objects) and click the Open Object edit Library Object dialog.
button to open the specification dialog for 4. Click on the surface of an object with
that object. On the Material tab you can the pointer to apply that material. The
specify material assignments for the selected material is applied to surfaces
components that make up that object. When in the model based on the active Mate-
a material has been assigned, its appearance rial Painter Mode.
updates in the preview. See “Materials Tab”
on page 710. There are five Material Painter Modes. Each
mode specifies how broadly or narrowly the
From the Library Browser selected material will be applied to surfaces
in your plan. A check displays next to the
Materials can be applied directly from the active mode in the submenu.
library in 3D Views. Select a material from
the Library Browser and notice that the
pointer changes ( ) to indicate that the
selected material is ready to be applied to an
object using the Material Painter appli-
cation method.
Material Painter • The Material Painter Component

Classroom Design Project Training Mode is the default mode. This
Video: Changing Materials in 3D Views applies the selected material to an object
component. Using this tool is the same as
Select 3D> Materials> Material opening an object for specification and
Painter to apply materials to surfaces changing the material for one of its com-
in 3D views. ponents on the Materials tab. See “Mate-
rials Tab” on page 710.
708
Viewing Materials
plan, applying a selected material while

• The Material Painter Object Mode
this mode is active will change all carpet
applies a material to all components of an
on all floors.
object.
• The Material Painter Room Mode When you apply a material to a wall
using the Material Painter, the material
applies a material to all the objects in the
is applied to the entire room - not the individ-
room that currently have the same mate- ual wall. This rule applies to exterior wall sur-
rial. For example, if you apply a material faces, as well. See “The Exterior Room” on
to a dining room chair, this mode applies page 284.
the material to all other objects in the
room with the same original material, Material Eyedropper
such as other chairs and the dining table.
The Material Eyedropper tool allows
• The Material Painter Floor Mode you to load the material assigned to an
applies the selected material to all sur- existing object and apply that material to
faces on the floor that currently have the other objects.
same material. For example, if you apply
In a 3D view, select 3D> Materials> Mate-
a material to the kitchen countertops
using this mode, the bathroom counter- rial Eyedropper and then click on the
tops on the same floor also have the surface of an object to load its material
material applied.
assignment. The pointer then changes ( )
• The Material Painter Plan Mode to indicate that the material is ready to be
applies the selected material to all sur- applied to another object using the Material
faces in the entire plan that currently have Painter tool. You can continue to apply
the same material. For example, if you
Materials
the material to the surfaces of other objects.
have the same carpet on all floors in a
Viewing Materials
Textures do not display in Vector Views. See
“Vector View Tools” on page 734. Textures
do display in Render Views and Raytrace
views. See “Render View Tools” on page
764.
If you recieve an error message when
creating render views, your plan might To resolve this, find the original texture file
contain two textures of the same name or named in the error message and copy it
textures that did not originally come with the (while recreating its path) into the “Old
program. Textures” folder. The next time Chief
709
Architect is opened, it will find the missing

file and correctly show the texture.
Materials Tab
The specification dialogs for most objects where materials are assigned to the selected
include a Materials tab. The Materials tab is object and components.
The Materials tab shown above is used to

1 Select a component in the tree to assign
assign materials to an object. The tree on the a new material to it.
left lists the components of the selected
object that can be assigned materials. Some 2 The two boxes on the right display the
color, pattern and the texture of the
objects may only have a single component
material that has been assigned to the
while more complex objects may have many.
selected component. If “No Texture”
Some components contain additional sub- displays in the preview window, either the
components. The contained items display material has no texture assigned or the
separately in the components tree. texture file could not be found on the system.
710
Editing Materials
Click Plan Material to open the Plan

3 Click Library Material to open the
Select Library Object dialog. Material dialog and select a material from
Select a material and click OK to assign that those already used in your plan. See
material to the selected component. See “Managing Plan Materials” on page 706.
“Select Library Object Dialog” on page 679.
Select OK to close the dialog and return to
the active view.
Editing Materials
If you cannot find a material that suits your Adjust Material Definition
needs, you can create a new material or edit
an existing one. Applying a different material This tool is useful for changing plan
to an object is not the same as editing an materials directly from a 3D view.
existing material. See “Applying Materials” Click the Adjust Material Definition
on page 708. button and then click any surface in a 3D
or render view to modify the material cur-
When a material is applied to an object in a
rently assigned to that surface in the Define
plan from the library, a copy of that material
Material dialog. Changing the material def-
is made and saved with the plan. If you
inition with this tool affects all objects in the
access the Define Material dialog through
current plan that are using that material.
a menu or object specification dialog, your
edits affect that material wherever it is found
within that plan. Other objects in that plan Library Browser
that use that material are also affected, but Select a material from an unlocked library in
objects outside the current plan are not.
Materials
the directory view of the Library Browser
and select Library> Open to open the
Plan Materials Define Material dialog for that material.
You can also right-click a material in the
Click the Plan Materials button to open Library Browser and select Open from the
the Plan Material dialog for the current contextual menu to open the Define
plan. Select a material and click the Edit, Material dialog.
Copy, or New button to open the Define
Material dialog. You can add a newly
defined material to the library from the Plan
Material dialog by selecting it and clicking
the Add to Library button. See “Plan
Materials Dialog” on page 707.
711
Using the contextual menu
Define Material Dialog

Select a material from the Plan Materials You can also create a new material from
dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy to open scratch by selecting 3D> Materials> Create
the Define Material dialog for that
Material... .
material. The Define Material dialog can
also be accessed by right-clicking on any If you select a manufacturer’s material, the
material located in an unlocked library in the Define Material dialog displays
Library Browser and selecting Open... from differently. Some options are not available
the contextual menu or Library> Open.... and the tabs may vary.
712
General Tab
1
6
2
3
4 7
The information on the General tab varies views. See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page
from one material to the next. 722.
1 The name of the material displays here. 4 Shading Contrast - Use the slider bar
Materials
In this field you can redefine the name or text field to specify the amount of
of the material. If you rename the material, it contrast between surfaces at different angles
does not create a new material; it redefines to each other in 3D views. The farther to the
the existing material. right the slide bar is set or higher the contrast
value, the more contrast you see. This setting
2 Material Color - The current color of has no effect on render views.
the material. This color displays in 3D
views and in render views if no texture has The following is a picture showing the same
been selected. Click the color box to open the curved wall view with three different
Windows Color dialog and select a new contrasts (combined using a separate
color. See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page graphics program). Notice how the lowest
722. contrast at the top appears almost flat, while
the highest contrast on the bottom is sharp.
3 Line Color - The color of the pattern
lines displays here. Click in the box to
open the Color dialog and to select a new
line color. Lines are only used with patterns
in vector views and are not used in render
713
Length - Define a length dimension for the

pattern. This value typically refers to the
Low Contrast Pattern across the screen view.
Thickness - Specify a thickness for a
material such as Tile. This information does
Normal not typically effect the display of the material
Contrast but is used for material list calculations.
Depth - Specify a depth for the material such
as brick. This information does not typically
effect the display of the material but is used
High
Contrast for material list calculations.
Size - Some patterns are defined by relative
size. Enter a number here. The number does
not have any units, it is more like a scaling
factor.
Joint Width - Enter a value for joint width
5 This area displays a preview of how the between pieces of the material. This does not
material looks in vector views. It draw the joint any wider, but the information
updates as you change the material is used by the program when counting pieces
definition. of tile or brick.
6 Type - This is the list of material types Mortar Width - Enter a value for the mortar
defined by the program. Some types are joints in a brick or block pattern. This does
associated with patterns. A Type defines not draw the mortar any wider, but the
how a material is calculated in the Material information is used by the program when
List. See “Types” on page 715. counting pieces of bricks or block.
7 Depending on the Type selected, Overlap amt - Enter the amount the material
several additional edit boxes may overlaps itself, such as lap siding.
display in the dialog.
Note: the Height - Overlap Amount =
Height - Define a height dimension for the Exposure of the material.
material. This value may be restricted to a
ratio of another dimension. When applied to Pattern Angle - Certain patterns may be
a strip or siding pattern, this number rotated to a different orientation.
represents the width of the material. Line Weight - Specify the desired line
Note: the Height - Overlap Amount = weight for pattern lines in vector views.
Exposure of the material. Grouping - With a Strip type, grouping is
used to describe the repeat of the pattern
across the width of the material. i.e. A 13"
wide siding with an overlap amount of 1"
714
and a grouping of 3 calculates materials covered. Overlap is subtracted from the

based on a 12" coverage and a repeat line height to get the exposure of the material.
pattern of 4". Grouping can be used to model a material
that has a repeating pattern across its width.
DXF Code - This field holds up to five
characters that appear at the end of the layer Sheet - Sheets do not show a pattern. If a
names used when exporting a 3D DXF file. sheet material is applied to a wall or floor
surface, the Material List calculates the
Types number of sheets needed. If a sheet material
is applied to a library object such as chair, the
Every material is classified by Type. The Material List does not calculate it.
Type defines how the material is calculated
in the Material List. Some Types are Gap - This does not show a pattern. Specify
associated with patterns but not every Type is gap to a material to create an Air Gap
associated with a 3D pattern. Not every Type between materials as in the case of a wall
is calculated in the Material List. layer definition. This would be the same as
defining no material at all. This does not go
Following are the available Types and their to the Material List.
characteristics:
Area - This does not generate a pattern. The
Framing - These types are used by the Material List calculates surface area. In the
program to estimate stick framing quantities case of walls it is the area of the vertical
if they are applied to the main layer of a wall surfaces.
layer definition.
Volume - This does not generate a pattern.
Brick - Displays a typical brick course The Material List calculates cubic feet.
pattern. The height and length of the brick
can be specified. This can be specified for Concrete - This does not generate a pattern.
Materials
anything using this type of layout, including The Material List calculates cubic yards or
plywood with staggered joints. The Material cubic meters. When you apply this to a floor
List calculates the number of bricks (by platform, the thickness is defined as four
height and length) that fit on the total surface inches, by default.
area of the defined object. For a wall, the Tile - This produces a grid-like tile pattern.
surface area is used. For a full masonry wall The Material List calculates the number of
with two layers of brick, be sure to define the units based on the total surface area, exactly
wall as having two layers to get the right as for bricks.
count. You can define the mortar width that
enables the program to do an accurate count Shingles - This produces a pattern similar to
of bricks. the brick pattern, but you are able to define
an overlap amount. The Material List
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D calculates the number of shingles required to
views. The height, separation of the lines, cover the surface area.
and the angle can be specified. The Material
List calculates lineal footage based on the
height of the strip and the surface area
715
Flooring - This does not produce a pattern. Parquet - This produces a parquet wood
The Material List calculates the total surface floor pattern of small squares. The Material
area. List calculates the required number of
parquet units.
Shakes - This produces a pattern to represent
wood shingles. The Material List calculates Textured - This produces a pattern similar to
the number of shingles required to cover the stucco. The density or frequency of the dots
surface area. is definable. The Material List does not
calculate this material Type.
Herringbone - This produces a herringbone
pattern. Height and width are restricted to a Earth - This produces a 2D hatch that
2:1 ratio. The Material List calculates the represents earth in cross section view. The
number of units required to cover the surface Material List does not calculate this material
area. Type.
Octagon - This produces a “tile” pattern of Stars - This produces a star pattern. The
octagons and small squares. The size Material List does not calculate this material
specified is the size of the small squares Type.
between the octagons. The octagon resizes
Custom - If you select a pattern type from a
proportionally. The Material List calculates
PAT file, the material is automatically
the number of square and octagonal tiles
defined as Custom regardless of the pattern
required to complete the pattern.
style. Custom materials are calculated in the
Hexagon - This produces a hexagon pattern. Materials List as area.
The Material List calculates the number of
units required to cover the area of the object.
716
Pattern Tab
4
5
6
7
2D surface patterns can be used as a visual Material List. If a .pat file is defined, the
tool in vector views. When a cross section/ pattern type is listed as Custom.
elevation view or overview is generated, the
pattern helps define what material is used. 4 Pattern File - The name of the current
Patterns that are associated with Types are pattern file is shown here.
Materials
used by the program to generate accurate Click Browse to select a Pattern File that has
take-off quantities for the Material List. not been defined by Chief Architect. Pattern
Patterns are not used in render views. files (files with a .pat extension) can come
from a variety of sources and can be saved on
1 The name of the material displays in your hard drive. Once you have selected a
this field.
pattern file, use the Entries drop-down list to
2 This is a preview of the material as it pick a hatch pattern from the file.
appears in a vector view. The pattern is
not used in render views. The preview 5 Entries - Pattern files are text files that
updates as changes are made. define more than one hatch pattern.
Individual patterns are defined with names
3 Pattern Type - Select a Chief Architect that appear in the Entries list. Use the drop-
pattern from the pull down list. The down list to select an entry from the pattern
Pattern Type defines how the material is file. The selected pattern displays in the
calculated in the Material List. Only Chief preview window.
Architect Pattern Types are figured in the
717
6 Scale - Rescale the pattern if necessary. 7 Origin - Enter coordinates to specify

If the pattern displays as black, the where the pattern begins in vector
pattern repeats too often and the number in views. See “Mapping Patterns and Textures”
this field should be increased. on page 705.
Texture Tab
3
4
5
6
7
Textures applied to materials affect how a Click the Browse button to select a texture
material appears in render view. for the material. This accesses the Textures
Transparency information contained on the folder.
alpha channel of a texture is used in render
view. Textures do not show up in any other 4 Ratio - Adjust the ratio or scaling of the
selected texture. The values are in
3D view and do not affect the Material List.
inches (or mm).
1 The name of the selected material In this example, the bitmap shown is mapped
displays, and can be renamed here if
to a 48” x 48” area.
desired. Renaming a material does not create
a new material; it just changes the name of an If the surface rendered is larger than this
existing material. ratio, the surface has “tiles” that are 48” x
48” of the assigned bitmap. If it is smaller,
2 The selected texture displays here. only a portion of the texture is shown.
3 Texture File - Displays the path and
file name of the selected texture.
718
Select the Stretch to Fit check box to stretch

5 Set a new Origin, if needed, so the
the texture image to cover each surface it is texture displays correctly on surfaces in
applied to. render views. See “Mapping Patterns and
Textures” on page 705.
Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch
to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if 6 Rotate Angle - Specify how the texture
they are mapped to a surface using a differ- is rotated on the surface.
ent aspect ratio than they were originally cre-
ated with. 7 Set Color Using Texture - Selects a
color to represent the material in vector
views. The program averages the color of all
pixels.
Render Tab
1
2
3
4
5
Materials
The Render tab controls how the material
2 Use the radio buttons to select the
displays in render views. The preview Simple or Advanced editing options.
window displays the material as it is The Simple options display on this tab and
rendered on a panel that is approximately 3’ the Advanced options, below.
x 6’. As any of the render properties are
changed, the preview updates to show how 3 Brightness - Controls how bright the
material appears. It can be used to get
the new material looks in a render view.
the desired appearance relative to other
1 The name of the material displays here. materials.
719
4 Shininess - Controls the sheen of the 5 Transparency - Controls the opacity of

material when it is rendered with a the material. Most materials are set to
point or spot light source on it. Shiny Opaque, but Partial can be used to simulate a
materials appear to have a bright white spot glass surface that you can see through.
that simulates reflection of light.
Render Tab - Advanced
1
2
3
4
5
6
Advanced options provide more control over The Specular and Shininess settings are used
the appearance of the rendered material. If together to modify a material’s shininess.
you change any Advanced value, the Ren-
der tab displays the Advanced options when 3 Specular - Controls how bright the
material appears when illuminated by a
you edit that material. You can always
positional light source. It simulates the
change back to the Simple settings.
reflection of light off a surface.
You can adjust settings using the slide bar, or
by entering a value in the edit box. 4 Shininess - Controls how shiny the
surface appears when illuminated by a
The Ambient and Diffuse settings are used positional light source. It must be used
together to modify a material’s brightness. together with the specular value to simulate
light being reflected from a surface. Adjust
1 Ambient - Controls how bright the the shininess value to control the size of the
material appears when only ambient
reflected highlight on a surface.
light is present.
5 Emissive - Controls how bright a
2 Diffuse - Controls how bright the material appears without regard to the
material appears when illuminated by a
lighting of the current scene. It can be used to
light source.
simulate surfaces that are glowing with their
own light, such as the glass on a light fixture.
720
Material Defaults Dialog
6 Transp - Controls the transparency Raytrace Tab

range from completely opaque to
completely transparent. For information about the Raytrace tab, see
“Raytrace Tab” on page 791.
You should note that the material Render
Properties are dependent on the Render Manufacturer Tab
settings in the Preferences dialog and the
lights that have been placed in the model. If you select a manufacturer’s material from
a locked library, the Manufactuer’s tab is
To get proper lighting effects on an object, available in the Define Material dialog.
use at least one point or spot light. For these
highlights to appear on large flat surfaces, This tab lists information on the
select the Use Triangles option on the Ren- manufacturer and how to contact them.
der panel of the Preferences dialog.
Material Defaults Dialog

Default Settings are accessed by dialogs of objects throughout the program.
selecting Edit> Default Settings .
Expand the Materials category in the tree Select an item from the list on the left. Click
view, select General Materials, and click the Library Material button or either of the
the Edit... button to display the Material preview boxes to open the Select Library
Defaults dialog. Object dialog, or click the Plan Material
button to open the Plan Material dialog.
Not every object has default materials
Materials
defined before being placed in a plan. For
example, stairs do not have a default setup
and so do not have default materials. Specify
the materials for the stair components in the
Material Defaults dialog.
Once you create a stairway, you can open the
Stair Specification dialog and change its
materials.
This dialog functions similarly to the

Material tabs found on the specification
721
Color Chooser Dialog

Introductory Training Video: Color The Color Chooser dialog is opened by
Chooser
selecting Tools> Color Chooser or by
clicking on the color bar that can be found in
many dialogs throughout the program.
3
4
1
5
2 6
1 Click in any one of the Base colors 5 Drag the Color Chooser eyedropper to
boxes to select it as the new color. locate the color and release the mouse
button to select it.
2 Click in one of the Custom colors
boxes to define which box will contain
6 Click Create Material to add the color
the new custom color to be defined. to the library under My Materials. The
name “Custom Color” is followed by the
3 Click and drag in the color palette area RGB values of the color.
to dynamically choose a color.
7 Click Add to Custom Colors to add
4 Adjust the lightness or darkness of the the color to the Custom Colors palette.
selected color.
722
Chapter 26:
Zoom & View Tools
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Navigat- Chapter Contents
ing in 2D • Zoom Tools
Use the Zoom tools to position the view. To • Undo Zoom
work on a specific area, you may need to • Fill Window
zoom in so that the entire screen is filled by • Panning the Display
only a single room. At other times you may • Window Menu Tools
need to view the entire plan. • Cascade
• Tiling Views
There are also a number of ways to pan • Arrange Icons
across the screen, shifting the visible part of • Swapping Views
the plan slightly while still maintaining the • Aerial View
same zoom factor. • Closing Views
Multiple views of one or more open files can
be arranged and managed using the view
Zoom
Tools
tools.
Zoom Tools
Zoom is used to magnify any given you release the mouse, the selected area
area on the plan or 3D view. Select expands to fill the screen. When the zoom is
complete, whatever tool was active prior to
Window> Zoom , then click and drag a
marquee around an area on screen. When selecting the Zoom tool automatically
723
becomes active again. If another zoom is Pan Window - Move the display with-
out changing the zoom factor.
needed, click the Zoom tool again.
Zoom In - Click to zoom in to the Zooming With the
screen center by a factor of two. Mouse Wheel
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and
the screen center by a factor of two. out in plan and 3D views. Scrolling
Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom the mouse wheel one click up or
operation. down zooms in or out, centering on the
location of your pointer and changing the
Fill Window - Fits all visible items on zoom by about 10%.
screen.
Fill Window Building Only - Fits all Note: Depending on the configuration of your
mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the
visible items, except the terrain perim-
Ctrl key while turning the mouse wheel. If
eter, on screen. zooming in and out are not working correctly,
then please contact the manufacturer of your
mouse and mouse driver for their assistance.
Undo Zoom
Select Window> Undo Zoom to
Zoom and Undo Zoom are also
reverse the last zoom operation.
available through the contextual menu.
Note: Undo and Redo do not affect zoom.
Fill Window
Select Window> Fill Window or press When the drawing sheet is shown, Fill
the F6 key to view everything on
Window zooms to the sheet borders.
screen that is visible. If you are zoomed in so
close that only a portion of the view displays
Fill Window Building Only
on screen, selecting Fill Window zooms
out so that the entire view fits on the screen. Window> Fill Window Building
If you are zoomed out so far that the entire Only is similar to Fill Window, but
view is smaller than the screen, selecting zooms in or out to fill the current window
with the entire building while ignoring the
Fill Window zooms in until the entire
view fills the screen.
724
Panning the Display
terrain perimeter. Fill Window Building

Only zooms to the edges of the drawing
sheet if it is shown.
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display arrows on the scroll bar. They shift the
without changing the zoom factor. display according to the number of inches
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Using the Scroll Bars
Using the Mouse
One method is to use the scroll bars on the
right and bottom edges of the window. If you have a wheel mouse, you can pan the
display by pressing the middle mouse button,
or wheel, and moving the mouse in the
direction you would like to pan.
Mouse drivers sometimes have other
functions assigned to the wheel and buttons.
These override the Chief Architect setting.
• Drag the square button in the bar itself in

Using the Pan Window Tool
order to pan a larger distance.
The Pan Window tool works much like
• Click the end arrow keys on the scroll the mouse wheel method.
bars to shift the display in 12" incre-
ments. • Select Window> Pan Window The
• The 12" increment is defined in the Plan pointer changes to a hand icon. Click
Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled and drag in floor plan view to pan the
by Arrow Key. See “Plan Defaults” on window. The command is invoked once
page 180. and the program reverts to the previously
Zoom
Tools
active tool.
Using the Arrow Keys
• Double click the Pan Window tool
In floor plan view, the arrow keys on the and the command remains active.
keyboard work exactly like clicking the
Window Menu Tools

Classroom Design Project Training Select Window to access the Window
Video: Displaying Multiple Views tools.
725
minimized. See “Arrange Icons” on page

Note: The Window Menu Tool button does 728.
not display on the toolbar by default but it
can be added. See “Toolbar Customiza- Click Window> Next Window to
tion Dialog” on page 18. switch to the next open view. See “Swapping
Click Window> Cascade to cascade all Select Window> Previous Window to

open views. See “Cascade” on page 726. switch to the previous open view. See
“Swapping Views” on page 729.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally or
Click Window> Aerial View to open
Tile Vertically to tile all open views. See
the aerial view window. See “Aerial View”
“Tiling Views” on page 727.
on page 729.
Choose Window> Arrange Icons to
arrange all open views that are currently
Cascade
Select Window> Cascade to cascade
all open views. Click any visible edge
to activate that window.
726
Tiling Views
Tiling Views
Introductory Training Video: Tiling 2D you make are reflected in the camera view as
and 3D Views well.
The window tiling options allow you to To end window tiling, click the Maximize
display multiple views side by side in the button in the upper right corner of any open
Client Viewer window. view.
Select Window> Tile Vertically or press
Zoom
Tools
Shift + F6 on the keyboard to display both
views in a vertical orientation.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally to

display both views in a horizontal
orientation.
To activate a view, click the title bar or
anywhere in the view. Note that any changes
727
Tiling is useful for copying objects, details,

click the Copy edit button, activate
or architectural symbols from one plan to
another view, and select Paste or Ctrl + V.
another. Select the object(s) to be copied,
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons is a Windows function bars in a row at the bottom of the working
used when several active windows desktop. You can then click the minimized
have been minimized. Select Window> title bars to reactivate them or use them for
Arrange Icons to align the minimized title swapping and closing views.
728
Swapping Views
Swapping Views
There are several ways to swap views.
• Select Window> Next Window or
• The Swap Views button toggles Window> Previous Window to
between the current view and the view cycle through all open views in the order
that was current before it. you prefer.
• Select Window> Swap Views or • A list of all the views currently open is
press F7 to switch between the two most located at the bottom of the Window
recent views. menu. Each view is identified by its name
and what type of view it is. Select one to
• Press the Ctrl + Tab keys to cycle through
Zoom
Tools
go directly to that view.
all open views.
Aerial View
Classroom Design Project Training In floor plan view, select Window>
Video: Zooming, Panning and Using Aerial View to open the Aerial View
the Aerial View window.
729
Aerial View facilitates zooming and panning As you pan around the floor plan view
of the floor plan view window by showing window or zoom in or out, the marquee in
everything on the current floor and a Aerial View moves and resizes to reflect
marquee indicating the portion currently these changes.
visible in the floor plan view window.
The grey border that displays in the aerial view window represents the extent of the floor plan view.
The Aerial View window is initially docked • The aerial view window can be moved
on the right side of the window, but it can be and resized.
moved to any other edge or allowed to float • The grey marquee that displays in the
while pressing the Ctrl key. The Aerial View aerial view window represents the extent
always displays the entire plan, so it has no of the floor plan view. The grey marquee
scroll bars or maximize button. It always updates if you zoom or pan in floor plan
maintains it’s position on top of other view.
windows.
730
Closing Views
• Use the left mouse button to drag a new • The display of objects in the aerial view
marquee within the aerial view window. is controlled by the default layer set for
The floor plan view updates to match. aerial views. Since the primary purpose
• Use the right mouse button to pan the of aerial views is to enhance navigation
existing marquee within the aerial view of plan views, you may want to turn off
window. The floor plan view updates to any layers that clutter and slow down the
match. aerial view window. See “Layer Set
Defaults Dialog” on page 225. To change
• No matter what tool is active, when you the display of objects in this layer set, see
move the pointer to the aerial view win- “Layer Sets” on page 216.
dow and drag a marquee, the floor plan
view zooms in on that area.
Closing Views
Select File> Close or click the at the top view is still needed, swap to a different view
right corner of a window to close it. If the without closing the current views.
731
732
Chapter 27:
Vector Views
Chapter Overview
A vector is a line, which is the fundamental Chapter Contents
component of all vector views. Instead of • Defaults and Preferences
displaying textures and images on the • Vector View Tools
surfaces of objects, as in render views, vector • 3D Tools
views display patterns and solid colors. This • Creating Camera Views
makes them ideal for use in layout drawings • Moving a Camera in 3D Views
and high resolution printing. • Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View
Render views are similar to vector views, but • Creating Overviews
are much more photo-realistic. They are • Displaying Vector Views
covered in their own chapter, “Render • Speeding up 3D View Generation
Views” on page 763. • Editing Objects in 3D Views
• Delete 3D Surface
From the 3D model, you can define and • Saving 3D Views
create cross section/elevation views that • Walkthroughs
detail the structure of the model. Cross • Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views
section/elevation views can be saved and the • Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views
program updates them as the model is edited. • Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras
The automatic updating of cross section/ • Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views
elevation views can save time when your • Camera Specification Dialog
drawings have been sent to layout. • Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Vector
Views
Specification
• Camera Defaults Dialog
• 3D Settings Dialog
733

Camera positioning, field of view and Ambient lighting settings, 3D
related initial settings for render and backdrop information, and other
vector cameras are specified in the Camera settings that affect render views as they are
Defaults dialog. See “Camera Defaults generated are found in the 3D Settings
Dialog” on page 755. dialog. See “3D Settings Dialog” on page
757.
Vector View Tools

Select 3D> Create Vector View to rotated, raised, lowered or have their line of
display the Vector View Tools. sight adjusted. The default camera height,
angle and move increment are defined in the
Camera Views Camera Defaults dialog. See “Creating
Camera Views” on page 736.
The Vector Full Camera tool creates a
multi-floor view of the 3D model. It
Overviews
can be used to create both interior and
exterior perspectives. The Vector Full The Vector Full Overview creates an
Camera is a good tool for displaying isometric drawing of the entire model,
cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell including all floors, ceilings, and the roof.
openings, or any other variation in floor and All surfaces such as roofs, walls, and ceilings
ceiling levels. can be removed from the view in order to see
into the model. See “3D Tools” on page 735.
The Vector Floor Camera creates a
vector view of the current floor only. The Vector Floor Overview creates an
This view does not show anything above the isometric drawing of the current floor
ceiling or below the floor. It is faster to without a roof or ceiling. All lines are in true
generate than a vector full camera view, length but the drawing cannot be scaled.
because less of the model is calculated.
The Framing Overview creates an
Check Restrict Camera to Room in the 3D
isometric drawing of the framing in the
Settings dialog to limit the view to the
model. Framing must be built before
current room. See “3D Settings Dialog” on
generating a framing overview. Framing
page 757.
overviews include all floors, walls, roof
Vector camera views can be changed to framing and foundations. Overviews can be
Render Camera views. See “Render rotated and viewed from any angle.
Current Vector View” on page 765. Overviews can be printed directly, sent to
Both the Vector Full Camera and the layout, or sent to a CAD detail. As a CAD
Vector Floor Camera can be moved, detail, the lines defining any part of the view
734
3D Tools
can be edited. See “Creating Overviews” on The Backclipped Cross Section tool
page 741. includes only the objects between the
starting point and stopping point of the cross
Cross Section/Elevation Views section line.
Cross Section/Elevation views are the The Wall Elevation tool creates a
traditional, orthogonal views often used in single floor, single room elevation. It
drafting. creates a 2D projection of a vertical face,
such as a wall, and the objects between the
A Cross Section/Elevation view wall and the camera. It is used primarily for
displays all floors of the model. It can applications such as kitchen elevations or
be used to create both interior and exterior bath elevations. It does not cut through walls
elevation views. If the view is created or show the ceiling, flooring, or roof. The
outside the structure looking toward it, the view can be taken at any angle to the wall(s).
result is an exterior elevation. If the view is
created inside the structure, or passes See “Creating Cross Section/Elevation
through any of the structure, a cross section Views” on page 749.
is created.
3D Tools
A variety of tools are available in 3D views Select 3D> Edit Active Camera to
that allow you to edit your 3D model, the edit properties of the current camera,
camera, and the appearance of the view. You such as field of view. See “Camera
can also export, print and send 3D views to Specification Dialog” on page 753.
layout.
Select 3D> Move Camera with
Choose from the Mouse to access the Move Camera
architectural tool with Mouse Tools. See “Move Camera with
buttons that allow placement of Cabinets, Mouse Tools” on page 738.
Doors, Electrical Objects, Windows,
Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Fireplaces, and Corner Trim in 3D views.
Keys to specify how the arrow keys affect
Select 3D> Create Render View> the active camera. See “Move Camera with
Render Current Vector View to in a Arrow Keys” on page 738.
vector view to generate a render view of the
Select 3D> Move Camera to access
scene. See “Render Views” on page 763.
the Move Camera Tools. See “Move
Select 3D> Save Active Camera to Camera Tools” on page 739. Vector
save the current camera in the plan. Views
Select 3D> Orbit Camera to access
Saved cameras can be re-opened for later
the Orbit Camera Tools. See “Orbit
use. See “Saving 3D Views” on page 747.
Camera Tools” on page 739.
735
Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access the Select 3D> Remove 3D in plan view to
Tilt Camera Tools. See “Tilt Camera remove all 3D views associated with
Tools” on page 739. the plan file. See “Remove 3D” on page 748.
Select 3D> Overview Direction Tools Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the
to access the Overview Direction entire 3D model. See “Rebuild 3D” on
Tools. See “Overview Direction Tools” on page 748
page 744.
Select 3D> 3D Settings to open the 3D
Select 3D> Walkthroughs to record or Settings dialog. See “3D Settings
play a walkthrough. See Dialog” on page 757.
“Walkthroughs” on page 904.
Select Tools> Display Settings>
Select 3D> Materials to create, edit Color On/Off to control the display of
and apply materials to surfaces in the color in all views except render views. See
plan. See “Materials” on page 703. “Color On/Off” on page 743.
In a render view, select 3D> Lighting Select Edit> Snap Settings> Grid
to add or adjust the settings of light Snaps to toggle grid snaps on or off for
sources in the plan. See “Light Types” on greater precision when editing in 3D views.
page 773.
Select File> Export> Picture to save
In a render view, select 3D> Render the current screen image as an image
View Options to change the display file. See “Exporting Picture Files” on page
properties of the view. See “Rendering 892.
Select File> Print> Print Image to
Select 3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode print the current screen image. See
to switch between High- and Low- “Print Image Dialog” on page 967.
Detail display modes. Low-Detail allows
Select File> Send to Layout to send
quicker view drawing, editing and camera
the current view to layout. See
movements. See “Low Detail Display” on
“Sending Views to Layout” on page 975.
page 746.
Select 3D> Delete Surface, then click Press Ctrl + Alt + S while in a camera
on a surface in the view to temporarily view or overview to spin the view. Pres
remove the surface from the current view and Esc to stop the spinning.
reveal the surfaces behind it. See “Delete 3D
Surface” on page 747.
Creating Camera Views

Introductory Training Video: Camera What’s New In Version X1 Training
Views Video: Camera Views
736
Moving a Camera in 3D Views
Both the Vector Full Camera tool and 2. Click and drag a line to define the per-
spective.
the Vector Floor Camera tool are used • Where your line begins is the camera’s
in the same way. position.
• The line that you drag defines the
To create a vector camera view
direction the camera is pointed.
1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Create • The end of the line is the focal point of
the view, the point the camera rotates
Vector View> Vector Full Camera around.
or the Vector Floor Camera . The • By default, the field of view is 45
pointer changes to a camera ( ) with a degrees, which is similar to what the
crosshair marking the position of the human eye sees or a 50mm camera
pointer. lens.
3. When you release the mouse button, a
view generates in a new window.
Focal
Point 4. Click the Swap Views button to
(release) return to the floor plan view. A camera
symbol displays in floor plan view.
Line of
Sight
(drag)
FOV Indicators
Camera
(click)

Introductory Training Video: Navigat- Camera movement is controlled in
ing in 3D incremental steps using either the toolbar or
the keyboard. The distance the camera
The camera tools function similarly for both
moves is defined in the Camera Defaults
vector and render views. Once these views
Vector
dialog. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on Views
are created, there are many ways to
page 755. Each time you move the camera,
manipulate the camera location, focal point,
the view is updated. If you are using either
and line of site to adjust the view on-screen.
the toolbar or keyboard to move the camera,
737
and you have a large distance to move you down. It also allows you to turn the camera
can hold down the Shift key as you click a left and right in the same way. This tool is
button or hit the keys on the keyboard. This not availble in vector full overviews.
suppresses the redraw of the view until the
Click Mouse-Tilt Camera (or use the
Shift key is released.
hot key Alt + T) then move the mouse
The camera movement tools provide the to tilt the camera in any direction while
ability to pivot the camera in any direction, staying in the same location.This tool is not
move it orthogonally to the line of sight and availble in vector full overviews.
rotate the camera around its focal point.
3D Center Camera on Point - Allows
If you hold down the Shift keys while using you to focus the camera at a particular
any of these tools, screen refresh is point in the scene. This also sets the camera
suppressed. This means you can move center so that future use of the Mouse-Orbit
multiple increments quicker. tool rotates around that particular point. To
use the 3D Center tool, activate the tool and
Tile a 3D view and the floor plan view then click any object in the scene.This tool is
and use the camera movement tools to not availble in vector full overviews.
see how they effect the camera.
Move Camera with Arrow Keys

Move Camera with
Mouse Tools Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Keys to access these tools. These tools are
Select 3D> Move Camera With not available in Cross Section/Elevation,
Mouse to access the Move Camera Back Clipped Cross Section, or Wall
with Mouse modes. Elevation views.
Click Mouse-Orbit Camera (or use Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
the hot key Alt + O) then move the Keys> Arrow-Orbit Camera to rotate the
mouse to rotate the camera around the camera around the current focal point. Use
current camera focal point. You can also the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the
click in the render view, move the mouse, camera. This is the only arrow keys tool
and release the mouse button to “throw” the available in vector full overviews, vector
view. Click again in render view to stop the floor overviews, and framing overviews.
view from rotating. This tool is available in
all vector views. Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Keys> Arrow-Pan Camera to move the
Click Mouse-Pan Camera (or use the camera up, down, right, and left using the
hot key Alt + P) then move the mouse arrow keys. This tool is available for full
to move the camera up, down, left and right. camera overviews, and floor camera
Click Mouse-Dolly Camera (or use overviews.
the hot key Alt + D) then move the Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
mouse to move the camera forward and Keys> Arrow-Dolly Camera to move the
backward by moving the mouse up and camera forward and back using the up and
738
down arrow keys, and side to side using the Orbit Camera Tools
left and right arrow keys. This tool is
available for full camera overviews, and Select 3D> Orbit Camera to access
floor camera overviews. these tools. Orbiting the camera rotates
the camera about the focal point.
Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Keys> Arrow-Tilt Camera to use the arrow Move Camera In - Moves the position
keys to tilt the camera any direction at the of the camera closer to the focal point
same location.This tool is available for full along the line of sight. The camera does not
camera overviews, and floor camera rotate past the focal point using this tool. You
overviews. can also use the hot key I.
Move Camera Out - Moves the posi-
Move Camera Tools tion of the camera away from the focal
Select 3D> Move Camera to access point along the line of sight. You can also use
these tools. These tools relocate the the hot key O.
camera, while keeping the direction of the Orbit Camera Upward - Rotates the
field of view in the same place. camera up about the focal point. The
Move Camera Forward - Moves the camera does not rotate past the vertical line
camera and the focal point forward. going up from the focal point.
You can also use the hot key F.
Orbit Camera Downward - Rotates
Move Camera Back - Moves the cam- the camera down about the focal point.
era and the focal point back. You can The camera does not rotate below the vertical
also use the hot key B. line going down from the focal point.
Move Camera Left - Moves the cam- Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the cam-
era and the focal point to the left in a era to the left about the focal point.
line perpendicular to the line of sight. You
can also use the hot key L. Orbit Camera Right - Rotates the
camera to the right about the focal
Move Camera Right - Moves the point.
camera and the focal point to the right
in a line perpendicular to the line of Tilt Camera Tools
sight.You can also use the hot key R.
Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access
Move Camera Up - Moves the camera these tools. Tilting keeps the camera in
and the focal point up.You can also use one place and pivots the camera about its
the hot key U. vertical or horizontal axis. This movement is Vector
similar to tilting your head up and down or Views
Move Camera Down -Moves the cam- turning it side-to-side.
era and the focal point down. You can
also use the hot key D.
739
Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the cam- B - Move backward.

era up while keeping it in the same
U - Move up.
location. The camera does not tilt beyond the
vertical position. D - Move down.
Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the L - Move left.

camera down while keeping it in the R - Move right.
same location. The camera does not tilt
beyond the vertical position. I - Moves inward along the line of sight.
O - Move outward along the line of sight.

Tilt Camera Left - Turns the camera
to the left while staying in the same Left or Right Arrow - The program
location. remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are
Tilt Camera Right - Turns the camera in a view that does not support the mode you
to the right while staying in the same selected, the arrow keys move the screen
location. right or left.
Up or Down Arrow - The program
Keyboard Camera Movements remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Camera movement in vector views and Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are
render views can be controlled using the in a view that does not support the mode you
keyboard and the toolbars. selected, the arrow keys move the screen up
or down.
F - Move forward.
Field of View
The Field of View refers to a camera’s field A camera’s field of view can be adjusted in
of vision. A wider field of view makes the the Camera Specification dialog. See
focal point appear further away, as more of “Camera Specification Dialog” on page 753.
the image is included; however, it does not
The field of view can also be adjusted with
actually affect the camera’s position the way
the mouse wheel while in a camera view, if
zooming in or out does.
your mouse is equipped with one.
In floor plan view, the angled lines of a
camera symbol indicate its field of view.
Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View

Return to floor plan view without closing the
Objects tool, select the camera object.
vector view or render view. Using the Select
740
Creating Overviews
When a camera symbol is selected it displays • Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition
four edit handles. the camera, the focal point, and line of
sight.
• Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the cam-
Line of sight
era’s line of sight about its center.
The 3D view corresponding to the camera
Move symbol reflects changes made to the symbol
in floor plan view.
The position and movement of a camera is
Focal point affected by its location within the model.
When the camera is outside a building, its
Rotate height is relative to the terrain and follows
the terrain as it is moved. When inside a
• Drag the Line of Sight handle to change
building, the camera goes up and down stairs
the camera angle without moving the
automatically and bounces off walls.
focal point.
• Drag the Move handle to relocate the If the camera is on an upper floor and you
camera while maintaining its relative move the camera outside of the building, the
angle. camera remains at the same height relative to
the floor it was created on.
Creating Overviews
Introductory Training Video: Over- Full Overview
views
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Vec-
Classroom Design Project Training tor Full Overview to generate an
Video: Using the Vector and Render isometric drawing of the entire building. The
Overview Cameras overview begins to generate immediately.
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Vector
Floor Overview , Vector Full Overview
, or Vector Framing Overview to
automatically generate an overview in a new
window.
Overviews generate as soon as you select the
Vector
Views
tool and are always created at the same
angle. Once generated, the view angle can be
adjusted. See “Displaying Vector
Overviews” on page 743.
741
Floor Overview To see a different floor, return to floor plan

view and make the other floor current before
Select 3D> Create Vector View> Vec- generating the floor overview.
tor Floor Overview to create an
isometric drawing of the current floor with
Framing Overview
the ceiling removed.
Select 3D> Create Vector View>
Vector Floor Overview is an effective Vector Framing Overview to create
trouble-shooting tool, since it can isolate an isometric drawing of the entire building,
each floor for review. displaying only framing and foundation.
Framing must be built before generating this
view or the view is empty.
Displaying Vector Views

Up to four camera views and eight total 3D Layer Display Options
view windows can be open at any time. A
camera symbol displays in floor plan view Which objects display in a vector view
for each camera view that is open. The views is controlled in the Layer Display
are named and numbered sequentially in the Options dialog. Line weights can be
order they were created. The camera symbol displayed using the Show Line Weights
is an on-screen reference, and does not print. toggle button. Line weights can be specified
by layer. From a vector view select Tools>
Display Options to open the Layer
Note: An object does not show in 3D views if
it has been turned off in the Layer Display
Options dialog.
742
Displaying Vector Views
Enhanced Vector Views If Obey Color On/Off Setting is unchecked,

all lines appear in black and solid fills appear
Vector views can be drawn using Enhanced in either white or black, depending on the
Line Drawing , a setting located in the actual fill color when color is turned on. The
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance background remains as defined in the
Panel” on page 184. Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel” on
Enhanced vector views remove small gaps in page 186.
vector lines, which can be useful in cross To print in color, check Print in Color in the
section/elevations and other images that are Print dialog. The program remembers your
sent to layout. choice and checks it automatically on future
print jobs.
Color On/Off
Select Tools> Display Options> Displaying Materials
Color On/Off to control the display of in Vector Views
color in all views except render views. You
The pattern lineweight for a material can be
can set defaults to specify whether cross
set in the Define Material dialog. See
section/elevations, vector views, and vector
“Define Material Dialog” on page 712.
overviews are generated with colors turned
on in the Options tab of the 3D Settings There are a number of ways to change the
dialog. material on an object from a vector view. See
“Editing Materials” on page 711.
The display of colors may or may not make a
view easier to understand. Experiment to see
what works for you, then set your default in Displaying Vector
the 3D Settings dialog for each view. Overviews
Colors are used in vector views to represent Select 3D> View Direction Tools> View
the use of different materials. The colors can Angle to display the View Angle
be printed if you have a color printer, or can dialog. The dialog includes a picture of the
appear as shades of gray on a black and white exterior walls of the current floor as seen
printer. If you have assigned a picture file to from the current view angle. Select the check
represent the texture of a material in render boxes or move the slide bars to adjust the
views, the program can sample that picture view. The picture updates to show all the
file and define an approximate color to use in adjustments being made. When you are
all vector views. satisfied, click OK to have the isometric
Select Tools> Display Settings> Color Off drawing of the model adjusted to match.
to turn off color for the current window. With the View Angle tool, an isometric
Vector
By default, the view appears in gray scale as Views
drawing can be generated from any
long as Obey Color On/Off Setting is conceivable angle, from the Top (bird’s eye
checked in the Preferences dialog. See view) to an Elevation (straight on view) to
743
the Bottom (worm’s eye view), and View Angle Dialog

anywhere in between.
Overview Direction Tools 1

These tools are available in vector
overviews only. Access these tools by 2
selecting 3D> Overview Direction Tools. 3
View Angle - Click to open the View
Angle dialog.
4
Front View - Click for a front view of 5
the model.
Back View - Click for a back view of
the model.
6
Top View - Click for a top view of the
model.
Bottom View - Click for a bottom view
of the model.
1 Select the check boxes to view model
Left Side View - Click for a left side from Elevation, Top or Bottom.
view of the model.
2 Use the slide bar to adjust the height to
Right Side View - Click for a right view the model from.
side view of the model.
3 Use the slide bar to adjust how close the
Restore Original View - Click to view is to the model.
restore the original view position.
4 Use the slide bar to view the model
from a different direction.
5 Select the check boxes to view the

model from each side.
Note: An Elevation created by turning the

view is different from that created using the
Cross Section/Elevation camera. The
CAD tools are not accessible in this type of
view.
6 A simple preview showing only walls

displays here.
744
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Zooming in Vector Views Selecting Window> Zoom In , Zoom

The Zoom Tools are available for all Out or Fill Window does not
vector camera views and vector change the field of view, but does redraw the
overviews. view zoomed in or out, or adjusted as you
Although the Zoom Tools function normally want. You can use the Zoom tools to
in vector views, the results may be affected simulate Field of View settings.
by perspective distortion.
Speeding up 3D View Generation

Depending on the speed of your processor The default settings are reasonable for most
and the memory of your computer, a 3D view computers, but with some experimentation
should generate in a few seconds or less. you may find other settings that work well.
When you have a large, complex model with
a lot of interior detail, many objects, or hatch Suppress Objects in 3D Views
petterns with many lines, it may take a few
minutes to generate a vector view of The display of objects in 3D views can be
everything in the model. turned on or off by layer in the Layer
Display Options dialog. Turning off the
During this process, the information window display of unneeded objects can speed up 3D
in the toolbar indicates that surface sorting is view generation time.
occurring. There are several ways to speed
up the generation time of views. Each camera view and overview uses the
default layer set for Camera Views. Changes
made to this layer set in one view affect all
Change View Panel Factors
other views using that set. See “Layer Set
Vector views are drawn using an adaptive Management” on page 217.
method that saves time by dividing the
screen into horizontal and vertical panels. Halt Generation with Esc Key
The Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog
has two tuning factors that allow you to Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the
adjust the way the adaptive method works. modeling process at any point and display
the incomplete model “as is.” This is
The View Panel Factor 1 determines how particularly helpful when you just need to
many surfaces are drawn for each horizontal reorient a model on the screen for a specific
panel. Each horizontal panel is then angle or view.
subdivided into vertical panels - and View
The Esc option allows you to place the view
Vector
Panel Factor 2 determines how many Views
surfaces are contained in each vertical panel. quickly, then use Window> Refresh Display
to redraw the model with all 3D Faces intact.
You may use this option with elevation
745
views, vector views, render views and draws 3D approximations of some objects,
overviews. allowing for a quicker screen redraw time
and quicker camera movement.
Low Detail Display To draw all 3D views in Low Detail Mode by
Select 3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode default, check Start in Low Detail Mode on
to switch to and from Low Detail the Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog.
Mode. Low Detail suppresses patterns and See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 757.
Editing Objects in 3D Views

Objects can be created and edited in 3D that indicates the overall height and either the
views and floor plan view. width or depth of the object.
Normally, five handles display. The top and
Creating Objects in 3D Views bottom handles raise and lower the heights of
You can place windows, doors, cabinets, the object's top and bottom. Side handles
electrical objects, corner trim, and most move the object's sides in and out, changing
library objects directly into 3D views. To do its width or depth. The middle handle moves
this, select the appropriate tool from the the object horizontally or vertically, changing
toolbar and click in the 3D view. You can its position but not its size.
then edit the object’s size and placement. All moving or resizing is in the plane of the
The Build Framing and Build Roof handle surface. You cannot move an object
dialogs are also accessible in 3D views, directly towards or away from the camera; it
is restricted to the handle surface plane.
although the manual Framing Tools and
By default, movement is restricted to one
Roof Tools are not.
inch or 10 mm increments, but this
restriction can be set to custom increments in
Selecting Objects in 3D Views the Plan Defaults dialog and toggled off
Most objects can be selected and edited in and on using the Grid Snaps button.
3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled
and click the surface of an object. Edit
by holding down the Ctrl key while moving
handles that can be used to move and resize
the object display. Double-click the object or or resizing an object. Holding down he Ctrl
key also allows you move or resize the
click the Open Object edit button to object due to obstructions such as other
open the specification dialog for the object. objects.
When you select an object, handles and a If Furniture/Fixture Resize Enable is
handle surface display. The handle surface is cleared in the Plan Defaults dialog, only a
a rectangle around the perimeter of the object single handle displays for furniture and
746
Delete 3D Surface
stand-alone fixtures and appliances. In this display in the others. If you have major
case, the object can only be moved. changes to make to your plan, it is faster to
make them with as few windows as possible
Dimension lines are displayed to help you
open.
resize an object and determine its height.
These are more visible when the color is
turned off. Rebuild 3D
Due to movement restrictions, cross section/ As changes are made to your plan, a
elevation views are sometimes more suitable 3D view automatically updates to
for editing objects than vector views or reflect any changes visible in the view. If you
overviews. find that a view is not updating as expected,
select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the entire
When several floor plan views and 3D views 3D model.
are open, changes made in one automatically
Delete 3D Surface
The individual surface of an object can Hold the Alt key while clicking to delete one
be temporarily removed from any 3D triangular face at a time rather than all
view by selecting 3D> Delete Surface and adjacent surfaces. See “Render Panel” on
then clicking on a surface. page 211.
Surfaces removed in one view are removed Select 3D> Delete Surface or click the
in all 3D views, but are not permanently toolbar button to restore the most recently
removed from the model. Continue clicking deleted surface. All surfaces can be restored
surfaces to remove them, then select another by selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/
tool when you are finished.
Floors/Ceilings or by exiting the 3D
view and reopening it.
Saving 3D Views
All 3D views can be saved. Once a view is Saving 3D Views
saved, it is listed in the Project Browser and
can be named. If the view is a camera view Introductory Training Video: Saving
or cross section/elevation view, this name and Restoring Camera Views
appears as a label with the camera symbol in You can save any vector or render view
Vector
floor plan view. See “Project Browser” on either by opening the camera for Views
page 165. specification in floor plan view and clicking
the Save button in the Camera
Specification dialog, or by clicking the
747
Save Camera button or selecting 3D> Activating Views

Save Active Camera when the view is To activate a view
open.
• Select the camera symbol, open it for
specification, and click Activate in the
Saving Cross
Camera Specification dialog. (Cam-
Section/Elevation Views era views only)
If CAD objects have been added to a cross • Select the camera symbol and click the
section/elevation view, the program prompts
you to save the view before closing. Activate Camera edit button.
• Double-click the camera symbol in floor
To save a cross section/elevation view plan view.
• Click the Save Camera button from Note: If the symbols for your saved cameras
within the view to save it. do not display in floor plan view, make sure
that the Cameras, Inactive layer is checked
• Select a cross section/elevation camera in
in the Layer Display Options dialog,
floor plan view, click the Open Object then refresh the display. If the camera still
edit button to open the Camera does not show, it does not exist.
Specification dialog, and click the
Save button. Remove 3D
If a vector camera view, render camera view, Select 3D> Remove 3D from floor
or cross section/elevation view has not been plan view to close all 3D views
saved, it displays in floor plan view using the associated with the current plan file and
same color designated for moving objects. remove unsaved 3D data from memory.
See “Colors Panel” on page 186.
Any views saved with the plan are closed but
Cameras and views that have been saved not deleted.
display using the color specified for the
Cameras, Inactive layer in the Layer Rebuild 3D
Display Options dialog. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 218. Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate
all 3D data asociated with the current
plan. All open views will remain open.
Walkthroughs
Any vector camera view or overview can be are recorded as .avi files. See
used to record a walkthrough. Walkthroughs “Walkthroughs” on page 904.
748
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views

Introductory Training Video: Cross makes it easy to accurately see the spatial
Section/Elevation Views relationships of the 3D objects in the model.
Classroom Design Project Training Cross section/elevation and wall elevation
Video: Using the Cross-Section and views are accurate 2D elevations of the 3D
Elevation Cameras model. Although they display objects at
different depths from the camera, all lines in
the view are in the same plane when sent to
Video: Creating Updatable Cross Sec-
layout.
tions
Cross section/elevations and wall elevations
can be calculated at any allowed wall angle.
Video: Creating Fully Editable Cross
This makes it possible to create a true length
Sections
elevation of any wall, provided that the wall
The Cross Section/Elevation , Back- is on an allowed angle.
clipped Cross Section and Wall Cross Section/Elevations and wall elevations
have the editing capabilities found in other
Elevation tools produce the traditional, 3D views, and can be further enhanced with
orthogonal views often used in drafting. the CAD tools.
Lines and dimensions are true lengths, which
Cross Section/Elevation View
Wall Elevation View Vector

Views
views are created in the same way.
Cross Section/Elevation , Backclipped
Cross Section and Wall Elevation
749
To create a Cross Section/Elevation view 4. When you release the mouse button the
view generates in a new window.
1. Select 3D> Create Vector View> Cross
If a cross section line does not cut through a
Section/Elevation . The pointer 3D object and the object is within the back
changes to a with crosshairs marking clipped distance, such as a window shown in
the position of the pointer. elevation, the object retains its 3D definition.
3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched,
2. Click in the floor plan view at the spot
or otherwise modified in a cross section/
where the section is to be cut, or eleva-
elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
tion is to be viewed from.
all views.
3. Drag in the direction of the line of sight,
perpendicular to the cut line, and release Wall Elevations
the mouse button. The cut line is the line
that you would traditionally think of as Always drag the Wall Elevation camera
the section line in a floor plan drawing. perpendicular to the wall to be viewed. The
length of the line is not important.
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views

Introductory Training Video: Adding You can convert everything in a cross
Detail to Cross Section Views section/elevation view to CAD objects,
disassociating it from the 3D model
Cross section/elevation views are actual 2D
completely. This allows for the most editing
representations of the 3D model and are very
capabilities, but requires that all manual
versatile. Architectural objects in the model
work be redone if the 3D model changes and
can be edited directly from the view. See
the view needs updating.
“Editing Objects in 3D Views” on page 746.
If dimensions are set to locate an object, such
as cabinets or windows, these objects are Adding CAD to Cross Section/
located in cross section/elevation views, as Elevation Views
well. If the 3D model is edited in another The CAD text tools are accessible in cross
view, the cross section view updates. section/elevation views. Any CAD
CAD objects can be added to cross section/ information added to a cross section or
elevation views that save with the view. Any elevation view, including dimensions and
added objects need to be manually replaced, text, is stored in that view when it is saved.
but if the model changes and the view must Any added CAD objects are superimposed
be updated. Note that when editing CAD on the view and have no affect on the 3D
objects in a cross section/elevation, the 3D model itself. If CAD objects are added to a
model may obscure the CAD snapping grid. cross section/elevation view, the program
750
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views
asks you to save the window before closing • Wall Details - Add closed CAD
the view. polylines for each wall layer to a cross-
section or elevation view where the wall
Cross sections and elevations are the only 3D
intersects the viewing plane. The polyline
views that can have information added using
fill defaults to the fill specified in the
the 2D CAD tools. They can be fully
annotated and dimensioned and then printed
to scale. A cross section/elevation printed
directly from the view can be printed to • Insulation - Specify which wall layers in
multiple pages if the scale requires it. should display insulation fill when auto-
detailed. See “Wall Specification Dialog”
Auto-Detailing on page 259. Specify which rooms
should have insulation below the floor or
To save time, use the Auto-Detailing above the ceiling. See “Room Specifica-
tool to give you a head-start in tion Dialog” on page 296.
detailing your cross section/elevation view.
• Foundation Walls - Closed polylines are
The auto-detailer automatically creates CAD
created for foundation walls and footings
objects for commonly detailed aspects of a
view. To activate the auto-detailer, select • Slabs - Closed polylines with a concrete
pattern are created for slabs where the
CAD> Autodetail... . slab intersects the front clipping plane.
For more information on editing CAD
objects, including closed polylines, see
“Polylines” on page 863.
When the auto-detailing tool is used, CAD
objects are placed on the default CAD layer.
Using the auto-detailing tool twice results in
two copies of the same CAD objects.
CAD Detail From View

When you have finished modifying
your cross section view, use the CAD
Detail From View tool to generate a
CAD detail of the view. This converts all 3D
lines to CAD lines, and copies them with any
added items to a CAD Detail. This tool can
be used in any view except render or raytrace
Vector
Views
views. CAD details created from a view do
The auto-detailer creates CAD objects for the
not update when the model is changed. See
following:
“CAD Detail from View” on page 875.
751
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras

Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation , Wall Elevation , and
Backclipped Cross Section tools can be
edited with the CAD tools. If CAD objects
are added to a cross section/elevation view,
the program prompts you to save the view
before closing. Any CAD objects added to a
cross section/elevation view are saved with
the view as part of the plan file.
There are three ways to save a cross section/
There are four ways to open a saved cross
elevation camera view:
section/elevation view:
• In floor plan view, select the camera sym-
• Select the camera symbol in floor plan
bol, click the Open Object edit view and click the Activate Camera
button to display the Cross Section/ edit button.
Elevation Camera Specification
dialog, and click the Save Camera but- • Double-click the camera symbol using
ton. See “Cross Section/Elevation Cam- the Select Objects tool.
era Specification” on page 755.
• Select the camera symbol, open it to dis-
• From within the view, select 3D> Save play the Camera Specification dia-
Active Camera button. log, and click the Activate button.
• Close the cross section/elevation view. • Double-click the cross section/elevation
click Yes when prompted to save the view in the Project Browser. See “Project
view. Browser” on page 165.
Note: When a view is saved, its 2D symbol is

placed on the Cameras, Inactive layer in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page 218.
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views

The display of objects in cross section/ dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
elevation views is controlled in the 3D 221.
column of the Layer Display Options
To show framing in a cross section/elevation
view, framing must first be built in the Build
752
Camera Specification Dialog
Framing dialog. See “Framing” on page

469.
Camera Specification Dialog

The Camera Specification dialog is the camera symbol that represents the
accessible from Vector Full Camera , camera’s location and clicking the Open
and Render Camera views by selecting Object edit button to open the Camera
Specification dialog. If more than one
3D> Edit Camera . This dialog is also camera object is selected, they cannot be
accessible from floor plan view by selecting opened for specification.
1
5
2
The Camera Specification dialog

2 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces
applies to the selected camera view only. section determine the extent of the
Depending on the type of camera view in camera view.
use, not all the settings may be editable. In
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the
addition, some settings only affect some
camera does not display an object within this
types of views.
distance.
1 Camera Name - The camera name Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of
displays in floor plan view and is listed
walls within this distance of the camera.
in the Project Browser. See “Project
Vector
Views
Browser” on page 165. Both of these distances are measured as a
radius from the camera position.
753
Check Unless Opening to display a wall that The Incremental Move Distance controls
is inside the Remove Wall Within range if how many inches the camera moves each
the camera is pointing through an opening time you direct it to move right, left,
such as a door or window. forwards or backwards. For interior views a
small number is good, but for exterior you
Check Default for any value to use the
may want a larger increment.
default setting. See “Camera Defaults Dia-
log” on page 755. The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how
many degrees the camera rotates each time
3 Settings in the Plan Display section you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees
determine the camera’s display in floor
would make one full rotation in four moves.
plan view. For more information, see
“Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View” on The Height Above Floor defines the height
page 740. that the camera is above the floor level for
the current floor.
Check Show Field of View Indicators to
display the field of view indicator for The Field of View defines the camera’s field
cameras in floor plan view. You can also of vision in angular degrees.
change the FOV Indicator Length, which is The Tilt Angle determines the angle the
measured in plan inches. camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
Check Show Camera Focal Point to focal point and position in floor plan view,
display the camera’s focal point in floor plan but if the camera is tilted, the focal point is
view. above or below the current camera height.
The Camera Symbol Size is measured in Note: Tilt angles greater than +/- 10 degrees
plan inches. may produce unexpected results.
Check Default for any value to use the
default setting. See “Camera Defaults Dia- Specify the Camera Angle for the selected
log” on page 755. camera. This is an absolute value. Entering a
value of 90 degrees orients the camera to the
4 Click Save Camera to save this view top of the screen.
with the plan. The camera view can be
named and is listed in the Project Browser. Specify the X Position and Y Position for
See “Project Browser” on page 165. the selected camera. These are absolute
coordinates. Specifying zero for both places
5 Settings in the Positioning section the camera at the plans origin point (0,0).
determine the position and orientation
of the camera. Check Default for any value to use the
default setting. See “Camera Defaults Dia-
log” on page 755.
754
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification

The Cross Section/Elevation Camera in the Project Browser. See “Project
Specification dialog is accessible from Browser” on page 165.
Cross Section/Elevation , Wall Eleva-
2 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces
tion , and Backclipped Cross Section section determine the extent of the
camera view.
views. Select the camera symbol and
Back clip after - Enter the distance in inches
click the Open Object edit button. from camera to backclip plane. If zero, no
clipping occurs.
1 3 Settings in the Positioning section

determine the elevation of the camera.
2 • Specify the X Position of the camera in
absolute coordinates.
3 • Specify the Y Position of the camera in
4 4 Click Save Camera to save this view

with the plan. The camera view can be
named and is listed in the Project Browser.
See “Project Browser” on page 165.
1 Camera Name - The camera name
displays in floor plan view and is listed
Camera Defaults Dialog

Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings or by
double clicking the Render Tools button.
The settings in the Camera Defaults
dialog affect both vector and render cameras
and define how a camera clips and captures
views, how it displays in floor plan view,
how the camera is positioned, and how the
Vector
camera moves. Views
755
1 3
1 Settings in the Wall and Surfaces cameras in floor plan view. You can also
section determine the extent of the change the FOV Indicator Length, which is
camera view. measured in plan inches.
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the Check Show Camera Focal Point to
camera does not display an object within this display the camera’s focal point in floor plan
distance. view.
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of The Camera Symbol Size can be changed. It
walls within this distance of the camera. is measured in plan inches.
Both of these distances are measured as a You can change the Clip Plane Indicator
radius from the camera position. Length that displays in floor plan view for
Check Unless Opening to display a wall that Cross Section/Elevation Views,
is inside the Remove Wall Within range if Backclipped Cross Section Views, and
the camera is pointing through an opening
such as a door or window. Wall Elevation Views. The length is
measured in plan inches.
2 Settings in the Plan Display section
determine the camera’s display in floor
plan view. For more information about how a
camera displays in floor plan view, see
“Editing a Camera in Floor Plan View” on
page 740.
Check Show Field of View Indicators to
display the field of view indicator for Clip plane indicator in an elevation view
756
3D Settings Dialog
3 Settings in the Positioning section The Height Above Floor defines the height
determine the position and orientation that the camera is above the floor level for
of the camera. the current floor.
The Incremental Move Distance controls The Field of View defines the camera’s field
how many inches the camera moves each of vision in angular degrees.
time you direct it to move right, left,
The Tilt Angle determines the angle the
forwards or backwards. For interior views a
camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
small number is good, but for exterior you
focal point and position in floor plan view,
may want a larger increment.
but if the camera is tilted, the focal point is
The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how above or below the current camera height.
many degrees the camera rotates each time Leaving this default value at zero is
you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees recommended. Any tilt angles greater than +/
would make one full rotation in four moves. - 10 degrees may produce unexpected
results.
3D Settings Dialog
Select 3D> 3D Settings or double-
click the Vector View Tools button
to display the 3D Settings dialog.
Settings in the 3D Settings dialog are not
global: they are saved with each plan file.
Some settings affect render views, some
affect vector views, and some affect both
view types.
Vector
Views
757
Options Tab
1 2
3 4
5
1 The General Options affect both selected 3D backdrop. Use this option to
render and vector views. maximize computer resources or to mini-
• Start in Low Detail 3D Mode - Check mize file size when creating a single
this box to create any camera in Low room 3D Walkthrough.
Detail mode by default. See “Low Detail
Display” on page 746.
• Restrict Camera to Room only affects
subsequently generated floor camera
views. See “Vector View Tools” on page
734. Check this box to suppress the gen-
eration of objects beyond the room con-
taining the floor camera. If checked, the
view through a doorway into another
room shows only blank space or the
Unrestricted camera view.
758
3D Settings Dialog
2 The Render View Options affect

render views only. Click and drag the
slide bar or type in a percent value to adjust
these options. For more information, see
“Ambient Lights” on page 772.
3 The Vector View Options affect vector

views only.
• Check Opaque Glass From Outside to
make the glass in windows and doors
opaque when seen from outside the
“Restrict Camera to Room” is checked. house.
• Camera Bumps Off Walls - Uncheck • View Panel Factors adjust the perfor-
this box to allow the camera to move mance of vector views. Normally, these
freely through walls. values should not need changing, but you
may be able to get modest performance
• Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings -
improvements by trying other values.
Check this box to automatically rebuild
floors and ceilings before a 3D view or • When a vector view is generated, the
elevation is displayed. view is first divided into panels. View
panel factors represent target numbers of
• Auto Rebuild Terrain - Check this
surfaces to use in defining each panel. A
option to automatically rebuild terrain to
value of 10000 for Factor 1 means that a
reflect recent changes before generating a
total of 10,000 or more surfaces are col-
3D view. If this option is unchecked, you
lected to define each panel vertically. A
are asked if the terrain should be rebuilt.
value of 2000 for Factor 2 means that
• Auto Remove 3D - Uncheck this box to 2,000 or more surfaces are collected to
retain the 3D model in memory when you define panels horizontally.
are making changes to the model. This
• Making these numbers larger results in
can speed up the generation of additional
fewer panels; making them smaller
3D views of the model, but may slow
results in more panels. Adjusting these
down the speed of working in 2D.
numbers either too low or too high causes
• Version 10 Compatible Texture Map- the time required to draw to increase.
ping - Check this box to use global tex-
• When changing these values, turn on
ture mapping settings rather than texture
"Show Screen Redraw Time" in the Pref-
mapping fixed to individual objects.
erences> Appearance panel to see if a
Version 10 Compatible Texture Map-
change improves drawing speed. See
ping should remain unchecked except “Appearance Panel” on page 184.
Vector
Views
for legacy plans with custom rotated textures. • Framing Back Clip defines the back clip
for framing members in cross section/ele-
vation view. Framing must be set to dis-
759
play to see the effects of this value. A across the window. See “Panning the
zero value does not back clip at all. Display” on page 725.
4 Default Color Display has check 6 Specify how the Surface Edge Lines
boxes for each type of vector view. display for all objects in 3D views.
Select a check box to generate that view type • Check Use Layer Settings to display sur-
in color or clear the box to generate that view face edge lines for objects using the dis-
type as a line drawing. A colored view can play settings specified by layer in the
always be changed to a line drawing and vice Layer Display Options dialog
versa by choosing Tools> Color Off/Color
On . If this option is not checked, all edge
lines are drawn black and solid with a
5 The Scroll Bars check boxes control line weight of 0.
the display of scroll bars along the right
side and bottom of each type of vector view. • If Use Layer Settings is checked you can
Clear the check box to suppress the scroll bar also check Use Object Settings. All
and yield more viewing area when using objects that have special settings speci-
smaller windows. fied on the Line Style tab of their specifi-
cation dialog display using those settings,
When the scroll bars are suppressed, use the overriding the layer settings in the Layer
keyboard arrow keys to scroll. To pan the Display Options dialog.
display, hold the key and drag the pointer
Backdrop Tab
1 5
6
2
3
760
3D Settings Dialog
1 A preview of the selected backdrop vertical angles control how far around the
displays. sphere the backdrop is stretched.
2 Click Select Backdrop to open the 6 Click the color bar to change the
Select Library Object dialog. Background Color that displays when
Browse the Backdrops library, select a a backdrop is not being used.
backdrop, and click OK.
Creating Backdrops
3 Click Remove Backdrop to change the
backdrop to a solid color. The color New backdrops can be created using a
used is defined in the Background Color variety of graphic file formats. Backdrops
section of this dialog. are automatically adjusted to fit the window
size, so they look best when they are created
4 Select the check boxes to specify what with the same height to width proportions as
views the backdrop displays in.
the window you are working in.
5 Render View Options can be used to Scanned images from photographs or digital
create spherical panoramic backdrops.
A spherical backdrop is created by placing photos can be used to create backdrops of a
the selected backdrop onto a sphere that specific building site. See “Images &
surrounds your scene. The horizontal and Backdrops” on page 769 and “Adding
Materials and Images to the Library” on page
676.
761
762
Chapter 28:
Render Views
Render
Views
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Creating and edited in render views, just as they can in
Photo-Realistic Renderings vector views.
Classroom Design Project Training Render views can be saved with the plan for
Video: Presenting a Rendered 3D View use in layout and easy access to commonly
used interior and exterior views.
Render views are similar to vector views, but
have a more realistic appearance because
they display surfaces using textures and can Chapter Contents
calculate light sources and generate shadows. • OpenGL and Hardware
• Defaults and Preferences
Very little preparation is needed to create a • Render View Tools
render view. Chief Architect has default • Rendering Tools
values for most textures and even creates • Preview vs. Final Render View
default light sources so that the render view • Glass House View
looks realistic when first generated. For • Using the Contextual Menu
better renderings, add or adjust light sources • Editing a Camera
and edit the materials being rendered. • Materials In Render Views
From a render view, you can create final and • Images & Backdrops
raytrace views that appear even more • Plan Export
realistic. • Editing Objects in Render Views
• Saving a Render View Picture
The render camera and overview tools • Printing a Render View
function just like the vector camera and • Rendering Tips and Tricks
overview tools. Many objects can be placed • Light Sources
763
• Light Types • Sun Angle Specification Dialog

• Defining Light Types • Light Specification Dialog
• Adjusting Lights • Cross Section Slider Dialog
OpenGL and Hardware

Chief Architect contains a built in, easy to takes to perform the rendering. It is highly
use rendering engine that makes use of recommended that users have a graphics card
OpenGL rendering technology. OpenGL, the that supports OpenGL hardware acceleration,
standard for high-end 3D graphics, has the to take full advantage of the rendering
advantage of good hardware support on most capabilities of Chief Architect. For complex
video cards. With OpenGL, render views models, an accelerated card generates quality
should look the same on all computers renderings in seconds that might otherwise
regardless of the graphics card being used. take hours with a non-accelerated card.
The only difference is in the speed that it

The Render panel of the Preferences render views as they are generated are found
dialog controls settings for render previews in the 3D Settings dialog. See “3D
and final views. Since these settings Settings Dialog” on page 757.
significantly affect rendering speed and
Camera positioning, field of view and related
quality, it is a good idea to optimize them for
initial settings for render and vector cameras
your computer system. See “Render Panel”
are specified in the Camera Defaults
on page 211.
dialog. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on
Ambient lighting settings, 3D backdrop page 755.
information, and other settings that affect
Render View Tools

Select 3D> Create Render View to Glass House Camera
access the Render View Tools.
In a glass house view, the surfaces in
the scene are semi-transparent. This
Camera Views and Overviews
allows you to view the spatial relationships
The render camera and overview tools between areas within the house, and examine
function just like the vector camera and the interior and exterior simultaneously.
overview tools. See “Vector View Tools” on
page 734.
764
Rendering Tools
Select 3D> Render View Options> Glass Render Current

Vector View
Render
House Camera , then click and drag a
Views
camera arrow in floor plan view to create a
You can render an active vector view
Glass House camera view. See “Glass House
by selecting 3D> Create Render
View> Render Current Vector View. Chief
While in an existing render view, you can Architect renders the view based on your
select 3D> Render View Options> Glass Preview settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog. See
House Mode to display the view in
Glass House Mode. See “Rendering Tools”
on page 765.
Rendering Tools
A variety of tools are available in 3D views examine the interior and exterior of your
that allow you to edit your 3D model, the structures simultaneously. See “Glass House
camera, and the appearance of the view. You View” on page 767.
can also export, print and send 3D views to
Select 3D> Render View Options>
layout. See “3D Tools” on page 735.
Glass House Options button to modify
Some 3D tools apply specifically to render the settings for the Glass House view, such
views. as transparency level and color. See “Glass
House View” on page 767.
Select 3D> Raytrace Current Render
View to Raytrace the current render Select 3D> Render View Options>
view. See “Raytracing” on page 787. Cross Section Slider button to open
the Cross Section Slider dialog that
Select 3D> Render View Options in a
allows you to adjust the cutting plane of a
render view to access the Render View
render view. See “Cross Section Slider
Options Tools.
The Adjust Lights option allows a
Final View or 3D> Render View
user to edit the current lights that are
Options> Final View with Shadows to
being used in the render view. The lights are
regenerate the render view based on the final
displayed in a list for easy selecting. Interior
view settings on the Render panel of the
default lights in the list cannot be changed or
Preferences dialog. See “Preview vs.
altered, but the default sun can be changed.
Final Render View” on page 766.
You can quickly adjust lights to get the
desired appearance in the render view. Use
Glass House Mode to turn on/off
the checkboxes to turn lights on and off.
Glass House mode. This mode makes the 3D
Selecting a light and choosing "Adjust" in
model semi-transparent, so that you can
765
the Adjust Lights dialog opens a dialog Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sun-
box. If it is an added light, the dialog is the light button to turn on and off the light
Light Specification dialog. If you open a source that represents the sun. This feature
Light Fixture, the dialog consists of the Ren- can be used to simulate day vs. night exterior
der Data tab of the Electrical Service views. User defined exterior lights are turned
Specification dialog. See “Adjusting off in day views and turned on in night
Lights” on page 778. views. See “Sun Angles” on page 775.
Preview vs. Final Render View

A render view is first drawn using the Pre- lighting. For the best rendering quality, but
view settings on the Render panel of the slowest rendering speed, all rendering
Preferences dialog. By default, many options should be turned on in Final View
available options are turned off for the settings.
preview that allows the rendering to display
The rendering option that has the greatest
much faster.
impact on rendering speed is the Show
When you have finished making adjustments Shadows option. It is recommended that you
in render view, select 3D> Render View don’t use this feature unless you have
Options> Final View or Final View OpenGL hardware acceleration on your
video card.
with Shadows . Apply the Final View
settings from the Render panel of the When rendering shadows, a percentage
Preferences dialog to your render view. complete value displays on the status bar.
This creates a much higher quality image that
is more suitable for printing or saving as a
.bmp, .jpg, .png, .cif or .pcx file. It usually You may adjust your Preview and Final
takes significantly longer to generate the View settings to best fit the speed of your
final view than the preview. The render view graphics card and still provide satisfactory
reverts back to the Preview settings as soon rendering quality. See “Render Panel” on
as anything is changed within the view. page 211.
For faster rendering speed, but lowest
rendering quality, all options in Preview To generate higher quality renderings
settings should be turned off. To speed up the than can be created with the final view
render speed even further, you can switch to settings, use the Raytrace feature. See
Low Detail rendering mode, that draws a “Raytracing” on page 787.
simplified version of the view without
766
Glass House View
Glass House View
Render
Views
Introductory Training Video: Glass You can modify the settings for glass house
House Views view by selecting 3D> Glass House Options
You can display a current render view to open the Glass House Options
as a Glass House view by selecting dialog.
3D> Render View Options> Glass House
Mode. You can also create a glass house
view from floor plan view by selecting 3D>
Create Render View> Glass House
Camera tool, and clicking and dragging
a camera angle.
Color - Specify which color is used in glass

house view.
Transparency - Specify how transparent the
surfaces are in glass house view. For
example, to create a wireframe line drawing
of your structure, turn transparency to full
and minimize line thickness.
Line Thickness - Specify the thickness of
the lines drawn in glass house view.
Using the Contextual Menu

When in a render view, click the right mouse
button to access the contextual menu. In
most views, the contextual menu contains the
same tools as the Edit toolbar, but in render
views the options are a mix of tool buttons
and toggles that allow you to override the
settings on the Render panel of the
Preferences dialog, or to access special
render features.
Refresh Display, Final View, Raytrace,

Toggle Sunlight, Toggle Low Detail Mode,
767
and Glass House Mode are all available Changing a setting from the menu only
from the toolbar. affects the current view, it does not affect the
settings in the Preferences dialog.
Editing a Camera
Just as with a vector camera view, once a In 3D Views
render camera view is created, there are a
number of ways to adjust its focal point, field Just like vector camera views, a render
of view, and angle. camera view can be edited while the view is
active. See “Moving a Camera in 3D Views”
on page 737.
In Floor Plan View
You can also make adjustments to the camera
When a render camera view is open, it is
represented in floor plan view with a camera view by clicking the Edit Camera
symbol that displays an "R" (for render). button to open the Camera Specification
This symbol displays the focal point, field of dialog. See “Camera Specification Dialog”
view, and camera angle and can be selected on page 753.
and edited. See “Editing a Camera in Floor
Plan View” on page 740.
Materials In Render Views

A render view is similar to a vector view Textures are assigned to Materials and
except that materials are displayed with Materials are assigned to objects. Materials
textures instead of patterns and object are stored in the Library Browser along with
surfaces are illuminated by light sources. their assigned textures.
The display of materials in render views is For realistic render views, it is important to
controlled by settings on the Texture and adjust texture properties correctly. Textures
Render tabs of the Define Material dialog. can be mapped to objects for correct
See “Define Material Dialog” on page 712. placement. See “Mapping Patterns and
Textures” on page 705.
In render views, there are many ways to
change an object’s appearance. See “Editing If no texture is selected for a material or if
Materials” on page 711. the display of textures is turned off, affected
surfaces are a solid color instead.
Texture
Render Properties
Textures are graphic files that represent
irregular surfaces of objects such as bricks, Brightness, shininess and transparency
tile, wood, and carpet in render views. control how light sources affect the display
768
Images & Backdrops
of surfaces in render views. See “Light

Sources” on page 772.
Render
Views
Images & Backdrops
Hundreds of graphics files have been Spherical Backdrops
included with Chief Architect. They are
categorized into three groups: Images, The render view allows a special type of
Materials, and Backdrops. By using them, backdrop called a Spherical Panoramic
you can create more realistic render views. Backdrop. These options are used to have
the backdrop rotate as you move the render
view Camera.
Images
To enable Spherical Panoramic Backdrops,
Images are very important for the appearance
you can turn them on from the Backdrop tab
of rendered views and VRML file export.
of the 3D Settings dialog. You can then
Images are picture files that represent
adjust how much the backdrop wraps around
individual objects, such as trees, flowers,
the scene.
cars, people, etc. They are marked in floor
plan view with a 2D Block and are visible in Adjusting the Horizontal Angle determines
vector views. how many times the backdrop should appear
as you rotate in a full circle from side-to-
Backdrops side. A value of 360 makes the backdrop
wrap around the scene once. A value of 720
Backdrops are images that display in the makes it wrap around the scene twice. 180
background of 3D views. Only one backdrop makes only half the backdrop wrap around
can be used at a time. If a backdrop is not the scene.
applied, Chief Architect applies a default
background color. Backdrops are selected The Vertical Angle determines how much
and removed on the Backdrop tab of the 3D the backdrop stretches up-and-down. To have
Settings dialog. The background color for the backdrop stretch from the highest point in
render views is also defined there. See the sky to the lowest point in the ground, use
“Creating Backdrops” on page 761. a value of 180. To have the backdrop stretch
from just below a horizontal render to just
You can drag and drop a backdrop directly above, use a smaller value such as 100.
into a render view from the Library Browser.
Select a backdrop from the upper pane of the It takes a special camera or an image
Library Browser, notice that the pointer processing program to generate spherical
panoramic backdrops. Some experimenting
changes in render view ( ) to indicate that
with the images and the Angle values may be
a backdrop is loaded for placement, and then
necessary to achieve the desired results.
click in a render view to apply the selected
backdrop.
769
Plan Export
When transferring a plan to another accessed through File> Export > Entire
computer or to another user, it is Plan allows you to save the plan and all
helpful to have all the Images, Textures, and associated images, textures, and backdrops,
Backdrops used in the plan so that render into a single directory. For more information
views are complete. The Plan Export tool see “Exporting an Entire Plan” on page 173.
Editing Objects in Render Views

You have full editing functionality in a objects. See “Editing Objects in 3D Views”
render view, including the ability to add, on page 746.
resize, move, group, ungroup, and delete
Saving a Render View Picture

Render views may be saved as .bmp, .jpg, 4. Use the file type drop-down to choose
.png, .tif, or .pcx files. which file type to save to.
5. Give the file a name and click Save.
To save a render view
Once saved, a picture can be opened and
1. Select File> Export> Picture or click converted into many other formats using a
graphics program. Picture files can be sent to
the Export Picture button on the layout or used in word processing, desktop
render toolbar. publishing, and web development programs
2. The Export Picture File dialog dis- to create advertisements, brochures, etc.
plays with the current directory.
The picture is saved using the size of
3. Navigate to the desired directory before
the current window. You can change the
saving the file. size of your render window to create a
smaller or bigger picture.
Printing a Render View

Since render views are created from special Chief Architect function that prints
pixels instead of lines, File> Print> the screen in picture format. The entire view
Print Image must be used to send them to prints, including images such as trees and
the printer. File> Print> Print Image is a textures.
770
Rendering Tips and Tricks
The quality of your print image is affected by

your current window size and screen If you want to save or print a picture
Render
Views
resolution. To maximize the quality of your whose resolution is higher than your
printed image, generate it in full screen size screen, you can create the image using Ray-
tracing. See “Raytracing” on page 787.
and use the maximum screen resolution.
Rendering Tips and Tricks

You can achieve significantly different have no lights, you probably want to turn off
results in rendering speed or quality by Use Triangles.
adjusting the following options in the
Soft Shadows - Only used when Shadows
Render tab of the Preferences dialog. To
are turned on, this significantly slows down
access this dialog go to Edit> Preferences>
the rendering speed. To save time, only use
Render.
this option for final images, and consider
Raytracing as an alternative way to generate
Faster Rendering a high-quality image.
To improve rendering speed, consider Surface Backdrop - For some OpenGL-
turning off the following options accelerated video cards, this option
Always Rebuild - This forces Chief drastically increases your render speeds.
Architect to re-create the entire model for When turned on, this option creates surfaces
each frame. For most video cards you may the backdrop is drawn on. When this option
want to turn this off, and turn Keep All is turned off, the backdrop is send directly to
Surfaces on. the video card. For most modern video cards,
Off is the recommended setting.
Keep All Surfaces - When Chief Architect
creates the 3D model, this option toggles Use Optimizations - Many OpenGL-
whether to only create surfaces facing you. accelerated video cards are capable of
On most OpenGL-accelerated video cards, it ’optimizing’ the view for subsequent
is faster to create the model with all surfaces redraws. Use of this option varies from video
once, rather than re-create it every time the card to video card.
camera position changes. For most scenarios In general, you should leave this option
you may want to turn this on, and turn turned on unless you are experiencing
Always Rebuild off. crashes when rendering.
Use Triangles - This determines whether or Smooth Edges - Only use this option for
not lights illuminate the scene accurately. final views, as this slows down even the
Turning off this option speeds up render fastest video card.
times, but results in large objects (such as
walls) appearing to be lit incorrectly. When Show Shadows - This should only be used
you are editing in a render view, or when you for final views, unless you have an extremely
fast OpenGL-accelerated video card.
771
In general, you should make sure you are appear to illuminate objects properly.
only using a minimum number of lights to Generally speaking the smaller you set your
cast shadows. Triangle Size, the slower the render, but the
higher-quality result you can achieve.
Use Textures - Some older video cards slow
down significantly using textures. Look at Texture Filters - Mip-mapping, though
your Render> Texture Filter settings; some slightly slower on older video cards, greatly
video cards perform significantly faster using improves the appearance of scenes where
either Nearest or Linear texture filters objects are far away.
instead of using a mip-mapping filter.
Use Transparency - Necessary to display
In addition, the number of light sources in a transparent or semi-transparent surfaces in a
plan can drastically affect rendering speed, render view.
especially if you are using shadows. Light
Smooth Edges - Though slow, this can
sources are added by selecting 3D>
significantly improve the quality of a final
Lighting> Add Lights and can be removed
view.
by clicking the light source in floor plan view
and deleting it.
To generate a high-quality picture of
your scene, consider Raytracing. See
Higher Quality Rendering “Raytracing” on page 787.
Use Triangles - when you have lights in your

scene, triangles are used to make those lights
Light Sources
Lighting is extremely important in render The maximum number of light sources that
views, raytracing, and VRML file export. can be turned on in a room at the same time
Even small changes can have a large impact is determined by your video card. See
on image quality. “Render Panel” on page 211. If eight is your
maximum number of lights, the program
In render views, lighting calculations are
only uses the eight light sources closest to the
done on a room-by-room basis; only the
camera’s position for its lighting
lights in the room containing the camera are
calculations. You can manually turn on and
used. When the camera is outside a building,
off certain lights in order to get desired
the program normally uses sunlight for
lighting effects. See “Adjusting Lights” on
lighting calculations. In this case, all the
page 778 for more information.
other lights are turned off.
It is possible to turn the sunlight off and to Ambient Lights
have all the other exterior lights turned on to
simulate night time views. The sun can be Ambient light is additive to other lights in a
controlled like other light types. room or scene. Ambient light settings are
772
Light Types
controlled on the Options tab of the 3D Nighttime Ambient controls the light when
Settings dialog. Select 3D> 3D Settings... you are outside the model and Toggle Sun-
Render
Views
to access the dialog. Here you can adjust light is off.
the ambient light settings, which affect the Ambient light is used to simulate the way
overall brightness of a render view. Too that light “bounces” around a scene. Ambient
much ambient light can give the 3D view a light approximates this by simply ensuring
flatter look. that all objects are at least as bright as the
Interior Ambient controls the light when a appropriate ambient value. To create a more
View is inside the model. realistic model of how light bounces around
a scene, use Raytracing with Radiosity. See,
Daytime Ambient controls the light when “Raytracing” on page 787.
you are outside the model and Toggle Sun-
light is on.
Light Types
In addition to the ambient light levels See “Defining Light Types” on page 777.
specified in the 3D Settings dialog, there
are four additional ways to create light Default Lights
sources for render or raytrace views:
If you create an interior render view and no
• Default Lights user defined lights exist, the program creates
• Light Fixtures a Default Light source within the room. The
• Added Lights Default Interior light acts like a central point
source.
• Sunlight
It cannot be adjusted in any way. If you want
Each individual light has a set of Rendering control over the light sources in your interior
properties that can be defined. render views, you must add a light to the
You can adjust a light’s color, intensity, room that you are rendering by placing a
attenuation (which affects how quickly the lighting fixture or by adding a light source
light drops in intensity over distance) and using 3D> Lighting> Add Lights .
control whether it casts shadows and whether
the light is on or off. Light Fixtures
There are three possible types of light Electric symbols placed in floor plan view
sources that can be used to specify how a that represent a Light Fixture may create
light is calculated by the Renderer: one or more light sources in render and
• Parallel Light sources raytrace views. The light type and properties
• Point Light sources for each fixture can be modified by selecting
• Spot Light sources. the fixture, clicking the Open Object
773
edit button, and opening the Electrical Added Lights

Service Specification dialog to the Ren-
der Data tab. See “Electrical Service 3D> Lighting> Add Lights allows
Specification Dialog” on page 529. you to quickly add a light source in the
floor plan view. Added lights display 2D
Use the "Light" drop-down to choose which symbols in floor plan view and serve as
of the fixture lights you want to edit. You can sources of light in the render and raytrace
then specify the Light Type - (parallel, point, views, but do not display as objects in 3D.
or spot), the Color, Intensity, and adjust the
Offsets to determine the light position Added lights can be placed into objects that
relative to the fixture. normally do not generate light, such as a TV.
Offset From Base controls how far the light To add a Parallel Light
source is relative to the position of the fixture
base. The fixture base is determined by the
surface that it is attached to, (i.e. wall, floor, 1. Select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights .
or ceiling). 2. Click and drag in floor plan view.
Offset in X/Offset in Y are only available 3. When you release the mouse, a parallel
when you are not editing a wall-mounted light pointing in the direction that you
fixture. These allow you to position the light dragged is created.
relative to the center of the fixture, along the Parallel Lights can be added to the exterior or
floor/ceiling. interior of a model.
Offset up Wall/Offset Along Wall are only
available when you are editing a wall- To create a Point Light source
mounted fixture. These allow you to set the
light’s distance up/down the wall, and left/ 1. Select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights .
right along the wall.
2. Click in floor plan view. Do not drag the
If the light source is a Point or Spot Light, pointer when you click the screen, or
you can define its offset relative to the fixture you create a parallel light source.
base. For instance, if the fixture is on the
ceiling you may want to set the Height Offset To create a Spot Light source
field to move the light source down to the
location where the bulb might be in real life. 1. Create a Parallel or Point Light source.
By using Show Position in Render View
2. Select the light and open it for specifica-
you can tell where in the scene your light is
tion.
located.
3. Change its Type to Spot Light in the
Due to limitations in the OpenGL lighting Light Specification dialog.
model, and limitations of raytracing, lighting
looks most realistic if it is offset from a
surface.
774
Light Types
Sun Angles A Sun Angle’s position is specified by Lati-

tude and Longitude. The following table lists
Render
Views
A Sun Angle arrow is a marker that a sample of latitude and longitude values for
displays in floor plan view and indi- some cities:
cates the angle of the sun at a specific time
and location on the Earth. Multiple Sun
Angles can be created in floor plan view,
each with different specifications.
Sun Angles are parallel light sources. Their
location and direction are defined per plan.
To accurately define the Sun’s location
relative to the model, use a North Pointer
. See “North Pointer” on page 849.
When rendering an exterior view, the
program looks for the Sun Angle that is
turned on. If you have multiple Sun Angles,
select the one you want to use and turn it on
on the Render tab of the Sun Angle
Specification dialog. Verify that all others
are turned off and the program render sthe
correct Sun Angle. If a Sun Angle does not 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight
exist, the program uses the Default Sun. controls the display of either the
Default Sun or the current Sun Angle as a
To create a Sun Angle source of light.
1. Make the first floor or foundation level Default Sun Light

the current floor. Sun Angles can only be
created on these floor levels. If you create an exterior render view and no
2. In floor plan view, select CAD> Spe- Sun Angle exists, the program creates a
Default Sun. The Default Sun acts like a sun
cial> Sun Angle and click the but its location is not based on any real world
screen where the Sun Angle arrow locations.
should display.
The Default Sun can be opened for
3. In the Sun Angle Specification dia- specification in a render view by selecting
log, specify the Sun Angle’s Earth Data
and other information. See “Sun Angle 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights . If there
Specification Dialog” on page 778. are no other lights in the view, the default
sun’s Light Specification dialog opens.
4. After it is created, a Sun Angle can be See “Light Specification Dialog” on page
moved to a different location in floor 781.
plan view. Shadows are not affected.
775
If there are other lights in the scene, but no .

Sun Angles, the Adjust Lights dialog
opens. Select Default Sun from the list of
available light sources and click Adjust to
open the sun’s Light Specification
dialog. See “Adjusting Lights” on page 778.
The Default Sun acts like a parallel light
source. In the Default Sun’s Light
Specification dialog, you can specify:
• Intensity
Sun angle for:
• Color
• Tilt Angle March 1, 2007
• Dir Angle 12 p.m. (noon)

• On Coeur d’Alene, ID
• Casts Shadows To display shadows created by a Sun Angle
• Soft Shadows
1. On the Render tab of the Preferences
If you place a Sun Angle in floor plan dialog, check Show Shadows for Pre-
view, the Default Sun can no longer be used view and/or Final View. See “Render
as a light source in exterior render views Panel” on page 211.
unless the Sun Angle’s light is turned off. 2. Select a Sun Angle and click the Open
Shadows Object edit button.

3. On the Render Data tab of the Sun
Sun Angles allow the shadow cast by a Angle Specification dialog, make
building at any time of the year to be dis- sure that Casts Shadows is checked.
played in floor plan and render views.
4. To display the shadow in floor plan
view, click the Make Shadow button on
the Earth Data tab.
Multiple Sun Angles can be placed in the
same plan to allow the simultaneous display
of shadows cast at different times in floor
plan view.
Specify different line colors and/or

styles for shadows cast by multiple Sun
Angles on the Line Style tab of the Sun
Angle Specification dialog.
776
Defining Light Types
If no Terrain Perimeter has been created, • In floor plan view, select and delete the
shadows fall on an imaginary plane at height defining polyline.
Render
Views
zero, the default height for the first floor. If a • In floor plan view, select and delete the
Terrain Perimeter exists, shadows are modi- Sun Angle arrow.
fied to indicate where the real shadow would
fall on the actual terrain. • In the Sun Angle Specification dia-
log, click the Delete Shadow button.
Deleting Shadows • In the Sun Angle Specification dia-
log, click Make shadow to delete the
There are several ways to delete the shadow
existing and create a new shadow.
created by a Sun Angle.
Defining Light Types

Each light type may be defined as modelling Point Lights
either a Point Light source, a Parallel Light
source, or a Spot Light source. These Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light
definitions can be assigned and modified to radiates light equally in all directions
create many different lighting effects. from its origin. It slows rendering
down, but it is a more realistic representation
of electric lighting and should be used where
Parallel Lights
visual fidelity is the deciding concern.
A Parallel Light has a direction but
If no user defined light exists, Chief
no position. The light appears to
Architect creates a Point Light source to
illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as
represent a light within a room. Any light
if it were at an infinite distance from the
source, except a sun angle, can be changed
object. A Parallel Light source is commonly
into a Point Light source by changing its
used to simulate distant light sources, such as
light type in the specification dialog.
the sun. It is the best choice of light to use for
maximum speed generating render views. To modify the light, double-click it (or select
Parallel Light sources are represented in it, then click the Open Object edit
floor plan view by three arrows. To modify button). The Light Specification dialog
the light, double-click it or select it, then opens.
click the Open Object edit button. The
Light Specification dialog opens,
Spot Lights
allowing you to modify the light’s A Spot Light focuses the light in a
characteristics. Any light source can be specified direction. The location,
changed into a Parallel Light source by cone angle, direction and intensity
changing its light type in the Light of a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights
Specification dialog. cannot be placed directly in the plan. They
are created by changing an existing light’s
777
specification. Once defined as a Spot Light, added light source, by rotating the light in
the direction of a spot light can be changed in floor plan view.
the Light Specification dialog or for an
Adjusting Lights
Once lights have been added to the Adjust Lights to open this dialog in floor
model, they can be accessed and edited plan or any 3D view.
using the Adjust Lights dialog. Select 3D>
Adjust Lights Dialog
All lights in the plan appear in the list. Check The Light Specification dialog opens.
the box beside a light to turn it on or uncheck Make changes to the light and click OK.
the box to turn it off.
Select another light to adjust or click Done.
To adjust the properties of a specific light,
If you are in a render view, the view will
select that light in the list and click Adjust.
regenerate based on the new light settings.
Sun Angle Specification Dialog

Select CAD> Lines> Sun Angle, then You can also open the Sun Angle
click anywhere in floor plan view to Specification dialog for an existing sun
open the Sun Angle Specification dialog angle by selecting it and clicking the Open
and create a new sun angle. See “Sun Angle” Object edit button.
on page 850.
778
Sun Angle Specification Dialog
Earth Data Tab
Render
Views
1
2
3
4
5
7 10
8 11
9
12
1 Latitude is measured North or South of 6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
the equator. Specification dialog is a section dis-
playing the calculated angles.
2 Longitude is measured West or East of
the Greenwich meridian. The Solar altitude angle displays the angle
Common values for latitude, longitude can of the sun in degrees above the horizontal
be found in any atlas. plane.
The Solar direction angle shows the angle
3 Date - Enter a date for each arrow you between true north and the sun's direction.
create.
This is the angle the Sun Angle arrow dis-
4 Time - Enter a time for each arrow you plays in floor plan view.
create. Define whether or not it should
be adjusted to allow for Daylight Savings This angle is always measured relative to
Time. north. North is defined by a user specified
North Pointer . If you have not created a
5 Time Zone - Specify the time zone. North Pointer, north is assumed to be straight
The previous values default to the setup in the floor plan view. If a North Pointer is
tings on the Special CAD panel of the drawn, or the direction of an existing North
Preferences dialog. Pointer is changed, Sun Angles and their
shadows automatically update.
779
7 Always Update - Select the check box noon to test the function. If the shadow
to have the program update the shadow appears, your original time setting was too
for this arrow whenever any of the defining early or too late to generate shadows.
information is changed. When checked, it Note that the Make Shadow option does not
slows the system down while the Sun affect the Render view. To turn shadows on
Angle Specification dialog is displayed. and off for the Render view, use the Render
If this is not checked, click the Make tab.
Shadow button to generate a new shadow
based on the new information. 12 Delete shadow - Removes the sun
shadow generated using Make Shadow
Show Date on Sun Angle - Select the
8 from the floor plan view.
check box to have the date and time dis-
play on the Sun Angle arrow in the floor plan
Render Data Tab
view.
9 Auto Rebuild Terrain - Select the

check box to rebuild the terrain
automatically whenever you create a sun
shadow. 1
2
If the Auto Rebuild Terrain check box is
checked, then if you rebuild the sun shadow, 3
the terrain automatically rebuilds as needed
before the sun shadow generates. If this 4
check box is unchecked, you are prompted to
rebuild the terrain. You can define if the Sun Angle is used as a
Note that when you use the Build Terrain light source in render views. Set the parame-
command in floor plan view, all sun shadows ters here if you want to use the Sun Angle as
in the plan are automatically updated. a light source in render views.
The settings defined on the Render Data tab
10 Length of Plan Symbol - Enter the are not related to how the shadow is dis-
length of the Sun Angle arrow for floor
plan view. played in floor plan view. They only affect
render views.
11 Make shadow - Click the button to cal-
culate the shadow on screen. The shadow is a 1 On - Check this box to select the cur-
rent Sun Angle as a rendering light
polyline filled with a hatch pattern derived source. If there is more than one defined Sun
from the Sun Angle direction. Angle, the renderer selects the first Sun
No shadow generates if the sun is not above Angle that is defined as On. To make sure
the horizon or if the sun is so low on the hori- you are rendering the correct Sun Angle,
zon that the shadow would be extremely make sure all others do not have this box
long. If no shadow appears, reset the time to checked.
780
Light Specification Dialog
2 Casts Shadow - Check here to have 4 Color - Select a color for the light
this light source cast shadows. These source.
Render
Views
shadows are similar to the shadow shown in
floor plan view, but they may render differ- Line Style Tab
ently based on other light sources.
3 Intensity - Use this slider bar to define “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
the relative intensity of the light source.
Time of day as set on the Earth Data tab,
Fill Style Tab
does not affect how the Sun Angle renders as
a light source, but this does. For information about the Fill Style tab, see

Select a parallel, point or spot light and click
the Open Object edit button to open the
Light Specification dialog.
You can also select 3D> Adjust Lights

to access a list of the light sources present in
the current plan and open the specification
dialog for any of them. See “Adjust Lights
In addition, you can right-click on a light in
an unlocked library (see “Adding to the
Library” on page 674) or click on it and
select Library> Edit Light Data to open a
version of the Light Specification dialog
that is similar to the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See “Light Data
Tab” on page 531.
781
Light Specification
1
2
3
4
11
5
6
7
12
8 13
9 14
10
15
Depending on the type of light selected, the Lights that have an intensity of 0% are the
options available may vary. same as lights that are turned off. Lights that
have an intensity of 100% have the
1 Type - Select a source type for the light. maximum brightness allowed. If you have
Available source types are Point Light,
multiple lights in a room all set to maximum
Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The selections
intensity, it is possible to have too much light
in the dialog are affected by the Type that
for a realistic View. Colors and textures
you select. Each type of light source behaves
become washed out if there is too much light.
differently but they have some rendering
properties in common. See “Defining Light
3 Color - Click the rectangle to define the
Types” on page 777. color of the light being modeled.
Colored lights may be used to achieve
2 Auto Intensity - Select the check box special lighting effects. They alter the
to have the program set intensities for
appearance of your material colors and
each light in the render view. When you
textures.
select Auto Intensity the program provides
an average intensity to render with The default color of light is pure white,
reasonable lighting effects. If you clear the which has the least affect on the material
check box, the slider bar controls how bright colors and textures.
the light appears in the render view.
782
4 Attenuated - Check this box to control Added light to display in a room on the
how the quickly the light intensity second floor you must enter a height value
Render
Views
drops off as a result of the distance from the that includes the first floor. A value of 0
light source. Only Spot and Point Lights can equals the floor elevation of the first floor.
have attenuation values set.
7 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to
The three edit values represent the three control the angle of the light with
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression: respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees
means that the light is pointing straight down
and a value of 90 degrees means that the light
is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
the horizon.
where d is the distance from the light source.
Increasing any of these values results in the 8 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along.
light intensity dropping off faster (the light Zero degrees is measured horizontally on
does not travel as far). Decreasing any value your screen pointing to the right. Positive
results in the light intensity dropping off values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction
slower, (the light travels farther). Small from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees.
changes in these coefficients can have If you enter a negative value, the program
significant impact on lighting effects. Some uses Zero.
experimentation should be done to fully
understand how to use them. Direct a Spot Light in floor plan view by
selecting and dragging the rotate handle.
5 Floor Number - Define where the
symbol for an added light displays in 9 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
floor plan views. controls the angle of the cone of light
for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180
The Floor Number controls which floor plan degrees would create a Spot Light that shines
the added light symbol is drawn on. If you on one side of the light’s position,
assign the number of a non-existent floor, representing a half sphere. A small cone
you cannot see the light and you cannot angle, say 10 degrees, would create a very
delete that light. narrow cone of light. The cut off angle
A floor number of -1 draws the light symbol should always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
on all floors, a value of 1 draws the light The cut off angle for an added light can be
symbol on the first floor. The floor number defined in the floor plan view by dragging
has no effect on the light height. Set the the handles at the ends of the cone lines in or
number equal to the floor plan that contains out.
the room that the light is in, if you want it to
display in floor plan view. 10 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
the light intensity drops off from the
center of the cone of light to the outside
6 Height - Define a height for the light. edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
Heights of Added lights are always
relative to the first floor. If you want an
783
The default value for this is set to 7.5, which

13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or
means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is not the light casts shadows when
not useful to set this value too low because Shadows are turned on in a render view.
there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting
It is recommended that you only use one, or
model that result in jagged looking circles of
at most two lights to casts shadows at a time.
light when they are shining on large flat
Shadow calculations are very complicated
surfaces. Appearances can be improved by
and can slow rendering significantly.
decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and
increasing the Drop off Rate but it is
14 Show Position in Render View -
impossible to get a nice sharp circle of light Check this box to display an indicator
using current methods under OpenGL. where a light source is actually positioned in
a render view. The light position indicator is
11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This only drawn when the light is "On" and only
allows you to set how a light casts soft
for positional lights such as "point" or "spot"
shadows in a Raytrace view. Setting the
lights. This tool can be used to determine if
Light Size determines how big the light
your light source is positioned correctly.
should appear. A size of zero indicates a true
point light source, while a size of 3 indicates
15 Use in Real-Time Rendering/Use in
a larger source such as a lightbulb. Setting Raytracing/Use in Both - These
the Softness determines how many iterations options allows you to specify whether a light
the raytracer should go through to soften the is used only in a raytrace view, only in a
light. This value determines the quality of the render view, or used in both views. Raytrace
raytrace, but also slows down the raytrace. It views can handle many more lights than
is not recommended to use values greater render views, and some fixtures may have
than 2 or 3, unless the Light Size is very four or five lights in a raytrace view while
large. only one in a render view. Be warned that the
more lights you use in either view, the slower
12 On - This controls whether or not the the time to generate that view.
light should be used for lighting effects
in the render view. The default is “On”.
Layer Tab
784
Cross Section Slider Dialog
Cross Section Slider Dialog
Render
Views
Click the Cross Section Slider button in Choose one of the cross section angles and
a render view to open the Cross Section move the Position slide to adjust the position
Slider dialog.
of the cutting plane. Select the option at top
right to turn off the cutting plane.
785
786
Chapter 29:
Raytracing
Raytracing
Chapter Overview
Raytracing is a technology that allows the such as reflections and highly realistic
creation of highly realistic images from your lighting.
Chief Architect plans. Rendering draws your
model onto the screen, while raytracing Chapter Contents
actually traces the rays of light from your • Creating a Raytrace View
camera as they bounce around and reflect in • The Raytrace Window
the 3D model. As a result, raytracing is • Creating Materials for Raytracing
slower than OpenGL rendering, but can be • Tips and Tricks
used to achieve much more complex effects • POV-Ray
Creating a Raytrace View

To create a raytraced image in Chief views. In raytrace views, lights are not
Architect, begin with a render view. limited to the current room; instead, all the
The camera position, orientation, and field of lights currently modeled in the plan are used,
view of the render view determine the way as long as the light has been turned “on” in
the scene appears in the raytrace window. its specification dialog and has been set to
None of the other render settings, including “Use in Raytracing.”
your render preferences, are used for
Unlike a render view, a raytrace view has no
generating a raytrace view.
limit on the number of lights that can be used
The lighting used in a raytrace view is also to create a scene.
different than the lighting used in render
787
In a render view, select 3D> Raytrace

The more lights that are turned on and
set for use in raytracing, the longer it Current Render View to begin
takes to raytrace a scene. raytracing. The Raytrace Options dialog
opens.
Raytrace Options Dialog
4
5
6
Raytrace Properties original image and prevent the raytrace from

being stretched or distorted.
1 Width/Height – The size, in pixels, of Use Render Window Size - Check this box
the image you are about to create. You
can set these values to virtually anything you to set the raytrace to the size of the render
want, but images larger than 2000 x 2000 window. If you change the size of the render
pixels cannot be viewed from within Chief window, subsequent raytraces are also the
Architect and must be saved directly to a new size.
.bmp file. Save Raytrace to File – Save the raytrace
Retain Aspect Ratio - Check this box to image directly to a file while it raytraces. The
maintain the width to height ratio of the only supported file format is the Windows
Bitmap (.bmp) format. Saving as a file is the
788
Creating a Raytrace View
only way to produce a final image larger than ‘blotchy’. This is the fastest Radiosity
the Chief Architect view window. option.
• Medium Quality - This option should
Raytrace Parameters only be used for images where Low Radi-
osity is insufficient, as it is more time-
2 Radiosity – Radiosity is slower, but consuming.
produces a much more realistic lighting
Raytracing
model than standard raytracing. Without • High Quality - Extremely time-consum-
radiosity, the raytracer uses a lighting model ing and only necessary for the most dis-
similar to a render view, which uses a cerning tastes. High Radiosity often takes
constant value for ambient lights. Unlike the hours to render what takes minutes using
constant Ambient Lighting model that Low Radiosity.
assumes any object not directly exposed to a
Time of Day – Similar to the Daytime/
light is a pre-set brightness, Radiosity traces
Nighttime setting in Render views, this
light as it bounces around a scene, capturing
allows you to choose whether to render a
the subtle variations in shadows.
daytime or a nighttime image.
Without Radiosity Anti-Aliasing – This setting determines
what quality of “smooth edges” to create in
your raytraced image. The High Quality
setting is somewhat slower than the Normal
quality setting. This is similar to the Smooth
Edges option used in render views. See
“Faster Rendering” on page 771.
3 The Sunlight Contribution options are

With Radiosity available when a Radiosity setting other
than None is used, and allow the ability to
have light coming directly from the sun, as
well as light ‘scattered’ through the clouds.
Direct Sunlight allows you to brighten the
intensity of the light coming from the sun.
Diffuse Sunlight allows you to brighten the
The following options allow you to adjust intensity of the light from the surrounding
how Radiosity works in the scene: atmosphere. For a cloudy day, you might turn
up the diffuse sunlight, and turn down the
• None - Uses an ambient lighting model
direct sunlight.
similar to the render view.
• Low Quality - This option should pro- 4 Use Soft Shadows – You can specify
vide reasonable image quality for most soft shadow settings for each light in
images, though the results may appear the Adjust Lights dialog. See “Adjusting
Lights” on page 778. These settings only
789
take effect if you enable Use Soft Shadows. been added, the program creates a Default
Soft shadows may slow image generation. Configuration.
5 Create Default Light – If you have no You can add your preferred raytrace
lights in your scene, the raytracer configurations to your template plan.
creates one for you if the scene is indoors and See“Template Files” on page 167 .
this box is checked.
To add a configuration
Raytrace Configurations
1. Click New. A configuration called
6 A Raytrace Configuration is a group “Copy of Default Configuration”
of raytrace settings. Configurations are
saved with the plan and can be reused. appears in the list. When you add addi-
tional configurations, they are called
• Select a configuration from the drop- “Copy of” and the name of the configu-
down list. ration that is currently selected.
• Click the New button to create a new 2. Give this new configuration a short,
configuration. descriptive name.
• Click the Delete button to delete the 3. Make any desired changes to the Ray-
selected configuration from the list. This trace Options settings in this dialog.
button is not available if there is only one
configuration in the list. 4. Click Save to keep this configuration
with the plan.
The existing configurations are shown on the
5. To reuse this configuration, select it
drop-down list. There must always be at least
from the drop-down list.
one configuration available. If none have
The Raytrace Window

If your raytraced image is small enough to fit Select File> Save Image to save your picture
in a window, your image appears as it is to any of several file formats including .jpg,
created. Unlike render views, you can .bmp, and .png.
minimize your raytrace window or perform
other tasks while the raytrace is progressing. Adjust Image Properties
Simply restore your raytrace window when
you are ready to view your image. A raytracer mimics a camera while it
generates your image. Select File>
The following options are available from the Adjust Image Properties to open the
raytrace window: Adjust Image Properties dialog and
Select File> Print Image to print your adjust the camera lens aperture, which affects
picture. brightness, and as film speed, which affects
contrast. This can be done during the
790
Creating Materials for Raytracing
raytrace process or when the raytrace is

completed.
Raytracing
Creating Materials for Raytracing
There are several properties of materials that the Show Preview option on the Raytrace
only come into effect when you are doing a tab in the Plan Material dialog. See
raytraced image. To view the effect of your “Define Material Dialog” on page 712.
material settings in a raytrace, you can use
Raytrace Tab
1
2
3
5
6
The Raytrace tab controls how materials window by clicking the Show Preview
appear in raytrace views. Modifying these button.
values has no effect on vector or render
views. You can activate the raytrace preview 1 The name of the material displays here.
791
2 Reflectivity - This controls how 4 Bump Height allows you to specify

reflective the material appears in how drastic the effect of the bump map
raytrace views. Push the slide bar all the way is. The Ratio and Stretch to Fit options
to the right to simulate a highly reflective work for bump maps the same way that they
material such as a mirror. For more accuracy, do for textures. If you are using a texture and
enter a value in the edit box. a bump map, they both use the same values
for Ratio and Stretch to Fit.
3 Use Bump Map - A bump map is an
image file used to make a material
5 Material is translucent - A translucent
appear non-flat where light hits it. For more material allows light to pass through it,
information on bump maps, see “Raytracing” but still appears in the image. An example of
on page 787. To create a bump map, turn on a translucent material is a lampshade.
Use Bump Map and select a bump map to Translucency is an effect that looks best
use. Any image file or texture can be used as when rendering with Radiosity.
a bump map, with dark areas of the image
corresponding to low points in the bump 6 Transparency Filters Light – A
material that filters light acts like a
map, and brighter areas corresponding to
stained-glass window. A material that does
high points.
not filter light simply transmits it, such as
white tissue paper.
Tips and Tricks

Faster Raytracing Use the Adjust Lights dialog available in
render or floor plan views to turn off any
Calculating a realistic image can take time, lights that are not important to your scene.
but there are several things to think about Remember that most lights are ‘on’ by
before you raytrace that can drastically default.
reduce your raytrace time.
Radiosity Quality – For simple scenes, Low
Without the appropriate setup, a scene Quality Radiosity is usually sufficient. High
that should take five minutes to raytrace Quality Radiosity is extremely time-
can quite literally take five to ten days. These consuming and only necessary for very
tips can help you reduce raytrace times so complicated scenes where Low or Medium
you can get the image you want, when you
radiosity is not sufficient.
want it.
If your image is very large, or if you have
Number of Lights – Unlike a render view, complicated aspects such as grills or grates,
which can support only a limited number of you may want to try Medium radiosity.
lights, a raytrace view can handle as many Always try Low radiosity first to see if you
lights as you like. Leaving the lights on is the get the desired result.
number one cause of slow raytracing.
792
Tips and Tricks
Preview Your Raytrace – When you are Use Radiosity - Although slower, radiosity
setting up lighting for a scene, there is no adds significant depth to the scene by
need to raytrace a full-screen image. Try simulating the way that light works in the
using a much smaller image size – such as real world. Radiosity is especially effective
300x200 – that can give you the information in scenes with a fair number of shadows.
you need to determine whether lighting is
Use Reflections – For outdoor scenes,
appropriate.
Raytracing
ensure that your windows are slightly
Image size is a significant factor in reflective. You may want to set up a building
determining raytrace speed. Only raytrace across the street that, though not in the scene,
your full image when you are certain that appears in the reflections in the windows.
your scene lighting is correct. Especially important are partly reflective
materials on objects such as stovetops, tile
It may be helpful to create a configuration for
floors, and coffee pots. The subtle effect of
previews so you do not have to reset all the
the reflections help convince the viewer’s
options each time. See “Raytrace
eye that the picture is a real photograph.
Configurations” on page 790.
Sunlight Settings – The brightness of the
Anti-Aliasing Level – Anti-aliasing works
sun varies dramatically from climate to
to smooth edges that otherwise would appear
climate, from cloudy day to sunny day. Use
jagged. High-quality anti-aliasing is most
the Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Settings to find
useful when you are raytracing a smaller
a setting that provides the appropriate
picture that contains a very complicated
lighting for the scene you are rendering.
scene. If you are raytracing a very large
picture, you probably only need low-quality Lighting – Lighting is an extremely
anti-aliasing. important tool for achieving high-quality
results. Work with the lighting of your scene
Bump Maps – Bump map calculation is
until you achieve something realistic.
time-consuming and should only be used as
necessary. Add 3D lights as necessary to capture the
effect you want. For lights that cast shadows
Soft Shadows – Soft shadow calculation is
into the scene, consider soft shadows that
time-consuming and should only be used as
smooth the appearance of the scene lighting.
necessary. Only enable soft shadows for
See “Added Lights” on page 774.
lights whose shadows are significant to the
scene you are raytracing. Finally, from the raytrace window, use the
File> Image Adjustment options to subtly
Raytrace Quality adjust the brightness of your finished
rendering. Don’t be afraid to over-saturate
It is not hard to create an image that looks your image slightly in very bright areas – this
reasonably realistic with raytracing, but is a common occurrence in actual
producing an image that really looks like a photographs.
photograph takes extra attention to detail.
Here are a few tips for achieving the most Interior Shots - If you are raytracing an
photo-realistic images possible: interior radiosity view where the primary
793
source of light is the sun through a window the impression that the scene is actually a
or door, you probably need to adjust your photograph. A tile floor that shades
image brightness using File> Image appropriately to the lighting in the room, for
Adjustment in the raytrace window. You example, lends to an appearance of realism.
may also need to use Medium radiosity
Emissive Materials – A material with
quality to ensure that the raytracer models
emissive properties actually cast light into
the light bouncing through the window
the scene when Radiosity is used. This effect
accurately.
can be used to achieve the subtle variations
Bump Maps – Though the effect of bump- of light seen in the real world.
maps are usually very subtle, they do add to
POV-Ray
The Persistance of Vision Raytracer (POV- Exporting to POV-Ray Format
Ray) is a high-quality, yet entirely free
raytracer. The POV-Ray raytracer has been Note: You do not need to export a POV-Ray
used for over ten years to generate images of scene in order to raytrace in Chief Architect.
virtually anything imaginable. POV-Ray has
even been used on the space shuttle! To use a Chief Architect scene in the POV-
Ray raytracer, you can export your scene to
Chief Architect uses POV-Ray to generate
POV-Ray format (.pov) file. You must be in
raytraced images. It communicates with and
a render view to export to POV-Ray format.
manages POV-Ray directly, so you do not
From the render view go to File> Export
need to understand POV-Ray to create high-
quality, raytraced images from within Chief , and choose POV-Ray (.POV) from the
Architect. list of file types.
Hobbyist raytracers or those interested in the When exporting to a POV-Ray file, you have
highest possible visual quality may want to the option of including all the images that are
learn about POV-Ray to take advantage of used in the scene. This makes a copy of the
the complete flexibility that it provides. For necessary textures and images into the same
more information on POV-Ray, or to directory as the destination for your POV-
download the latest version, please visit the Ray export.
POV-Ray Web site at www.povray.org.
794
Chapter 30:
Dimensions
Dimensions
Chapter Overview
Video: Dimensions
Chief Architect provides many dimensioning Chapter Contents
tools. In addition, dimension lines can be • Compatibility With Previous Versions
selected, edited, and customized. Extension • Dimension Defaults
lines can also be customized using the mouse • The Dimension Tools
or opened for specification. • Displaying Dimension Lines
• Editing Dimension Lines
You can accurately position objects relative • Editing Extension Lines
to other objects using the dimensions that • Moving Objects Using Dimensions
locate them. • Dimension Line Specification Dialog
• Dimension Defaults Dialog
795
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimensions function differently in Versions Dimensioning the same object in different
9.0 and later of Chief Architect than they did ways obtains the same results as long as
in previous versions. Being familiar with objects are placed with the same accuracy as
these changes is necessary if you plan to the precision of the dimension lines. If an
open plans from earlier versions. object is placed using more precision than
the dimensions, results will vary between
The Chief Version 8 Compatible Accuracy
methods.
option in the Dimension Defaults dialog
controls how Chief Architect handles An example is a 36 1/16” window centered
dimensions in legacy plans. This option is on a 20' wall.
checked by default for plans created in .
earlier versions, and affects your available
options. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog”
on page 809.
In Version 8, extension lines had two modes: Results with 16ths checked
in dimension defaults
normal and short. Version 9 and later offer
full control over extension lines. If Chief
Version 8 Compatible Extensions is
checked, you do not have this control. See
“Extensions Tab” on page 815.
Results with 16ths unchecked
in dimension defaults
Accuracy
Chief Architect uses a different method for
rounding dimensions than in prior versions. A good approach to accurate dimen-
Prior versions showed the distance between sioning is to turn on the accuracy indi-
equally spaced objects correctly, but cators and position objects so that the
inaccuracy indicators do not display. See
dimension runs weren’t always accurate
“Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 809.
when added. In Versions 9 and later,
dimension runs always add up correctly.
Dimension Defaults
Introductory Training Video: Dimen- double-clicking the Dimension Tools
sion Defaults parent button or any of its child buttons
Dimension Defaults can be accessed by (except Auto Exterior Dimensions ).
selecting Edit> Default Settings or by
796
The Dimension Tools
The settings in the Dimension Defaults section/elevation views and a third affecting
dialog define the behavior and appearance of CAD Details. Each dialog can be accessed
dimensions. See “Dimension Defaults by opening the Dimension Defaults
Dialog” on page 809. dialog when that view type is active.
In each plan file, there are three different Dimensions can be drawn at the Allowed
Dimension Defaults dialogs: one that Angles set in the Plan Defaults dialog. See
affects floor plan view, one affecting cross “Plan Defaults” on page 180.
The Dimension Tools

Introductory Training Video: Dimen- in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
Dimensions
sion Tools “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 809.
Select CAD> Dimension to access the Each manual dimension line can be edited
Dimension tools. individually. See “Editing Dimension Lines”
on page 801.
With the exception of Angular Dimensions
, dimension lines only locate objects that
are parallel or nearly parallel to one another The wall is 40” from where
and should be drawn orthogonal, or at right the dimension was created.
angles, to the objects being located. Drag manual This is too far so the dimen
dimension sion cannot reach the wall.
When Angle Snaps are enabled,
dimension lines can be drawn at Allowed The sink is within
Angles as specified in the Plan Defaults reach so is located
dialog . See “Angle Snaps” on page 84.
Manual Dimensions
Video: Using the Manual Dimension
Tools End-to-End Dimensions
To display the distance between two Use the End-to-End Dimension tool
objects, select CAD> Dimension> to dimension between any two defined
Manual Dimension and drag a dimension points or objects in floor plan view or in a
line near or through the objects. CAD Detail.
Manual Dimensions locate objects as Select CAD> Dimension> End-to-End

specified on the Locate Objects tab and lying Dimension , then drag the dimension
within the Manual Reach distance specified from the first object to the second object. The
797
dimension line snaps to each object, ignoring Angular dimensions can be selected and
any other objects located between either end. moved by dragging from a handle along the
arc in its middle. The dimension moves to
End-to-End Dimensions locate objects as
maintain the location of its own arc center. If
specified on the Locate Objects tab and lying
one of the dimensioned objects is moved, the
within the Manual Reach distance specified
angular dimension adjusts, but may have to
in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
be moved manually to a more visible
position.
Angular Dimensions
The Angular Dimension tool displays Interior Dimensions
the angle between any two straight
Select CAD> Dimension> Interior
edges, including lines, walls, the sides of
Dimension to create interior
boxes, the straight sides of polylines,
dimensions. Draw a dimension line through
cabinets, and soffits. Any straight line or side
walls, at right angles only, to create interior
within a CAD block can be dimensioned, as
dimensions in floor plan view.
well. Edges nested up to four levels deep
within a CAD block can be dimensioned.
The Interior Dimension tool locates
Click the first line, then drag and release on interior walls only. It does not dimension
the second. The line start and end points between surfaces in the same wall. Allowed
should be as close as possible to the objects. dimension angles match the allowed wall
Do not pull the angular dimension past the angles for each plan.
object as you might with a normal straight
Interior Dimension locates either the wall
dimension line.
surface or the main layer, depending on the
settings in the Locate Objects tab of the
Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Locate
Objects Tab” on page 812.
Point to Point Dimensions

The Point to Point Dimension tool
dimensions between any two locations.
As with a straight dimension line, an angular
If you click or release the mouse within 3” of
dimension selected with other CAD objects
an object using the Point to Point Dimen-
can be included in a new CAD block. When
the block is exploded the angular dimension sion tool, that object is located. If no
may become invalid and disappear when object can be found near the beginning or
edited or changed. If this occurs, the angular end of the dimension line, a point marker is
dimension can be redrawn. created. Point markers have no text and
display as a “+” at either end of the
dimension line. See “Markers” on page 823.
798
The Dimension Tools
The spacing between lines is the Line

Separation value, which is also used by
automatic dimensions. See “Dimension
Dimensions
Point markers can be selected and edited. See
“Editing Markers” on page 823.
Auto Exterior Dimensions
Introductory Training Video: Auto-
If the objects or point markers located by a
matic Exterior Dimensions
Point to Point Dimension line are
moved, the dimension updates to reflect the
Video: Creating Exterior Dimensions
change.
Automatically
Objects and point markers located by a Point
The Auto Exterior Dimension tool
to Point Dimension line can be generates dimensions around a plan’s
accurately relocated by specifying new exterior in floor plan view. The dimension
dimension values. See “Moving Objects lines locate walls and openings as specified
Using Dimensions” on page 804. in Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 809.
Baseline Dimensions
Auto Exterior Dimensions do not gen-
The Baseline Dimension tool creates a erate properly if there is a gap in the
series of dimensions that all share the exterior walls. For example, sometimes
same origin instead of continuing from each angled walls may not connect properly. If
previous location. Baseline Dimensions are automatic dimensions do not generate, try
independent and can be edited separately. Build> Wall> Fix Wall Connections .
Select CAD> Dimension> Baseline These dimensions can be edited individually,

Dimension , click near an object in a but all such editing is lost if Auto Exterior
floor plan or cross section/elevation view, Dimensions are created again.
and drag a dimension line near or through the
objects requiring dimensions. To save an automatic dimension line, convert
it to a manual dimension line by unchecking
Automatic in the Dimension Line
799
Specification dialog. See “Dimension temporary dimensions created when an

Line Specification Dialog” on page 807. object is selected. This toggle affects all
views and is saved between launches of
There are a maximum of three rows of
Chief Architect.
automatically generated dimensions per
exterior wall direction. The innermost As with other dimension lines, Temporary
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior Dimensions only locate objects that are
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The parallel or nearly parallel to one another. A
second dimension line locates exterior and temporary dimension will not display when
interior walls. The outermost dimension line an object is selected if a manually drawn
is the overall exterior dimension. dimension line locating the same object is
already present and is drawn parallel to the
Display Temporary temporary dimension that would be created.
Dimensions
You can control how temporary dimensions
Select CAD> Dimension> Display locate objects in the Dimension Defaults.
Temporary Dimensions or click the See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page
toggle button to turn on or off the display of 809.
Displaying Dimension Lines

Dimension Dimension
Video: Using the Manual Dimension Labels
Lines
Tools
Dimension lines can display in CAD details,
floor plan, cross section/elevation, and layout
views, all of which are considered 2D views. Extension
Arrowheads
Lines
The display of dimension lines is controlled
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Dimension lines created by any of the
dimension tools share the same components.
Dimension Lines run parallel with the
distance being measured.
Extension Lines are perpendicular to
dimension lines, indicating where they begin
and end.
800
Editing Dimension Lines
Arrowheads display at the intersections of You can select the text and drag it away from
dimension and extension lines. the dimension line using the move handle.
Dimension Labels display at the midpoint of You can customize the display of dimension
dimension lines and indicate the distance of lines by placing them on different layers. See
the dimension line. “Dimension Tab” on page 807.
Editing Dimension Lines

Video: Editing Dimensions and their Rotate
Extensions
Dimensions
Extension Line
Dimension lines can be selected and edited
using the mouse, the edit toolbar buttons, or
the Dimension Line Specification Move Dimension
Label
dialog. See “Dimension Line Specification
Dialog” on page 807. Move
Dimension line numbers and extension lines
can be moved and deleted individually and Add Extension
new extension lines can be added. Line
Extension Line
Edit Handles
Select a dimension line to display several • The Extension Line handles are used to
edit handles, each of which edits the line in a move or delete extension lines. See
different way. There are four types of “Moving Extension Lines” on page 803.
dimension line edit handles. More than one • The Add Extension Line handle displays
of some types display, depending on how to the side of the Move handle and is used
many extension lines are present. to add extension lines to the dimension
line. Dimension lines do not extend
unless an object can be located. See
“Adding Extension Lines” on page 802.
• The small, square Move Dimension
Label handle is located at the center of
the selected label. Use this handle to
move the dimension number for each
dimension line section. The pointer
changes to a four-headed arrow when
moved over this handle.
801
• The Move handle is located where you objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
clicked to select the dimension line and is page 95.
used to move the entire dimension line,
including any subsections, perpendicular Edit Dimension Ends is useful for
to itself. Extension lines are resized as locating a point on an object that it might not
appropriate. The pointer changes to a locate otherwise, such as the corner of a
two-headed arrow when moved over polyline.
this handle.
• The Rotate handle is located one plan
foot past the end of the dimension line
and is used to rotate the dimension line.
As you rotate, the dimension snaps to
objects within reach.
Edit Buttons
Dimension lines can be repositioned and
copied using the edit toolbar buttons much
the way other objects in the program are. See
Dimension lines like these require
and “Editing Objects” on page 79. edited dimension ends.
Click the Edit Dimension Ends edit
Click the Edit Extensions edit button
button to edit the dimension line using
to edit the length of the selected
edit handles similar to those on line based
dimension’s extension lines. See “Editing
Extension Lines” on page 802.
Editing Extension Lines

Extension lines can be added, edited, and 2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Exten-
deleted using the mouse. Extension lines are sion Line edit handle. The pointer
also affected by the settings on the Extension changes to a double-headed arrow .
tab of the Dimension Line
3. Drag the handle to the object that you
Specification dialog. See “Extension Tab”
want to a new extension handle to
on page 808.
locate. This example adds an extension
line to the window edge.
Adding Extension Lines
To add an extension line
1. Select the dimension line.
802
Editing Extension Lines
4. Release the mouse button to add an 3. Drag the handle to a new location. The
extension line. extension line snaps to possible marks as
the handle is moved.
Dimensions
4. Release the mouse button at the new
location.
Moving Extension Lines

Extension lines can be moved to locate the
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In
this example an extension line is moved from Dimension lines do not locate library
the windows edge to the center. objects when the dimension is drawn,
but an extension line of an existing dimension
To move an extension line line can be moved or added to locate a library
object.
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
to, not the extension line itself. Resizing Extension Lines
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
The pointer changes to a two-headed 1. Select the extension line or select the
dimension line and click the Edit
arrow .
Extensions edit button to display
two handles along the extension line.
803
To remove an extension line
1. Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
2. Click either handle, turning the pointer

into a two-headed arrow .
3. Extend or contract the extension line and
release the mouse.
Deleting Extension Lines

When an extension line is deleted, the
remaining dimensions update. 3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of
the arrows, away from any dimension-
able object, and release the button when
the extension line disappears.
Moving Objects Using Dimensions

Classroom Design Project Training are the dimensions that can be used to move
Video: Positioning Walls Precisely that object.
Using Dimensions
To move an object using dimensions
Most objects can be moved by changing an
automatic, manual or temporary dimension
1. Select the object and click on a dimen-
value that locates it. This technique can be
sion line that locates it.
applied in nearly any situation where
dimensions are present, including angular 2. The Move Object Using
dimensions. Dimension dialog shows the Previous
Displayed Distance as it appears in the
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can current view, as well as the Actual Dis-
be used to relocate the selected object by tance in units specified in the Number
changing to a pointing hand icon. Another Style/Angle Style dialog. See “Num-
way to tell is to select an object and drag it in ber Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page
the desired direction. As you drag, note 873.
which dimensions update. These dimensions
804
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a

time in succession so that you do not redefine
the same dimension more than once.
Resizing exterior dimensions may be

easier after windows, doors and interior
walls have been placed.
1. Sketch the general shape of the house

using Build> Wall> Straight Exterior
Wall . Generate exterior dimensions
3. Enter a value in the New Distance field. using CAD> Dimensions> Auto Exte-
Values followed by an apostrophe (sin-
Dimensions
rior Dimension .
gle prime) are in feet. Values followed
by quotes (double prime) are in inches.
Lone values are in inches.
4. Some objects can be selected by a par-
ticular edge. Select Move edge to move
the selected edge only or select Move
entire object to move the entire object.
5. The selected object or edge moves when
you click OK.
6. If Bumping/Pushing is enabled, the

object being moved will bump into any
objects in its move path and not move
the entire distance. Hold down the Ctrl
key when you press OK to override this 2. Select a wall, click a related dimension,
move restriction. See “Bumping/Push- enter a new value, and click OK.
ing” on page 124.
If the Move Object Using Dimension

dialog is appearing when you are trying
to edit another object using edit handles, hold
down the Shift key to prevent the dimension
line from being clicked.
Resizing a House Using

Exterior Dimensions
When resizing a house using dimensions, it
is important to work your way around the
805
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, adjusting each wall

sequentially as you work your way
around the house in one direction.
Using Angular Dimensions
Angular Dimensions are useful for

adjusting the angles of CAD lines and walls.
To change an angular dimension
1. Draw the angular dimension line, begin-

ning and ending the line on the objects
you want to move.
3. Select CAD> Dimension> Automatic 2. Select the edge that you want to move.
Exterior Dimension again.
3. Click the dimension value to open the

Set Angular Dimension dialog.
806
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
The Set Angular Dimension dialog indi- Rotate entire polyline to rotate the
cates the Previous Value in degrees, minutes entire object the selected edge is a part
and seconds. of, maintaining the previous value of the
angle.
4. Enter a value in the New Value field.
Dimensions
5. Select Rotate Edge to move the selected
edge when you click OK, or select 6. Click OK to apply the change.
Dimension Line Specification Dialog

To open the Dimension Line dimension line or group of dimension lines
Specification dialog, double-click a
dimension line using the Select Objects
or Manual Dimension tool, or select a
Dimension Tab
1
2
3
4
807
1 Number Height - Define a new dimension line that stretch between two
number height for the selected surfaces of the same wall. It still locates both
dimension. Type “d” in the box to reset the sides of the interior walls but not the wall
number size to the default. thickness.
2 Inches Only - Check this box to change 4 Automatic - Check this box to change
from feet and inches to inches only. a manual dimension line to an
Uncheck it to show that dimension in feet automatic dimension line or vice versa. An
and inches. This is only available in plans automatically produced dimension line that
using Imperial units. is changed to a manual one is not deleted
when automatic dimensions are produced
3 External Only - Check this box to again.
suppress those portions of the
Extension Tab
1 7
2
3
4 8
5
6
The Extension Tab is not available for of the selected dimension line is being
dimensions selected as a group or for specified. The numbers for each extension
Angular Dimensions . line display above the dimension line in floor
plan view when it is selected.
Note: The settings in this dialog have no
affect on the selected Dimension Line if the 2 Gap From Marked Object - Specify a
fixed gap between the marked object
option Version 8 Compatible Extensions is
and the end of the extension line. If the
checked in the Dimension Defaults dia-
log. See “Extensions Tab” on page 815.
dimension line is moved, the extension line
updates and the gap is maintained.
1 Selected Extension - Click the drop 3 Length Towards Marked Object -

down list to select which extension line Specify a fixed length for the portion of
808
Dimension Defaults Dialog
the extension line that points toward the

7 Use Plan Default - Check this if you
marked object. want to use the Plan Default settings for
the current extension lines. See “Dimension
4 Length Away From Marked Object - Defaults Dialog” on page 809.
Specify a fixed length for the portion of
the extension line that points away from the
8 Apply to All - Click this box to apply
marked object. the settings on this tab to all extension
lines on the selected dimension line.
5 Proximity Fixed - Check this box to
specify a fixed distance between the
marked object and the dimension line. This Layer Tab
has no effect when the mark is at the For information about the Layer tab, see
arrowhead. “Layer Tab” on page 223.
Dimensions
You can only fix the proximity for a single
extension line. Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow Tab, see
6 Distance to Marked Object - Displays “Arrow Tab” on page 854.
the distance from the dimension line to
the marked object.

Control how you use dimensions and their setting in your default template file for use in
appearance in the Dimension Defaults future plans. See “Template Files” on page
dialog. 167.
Select Edit> Default Settings... , select

Dimension, and click Edit..., or double-click
the Dimension Tools button to access the
Dimension Defaults dialog.
There are three different Dimension

Defaults dialogs in each plan file: one
that affects floor plan view, one affecting
cross section/elevation views and a third
affecting CAD Details. Layout also has its
own Dimension Defaults dialog. Each dialog
can be accessed by opening the Dimension
Defaults dialog from within that view type.
The settings in this dialog are saved with the

plan. It is recommended that you save your
809
Setup Tab - Left Side

Imperial Plans Metric Plans
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Eighth Inches/Millimeters - Check to appear: 7’ 1/2; if 0” is checked, the same

display dimensions in abbreviated value appears as: 7’- 0 1/2”.
eighths or millimeters. For instance, 5’ 3-1/
2” appaears as 5’3” 4, with the 4 3 Decimal Inches/Centimeters/mm -
Check this box to display inches in
representing 4/8”, which is equal to 1/2”. A
decimal format. For example 3 feet 1 1/2
dimension that does not have an exact
inches is represented as 3’ 1.5”.
equivalent in eighths is rounded up to the
nearest eighth (i.e. 7’ 6-3/16” would round to
4 Decimal Feet/Meters - Check to
7’6”2). display feet or meters in decimal
format. For example 5 feet 2 1/2 inches is
2 1/16 Inches/Centimeters - Check to represented as 5.208 feet.
display dimensions in fraction format,
or centimeters. This is the more precise of
5 Number Above Line - Check to have
the two options. all the dimensions display above the
dimension line, rather than in the center of
0” - Check to supply a zero after the decimal,
the line.
even if there is no fractional part. This
displays whole numbers of inches even if it is
6 Add Zeros - Check to display zeros out
zero, and places a dash between feet and to 3 decimal places. For example,
inches. If 1/16th Inches is also checked, the 314.500 instead of 314.5.
double quote (“) always displays after the
dimension. 7 Check Imperial and/or Metric to
define the units that are used for
For example, if 1/16 Inches is checked but 0” showing dimensions. Although Imperial
is not checked, the following dimensions plans always use the Imperial dimensions,
810
dimensions may be changed to display in

9 Use +, or - After Number - Check this
metric only or in both metric and Imperial box to indicate that the actual
units simultaneously. These options are not dimension value is higher or lower than the
available in metric plans. value shown.
8 Use ~ Before Number - Check this box

to indicate dimension values that are
not accurate with the ~ symbol.
Setup Tab - Right Side
Imperial Plans Metric Plans
Dimensions
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
10 Number Height - Specify the scaled 12 Moving Speed - (Allowed values 1-10)
height, in inches or mm, of dimension Defines how slowly a selected edit
numbers. A Number Height of 6 print a 1/8” handle moves when dragged using the
tall number at 1/4” = 1’ scale. mouse. Ten is the slowest speed, allowing the
greatest accuracy when objects are moved,
11 Min. Number Size - Specify the resized or reshaped.
minimum screen size in pixels for
dimension numbers. The screen dimensions
13 Automatic Reach - Specify how far
are no smaller than this value. This does not automatic dimension lines “reach” to
affect printed or exported output. To see the locate objects along exterior walls that are set
dimension numbers on the screen at the back. The default is 192 inches or 4800 mm.
printing scale, set this value to 0. Changing If exterior walls are set back farther than this,
this value affects all dimensions an additional set of dimension lines is
immediately. produced to dimension the set back walls.
811
14 Manual Reach - Specify how far tool locate doors and windows
manually drawn dimension lines
automatically. If the check is removed,
“reach” to locate walls and/or objects
openings may still be located using the
specified in the Locate Items tab. The
default is 24 inches or 450 mm. Manual Dimension tool.
15 1st Line Offset - Specify the distance 19 Check Auto next to Overall
between the exterior wall and the Dimension to have the Auto Exterior
nearest automatic dimension line in scale Dimensions tool locate the overall
inches or mm. exterior dimensions.
16 Line Separation - Specify the distance 20 New Lines Inches Only - Check to
between automatic and baseline have all subsequently created manual
dimension lines in scale inches or mm . dimensions show inches only (37” instead of
3’-1”). This does not affect existing
17 Min. Dimen Area - Specify the dimensions. Uncheck this box to return to
minimum enclosed area needed for the
drawing manual dimensions using feet and
Auto Exterior Dimensions tool to
inches. Imperial plans only.
generate dimensions.
21 Chief Version 8 Compatible
18 Check Auto next to Locate Opening to Accuracy - See “Compatibility With
have the Auto Exterior Dimensions
Previous Versions” on page 796.
Locate Objects Tab

The Locate Objects tab specifies whether or new dimension lines, not those already
not dimension lines locate specific types of drawn.
objects. Changes made in this box affect only
812
1 9
2
3
4
5
10
6
7
8
Dimensions
Walls - These options affect Auto Exterior The surface dimensioned is either the outside
surface or the main layer surface, depending
Dimensions , Manual Dimensions ,
on the option selected above.
and Temporary Dimensions .
5 Check Internal Only for dimensions to
1 Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls ignore the interior surface of exterior
by outer surface and interior walls by walls. They still locate both surfaces of an
one of their surfaces. interior wall, but do not display the wall
thickness. Internal Only is only available
2 Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate when Both Wall Surfaces is checked.
exterior walls by the outer surface of
the main layer and interior walls by a main
layer surface. The Wall Dimension Layer is
specified in the Wall Type Definitions
dialog. See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog”
on page 251 Both Wall Surfaces
3 Check Interior Wall Centers to have

dimension lines locate the centers of
interior walls. Exterior walls are
dimensioned by the option selected above.
4 Check Both Wall Surfaces to have Both Wall Surfaces & Internal only
dimension lines locate both surfaces of
walls. Wall thickness is also dimensioned.
813
Cabinets - This section affects only manual both the automatic and manual dimension
dimensions. tools.
6 Sides - Check to locate cabinet sides Centers - Check to locate dimensions to the
using manual dimensions. The sides center of windows and doors.
must be perpendicular to the dimension line.
Sides - Check to locate both sides of
7 Corners - Check to locate the corners windows and doors. This does not dimension
of all cabinets within the manual reach the rough opening. It dimensions to the
area. Angled cabinets are dimensioned to window or door nominal width.
their corners at a right angle to the dimension
Casing - Check to locate both sides of
line. The cabinet fronts or sides do not need
windows and doors at the edge of the casing.
to be perpendicular or parallel to the
Because casing can have different widths on
dimension line.
each side of an exterior wall, an opening may
show different widths depending on which of
its sides the dimension line is drawn.
Rough Opening - Check to locate both sides
of windows and doors at the rough opening.
When editing dimension lines and moving
their marks, this must be checked in order to
place a mark at the rough opening. Otherwise
a mark can be placed at the opening side or
the casing edge, but not at the rough opening.
Note: If neither box is checked, Automatic

dimensions default to locating the centers of
openings. Manually drawn dimensions do not
locate openings at all.
10 CAD Objects - This section affects

8 Other Objects- Check Electrical to only manual dimensions of 2D objects.
locate electrical objects. Use this option
when you want to precisely position Line/Sides - Check this box to locate lines
electrical objects. and edges that are perpendicular to the
dimension line. If the lines or edges are not
Check Plants and Images to locate these perpendicular to the dimension line, they are
items. not dimensioned.
9 Openings - Check one of four options Ends/Corners - Check to box locate all ends
to determine both the default program of lines or corners of polylines, no matter
and manual override behaviors when what angle they are in relation to the
dimensioning openings. This section affects dimension line.
Text - Check to locate text objects.
814
Extensions Tab
1
2
3
4
Dimensions
6
1 Gap From Marked Object - Specify You can only fix the proximity for a single
the distance between the marked object extension line.
and the end of the extension line in plan
Automatic Dimensions ignore the fixed
inches or mm. If the dimension line is
proximity default and use the default spacing
moved, the extension line updates, and the
values. If you select Proximity Fixed as
size of this gap is maintained.
your default, Automatic Dimensions set the
2 Length Towards Marked Object - closest mark as fixed proximity.
Specify the length for the portion of the
extension line that points toward the marked 5 Chief Version 8 Compatible
Extensions - Check this box for
object in plan inches or mm.
extensions to function as they did in Version
3 Length Away From Marked Object - 8. See “Compatibility With Previous
Specify the length for the portion of the Versions” on page 796.
extension line that points away from the
marked object in plan inches or mm. 56 Short Extensions - Check this box to
have short, uniform-length extension
4 Proximity Fixed - Check this box to lines created instead of the extension lines
specify a fixed proximity between the reaching the object it locates.
marked object and the dimension line. This
has no effect when the mark is at the
arrowhead.
815
Font tab
1 Layer - Specify and define the Arrow Tab

properties of the layer dimensions are
placed on. See “Layer Tab” on page 223. For information about the Arrow tab, “Arrow
Tab” on page 854.
2 Font - Specify the font and font style
used for dimensions. For more
information , see “Text Tab” on page 831.
816
Chapter 31:
Text, Callouts
and Markers
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Text and Chapter Contents
Callouts • Text Defaults and Preferences
Text
Classroom Design Project Training • Fonts
Video: Creating Text and Callouts • The Text Tools
• Creating Text
What’s New In Version X1 Training • Text Arrows
Video: Text, Callouts and Markers • Callouts
Text, callouts and markers are an ideal way • Editing Callouts
to draw attention to special details in plans. • Markers
Text can be added in floor plan and cross • Editing Markers
section/elevation view, and to layout pages. • Displaying Text, Callouts and Markers
• Editing Text
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text • Text Macros
objects, allowing you to direct attention to • Spell Check
specific plan details. • Text Specification Dialog
The display of text can be controlled by layer • Callout Specification Dialog
or set specifically for each text object. • Marker Specification Dialog
• Text Defaults
• Callout and Marker Defaults
• Room Label Defaults
• Arrow Defaults
• Designer Information Dialog
• Client Information Dialog
817
Text Defaults and Preferences

Default settings can be accessed by Room Label Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings....
See “Text Defaults” on page 838. Specify the default appearance of room
labels in the Room Label Defaults
dialog. See “Room Label Defaults” on page
Text Defaults
838.
Double-click the Text or Leader Line
Arrow Defaults
tool to open the Text Defaults dialog
and specify the default appearance of text Double-click the Text Line with Arrow
objects. See “Text Defaults” on page 838. tool to open the Arrow Defaults dialog
and specify the default appearance of Lines
Callout Defaults
with Arrow , Leader Lines , and
Double-click the Callout tool to open the Text Lines with Arrow . See “Text
Callout Defaults dialog and specify the Defaults” on page 838.
default appearance of callouts. See “Callout
Specification Dialog” on page 834. Preferences
Specify whether pressing the Enter key
Marker Defaults
creates a new line of text or closes the Text
Specification dialog, and the number of
Double-click the Marker tool to open
the Marker Defaults dialog and specify segments for new leader lines in the
Preferences dialog. See “Text & Page
the default appearance of markers. See
“Marker Specification Dialog” on page 837. Setup Panel” on page 189.
Fonts
Chief Architect allows you to use any font installed in the Windows Fonts directory
found in your Windows Fonts directory. when Chief Architect is installed.
Multiple fonts can be used within the same
file. Only one font can be defined for each
text object, but each text object can use a
different font.
Blueprint Fonts
Three architectural fonts: Blueprindbt, City
Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are
818
The Text Tools
The Text Tools

Select CAD> Text to display the Text The Leader Line tool places a text
Tools. object with an arrow attached. See
“Leader Line” on page 819.
The Text tool is used to create text
objects. The Callout is used to place callouts.
See “Callouts” on page 821.
Text Line with Arrow is used to draw
a line to with an arrow. See “Text Select CAD> Text> Marker and click
Arrows” on page 819. in a plan or layout to place a marker.
See “Markers” on page 823.
Creating Text
Text can be created in floor plan view, Specification dialog opens. See “Text
CAD details, cross/section elevation Specification Dialog” on page 830.
views, and in layout files. 3. Enter text and click OK.
To create text 4. To edit text, select it and use the edit
Text
handles that display. See “Editing Text”
on page 824.
1. Select CAD> Text> Text .
Up to 32,000 characters can be inserted in
2. Click where you want the upper left cor- one text object. It is usually better to use
ner of the text to display. The Text several smaller text objects when a lot of text
must be inserted.
Text Arrows
Lines with arrows can be independent or To create text with a leader line
attached to other objects. If an arrow is
attached to text or another object, deleting
1. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line .
that object will also delete the arrow.
2. Starting at the point where you want the
Leader Line arrow to point, drag to where you want a
bend in the leader line and release the
The Leader Line tool places a text mouse button.
object with an arrow already attached.
3. Click at the point where you want the
This arrow can be selected and moved like
center of the first line of text to display.
any other line with arrow.
The Text Specification dialog opens.
819
See “Text Specification Dialog” on page Check these if you want the text line with
830. arrow to update its position on the text object
4. Enter text and click OK. if the text object or text line with arrow is
moved.
Click in the same location to create a text
• The first segment of a polyline arrow
items without a lader.
attached to text maintains its angle when
For multiple leaders, click int he same Auto Position is off and text is moved.
location to stop adding leader segments. • Auto Position is turned off automatically
when an arrow is not attached to one of
Note: Leader lines have two segments by
the auto position locations.
default. You can change this in the Prefer-
ences dialog. See “Text & Page Setup Panel” • Arcs and splines with arrows can also be
on page 189. attached to text objects.
The following image illustrates the behavior
Text Line with Arrow
of auto positioning. The arrow has the Auto
Text Lines with Arrow can be Position Tail option checked. When the head
attached to text, CAD and architectural of the line with arrow is moved, the tail of
objects by selecting CAD> Text> Text Line the arrow snaps to different locations on the
text object, maintaining its connection.
with Arrow . There is no limit to the
number of text lines with arrow that can be
attached to an object.
A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a

Line With Arrow with one exception.
Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on
the default Text layer, not the default CAD
layer. See “Line With Arrow” on page 849.
Auto Positioning Arrows

If either or both ends of a line with arrow are Special Use Arrows
attached to a text object, Auto Position Tail A text line with arrow designated as a special
and Auto Position Head are available on the use arrow offers unique functionality that
Arrow Tab of the Line Specification may be useful when annotating the height of
dialog. various platforms. A special use arrow
replaces the first number in the attached text
object with the height of the architectural
object it is attached to on the other end. The
height is relative to the first floor elevation of
0’-0”.
820
Callouts
To create a Special Use Arrow
1. Create a text object that includes a num-

ber such as, Foundation Wall Height 1.
2. Using the Leader Line tool, draw

an arrow that connects the text object
with a stem wall, footing, slab,
foundation slab, custom countertop, or
stair landing.
3. Select and open the arrow for specifica-
tion, check Special Use on the Arrow
tab, and click OK.
4. The text object should now read Foun-
dation Wall Height 3' 0".
Text
Callouts
Select CAD> Text> Callout, then Cross section lines can be added to any
click at the location where you want a shape. Move or stretch the cross section line
callout to be placed in floor plan view, a by dragging the triangular edit handle near
cross section/elevation view or in a CAD the end of the cross section line.
Detail. The Callout Specification dialog
Delete a cross section line by dragging the
displays. Make any needed changes and click
triangular handle to the center of the callout,
OK to place a callout. See “Callout
or by clearing the Cross Section Line check
box in the Callout Specification dialog.
Cross Section Lines Pointers and Arrows
Select the Cross Section Line check box in
Callouts can have arrows and/or pointers
the Callout Specification dialog to add a
added.
cross section line perpendicular to the nearest
wall. See “Callout Tab” on page 835.
With With
Pointer Arrow
821
To add a pointer to a callout, select the • Remove a pointer by selecting the

callout and drag the diamond-shaped handle. Callout and dragging the pointer’s handle
A pointer is created. into the center of the callout.
• If there is a cross section line, only one You can also add as many arrows as you like
pointer may be created. to callouts. To add an arrow to a callout,
• Change the pointer’s direction by select- select CAD> Text> Text Line with Arrow
ing the callout and dragging the edit han- , then click and drag to create a line with
dle appearing just beyond the pointer. arrow, which can be moved or resized as
needed.
Editing Callouts
Callouts can be edited using the edit handles, • The small, square Resize handle is
the edit toolbar buttons and the Callout located on the edge of the callout and is
Specification dialog. See “Callout used to resize it and its associated text.
Specification Dialog” on page 834. • The Add pointer handle is used to add
When a callout is selected, it has at least four pointers by dragging away from the call-
edit handles. An additional rotate handle out
displays for each pointer added to the callout. • The small triangular Rotate pointer han-
dle located at the end of a pointer, if one
Rotate Move Extend/ has been added, is used to rotate that
pointer Rotate pointer.
Resizing Callouts
To change the size of a callout’s text, change
the Character Height in the Callout
Specification dialog. The Callout adjusts
to fit the text. See “Attributes Tab” on page
Add pointer Resize
836.
• The Move handle is located at the center
Adding more text to either the top or bottom
of the callout and is used to move it.
area enlarges the Callout size as well, unless
• The triangular Extend/Rotate handle is Specify Callout Size is checked.
used to extend and/or rotate the callout’s
cross section line, if one exists. See Callout size can be adjusted without
“Cross Section Lines” on page 821. independent of its text by checking Specify
Callout Size in the Callout Specification
dialog. See “Callout Tab” on page 835.
822
Markers
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test Borings You can also place a framing reference
and Point Markers can be placed in marker using Build> Framing> Framing
floor plan view, cross sections, or CAD Reference . See “Framing Reference
Details. Framing Reference Markers Markers” on page 486.
should only be placed in floor plan views.
In addition, a Point Marker is placed using
To create a marker, select CAD> Text>
the Point to Point Dimension tool if an
Marker and click at the location where existing object is not available to snap to. See
you want it to be placed. The Marker “Point to Point Dimensions” on page 798.
Specification dialog opens. See “Marker
Editing Markers
Markers can be edited using the edit handles, • The Move handle is located at the center
edit toolbar and Marker Specification of the marker and is used to move it.
dialog. See “Marker Specification Dialog” • The Resize handle is located on the edge
Text
on page 837. of the marker and is used to resize the
When a marker is selected, it has four edit marker and associated text.
handles. • The triangular Rotate handle is used to
rotate the marker and associated text.
Move Extend
• The Extend handle is used to adjust the
distance between the marker and its asso-
ciated text.
Resize Rotate
Displaying Text, Callouts and Markers

Text can be used in CAD details, floor plan 221. By default, text objects are located on
view, cross section/elevation views, and in the Text layer.
layout. The display of text objects is
The display attributes can be controlled for
individual text objects, independent of the
dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
823
layer that contains it. See “Text Specification text and other objects. See “Layer Sets” on
Dialog” on page 830. page 216.
To move text to a different layer, select the
Custom Text Layers text object or group of text objects, then click
Text objects do not need to be shown at all the Open Object edit button to open the
times. For instance, electrical notes should be Text Specification dialog. The layer
included with the electrical plan, but not with containing the selected text object can be
the framing plan. You can create custom changed on the Line Style tab. See “Line
layers and layer sets to control the display of Style Tab” on page 851.
Editing Text
Text can be edited using the edit handles, the • If Fillet editing is selecting, the cor-
edit toolbar buttons, and the Text ners become rounded and the font size
Specification dialog. See “Text Specifica-
does not change. See “Behaviors Panel”
tion Dialog” on page 830. on page 202.
Edit Handles When resizing text, there is a snap X

that occurs at the natural size of the
A selected text object has the same edit text. To override this behavior, hold down the
handles as a CAD box. See “Editing Box- Ctrl key while resizing.
As a text box is made narrower or wider Sizing Text
using an Extend edit handle, the bottom of
Text size can be set on the Text tab of the
the text box may expand or contract to allow
Text Specification dialog.
all text to be shown.
Depending on the active Edit Behavior ,

the text box and the characters within it may
or may not resize together when a corner edit
handle is dragged.
This value is subject to the current drawing
• If Resize editing is enabled, both the scale, derived from the Page Setup dialog.
text object and the font resizes when a See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 963.
corner edit handle is dragged.
Text can be sized in two different ways:
• If Default or Concentric editing • Chief Architect uses a font sizing method
is enabled, the text box resizes, but not that specifies text size as the measure-
the font size. ment from the baseline to the topmost
part of the capital letter A. This method is
824
Editing Text
similar to that used in most CAD pro-

grams. Note: An uppercase "A" is used to calibrate
the size of printed text. If the desired print
• The Legacy Compatible Size uses a size is one inch, a CAD box of 1" height
method similar to most word processing should match the height of a capital A,
applications, where size is based on assuming margins have been turned off. This
information stored in the font. This infor- rule does not apply to Legacy Plans
mation varies from font to font and is
responsible for apparent differences in Aligning Text
font height.
To align text, select it and click the Align
To determine the Height needed to produce
Left , Align Right , Center , or
text of a certain printed size, click the Scale
button to open the Printed Size Input Justify edit button.
dialog.
Using these edit buttons to align text is the
same as using the Alignment drop down box
on the Attributes Tab of the Text
Specification dialog. See “Attributes Tab”
on page 833.
Hold down the “C” key when resizing
Text
text to resize the text about its center.
The Make Parallel edit button can be

used to make text parallel with other objects.
To use the Printed Size Input dialog
Individual text objects can be aligned with
1. Click the Scale button on the Text tab of one another using settings in the Text
the Text Specification dialog to open Specification dialog. Group-select the text
the Printed Size Input dialog. objects and on the Attributes tab, set their
2. Enter the Desired Print Size of the text. Widths to the same value and enter an X
Position, which locates the center of the text
3. Click OK to return to the Text objects. When done, you can manually resize
Specification dialog. The Height the text boxes to their natural width. See
updates, reflecting the character height “Attributes Tab” on page 833.
necessary to print the text at the Desired
Print Size when printed at the specified A variety of other alignment methods are
Drawing Scale. also available. See “Aligning Objects” on
page 126.
In most cases, the Drawing Scale does not
need to be changed in the Printed Size
Copy, Cut and Paste
Input dialog unless you intend to send the
current view to layout at a different drawing Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of
scale. the Text Specification dialog uses the
825
Windows clipboard, making it possible to To insert tab-spaced text

transfer text from your plan into other
applications or to copy text from any 1. Highlight a block of text objects from
program in Windows into Chief Architect. the Material List and press Ctrl + C to
copy them to the Windows clipboard.
General notes can be created and saved in a
word processing program, then copied and 2. Return to the floor plan view, select the
pasted into a text box. Sections of the Text tool, and click to place a text
Materials List can also be copied and pasted object.
into a text box or a word processing or
spreadsheet program. 3. Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied mate-
rials into the text box, then click OK.
To Copy, Cut and Paste text The text object displays on-screen.
4. Select the text object and note the addi-
1. On the Text tab of the Text tional lines with handles separating each
Specification dialog or in another column.
program altogether, highlight the text
you wish to cut, copy or paste.
2. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text
and save it to the Windows clipboard
3. Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text
and copy it to the Windows clipboard.
Columns automatically resize to fit the
4. Click to place your cursor at the location contained text. When a text object is selected
where you want to paste the copied text you can use the edit handles that display at
and press Ctrl + V to paste it. each column to adjust spacing.
Tab Spacing
Tab spacing for tabbed text objects such as
tables can be visually edited.
Text Macros
Text macros insert dynamic information To insert a text macro
relevant to the current plan or layout file.
Macros are particularly useful in layouts; 1. Click the Insert button on the Text tab
page numbers, drawing scale, and of the Text Specification dialog.
information to identify drawings can be
inserted to improve organization and clarity.
826
Text Macros
Macro Description
%date.short Inserts a short version of the
date using system settings.
(10/25/04)
2. Select from the list of available text %date.long Inserts a long version of the
macros. In this example Short Date date using system settings
(%date.short) is selected. (Monday, Oct 25, 2004)
%file.drive The drive letter of the current
3. Click OK to return to the Text
file. (C:)
%file.name The name of the current file.
(myPlan)
%file.dir The directory path of the cur-
rent file. (\myplans\)
The formula
appears in the %file.ext The file type of the current file.
(.plan or .layout)
Text Entry
portion of the %file The full path name of the cur-
dialog rent file
(C:\myplans\myPlan.plan)
%page Page number of the current lay-
Text
out page.
%living.area Living area of the current plan.
4. Click OK to close the Text
%room.area Internal room area of the room
Specification dialog and place the
.internal that the center of the text is in.
text.
%room.area Standard room area of the room
.standard (at center of text).
%room.dim Dimensions of the room that the
ensions center of the text is in.
Drawing Macros %scale Current drawing scale. On
screen this varies based on the
Information related to the current state of a zoom factor. In printouts this
file such as the date, time of day and file shows the exact scale used for
information can be inserted into text objects printing.
using a selection of different formats. %sheet.size The size of the sheet.
%time.24 24 hour time.
Similarly, information specific to the position
%time AM/PM time.
of the text object, such as room area or page
number, can also be inserted. Registered User Macros
The following is a list of commonly used Information supplied by the Registered User
macros that you may find useful. You can macros, which begin with “Registered,”
find a complete list of available macros in the correspond to the information that was given
Text Specification dialog. when the current installation was registered
827
and cannot be modified without reinstalling Client Macros

and registering the program.
Information supplied by the Client macros,
which begin with “Client,” is specified in the
Designer Macros
Client Information dialog. This
Information supplied by the Designer macros information is file-specific and can be edited
can be specified in the Designer at any time. The client info for a plan file and
Information dialog. Information in this a layout file are seperate. See “Client
dialog is file-specific and can be edited at Information Dialog” on page 840.
any time. See “Designer Information Dialog”
on page 839. Character Macros
By default, this dialog is populated by Special text characters such as and can
information from the Default Designer be inserted into text in the same manner as
Information dialog. See “Text & Page
dynamic text macros.
Setup Panel” on page 189.
Spell Check
Select Tools> Checks> Spell Check to Specification dialog. See “Text
open the Check Spelling dialog. Specification Dialog” on page 830.
The Spell Check feature checks each text
When Spell Check is accessed through the
object in the current current .plan or .layout
Text Specification dialog, only the
file consecutively for spelling errors.
selected text object is checked for spelling
Spell Check can also be accessed by clicking errors.
the Spell Check button in the Text
828
Spell Check
Check Spelling Dialog
1
2 6
3
4
5
Click Options to open the Spelling

Note: Spell Check has its own Help system. Options dialog. Select options to specify
For complete documentation, click Help. how Spell Check functions.
Click Dictionaries to open the Spelling
1 Spell check looks in for each word in Dictionaries dialog. Additional
all open dictionaries. Any words not
Text
found display in this field. Type a correction dictionaries can be opened or closed by
in the field and click Change or select one of clicking the Add File or Remove File
the suggested corrections below. buttons. Click the New File... button to add a
new dictionary to the list.
2 Spell check makes Suggestions for Click Help to open the Spelling Checker
corrections and display them here.
Dialog help system for complete
3 If a word is not misspelled but is not documentation.
found in a dictionary, it can be added.
Click the drop-down File list to select which Click Cancel to close the Spell Check
dictionary the word is saved to. dialog without making any further changes.
Note: New words can be added to any dictio- 5 The selected text displays here.
nary file, but if Chief Architect is uninstalled 6 Click Ignore to ignore the word in
and reinstalled, only additions to the User question during the current spell check
Dictionary, userdic.tlx, are retained. Words session. Running spell check again does not
added to other dictionary files are not saved. ignore the same word.
Click Ignore All to ignore the word in
4 Click Undo to reverse the previous question every time spell check is run.
spell check operation.
Click Add to add the word in question to the
dictionary.
829
Click Change to replace the word in When Spell Check is finished checking the
question with the suggested word that is text object or file for errors, the Spell Check
currently highlighted. results window displays.
Click Change All to replace all instances of
the word in question with the suggested word
that is currently highlighted.
Click Suggest to initiate a deeper search for
suggested corrections. Once all possible
suggestions have been made, the button is
disabled.
Text Specification Dialog

Select one or more text objects, then click the When text objects are group-selected, the
Open Object edit button to open the textual content cannot be changed, but
Text Specification dialog.
everything else (character height, color,
transparent background, etc.) can be.
830
Text Tab
1 4
2
3 5
6
Text
1 Specify the Text Size. The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and
Strikeout are available. Check any of the
Enter the Character Height. This
boxes to apply that style.
height is subject to the current drawing scale.
Click the Scale button to open the Printed 3 Click Insert to choose from a list of
special characters and text macros. See
Size Input dialog.
“Text Macros” on page 826.
In Version 9, text size was driven by
dimension information associated with the 4 Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the
selected text when the Rotate View
current font. Check Version 9 Compatible
command is invoked. If unchecked, the
Size to use this information for text sizing.
selected text maintains its position on screen
See “Sizing Text” on page 824.
when the Rotate View command is invoked.
2 Click the drop-down list to select a See “Rotate View” on page 135.
different Font. If a font is missing when
Check Preview to show the text in the Text
a file is opened, you are prompted to select
Specification dialog using the selected
from the available fonts in the Font dialog.
831
font and font size, and the current settings in

5 Check Add an Arrow to add a Text
the Page Setup dialog. Arrow to the selected text object.
If you are entering text in a view that you
6 Enter text in the Text Entry Box. If text
plan to send to layout at a drawing scale that is selected and opened for specification,
is different from the current drawing scale in it displays here.
the Page Setup dialog, the text may not • Depending on the current preference set-
preview accurately. tings, pressing the Enter key either forces
a new line in the text box or closes the
Note: Changing the drawing scale in the
dialog. See “Text & Page Setup Panel” on
Printed Size Input dialog does not effect
the appearance of text in preview mode.
page 189.
• Text automatically wraps to a new line
Click the Spell Check button to check the without requiring a hard return.
spelling of the text that displays in the Text • Tabs can be added to the text by pressing
Entry area. If Spell Check finds words that
the Tab key.
may be spelled incorrectly, the Check
Spelling dialog opens. See “Spell Check” To jump from the text entry area to Text Size
on page 828. Height using the keyboard, press Shift + Tab .
832
Attributes Tab
Text
1 Tabs - Check Box/Grid to have The X Position and Y Position of the pointer
gridlines separate the rows and columns can be set to display in the status bar, which
of tabbed text. When no tabs are present, a may help determine the exact coordinates of
simple box is drawn around the text. a location in a plan or layout file. See
The edit box defines the number of spaces
from the left edge of the text box where each An exact Angle can be entered. An angle of
new column begins. The first column always 90 is vertical (pointing up) and an angle of
starts at 0. In this case, the second column 180 is upside down.
(following the first Tab ) starts 10 spaces in,
the next at 20 spaces, etc. 4 Adjust the Size of the text box
surrounding the text by entering a
Height and Width.
2 Select an Alignment option from the
drop-down list to apply to the text. A width of 0 makes the text box as small as
Specify the Position of the text using the text within it allows. This is a one-time
3 resizing. To make text automatically resize to
CAD coordinates.
the width or height, use the Auto Width and
833
Auto Height check boxes. If you manually • Chief Architect appends the http:// prefix
edit the width or height of the text box, the automatically for links that begin with
corresponding auto size option turns off. "www" when Test Link is clicked.
5 Specify the Margins to be used with To create a hyperlink

the text. This is the distance between
the text and the edge of the text box.
1. Enter text on the Text tab of the Text
A default Left and Right margin is applied. Specification dialog.
Top and Bottom margins are measured 2. Enter a link on the Link tab.
relative to the line height and may not extend
• Click the Browse button to browse to a
to the text box completely when given a
file on your computer or network.
value of 0.
• The link can be tested by clicking the
Test Link button.
Link Tab
3. Click OK to close the Text
To use a hyperlink
1. Select the text object.
2. Click the Follow Hyperlink edit

button to activate the link.
Line Style Tab

Hyperlinks can be associated with text
objects. The link entered on the Link tab is For information about the Line Style tab, see
associated with the text object that is entered “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
on the Text tab.
• If no text object is entered on the Text Fill Style Tab
tab, the link has nothing to attach itself to For information about the Fill Style tab, see
and is not created. “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
Callout Specification Dialog

To open the Callout Specification This dialog also displays when a new callout
dialog, select a callout and click the Open is created by clicking in floor plan view
Object edit button. using the Callout tool.
834
Callout Specification Dialog
Callout Tab
2
3
4
Text
1 Callout Label - Enter the text for the
top row of the callout.
2 Text Below Line - Enter text for a

bottom row if desired.
3 Cross Section Line- Select the check

box to add a cross section line. Cross
section lines may be added to any shape.
4 Define the callout shape.

5 Specify Callout Size - Check this box
to specify individual callout size in
inches or millimeters. If this box is left
unchecked, the callout is sized according to
the size of the text in the callout.
Specify the desired Callout Size in plan
inches or millimeters.
835
Attributes Tab
1 Check Default to place the callout or 4 The Character Height is subject to the
marker on the default layer. Click the current drawing scale.
drop down list to select from all layers.
Click the Scale button to open the Printed
Click Define to open the Select CAD Size Input dialog. For more information,
Layer dialog and choose from all layers. See see “Sizing Text” on page 824.
“Select Layer Dialog” on page 222.
In Version 9, text size was based on sizing
2 Click the Color bar to open the information stored in each font rather than
standard Windows Color dialog. Use actual character dimensions. Check Version
the dialog to choose the desired line color. 9 Compatible Size to use this information
for text sizing.
Select the By Layer check box to use the
default color for the specified layer. Check Rotate with Plan to prevent the
selected callout from rotating if the Rotate
You can assign white if an object is to View command is invoked. See “Rotate
exist but not appear on the screen or in View” on page 135. If checked, the callout
printouts (must print with color on). center moves with other objects as the plan
rotates, but the orientation of the callout does
3 Click the drop-down list to select a not change.
different Font.
Check Transparent to allow objects behind
The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, and the callout or marker to display. If
Strikeout are available. unchecked, the callout or marker displays on
top of other objects.
836
Marker Specification Dialog
Marker Specification Dialog

To open the Marker Specification dialog, This dialog also displays when a new marker
select a marker and click the Open Object is created by clicking in floor plan view
edit button. using the Marker tool.
Marker Tab
3 4
5
Text
1 Enter optional Text Above Line. 4 Enter the Height of the marker in 3D
space. Changes do not affect floor plan
2 Enter optional Text Below Line (Level view. Height can only be entered for a Level
Line Marker only).
Line and Point Marker.
3 Choose a Marker Type. Enter the Marker Radius, in inches or
5
millimeters.
Level Line
Test Boring Attributes Tab

Point Marker The Attributes tab for markers is similar to
Reference Marker the Attributes tab for callouts. See
“Attributes Tab” on page 836.
Only a Framing Reference marker effects
the model. The other marker types are only
cosmetically different.
837
Text Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by The values in the Text Defaults dialog
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... determine the initial settings for text objects.
Click the "+" next to Text, Callouts and Changes made to default settings do not alter
Markers to display the sub-headings. Select existing text objects, so it is a good idea to go
Text and click the Edit... button to open the over the default settings before placing text.
Text Defaults dialog. The Text Defaults dialog is similar to the
Text Specification dialog. See “Text
Callout and Marker Defaults

Default Settings are accessed by default settings before creating callouts and
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... markers.
Click the "+" next to Text, Callouts and
The Callout Defaults dialog looks almost
Markers to display the sub-headings. Select
the same as the Callout Specification
Callouts or Markers and click the Edit...
dialog. See “Callout Specification Dialog”
button to open the Callouts or Markers
on page 834.
Defaults dialog.
The Marker Defaults dialog looks almost
The values in the Callouts and Markers
the same as the Marker Specification
Defaults dialogs determine the initial
dialog. See “Marker Specification Dialog”
settings for callouts and markers. Changes
on page 837.
made to default settings do not alter existing
objects, so it is a good idea to go over the
Room Label Defaults

Default Settings are accessed by determines the initial settings for room
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... labels.
If you add text to the Room Label
Defaults dialog, this text appears after all
Room Label and click the Edit... button to
subsequently created room labels. Changes
open the Room Label Defaults dialog.
made to default settings do not alter existing
The Room Label Defaults dialog is room labels. To update existing labels so that
similar to the Text Specification dialog. they reflect changes made to the default,
See “Text Specification Dialog” on page 830. delete and replace them. See “Room Labels”
The Room Label Defaults dialog on page 286.
838
Arrow Defaults
Arrow Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by The settings on the Arrow Defaults dialog
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... determine the initial settings for arrows
drawn using the Leader Line tool and
Arrow and click the Edit... button to open the Line With Arrow tool. Changes
the Arrow Defaults dialog. made to default settings do not alter existing
text objects, so it is a good idea to go over the
The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog
the same as the Arrow tab of the Text before placing text.
Specification dialog. See “Arrow Tab” on
page 854.
Designer Information Dialog

Select Tools> Designer Information to The specifications in this dialog apply to
open the Designer Information dialog. Designer text macros and are plan-specific.
Text
839
Enter information in each field exactly as corresponding text macro is used. See “Text
you want it to display when the Macros” on page 826.
Client Information Dialog

Select Tools> Client Information to apply to Client text macros. This information
open the Client Information dialog. This must be filled out seperately for plan files
dialog is similar to the Designer and layout files. See “Designer Information
Information dialog, but its specifications
840
Chapter 32:
CAD Objects
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: CAD more information, see “Editing Objects” on
Tools page 79.
Video: Working with CAD in Chief
Architect
With the 2D Computer Aided Design (CAD) Chapter Contents
tools included in Chief Architect, you can • CAD Defaults
add the details necessary to create complete • The CAD Drawing Tools
working drawings. Custom details can be • Point Tools
Objects
created, saved, and used in other plans. • Line Tools
CAD
Individual elevations and cross sections can • Line Specification Dialog
also be customized. • Arc Tools
CAD lines are 2D objects and can be • Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
superimposed on floor plan views, cross • Arc Specification Dialog
section views, elevation views, and layouts. • Circle Tools
They do not affect 3D objects or display in • CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification
Dialog
3D views.
• Polylines
CAD polylines can be converted to 3D • Polyline Specification Dialog
objects and shown in 3D views. Custom • Box Tools
countertops, slabs and molding are a few • CAD Box Specification Dialog
examples of the many custom 3D objects that • Splines
can be created using CAD polylines. • Displaying CAD Objects
• CAD Blocks
CAD objects are edited much like other
• CAD Block Specification Dialog
architectural objects in Chief Architect. For
841
• Dimensions • Plot Plans and Plan Footprints

• Number Style/Angle Style Dialog • Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
• CAD Details • CAD Defaults Dialog
CAD Defaults
CAD Defaults can be accessed by The behavior and appearance of CAD
selecting Edit> Default Settings from objects are also affected by settings on the
the menu or by clicking the CAD Defaults CAD, Line Properties, Sun Angle,
button, which can be added to a toolbar Behaviors, and Snap Properties Panels of the
Preferences dialog.
See “Adding Toolbar Buttons” on page 18.
Settings in the CAD Defaults dialog Unlike default settings, preference settings
control the basic appearance of CAD objects are global, affecting all plan and layout files.
and are file-specific. See “CAD Defaults See “Preferences Dialog” on page 183.
The CAD Drawing Tools

Video: Drawing CAD Points, Lines and
Splines
Line Tools
Video: Drawing CAD Arcs, Circles, Select CAD> Line to access the line
Ovals and Ellipses tools.
Classroom Design Project Training The Draw Line , Input Line , Line
Video: Drawing CAD Polylines and
With Arrow , Sun Angle , and the
Boxes
North Pointer are discussed in detail
The CAD drawing tools are available
later in this chapter. See “Line Tools” on
in the CAD toolbar configuration,
page 846.
which can be accessed by clicking the CAD
Configuration button.
Arc Tools
You can also access the CAD drawing tools
Select CAD > Arcs to access the arc
using the menu. For an outline of the CAD
tools.
drawing tools and their corresponding menu
items and shortcut keys, see “CAD Menu”
The Draw Arc , Input Arc , and the
on page 55.
Arc With Arrow tools are discussed in
842
Point Tools
detail later in this chapter. See “Arc Tools” The Place Point , Input Point , Point
on page 856.
Marker , and Delete Temporary Points
Box Tools tools are discussed in detail later in this
chapter. See “Point Tools” on page 843.
Choose CAD > Boxes & Framing to
access the box tools.
Spline
The Rectangular Polyline , Regular Select CAD> Spline to draw
Polygon , Box , Framing , Wall connected line segments that form a
spline. See “Splines” on page 868.
Bridging , Cross Box , and
Insulation tools are discussed in detail Dimension Tools
later in this chapter. See “Box Tools” on page
865. Select CAD> Dimension to access the
dimension tools.
Circle Tools The Dimension Tools can be used with
Select CAD> Circles to access the CAD objects and are discussed in their own
circle tools. chapter. See “Dimensions” on page 795.
The Circle , Circle About Center , Text Tools

Oval , and the Ellipse tools are Select CAD> Text to access the text
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See tools. The text tools are functional in
“Circle Tools” on page 860. CAD and Architectural modes and are
discussed in the Text chapter. See “Text,
Objects
Point Tools
CAD
Callouts and Markers” on page 817.
Select CAD> Points to access the
point tools. CAD Layer
Select CAD> Current CAD Layer to
change the current default CAD layer.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the Place Point
point tools.
Select CAD> Points> Place Point and
click the screen to place a temporary
CAD point in the plan. These temporary
843
points can be used to accurately position • Relative to Current Point (not Polar)
other CAD objects. See “Temporary Points” requires input on the distance along the
on page 845. X-axis (horizontal) and along the Y-
axis (vertical) to locate the next point.
Input Point • Relative to Current Point, Polar
requires input of the distance and the
A new point can be placed using
angle between the start point and the
new point. This is the most typical
method.
To use the Input Point tool
Note: When using Imperial units, lengths and
1. Select CAD> Points> Input Point distances may be entered as inches or feet
to open the New CAD Point dialog. and inches, in either decimal or fractional
form. Fractional inches with denominators 2,
4, 8 and 16 are allowed. Millimeters are used
for all metric distances. Angles may be
entered as bearings, decimal degrees, or
degrees, minutes and seconds.
Use the Next button at the bottom of the

New Point dialog to place several points.
Place a point, click Next, and place another
point without closing the New Point
dialog.
2. Select Absolute Location, and enter the
absolute coordinates. The new point Point Markers
becomes the current point and is high-
Use a permanent Point Marker as a
lighted.
snap point for dimension lines and
3. To locate a second point, click CAD> other CAD objects. Select CAD> Points>
Points> Input Point , opening the Point Marker and click in the view to
New CAD Point dialog again. You can place a permanent point marker. Point
locate a new point using keyboard input markers display as a simple cross, with or
in the same way a line is drawn using without a text label. They can be opened for
keyboard input, but no line connects the specification and modified to include a label
points. See “Creating a Plot Plan” on or alter their attributes.
page 599.
You can also place point markers using the
• Absolute Location requires input of
the X and Y coordinates tht are related Marker tool, which lets you specify the
to the absolute origin (0,0). marker label and type. See “Markers” on
page 823.
844
Point Tools
Temporary Points Delete Temporary Points

Temporary points are used for snapping All temporary points can be deleted at
objects. You can add them manually using once using CAD> Points> Delete
the Place Point tool, or the program may Temporary Points.
add them automatically, such as when the You can also press the Delete key when
Input Line , Input Arc , or Input nothing is selected to delete the points one by
one; however, Delete Temporary Points
Point tools are used. These points are
saves time when there are many points.
temporary and are not saved with the plan.
The current CAD point is either the most Moving CAD Points
recently created or the most recently
accessed. When multiple temporary points Points can be repositioned relative to
are on-screen, the current CAD point is high- themselves, another point, or a CAD object
lighted so it can be easily identified. To make such as a line. For example, you can locate
a different point the current CAD point, dou- the point exactly one-quarter the distance
along a given line, or exactly 6 inches from
ble-click it using the Select Objects tool. one end. This new location can then be used
for the start point of a new line or other
prupose.
To reposition a point, double-click the point
you want to move to open the Move Point
dialog.
Objects
CAD
Current
Point
There can only be one current point
To delete the current point, make sure no

other objects are selected (pressing the Esc There are four ways to move a point using
key deselects a selected object) , and press this dialog. The two relative ways allow you
the Delete key on the keyboard. Continue to specify normal or polar values.
pressing the Delete key to delete temporary Absolute Location sets the location by X
points one at a time in the reverse order that and Y coordinates. The current location is
they were created. always listed.
845
Relative to Itself sets the point's new object at the defined distance from the end it
location relative to its current one. The new was originally closest to. For an arc, the
location can be placed using rectangular or distance is measured along the curve. This
polar coordinates, just as when positioning a distance may be defined as a percentage of
new point. the total line or arc length by checking the
percentage % box. Thus 0, or 0% moves
Relative to Prev. Point positions the new
the point to the closest end of the nearest
point location relative to the point that was
edge, 50% to the midpoint, and 100% to the
current just before the point being moved
other end. Negative numbers and
was created or made current. To be sure that
percentages greater than 100 are allowed.
the correct reference point is used, click it
and then double-click the point to be moved. If the point is near a box or polyline, then
This sets the reference point to the previous Along Line applies to the line or arc forming
point. The point you are moving is always the closest side just as it does to a
the current point. unconnected line or arc. If the point is near
an oval or circle, then the point is placed
From Line End is enabled when the point is
along an (invisible) axis line the item was
near a CAD object. Enter a value in the
originally drawn along.
Along Line box place the point on the CAD
Line Tools
Select CAD> Lines to display the and drag to draw a line. You can also
submenu of line tools. toggle to alternative mode.
3. Move your cursor to a new location in
Draw Line the drawing area and click once. A new
There are two methods that you can use line is drawn that is connected to the end
to draw lines with the Draw Line tool. of the previous line.
The standard method is to select CAD> 4. To stop, press Esc on your keyboard or
Lines> Draw Line , then click and drag press two mouse buttons at the same
from beginning to end. Draw a line back on time.
itself to erase a section.
If Object Snaps are enabled and Edit
An alternative method for drawing multiple
Object Parts is disabled, you can
lines is also available.
connect the end of two lines or arcs or a line
and an arc together. This new entity is a
To draw continuous lines
polyline, which is two or more lines and/or
arcs joining end to end to form a single unit.
1. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line .
If one end of the polyline is connected to the
2. Press the Alt key on your keyboard (or other, it becomes a closed polyline. Closed
use the right mouse button) and click
846
Line Tools
polylines can be filled with a pattern, or To connect lines, make sure Edit Object Parts
turned into special 3D objects such as is off, then click on the end edit handle were
countertops or slabs that display in 3D views. the two independent lines join.
Lines and polylines can be distinguished by
the edit handles that display when you select Input Line
the line. A line displays an edit handle at CAD lines can also be created using
each end and one in the middle. If more than absolute values entered using the
three edit handles display, the object is a keyboard. This method is slower but more
polyline. precise than using the mouse and is ideal
when the desired length and angle of each
Line line is known, such as with property lines.
Before any line is drawn using this method, a
Polyline
starting point must be defined. If a starting
point has not been defined, Chief Architect
assumes a starting point of 0,0.
Lines that may appear connected to a New CAD Line Dialog

polyline may prove to be unconnected when
selected. CAD lines can be created using absolute
values in the New CAD Line dialog. To
All segments forming a polyline display edit open the New CAD Line dialog, select
handles when the polyline is selected. To
display the edit handles of one individual CAD> Lines> Input Line or double-
segment at a time, click the Edit Object click the Line Tools button.
Parts toggle button. See “Editing
Objects
CAD
1
2
3
4
5
6
The two shapes above appear identical until Begin by specifying how you want to define
they are selected. When selected at their left the line End Point Location.
edge, the polyline on the left reveals that the
left edge is not attached. The polyline on the 1 Absolute Location - Define the end
point of the new line in X Position
right confirms that the left edge is part of the
(horizontal) and Y Position (vertical)
larger polyline unit.
coordinates.
847
Any point can be uniquely Points can also be described

described using absolute relative to the starting point
coordinates using angle and distance
2 Relative to Start Point - Define the 4 Relative to Previous Line - Define the
end point of the new line in X and Y end point of the new line by its
coordinates that are relative to the start point, Distance and Angle relative to the end of the
as though the start point was at (0,0). previous line drawn, as though the end of
that line end point were (0,0) and it was
drawn left to right on the X axis.
Points can be described

relative to the starting point
using coordinates Points described relative to the
previous line depend upon the
previous line for orientation
3 Relative to Start Point: Polar
(Counter Clockwise from horizontal)
- Check this box to define the end point of 5 Click Next to create a line without
exiting the dialog so you can input data
the new line by its Distance and Angle from
for the next line. The start point of the next
the start point rather than in X and Y
line is the end point of this line.
coordinates. This is helpful when creating a
plot plan. For more information about 6 Click Num Style to change the units
creating plot plans, see “Creating a Plot shown in the New CAD Line dialog.
Plan” on page 599. See “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
page 873.
848
Line Tools
To use the Input Line tool Continue to draw connected lines to form a
polyline with an arrowhead at the end. The
1. Select CAD> Points> Place Point , arrowheads display only at the free ends, not
then click the screen to place a CAD where the lines connect.
point. This is the current point, and is the You can also create arcs with arrowheads.
start point for the new line. See “Tempo- See “Arc with Arrow” on page 858.
rary Points” on page 845.
If a line or arc with arrow is snapped to
2. Choose CAD> Lines> Input Line another object such as text and that object is
to open the New CAD Line dialog. deleted, the line or arc with arrow will be
deleted, as well.
3. Specify the line end point, then enter
distance and angle or position data and
click OK. North Pointer
The North Pointer defines true north
Note: If you accidentally click OK instead of in floor plan view. If north is not
Next and need to continue drawing a polyline
defined, it is assumed to be straight up.
using the New CAD Line dialog, click Input
Line again and continue.
Every bearing is defined relative to
Enter Coordinates North, so establish this direction before
entering survey information for plot layout or
Similar to Input Line, lines can also be for bearings to establish polar direction for
specified by pressing the Tab key on the the creation or editing of objects such as
keyboard when a line is in the process of points, lines, arcs, etc.
being drawn. This opens the Enter
Coordinates dialog, for more information,
Objects
see “Creating Objects” on page 90. Select CAD> North Pointer , then click
CAD
and drag to define the pointer, starting at the
Line With Arrow tail and dragging toward the point. Once it is
drawn, you can define the exact length and
Create a line or polyline with an arrow angle in the Line Specification dialog.
on one or both ends by selecting CAD> See “Line Specification Dialog” on page
Lines> Line With Arrow, then clicking and 850.
dragging on screen. The default attributes of
the line are determined by the settings on the When a north pointer is placed on one floor
Arrow Defaults dialog. See “Arrow of a plan or into a CAD detail, a north pointer
Defaults” on page 839. drawn on any other floor automatically
points in the same direction. If the direction
Change the appearance and behavior of the of the north pointer is reset on any floor,
line with arrow by selecting it and clicking those on all other floors automatically reset.
the Open Object edit button. See To enter the angle in bearings, first type N or
“Arrow Tab” on page 854. S (for North or South) then the degrees
849
(followed by d), then the minutes (followed

by '), then the seconds (followed by "), and
finally type either E or W (for East or West).
If minutes are zero, you do not need to enter
a value. Following are some examples of
bearings. It is not necessary to capitalize the
letters. Spaces are also optional.
• N 20d 30' E
• S 45' W
• N 89d 48' 30" W The same line angle is set to show
Bearings. This shows the angle in
• N 90' E
reference to the North Pointer.
If you choose to display the angle of a line
North pointers can be selected and edited
when a north pointer exists, be sure to select
using their edit handles and the edit toolbar
the appropriate format on the Line Properties
buttons. For more information, see “Editing
panel of the Preferences dialog. If angles
are set to show as Degrees, the angle relates
to 0 degrees (horizontal to the right) even
though a north pointer is already established. Sun Angle
If angles are set to Bearings, they are In floor plan view you can create
relative to the north pointer. See “Line multiple Sun Angles. Select CAD>
Lines> Sun Angle and click in floor plan
view. The Sun Angle Specification
dialog displays. For each sun angle you
place, specify time of year, time of day, and a
location based on longitude and latitude.
If you have created a north pointer, the sun
angle location relative to the model is
accurate. See “Sun Angles” on page 775.
Sun angles can be moved and extended using
Line angle shown in degrees. This the edit handles, but they cannot be rotated.
does not reference the North Pointer.
Line Specification Dialog

Select a line, line with arrow, or text line with button to open the Line Specifcation
dialog.
arrow, and click the Open Object edit
850
Line Tab
1 3
4
2
The Line tab is similar to the Selected Line equally. Changing the angle rotates the line
tab of the Polyline Specification dialog. around the center.
See “Selected Line Tab” on page 864.
Select Length/Angle to keep the length and
1 Lock - These lock options control how angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the
changing properties on this dialog start or end moves the other end so the length
affect the line. and angle of the line do not change.
Start - Select this option to keep the start of
2 Specify the Length and Angle of the
the line fixed when changing the length, selected line.
angle, and end.
3 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the
End- Select this option to keep the end of the Start of the line.
Objects
CAD
line fixed when changing the length, angle,
and start. 4 Specify the X and Y coordinate for the
End of the line.
Center- Select this option to keep the center
The format for these controls can be changed
of the line fixed. Changing the length of the
by clicking the Num Style button. See
line moves the start and end of the line
“Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page
873.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
objects. Here you can control the display of a
CAD line or the lines that make up an object.
851
4 6
5 7
1 Specify the Layer the selected object Click the drop-down list to select from all
should be located on. See “Layer Tab” available line styles. You can use the
on page 223 keyboard arrow keys to scroll up and down
through the options.
2 Specify the Line Color used to show
the selected object. Click the Library button to access the Line
Styles library and add a line style to the drop-
Check By Layer to use the line color
down list. See “Line Styles” on page 688.
assigned to this layer.
Click the color bar to assign another line 4 Define the Line Weight (in pixels).
color to the selected object(s) using the
Color Chooser dialog. See “Color Check By Layer to use the Line Weight
Chooser Dialog” on page 722. assigned to the specified layer.
3 Specify the Line Style used to show the Setting the line weight to zero (0)
selected object. makes the line weight print as thin as
Check By Layer to use the line style possible.
assigned to this layer.
852
5 The Drawing Group options control function when Bumping/Pushing is

how the selected object(s) display enabled. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
relative to other objects. See “Drawing 124.
Groups” on page 122.
• Select Back Group to display the 7 Select the desired Display Options.
selected object(s) behind objects in the
• Check Show Length to show the length
other two drawing groups.
of each line centered above the line. This
• Select Default Group to display the option is available with line and arc seg-
selected object(s) in front of those in the ments and is commonly used for property
Back Group but behind those in the Front lines. The length format for Imperial
Group. units (fractional or decimal feet) is
• Select Front Group to display the defined on the Line Properties panel of
selected object(s) in front of objects in the Preferences dialog. See “Line
the other two groups. Properties Panel” on page 200.
• Check Move to Front of Group to dis- • Check Show Angle to show the angle of
play the selected object(s) in front of each line centered below the line. The
other objects in the same drawing group. angle format (degrees or bearings) is
defined on the Line Properties panel of
You can also move a selected object to the Preferences dialog. See “Line
the front of its drawing group by clicking Properties Panel” on page 200.
the Move to Front of Group edit • Uncheck All Angles to show only those
button. See “Move to Front of Group” on angles that are neither horizontal nor ver-
page 122. tical. This is automatically checked when
Show Angle is checked.
Objects
Note: “Move to Front of Group” is an action, • Check Reverse Angle to reverse the
CAD
not an attribute. The box is not checked the angle by 180 degrees. This is most com-
next time the specification dialog is opened.
monly used when showing the bearing of
a line, since the start point of the lines
6 Specify the desired Bumping behaviors defines the bearing.
for the selected object(s).
• Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
selected object into other CAD or CAD-
based objects as it is moved, and/or to
push the other object(s).
• Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
selected object when it bumps into a wall.
Walls cannot be pushed by other objects.
CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move are
not available for Primitive objects and only
853
Arrow Tab
1
2
3
4
The Arrow Tab is available for any line, arc, Check Default to use the default fill color.
polyline, or spline that can have an arrow.
4 Define a Size for the arrow(s).
Check Include Arrow to turn the
1 Check Default to use the default size.
arrows on or off.
5 Select from the available Options.
2 Select an arrowhead Type from the
drop-down list. Check Arrow on Both Ends to place a
head on both ends of the selected arrow(s).
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have
more than one arrowhead type, check No Check Special Use Arrow to create an arrow
Change to keep the defined arrow type for that can be used in layouts and floor plan
each arrow. views to show platform elevations. See
“Special Use Arrows” on page 820.
Check Default to set the arrow type to the
default specified on the Arrow tab of the Auto Position Tail and Auto Position Head
Text Defaults dialog. See “Text Defaults” are available when either end of the line is
on page 838. attached to a text object. Check either or both
options if you want this text line with arrow
3 Select the Fill Color used to fill the to update its position on the text object if the
arrowheads.
text object or text line with arrow is moved.
If multiple arrows are selected and they have Usually better results are obtained if Auto
more than one fill color, check No Change Position is off. See “Auto Positioning
to keep the defined Fill Color for each arrow. Arrows” on page 820.
854
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes

There are five Arc Creation Modes that • The chord is the straight line between the
control how an arc is drawn using the start and end point.
Draw Arc tool. These arc creation • A straight line that intersects an arc and is
modes also control how curved walls are perpendicular to the radius of the arc at
drawn (see “Drawing Curved Walls” on page that point is tangent to the arc.
238). Each mode allows you to specify a
different aspect of the arc, such as its radius Free Form Arc
or tangent. The method used for drawing an
arc or curved wall depends on what Arc Free Form Arc mode allows you to
Creation Mode is currently active. The define an arc by clicking and dragging
program remembers the last creation mode along the desired path. There are two
used between sessions. Once drawn, all arcs methods for using this mode.
are edited similarly. See “Editing Arc Based
Objects” on page 98. To draw a Free Form arc
Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes to 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
view these modes. then click at the arc’s start point.
Before deciding which arc tool works best 2. Move the pointer along the desired
for the project at hand, it may be helpful to curve while dragging to curve the arc.
be familiar with the different components 3. Release the mouse button at the end
that make up an arc. point to complete the arc.
Objects
End
To draw continuous Free Form arcs
CAD
Tangent
This mode is useful for making custom
revision clouds.
Start Chord 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc .

2. Press the Alt key on your keyboard and
Radius Center click and drag to draw an arc.
• The center of an arc is the point the arc is 3. Move your cursor to a new location and
drawn about. click. A new arc is drawn that is con-
nected to the end point of the previous
• The radius is the distance from the center
arc.
to the arc.
• The start is where the arc begins.
• The end is where the arc stops.
855
Center/Radius/End Arc Start/Tangent/End Arc

Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows
you to define the center and radius of you to define the start and end points of
an arc, and then its length. an arc, its tangent and its curvature.
To draw a Center/Radius/End arc To draw a Start/Tangent/End arc
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
then click at the center of the arc and then click at the start of the arc and drag
drag to define the radius. a line to define the arc’s tangent at the
2. Release the mouse button, then move the start point.
mouse to the end of the arc and click 2. Release the mouse button.
again. 3. Move the mouse to adjust the length and
curvature of the arc, then click to release
Start/End/On Arc the mouse and create the arc.
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you to
define the start and end points of an Arc About Center
arc, then adjust the curvature. Arc About Center mode allows you to
draw an arc by defining the center and
To draw a Start/End/On arc then the start and end points.
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , To draw an Arc About Center

then click at the start point of the arc and
drag to the end point. 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc ,
2. Release the mouse button at the end then click once to define the center
point. point.
3. Move the mouse to adjust the curvature 2. Click and drag from the start point of the
of the arc, then click to release the arc to its end point.
mouse and create the arc. 3. Or click and drag an arc. The most
recently placed point is used as the cen-
ter.
Arc Tools
Select CAD> Arcs> to display the Draw Arc
submenu of arc tools.
The method used to draw an arc using
Draw Arc depends on which Arc
856
Arc Tools
Creation Mode is currently active. Once • The Chord Direction defines the angle
drawn, an arc can be edited. See “Editing Arc of the arc’s chord from the start point.
Input Arc
An arc can be drawn to exact
specifications using the New Arc
dialog.
To use the Input Arc feature

Start Direction = 0 Chord Direction = 45
1. Define a start point by clicking the
4. Define the Radius of the arc.
screen using the Place Point tool.
5. Define one of the values in the Exten-
The “X” defines the current point, which
sion group:
is the start point for the new arc.
Arc Angle: The positive number of
2. With the start point defined, select
degrees from the center point of the arc
CAD> Arcs> Input Arc to open the to each of its two endpoints.
New Arc dialog. Define the arc end- Arc Length - The length along the arc
point, curvature, and direction. itself from one endpoint to the other.
Chord Length - The length of the
straight line from one end to the other.
Arc Angle = -90°
Objects
CAD
Chord Length =
282 13/16
Radius = 200
Arc Length = 314 3/16
6. Select the direction the arc bends, either

3. Select either the Start Direction or the cw (clockwise) or ccw (counter
Chord Direction. clockwise).
• The Start Direction defines the angle 7. Click OK to draw the specified arc.
of the tangent from the start point.
Click the Num Style button to display the
Number Style / Angle Style dialog. See
857
“Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page or more arrow arcs and clicking the Open
873.
Object edit button. See “Arrow Tab” on
page 854.
Arc with Arrow
Continue to draw connected lines and arcs to
You can create an arc with an arrow on form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end.
one or both ends, using the Arc With The arrowheads display only at the free ends,
Arrow tool. not where the lines connect.
Draw an Arc With Arrow like a Lines with arrowheads can also be created.
standard arc. When you release the mouse See “Line With Arrow” on page 849.
button, the arc has an arrowhead at the end.
The default attributes are determined by the A line can be converted to an arc by
settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog. See selecting the line, pressing and holding
down the Alt key, then using the edit handle
“Arrow Defaults” on page 839. The at either end to bend the line.
arrowhead can be changed by selecting one
Arc Specification Dialog

Select an arc and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Arc Specification
dialog.
858
Arc Specification Dialog
Arc Tab
1 3
2
4
1 The Lock options control how Center Y - Specify the y coordinate for the
changing properties on this dialog center of the arc.
affects the arc.
Radius - The distance between the center of
Start - Select this option to keep the start the arc and the arc surface.
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or end.
Objects
End - Select this option to keep the end fixed
CAD
when changing the arc, chord, or start.
Center - Select this option to keep the center
of the arc fixed when changing the arc.
Arc - Select this option to keep the arc fixed
Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line
when changing the arc location.
drawn from the arc center to the arc start
Chord - Select this option to keep the arc makes with a horizontal line to the right.
chord fixed when changing the arc radius.
End Angle - Specify the angle that a line
2 Arc - These parameters define the arc. drawn from the arc center to the arc end
Various controls are disabled depending makes with a horizontal line to the right.
on what lock option is used.
Arc Angle - The angle between the center of
Center X - Specify the x coordinate for the the arc and each end.
center of the arc.
859
End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the end

of the arc.
End Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the end of the arc.
5 Chord - These values define the chord

of the arc.
Arc Length - The length of the arc along the Chord Length - The straight line distance
curve. between the two ends of the arc.
3 Start - These values define the start Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the
point of the arc.
chord (the imaginary straight line going from
Start X - Specify the X coordinate for the the start of the arc to the end of the arc).
beginning of the arc.
Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the Line Style Tab
beginning of the arc.
Start Direction - Specify the angle of a “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
tangent line at the start of the arc.
Arrow Tab
4 End - These values define the end point
of the arc. For information about the Arrow tab, see
End X - Specify the X coordinate for the end “Arrow Tab” on page 854.
of the arc.
Circle Tools
Select CAD> Circles to access the Use the Circle Specification dialog to
circle tools. accurately define size, position and other
attributes. You can fill a circle with a hatch
Draw a Circle by dragging across the
pattern or solid fill. See “CAD Circle/Oval/
diameter. If a small circle is needed,
Ellipse Specification Dialog” on page 861.
draw a larger circle and then resize it.
860
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
Draw Circle About Center Ovals

Select CAD> Circles> Circle About An Oval is a four-arc approximation of
Center to create a circle by dragging an ellipse. To draw an oval, select
the radius out from the center point. CAD> Circles> Oval, then click and drag.
Use the CAD Oval Specification dialog
To draw a Circle About Center
to accurately set the length and width of the
oval and other attributes.
1. Click the Circle About Center tool.
2. Click the screen to define the center. Ellipses
3. Drag the radial distance and release the An Ellipse is a set of points with a
mouse button. If you are using Object constant combined distance from two
Snaps , both the center point and the points called foci. An ellipse looks like a
radius snap to any appropriate nearby stretched circle, or a circular surface viewed
CAD object, intersection or point. at an angle. To draw an ellipse, select CAD>
Circles> Ellipse and drag at an angle to
define its maximum height and width.
Use the CAD Ellipse Specification
dialog to accurately set the length and width
of the ellipse and other attributes.
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog

The CAD Circle Specification dialog
Objects
and the CAD Oval Specification dialog
CAD
are almost exactly the same. The CAD Oval
Specification dialog has an additional
setting for Angle.
861
General Tab
1 Specify the Position of the circle/oval. Line Style Tab

Specify the X Position and Y Position For information about the Line Style tab, see
of the center of the circle/oval. “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Specify the oval’s Angle.
Fill Style Tab
2 Specify the Size of the circle/oval. For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Specify the Length and Width of an “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
oval or the Diameter and Radius of a circle.
862
Polylines
Polylines
Closed Polylines Open Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more line and/ Polyline Based Objects” on page 103 and
or arc segments that are attached at their “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
endpoints. If a polyline connects with itself, page 107. Additionally, the individual
it is a closed polyline; if there is a gap in the segments can be edited. See “Edit Object
polyline, it is open. Parts” on page 81.
Create a polyline by drawing lines and/or There are a number of unique polyline
arcs end-to-end, allowing the end of each editing behaviors that you should be familiar
successive object to snap to the end of the with before creating and editing polylines.
previous one. See “Editing Open Polyline Based Objects”
on page 103 and “Editing Closed-Polyline
Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or
resized as a single unit. See “Editing Open
Objects
CAD
Polyline Specification Dialog
Select a polyline and click the Open Object Polyline Tab
edit button to open the Polyline
The Polyline tab of the Polyline

Specification dialog indicates the length
of the perimeter, the enclosed area, and the
volume of a closed polyline.
If the polyline is not closed, “Not closed”
displays under Area.
863
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the Line tab of the Line Specification dialog.
selected segment of the polyline is a line as See “Line Tab” on page 851.
opposed to an arc. The data here applies to
the selected line segment. Selected Arc Tab
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the The Selected Arc tab is available when the
end of the previous connected line, if there is selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line opposed to a line. The data here applies to
segment moves move the start of the next the selected arc. See “Arc Tab” on page 859.
connected line, if there is one.
The Selected Line tab of the Polyline Line Style Tab
Specification dialog is the same as the For information about using the Line Style
tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Fill Style Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
864
Box Tools
Fill patterns can be applied to boxes, circles, Fill Pattern Color - Define a different
6
closed polylines and a variety of architectural line color or fill color if a solid is
objects. The pattern options are disabled specified. This overrides the layer color.
until you select a pattern other than None
from the Fill Pattern drop-down list. 7 Select Use Background Color to use
the background color for solid fills or
1 Fill Pattern - Choose a fill pattern patterns.
from the drop-down list. If the pattern
Custom is selected, the custom pattern 8 Check Use Layer Color to have the fill
pattern use the layer color for the
options become available below.
pattern lines. If it is a solid fill, the fill color
2 Spacing - Define the spacing for the is the same as the layer’s color.
selected fill pattern. Hatch spacing set
at 12" matches grid/reference spacing set at 9 Custom Pattern File and Name - This
section is enabled when Custom is
12".
selected from the Fill Pattern list.
3 Angle - Define the angle of the selected • Click the Browse button to open the
fill pattern. Custom Pattern File dialog and select
a pattern (.pat) file from the Chief Archi-
4 Set the Line Weight for the selected fill tect Patterns directory or a custom .pat
pattern.
file elsewhere on your computer. The
5 Check Transparent Pattern Fill to selected .pat file’s path name displays
make the fill pattern transparent. When and can be edited in the text field.
you check this option, any objects behind the
fill pattern are visible through it. • Select a Pattern from the drop-down list.
This list includes all custom patterns
available in the selected file.
Objects
• Specify a Scale for the selected pattern.
CAD
Box Tools
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing to Regular Polygon
access the box tools.
You can draw a regular polygon based
on the length of a side, or the length of
Rectangular Polyline
the radius to a vertex or a side. Select your
A Rectangular Polyline begins as a options in the New Regular Polygon dialog
rectangle, drawn from corner to corner. and click OK. Click in your plan to place the
Once selected, a rectangular polyline can be polygon.
edited into any shape. See “Editing Box-
865
The Trim Objects and Extend Objects

tools work well to adjust the framing
members to the correct length, and to cut
their ends off at an angle to fit against the
trimming members. See “Trim and Extend”
on page 142.
Wall Bridging
Box Select CAD> Boxes & Framing Wall
Bridging to draw wall bridging in a
Draw a box from one midpoint to the
wall detail. For more information, see
midpoint of the opposite side. A box
“Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views” on
draws as a square at first and can be reshaped
page 750.
into a rectangle. A box always has four 90
degree corners.
Cross Box
Boxes have some unique editing behaviors
that are important to be aware of. See The Cross Box behaves the same as a
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 111. box. The only difference is the cross
that is automatically drawn whenever this
Framing tool is used. Use the cross box add framing
detail to cross sections.
Select CAD> Boxes & Framing>
Framing to draw a 1-1/2" (38 mm)
wide box of any length. When dragging the
length, the framing member looks like a line
until the mouse button is released. Specially
designed to represent general framing
materials, the box can be resized to any
specification using the handles or the
Framing Specification dialog, discussed
Cross boxes are automatically maintained at
later in this chapter. Multiple copies can also ends of framing members cut by the cross
be laid out automatically at defined spacing section cutting plane. They automatically
update when the cross section first is created
using the Multiple Copy edit button or
the Transform/Replicate Object dialog. and whenever you click Fill Window .
Objects drawn with this tool are listed in the You may want to create and resize one cross
Framing category of the Materials List. To box for each framing member size used, such
specifically draw rafters or joists, click the as 2x4, 2x6, 2x12, then copy and paste the
original as needed. It is easiest to resize using
Rafter button or Joist button and CAD Box Specification dialog.
drag to draw a framing member.
866
CAD Box Specification Dialog
Insulation
Use the Insulation tool to draw
insulation in cross section details. Drag
the length of the insulated area, then select
object and use the edit handles to move or
resize it. It may be easier to use the CAD
Box Specification dialog to define the
insulation width and length exactly. Drag to Result Select
create to edit
CAD Box Specification Dialog

Select a rectangular poyline, a box, a framing edit button to open the CAD Box
box, a wall bridging box, a cross box, or Specification dialog.
insulation and click the Open Object
General Tab
Objects
CAD
2
1 Specify a Box Style. Specify the X Position and Y Position of the

center of the box.
Select Normal to specify a normal box,
Cross to specify a cross box, or Insulation to Specify the Angle of the box.
specify an insulation box.
3 Define the Size of the box by
Define the Position of the box. specifying its Height and Width.
2
867
Line Style Tab

To find out which direction is the height
and which is the width of a square box, For information about the Line Style tab, see
select it. The triangular rotate handle is near- “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
est the side you originally dragged from when
creating the box. Changing the height
Fill Style Tab
changes the length of this side.
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Splines can be selected and opened for As drawn
specification. See “Polyline Specification
To use the Spline tool Result
1. Select CAD> Spline . 4. As soon as two straight spline segments

connect end-to-end, the straight seg-
2. Draw the first spline segment just as you
ments become a curve that passes
would a line. A single spline segment
through the endpoints defined by the
looks identical to a line. You may need
original segments. Each point is called a
to turn off Angle Snaps to draw vertex.
freely. 5. Draw a few more segments, connecting
each to the free end of a previously
drawn segment.
Result
3. Draw the second segment from the end As drawn

of the first at a different angle. Object
6. Notice as additional segments are drawn
Snaps should be on to assure that that the spline changes the curvature of
new segments attach correctly to the the previous segment to create a contin-
ends of previous segments. uous curve between the last three points.
868
Displaying CAD Objects
Applications for Splines

As drawn
Splines are typically used in situations where
there is an irregular curve. A contour line is a
typical example. Splines are useful wherever
a free-flowing curve is needed.
Result
Spline Tab
7. Form a closed spline by drawing a seg-
ment between its two free ends.
Draw segment to close
Polylines that are splines display the spline

8. The result is an irregular curve that tab in the Polyline Specification dialog.
flows smoothly through each vertex.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
Result
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.
Objects
CAD
Displaying CAD Objects
As with architectural objects, the display of Initially, the Default CAD Layer is set as the
CAD objects is controlled in the Layer Current CAD Layer, but this can be changed
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying at any time in the CAD Defaults dialog.
Objects” on page 221. See “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 878.
The Current CAD Layer can also be changed
Current CAD Layer in the Select CAD Layer and Layer
When drawn, CAD objects are automatically Display Options dialogs. See “Select
placed on the Current CAD Layer. In floor Layer Dialog” on page 222 and “Layer
plan and cross section/elevation views, the Display Options Dialog” on page 218.
name of this layer displays on the right side
of the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
See “The Status Bar” on page 8.
869
Changing the Current CAD Layer

affects subsequently-drawn objects, but
existing CAD objects are unaffected by the
change. As a result, you can efficiently pro-
duce CAD drawings on multiple layers
CAD Blocks
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that based objects that display in 3D, such as
have been grouped together so that they counter tops and slabs, can be part of a CAD
behave as a single object. block, but most cannot. See “Architectural
CAD blocks can be selected, moved, rotated
and resized much like CAD boxes. They can
be added to the library and can also be Explode CAD Block
exploded into their individual parts. Click any item in a CAD block to
Click and drag a corner handle to resize a select the block. When a block is
CAD block proportionately. Drag a side selected, click the Explode CAD Block edit
handle to resize in only one dimension. button to separate it into its individual
Resizing each dimension differently can components. You cannot explode a block by
distort ovals and arcs, and does not allow you using a marquee to select it; you must click it
to explode the block. to select it.
If the block is composed of other blocks,
Make CAD Block exploding the outermost block breaks it
down into the component blocks. Note that
Create a CAD block by selecting
the block definition is not exploded or
multiple CAD and text objects, then
changed, just the instance.
clicking the Make CAD Block edit button.
The new block acts like a single CAD object. If a block has been resized so that its original
CAD blocks can contain other CAD blocks, aspect ratio is altered, it cannot be exploded.
referred to as “nested” CAD blocks. See “CAD Block Specification Dialog” on
page 872.
A CAD block cannot contain the following
CAD objects: roof planes, layout boxes,
north pointer, plan footprint, roof/gable line, Add to Library
sun angle arrow, bearing line, or joist Like other objects, customized CAD
direction line. If any these are selected as blocks can be added to the library for
part of a group, the group cannot be turned future use in other plan files. See “Adding to
into a CAD block. the Library” on page 674.
Text , Callouts and Markers can Before an exploded block can be added to the
be included in a CAD block. A few CAD- library, it must first be group-selected and
870
CAD Blocks
blocked once again using the Make CAD CAD Block Management
Block edit tool. When creating a CAD block, two things are
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in actually created: a block definition and a
DXF/DWG format. These can be imported, block instance. The block definition holds all
blocked and added to the library. In addition, the items in a group, while block instance
some manufacturers’ details are available in shows the block at a position, orientation and
.ALB library file format, which can be added size that matches the items in the original
to the library. See “Adding a Third Party group. More instances of the new block can
Library” on page 675. be made by copying the first instance. Any
copy can be repositioned, resized and rotated
You can organize your CAD blocks in independently of any other block instance.
the Library Browser by creating custom
libraries and library folders. See “Adding a
For a single plan file, these instances share
New Library” on page 674. the same definition regardless of what floor
or CAD detail they display in. Copying a
block instance to a completely different plan
file also copies the block definition to that
plan.
Objects
3
CAD
4
5
6
your plan. These blocks can remain after all

Select CAD> CAD Block Management
their instances have been deleted.
to access the CAD Block Management
dialog.
2 In Use shows the blocks that have at
least one instance used.
1 Displays a list of all CAD blocks for the
current plan file, including all CAD
3 Select any block in the list, click Insert,
blocks that appear as instances on any floor, then click in floor plan view, a CAD
in a CAD detail or saved elevation/cross detail, or in a cross section/elevation view to
section view. It can also include CAD blocks place a new instance of the block into that
that currently have no instance anywhere in view.
871
4 Rename - Click to specify a new name plan for deletion. Click OK to delete the
for the CAD Block. blocks.
5 Press the Purge button to mark all 6 Delete - Mark a selected block Delete
unused block definitions from your or Undelete with this button. Blocks are
deleted when you click OK.
CAD Block Specification Dialog

General Tab
2 4
1 Block Name - Specify the name for the instances of that block are updated to match
CAD block in the plan CAD Block the current definition.
Management list. All other changes in this
Copyright - Shows the block copyright, if
dialog affect only this instance of the block,
there is one.
but changing the name modifies the block
definition.
2 X Position - Specify the x coordinate of
the center of the CAD block instance.
This name is used when you export the block
via DXF/DWG, and is also imported with Y Position - Specify the y coordinate of the
DXF/DWG block definitions. A CAD block center of the CAD block instance.
name is limited to 255 characters.
Angle - Specify the angle for the CAD block
If you use a name that is in use, the definition instance.
of the other block is overwritten and the
872
Dimensions
3 Retain Aspect Ration of x - Check this 4 By Block - Specify that the block line
box to retain the existing ratio between style and fill style should override the
the height and width of the block. If you line style and fill style of the individual
resize the block unevenly, you cannot objects in the block.
explode it.
New block instances default to By Block
Height - Specify the height of the CAD unless Use ‘By Object’ when creating new
block instance. CAD blocks is checked in the CAD panel of
the Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel” on
Height Factor - Specify the ratio of the
page 199.
height of the CAD block instance to the
height of the original CAD block. By Object - Specify that the individual
objects in the block control their own line
If the height and width factors are set to
style and fill style.
different values, the instance cannot be
exploded and ovals and arcs are distorted.
Line Style Tab
Width - Specify the width of the CAD block
instance. For information about using the Line Style
Tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
Width Factor - Specify the ratio of the
width of the CAD block instance to the width Fill Style Tab
of the original CAD block.
For information about using the Fill Style
If the height and width factors are set to Tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
different values, the instance cannot be
exploded and ovals and arcs are distorted.
Objects
CAD
Dimensions
The Dimension Tools are discussed in
depth in their own chapter. See
“Dimensions” on page 795.
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog

At the bottom of many dialogs, you can click
the Number Style button to open the
Number Style/Angle Style dialog.
This dialog controls the format of distances,
coordinates and angles in these dialogs and
the status bar.
873
CAD Details
Classroom Design Project Training CAD Detail
Video: Adding CAD Details Management Dialog
What’s New In Version X1 Training Select CAD> CAD Detail Manage-
Video: CAD - Details Library and ment to open the CAD Detail
Details Template Plan Management dialog. An alphabetical list
CAD Details are special view windows for of all CAD Details saved with the current
drawing, saving and organizing any 2D plan displays on the left side of the dialog.
drawings associated with the current plan,
such as plot layouts and cross section details.
Like other views, CAD Details are saved
with the plan they are created in and can be
sent to the printer or layout sheet.
2D CAD information can also be copied into
or out of a CAD Detail window using the
group select and copy functions.
Each plan file can store any number of CAD
Details. CAD Details saved with the current
Click New... to open the Create New CAD
plan are listed in the Project Browser and
Detail dialog.
the CAD Detail Management dialog.
874
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints
When walls are framed using the Build

Framing dialog, a Wall Detail is created for
each wall. These details are listed in the
Project Browser and are also accessible
by selecting a wall and clicking the Open
Wall Detail edit button. Wall Details are
not listed in the CAD Detail
Name the CAD Detail, click OK, and a new Management dialog. See “Wall Framing
CAD Detail window opens. Details” on page 492.
To rename an existing CAD Detail, click
Rename. In the Create New CAD Detail CAD Detail from View
dialog, type a new name for the selected CAD> CAD Detail from View
CAD Detail and click OK. converts the current view into a 2D
To open an existing CAD Detail, click its CAD drawing composed of CAD objects that
name to select it, then click Open. can be then edited.
To delete an existing CAD Detail, click its CAD Details should be given short
name in the alphabetized list to select it, then descriptive names for organizational
click Delete. purposes.
Note: It is important to understand that a

Special CAD Details detail created with the CAD Detail from View
Some CAD details are created automatically tool is not dynamically linked to the original
by the program. If any roof or floor trusses view. Any changes made to the view do not
update in the detail or vice versa.
are present in your plan, the program creates
Objects
a Truss Detail that includes an editable
CAD
diagram of each truss type used and a count CAD Detail from View is available in
of each. See “Editing Framing” on page 494. all views except render and raytrace views
and materials lists.
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints

What’s New In Version X1 Training A plot plan can be sent to layout and
Video: CAD - Plan Footprints included in working drawings. See “Floor
Plan Views and CAD Details” on page 978.
Using the CAD Tools and conventional
survey information, you can create an A plot plan can also be converted into a
accurate plot plan in floor plan view or a terrain perimeter, allowing you to add
CAD Detail. See “Creating a Plot Plan” on elevation data and accurately position
page 599. buildings for 3D modeling of home and lot.
875
Plan Footprint (see “Plan Footprint Specification Dialog”

on page 877).
Plan Footprint is a feature that creates
a new CAD detail or imports the Inserting a footprint into a CAD detail
building footprint into an existing CAD
Detail. Once the plan footprint appears in the 1. Open the CAD detail you want to insert
detail window, you can control what a footprint into.
information displays.
2. Select CAD> Plan Footprint .
To create a new Plan Footprint 3. Select the floor to use from the drop-
down list and click OK.
1. Open the floor plan view of the plan you
want to create a plan footprint from.
DN
DECK
15'8 x 9'7
30" GE
electric
cooktop
4. The floor plan appears in the CAD
KITCHEN
DINING
12'4 x 13'5
12'4 x 10'5
Allow 39"
for ref.
Detail window. Select Window> Fill
Double
electric
oven
LIVING
Window to center the footprint on
15'6 x 25'2
HALL
2'6 x 6'5
NOOK
10'3 x 9'5 screen. The footprint can be rotated and
UP
moved anywhere in the window.

DN
HALL
4'8 x 31'10
CLOSET
2'2 x 7'2
two vents, min 50 sq in ea., FAMILY
max 5 in off floor
13'1 x 19'1
solid core door, 1 DN

hr rating
UP
5/8 inch, wallboard on walls

& ceiling between house and
garage
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
BATH
6'6 x 5'6
PORCH
15'7 x 5'6
DN
Floor Plan View

UP
2. Select CAD> Plan Footprint . The

DN
program creates a new CAD detail with

the footprint of the current floor. UP
By default, this new CAD detail uses the

Plan Footprint layer set. You can control
what displays in the footprint using the
Layer Display Options dialog (see
DN
“Displaying Objects” on page 221), or by Plan Footprint

opening the Plan Footprint for specification
876
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog
If the model consists of several buildings, a footprints is used. See “Layer Set Defaults
footprint is created for each building. Dialog” on page 225.
Moving one footprint automatically adjusts
When a plan footprint is created by selecting
all the footprints in order to maintain their
relationship. CAD> Plan Footprint while in a CAD
Detail, the current layer set is used. See
If you edit a plan using Reverse Plan or “Layer Set Management” on page 217.
the Edit Area tools, the plan footprint Regardless of the layer set in use, the
updates automatically. appearance of objects in a Plan Footprint is
Layer Display dialog. Individual objects are on the same
Options Dialog layer as in floor plan view, while the entire
Plan Footprint is on the Default CAD Layer.
When you create a plan footprint by selecting See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
CAD> Plan Footprint while in floor 218.
plan view, the default layer set for plan
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog

Select a plan footprint and click the Open Footprint Specification dialog for the
selected plan footprint.
Object edit button to open the Plan
General Tab
Objects
CAD
1
2
3
4
1 Select the Floor Used for Plan 2 Check Display Footprint Polyline to
Footprint from the drop-down list. draw a polyline around the perimeter of
the footprint. This polyline may not be
877
visible if you also have Display Plan Details Polyline Tab

checked.This option must be chosen if you
want to use a fill pattern or specify line For information about the Polyline tab, see
styles. “Polyline Tab” on page 863.
3 Check Display Plan Details to show Line Style Tab

the walls and other details as they
appear in floor plan view. For information about using the Line Style
4 Check Use Current Layer Set to
Display to to control what displays in
Fill Style Tab
the footprint using Layer Display Options.
You can choose an alternate layer set from For more information about the Fill Style tab,
the drop-down list on the toolbar at any time. see “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
If you uncheck this box, you lose control of
what displays and the program makes the
determination for you.
CAD Defaults Dialog

The CAD Defaults dialog controls the elevation views and a third affects CAD
general appearance of CAD objects. details. Layout also has CAD defaults. Each
dialog can be accessed by opening the CAD
In each plan file, there are three different
Defaults dialog from within that view.
CAD Defaults dialogs. One affects floor
plan view, another affects cross section/
2 5
878
CAD Defaults Dialog
1 Select the Current CAD Layer from 5 Select any combination of the available
the drop-down list. See “Current CAD Options.
Layer” on page 869.
Show Arc Centers and Ends - Select
the check box to show arc centers and
Note: Although there are three CAD Defaults
dialogs in each plan file, only one layer can ends. Ends display as small lines where arcs
be specified as the Current CAD Layer. When connect to one another. A center also acts as
a new Current CAD Layer is selected, the a snap point.
change affects all view types.
Click the Define button to open the Layer

Display Options dialog. See “Layer
2 Specify the desired Line Label Height Show Arc Centers andEnds
in plan inches. You can set this higher
so that line labels on objects such as property
lines can be easily read at small scales.This Fill New Framing Members - Check to
value does not affect the size of dimension have all new framing members drawn with a
numbers or other text objects. solid white fill. This makes it easy to tell
what framing member is on top, since the
3 Display Line Lengths as - Select either objects below are blocked by the solid white
Fractional feet or Decimal feet. This fill. You can change the color for framing
setting is not available in metric format, once it is created.
which always uses millimeters.
Use Line for Framing - Check this box to
show all framing members as single lines rather
than as closed polylines.
Objects
CAD
• Fractional • Degrees
• Decimal Feet • Bearing
4 Display Line Angles as - Select either

Degrees or Bearings relative to the
North Pointer. If no North Pointer has been
established, north is assumed to be straight
up on the screen.
879
880
Chapter 33:
Advanced Design
& Editing
Chapter Overview
The tools described in this chapter allow you they are free of code violations and other
to track the time you spend on plans, errors.
eliminating guesswork and making billing
easier. Chapter Contents
Others let you draw plans with ease and • Time Tracker
flexibility, and run checks on plans you • Time Log Dialog
completed so you can be more confident that • House Wizard
• Plan Check
• IRC Checklist
Advanced
Design
Time Tracker
Classroom Design Project Training allow it to run automtically. The Time
Video: Keeping Track of your Design Tracker keeps a log that can be amended and
and Drafting Time edited as needed.
The Time Tracker tool monitors the Select Tools> Time Tracker> Start
time spent on each Chief Architect file. Time Logging to begin logging time
You can enter start and end times each time a for the current plan or layout file. This
plan or layout file is opened and closed, or creates a new entry. Opening a plan or layout
881
automatically starts a time log if you set your Time Tracker information is stored with each
preferences to do so. See “Time Tracker file and can be printed or exported from the
Panel” on page 197. Time Log dialog.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> Stop You can how the Time Tracker functions on
Time Logging to stop logging time for the Time Tracker panel of the Preferences
the current file. This button is only available dialog. See “Time Tracker Panel” on page
when an entry is currently being recorded. 197.
Select Tools> Time Tracker> View
Time Tracker logs times for each plan
Time Log to open the Time Log and layout file separately, even if they
dialog and view the time log for the current have the same project name or are saved in
file. See “Time Log Dialog” on page 882. the same directory on your computer.
Time Log Dialog

The Time Log dialog displays all entries Select Tools> Time Tracker> View Time
logged for the current plan or layout file.
Log to open the Time Log dialog.
Entries can be added, deleted, edited,
exported, and printed.
882
Time Log Dialog
3
4
5
Click Print to open the Print dialog and

1 A summary of the entries displays here.
Select an entry in the Start Time print the log.
column and edit the details in the lower
portion of the dialog. 3 Select an entry and edit the Start and
End times. Highlight the digits and
Click Add to add a new entry using the enter new values or use the arrow keys on the
2
current time. keyboard. You can also click the drop-down
list and select a date from the calendar. The
Select an entry and click Delete to remove it.
start time must predate the end time.
Advanced
Click Export to open the Select Log
Design
The Duration of the selected entry and the
Export File dialog and specify a name and
Total Duration display at right.
destination for the exported file. Time log
information can be exported as either a text
4 Initially the User information is derived
(.txt) or Comma Separated Values (.csv) file. from the Chief Architect license
registration information. By default, the User
If you have multiple plan and/or layout information prefills from the Default User
files associated with a particular project Name on the Time Tracker panel of the
and wish to bill them together, export your Preferences dialog. You can select an
Time Logs to another application and then-
combine them.
entry and change the User here.
883
5 Select an entry and add Notes.
House Wizard
The House Wizard is a time-saving Editing Rooms
feature used to create a preliminary
room-by-room design of a home without
getting caught up in the details. Once the
shape and layout of the rooms are finalized,
the House Wizard converts them into a
working plan that can be edited and detailed
to completion.
Start House Wizard

Select Tools> House Wizard> Start
House Wizard. The House Wizard
leads you through a series of windows that
gather information about the rooms you want
to include in your house. When you click
Finish and close the House Wizard, the
selected room boxes display. • Select room boxes using the Select
Objects tool just like other objects in
Chief Architect. Room boxes can be
resized, rotated, and rearranged.
• Try to line up the rooms so that they are
just touching. Excessive overlaps may
cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
Closets are the exception. You can over-
lap a room with a closet, or place in
inside another room box.
• Rooms can be copied and pasted using
the Copy/Paste edit button and
deleted using the Delete edit button.
Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor • Select Tools> House Wizard or click
plan. the Space Planning Configuration
button to access the list of room boxes
and place additional rooms in your plan.
884
Plan Check
Select an item from the list and click in 3. Turn on Reference Layers by pressing
the plan to place a room box of that type. F9 on your keyboard.
4. Add a second floor, making it blank.
5. On the second floor, select Tools>
• Select Tools> House Wizard> Hide
House Wizard> Build House .
Room Boxes or click the toggle but-
ton to hide or show the room boxes. 6. Arrange the second floor rooms as
desired, using the reference display as a
Build House guide.
7. Use Build House to complete the second
When the rooms are in place, select floor.
Tools> House Wizard> Build House
to convert the rooms into a building model.
Walls and doors are inserted between the
rooms that you arranged.
Multiple Floors
If you specified a two-story house, follow
these steps:
1. Arrange the rooms on floor one as

described.
2. Use the Build House tool to create the
walls on the first floor.
Plan Check
Advanced
Classroom Design Project Training As your plan evolves, a number of things that
Design
Video: Assigning Room Types and may become incorrect can be fixed using
Running a Plan Check Plan Check. For example, doors that change
from exterior to interior as you add new
Plan Check checks the floor of your
rooms are redrawn without the threshold line
plan shown on screen for anything that
that marks an exterior door. A cabinet,
appears to violate common building
fixture or furniture item that is against a wall
practices. Plan Check may not find all the
because the wall was moved into it, as
problems in a plan, but does it point out areas
opposed to the item moving, are attached to
that may need improvement.
the wall.
885
• Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you

Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in can fix the current error. Select Tools>
Chief Architect compares your plan with Checks> Plan Check again and the
common building practices. This Plan Check check starts where it left off.
does not claim to detect all building code and
design requirements. Always have your plans • Click Done to terminate Plan Check.
checked by a licensed professional before
beginning actual construction. Potential plan errors found are usually
highlighted in floor plan view. To ensure the
To run Plan Check, select Tools> Checks> highlighted item is on-screen, make sure the
entire plan is shown in the window before
Plan Check you run Plan Check.
If this dialog obscures the floor plan view,
Plan Check Dialog drag its title bar to move it. It remembers its
new position and displays there the next time
Plan Check is run.
1
Room Types
2
3 Plan Check can do a much better job of
checking for problems if it knows what the
rooms in your plan are to be used for, so you
should assign a Room Type to each room in
your plan. See “Room Types” on page 284.
The first time Plan Check runs in a plan, it
The current error number, along with automatically assigns a room type to as many
1
the total number of errors found. undesignated rooms as it can. Some rooms
are determined by their size and shape, and
2 A description of the current error others by their contents. For example, a shelf
displays here.
in a small room indicates a closet; a stove or
3 Options for navigating Plan Check are refrigerator indicates a kitchen; or a bed, a
found on the right side. bedroom. If the program cannot assign a
• Click Next to ignore the current error and room type, Plan Check highlights it and
proceed to the next. suggests that you do so manually.
• Click Previous to return to the previous
error.
IRC Checklist
Chief Architect includes the Checklist, a comprehensive list of standard
International Code Council’s IRC building codes that can greatly facilitate your
886
IRC Checklist
planning, design, and plan approval

processes. Note: The IRC Checklist is a useful reference
tool but is not an alternative to the local build-
Select Tools> Checks> View IRC Checklist ing codes in your area.
to view a copy of the IRC Checklist in
.pdf format.
Advanced
Design
887
888
Chapter 34:
Pictures, Images,
& Movies
Chapter Overview
Video: Images, Pictures, and Movies
Chief Architect can save any view in a wide Chapter Contents
variety of picture file formats. Picture files • Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image
Objects
can also be imported into Chief Architect and
• Importing Picture Files
shown in most views.
• Editing Picture Files
Chief Architect also contains many images • Exporting Picture Files
of real world objects such as trees, plants, • Picture File Box Specification Dialog
people, and vehicles in the Library Browser. • Creating Images
Images are actual objects that can be edited • Placing Images
in a variety of ways. • Displaying Images
• Resizing an Image
Chief Architect allows you to create virtual
• Adding Images to the Library
tours that can be saved as .avi files, shared
• Image Specification Dialog
with others, and played back later.
• Creating Screen Captures
Chief Architect can also generate a POV-ray • Metafiles Pics, Images
file from a 3D view for photo-realistic • Editing Metafiles & Movies
rendering capabilities. The POV-ray feature • Metafile Specification Dialog
is covered in its own chapter. See • Copy Region as Picture
“Raytracing” on page 787. • Walkthroughs
889
• Creating VRML Files
Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image Objects

In common computer language, picture files, A picture, on the other hand, is an image that
pictures and images are more or less that has been imported into the program from
synonymous. In Chief Architect, however, a picture file. Pictures can be imported into
there are some notable differences between floor plan view, cross section/elevations,
these terms. wall elevations, CAD details, and layout
pages. They are two-dimensional only; they
In Chief Architect, a picture file (such as a
do not display in camera views or overviews.
.bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png) is a two
dimensional image file. You can find An image object is also based on a picture
examples on most computers. file, but it does display in both 2D and 3D
views. Images contain width and height data
and have an associated 2D CAD block.
Importing Picture Files

Picture files can be imported into floor Select File> Import> Picture (BMP, JPG,
plan view, cross section/elevations, PNG) to insert a picture file into a plan
wall elevations, CAD details, and layout or layout file. The Import Picture File
pages. Picture files do not display in camera dialog opens so you can browse to a picture
views or overviews. file on your computer.
Import Picture File Dialog
1
2
3
4
890
Editing Picture Files
1 Navigate to the folder containing the and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the
picture to be imported. menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools.
See “Paste” on page 137 and “Creating
2 Select the picture file from the list. Screen Captures” on page 900.
3 File name shows the selected picture.
Importing Backdrops
4 Files of type can be *.bmp, *.jpg,
*.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx. Backdrops for 3D views can be imported
Click Open to finish importing the picture. directly into the Library Browser from
The picture is placed in the center of the anywhere on your computer. See “Adding
current view. Backdrops to the Library” on page 676.
Using Paste Image Importing/

Exporting Metafiles
You can also import a picture by first
copying it to the Windows Clipboard, Enhanced Metafiles (.EMF) can be imported
then navigating to a Chief Architect window and exported. See “Metafiles” on page 901.
Editing Picture Files

Picture files can be edited like other objects. 5. The Resize Factor for the image is the
See “Editing Objects” on page 79. true distance on the image divided by
the distance between the CAD lines.
Resize Factor In other words, if the items are supposed to
An imported picture of a house plan or be 10 feet apart on the picture, but the
property layout can be drawn at full scale distance between the two CAD lines
with a bit of calculation. superimposed on them is only 2 feet, you
need to set the Resize Factor for the picture
To calculate the Resize Factor to 5. (10’ divided by 2’ equals 5). When the
picture is 5 times the original size, the items
1. Import the picture file. on the picture are at the actual scale shown
on the picture.
2. Find two items on the picture that are a
known horizontal or vertical distance 6. Select the picture and click the Trans-
apart. form/Replicate Object edit button.
3. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these The Transform/Replicate Object
Pics, Images
two items. dialog opens.
& Movies
4. Find the distance between the CAD 7. Select the Resize Factor check box and
lines. enter the calculated Resize Factor.
8. Click OK and the image is rescaled.
891
Resize Picture 4. After you click at the second point, the

Resize Picture dialog opens showing
A selected picture can be resized in the distance between the points.
either the X or Y direction with the
Resize Picture tool.
1. Select the picture.
2. Click the Resize Picture edit

button.
3. Click two points in the image that have a 5. Enter a new dimension that matches the
known distance between them. known distance between the points.
6. Click OK and the picture is resized.
Exporting Picture Files

The Export Picture tool is similar to to open the Export Picture File dialog
creating a screen capture of everything and save the current view as a picture file.
in the current Chief Architect window. Select
Files may be saved in various picture file
File> Export> Picture (BMP, JPG, PNG)
formats. These files can then be used outside
of Chief Architect in other applications.
1 Navigate to the desired folder. 3 Give the picture a name.

2 The pictures that exist in the current 4 Save as type can be *.bmp, *.jpg,
folder display here. *.png, *.tif, or *.pcx.
892
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
Click Save to finish. Importing/

Exporting Metafiles
Enhanced Metafiles (.EMF) can be imported
and exported. See “Metafiles” on page 901.
Picture File Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported picture file and click the
Picture File Box Specification dialog.
3 5
Pics, Images
1 Filename - The full pathname for the 2 Retain Aspect Ratio - Check this box & Movies
picture file. Type a new name to change to maintain the width to height ratio of
the picture assigned to this box. the original image. If you change one value,
the other recalculates so the image is not
Browse - Click this button to browse for a
stretched or distorted as it is resized.
new picture file or to relink to a missing file.
893
Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the aspect Check Black and White Dither to dither
ratio is changed, you can click this button to the selected picture file. Dithering creates a
return the picture to its original aspect ratio. two tone effect that may produce better
results when printing some pictures.
Width - Specify the desired width of the
picture box in plan inches. The original Check Grayscale to replace the color in the
width in pixels displays to the right. selected picture file with shades of gray.
Height - Specify the desired height of the Check Reflect to reverse the image.
picture box in plan inches. The original
Enter a degree of Brightness from 1 - 100%.
height in pixels displays to the right.
Enter a degree of Contrast from 1 - 100%.
3 X Position - The location of the picture
box relative to the absolute origin.
Line Style Tab
Y Position - The location of the picture box
relative to the absolute origin. The Line Style tab in the Picture File Box
Specification dialog is similar to the same
Angle - The current angle of the picture box tab in numerous other dialogs, with one
relative to a horizontal line pointing towards exception.
the right hand side of the screen.
Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off
4 Input/Output (IO) Options - Check the display of the picture’s border polyline.
Save in Plan to embed the image in the
plan file. If a picture file is embedded in a
plan, you do not need to include it when
sending the plan to a different computer.
Click the radio button beside either PNG or
JPEG to specify:
• Picture files that were originally using
.jpg format select the .jpg option by
default.
Fill Style Tab
• Picture files that were using .gif or .png
formats select the .png option by default. For information about using the Fill Style
tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 864.
5 Choose from a variety of Display
Options.
Creating Images
Select Build> Image to view the 2D images representing real world objects to
Image Tools, which allow you to use enhance your 3D views.
894
Creating Images
Images have the advantage of making 3D block from the library. See “CAD
views and renderings more realistic without Blocks” on page 870.
adding many surfaces to the model. For • Enter Height and/or Width and Loca-
example, a realistic tree image can be used tion information.
instead of a tree symbol with thousands of
3. Enter transparency information and
surfaces, dramatically improving realism
layer information on the Transparency
without compromising drawing time.
tab.
An image is not the same as a picture file. 4. Click OK to close the Image
See “Picture Files vs. Pictures and Image Specification dialog.
Objects” on page 890. Images are associated
with a CAD block for floor plan view and 5. Click to place the new image in floor
have width and height data assigned to them. plan view.
There are two types of images in the For information about saving images to the
program: library, see “Adding Images to the Library”
on page 897.
• Images rotate so that they always
face the camera in 3D views. To create an image in the Library Browser
• Billboard Images do not rotate to 1. From the Library Browser, select an

face the camera. An example of when unlocked library, folder, subfolder, or
this may be useful is an image of a trellis, image.
which might look awkward when facing
2. Right-click with the mouse and select
a camera from a side view.
New> Image to open the Image
Specification dialog. See “Image
To create an image in floor plan view
1. In floor plan view, select Build> 3. Once created, the image is listed in the
Library Browser where you right-
Image> Create Image or Billboard clicked. Size and other data is saved.
Image to open the Image
Specification dialog. See “Image Using Paste Image
You can also import an image by first
2. On the Image tab: copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
• Click the Browse button to browse to a then navigating to a Chief Architect window
picture file on your computer or enter and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the
the path to a valid picture file in the menu, or by using the Screen Capture tools. Pics, Images
Image File field. See “Paste” on page 137 and “Creating
& Movies
• Select a CAD block to represent the Screen Captures” on page 900.
image in floor plan view. Choose a 2D
Plan Symbol from the list or click the
Library button and select a CAD
895
Converting a 2. Select a folder of images to convert in

Folder of Images the Browse For Folder dialog and
click OK.
A folder of images can be converted
3. When all of the images in the folder are
into image objects all at once, saving
converted, a new library of the same
the effort of converting them individually.
name and directory structure as the con-
verted folder is listed in the Library
To convert a folder of images:
Browser.
1. Select Build> Image> Create Image
Library .
Placing Images
Open the Library and expand the The image displays in 3D views and a CAD
Image cetegory. Select an image and block marks its location in floor plan view.
click in a floor plan, vector, or render view to
place it.
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan and 3D the library can represent an image object. See
views can be controlled in the Layer “Image Specification Dialog” on page 897.
The CAD blocks that represent images in
floor plan view are placed on the Images
An image consists of a two-dimensional layer by default. They can be moved to other
picture file, an associated CAD block, and layers. See “Image Specification Dialog” on
width and height data. Depending on the type page 897.
of view that is current, the image appears
differently, or may not display at all. In Layout
The symbols representing images in floor
In Floor Plan View plan view, whether 2D symbols or CAD
In floor plan view, images are represented by blocks, can display on a layout sheet and be
an 2D CAD block. Any 2D CAD block from printed or plotted.
Resizing an Image
Images can be resized in either 2D or 3D views, or in the Image Specification
896
Adding Images to the Library
dialog. See “Image Specification Dialog” on the top. The picture image and the 2D
page 897. symbol resize proportionally.
When either the height or the width is
changed, the rest of the image resizes
proportionally.
Images can be resized in floor plan view by
dragging the circular handles at the top of the
2D symbol. This method retains the aspect
ratio of the of the image and 2D CAD block..
An image can be resized in any 3D view by

dragging the circular Resize edit handle at
Adding Images to the Library

Chief Architect can use any image with a the contextual menu. The Image
*.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, *.tif, or *.pcx. Specification dialog opens.
extension. Browse to the image you want to add and
Generally, .png files work best as images select your other options. For more
because this format has good compression information in these options, see “Image
and allows for the image to contain Specification Dialog” on page 897.
transparency information. For information about adding images, see
Right click on an unlocked folder in the “Graphics Directories” on page 193.
Library Browser. Select New> Image from
Image Specification Dialog

Any image can be adjusted in size or even Existing images can also be opened for
changed to a different image altogether. specification directly from the Library Pics, Images
Select the image and click the Open Object Browser. Select an image in the tree view,
& Movies
right click, and select Open from the
edit button to open the Image
contextual menu.
897
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Image File - The path and name of the 3 Height - Enter a height for the selected
selected image file. Click Browse to image. The width adjusts
open the Library Browser and replace the proportionally.
current image with a different one.
4 Width - Enter a width for the selected
2 2D Plan Symbol - Several universal image. The height adjusts
CAD blocks are available to mark the proportionally.
location of the image in floor plan view.
Select one from the drop-down list or click 5 Check Do not rotate in render view to
keep the image from rotating with the
the Library button to choose a CAD block
camera.
from the Library Browser.
If you change the CAD block that represents 6 Location - Locate the selected image
precisely by specifying its X
an image in floor plan view, you may want to Coordinate and Y Coordinate.
save the new image to the library. See
“Displaying Images” on page 896. Height Above - Specify the image height
above the ground, if applicable.
898
Image Specification Dialog
Transparency Tab
2
3
1 Click this button to keep the default that is magenta becomes transparent in 3D
transparency included in the image file. views. If the image itself contains the
transparency color, that part of the image
2 To use another color to represent the also becomes transparent. This may make the
tansparency, click this button.
image appear partially disintegrated.
Click the color box to open Color Chooser
You may need to experiment to find the best
dialog and select another transparency color.
transparency color for the image.
Enter a level of Tolerance to be applied to
colors that are almost the same color as the Layer Tab
specified transparency color. Use the slide
bar or type a number in the edit box. For information about using the Layer tab,
see “Layer Tab” on page 223.
3 Place your pointer over a part of the
preview and a magnified preview
displays here, allowing for accurate pixel
selection.
Pics, Images
The Transparency Color & Movies
By default, the program uses magenta as the
transparency color. Every pixel in the image
899
Creating Screen Captures

Use the Screen Capture tools to add Begin by selecting Tools> Screen Capture>
backdrops, images or materials to the Chief Screen Capture Setup to open the
Architect Library or to create picture objects. Screen Capture Setup dialog.
You can capture screens in Chief Architect or
other applications.
Screen Capture Setup Dialog
1 Select the Screen Capture Creation • If you choose Picture as the capture type,
Type that you want. the picture displays on screen in Chief
• If you select Backdrop as the capture Architect.
type, the program will add the capture to
the My Backdrops library category, and it 2 Follow these instructions to create the
screen capture after you have selected a
will display in the library preview panes. capture type.
To use this backdrop, select 3D> 3D Set-
tings from the menu. See “3D Set- 3 Click Capture when you are ready to
proceed.
tings Dialog” on page 757.
• If you select Image as the capture type, To create a screen capture
the program will add the capture to the
My Images library category. The image 1. Select 3D> Screen Capture> Capture
will display in the preview panes and will Screen , or click the Capture button
be selected. Click in the plan to place it. in the Screen Capture Setup dialog,
• If you select Material as the capture then right-click on screen to activate the
type, the new material will be added to capture tool.
the My Materials library category and 2. Navigate to the window you want to
will be shown in the preview panes. capture from. This can be in Chief
Select 3D> Materials> Material Architect, another program, or a Web
Painter to apply the material. page in your Internet browser.
900
Metafiles
3. Click to specify the first corner of the To change the name of a captured backdrop,
capture. image, or material, right click on it’s name in
4. Click to specify the second corner. A the library list, select Rename, and type in
marquee defines the capture area as you the new name. See “Renaming Libraries” on
move the mouse. page 677.
Metafiles
A metafile (.EMF) is a special file format 5. Enter a name and location for the meta-
that is made up of vectors (lines) that allow file.
the image to be rescaled without loss of 6. Click Save to close the Export
quality. High resolution pictures can be Metafile dialog and open the Metafile
exported as a metafile. Size dialog.
Exporting Metafiles
A metafile can be exported from any
view except render and raytrace views.
Only items that display on screen are written
to the metafile.
To export a metafile
1. Accurately position the view on screen. 7. Specify the metafile desired Width or
Height. When one value is edited, the
2. Select File> Export> Metafile (EMF) other changes to maintain its aspect
. ratio. Metafiles can always be resized
later.
3. Drag a marquee from corner to cor-
ner, defining the area that will become a Specify, too the desired Dots Per Inch
metafile. (DPI) for the metafile. A larger value
4. Release the mouse to open the Export results in a higher quality metafile, but
Metafile dialog. also a larger file size.
3D Views and Metafiles

The Metafile Size dialog from a 3D view Pics, Images
also allows you increase the printing line & Movies
weight of a metafile created from any 3D
view.
901
This option has no effect on a metafile

created from a floor plan view. Metafiles
created from a floor plan view use the line
weights defined in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See “Layer Display
Importing Metafiles
Select File> Import> Metafile from
To increase the printing line weight, type a
floor plan view, a cross section/
larger number in the Use Line Weight box.
elevation view, or a CAD detail to open the
A line weight of 3 or 4 is usually sufficient
Import Metafile dialog, which is a typical
for plotting.
open file dialog. See “Opening a Plan or
Layout File” on page 164.
Editing Metafiles
Once imported into a plan, a metafile can be As with most objects, metafiles can be
selected and edited like other objects. See copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
“Selecting Objects” on page 92. “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 113.
Using Dimensions display on the edit toolbar for a selected
Metafiles can be relocated relative to other metafile.
objects with precision using dimensions. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
open the Metafile Specification
page 804.
dialog. See “Metafile Specification Dia-
log” on page 903.
Using Edit Handles
• If another object occupies the same space
Metafiles can be edited using their edit as the metafile, click the Move to Front
handles much the way CAD boxes can. See
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 111. of Group edit button to display the
metafile on top of the other objects. See
“Move to Front of Group” on page 122.
Using Edit Buttons
A selected metafile can be edited in a variety
of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
902
Metafile Specification Dialog
Metafile Specification Dialog

Select an imported metafile and click the
Metafile Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 3
1 The metafiles Size displays here along Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off
with the current Aspect ratio. You can the display of the picture’s border polyline.
enter a different Width or Height.
2 The metafile’s original aspect ratio

displays here. If the metafile’s width or
height has been changed, you can click the
Convert To Original Aspect Ratio button
to return it to the original aspect ratio.
3 The Metafile’s current Position and tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 851.
orientation display here. Enter a new X
Position and/or a Y Position to relocate the Fill Style Tab
Metafile in absolute coordinates. You can
also change the Metafile’s Angle. For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Line Style Tab
The Line Style tab in the Metafile Pics, Images
Specification dialog is similar to the same & Movies
tab in numerous other dialogs, with one
exception.
903
Copy Region as Picture

You can copy any portion of the screen 4. The selection is copied to the Windows
and save it as a picture. clipboard.
• As long as the current view is not a ren-
To use Copy Region as Picture der or raytrace view, the Metafile
Size dialog displays because the pro-
1. Open the view that you would like to gram uses this file format to produce
copy all or part of as a picture. vector-based pictures. See “Exporting
2. Select Edit> Copy Region as Picture Metafiles” on page 901.
. Your pointer displays a marquee • If the current view is a render or ray-
icon. trace view, the region is sent directly to
the Windows clipboard.
3. Click and drag a rectangular selection
marquee around the desired region. 5. From there, the picture can be pasted
into another view or another program.
Walkthroughs
Introductory Training Video: Virtual
Walkthroughs
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of picture
files saved in .avi format that can be
opened by other applications such as
Windows Media Player.
Recording a Walkthrough • Select a Frame Rate between 1 and

100. The value entered is the number
1. Create a vector or render view. This of frames per second.
view is the first frame of the walk- • Select a Compression Percent
through. between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives
the highest quality images and the larg-
2. From the view, select 3D> Walk-
est file size.
throughs> Record Walkthrough . • Click OK.
3. Specify a location and name for the 5. Use the camera movement tools to cre-
walkthrough in the Write Movie File ate additional views. Each time the
dialog and click Save. screen redraws, that view is recorded as
4. In the Walkthrough Options dialog: the next frame in sequence. See “Mov-
ing a Camera in 3D Views” on page 737.
904
Creating VRML Files
6. To move the camera without saving a

view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll
bars does not change the viewpoint and does
Recording to temporarily stop not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
recording. You can then use the Save
Frame button to control what views Playing a Walkthrough
are saved, or start recording again by
Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play
selecting 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
Walkthrough to open the Open
Recording again. Movie File dialog. Browse to an .avi on
7. When the walkthrough sequence is com- your computer. Your default video
plete choose 3D>Walkthroughs> Stop application plays the walkthrough.
Recording or close the view.
Creating VRML Files

VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling 3D model with texture, image, and lighting
Language) is a 3D file format that can information that cannot be exported via
be imported by various “walkthrough” DWG/DXF. You can post a VRML file to the
viewers as well as other rendering packages. web or e-mail it to a customer.
An exported VRML file contains the entire
Exporting VRML Files

VRML files are created from vector and VRML files match render views more
render views. The entire model is exported, closely than vector views since they use
but the starting point for the walkthrough is similar display methods including lighting
defined by the camera location at the time of and textures.
export. VRML files use the same textures
When a vector or render view is active, select
that appear in render views.
File> Export> Export VRML . The
VRML Export Options dialog opens.
1 2
3
4 Pics, Images
5 & Movies
6
7
8
905
1 Define the Camera Field of View. save it to the desired VRML folder and click
Standard most closely corresponds to Save.
the default Chief Architect camera view. The
other options generate a wider field of view. It is best to keep all VRML files in a
folder separate from your normal Chief
Select as many options along the right side as Architect files, since all textures used in the
desired. model also export to the same folder. This
could add a significant number of files, creat-
2 No Textures Exported keeps ing potential organization problems. A folder
associated texture files from being named VRML export can be found in the
exported with the VRML file. If textures are Chief Architect root directory for this purpose.
exported, the texture files must be in the
folder with the VRML file. VRML use of Texture
& Image Files
3 Walk Through Surfaces allows you to
walk through walls and closed doors The VRML specification does not support
from room to room, instead of stopping when the use of .bmp files. Instead, VRML only
you reach a wall. supports compressed file formats such as
.gif, .png, or .jpg files. These are more
4 Turn off Ambient Lights turns off the compatible, compressed, efficient formats. In
default lights that are used to light a
scene. order for VRML to render textures correctly,
the texture and image files must be in the
5 Turn off Fixture Lights turns off the same directory as the exported .wrl file.
default lights that are generated for
fixtures and used to light a scene. You may add new texture and image files for
Chief Architect to use if you use the same
6 Night Sky/Ground colors darkens the file formats as those provided with the
ground plane and sky to give a night program. If you want to use a .bmp file in
appearance. Chief Architect and still be able to export it
with the VRML file, you should also create a
7 Run Default VRML Viewer starts the .gif file with the same name in the same
VRML viewer and opens the new
VRML file as soon as it is generated. directory. When you export the VRML file,
Chief Architect automatically substitutes the
8 Copy Images to Export Directory .gif for the .bmp file used in the render view.
should be checked if you are saving the You should use either the .jpg or .png file
VRML to a file on a disk to share with format instead of using .bmp and .gif pairs
others. This copies texture bitmaps with the whevenever possible.
VRML file so that they render correctly
when exported. For more information about VRML players,
visit the Chief Architect Web site at
Once the general parameters have been www.chiefarchitect.com.
selected click OK. Name the VRML file and
906
Chapter 35:
Importing and
Importing &
Exporting
Exporting
Chapter Overview
Video: Importing and Exporting 3D
Symbols
Video: Importing and Exporting 2D
DWG or DXF Files
Chief Architect allows you to import and Chapter Contents
export files from, and to, other plans or other • Compatibility
CAD programs. Importing is the process of • DXF vs. DWG
opening a file in Chief Architect that was • CAD to Walls
produced in a different program. Exporting is • Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files
the process of saving a file in a format that • Additional 2D Import Information
can be read by another program. • Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
• Additional 2D Export Information
• Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG
Format
• Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format
907
Compatibility
Importing For more information on importing these
files, see “Create Symbol Wizard” on page
Chief Architect supports import of the 925.
following:
• 2D .dxf or .dwg files compatible with Exporting
AutoCAD through version 2007.
Chief Architect supports export of the
• Polylines (Bulges- Arcs in Polyline) following:
• Multi Line Text • Complete 3D .dxf or .dwg models
• Lightweight Polylines including geometry.
• 2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids) • 3D .3ds models including geometry and
• 3D faces/polyface meshes materials
• Hatch entities • 3D views as 2D .dxf or .dwg files
• Spline entities
Dimensions
• Ellipses
Chief Architect supports the import and
Chief Architect also supports import of these export of aligned, rotated, and angular
file types using the Create Symbol Wizard: dimensions. Imported dimensions that are
• 3D .dwg/.dxf files compatible with not supported by Chief Architect can be
AutoCAD edited only as lines and text.
• .obj files CAD blocks containing dimensions as text
• .3ds files must be exploded before the text can be
edited separately. For more on exploding, see
“CAD Blocks” on page 870.
DXF vs. DWG

Many design programs can read and write .dwg is the native AutoCAD file format.
.dxf and .dwg file formats. Both formats Originally a proprietary format, it is now
interpret data as CAD objects such as lines, widely used with many different products.
polylines, and circles.
The .dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a
standard file format created by Autodesk for
the transfer of data between other programs.
908
CAD to Walls
Importing &
Exporting
CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a wall layers and other structural items can be
flat line drawing into a 3D model. converted to actual Chief Architect walls,
Once a drawing has been imported into Chief railings, windows, or doors. See “CAD to
Architect, double CAD lines that represent Walls” on page 249.
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files

To import a 2D drawing file, select A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported into floor
File> Import> Drawing (DWG/DXF)
plan view, Wall Elevation view, Cross
to open the welcome page of the Import
Drawing Wizard. Click Next to continue. Section/Elevation view, or a CAD
Detail window.
Select File
3
4
1 Enter the full pathname of the drawing using the Import Drawing Wizard displays in
file you want to import or click Browse this field.
to locate a file on your computer. The
directory containing the last file selected 2 If you want to convert lines to polylines
or boxes, check the appropriate options.
909
Polylines are imported as polylines the file being imported whether or not they
regardless of these settings. are visible. See “CAD Block Management”
on page 871.
Terrain Elevation Data - Check this box to
import lines as Terrain Data. See “Importing
4 Select Only import CAD blocks if
DXF/DWG Elevation Data” on page 627. they are referenced in the drawing to
reduce the volume of transferred data.
Polylines - Check this option to import lines
as polylines. Unconnected lines will be
5 Check Import Hatch entities to import
connected. This option is rarely needed. areas of hatching as solid-filled
polylines.
Boxes - Check this option to import lines as
boxes. Unconnected lines will be connected. Click Next to load the file into memory so
This option is rarely needed. that Chief Architect can present information
about the contents of the file. This can take a
3 Select Import all CAD blocks to while for larger files.
access all CAD blocks associated with
Select Layers
1 Specify which layers you want to 3 Layers that were frozen on import are
import. Boxes checked at left are not checked by default. You can include
imported; unchecked boxes are not. them by checking the box at left.
2 Layers that were visible on import are Layers are designated as “visible” or
checked by default. You may choose to “frozen” before a file is saved/exported in the
include an invisible layer by checking the original program. Changes must be made in
box at left. the original program and saved/exported
again.
910
Layer Mapping
Importing &
Exporting
1
2
3
4
5
The Layer Mapping page specifies how Mapping Layers By Name

layers are structured once imported into
Chief Architect. 3 The second option is to map layers by
name. Layers are created in Chief
Architect with the same names as those listed
Mapping to a Single Layer
on the Select Layers window of the Import
Drawing Wizard, and the imported CAD
1 The simplest layer mapping option is to
assign all CAD objects to a single Chief objects are placed on those layers.
Architect layer. This choice offers the least
control. Original layer attributes are lost. 4 In combination with the second
alternative, you may choose to import
Line color, style, and weight are preserved on
all attributes for each layer or none at all.
a per object basis.
The third option is to map each layer
5
2 All CAD objects to be imported are individually with complete control of
placed on the layer indicated in the box.
all layer mapping options. Selecting the third
Select a layer from the drop-down list or
option opens the Advanced Layer
click the Define... button to open the Layer
Mapping page.
Display Options dialog and specify a layer
and its properties. See “Layer Display
911
Advanced Layer Mapping
If you select the Advanced Layer Mapping

2 Shows the Chief Layer that the
alternative, the Advanced Layer currently selected drawing file layer
Mapping page displays. This window will be imported to. Select a different layer in
allows for complete user control of all layer Chief Architect to import onto from the drop-
mapping options. down list, or click the Define... button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog
1 Lists the layers found in the drawing where Chief layers can be specified and
file and the layer in Chief Architect that
defined. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
each will be imported to. Select a layer and
on page 218.
specify which layer to import it to below.
Select multiple layers by holding down the Repeat these steps for additional layers.
Shift key. Click Next to continue.
912
Duplicate CAD Blocks
Importing &
Exporting
1
2
3
4
If one or more CAD blocks in the imported

4 Select the fourth option to open the
file have the same name as a block in the Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
current plan, the Duplicate CAD Blocks page and manage each duplicate individually.
page displays.
Click Next to continue.
There are four alternatives. Selecting any of
the first three applies that choice to all
duplicate CAD blocks in your plan.
1 The first choice is to allow the program

to automatically generate unique names
for each duplicate. For instance, if the
original file’s name is “blockname,” the
program gives the new file a name like:
“blockname-copy” or “blockname-copy-1.”
2 The second alternative is to replace the

existing block in the plan with the
duplicate. This option is not recommended,
as all instances of the CAD block are
replaced.
3 The third is to keep the existing block

and discard the duplicate.
913
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
3
1
If you chose the fourth option from the

2 Click one of the three buttons in the
Duplicate CAD Block dialog, the center of the window to specify how the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Block highlighted blocks are to be treated.
window displays. It allows you to apply the
first three alternatives from the previous 3 Review your choices in the tables at the
right.
window to each duplicate individually.
4 Highlight block(s) within tables at far
1 Highlight a block in the list at the far right and click Remove to reverse
left. Select multiple blocks by holding
choices.
down the Shift key..
Click Next to continue.
914
Additional 2D Import Information
Drawing Unit
Importing &
Exporting
1
2
3
1 What unit of measurement was used 3 Import as CAD blocks - Select this
to create this drawing? - Click the radio button to import dimensions as
drop down box and select a unit of CAD entities that are not recognized by
measurement. This ensures that your Chief Architect as dimensions.
imported drawing is accurate.
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Chief Archi-
tectHome Designer Pro defaults to inches or When a file is imported, it initially appears in
millimeters. If you are importing a site plan or Chief Architect as a single unit, with a Move
topo prepared by a surveyor, or if you are
edit handle available for relocating the
importing a metric drawing into an imperial
plan (or vice versa), you may need to change entire drawing. A Rotation handle is
units. available as well.
Imported CAD objects can be manipulated
2 Import as dimensions where possible with the CAD tools. See “Editing Objects”
- Select this radio button to import on page 79.
dimensions as Chief Architect supported
dimensions.
Additional 2D Import Information

2D import is accomplished by reading In general, all Z coordinates are mapped to
entities from the .dwg or .dxf file and zero. If an entity has thickness, Chief
creating the equivalent CAD objects in Chief Architect ignores it.
Architect.
The following is a list of the entities that are
read and how they are converted. All other
entities are ignored:
915
Lines - Both 2D and 3D lines. dimensions. All other dimension types have
their associated block imported and placed as
Circle - Fully supported in 2D. an insert at the appropriate location.
Arc - Fully supported in 2D. Polylines and Lightweight Polylines -
Ellipse - Fully supported in 2D. Polylines are imported as polylines. Bumps
are converted to arcs. Line widths are
Splines - Fully supported as 2D polylines. ignored.
Text & Multi-line Text - Both are mapped to Attributes - Attributes are text objects that
the Text layer. Multi-line text objects retain are associated with other items, like blocks.
their original width. The first font in a multi- These are imported as text objects at the
line text object is applied to the entire object. appropriate location. The association with
Hatch - If Import Hatch entities is selected the original object is broken.
on the Select file page of the Import Layers - There can be some confusion
Drawing Wizard for a .dwg file, Hatch between importing a layer and actually
patterns are imported as a CAD block mapping entities to a layer. The distinction is
consisting of solid black filled polylines. important. The filter and layer mapping
Blocks & Block Inserts - Blocks are loaded pages of the Import Drawing Wizard
by name. The Duplicate CAD Blocks mostly deal with how entities are mapped
dialog controls whether the block is imported from one layer to another. Layer information
under a new name, replaces an existing block is only imported through the path that maps
or simply uses the existing block of the same all layers to successive numbered layers or in
name. A block is a group of entities. the Advanced Layer Mapping dialog
when the appropriate item is checked.
Solid - A solid is a 3 or 4-sided filled area.
These are imported as faces. Line Styles - Line styles are not imported.
Instead, if a style of the same name displays
3D Face - A 3D face has its Z coordinate in the Chief Architect line styles, that line
mapped to zero, and imports as a polyline. style is used. Otherwise a solid line style is
Dimension - Chief Architect supports the used.
rotated, aligned and 3-point angular
Importing 3D DWG, DXF, 3DS, and OBJ Files

Chief Architect supports the import of 3D It is not necessary to explode a 3D model
surface and 3D solid object saved to the before importing it; the block is exploded as
.dwg/.dxf format. These models are part of the import process.
decomposed into polyface meshes on import.
Materials assigned to the 3D model in the
originating program do not transfer into
Chief Architect.
916
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
In Chief Architect, materials are assigned by .3ds and .obj files are also imported using the
Importing &
Exporting
layer. Objects residing on the same layer are Create Symbol Wizard. The textures
assigned the same material. associated with .3ds are imported along with
the model and copied to the My Textures
3D .dxf, .dwg and .obj files are imported
folder of the Library Browser. The materials
using the Create Symbol Wizard. See
associated with .obj files are also imported if
“Create Symbol Wizard” on page 925.
the supporting files are available.
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files

2D and 3D files can be exported from Chief
Architect in both .dxf and .dwg file formats.
You can specify the version of AutoCAD to
export to. Compatibility with other software
may vary.
There are two ways to export .dxf files, both
using the Export Drawing File dialog.
To export the floor or CAD detail that
is currently visible, select File>
Export> Current View (DWG/
DXF).
To export the floor plan view for all
floors simultaneously, select File>
Export> All Floors (DWG/DXF)
from any floor of the plan.
917
Export Drawing File
3
4
5
6
7 10
8 11
9
12 14
13 15
1 Save In - The current directory displays .dxf is easier for the computer to read, is
here. Click the drop down arrow and more accurate, and occupies less disk space,
browse to the export location you prefer. but some applications do not support binary
.dxf.
2 Existing .dxf or .dwg files in the
current directory are listed here. The .dxf format must be selected at step 4 to
allow binary .dxf as an option.
3 Enter a file name.
7 Split Wall Assemblies Into Layers -
4 Save as type - Specify the file format Wall assemblies can be split into layers,
Chief Architect should use to export.
allowing them to be edited separately.
5 File Format Options - .dxf and .dwg
files created by Chief Architect are 8 Export only displayed layers - Select
this radio button to export only those
compatible with many versions of
layers that display on screen.
AutoCAD. Specify which version from the
drop down list.
9 Export all used and named layers -
Select this radio button to export all
6 Binary DXF - Check this box to export layers that either have something on them or
the file in binary .dxf format. Binary
918
Additional 2D Export Information
have a layer name specified. See “Layer This file is now ready to be imported by
Importing &
Exporting
Display Options Dialog” on page 218. another program.
• If you chose to export all floors, the file
10 Layer Set - Select a layer set to export. will contain all floors superimposed on
each other. The items are on distinct lay-
Customize layer sets to accommodate ers, each for its own floor. Items or entire
desired naming conventions or display floors can be turned on or off as desired.
attributes. See “Layer Sets” on page 216.
• For each floor, different plan items are
placed on separate layers. The floor an
11 Define Layers - Clicking this button item is located on is indicated by a num-
opens the Layer Display Options
ber following the layer name. For exam-
dialog and allows you to edit your layer sets
ple: “Electrical-2” contains the electrical
before exporting. See “Layer Display
information for the second floor.
12 Scaling Unit - Select the unit of DXF/DWG 2D View

measurement to be used.
Sometimes a flat 2D drawing of a 3D camera
13 Create Associative Dimensions - view, overview or elevation is needed. When
Check this box to export dimensions as the 3D view is on screen with the desired
associative dimensions. Associative objects shown, select File> Export> Cur-
dimensions are recognized by AutoCAD and
rent View . Name the file and save in the
many other CAD programs.
desired location.
Uncheck this box to export dimensions as
simple CAD entities that are not recognized Before exporting, turn off the color
dimensions. (Tools> Color Off) in the 3D view so
that only lines show. This reveals which lines
14 Export Pattern Lines - Check this box will be visible in the exported file.
to export pattern lines. Pattern lines are
exported as normal CAD lines. Elevation and cross section views produce a
file with accurate dimensions. Vector and
15 Export Filled Areas - Check this box overviews are not produced to scale.
to export filled areas as AutoCAD 2D
solid entities.
Use the CAD Detail from View tool to
Select Save to complete. automatically create a 2D view from a
3D view. See “CAD Detail From View” on
page 751.
Additional 2D Export Information

The export process converts high level Chief simple, CAD-based objects (lines, circles,
Architect objects (doors, windows, etc) into etc). Chief Architect exports all data to
919
AutoCAD’s model space. The following

entity types are currently supported for 2D Note: Uncheck “Use Associative Dimen-
export: sions” in the Export Drawing File dialog
if the CAD program you are using does not
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD, this support AutoCAD Associative dimensions.
is a 3 dimensional line with the Z coordinate See “Export Drawing File” on page 918.
set to zero.
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and
to a block, which is a named collection of
radius.
entities. A block can also contain block
Circle - Fully Supported. inserts.
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an In addition to the above entities several other
AutoCAD release that supports multi-line things are also written to the file as follows:
text, Chief Architect writes the file as multi-
line text. If exporting to a version that does Line Type
not support multi-line text, the file is written
as simple text. A line type is used by layers and entities to
determine how lines are drawn. Chief
Polyline - Polylines are a collection of points Architect line types are supported on export.
with lines or arcs connecting them. Chief
Architect supports both lines and arcs. Arcs Layers
are referred to as bulges in AutoCAD.
Layers in other systems are similar to Chief
Dimension - Architect layers, but there are some subtle
• Each dimension has an associated block differences. The following information in a
that contains a representation of the layer is mapped as follows:
dimension as it is drawn in Chief
Architect. It also contains all the data to Chief Other Systems
recreate that information. Architect
• When an exported dimension is modified Name Name
in AutoCAD or another CAD program, Color Nearest AutoCAD Color. Chief
its appearance changes. Architect uses the default
• Chief Architect does not support arrow- AutoCAD color table to
head styles or fonts. determine this mapping.
• Three kinds of dimensions are generated: Display On
Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular.
• Please refer to AutoCAD documentation
for more information.
920
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format
Size Line Weight. In AutoCAD, line
Importing &
Exporting
weights are determined by a
table of mm line widths. Chief
Architect maps to the closest
match in the default line weight
table based the Line Weight
Scale set in the Page Setup
dialog. See “Page Setup
Style Line type
Lock Lock
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format

The entire 3D model can be exported
from Chief Architect as a 3D file, with AutoCAD Layer Chief Architect
all surfaces exported as 3DFACE entities. Name Surface / Object
This file can then be imported by any A-APPL-MAIN Appliance
program that is fully compatible with A-CASE-CABF Cabinet Door
AutoCAD’s 3D .dxf or .dwg format. A-CASE-CABN Cabinet Box
A-CASE-CNTR Cabinet Counter Top
To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be
A-CASE-GLAS Cabinet Glass
active. Make sure that everything to be
exported is visible. If you use the delete A-CASE-SOFF Soffit
surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces are not A-CASE-TOEA Cabinet Toe Area
exported. A-CEIL-BAY Bay / Bow Window
Ceiling
When the model is ready, select File>
A-CEIL-MAIN Platform Ceiling
Export> 3D Model (DWG/DXF)... . A-CEIL-SLOP Roof Ceiling
Give the file a name, making sure to save it A-DOOR-STND Door
in the desired location. The 3D model is A-EQPM-DOOR Window Hardware
created. A-EQPM-HDWR Cabinet Hardware
A-FIXT-GLAS Fixture Glass
Layers for 3D DWG/DXF Model A-FIXT-MAIN Fixture
When you export a 3D model, all surfaces A-FLOR-BAY Bay / Bow Window
are exported as 3DFACE entities. Each entity Floor
represents a surface in the 3D model. The A-FLOR-MAIN Platform Floor
entities are placed on layers that are named A-FOOT-FOOT Footing Top
by Chief Architect. The names currently A-FRAM-CEIL Ceiling Framing
used by Chief Architect are listed below.
921
A-FRAM-DECK Deck Framing A-WALL-PONY Pony Wall

A-FRAM-GENL Framing A-WDWK-EXTR Exterior Door /
A-FRAM-JOIS Floor Framing Window Trim
A-FRAM-ROOF Roof Framing A-WDWK- Exterior Sash
A-FRAM-TRUS Truss Framing EXTTRIM
A-FRAM-WALL Wall Framing A-WDWK-MOLD Molding
A-FURN-MAIN Furniture A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-GLAZ-DOOR Door Glass A-WDWK-TRIM Interior Door /
A-GLAZ-WIND Window Window Trim
A-HRAL-BAL Stair Baluster C-PROP-CURB Curb
A-HRAL-BLST Railing Baluster C-PROP-ROAD Road
A-HRAL-NWEL Newel C-PROP-TERA Terrain
A-HRAL-RAIL Handrail C-PROP-TRFE Terrain Feature
A-CASE-CABD Cabinet Drawer C-PROP-TRSK Terrain Skirt
A-MASN-FIRE Fireplace E-ELEC-TRIM Electrical
A-NONE-NONE Miscellaneous
A-PLAT-RIM Platform Rim DXF Code
A-RISR-MAIN Stair Riser Each layer name exported can include a DXF
A-ROOF-EAVE Roof Soffit Code from the materials used for items on
A-ROOF-FASC Roof Fascia that layer. If a material has been specified for
A-ROOF-MAIN Roof an item and appears on its surface, the DXF
A-STRS-RUNR Stair Runner code for the material is included in the layer
A-STRS-TRED Stair Tread name. This DXF Code is specified on the
A-STRS-UNDR Stair Bottom General tab of the Plan Material dialog.
A-WALL-BAY Bay / Bow Window These codes are specified in the Plan
Wall Material dialog for each Chief Architect
A-WALL-EXTW Corner Board material. As you add new materials in this
A-WALL-MAIN Wall dialog, you can specify an appropriate DXF
A-WALL-PAPE Wallcovering code for each.
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format

The entire 3D model can be exported To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be
from Chief Architect as a 3D .3ds file. active. All surfaces are exported whether or
A .3ds file can be opened by any program now they are visible, but if you use the delete
that is compatible with 3D Studio’s .3ds surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces are not
format. exported.
922
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format
When the model is ready, select File>
Importing &
Exporting
Export> 3D Model (3DS)... , and enter a
file name and location.
1
2
1 Check Truncate Texture Names to 8.3

format to truncate material and object
names to an eight character file name with a
three character extension. This allows import
into applications that support only legacy
.3ds files.
2 Check Place Textures in a Separate

Folder to put all associated textures
(image files) into a folder independent of 8.3
file names.
923
924
Chapter 36:
Create Symbol Wizard
Symbol
Wizard
Overview
Chief Architect provides a complete set of Chapter Contents
architectural tools for highly customized • Importing 3D Data
design. In addition, the Library Browser • Opening the Create Symbol Wizard
contains a vast supply of objects that can be • Selecting the Symbol Category
used to add more detail to a plan. For • Loading the 3D File
everything else, there’s the Create Symbol • 2D Block
Wizard. With the ability to make your own • Cabinet Front Symbols
symbols, the amount of detail that can be • Symbol Options
added to a plan is limitless. • Sizing
With the Create Symbol Wizard, you can • Materials
import 3D objects and convert them into 3D • Openings
symbols for use within Chief Architect. You • Floor Plan View
can also modify existing library symbols. • Closing the Create Symbol Wizard
• Symbol Specification Dialog
This chapter guides you through the process
of creating a symbol in Chief Architect using
the Create Symbol Wizard. Adding
symbols to the library, editing them, and
placing them in a plan are covered in the
Libraries chapter, see “Libraries” on page
669.
925
Importing 3D Data
Creating a symbol that can be used by Chief • The face data should be assigned to dif-
Architect is a relatively simple process that ferent layers so that you can map them to
begins with previously created 3D data. This the correct materials when viewing them
3D data usually comes from a program other in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers
than Chief Architect. If you use another 3D using a convention that identifies that
modeling program to create the 3D data, be materials should be assigned to each sub-
aware of the following requirements before component.
attempting to create symbols. • Pay attention to the origin and orientation
of the 3D data when designing symbols.
Chief Architect is not able to provide Chief Architect allows some adjustment
support for any third party software.
when creating the symbol, but it is easier
to build the 3D data correctly before
There are a number of requirements that importing it into Chief Architect. For
must be met before any 3D data can be used more information about defining the ori-
to create a symbol in Chief Architect: gin, see “Origin Locations” on page 930.
• The 3D data must be stored in a standard
Drawing Exchange File (.dxf), AutoCAD Surface Normals
Drawing (.dwg), object (.obj) or 3D Stu-
dio Mesh (.3ds) file format. If you have If you use third party software to help you
3D data in another format, you must con- create the .dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds files that will
vert it into one these formats first. be turned into symbols, you should be
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
• Geometry and material information
stored in .3ds files are imported; cameras A surface normal is a vector
and lights are not. that is perpendicular to the
plane of a surface. This
• The 3D model must be composed of 3D
DWG or 3DSOLID solid entities, or face vector points in one
data. Faces are typically referred to as 3D direction, determined by the
faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes. way the face is drawn.
Other types of entities such as lines, If the face is drawn
curves, circles, polylines, and free form clockwise, the surface normals are directed
surfaces can exist in the file but are not outward, if the face is drawn counter-
imported when the symbol is created. clockwise, the surface normals point inward.
This is true for all (.dxf /.dwg/.obj/.3ds)
file types.
926
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard
right shows which direction the surface

normal for each face points as a result.
Many objects can be drawn using only one
side of each face. A cube is a good example.
The inside of a cube is not visible when only
the outside faces are drawn. When the inside
faces are not calculated, 3D views in Chief
Symbol
Wizard
Architect generate faster. Chief Architect
assumes that the face on the positive side of
the normal vector is the outside face.
A time saving option, Make Faces Double
Sided, allows you to view faces from any
The cube on the left shows which direction perspective. See “Loading the 3D File” on
each face was drawn and the cube on the page 929.
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard

To open the Create Symbol Wizard, existing symbol and can be accessed by
selecting a symbol based object and clicking
select Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol .
the Open Symbol edit button. See
A slightly different version of the Create
“Symbol Specification Dialog” on page 945.
Symbol Wizard allows you to edit an
Selecting the Symbol Category

The Select Symbol Category window
allows you to determine the symbol type.
Each category contains properties specific to
the type of item being created. These proper-
ties are viewable later in the Create
Symbol Wizard.
927
1 Category - Choose a category. This Furniture categories. Select a Type of Object

category determines where the symbol to determine where the symbol appears in
is stored in the Library Browser and may Material Lists.
affect some of the options in the symbol
Some object types for Fixtures may also
creation process.
affect how the symbol can be placed. The
2 Type of Object - This drop down list is following table lists these effects. See
available only for the Fixture and “Symbol Options” on page 935.
Item Type Placement Affect

Appliances Placement in base cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
(built-in base cabs) selected.
Appliances Placement under wall cabinet is allowed if Fits under Wall Cabinet option is
(under wall cabs) selected.
Cooktops Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
928
Loading the 3D File
Ovens (built-in) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Refrigerators Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is
(built-in) selected.
Sinks (bathroom) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Sinks (kitchen) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Sinks (laundry) Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
Symbol
Wizard
Loading the 3D File
The options in the 3D window determine
how the symbol appears in 3D.
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 10
11
1 Enter the name and directory of the file If a file with faces containing more than
you want to import, or click Browse to
locate a file on your computer. four vertices is imported, the faces are
truncated, resulting in an object that appears
to have holes. The best remedy is to re-
export the model from the original application
using only triangular or quadrilateral faces.
929
2 This informational line indicates the

number of faces in the model. Although
there is no limit to the number of faces, large
numbers can increase render time.
3 Check Double Sided to make all

symbol faces double sided.
While making faces double sided increases
the amount of information calculated for
render views, it also simplifies the symbol
building process by ensuring that all surfaces
are visible from any perspective. To The center edge lines on this object do not display
understand this option, it is helpful to be when Automatic Edge Lines is checked
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
Surface Smoothing Angle - This
See “Surface Normals” on page 926. 5
value is used to determine whether two
Chief Architect assumes that faces in the adjacent surfaces are shown with a smooth or
imported model are counterclockwise and sharp angle between them in render view. If
automatically reverses them to clockwise on the angle between any two surface normals is
import. If the model is already clockwise, less than this angle, then normal averaging is
click Reversed to keep that orientation. used in the render view to give the effect of a
curved surface. This angle also effects the
4 Automatic Edge Lines: Check this box generation of automatic edge lines.
if you want Chief Architect to
automatically determine which lines display A good example is a hexagonal cylinder. The
in 3D views. angle between adjacent surfaces is 360/8, or
When displaying a model in 3D, edge lines 45 degrees. If you want it to look cylindrical,
emphasize the edges and corners of the then the Surface Smoothing Angle should
model. Each face has up to 4 edge lines. be set to something greater than 45 degrees.
Some edge lines are helpful in third-party If you want to make the cylinder look
programs but are not needed in Chief hexagonal, set it to less than 45 degrees. The
Architect. If your modeling program has the default is 35 degrees.
capability to turn edges off, that may be the
ideal place to do so.
6 Units - Enter the units that were used
when the symbol was created.
Instead of manually turning edges on and off, Specifying any units other than inches or mm
Chief Architect offers another alternative causes the program to convert the data into
with Automatic Edge Lines. This interprets units appropriate for Chief Architect.
which lines are needed in Chief Architect
and turns the others off. Origin Locations
7 Specify Origin - The origin of an

object determines where that object is
930
Loading the 3D File
placed in Chief Architect. It is the point Z fields represent the difference between
where the X, Y, and Z axes intersect (0,0,0). the default Chief Architect origin for that
type of symbol and the origin from the
For example, the top surface of a smoke
original .dxf/.dwg/.obj/3ds file.
detector typically rests against the ceiling
bottom surface, while an armchair’s bottom • Check this box and enter new values to
surface typically rests on the top surface of manually adjust the origin. The values in
the floor. For an object to be placed correctly, the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset
Symbol
of the origin point from the default Chief
Wizard
the origin must be at the right location.
Architect origin.
The origin of an object is defined when it is
created in a third party modeling program. Origin 0,0,0
Chief Architect also has default origins for located middle,
most object types. The following table lists bottom, back of
these default origins by symbol type. object
Symbol Type Origin location

Furniture Bottom, Back, Middle
Fixture Bottom, Back, Middle
Electrical Floor Center, Bottom (against
Items floor)
Electrical Wall Center, Back (against
Items wall)
Electrical Ceiling Center Top (against
ceiling)
Windows Bottom, Outside, Middle
(of sill)
Cabinet Door Bottom, Back, Middle
Doors Bottom, Back, Middle
Doorways Bottom, Outside, Middle
This portion of the dialog allows three

options:
• Leave this box unchecked to accept Chief Window origin located bottom, outside, middle.
Architect’s default origins for the sym-
bol. Checking this box and entering 0 in
8 Select an axis and click Rotate 90° to
the X, Y, and Z fields produces the same roatate the object 90 degrees around
results. that axis when creating the symbol.
• Check this box if you want to use the ori-
gin point from the original .dxf/.dwg/ 9 A preview of how the object looks in
3D views displays here. The preview is
.obj/.3ds file. The values in the X, Y, and
931
updated in this dialog when the symbol is

11 Display Size - This allows you to
rotated and when a 3D data file is selected. append the name of the symbol with
size information that is relevant to the current
10 Enter a Symbol Name up to 63 plan. Select the format from the drop-down
characters. Symbol names are case
list and the symbol name is automatically
sensitive. Symbol names appear in the
appended with the selected sizing
Materials List, the Symbol Specification
information. Choosing “None” does not
dialog, and any specification dialogs that
append anything to the name.
apply to this particular symbol.
2D Block
Most 3D objects require 2D representation in The 2D Block window of the Create
floor plan view. 2D CAD blocks are not Symbol Wizard allows you to choose 2D
required for Windows, Doors, Cabinet CAD blocks from a variety of sources.
Doors, and Doorways.
5
2
3 6
4
1 Select Blocks From - Checking these Plan - Check this box if you want every
boxes populates the list with available CAD block that is currently in your plan to
2D CAD blocks. appear in the list. See “CAD Blocks” on page
870.
932
Cabinet Front Symbols
File - Check this box to include any CAD Create your own CAD blocks to represent
blocks contained in the 3D .dxf/.dwg/.obj/ symbols in floor plan view. The only
.3ds file. requirement is that the correct X and Y
dimensions are defined. An incorrect CAD
Generated - Check this box to automatically
block size causes inconsistent placement of
generate a CAD block based on an overhead
your symbol.
projection of the object.
It is usually best to build your CAD block
2 Available Blocks - The available 2D
Symbol
Wizard
with solid filled properties. This keeps
blocks display here.
background patterns and other objects from
3 Plan Fill Color - Select a color for the showing through.
background of the 2D symbol.
For more information on creating CAD
4 No Fill (transparent) - Select the blocks, see “CAD Blocks” on page 870.
check box to have the 2D background
Once the CAD object has been blocked it
transparent.
must be named. Select the item and click the
Use Plan Colors - Select the check box to
make the background white.
CAD Block Specification dialog. See
“CAD Block Specification Dialog” on page
5 The selected CAD Block displays here.
872.
6 Enter an angle if you want to rotate the
2D CAD block from its original angle. Blocks can also be imported with the
The orientation of the 2D CAD block in floor Import Drawing Wizard, but nested
plan view is independent of the symbol blocks cannot be used in the symbol develop-
orientation in 3D view. ment process. See “Importing and Exporting”
on page 907.
Creating Your Own
CAD Block
Cabinet Front Symbols

What’s New In Version X1 Training Cabinet Symbols
Video: Cabinets - Updatable Hybrid
933
If you selected Cabinet as the symbol displays, where you can specify the function
category, the Cabinet Front Symbols window of both the cabinet and its individual parts.
1 2
1 Layer/Component Assignment - 2 Cabinet Type - Specify whether the

Specify the type of component for each cabinet symbol is a Base Cabinet, Wall
layer associated with the cabinet symbol. Cabinet or Full Height Cabinet.
Click a layer in the list, then select the type
Cabinet symbols should not include
of cabinet component type from the Select hardware. Handles and hinges are
Component drop-down list. assigned according to cabinet defaults when
the cabinet is created. See “Hardware Tab”
on page 573.
934
Symbol Options
Symbol Options
Symbol
Wizard
2
3
The options that display in this window vary, when the Light option is checked. Enter a
depending on the type of symbol being distance to offset the light source from the
created. symbol’s origin.
1 Options - How each of these options Available Options

affects a symbol is detailed in the
following table. The following table lists each of the options
that are available and how this option affects
2 Height Off Floor - Enter a value if you the behavior of the symbol:
want the symbol to rest a certain height
above the floor.
3 Material Components - Click this

button to open the Components
dialog. See “Components Dialog” on page
1014.
Default Light Offset - This field is available
only for electrical symbols and is enabled
935
Option Categories Effect on Symbol

110 / 220 Volts Electrical If a 110V or 220V item is on a wall and you select Build>
Electrical> Auto Place Outlets , an outlet is not
placed in that area.
3-Way Electrical Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 3-way
switch.
4-Way Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 4-way
switch.
Appears in Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Appli-
appliance ance Schedule.
schedule
Appears in Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the HVAC
HVAC schedule Schedule.
Appears in Fixture Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Plumb-
plumbing ing Schedule.
schedule
Breaker Panel Electrical No effect
Can sit on base Fixtures, Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols
cabinet or table Furniture, remain selectable and independent of cabinet after place-
Electrical ment. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to
bottom.
Ceiling Electrical Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin.
Mounted
Doorbell Electrical Uses switch default height.
Fan Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Fits under wall Fixtures Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet
cabinet and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed
independently on plan, and locates itself 54" from floor to
bottom.
Floor Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Use Height
Off Floor to specify distance from floor.
GFCI Electrical If an electrical symbol is given the GFCI attribute and is
placed behind a cabinet in a bathroom, Build> Electri-
cal> Auto Place Outlets recognizes it and does not
insert a GFCI outlet behind the cabinet.
Hangs on wall Fixtures and Fixture attaches to wall at 54" from floor if placed within
Furniture 8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of
wall if placed more than 8" away and inserts at 54" from
floor to bottom.
936
Symbol Options

Inserts into Fixtures Fixture attaches itself centrally to the front of a full height
cabinet front cabinet. The fixture becomes merged with the cabinet,
and is selectable and resizable only from the Cabinet
Specification dialog. Cannot be placed independently.
When this is the single option selected, fixture can be
placed in a full height cabinet only.
*Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or
Symbol
Wizard
width/depth modification is required. For modification,
depth must equal distance from back of block to point
wanted to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show
properly.
Inserts into Fixtures Fixture rests on top of base cabinet, merging itself to it.
countertop Cannot be placed independently. Fixture is not select-
able.
Light Electrical Creates light source with available properties to individ-
ual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check as needing to
be connected to a switch.
Move casing Doorways This option only applies when a sill is present. Check this
out 1/2 inch, 1 and Windows box to have the casing moved out from the window or
inch at sill doorway. The option System Supplies Rectangular Cas-
ing must also be checked.
No default door Doorways Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway.
in this doorway and Windows
Outdoor Electrical Plan Check warns that this is not a waterproof switch/out-
let.
Outlet Electrical Can be placed automatically using the Place Outlets
option. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Phone Electrical Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Requires high/ Fixtures If against a wall, Place Outlets places an outlet of the
standard volt- appropriate type behind the fixture. Also makes fixture
age appear in Appliance Schedule.
Requires natu- Fixtures Appears in Appliance Schedule.
ral gas
Requires water Fixtures Appears in Plumbing Schedule.
drain
Sits on floor Fixtures and Default option for Fixtures. Places fixture on floor.
Furniture
Smoke Detec- Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as a requirement for certain
tor rooms.
Switch Electrical Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a switched
item. Electrical Defaults determines height above floor.
937

Switched Electrical Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
System sup- Doorways Chief Architect automatically supplies rectangular casing
plies rectangu- and Windows if your model does not already have a casing.
lar casing
Thermostat Electrical No affect. Uses switch default height.
TV Electrical Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Wall Mounted Electrical Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Sizing
The Sizing window allows you to control the In most situations, the default values for
size of a symbol and how it behaves when Width (X), Depth (Y), and Height (Z) should
resized. The object’s Width (X), Depth (Y), be left unchanged.
and Height (Z) are referenced to the nearest
1/16". The default size information for the Saving a symbol to the library that has
symbol appears, representing the actual been resized in both the Fixture
boundaries of the 3D object. Specification dialog and the Symbol
Specification dialog may result in incon-
sistent symbol properties. Symbols should be
resized in one or the other, not both.
938
Sizing
1 Size -The size values do not need to be

modified unless the boundary box (the
selectable area) of a symbol is not the same
size as the 3D symbol.
For example, to make an object such as a
fireplace or air conditioner protrude through
other 3D items, smaller size values must be
Symbol
Wizard
used. Size values larger than the 3D objects
can be used if a symbol needs to be spaced
away from other 3D items (e.g. toilets and
sinks that need minimum clearance). It resizes like this:
2 Stretch Planes: Stretch Planes allow (Y axis into paper)

you to define where the symbol
stretches when resized. If no stretch planes
are added, the symbol resizes uniformly.
Stretch plane coordinates are relative to the
symbol’s origin point. For more about the
origin point, see “Loading the 3D File” on
page 929. Below one Stretch Plane is specified 6" from
the symbol’s origin.
Before
One Stretch Plane

One stretch plane means that the symbol
stretches only at the location of that plane. In
the following illustration, a stretch plane was
placed at x=0 and the symbol stretched along
the x-axis.
939
It resizes like this:
Stretch Zones
3 Stretch Zone - A Stretch Zone defines
an area between two planes that
stretches uniformly, leaving the area outside
unaffected.
Two Stretch Planes In the following example we want to
If you want to stretch the symbol without designate a Stretch Zone for an archtop. To
disrupting the outer arches, two stretch stretch only the middle when the archtop is
planes need to be specified. stretched vertically, select Height 1-2.
“Height” means that we are making the
In this example two YZ stretch planes are object taller, and “1-2” directs Chief
specified on the X axis, the first at -6", the Architect to the two planes that define the
second at 6". Stretch planes to the left of the area.
origin must be expressed as a negative
number, while stretch planes to the right are In the following example the area to be
positive. stretched is between 18" - 24" from the
bottom. Only this area becomes taller.

940
Materials
Symbol
Wizard
Materials
Materials window for an imported .obj file
The Materials window of the Create many other specification dialogs. See
Symbol Wizard is like the Materials tab on “Materials Tab” on page 710.
941
DXF/DWG Files materials file, default material properties are

assigned. Materials from the library can be
All the layers, layer names, solids and assigned by selecting a component of the
instances of blocked solids from the original object and clicking the Select Materials
.dxf/.dwg file display on the left. button.
• Double click a name to rename it.
The material definitions associated with an
• Select a material component, click the imported .obj symbol are not available for
Library Material button to open the use by other objects until that symbol has
Select Library Object dialog, and been placed into a plan.
assign a material to the selected material
component. OBJ and #DS Files and
• If the .dxf/.dwg file for a symbol has Textures
changed, all material information is lost.
Material definitions for .obj files can include
texture information. As with material
OBJ Files
definitions, any image files used to define the
One of the most useful features of the .obj texture (.jpg, .png, etc.) are typically
file format is its ability to record material included and referenced. If a textured object
data that can be transferred from one is created in another application and exported
application to another. as an .obj file, Chief Architect needs the .obj
file, the .mtl file, and any referenced texture
Any material names associated with a face in
files in order to properly import the object. If
the .obj file are listed on the left.
a texture file is not available, the material is
created without a texture.
OBJ Files and Materials
Once an .obj file is imported and turned into
Material definitions for most .obj files are a symbol, the .obj file and the .mtl file can
located in a separate file that is given the .mtl be deleted. The associated texture file is
extension. If such a file exists, the material copied to the My Textures library of the
definitions associated with the .obj file Library Browser. If a texture of the same
display on the left. name exists already, the following dialog
If Chief Architect does not receive material displays. Choose one of the three alternatives
definition information in an accompanying and click OK.
942
Openings
Symbol
Wizard
Openings
The Opening window of the Create
Symbol Wizard displays only for
Windows and Doorways.
When creating a doorway or window
symbol, Chief Architect needs information
about the space that contains it. The Opening
window defines the specifications of the hole
to be cut. The required hole is the same as the
rough opening that would be created in
actual construction.
Edit the size of the opening by clicking the
appropriate side and entering the dimension.
If a window or doorway requires an arch top
opening or triangle, you must select more
than one opening section from the drop down
list to correctly show the opening in Chief
Architect.
You can approximate the opening for arch or
other odd shaped windows or doors by
specifying up to three sections.
943
Floor Plan View

The Plan View window displays only for Mulled Units
Windows and Doorways. The preview shows
how the symbol displays in floor plan view. To represent a .dxf/.dwg that is a mulled
By default the program brings up a door window or doorway, you may need several
symbol for a doorway. To change from a windows and possibly a door in floor plan
door swing to a window, click the image view.
itself in the dialog. Click again to toggle Click the drop down list and select the
back. number of units. You can have up to five
To edit a dimension, click it and type the windows or four windows and a doorway.
desired size. This is independent of the opening.
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard

This window displays when you have Check the Add to Library box to close the
completed the Create Symbol Wizard. window and proceed to the Add to Library
dialog with your new symbol. See “Adding
Select the Back button at any time during the
to the Library” on page 674.
process to make changes.
If you created a symbol that must be
Click Finish to close the window and place
contained by another object, click Finish to
the new symbol in your plan with the next
close this window, place the object, then
click.
select Tools> Symbol> Get Last Symbol...
to retrieve the last symbol created.
944
Symbol Specification Dialog
Symbol Specification Dialog

The Symbol Specification dialog
provides a convenient method for editing Changes made using this method are
existing symbols. permanent. Use the Edit> Open
Symbol command only if you want to over-
The Symbol Specification dialog can be write the original library symbol. Instead, copy
accessed in two ways. The method used
Symbol
Wizard
a symbol and then add it to the library. See
determines whether the original symbol in “Adding a New Object” on page 675.
the library or a single copy of the symbol
placed in your plan is edited. Open Symbol
Edit> Open Symbol The Open Symbol edit button displays
when a symbol based object is selected
Any symbol from an Unlocked library in floor plan view or 3D view. Click it to
can be opened for specification and edited open the Symbol Specification dialog
from the Library Browser menu. Highlight a and edit the selected symbol.
symbol in the tree view of the Library The tabs on the Symbol Specification
Browser and select Edit> Open Symbol . dialog correspond to the windows in the
Create Symbol Wizard.
Type Tab
This tab is present when the Symbol
Specification dialog is opened for a
selected Fixture or Furniture object.
Click the drop down list if you want to

change the Item Type. See “Selecting the
Symbol Category” on page 927.
3D Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the
3D window in the Create Symbol
Editing a symbol using Edit> Open Symbol Wizard. See “Loading the 3D File” on page
opens the Symbol Specification dialog 929.
and allows you to make changes to the
original symbol and all future instances of it.
945
If you load a new .dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds to an Opening Tab

existing symbol, all material information are
lost. See “Materials” on page 941. The Opening Tab is present when the
Symbol Specification dialog is opened
for a selected Window or Doorway symbol.
2D Block Tab
See “Openings” on page 943.
This dialog is similar to the 2D Block
window in the Create Symbol Wizard. It Floor Plan View Tab
allows you to select from the 2D blocks in
the list or generate a new one. See “2D The floor plan view Tab is present when the
Block” on page 932. Symbol Specification dialog is opened
for a selected Window or Doorway symbol.
See “Floor Plan View” on page 944.
Options Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the Sizing Tab
Options window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See “Symbol Options” on page The Sizing Tab is the same as the Sizing
935. Window of the Create Symbol Wizard.
See “Sizing” on page 938.
Default Light Offset is not present in the
Symbol Specification dialog. If you Plant Information Tab
want to change the Light Offset for an
existing symbol, select the symbol and click If you open a plant symbol, this tab is
available. The options are the same as the
the Open Object edit button. See Plant Information tab of the Plant Symbol
“Render Data Tab” on page 780. Sepecification dialog. See “Plant
Information Tab” on page 608.
Materials Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the Plant Description Tab
Materials window in the Create Symbol If you open a plant symbol, this tab is
Wizard. See “Materials” on page 941.
available. The options are the same as the
Plant Descrption tab of the Plant Symbol
Sepecification dialog. See “Plant
Description Tab” on page 609.
946
Chapter 37:
Printing & Plotting
Printing
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect offers a wide variety of Chapter Contents
printing options. The simplest and quickest • Introduction to Printing
method may be to print directly from any • Printers and Plotters
view using either the Print dialog or the • The Printing Tools
Print Image dialog. • Display Options and Printing
To create complete working drawings, you • Printing Directly from a View
can use the program’s layout facility. In a • Printing from Layout
layout file, you can customize a border and • Printing to Scale
title block that appears on each page. • Printing Across Multiple Pages
Different views can be set at different scales, • Printing to a PDF File
and each can be controlled individually. • Line Weights
Once sent to layout, views and details can be • Printing Text and Dimensions
resized, replaced, updated, rotated, relocated, • Creating Custom Sheet Sizes
and otherwise edited to your liking. For more • Print Model
information about layout, see “Layout” on • Troubleshooting Printing Problems
page 969. • Page Setup Dialog
• Print Dialog
Chief Architect also allows you to save your • Print Image Dialog
drawings in an electronic file format that can
then be sent to a printing service.
Screen captures are provided for

illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products.
947
Introduction to Printing
Sheet Size - The dimensions of the final
Always familiarize yourself with your printed output. This may or may not be the
printer or plotter before a deadline. It same as the paper size. If the sheet size and
takes a little time to configure the machine paper size are the same, only one page is
properly when you first start.
required per sheet. See “Page Setup Dialog”
on page 963.
Chief Architect offers printing options for a
variety of needs. You will benefit from Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
understanding the output options clearly and be printed on. Specifying a paper size that is
choosing the one that makes the most sense smaller than the sheet size allows large
for the project at hand. drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
The preview diagram in the Page Setup
Output Options dialog illustrates the difference between page
Printing From Layout - For professional size and drawing sheet size. See “Page Setup
quality drawings and details in full size Dialog” on page 963.
format, printing from layout provides the
most control and the best results. For more
When a paper
information, see “Layout” on page 969.
size of 8½ x 11 is
Printing Directly From a View - For selected, 15
individual drawings or details, you may pages are
required to fill an
prefer to print directly from a view. The
Architectural D
process is quick and allows control over
drawing sheet
scaling, positioning, and line weights, size (24" x 36").
depending on the view type. See “Printing
Directly from a View” on page 952.
Printing to a Remote Plotter/Printer - Check Plot - A test printing, typically at a
Plans can be saved as a .pdf file and printed smaller scale, made before final output to
remotely. See “Printing to a PDF File” on large paper format. For more information,
page 953. see “Check Plots” on page 953.
Print Model - If your final printed output Line Weight - The thickness of a line. A
will be used to create a 3D model of your thicker lineweight is easier to see, but may
design, the Print Model feature works best. not show as much detail. See “Line Weights”
See “Print Model” on page 959. on page 954.
Printing Scale - Drawings are often printed
Terminology to scale for accuracy. ¼" = 1' and 1 m = 50 m
There are a few terms that you should are examples of common scales. When
familiarize yourself with. accuracy is not important, drawings can also
948
Printers and Plotters
be sized to fill a particular area. See “Printing

to Scale” on page 952.
Printers and Plotters

There are many different types of printers To find the version of your printer driver,
and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller, select Start> Control Panel> Printers and
normally outputting 8½ x 11" (Letter or Faxes to view the Printers information for
ANSI A size), 8½ x 14" (Legal Size) or Windows. Select the printer in question, then
sometimes as large as 11 x 17" (Tabloid or choose File> Properties.
ANSI B size).
In the Printer Properties dialog should be
Plotters are typically used to output larger a button called About. Click this button to
Printing
sheets of paper such as 17 x 22" (ANSI C), find the version and creation date of the
22 x 34" (ANSI D) or 34 x 44" (ANSI E). driver currently in use. If you experience
printing problems and yours is not the latest
Print Drivers driver, consider replacing it with an updated
driver. Visit your printer manufacturer’s Web
Print driver programs are interpreters site for more information.
between software programs and the printer.
The drivers are usually created by the Windows provides information about
manufacturer of the printer and are typically installing print drivers. To access Windows
updated regularly. Different drivers are used help, select Start> Help. If you have
for different versions of Windows. It is problems installing a print driver, refer to
useful to keep track of the drivers for each your printer documentation for technical
printer or plotter and update them whenever support.
the Windows operating system is changed.
Options available with one driver may
Note: You should only update your printer not be available with another. Printers
driver if you are having problems printing. and plotters supported in one version of
Windows may not be supported by the
manufacturer in another.
The Printing Tools

Select File> Print to view the Print Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a
Tools submenu. scale that fits your plan to the drawing
sheet. See “Printing to Scale” on page 952.
Page Setup - Opens the Page Setup
dialog, where printing options are set. Center Sheet - Automatically centers
See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 963. your drawing on the sheet. See “Center
Sheet” on page 951.
949
Print Preview - Shows how your view setup. See “Clearing Printer Information” on
appears when printed. See “Print page 965.
Preview” on page 951.
Print - Prints the current view or Toggle Buttons
layout sheet. See “Print Dialog” on Toggle buttons are either on or off. When on,
page 965. they appear depressed and remain depressed
Print Image - Prints a screen view until clicked again. See “Toggle Buttons” on
including images, textures and page 70.
backdrops. See “Print Image Dialog” on Show Line Weights - When this is on,
page 967. line weights appear on screen as they
Print Model - Opens the Print will print. See “Show Line Weights” on page
Model dialog print plan templates for 951.
making a physical model of your plan. See Show Sheet - Turn this toggle on for a
“Print Model” on page 959. preview of your plan relative to the
File>Print>Customize Sheet Sizes - Allows current sheet size. See “Show Sheet” on page
you to create custom sheet sizes. See 951.
“Creating Custom Sheet Sizes” on page 958. Print Preview - Turn this toggle on for
Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer a preview of how your plan will appear
information associated with the current page when printed. See “Print Preview” on page
951.
Display Options and Printing

The display of objects in views may be used Displaying Objects
to affect the printed output. Some display
options allow you to preview the printed You can control the display of objects
output on screen before any paper is used. when printing directly from a view in
Objects must be visible for them to print, but “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
not all items that are visible print. Camera 218.
symbols in floor plan view, CAD points, and
the snap and reference grids, for example, do To control the display of objects in an
not print. The Reference Display prints if it is orthogonal view sent to layout, select the
visible. See “Reference Floor” on page 368. view, click the Layout Box Layers edit
button, and make any needed changes in the
To see how your printed output will Layer Display Options dialog.
appear on paper, select File> Print>
Print Preview or click the Print Preview tog- To control the display of objects in a camera
gle button. view sent to layout, turn layers on/off in the
view before it is sent to layout.
950
Display Options and Printing
Creating a special layer set for printing may Show Sheet

be useful if you are not printing from layout.
See “Layer Sets” on page 216. Select File> Print> Show Sheet to
show the drawing sheet on screen. The
drawing sheet size is specified in the Page
Show Line Weights
Setup dialog. See “Page Setup Dialog” on
Select File> Print> Show Line page 963.
Weights for an on-screen
Any portion of your plan that cannot fit on
representation of line weights and line styles.
the drawing sheet at the current scale
Turning Show Line Weights on or off does
displays outside the sheet.
not affect the final printed output.
A blue border represents the printable area,
When Show Line Weights is turned on, you
which varies depending on which printer is
can Zoom In to see the location of lines currently selected. This border may not
Printing
and dashed lines as they will appear on the display on all edges of the drawing sheet. See
printed page. “Print Drivers” on page 949.
When Show Line Weights is off, dashed When Show Sheet is on, the drawing
lines look the same, regardless of the zoom sheet behaves as an object.
factor. • When selected at its border the sheet has
edit handles, allowing it to be resized,
Show Line Weights can also be turned relocated, and rotated. See “Editing
on or off in the Preferences dialog. See Objects” on page 79.
• If the sheet size is changed, the drawing
sheet dimensions update in the Page
Print Preview
Setup dialog. See “Page Setup Dialog”
Select File> Print> Print Preview for on page 963.
an on-screen representation of how the • Dimension lines locate the borders of the
current view will appear when printed. sheet. These dimensions can be used to
Objects such as camera symbols that do not relocate other objects in relation to the
print do not display in Print Preview. Text sheet. See “Moving Objects Using
and dimension objects appear on-screen as Dimensions” on page 804.
they will on the printed page.
Note: Specifying a standard sheet size
When Print Preview is on, the toggle in the Page Setup dialog is preferable to
editing the sheet size on-screen.
buttons Show Sheet and Show Line
Weights are overridden. Center Sheet
Select File> Print> Center Sheet to
center the drawing sheet on the
drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
951
drawing but does not affect the coordinates drawing sheet is independent for each floor
of objects in the drawing. The location of the of the model.
Printing Directly from a View

To print directly from any floor plan To set up print formatting before printing,
view or cross section/elevation view,
select File> Print> Page Setup . See
choose File> Print> Print. For more
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 963.
information, see “Print Dialog” on page 965.
Render views can be printed using the File>
Print Image option. See “Print Image
Printing from Layout

Chief Architect layout files can be used to title block that display on all sheets and can
print professional working drawings. be printed at full size or printed at a smaller
Multiple views at different scales can be sent scale for check plots. See “Layout” on page
to each page and organized as desired. 969.
Layout sheets can accomodate a border and
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are Orthogonal views can be printed to scale.
available. The type of view that you are
The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is
printing determines which options you may
inherited by the Print and Send to Layout
choose from.
dialogs. This scale can be overridden on an
individual basis in either of these dialogs.
Orthogonal Views See “Print Dialog” on page 965 and
Floor plan views, cross section/elevation “Sending Views to Layout” on page 975.
views, CAD details and layout pages are Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an
orthogonal views, which means: orthogonal view to select a suitable
• Your line of sight is at a right angle to all scale and recenter the drawing sheet so that
objects in the view. everything fits on the sheet.
• Objects do not appear to decrease in size Imperial drawing scales are typically noted
as their distances from the viewer in inches per foot. Larger scales, such as 1
increase.
952
Printing Across Multiple Pages
inch = 50 feet or 1:200m, are often used for how much of the printed page to fill. 50%
property layouts. causes the print to be 50% of both the height
and width of the paper, not including the
Once a view has been sent to layout, there
non-printable border. If printing to an 8½ x
are a variety of additional scaling options.
11 page with a 1" non-printable border in
See “Rescaling Views” on page 980.
each direction, 100% would print 7½ x 10,
and Full Page 50% would print 3¾ x 5. Each
Perspective Views printer may vary slightly.
Vector and render camera views and render
overviews are referred to as perspective Check Plots
views, which means:
A check plot is a test print that allows you to
• Your line of sight can be at any angle to print at a reduced scale on smaller, less
the objects in the view. expensive paper so you can check that the
Printing
• Objects seem to decrease in size as their drawing will print as expected.
distances from the viewer increase. In a check plot, the drawing scale is
Perspective views cannot be scaled. temporarily adjusted to a specified fraction
of its true value. Both drawing scale and line
Perspective views cannot be printed to scale. weights are subject to this scale adjustment.
If Fit to Paper is selected in the Print
dialog, a percent value can be set that defines
Printing Across Multiple Pages

When printing directly from a floor plan the drawing sheet boundary on the sides that
view, cross section/elevation view, or layout need to be cut.
it is possible to print at a scale that does not
To see on-screen what this will look like
fit the image on one page. To do this, specify
when printed, select File> Print> Show
a larger drawing sheet and print across
multiple pages. Sheet and then Window> Fill Window
When printing to a paper size that is smaller . Grey lines across the drawing sheet
than the sheet size, a 2% overlap is used. indicate where the page breaks will occur.
Crop marks print where the paper needs to be See “Show Sheet” on page 951.
cut between pages. A solid line is drawn at
Printing to a PDF File

The .pdf, or Portable Document Format, and is one of the most universally compatible
creates viewable and printable documents and efficient of file formats.
953
Creating a .pdf document requires that a .pdf Page Setup dialog. See “Page Setup
printer driver be installed on your computer. Dialog” on page 963.
This is not a physical print device, but a
software program that is recognized as a 2. Select File> Print> Print to open
printer by all other programs and creates a the Print dialog. Your .pdf printer driver
.pdf file that can be read and printed using is listed as the selected printer.
Adobe® Reader®. 3. Select the needed options in the Print
When you print to a .pdf print driver, you dialog, then click OK.
will be asked for a file name and destination 4. In the Save As dialog, select a File
automatically. name and Save in location for your .pdf
file. For more about the Save As dia-
To print to .pdf log, see “Saving a Plan or Layout File”
on page 160.
1. Select your .pdf printer driver as you
would select any other printer in the The PDF995 .pdf driver is available on
the Chief Architect installation disks.
Line Weights
The weight of a line refers to its thickness on • Most objects’ line weights can be set in
the printed page and is described in absolute their specification dialogs. See “Line
terms as a fraction of a unit, often 1/100th of Style Tab” on page 851.
a millimeter or 1/1000 of an inch. • The line weight for a group of objects can
You can specify the Line Weight Scale by be set by layer. See “Layer Display
defining the denominator and the unit used in Options Dialog” on page 218.
this fraction in the Page Setup dialog. See • The line weights for walls in floor plan
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 963. view are defined by wall type in the Wall
In Chief Architect, line weights are assigned Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall
to objects, patterns or layers using whole Type Definitions Dialog” on page 251.
numbers that correspond to the numerator of • The line weights of material pattern lines,
this fraction. which are visible in Vector Views, can be
set in the Define Material dialog. See
Your preferred line weights and line weight
“Define Material Dialog” on page 712.
scale can be saved in your template plan and
layout files. See “Template Files” on page • The line weight for fill patterns is set for
167. individual objects on the Fill Style tab of
their specification dialogs. See “Fill Style
The method for changing the line weight for Tab” on page 864.
a particular object depends on the object and
the type of view.
954
Line Weights
• The line weight applied to surface edges Dialog” on page 976 and “Rescaling Views”
in Vector Views can be set in the Print on page 980.
dialog. See “Print Dialog” on page 965.
Note: Under most circumstances, you should
• The end cap length of dashed lines in
select Use Layout Line Scaling when sending
floor plan view is controlled in the views to layout.
Preferences dialog. See “Line
Properties Panel” on page 200. Line weight scaling affects both line weights
• An assigned line weight of 0 draws a line and line styles and can be particularly
weight of 1 pixel, the thinnest line weight noticable with dashed line styles.
a printer allows. How thick this is varies
In the following image, the same floor plan
from printer to printer. See “Printers and
view has been sent to layout twice, at two
Plotters” on page 949.
different scales. The view on the left was sent
Printing
at the same scale as the original view,
Line Weights and Scaling 1/8” = 1’. The view on the right was sent at
When a view is sent to layout, line weights 1” = 1’, or magnified eight times, to show an
may be affected by the drawing scale area of the plan in greater detail.
selected for the view. This occurs when the
layout view’s scale is different from the
drawing scale of the original view.
For example, assume that you have an object
in a view with a line weight of 20, and that
the view’s drawing scale is 1 mm = 50 mm.
• If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
25 mm scale, twice the original scale, the
resulting printed line weight for this
object will increase to 40 instead of 20.
• If you send the view to layout at 1 mm = Because the view on the right was sent to
100 mm scale, half the original scale, the layout at a scale other than that of the
resulting printed line weight for this original, it is subject to layout line scaling.
object will decrease to 10 instead of 20.
The solid lines representing walls, cabinets
You can specify the drawing scale for any and doors are rescaled to be eight times
orthogonal view by opening the Page thicker than in the original view.
Setup dialog while in that view. See “Page
Setup Dialog” on page 963. Similarly, the dashed lines representing the
door jambs are rescaled so that the dashes
For any layout view, you can specify whether and the spaces between them are eight times
the original line weight is maintained or not larger than in the original view.
in the Send to Layout and Change
Scale dialogs. See “Send To Layout
955
when Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled.

Were the view rescaled to be smaller instead,
the line weights would look relatively large
and thick.
Printers and Line Weight

Line weight and print scaling are subject to
the limitations of the printer being used. For
example, you will not be able to see the
difference between a line that is 1/150th of
an inch wide and one that is 1/300th of an
inch wide when they are printed using a
printer that prints 150 dots per inch (DPI).
That is, a CAD line with a line weight of 1
will look the same as a CAD line with a line
with Use Layout Line Scaling disabled
weight of 4 when the Line Weight Scale is
If Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled, line set at 1 = 1/600th of an inch and you print to
weights are no longer scaled and the dashed a printer capable of 150 DPI.
lines display at the same size as in the
original view. The default Line Weight Scale of
1 = 1/100 mm makes it easy to meet
many professional drawing standards. In
most cases, this scale will produce positive
results using any printer or plotter and should
not be changed.
Legacy Plans
When plans and layouts created in prior
versions of Chief Architect are opened in
Version X1, they assume the Page Setup
settings, including the Line Weight Scale,
specified in the Preferences dialog. See
“Text & Page Setup Panel” on page 189.
When working with legacy files, using a
Line Weight Scale of 1 = 1/X, where X is the
with Use Layout Line Scaling enabled DPI of your printer, will produce the most
Because the view in this example is scaled faithful translation from the previous
eight times larger in this case, the dashes and version.
line weights look relatively small and fine
956
Printing Text and Dimensions
Printing Text and Dimensions

Text may not print exactly as it appears on- B ¼" = 1' 1" 48”
screen. To get a better idea of how letters, ½" 24”
numbers, and other characters in text will 3/8" 18”
¼" 12”
print, Zoom In on them.
1/8" 6”
C 3/8" = 1' 1" 36”
Text may not appear accurately on
½" 18”
screen when the font used by the
printer is different than the font used on 3/8" 12”
screen. Consult your printer documentation ¼" 8”
for more information on font substitution. 1/8" 4:
D ½" = 1' 1" 24”
Printing
Default text character height is set in the ½" 12”
Text Defaults dialog. See “Text Defaults” 3/8" 9”
on page 838. ¼" 6”
1/8" 3”
Dimension number height is affected by E ¾" = 1' 1" 16”
scaling the same way text is and is set in the ½" 8”
Dimension Defaults dialog. See 3/8" 6”
“Dimension Defaults” on page 176. ¼" 4”
1/8" 2”
The following tables detail the resulting print
height when character height is assigned at a If, for example, you print or send a view to
given scale. These tables can be used to layout at 1/8"=1' scale, refer to Section A.
determine the necessary character height for
printed output of a certain size. In Section A, find your Desired Print Height,
then note the Necessary Character Height
The relationship between character height that you need to use.
and printed scale is also addressed in the
Text Specification dialog. See “Sizing For text in layout views to be 1/8" high, for
Text” on page 824. example, the character height in the drawing
needs to be set at 12.
Imperial Plans
Metric Plans
Necessary The following table is a metric equivalent of
Plan Scale Desired
Character the imperial dimensioning system.
in Layout Print Height
Height
A 1/8" = 1’ 1" 96”
½" 48”
3/8" 36”
¼" 24”
1/8" 12”
957
D 1:100m 25 mm 250 mm
Necessary 20 mm 200 mm
Plan Scale Desired Print
Character 15 mm 150 mm
in Layout Height
Height 10 mm 100 mm
A 1:25m 25 mm 62.5 mm 5 mm 50 mm
20 mm 50 mm E 1:200m 25 mm 500 mm
15 mm 37.5 mm 20 mm 400 mm
10 mm 25 mm 15 mm 300 mm
5 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm 200 mm
B 1:50m 25 mm 125 mm 5 mm 100 mm
20 mm 100 mm
15 mm 73 mm
10 mm 50 mm Different fonts may introduce slight vari-
5 mm 25 mm ations in text height. When conducting
C 1:75m 25 mm 187.5 mm your own printing tests to determine optimal
text height in a Layout, we recommend using
20 mm 150 mm
a true-type or open-type font.
15 mm 112.5 mm
10 mm 75 mm
5 mm 37.5 mm
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes

Standard drawing sheet sizes can be selected
in the Page Setup dialog.
To create custom sheet sizes, select File>
Print> Customize Sheet Sizes... or click
Customize in the Page Setup dialog.
Several options are available:
958
Print Model
• Click New to create a new sheet size. • The data for this dialog is stored in the
• Select a sheet size and click Copy to cre- “sheetSizes.sheet” file in the program
ate a duplicate sheet size. directory.
• Click Delete to remove the selected sheet

size.
• Select a sheet size and click Edit to open
the Edit Paper Size dialog and change
its description, dimensions, and units of
measurement.
• Click OK to close the dialog. Any new
sheet sizes created are now available in
the Page Setup dialog.
Printing
Print Model
The Model Maker allows you to create a Printing the Model
template of your plan that can be printed to
scale and assembled into an actual 3D model. The best way to understand how the various
Three groups of templates are used in the options affect the final product is to make a
process. Walls and roofs are printed very simple two story plan and try them out.
separately. These can then be placed onto a To print the model templates, choose File>
floor plan view, which is printed as a layout
for the entire model. Print> Print Model . The Print Model
dialog opens.
Since different people build house models in
different ways, the Model Maker focuses on
providing the most necessary tools. It may
not necessarily give you everything you
might want in order to build house models
your way. For example, you may want to
affix tabs to certain wall or roof edges to help
attach them to their neighbors. While you
can draw some of these things onto printed
sheets, the system does not provide them
automatically. What it does provide is
accurate templates for wall and roof sections.
Combining these with your own skills helps
you create professional quality models.
959
The Print Model Dialog
2
3 10
4
5 11
6 12
7
8
13
14
9
1 Printer - Select the printer for your 5 Fold Interior Down - Check this box
model. Larger sheet sizes are better. to print the interior surface of a wall
Landscape is usually the best mode for above its corresponding exterior surface and
printing models. If it is not your default upside down. This allows both walls to be
printing mode, it can be selected via the cut in one piece and folded over. This is
Properties button. convenient when making a separate model
for each floor to show its interior.
2 Printer Info - Information about your
printer and its current setup displays
6 Combine Floors - Check this box to
here. Check this box if you prefer to Print to print together the exterior surfaces of
File instead. walls that are on top of each other. Interior
surfaces of those walls still print separately.
3 Walls - Clear the check box to prevent
walls from printing. Allow Offset - This modifies the outcome of
the Combine Floors Option. Normally the
4 Exterior Only - Check this box to main layers of stacked walls must be closely
suppress interior wall surfaces.
aligned and have the same thickness for
Normally it is only the exterior walls that
walls to combine. Check this box to allow an
display in a model. If interior walls and
offset of up to six inches (15 cm) and allow
surfaces are produced, much more paper is
different thicknesses.
required. Interior surfaces are typically
printed when composing a model of only the
7 Railings - Check this box to print
current floor, without a roof. railings along with walls.
960
Print Model
8 Outdoor Walls/Foundation Walls - 12 Use Scale Wall Thickness - Uncheck

Check this box to include Outdoor this box to print walls to the width
Walls and/or Foundation Walls in the walls specified in the edit box, ignoring the scale
group. This also affects which walls display width. The walls of your plan temporarily
in the floor plan view template. resize so that their interior and exterior
surfaces accurately match the materials they
Outdoor Walls - An Outdoor wall is
are modeled with. These changes can be
normally a garden wall or a wall used as a
most readily seen when the floor plan view
fence. It may be a No Room Def. type wall,
of your model template is printed. Changing
see “Wall Specification Dialog” on page 259,
the wall thickness is useful when producing a
or have exterior type rooms, such as Deck,
model with an interior using material of the
Porch, or Attic on both sides of it.
specified thickness for walls.
If a plan has extensive outdoor walls,
printing them all may use a considerable 13 Floor Thickness - Specify the
Printing
thickness of the material you use for the
amount of paper.
floor platform.
Foundation Walls - Walls on floor zero, the
foundation floor, still print unless they are 14 Print in Color - This option depends
on whether you have a color printer.
specified as foundation walls on either the
Check this box to print in color.
General or Foundation tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. See “Wall
Specification Dialog” on page 259. Assembling the Model
Roofs - Remove check from box to Once the templates have been printed, they
9 are ready to be assembled. You need scissors
suppress roofs from printing.
and an adhesive and a rigid material that can
Plan View Instructions - Remove check be easily cut and glued, such as thin
from box to suppress floor plan view cardboard or styrofoam, to provide support
instructions from printing. for the 3D model.
10 Copies - Use the spin box to specify the Floor Plan View Template
number of copies to be printed.
Begin by laying out the floor plan view,
11 Scale - Specify the scale to be printed which is used as a layout for the entire 3D
in inches per feet. A simple ratio (1:48 model. If your floor plan view template
for example) is used for metric plans. printed on a number of sheets, they should be
The system arranges as many wall or roof combined into one. Exterior and interior wall
sections as possible onto a single sheet. For surfaces should match throughout.
larger scale models, a printer with a larger Adhere your complete floor plan view
sheet sizes is helpful. If any wall surface, template to a sturdy and dedicated surface to
roof surface, or floor plan view covers more provide support for your walls.
than one sheet, it prints by itself on the
number of sheets required. Models with large
surfaces may require a lot of paper.
961
Walls prevents walls from resizing. This is best if

you do not want to print the interior wall
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
surfaces, or are using a modeling material
backing so that they can stand on their own
that closely matches the scale thickness of
and support the weight of the roof or floors
your walls.
above them. How they are cut and assembled
varies depending on the desired final Roofs
appearance of the model and how they were Roof planes are joined together when
printed. possible before printing. For each roof
It may be helpful to take the thickness of the surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
rigid material being used into consideration attached at the eave, so that the least amount
and override the scale thickness of the walls of taping produces the roof and adjoining
so that it agrees with your material thickness. surfaces.
If your walls were resized in the Print All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are
Model dialog, you may see unwanted lines placed into a CAD detail named “Model
between floors that should merge together Detail.” This is overwritten and updated each
seamlessly. This is usually due to walls time the roof group is printed for a particular
whose exterior surfaces match but overall model. If the roof or portions of the roof need
thickness does not. You can prevent this by to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed
checking Use Scale Wall Thickness, which from the detail.
Troubleshooting Printing Problems

Printers and plotters vary widely in how they Testing the Printer
function. Often, solving a problem is as
simple as installing an updated print driver When setting up a printer for the first time,
downloaded from the Internet. Sometimes a make sure that the test page prints properly.
faulty cable can be a problem. Other times, There is usually a Print Test Page button
the plotter requires that the paper be loaded available in the Printer Properties dialog
in a different orientation. for that printer.
If the test page prints properly, try printing
It is a good idea to keep the Owner’s from Chief Architect. If there is a printing
Manual for your printer or plotter close
problem, make sure that you can print from a
at hand. Write inside the Owner’s Manual the
various phone numbers for technical support
graphics program such as Windows Paint. If
for that printer or plotter – for the original there is a problem printing the test page or
manufacturer and for your local dealer. printing from a different graphics program,
the printing problem is probably unrelated to
Chief Architect can print to almost any Chief Architect. Make sure that the latest
printer or plotter that supports printing printer drivers are installed, then solve the
graphics from Windows programs. printing problem for the other programs.
962
Page Setup Dialog
Once the printer prints properly from the and browse the Technical Support section of
other graphics programs, it should print from our Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com.
Chief Architect.
ChiefTalk
Help Database
Another helpful source of information about
For answers to frequently asked questions printing and other topics is the Chief
regarding printing and other topics, select Architect user forum, ChiefTalk. Select
Help> Visit Chief Architect Web Site Help> ChiefTalk to launch your Internet
browser to this web site.
Page Setup Dialog
Printing
Select File> Print> Page Setup to The settings in this dialog, including the
open the Page Setup dialog. selected printer, are specific to the current
orthogonal view or layout file, and are saved
The Page Setup dialog is only available
with the .plan or .layout file.
when an orthogonal view is active. When a
perspective view is active, File> Print>
Page Setup cannot be selected.
963
1 Click the Printer button to select the imperial and metric units of measurement are
current printer or edit its settings. If you available and can be selected independently.
have questions about your printer’s settings,
The units of measurement available here can
consult its documentation.
be controlled in the Preferences dialog.
2 Select the printer paper Size and See “Unit Conversions Panel” on page 195.
Source. The options available in these
This scale is applied for printing purposes
drop-down lists are controlled by the
only and has no effect on the plan scale.
currently selected printer’s driver.
The Drawing Scale acts as the default scale
Specify the Orientation of the printer paper.
for the Print, Printed Size Input, and
Check Show Page Breaks to display page Send to Layout dialogs.
breaks as grey lines across the drawing sheet
in the plan or layout view when Show Sheet 5 Select the Line Weight Scale. See
“Line Weights and Scaling” on page
is enabled. See “Show Sheet” on page 955.
951.
Check Automatic to have the program
Plotters can often have paper inserted
specify the line weight scale and adjust it to
into the machine in either of two orienta- maintain line thickness and dash size when
tions. Test your own machine and refer to the the drawing scale is changed. Automatic
printer manual to find out which way to insert Line Weight Scale is based on a 1/4 inch = 1
the paper for correct results. foot drawing scale and 1= 1/300 inch line
weight scale and is an option for .plan files.
3 Specify the Size of the Drawing Sheet, Plan files originally created in one of the
which is the final printed output.
Better Homes and Gardens Home Designer
Click the Customize button to open the products have Automatic checked by
Customize Sheet Sizes dialog. See default; however, this option is not normally
“Creating Custom Sheet Sizes” on page 958. recommended. See “Line Weights” on page
Specify the Orientation of the drawing 954.
sheet, which is the orientation of the entire Automatic Line Weight Scale is not
drawing. The dialog preview at right updates available in .layout files.
as the orientation is changed.
Setting the line weight to zero (0) for
Check Show Drawing Sheet to display the
any object or group of objects causes
drawing sheet on screen. the line weight to print as thin as is possible.
4 Specify the Drawing Scale for your

printed plan. The scale is specified in 6 Check Use These Settings When
two parts, which by default are 1 ft = 1 ft or 1 Converting Old Files and click OK to
m = 1 m for layout views, and ¼ inch = 1 ft establish the current settings as the default
or 1 m = 50 m for all other views. Both settings for plans, elevations, and CAD
details when opening plans created in earlier
versions of Chief Architect. Layout plans
964
Print Dialog
must be set separately. See “Text & Page Clearing Printer Information
Setup Panel” on page 189.
Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to
7 A line weight preview shows how clear the printer-specific information stored
changes to the drawing scale affect the in the Page Setup dialog.
printed size of various line weights at the
current Drawing Scale. This is useful for creating template plans
without an associated printer. See “Template
Files” on page 167.
Print Dialog
Direct printing can be used with any printer
and any sized paper. To print directly from Render views can be printed using the
Printing
any floor plan view or cross section/elevation File> Print Image command.
view, select File> Print> Print . The

Print dialog opens.
5
3
1 Specify Printer parameters. Click Properties to verify that the printer is

configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
Browse the Name list to choose a
and other settings can be accessed here.
printer.
965
Select the Print to file check box to create a To print a check plot, select Check Plot at
file for remote printing. and choose a scale adjustment from the drop-
down list. This temporarily modifies the
In the Print To File dialog, be sure to give the
scale but does not alter the scale specified in
file name a .prn or .plt extension.
the Page Setup dialog. Line weights are
also subject to the temporary scale
adjustment. If a drawing sheet larger than the
printer paper is specified, a check plot prints
across multiple pages.
Do not check Print to file if you are creating Note: None of these options override the
a .pdf file. See “Printing to a PDF File” on printer paper size specified in the Page
Setup dialog.
page 953.
Printing to a PDF file is often preferable 4 Check the accuracy of your printed
to printing to file. For more information, scaled documents using Height/Width
see “Printing to a PDF File” on page 953. Correction. If your scaled documents are not
correct, you can fine tune or calibrate the
printer with these adjustments. These
2 Specify the Print Range. numbers are multiplied into the scaling units.
From a layout file, select Current Page Such corrections should only be necessary if
or All. By default, the current page is you are using a dot matrix printer.
selected.
Current Screen prints only the portion of Check printer calibration by printing a
the entire View showing on screen. four foot square at ¼” = 1’-0”. Measure
the print to see if it measures out exactly 1"
Entire Sheet prints the entire sheet even square.
though you may be zoomed in on a portion of
the view.
5 Copies - Define the number of copies.
Note: If you are zoomed out, and Current
Screen is selected, any white space around Check Print in Color to print in color or
the plan is calculated for printing. clear the check box to print in black and
white.
3 Fit to Paper prints the plan on one When Print in Color is not checked, solid
page. The program uses whatever scale fills, including the shaded areas of vector
is necessary to fit the plan on one page. If a views, print as either black or white,
percentage less than 100 is specified, only depending on which is closer to the fill color.
that portion of the printable area is used.
Most black and white printers print a grey
Select To Scale to print at the scale specified scale approximation of the colors if Print in
in the Page Setup dialog. See “Page Setup Color is selected.
966
Print Image Dialog
printers. See “Printers and Plotters” on page

Printing to pen plotters is not supported. 949.
If there are a lot of pictures on your plan or
Use Outline Printing - Select the check box layout, using double buffered printing may
to have True Type text and dimension improve your print speed.
numbers drawn as outlines.
Line Weight - Available for vector views
If Use Outline Printing is selected when only. Specify the Line Weight for all lines
printing to a regular printer, only the outlines defining the edges of 3D objects. This is a
of text objects and dimension numbers print. global setting for all edges. Individual lines,
other than superimposed CAD lines, cannot
Double Buffered Printing uses computer
be defined with different line weights. To
memory to render the output at printer
modify individual lines, the 3D view must
resolution. The resulting bitmap is then
first be sent to layout. To edit a line once the
Printing
printed. This can greatly improve print speed
3D view has been sent to layout, select Edit>
when printing vector views, but a lot of
Edit Layout, and then select the line to be
memory is required. This method is not
modified. See “Editing Layout Lines” on
normally recommended for layouts, plans, or
page 983.
details; however, it may help you avoid
issues with certain printer drivers for older
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed by selecting The Print Image dialog is similar to the
File> Print Image. This is the only Print dialog; however, the printing process
way to print a render view or raytrace view. is different. Print Image prints individual
See “Raytracing” on page 787. pixels as opposed to vectors.
2 3
967
1 Specify Printer parameters. Select the Print to file check box to send the
print to a file for remote printing. For more
Choose a printer from the Name list.
information, see “Printing to a PDF File” on
Click Properties to verify that the printer is page 953.
configured correctly. Paper size, orientation,
and other settings are accessed here. 2 Specify the Print Range.
3 Specify the number of Copies.
968
Chapter 38:
Layout
Layout
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Creating Layout files can be printed on any printer
Layouts that uses a Windows driver. Layout files can
also be printed to a file for off site printing.
Video: Creating a Layout File for When you are ready to print a layout file to a
Working Drawings printer or plotter, refer to the chapter on
printing and plotting for information about
controlling the final printed product. See
Video: Layouts
“Printing & Plotting” on page 947.
The Chief Architect layout facility provides a
set of easy to use tools for arranging multiple Chapter Contents
views and/or details on a single page for • The Layout Tools
printing. You can create and print sets of • Preparing for Layout
working drawings or blueprints in almost any • Creating a Layout File
paper size. • The Current Page
Each layout can contain many pages, and • Layout Page Zero
each page can contain multiple views, • CAD and Text in Layout
details, images, CAD objects, text, or • Images in Layout
schedules. • Sending Views to Layout
• Keeping Layout Views Current
969
• Editing Layout Views • Edit Layout Lines Dialog

• Rescaling Views • Managing Layout Links
• Displaying Layout Views • Printing Layout Files
• Layout Page Display Options • Exporting Layout Files
• Opening Layout Views • Layout Box Specification Dialog
• Editing Layout Lines • Layout Defaults
The Layout Tools

Many of the tools available in layout are Select Files> Layout> Layout Files to see a
covered in the printing chapter. See “The list of the files that are included in the layout.
Printing Tools” on page 949. Some See “Layout Files Dialog” on page 987.
additional tools are available to help you get
Select File> Layout> Rescale Layout
the most out of Chief Architect’s layout
View to open the Change Scale
facility.
dialog and apply a different scale. This tool is
Select File> Send to Layout to open also available on the Edit menu. See
the Send to Layout dialog and send “Rescaling Views” on page 980.
the current view to the specified layout page.
Select a layout view and click the
See “Sending Views to Layout” on page 975.
Relink File edit button to open the
Use Tools> Layout> Page Choose Layout File Reference dialog
Up, Page Down, and and relink the selected layout view. This tool
Change Layout Page to navigate the layout is also available on the Edit menu. See
document. See “The Current Page” on page “Relinking Layout Views” on page 987.
972.
Click Swap Views to switch between
Click Files> Layout> Insert Page the current view and the view that was
button to add a new layout page, current before it. See “Swapping Views” on
moving the current page and all following page 729.
pages up one page, as long as there is nothing
Select Tools> Display Settings>
on page 1000.
Display Options from a layout file to
Click the Files> Layout> Delete Page open the Layout Page Display Options
button to delete the current layout dialog. See “Layout Page Display Options”
page, moving all following pages down one on page 982.
page, as long as nothing is on the current
Select a layout view and click the
page.
Layout Box Layers button to open the
Click Tools> Layout> Edit Layout to Layer Display Options dialog for the
allow the lines of a vector view sent to selected view only. See “Displaying Layout
layout to be edited individually. See “Editing Views” on page 981.
Layout Lines” on page 983.
970
Preparing for Layout
Click the Show Layout button to Select a layout view and click the
switch to a layout file that is currently Rescale Layout edit button to open the
open. Change Scale dialog and apply a different
scale. See “Rescaling Views” on page 980.
Edit Buttons Select a layout view and click the
Select a layout view and click the Relink File edit button to open the
Open View edit button to open the Choose Layout File Reference dialog
view that was originally sent to layout. This and relink the selected layout view. See
tool is only available for dynamic views. See “Relinking Layout Views” on page 987.
“Editing Dynamic Views” on page 980. Other edit buttons are available. These
buttons are common to other views. See
“Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 71.
Preparing for Layout

Very little preparation is necessary before Printing Services
creating layouts. Most changes can be made
any time before the layout file is sent to the If you plan to use a printing service, install sa
Layout
printer. There are a few things that are PDF wrter such as PDF995, which is
helpful to keep in mind. supplied with Cheif Architect. See “Printing
to a PDF File” on page 953.
Printer Setup Find out what paper size the printer company
uses and select it in the Page Setup dialog.
You can print to any printer that uses a
See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 963.
Windows driver. You can change the current
printer at any time in the Page Setup
dialog. See “Page Setup Dialog” on page Check Plots
963. If a large size printer has been chosen for the
layout, it is still possible to run a check plot
on a smaller printer. This allows you to make
final checks before printing to the larger
sizes. See “Check Plots” on page 953.
Creating a Layout File

Choose File> New Layout to create a If you have specified a layout template file, a
blank layout file. A layout file is new layout file will have its default and layer
created with the name untitled.layout. By settings. See “Template Files” on page 167.
default, new layout files open to page one.
971
To open an existing layout file, select File> same directory as the plan files from which
Open Layout . Browse to a directory and views have been sent to the layout pages. See
select the layout file to open. “File Management” on page 157.
Only one layout file can be open at a time. Although it is possible to use multiple plan
When a layout file is open, it is listed at the files with a layout, it is generally best to
bottom of the Window menu as an open associate only one plan file with a layout and
view. Layout files are also listed in the use the same file name for both.
Project Browser. See “Project Browser” on When you save your layout, take a moment
page 165. to also save the plan file associated with it.
If a layout file is not open when you try to
When a view is sent to layout, the lay-
send a view to layout, a warning message out view is linked to the .plan file. Do
will ask you if you want to create a new not change the path name by moving the
layout file. See “Sending Views to Layout” .plan file to a new folder or renaming it. If the
on page 975. path name is changed, the link in the layout
file must be reestablished for the view to
Select File> Save to save the layout file. appear in layout. Use the Relink File tool or
It is important that you save the layout in the resend the drawing to layout. See “Relinking
Layout Views” on page 987.
The Current Page

The current page is indicated To navigate between layout pages
at the center of the Layout • Click the arrow buttons on either side of
Page buttons. When a layout file is first the Layout Page button.
created, the current page is page one.
• Click the Current Page number between
The current layout page is the default target the arrows to open the Go To Layout
of any view sent to layout. If sent to the Page dialog. Enter a page number and
wrong page, a view may be moved from one click OK.
page to another. To accomplish this, click the
view you want to move. Once it is selected,
open the Layout Box Specification
dialog, which allows you to change the page
number on the Line Style tab. See “Layout • Select one of the options from the Tools>
Box Specification Dialog” on page 989. Layout> menu.
• Press Shift + N (up one page) or Shift + M
(down one page) on the keyboard.
972
Layout Page Zero
• Double click a page in the Project

Browser. See “Project Browser” on page Note: Layout pages do not print if they are
165. blank, even if layout borders are present
Layout Page Zero

Layout page zero is unique 3. Draw a rectangular polyline inside the
because anything on page printable area of the drawing sheet, indi-
zero displays and prints on all layout pages. cated by a blue border.
This allows you to create title blocks and 4. Go to the Edit> Behaviors panel of the
borders that appear on all layout pages Preferences dialog. Select Concentric
without having to recreate them on each Edit Type, and set the Jump to ½. This
page. Add anything to page zero that you allows a concentric copy of the polyline
want on all subsequent layout pages. to be made ½ inch from all edges. See
Creating Borders
Once the print area of the layout sheet is
established, you can use CAD tools to create
Layout
borders for your layout pages on sheet zero.
For information about the printable area, see
“Show Sheet” on page 951.
ac e
pl
Re
Drawing borders may be simplified by
making a few changes in the Preferences
dialog and your plan defaults. When you
have finished creating borders you may want 5. Select the rectangular polyline, click the
to reverse these changes.
Copy/Paste edit button, and drag
To create border lines on a layout page one of the corner edit handles to the
inside. A concentric copy of the polyline
1. In the Layout Defaults dialog, set the is made.
Snap Grid/Units to the desired distance 6. Thicker borders can be created by defin-
between border lines. A setting of ½ dis- ing the color, style, and/or line weight
plays a snap grid in ½ inch increments. for the CAD objects.
See “Layout Defaults” on page 990.
7. It may be easier to see your final product
2. With layout page zero open, Select with the snap grid and the reference grid
CAD> Boxes & Framing> Rectangu- turned off. See “Layout Defaults” on
lar Polyline . page 990.
973
To create a filleted border Title Block

1. Draw a rectangular polyline or CAD box Create the title block using CAD boxes, lines
inside the printable area of the drawing and text on layout page zero. Include only
sheet, indicated by a blue border. those items that should appear on every
layout page. You can create areas for page-
2. Double click the Fillet Two Lines specific information, which can be filled in
edit button and set the Fillet Radius later on each page.
value in the Chamfer/Fillet dialog. A
value of 1 fillets one inch of each line at A company logo can be added to a layout by
their intersection. importing it as a bitmap into a CAD detail,
then sending the CAD detail to the layout.
3. Select one side of the rectangle, click the You can also embed the image in the layout
Fillet Two Lines edit button and then file.
select an adjacent side. The two lines fil-
let where they meet. Text Macros
4. Repeat step 3 until all corners are fil-
Page numbers can be entered on page zero
leted.
using text macros that are available with the
Text tool. The correct page number displays
Note: The printable area varies from printer
to printer. For best results, inset layout bor-
on all pages. A variety of other macros are
ders 1/2" to 3/4" from the paper edge. also available including date/time, file name,
drawing scale, and others. See “Text Mac-
ros” on page 826.
CAD and Text in Layout

CAD objects and text can be added to any a view to layout. See “Sizing Text” on page
layout page. These are attached to the layout 824.
page itself, not to any specific view • CAD objects can be edited in layout just
contained on the page. as they are edited in floor plan view. See
Text sent to layout is specified in model “CAD Objects” on page 841.
coordinates. Text placed on a layout page is • Text objects can be edited in layout just
specified in printer coordinates. If you want as they are edited in floor plan view. See
text in a plan, elevation, or detail to print at a “Text Specification Dialog” on page 830.
particular size, you need to calculate its size
• To move text or CAD objects to another
based on the scaling you use when you send
page, change the Page number on the
Line Style tab.
974
Images in Layout
Images in Layout
Images can be imported into a layout file just A selected image has edit handles that allow
as they are imported into floor plan view. See you to resize, relocate, or rotate the image.
“Importing Picture Files” on page 890. See “Editing Picture Files” on page 891.
Once imported into layout, an image can be Render and Raytrace views sent to layout are
selected and opened for specification in the treated as imported images embedded in the
Picture File Box Specification dialog, file. See “Picture File Box Specification
including line style, fill style, and Dialog” on page 893.
transparency information. See “Picture File
Box Specification Dialog” on page 893. Embedded images increase layout
file size. Limit the number of large
and/or multiple images.
Sending Views to Layout

\Classroom Design Project Training To send a view to layout
Video: Sending Plan Set Views to the
Layout
Layout File 1. Prepare the view so that objects that
should be seen are visible and those that
Layout files can contain many different
should not are suppressed. See “Layer
views and details sent to it from one or
more plan files. To send a view to layout,
select File> Send to Layout.
Remember that if the Reference Display
When a view is sent to layout, the program is turned on when a view is sent to lay-
sends it to the layout file that is currently out, it cannot be turned off later. See
open. While more than one plan file can be “Reference Display” on page 369.
open at once, only one layout file can be
open at a time. If there are layer settings that you use
often, it may be helpful to define custom
If no layout file is open, the program layer sets for your layout files. See “Layer
searches for a layout file with the same file Sets” on page 216.
name as the plan that the view is being sent
from. If it cannot find such a layout file, the
2. Select File> Send to Layout . In the
program asks if you want to create a new
Send to Layout dialog, the available
layout and send the view to it.
options vary depending on the type of
view being sent to layout.
3. Click OK to send the view to the speci-
fied layout page.
975
Send To Layout Dialog
1 3
2 4
1 Select a radio button to specify the 2 Which Send Options are available
method of Scaling for the view sent to depends on the type of view being sent
layout. to layout.
• Select Fit to Sheet to send the view to • Select Entire Plan/View to send to lay-
layout at no specific scale. The view can out the extent of the plan that is visible
be resized on the layout sheet later.
when you click Fill Window . This
• Specify the exact scale for the view in option is available for vector views, wall
layout. The view can be rescaled later details, and cross section/elevation views.
from layout if necessary. Both imperial
• Select Current Screen to send only what
and metric units of measurement are
is shown on screen to layout. This option
available and can be selected indepen-
is available for vector views, wall details,
dently.
and cross section/elevation views.
• When views are sent to layout at different
• Select Current Screen As Image to send
scales, line weights and line styles are
only what is shown on screen to layout as
subject to the same scaling. In most cases
an embedded image. See “Picture File
this is not desirable. When Use Layout
Box Specification Dialog” on page 893.
Line Scaling is checked, the lines in
This option is available for all views, and
views sent to layout appear the same as
is the only option available for render and
lines drawn directly on layout. See “Res-
raytrace views.
caling Views” on page 980. This option is
available for vector views, wall details, • Select Make Copy of Active Layer Set
and cross section/elevation views. and specify a New Name to create a copy
of the currently active layer set and refer-
ence this copy from the layout view. The
copied layout set is saved with the plan
976
Keeping Layout Views Current
file that the view is sent from. This option tings when the view is sent to layout. If
is maintained between sessions. unchecked, the vector view respects the set-
tings in the 3D Settings dialog when sent
If Make Copy of Active Layer Set is to layout. See “3D Settings Dialog” on page
unchecked, the currently active layer 757.
set is applied to the layout view. If a layer set
is modified after a view is sent to layout, Check Use Pattern Line Defaults and spec-
those changes affect the view. ify a Default Pattern Weight to override the
Line Weight setting on the General tab of the
3 Specify the desired Send Position for Define Material dialog. See “Define
the view. These options are available Material Dialog” on page 712.
for all views.
Uncheck Merge Generated Lines to prevent
Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page the merging of colinear lines. Horizontal and
number to send the view to. vertical lines still merge.
Check Snap to Active CAD Point to snap If Merge Generated Lines is selected and a
the view you are sending to layout to the cross section/elevation view is sent to layout,
active CAD Point. See “Temporary Points” the program merges any lines that are
on page 845. superimposed or parallel with each other so
that the layout has only one line rather than
Check Show Layout Page to go to the
several. This makes the final view easier to
Layout
selected layout page when you click OK.
edit in layout if necessary, but may slow
4 The Vector View Options are available down the process of sending 3D views
when a Vector Camera View, Vector containing non-vertical or horizontal lines to
Overview, Wall Elevation View, or Cross layout.
Section/Elevation View is sent to layout. See
“Vector View Tools” on page 734. These set- This option is not available for floor plan
tings are preserved between sessions. views, Render Views, Raytrace Views, or
CAD Detail views.
Check Use Edge Line Defaults and specify
a Default Line Weight to override all layer
specific and object specific line weight set-
Keeping Layout Views Current

Classroom Design Project Training of view, some may update automatically and
Video: Creating Updatable Cross Sec- other must be updated manually.
tions
If a plan changes after views of the model are Dynamic & Static Views
sent to layout, some of the views may A dynamic view references the view saved
become out of date. Depending on the type with the original plan. Any changes made to
977
the original plan update the dynamic layout Cross Sections/Elevations

view.
Views created using the Cross Section/
For information about controlling the display
of dynamic views in layout, see “Displaying Elevation , Wall Elevation , and
Layout Views” on page 981. Backclipped Cross Section tools are
dynamic, but their behavior in layout is
A static view does not reference the original
different from other dynamic views.
plan and does not update when the plan
changes. Static views are like a snapshot • CAD objects can be drawn in cross sec-
taken at a specific time; subsequent changes tion/elevation views. Any CAD objects
do not appear in that snapshot. Changes added to a cross section/elevation view
made in the original plan must be resent to automatically update in the layout.
layout manually. • CAD objects added in a cross section/ele-
vation view can only be edited in the
Floor Plan Views cross section/elevation view.
and CAD Details • Double-clicking a cross section/eleva-
Floor plan views and CAD details sent to tion view in layout while in Select
layout are dynamic. Any changes made to Objects mode activates the original
these items in plan are reflected view, allowing you to modify the model
automatically in layout. or add CAD objects.
• The display of everything is under your • The lines that define cross section/eleva-
control. All editing must be done in floor tion views in layout are automatically
plan view or the original CAD detail, and generated copies that are no longer linked
all changes are automatically reflected on to the 3D model. Once in layout, these
every copy in layout. lines can be edited using the Edit Layout
• To edit the floor plan view or CAD detail button. See “Editing Layout Lines” on
from layout, double-click inside the view page 983.
using the Select Objects tool. This
opens the plan file where editing can be Updating Cross
done. Any changes made update the lay- Sections/Elevations
out.
If a cross section/elevation view is sent to
• If the reference display is on when a floor layout,and that camera is activated while the
plan view is sent to layout, the reference layout sheet is open, closing the view opens
display always displays for that layout the following dialog:
view. See “Reference Display” on page
369.
978
Editing Layout Views
, and Wall Elevation views, camera

views and overviews created using any of the
Vector View Tools are static. Render and
Raytrace views sent to layout are also static
views. They are treated as imported images
embedded in the file. See “Picture File Box
• If the layout view is up-to-date with the
3D model, you can choose NO. Any changes made to the 3D model have no
effect on static views. To update these views
• To update the view on the layout page
in layout, delete the old view and send a new
choose OK. When the picture is updated,
one. See “Dynamic & Static Views” on page
the layout view is replaced with a new
977.
copy. Any manual changes made to the
original picture are lost. For this reason, The lines that define vector views in layout
you should only make changes made to a are automatically generated copies that are
layout view using the Edit Layout no longer linked to the 3D model. Once in
tool after the model has been finalized. layout, these lines can be edited using the
Edit Layout button. See “Editing Layout
Static Views Lines” on page 983.
Layout
With the exception of Cross Section/
Elevation , Backclipped Cross Section
Editing Layout Views

To edit a layout view, first select its layout inside it rotate. Cross section/elevation and
3D views sent to layout cannot be rotated.
box using the Select Objects tool. Use
the edit handles that display to move, resize,
or rotate it. The edit toolbar also displays, Deleting Views
making additional tools available for To delete a view, select it and click the
modifying the selected view.
Delete edit button or press the Delete
key.
Layout views can be edited like CAD boxes. Copying Views
See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page
111. Just like many objects, views sent to layout
can be copied and pasted onto different
Floor plan views and CAD details can be layout pages or even into different layout
rotated. Both the layout box and the view files.
979
As a general rule, though, if multiple copies Editing Dynamic Views

of a view are needed, it is best to send the
view to layout as many times as necessary Select a dynamic view and click the Open
because each view can then be controlled View edit button to open the original
independently. view that was sent to layout. This is the same
Bear in mind, too, that if a layout has views as double-clicking a dynamic view in layout.
copied from a different layout file and is later See “Dynamic & Static Views” on page 977.
moved to a different location on your
computer, the link to the original plan file Resizing Scaled Views
may be broken. See “Keeping Layout Views
Scaled views retain their scale regardless of
Current” on page 977.
how you resize the border. You can resize the
border proportionally from a corner handle
Moving Layout Views or select one of the handles on an edge to
Layout views can be moved using the Move change the size in one direction only. The
edit handle or the Move Object Using image may be cropped if the border is resized
Dimension dialog. See “Moving Objects small enough.
Resizing Non-Scaled Views
Moving Views to If the view was sent to layout using the Fit to
a Different Page Sheet setting, resizing may have one of
To move a view from one layout page to several results:
another, select the view, click the Open • Drag a corner handle in or out to resize
both the border and the image proportion-
Object edit button, and change the Page
ally.
on the Line Style tab of the Layout Box
Specification dialog. See “Layout Box • If you drag a side handle in or out, the
Specification Dialog” on page 989. image stays the same size, but the border
changes. If you make the border smaller,
it may crop the image; if you make it
larger, you may show more of the image.
Rescaling Views
border and click the Rescale Layout View
Floor plan views, cross section/ edit button or select Tools> Layout>
elevations, wall elevations and CAD Rescale Layout View. The Change Scale
details sent to layout can be rescaled. To dialog opens.
change the scale of the view, select the
980
Displaying Layout Views
In most cases, you should specify a scale for

floor plan views, CAD details, and cross
sections/elevation views. Typical scales are
1 ¼ in = 1ft and 1 m = 50 m.
2
3 When a view is sent to layout at a scale
3 other than that of the original view, line
weights and line styles are affected. In many
cases, this is not desirable. Check Use
Layout Line Scaling to make lines in the
1 Choose No Scale to remove any selected view appear the same as lines of the
specific scale factor associated with the
selected view. same weight drawn on the layout page. See
“Line Weights and Scaling” on page 955.
2 Select this option to specify a scale for
the image. When the scale is changed,
the layout picture resizes.
Displaying Layout Views

What’s New In Version X1 Training for that view. From the layout page, you can
Layout
Video: Layers - Layers and the Layout quickly do either using the Layout Box Lay-
File ers edit tool.
Select Window> Show Layout to
make the layout file that is currently
Do not delete layer sets that are used in
open the current view. You can also press layouts.
Ctrl + Tab on your keyboard.
When a view is sent to layout,the active layer
To use the Layout Box Layers tool
set is used. Some view types give you the
option of duplicating and renaming the active
1. Select a layout view.
layer set before sending the view to layout.
See “Sending Views to Layout” on page 975. 2. Click the Layout Box Layers edit
Once sent to layout, static views cannot be button to open the Layer Display
changed. See “Dynamic & Static Views” on Options dialog. If this edit button does
page 977. not display, the view is not dynamic.
• The layer set for the layout view dis-
The layer set referenced by a dynamic view plays at the top of the dialog.
is saved with the plan rather than the layout
• The settings for the currently selected
file, and the display of the view can be
layer display below.
modified either by editing the referenced
layer set or by selecting a different layer set 3. You can make changes to settings of the
current layer set.
981
made to this layer set affect the layout

Changes made to this layer set affect all view, regardless of whether the changes
other views that use it, not necessarily were made using the Layout Box Lay-
the layout view alone.
ers tool.
4. Alternatively, you can select a different
layer set for the layout view from the 5. Save your changes before closing the
Layer Set drop-down list. Changes layout file.
Layout Page Display Options

Select Tools> Display Settings> open the Layout Page Display Options
Display Options from a layout file to dialog.
The Layout Page Display Options use this dialog, see “Layer Display Options
dialog is very similar to the Layer Display Dialog” on page 218. For information about
Options dialog, but only controls the controlling the display of views sent to
display of the layout borders and any objects layout, see “Displaying Layout Views” on
added to it such as text, dimensions, and page 981.
CAD objects. For information about how to
982
Opening Layout Views
Opening Layout Views

Dynamic views sent to layout reference Notice the name of the current layer set that
an original view in a plan. From the displays in the Active Layer Set Control
layout page, you can quickly access that drop-down list. Changes made to this layer
original view by selecting a layout view, then set affect not only the current view, but also
clicking the Open View edit button. The the associated layout view and any other
original view can also be opened by double- views that use this layer set.
clicking the layout view using the Select
It is important to remember that when a
Objects tool. plan view is accessed by opening a
Changes made in this view update in the dynamic layout view, that view uses the same
original layout view. Depending on the layer set as the layout view.
changes, other views may also be affected.
Editing Layout Lines

Individual lines in any vector view sent group select methods. See “Selecting
Layout
to layout can be selected, edited and Objects” on page 92.
drawn using the Edit Layout tool. Changes
made using this tool have no effect on the 3D Adding New Layout Lines
model.
Add a line to a layout vector view by clicking
The full set of CAD editing tools is not the Edit Layout button, selecting a
available when using Edit Layout. In layout view, and dragging a new line within
many cases, it is more efficient to edit lines in
the layout box. Once drawn, this line can be
a vector view by sending it to a CAD detail for
edited like any other layout line and
editing first. See “CAD Detail From View”
maintains its position in relation to the layout
on page 751.
view it was drawn in.
Selecting Layout Lines
Editing Layout Lines
CAD lines in vector views sent to layout
When a line is selected, use the edit handles
cannot be edited with the Edit Layout to change its size, angle, and position, as
tool. Only lines generated by the program with standard CAD lines. A selected layout
can be edited using this tool. line can also be deleted like a standard CAD
To select a line in a layout view, click the line.
Edit Layout button and click the line.

You can also select additional lines in the
same layout view using the marquee select or
983
Layout line properties can be changed in the

Angle Snaps , Object Snaps , and
Edit Layout Lines dialog. See “Edit
Grid Snaps are all available in layout. Layout Lines Dialog” on page 984.
See “Snap Settings” on page 80.
Edit Layout Lines Dialog

When lines have been selected with the Edit The dialog allows you to change the
properties of the selected lines without
Layout tool, click the Open Object
affecting the other lines in the view or
edit button to open the Edit Layout Lines
change the properties for all lines in the view.
dialog.
Line Weight Tab
1 5
6
2
7
3
4
1 Weight for Selected Lines - If this 4 Pattern Lines are define patterns such
value is set to -1, the selected lines use as brick, siding, and shingles.
the Default Weight for their line type
defined in the lower part of this dialog. 5 Highlight Certain Weight - Check this
box to isolate lines of a specific weight.
Default Weights - Set the line width for all This activates the rest of the Highlight
Normal lines and all Pattern lines. Weight section, where you can specify
which weights of lines are highlighted.
2 Selected lines can be changed to take
on the properties of either the Pattern
6 All Lines Editable - Check this box to
Lines or the Normal Lines. select all layout lines, even those that
are not highlighted. If All Lines Editable is
3 Normal Lines define the edges of the not checked, only highlighted lines are
surfaces of the 3D objects.
984
Managing Layout Links
selectable until you return to this dialog and unchecked, the highlighted lines of the
uncheck Highlight Certain Weight. specified weight are simple to select by
holding down the Shift key and dragging a
7 Normal Lines / Pattern Lines - marquee around the view (inside the border).
Specify the line weight for each line
Only the highlighted lines are selected.
type to highlight. If All lines editable is
Line Color Tab
1
3
2
Layout
Layout line color can be changed for the
2 Check Use Default Color to restore the
selected lines only or for the entire layout selected layout lines to the default color
line type. for that line type.
1 Click the box under Color for Selected 3 Use the menu to define new Default
Lines and choose a new color from the Colors for Normal Lines and for
menu to change all selected lines to the Pattern Lines. Unless changed individually,
newly defined color. every layout line in that view takes on the
newly defined color for its line type.

Chief Architect allows you to review plan Protecting Layout Links
files present in a current layout, change
existing links from one plan file to another, Careful file management is needed to avoid
and reestablish links to plan files that have disrupting layout links and producing
been moved or renamed. missing files. See “File Management” on
page 157.
The following guidelines can help prevent
layout links from being disrupted:
985
• Save plan files in the same folder as the 1. Files in the same folder or subfolder as
layout, or in a sub-folder in that folder. the layout.
• Legacy plan files referenced by a layout 2. Files in the directory the files were sent
must have the .plan file extension. Plans to the layout from.
from version 9.5 and prior with the .pl 3. If files of the same name as those
file extension cannot link to .layout files. originally sent to the layout are not
• Custom graphics included in a plan or found in these locations, the Layout
layout should be embedded in the file or Files dialog displays. See “Layout Files
saved in the same folder as the layout. Dialog” on page 987.
• Plan files used to save CAD details or
other information should be copied and To relocate missing files
saved in the same folder as the layout.
1. Select the file and then click the Browse
• Plan files should never be renamed. If a button to locate the file. Click Open to
new name is desired, make a copy of the restore the link. When all missing files
file and rename it. Changes made in the have been restored, click OK.
copy do not affect the layout.
2. Choose Tools> Layout> Layout files to
• Avoid sending cross section/elevations to double-check that all files have been
layout more than once. Changes made to found. If some are still missing, repeat
the view can affect layout views in unin- the above process. If a missing file is no
tended ways. longer needed, delete the view borders
• Layout files should never be moved. If a associated with it in the layout.
layout file must be moved, the entire
folder it is saved in should be moved or 3. Be sure to choose File> Save when
copied and then moved. the missing files have been restored to
save the new path names.
• Use Export> Export Entire Plan to 4. Legacy plans with the .pl file extension
create an independent copy of the origi- should be opened and saved in the most
nal layout. Avoid use of “Save As.” current program version.
• Do not delete any layer sets that are used
by a view that was sent to layout. Results of Missing Files
• If you relink a layout view to a new plan, If all missing files are correctly redefined,
be sure to save the plan file so the layer the layout opens when you click OK.
sets are updated.
If an error message displays, one or more of
Finding Missing Files the missing files could not be replaced by the
redefined file. Click OK to continue. The
When a layout file is opened, it looks for layout opens, but with the following
dynamically linked views in the following characteristics:
order:
986
1. Any floor plan views or CAD details

associated with the missing file(s) are
blank. Only the border displays.
2. Any elevations or cross sections associ-
ated with the missing file(s) show the
automatically generated lines, but any
added CAD objects are absent.
Finding Files from

an Opened Layout
If you want to relink all references to this
To view a list of the files that the current file, use the Layout Files dialog by
layout is linked to, choose Tools> Layout> choosing Tools> Layout> Layout Files....
Layout files to open the Layout Files See“Layout Files Dialog” on page 987.
dialog. See“Layout Files Dialog” on page
987. Layout Files Dialog
• If all files are located, only one section
displays: Files present in layout.
• If files are missing, a second section is 1
Layout
also available: Files NOT FOUND in
layout. 3
• Each section lists files by full pathname. 2
Click Browse to locate files in the
directory structure.
Relinking Layout Views

1 Files Present in Layout lists all files
You can change the file that a dynamic with intact links to the layout.
layout view is linked to by selecting the
view and choosing Tools> Layout> Relink 2 Files NOT FOUND in Layout lists the
names of files with disrupted links to
File or clicking the Relink File edit the layout. Any files listed here have been
button. The Choose Layout File moved or renamed and cannot be found by
Reference dialog opens. Select the file that the program. Intervention is required to find
you want to link to and click Open. these files and reestablish their links to the
layout.
3 Select a file and click the Browse

button to find the file in the directory
structure. Locate a missing file and click
Open to link it to the layout. You can also
type the entire path and file name of the file.
987
Missing Layer Sets This dialog provides information about

which layout view is affected by the missing
The layer set associated with each view in a layer set, the path name of the plan file that
layout is saved with the plan file from which the layer set is missing from, and the original
the view was sent. Just as it is important to layer set name.
not move, rename or delete the plan file, it is
important that you not rename or delete the Select a replacement layer set from the
layer set. Available Layer Sets drop-down list.
If a layer set used by a layout view cannot be Click the Define button to open the Layout
found when the layout is opened, the Page Display Options dialog, where you
Missing Layer Set dialog will display. can make changes to the selected layer set.
Printing Layout Files

Printing layout files is similar to Select File> Print> Print to open the
printing directly from a view in a plan Print dialog. See “Print Dialog” on page
file. See “Printing Directly from a View” on 965.
page 952.
As in a plan view, printing options for Scaling
layouts are set in the Page Setup dialog.
The drawing scale is specified in the Page
These options apply to all pages of the layout
Setup dialog. While you can specify any
file. See “Page Setup Dialog” on page 963.
drawing scale that you wish, in nearly all
circumstances, you will want the scale to be
1 in = 1 in for all layout files.
988
Exporting Layout Files
The views sent to your layout pages have made before final output to large paper
already been assigned a scale, and if you format. See “Check Plots” on page 971.
select a scale other than 1 in = 1 in in the
To see or change the current scale of a layout
Page Setup dialog, these views will be
view, select the view and click the Rescale
scaled a second time when printed.
Layout View edit button. See “Rescaling
Layout views will print at their specified Views” on page 980.
scales only when the drawing scale for
When a view is sent to layout at a scale other
the layout file is 1 in = 1 in.
than that used by the original view, line
weights may be affected. See “Line Weights
You can also print a Check Plot, which is a and Scaling” on page 955.
test printing, typically at a smaller scale,
Exporting Layout Files

Layout pages can be exported to .dxf/ than model units. If a 50” line in a plan
.dwg files much like any other vector- would be scaled to 1” inch when printed, it is
based view. exported as a 1” line instead of its length
before prior to scaling. See “Exporting 2D
The main difference is in the scale of the
Layout
DXF/DWG Files” on page 917.
output, which is in scaled paper units rather
Layout Box Specification Dialog

A layout box is essentially a CAD box that General Tab
contains a view once it has been sent to
layout. When selected, a layout box has edit On the General tab you can specify the exact
handles similar to those of a CAD box that size and location of the layout box. See
allow you to rotate, relocate, and resize the “General Tab” on page 867.
layout box.
Line Style Tab
Select a layout view and click the Open
The Line Style tab allows you to set the
Object edit button to open the Layout properties of the selected layout box and to
Box Specification dialog. The Layout
move the selected layout box to another
Box Specification dialog is very similar
layout page. For more information about the
to the CAD Box Specification dialog. options in the Line Style tab, see “Line Style
Tab” on page 851.
989
Fill Style Tab

Layout Defaults
To access the layout defaults for the apply to layouts are disabled. See “Plan
current layout file, select Edit> Defaults” on page 180.
Default Settings, select Layout from the
The default settings are saved with the layout
Default Settings dialog, and click Edit....
plan. If you want to customize the layout
The settings in the Layout Defaults dialog settings for future plans, create a template
are comparable to those in the Plan plan. See “Template Files” on page 167.
Defaults dialog. Some options that do not
990
Chapter 39:
Schedules
Schedules
Chapter Overview
A schedule is essentially a text object with model. You should never assume it includes
grid lines separating rows and columns. what you expect or need.
Schedules are available for doors, windows,
fixtures, furniture, and electrical items. A Chapter Contents
schedule can contain information for one or • Schedule Defaults
all floors of your plan. • Creating Schedules
Schedules update automatically whenever an • Editing Schedules
object is created, deleted,moved, or altered. • Adding Columns to Schedules
• Schedule Specification Dialog
You should check each schedule carefully to
be sure it accurately represents what is in the
991
Schedule Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by The Schedule Defaults dialogs look the
selecting Edit> Default Settings.... same as the Schedule Specification
Click the “+” next to Schedules to display dialogs. The settings determine the initial
the schedule sub-headings. Select a settings in the Schedule Specification
subheading and click the Edit... button to dialogs. Label defaults are also set here.
open the Schedule Defaults dialog
Individual schedules can be edited without
associated with your selection.
altering the default settings. See “Schedule
Schedule defaults can also be accessed by Specification Dialog” on page 995.
double-clicking the Schedules button. The defaults are stored with your plan. You
can create a template plan with defaults set
the way you like for future use. See
Creating Schedules
Classroom Design Project Training Select a Schedule Tool, and the Schedule
Video: Creating a Window Schedule Specification dialog opens, allowing you
to control how the schedule and associated
Schedules can be created in floor plan
object labels appear. See “Schedule
view and CAD detail windows. Select
Tools> Schedules to access the Schedule
Tools.
992
Editing Schedules
When you close the Schedule one or more CAD Detail windows instead.
Specification dialog, the schedule you Saving schedules in organized CAD details
have just created displays on screen. allows you to send them to layout without
needing to resize the layout view box. See
While you can place schedules in floor plan
“CAD Details” on page 874.
view, you may find it helpful to place them in
Editing Schedules
Schedules can be edited using the edit • Click the Select Next Object edit
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, or the button to select nearby objects instead of
Schedule Specification dialog. See
the selected schedule.
“Schedule Specification Dialog” on page
995. • Click the Open Object edit button to
Edit Handles selected schedule(s). See “Schedule
A selected schedule has the same edit
handles as a CAD box. See “Editing Box- • Click the Components edit button to
Based Objects” on page 111. open the Components dialog for the
In addition, schedules have edit handles selected schedule(s). See “Components
along the side of each column, in the Dialog” on page 1014.
Schedule heading near the top. Click and
drag one of these handles to adjust the width
button to accurately move the selected
of the columns on either side.
Schedules
schedule(s). See “Point to Point Move”
on page 125.
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 86. • Click the Center Object edit button
to center the selected schedule(s) along a
Using the Edit Buttons wall or over schedules. See “Center
Object” on page 125.
A selected schedule can be edited in a variety
of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. • Click the Reflect About Object edit
As with most objects, schedules can be button to reflect the selected schedule(s)
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See about another object. See “Reflecting
“Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 113. Objects” on page 135.
The following edit toolbar buttons may • Click the Move to Front of Group
display on the edit toolbar for a selected edit button to display the selected object
schedule. in front of other objects in the same
993
drawing group. See “Move to Front of objects have been added or removed from
Group” on page 122. a plan and the schedule numbering has
gaps.
ton to lengthen other object(s) until they Converting Schedules to Text
and Extend” on page 142. Click the Schedule to Text edit button
to convert the selected schedule to a
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button tabbed text object. You can then edit the
to shorten the length of object(s) inter- schedule as text.
and Extend” on page 142. When a schedule is converted to text, it no
longer updates automatically. In addition,
• Click the Schedule to Text edit but- shaped labels displaying as specified in the
ton to convert the selected schedule into a schedule’s specification dialog will no longer
text object. be present.
• Click the Renumber Schedule edit You can copy the text from the Text
button renumber the objects in the Specification dialog and paste it
selected schedule. This may be helpful if into other applications.
Adding Columns to Schedules

Schedules can be customized by adding
columns for new subcategories. This
example uses a window schedule.
994
Schedule Specification Dialog
1. Create the subcategories in the 5. For each accessory, click in the SubCat
Preferences dialog. See “Categories column, choose a subcategory from the
Panel” on page 209. drop-down list, and rename the Item
2. Next, create the window schedule with from “accessory” to the actual material
the new subcategories set to display. See information.
“Schedule Specification Dialog” on 6. If you need a new subcategory, click Edit
page 995. Sub Categories, then use the subcate-
3. To add definitions, select the window in gory when you return to the
floor plan view and click the Compo- Components dialog.
nents edit button. The window schedule updates to reflect the

new materials as soon as you click OK.
4. Click the Add button two times, and two
These materials are also placed into any
rows of “accessories” are added to the
material lists that you generate.
component material list.

Schedules and the object labels associated
with them can be edited in the Schedule
To open the Schedule Specification

dialog for a schedule, either select the
schedule and click the Open Object edit
Schedules
button or double- click the schedule itself
using the Select Objects tool.
995
Text Tab
1
5
2
3
4
1 Columns to Include - Select the check sequentially. This number may also be used
box for each column you want to as all or part of the objects label.
display in the schedule. At least one column
Label - This box is available for objects that
must be checked to create a schedule.
can be labeled. A Label tab is included in the
Columns appear in the schedule in the same specification dialog for the object if this is
order as this list. Columns may be added or the case. Check this box to include the label
removed at any time by selecting the in the schedule.
schedule, clicking the Open Object edit Qty - Quantity of the items represented by
button, and selecting or clearing check the row. The quantity of an item is dependent
boxes. Many of the columns described below on how much information about it is shown
are available only for some schedule types. in the schedule. For example, if a schedule
only lists Number, Quantity and Floor, all
The Number and Qty columns are the windows on that floor display with the
unique in that they may be included on same schedule number, even though the
either or both ends of a schedule.
windows might be different sizes and types.
The schedule does not show enough
Number - Describes the sequence of this information to distinguish them, although the
schedule entry. For example, the first labels in floor plan view might.
window in the schedule is defined as W01,
and the rest of the windows are labeled
996
Attached To - Indicates what an electrical

object is attached to in electrical schedules.
Description - Shows the general description
of the object. This is the same information as
in the Item column of the Components
dialog. It includes the type (double hung or
ext., hinged), indicators such as “ct” (circle
By including one more column, such as Size, top) or “at” (arched top), and materials if
the two windows above are separated by the specified in the object’s Components
schedule. dialog.
Be careful to have sufficient columns to Drawer Pull - Lists the name of any attached
distinguish the objects. A 3040 fixed glass drawer pull hardware.
window is not the same as a 3040 arch top Door Pull - Lists the name of any attached
window, but they may appear the same in the door pull hardware.
schedule if Description is not included.
Hinge - Lists the name of any attached
Floor - Indicates the floor for each item in the hinge.
schedule. This column is usually needed only
if the check box for All Floors is selected. Header - Shows the dimensions and quantity
of header stock for each item.
Size - Shows the window or door size in feet-
inches or millimeters, according to the Thickness - Displays the door thickness in
format defined on the Label tab. A 3640 door schedules only.
window is 3’6”x4’0”, with the dimension Code - Lists the value entered in the Code
order defined on the Label tab. Size does not cell of the object’s Components dialog.
Schedules
state units of measurement; they are implied.
Manufacturer - Lists manufacturer
Dimension - Displays the dimension of the information, if added in the object’s
opening, including the units, in the format Components dialog.
Width x Height. If Include Type is selected
in the Label tab, the dimension is followed Comments - Shows the information entered
by letters describing the object type. Size and in the Comments column of the
Components dialog.
dimension are typically not used together, as
they provide similar information. Information in the Description, Code,
Width - Lists the width of an item. Manufacturer, and Comments columns is
edited in the Components dialogs for the
Depth - Lists the depth of an item. obect. Some objects have several rows, but
Height - Lists the height of an item. the schedule refers to only one. To find the
correct row, look at the Description column.
R/O - Lists the rough opening size. Often but not always, the first item in the ID
column is the one the schedule refers to; for
997
doors, this is D1, for windows, W1, for The default is the current floor. Check All
cabinets, C1, and so on. Floors to include all floors in the schedule.
Note: When editing a Components dialog, Text Tab For Other Objects
double-click a cell to edit it.
For Doors
In addition to the default columns, the Single Doors - Include single doors.
Components dialog includes a column for
each subcategory defined under the Double Doors - Include double doors.
categories in the Preferences dialog. See Sliding Doors - Include sliding doors.
“Categories Panel” on page 209. Check any
of these to create a column for that Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass
subcategory’s information. doors. These may be included as part of a
window schedule if desired.
Objects to Include - Check the boxes for
objects you want to include in the schedule. Pocket Doors - Include pocket doors.
Multiple schedules can be created using Bifold Doors - Include bifold doors.
these filters as desired. See “Text Tab For
Other Objects” on page 998. Garage Doors - Include garage doors.
Mulled Door Units - Include mulled door
2 Character Height - Specify a height units. If Treat as door is checked in the
for text in the schedule.
Mulled Window Specification dialog, it
To specify a printed text size, click the is included here. See “Options Tab for
Scale... button to open the Printed Size Mulled Units” on page 347.
Input dialog
For Windows
3 Transparent Background - Check this Standard Windows - Include any window
box to make the schedule background
transparent, allowing items behind the that is not a bay, box, bow, or mulled unit.
schedule to show through. If unchecked, the Bow Windows - Include bow windows.
schedule has an opaque background that
blocks everything behind it. Bay Windows - Include bay and box
windows.
4 Don’t Rotate With Plan - Select the Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass
check box to prevent the schedule from
doors as part of a window schedule. Also
rotating when Tools> Rotate View... is available for door schedules.
selected.
Mulled Window Units - Include mulled
5 Title - Enter a title for the schedule and window units. If Treat as door is unchecked
select the Show Title check box to in the Mulled Window Specification dialog,
display the title at the top of the schedule. it is included here. See “Options Tab for
Mulled Units” on page 347.
6 Include From Floor - Specify the floor
whose objects appear in the schedule. For Cabinets
998
Base Cabinets - Include base cabinets. For Electrical

Wall Cabinets - Include wall cabinets. Outlets - Include any electrical items that are
designated as outlets.
Full Height Cabinets - Include full height
cabinets. Switches - Include any electrical items that
are designated as switches.
Other - Include other cabinet objects: soffits,
shelves and partitions. Lights - Include any electrical items that are
designated as lights.
For Fixtures
Other - Include any electrical items that are
Plumbing - Include any fixtures with the
not outlets, switches or lights.
Appears in plumbing schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
Appliances - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in appliance schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
HVAC - Include any fixtures that have the
Appears in HVAC schedule option checked
in the Symbol Specification dialog.
Indoor - Include any fixtures in the Fixtures
(Interior) library category that don’t appear
in Plumbing, Appliances, or HVAC.
Schedules
Outdoor - Include any fixtures in the
Fixtures (Exterior) library category that
don’t appear in Plumbing, Appliances, or
HVAC.
Other - Include other fixture objects that do
not fall into any of the above Fixtures
categories.
For Furniture
Indoor - Include any furniture that is in the
Furniture (Interior) library.
Outdoor - Include any furniture that is in the
Furniture (Exterior) library.
Other - Include other furniture objects that
don’t appear in Indoor or Outdoor.
999
Attributes Tab
1 Check Default to place the schedule on 3 Click the drop-down list to select a
the default layer. Click the drop down different Font. The text styles Bold,
list to select from all layers. Underline, Italic, and Strikeout are
available.
Click Define to open the Select CAD
Layer dialog and choose from all layers. See
4 Tabs - The edit box defines the number
“Select Layer Dialog” on page 222. of spaces from the left edge of the text
box where each new column begins. The first
2 Color - Click the color bar to open the column always starts at 0. In this case, the
Windows standard Color dialog. Use
second column (following the first tab) starts
the dialog to choose the desired line color.
10 spaces in, the next at 20 spaces, etc.
By Layer - Select the check box to use the Default tab settings can be set in the schedule
default color for the specified layer. defaults. See “Schedule Defaults” on page
992.
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Schedule and appearance of the labels that display in
Specification dialog controls the type, size floor plan view.
1000
1 5
2 6
7
3
8
4 9
1 Shape - There are six label shapes to 2 Size - Select one of the three formats to
choose from. The size of the shape is use when showing opening size. This
determined by the text it contains. applies to doors and windows only and also
affects the Size column of the door or
window schedule.
3 Include Type - Select the check box to

append the Size and Dimensions
Schedules
columns selected on the first tab with letters
that designate the opening type. For example,
If a shape is selected and Show Labels is 3050DH describes a 3050 double hung
also selected, windows or doors show the window.
shaped label, the schedule number, and
nothing else. All other label options, except 4 No rotate with plan - Keeps the label
for Character Height and Initial Offset, from rotating with the plan.
have no effect.
5 Include Schedule # - Shows the
schedule number in front of the size.
If no shape is selected and Show Labels is

also selected, window or door are labeled 6 Product Code Label - Replaces the
according to the format defined on this tab and size with the Code information added
the Label tab for the specific object. to Code column components dialog.
1001
Turning off the label removes that item from

the window or door schedule.
8 Character Height - Specify the height

of characters (in inches or mm)
7 Show Labels - Select the check box to associated with the labels.
display object labels in floor plan view.
This also turns on the appropriate layer for Note: The size of the label shapes is speci-
the objects labels in the Layer Display fied in the Callout Defaults dialog. See “Call-
Options dialog. out and Marker Defaults” on page 838.
You can suppress the label for an individual

door or window by checking the Suppress 9 Label Text - Specify the leading
characters to be used for the label.
labels check box in the Labels tab of the
Specification dialog for that object.
1002
Chapter 40:
Materials Lists
Chapter Overview
Introductory Training Video: Cost Esti-
mating The Materials List is based on certain
assumptions that may not match your
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List building style. Chief Architect makes no rep-
in three ways: From All Floors, From resentation as to the accuracy or reliability of
Room, or From Area. In addition, a polyline the Materials List generated by Chief Archi-
or multiple polylines can be used to define tect. Always compare the Materials List with a
areas in a plan a materials list can be manual take-off before providing a quote or
ordering material for a job.
generated from.
Materials lists can then be created, edited, Chapter Contents
and printed directly from the program. They • Working With the Materials List
Materials
can also be exported as text, html or • Creating an Accurate Materials List
List
Microsoft Excel format files for use in other • Calculate From All Floors
programs. • Calculate From Area
• Calculate From Room
• Materials Polyline
• The Master List
• Editing Columns
• Editing Materials Lists
• Material List Display Options Dialog
• Components Dialog
1003
• Managing Materials Lists • Exporting the Material List
Working With the Materials List

The materials list is based on accumulating list. The materials list generated from each
quantities of various items in your model. method behaves the same; only the content
There are several different ways to generate a varies.
The Material List and Report Style panels of Layer Display Options dialog. See
the Preferences dialog control what “Materials Lists” on page 222.
columns are included in the materials list and
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is
their order. See “Material List Panel” on
complete to generate a materials list. A
page 206. These settings can be changed for
materials list generates based on the current
individual lists in the Material List
state of the plan.
Display Options dialog. See “Material
List Display Options Dialog” on page 1012. You can save materials lists with your plan,
but they do not update to include changes
You can also control which objects are
included in the materials list by layer in the
1004
Creating an Accurate Materials List
made after they are generated. Create a new Saved materials lists can be accessed via the
materials list to reflect changes. Material Lists dialog that allows you to
edit, delete, or rename them. See “Managing
For comparison, generate materials Materials Lists” on page 1015.
lists with and without a proposed plan
modification.
If you are designing an addition and the
floor, ceiling, and roof information is
When you close the materials list window, needed, create the building design to comple-
tion and use File> Save As to create a copy
the program asks if you want to keep the
of the plan under a different name. Then
materials list. You can name or delete it.
delete the existing structure, leaving only the
building addition, and generate a materials
list using Calculate From All Floors.
Creating an Accurate Materials List

In order to take full advantage of Chief generally better with manual framing,
Architect’s materials list capabilities, there since each framing piece is calculated
are several things to keep in mind. based on the model. When no framing
• The accuracy of your materials list is tied has been built the framing is calculated
directly to the accuracy of your model. It based on rules that may result in a differ-
takes more than just making your model ent amount of material.
look right to generate an accurate materi- • Keep in mind that certain “tricks,” such
als list. If, for example, you use CAD as using soffits to represent items that
lines to draw an item on a floor plan, that aren’t directly supported in Chief
item is not included in the materials list. Architect can result in items being placed
A better way would be to use a symbol or in the materials list that you didn’t
some other structural element. expect.
• Framing items are added to the materials
The more work you put into making
list even if you haven’t done any framing.
Materials
your model right, the more accurate
The accuracy of framing materials lists is your materials list will be.
List
Calculate From All Floors
Select Tools> Materials List> Calcu- Materials lists calculated From All Floors
late From All Floors to generate a include the framing information if framing
materials list for the entire model. has been built.
1005
Any changes made to the model after a Materials lists can be long and only a portion
materials list is generated are not included in of the list may display on your screen at one
that list. To update the materials list, reselect time. Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll
Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All through the complete list. Move the pointer
to cells in the list to make changes.
Floors .
Calculate From Room

To calculate the materials list for a Calculate From Room can also be
room, select the room and select selected from a room’s edit toolbar.
Tools> Materials List> Calculate From
A materials list calculated from a room is
Room.
created for only the contents of that room;
wall materials are not included.
Calculate From Area

Calculate from Area produces a Polyline Specification dialog. Mate-
materials list for the portion of a plan rial list polylines created in this way are
included within a materials list polyline on a still shown in floor plan view after the list
single floor. is created.
Materials list polylines can be created in two To generate a materials list, select the
ways: polyline and click the Calculate Materials
• Select Tools> Materials List> Calculate List edit button and the materials list is
produced for items within the polyine on the
from Area and click and drag a rect- current floor. If you select the polyline and
angle around an area in your plan. When then instead select Calculate from All
you release the mouse button, a materials Floors, the materials list is produced for
list for the area is created. items within the polyline on all floors.
• Select CAD> and Framing> Rectangu-
You can group-select multiple polylines
lar Polyline and draw a polyline before selecting Calculate from Area or
around an area of your plan. Select the Calculate from All Floors by holding down
polyline and click the Convert Polyline
the Shift key in Select Objects mode.
edit button to open the Convert Materials are calculated for each polyline
Polyline dialog. Select Material List and added into the total. If two polylines
Polyline and click OK. Double click the intersect, materials in that area are counted
polyline to open the Material List twice.
1006
Materials Polyline
Materials Polyline
To create a materials polyline, select 12 linear feet of joist material. This can be
Tools> Materials List> Materials useful for additions and/or remodels.
Polyline. Draw a rectangular polyline
in floor plan view around the area to be Categories
calculated. Select the polyline and click the
The materials categories, such as General,
Calculate Materials List edit button. A Foundation, or Masonry, to be calculated
materials list is created for items within the within a polyline can be specified prior to the
rectangle on the current floor. generation of the materials list.
Portions of walls, floors, and framing that are
inside the designated area are placed on the To specify categories
materials list. Items such as cabinets, 1. Select the materials polyline and click
furniture, studs, windows and doors are
the Open Object edit button.
included in the materials list only if their
center is within the materials polyline. 2. In the Material List Polyline
Specification dialog, check the cate-
Large objects such as walls, framing, floor/ gories to be included in the materials
ceiling covering, and floor and ceiling joists calculation. Categories not checked for
are split at the area boundaries so that only this polyline are ignored.
portions of them appear in the materials list.
A few objects, such as floor joists, which Since you create multiple polylines for
show as pieces in a full materials list, must materials calculation, one polyline might
be listed in footage to accomodate this. For show only Masonry and Framing while
example, if three 16-foot joists fall within a another might include only Roofing.
four foot square area, the materials list shows
The Master List
Materials
The Master List allows you to specify Information for particular items can also be
added or modified in a materials list.
List
supplier, manufacturer, price and other
information for all of the materials included You can use information in an individual
in your materials lists. materials list to update the Master List by
When a materials list is calculated, the highlighting one or more rows in the list and
program refers to the Master List and checks selecting Tools> Update to Master.
for a record for each material. If a record is In addition, items in a materials list can be
available, its information is included in the updated to includes changes made to the
materials list. If a record is not found, a new Master List by highlighting the row or rows
one is added to the Master List.
1007
to update and then selecting Tools> Update select Tools> Materials List> Master List
from Master.
.
Note: If the Master List contains more than Specify which Master List is active on the
one record for an item, the program refer- Master List panel of the Preferences
ences the last one entered. You can override dialog. See “Master List Panel” on page 208.
this by defining one specific entry as the
default. This is achieved by clicking on the
You should regularly back up the mas-
check box in the Def column.
ter materials list (mmaster.mat) or lists
using Windows Explorer.
Chief Architect allows you to have more than
one Master List. Only one can be active, and
Displaying the Master List
only the active list is updated with new
information. To view the current Master List, To open the active Master List, select Tools>
Materials List> Master List .
The Master Window is almost identical to a The category menu at the top of the window
Materials List, but has a few additional lets you limit the Master List to only show a
controls to help with viewing. particular category or display all categories.
1008
Editing Columns
When viewing the Master List, you can you entered. If the text is not found, you hear
adjust the width of columns and control a beep. The status bar at the bottom indicates
which columns are included in the how many entries are listed.
spreadsheet. These settings are remembered
the next time the Master List is opened. For Editing the Master List
more, see “Material List Display Options
Dialog” on page 1012. New records cannot be inserted directly into
the Master List, but they can be deleted or
modified. New records are added to the
Searching the Master List
Master List when a Materials List is
Use the Find field near the bottom of the generated if a matching record is not found.
window to search for text in the Master List. You can also use the Tools> Update to
Master option to add edited records from a
Materials List.
To delete a row from the Master List, click
The search starts from the currently selected the row number at the far left. The entire row
cell and moves to the right, then moves down highlights. Choose Edit> Delete, click the
to the next row starting at the left column, Delete edit button, or press the Delete
and so on, until it finds an instance of the text key on your keyboard.
Editing Columns
The columns in a materials list, the in either place, the item does not show up in
Components dialog, and the Master List the materials list. This is useful in cases
are very similar, but some columns don’t where the program generates several items in
appear in all places. the materials list but only one item needs to
appear because it will be purchased as a
For columns that can be edited by typing in
single unit.
text, double click the cell to begin editing.
The following lists the capablities of each Sub Cat. - This column only appears in
Materials
column. materials lists and allows you to select a
subcategory for an item if subcategories have
List
ID - This column displays an automatically
been defined on the Categories panel of the
generated identifier for each entry. Click this
Preferences dialog. Click a cell in this
column in the Components dialog or in a
column in the Components dialog or in a
materials list to change the category of an
materials list and select from the drop-down
item.
list or double-click the cell and type in the
Use - This column only appears in the Master name of the subcategory.
List and Components dialog. Check boxes
indicate if each item should be included in a
generated materials list. If Use is unchecked
1009
Flr - This column shows the floor that the updated so any unit can be selected.
material came from. It is only visible in a Additional unit conversions can be added on
materials list and is not editable. the Unit Conversions panel of the
Preferences dialog. See “Unit
Size - This column shows the size of the
Conversions Panel” on page 195.
item. Size can be edited in a materials list
and in the Components dialog by clicking Price - This is the price of an item per unit. If
in a cell, but not in the Master List. To restore this is not entered in the Components
the original size, simply delete the text you dialog, it is taken from the Master List.
typed in. For a blank cell, type a single blank
% Markup - This is used to mark up the
space.
price of an item as entered. If this is not
Description - This column gives a brief entered in the Components dialog, it is
description of the item. It is editable in the taken from the Master List.
same way as the Size column.
Labor - This is the cost of labor per unit to
Quantity - This column is used to specify install an item. If this is not entered in the
how many of an item must be found before a Components dialog, it is taken from the
materials list applies information from the Master List.
Master List to it. If at least that many items
Equip - This is the rental or other per unit
are found for a materials list item, the price,
cost of equipment to install an item. If this is
supplier, and other information are recorded.
not entered in the Components dialog, it is
Quantity is only found in the Master List
taken from the Master List.
and is useful for applying a quantity
discount. Tot. Cost - This is the calculated total cost
and is found in the Components dialog
Count - This is the quantity of an item. In a
and in materials lists. This uses the Count,
materials list, Count cannot be edited. In the
Unit, Price, %Markup, Labor and Equip
Components dialog, it can be edited for
colums to calculate the cost. The formula
added accessories. See “Accessories” on
used is:
page 1014.
(Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (%
Extra - This is found in the Components
Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor)
dialog and in materials lists. It is used to
+ ((Count + Extra) * Equip)
provide extra units of the item. When Extra
is edited in the Components dialog, the If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the
Count column in the materials list is updated value of that column with the exception of
to reflect the change. Count and Price, which are always used in
the calculation even if they are not shown.
Unit - This indicates the units used to
measure an item and is not found in the Supplier - The supplier of an item. If this is
Master List. When you change the units of an not entered in the Components dialog, it is
item, the Quantity is updated to reflect the taken from the Master List. If more than one
change. When the Unit of an accessory in the supplier is added to the Master List for a
Components dialog is edited, Quantity is given item, double-click the Supplier cell
1010
Editing Materials Lists
for that item in a materials list to access a entered in the Components dialog, it is
menu of the suppliers that have been added. taken from the Master List. See “Schedules”
Choosing a different supplier references a on page 991.
different record in the Master List.
Comment - You can add additional text here.
Def - This column is only available in the This can also be included in a schedule. If
Master List. It indicates which item is to be this is not entered in the Components
used as the default if more than one item is dialog, it is taken from the Master List.
available. Click this column to change the
Manufacturer - This column can be used to
default.
specify the manufactuer of an item. This can
Code - Enter a code to specify an item. This also be shown in a schedule. If this is not
could be a SKU number of the supplier, for entered in the Components dialog, it is
example. This can also be included in a taken from the Master List.
schedule or used as a label. If this is not
Editing Materials Lists

Adding Information Click it to view a list of suppliers for that
item and select one.
You can enter information in the Price,
Supplier, Code and Comment columns for When a materials list is calculated, the
each item. Once Master List information program searches the Master List for the
exists for a particular item, you won’t have to Price, Supplier, Code information for each
enter this information. The system can load item. This information, marked as default in
the Price, Supplier, Code and Comment the Master list, is used in materials lists.
fields for subsequent materials lists. The
combination of Item, Size, and Supplier are Copying
used to identify unique materials in the
Sections of the Materials List can be copied
Master List.
and then pasted into a text box or into a word
Adding a supplier and price for any item is processing program or spreadsheet program
Materials
straightforward. While in a materials list, using the standard Windows Copy, Cut and
List
click in the cell and enter the information. Paste commands.
When the information is correct, highlight
the entire row and select Tools> Update to Changing the Font
Master. The new entry is added to the
Master List. The font used for materials lists can be
specified on the Font panel of the
You can switch between several existing Preferences dialog. See “Font Panel” on
suppliers for a given item by double-clicking page 187.
on the Supplier cell in a materials list. A drop
down arrow displays to the left of the cell.
1011
Choose a new font from the list of those

available. This changes the materials list font If you have problems with the materials
for all plan files, not just the current one. list printing too small, try using a differ-
ent Materials font.
Displaying Objects in the Materials List

You can control what objects are included in
the materials list and how they are shown.
Controlling Object
Display by Layer
The inclusion of objects in the materials list
can be controlled on the Mat column of the
An “M” in this column indicates that objects
in a layer are included in the materials list.
Click in the cell to add or remove the “M.”
See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
218.
Material List
Display Options Dialog Each plan file can be set to display materials
When a materials list is open, select according to their category. Check boxes for
Tools> Display Options to open the any columns you want to include. These
Material List Display Options dialog categories appear in the ID columns of the
for the materials or the Master List. These material and Master List in the order they are
options correspond to the options in the presented here.
Master List panel of the Preferences The materials list changes automatically to
dialog. See “Master List Panel” on page 208. reflect these changes as soon as the OK
button is selected.
Note: If the display of the category is sup-

pressed, the information is still part of the
materials list. If the materials list is exported,
the information related to the suppressed cat-
egories is exported as well.
1012
Displaying Objects in the Materials List
Subcategories Columns Tab

The materials list and Master List come with
predefined categories. For each of these
categories you can define any number of
subcategories. Subcategories are defined on
the Categories panel of the Preferences
dialog. See “Categories Panel” on page 209.
Subcategories can be specified for any item
in the materials list or Components dialog.
Once a subcategory is defined, it can be
selected from the drop down list in the Type
column.
A subcategory consists of a code and a Check to define which columns are included
description. The code can be any sequence of in the materials list. You can suppress the
characters, up to 12 characters in length. The column’s appearance by removing the check
description is how you want to label, or next to the column name.
describe the sub-category. For example:
Move Up - Click this button to change the
LKS Lockset order of the selected columns by moving
Subcategories are useful when creating door them up in the list. Columns appear in the
and window schedules. For example, you materials list in the same order shown here.
could choose to see the lockset for all doors Move Down - Click this button to move the
and windows in the schedule. If a door or selected columns down in the list.
window has a material with the LKS
“Lockset” subcategory, any text in the item Options Tab
field is shown in the schedule under the
lockset column. You would typically add an
Accessory with a LKS subcategory to a door
or window to add a lockset to a door or
window. See “Creating Schedules” on page 1
Materials
992.
List
2
1 Check Restrict floor and select a floor

to restrict the materials list to. To
restore it to showing all floors, remove the
check. This only affects materials lists Cal-
culated From All Floors.
2 If all the supplies for a job are

purchased from the same supplier,
1013
restricting the supplier saves time. Check Suppliers can be added to the list in the
Restrict supplier, then choose the supplier Components dialog. See “Components
from the list. Dialog” on page 1014.
Components Dialog
Open the Components dialog by Components dialog can also be opened
selecting an object and then clicking from the contextual menu.
the Components edit button. The
Editing the Components Dialog well. This information goes into the
materials list.
Besides editing and adding information for
items in the materials list and Master List, Components information can also be edited
you can edit and add information directly for for library items. When an item in a library is
some items through the Components placed into a plan the components
dialog. The Components dialog for an information goes along with it.
item is the materials list entry for an
individual item or group of items. Accessories
This information in this dialog can be edited In the Components dialog, you can add
just like a materials list or Master List. additional materials list entries for the object
Entering specific Price, Supplier, being edited. The additional materials list
Manufacturer, Comments or Typeembeds entries are called Accessories and are saved
that information into the item itself. When with the item. Accessories added to an object
that item is copied, even into a different plan, are embedded and appear in the materials
component information is transferred as list.
1014
Managing Materials Lists
2. Click the Add button and a new line is

Note: Accessory quantities can only be added to the spreadsheet.
edited when one object is selected. If multiple
objects are group selected, accessory quanti- 3. The new entry is given an item name of
ties are locked. Accessory#. You can give it any name
you prefer.
To create a new accessory 4. All other columns for accessory items
except ID can also be edited.
1. Select an object and click the
5. To remove an accessory, click any part
Components edit button to open the
Components dialog. of its row and click the Delete edit
button.
Managing Materials Lists

To open the Material Lists dialog, Done - Close the Material Lists dialog.
select Tools> Materials List>
Help - Open the Help Index to the page
Materials List Management.
describing this dialog.
Edit - Open the selected material list. Double
clicking a materials list is equivalent.
Delete - Delete the selected materials list.
Rename - Open the Rename Material
List dialog.
Exporting the Material List
Materials
Any materials list can be exported into
List
a text (.txt) file that can be opened
directly by most spreadsheet programs.
From a materials list or the Master List,
select File> Export Material List to open
the Material Export Options dialog.
1015
1 5
2 6
3 7
4
1 Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this only those columns that would have been
option to create a text file with a tab exported by Version 8. This is useful if you
between each field entry in the materials list, are using a program that expects the file to be
and a carriage return between each row. in this format.
2 Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select this Estimating Software

option to create a text file with a
comma between each field entry in the You can export a materials list to a word
materials list and a carriage return between processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
each row. it in your estimating format. You can also
export the materials list to a number of
3 Excel (XLS) - Select this option to commercial estimating programs in whose
create a Microsoft Excel format file.
databases you can keep your current pricing,
4 HTML - Select this option to create an labor costs, and markups and generate
html file that you can view with your reports based on this data.
web browser.
Before purchasing an estimating software
5 No Column Headers - Check this box program, be sure that the program supports
to prevent column headings from the direct import of Chief Architect materials
appearing in the first row of the text file. lists.
6 Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor - Any questions regarding estimating software

Check this box to immediately open the packages and how they interact with Chief
exported file with the program specified on Architect should be directed toward the
your computer. company providing the estimating software.
Chief Architect is unable to provide any
7 Export Version 8 Columns Only - technical support for third party programs.
Check this box to limit the export to
1016
Appendix A
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing of Chief Architect and is happy to answer

world-class technical support and training to basic questions about how to find or use a
complement our professional products. Our particular function of Chief Architect.
support professionals are eager to work with
In addition to technical support, Chief
you to make certain our software is
Architect has assembled a team of certified
functioning as designed.
trainers to offer instruction in using the
The primary function of technical support is program. You can access our trainers in
to make sure our software is functioning several ways. Chief Architect offers one-on-
correctly and to help you quickly resolve one personal tutor sessions, online training
problems that prevent its normal use. Our sessions, and classroom seminars.
Technical Support staff is trained in the use
Reference and Training Resources

Chief Architect offers a variety of reference achieve specific design goals. The Help
and training options in addition to the Database can be referred to again and again
resources that come standard with the at your convenience.
program.
Video Training
Help Database Technical
Chief Architect offers a DVD video training
Support
The Chief Architect Technical Support Help series and toolkits that contain in-depth
Database at www.chiefarchitect.com con- training on a wide range of topics from
tains a variety of articles describing how to beginning to advanced experience levels. For
resolve common technical problems and
1017
more information about these products, visit Seminars

our Web site: www.chiefarchitect.com.
Throughout the year, Chief Architect
conducts training seminars in various
Interactive Training
locations around the United States and
If you have questions about how to use Chief Canada. Learn about upcoming sessions on
Architect, consider contacting our training the Internet at: www.chiefarchitect.com.
department for a personal training session.
Personal training sessions are an excellent User Forum
way to learn how to use the program, Our ChiefTalk User Forum is a great place to
providing one-on-one interaction with a discuss and exchange ideas with other Chief
certified Chief Architect trainer via the Architect users. Here you can post questions;
Internet. Unlike a telephone call to Technical read discussions from other users; and post
Support, a personal training session lets you suggestions to improve our product. In
follow along with the trainer and see what is addition to our regular users, from time to
happening on your computer screen. Discuss time our engineering and support teams
topics that interest you and learn how to monitor the forum and provide input and
accomplish your specific design goals. discussion on current topics. This resource is
available without charge at www.chiefarchi-
tect.com/chieftalk.
Before Contacting Technical Support

Before contacting Technical Support, take a • Visit our Technical Support Help Data-
moment to see if the answer to your question base at www.chiefarchitect.com, which
is found in the Reference Manual, Help contains articles describing how to
index, training DVD’s, or in our on-line Help resolve common technical problems.
Database. When you contact us, Technical • The Help Database also includes a
Support will refer you to these resources if wealth of articles describing how to
the answer can be found there. accomplish many design goals. Use the
• Look up items related to your question in How Do I… Solution Finder to locate
the index of the Chief Architect Refer- articles of interest to you.
ence Manual. This manual can assist you • If you have a question about how best to
in resolving most “how to” questions. accomplish a certain design task, you
• Click Help> Index in Chief Architect to may find the users at the ChiefTalk user
access a comprehensive index of help forum a valuable resource for informa-
topics. tion and advice. Access this site at
• Refer to the Training DVD’s available www.chieftalk.com.
for Chief Architect. These answers many
“how to” questions.
1018
Before Contacting Technical Support
Installation Issues Troubleshooter can also be launched

manually by selecting Help > Hardware
The following are common reasons for Lock Troubleshooter….
installation failure of Chief Architect and
other software: Printing Problems
1. Anti-virus software is enabled and inter- Printing problems fall into two main
fering with installation. Anti-virus soft- categories: problems that prevent the printer
ware is the number one cause of from working in any program and problems
installation failures for any type of soft- printing from Chief Architect. To determine
ware. Refer to the documentation for if the problem is specific to Chief Architect,
your anti-virus software for details on try the following:
how to disable the software and re-
enable it once installation is complete. 1. Begin by clicking on the Windows Start
button, and select Printers.
2. The recommended minimum system
requirements are not met. 2. Right-click the printer that is not func-
tioning properly in the Printers folder.
3. The DVD has fingerprints, scratches, or
other defects. Sometimes a small finger- 3. Click Properties from the menu that
print can prevent the program from appears.
installing. Clean the disk with soft cot- 4. On the General tab, click the Print Test
ton cloth. Be sure to use soft cotton Page button.
rather than paper products on disks to
If the printer does not produce a test page,
avoid scratching.
the problem is not one that Chief Architect
If you see visible cracking on a CD or Technical Support can solve. Follow these
DVD, do not insert it in your CD/DVD suggestions:
drive. Cracked disks can fly apart and cause • Check the connection between the com-
damage to your drive.
puter and the printer.
Refer to the on-line Help Database for • Check your printer documentation for
solutions to common installation problems. troubleshooting printer problems.
If the answer to your question is not found • Contact your printer's manufacturer or
there, contact our Technical Support check their Web site for support informa-
department for assistance. tion.
Your printer manufacturer is the best source
Hardware Lock Not Recognized for solving these problems. Chief Architect
If your hardware lock is not recognized on Technical Support is not able to help Technical
startup, launch the Hardware Lock diagnose and solve these types of printing Support
Troubleshooter. The Troubleshooter can problems.
diagnose and provide solutions to most If you determine that the printer is working
common problems with hardware locks. The but continue having difficulty printing from
1019
Chief Architect, refer to “Printing &

Plotting” on page 947. Chief Architect has Click the Print Screen key on your key-
many new features and enhancements. As a board to capture a picture of the error
result, techniques that were used in prior message. Open a new word processing doc-
ument or e-mail message and choose Edit>
versions may not work in this current Paste to paste a copy of the error message
version. into the document for later reference.
Make sure that you use Print Preview before
printing. Print Preview shows you how the If you encounter the error more than once,
sheet is scaled to your drawing. If the make a note of your steps prior to recieving
drawing is not on the drawing sheet on- the message.
screen, it will not be on the sheet when you Before you report an error, check the Help
print. Database to see if the error is already
For more information on how to set up and documented by typing the error message or
use the enhanced printing functions in Chief part of the error message into the search
Architect X1, see “Printing & Plotting” on form. Most common error messages have a
page 947. known cause and simple resolution.
Make sure that your scaling is correct for the Finally, check to see if there are program
paper size. If the plan is much smaller or updates available. These updates are
much larger than the print preview then you provided free for the current version of Chief
may need to change your print scaling Architect and contain enhancements and
settings. See “Printing to Scale” on page 952. other changes that allow the program to
perform at an optimum level. From within
The on-line Help Database is another source Chief Architect, select Help> Download
of solutions to common printing problems. Program Updates... to visit our web site,
Our Technical Support specialists post new www.chiefarchitect.com, and follow the
articles periodically to help resolve problems instructions.
you may encounter.
Error Reporting
Error Messages
When and error occurs, you may have the
It is important that abnormal errors be option in the message box to send the report
reported to Chief Architect Technical to Chief Archiect.
Support so that we can identify and resolve
any problems. No personal information is sent. When you
click Send, your default Internet browser
The content of an error message is useful in launches and a web page appears on screen
diagnosing its cause. If you get an error This message confirms that the report was
message, read it carefully and write down the sent successfully and may give you further
error number and the exact text of the error instructions on how to proceed.
message.
1020
Contacting Technical Support
Contacting Technical Support

Chief Architect provides free e-mail and tele- available for download. Our engineering
phone support for the current Full version of team periodically creates updates to the
Chief Architect. Free e-mail and telephone program to resolve functionality or pro-
support for the Lite version of Chief Archi- gram issues that were unknown at the
tect is provided for the first 90 days after pur- time of release. These updates are pro-
chase. To extend your telephone support for vided free of charge for the current
the Lite version, contact the Chief Architect released version and can be accessed by
Sales Department. clicking on Help > Download Program
Updates….
Chief Architect's world-class technical
support is available Monday through Friday • Before contacting Technical Support,
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time select Help> About Chief Architect…
and can be reached at (208) 292-3399. and make a note of the serial number and
the exact version of Chief Architect you
There are several things you can do to ensure are using. Technical support is available
a speedy answer to your question when you to the owners of software licenses. When
contact Technical Support. you contact Technical Support, be pre-
• When you first encounter a problem or pared to verify that you are the owner of
error message, copy the exact wording of the software license.
the message or a detailed description of
the problem. This helps us isolate the Priority Support
problem and provide you with a solution
as quickly as possible. Chief Architect X1 Full version users can use
our Priority Support number located under
• When placing a call to Technical Support, Help> About Chief Architect.. This Priority
be at the computer or work station that is Support number bypasses the regular phone
experiencing the problem and have Chief queues to give you the fastest possible
Architect running. If you do not have answers to your questions. This priority
access to the problem computer at the support is not available for users of Chief
time of the call, the technician may be Architect Lite or older versions of Chief
unable to reproduce the issue and/or sug- Architect.
gest a remedy that can be implemented
and verified immediately.
Web Support
• Be prepared to reproduce the problem
when you contact us. If the problem can- Chief Architect has a variety of support
not be reproduced, there is a reduced resources available on our Web site. These Technical
chance that we will be able to resolve the include our Technical Support Help Support
problem on your first phone call. Database; the How do I…? Solution
Finder; downloadable program updates, and
• Before contacting Technical Support, ways to contact our Technical Support
check to see if there are program updates
1021
department. To access these resources, visit: 3. Select File> Export Entire Plan.
www.chiefarchitect.com. 4. Unless asked to do otherwise, select
Our support team is happy to assist you in Export Plan Files Only in the Export
finding the best resource to answer your Entire Plan dialog.
questions, and can resolve most issues in just
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
answer your calls, we ask that you limit
yourself to one question per support call.
E-mail Support
Questions can be e-mailed to the Technical
Support department. To send an e-mail, visit 5. Click OK and browse to the folder you
the Technical Support section of our Web site created on the desktop in Step 1 in the
and use the e-mail submission form. This Browse for Folder dialog.
route ensures that your e-mail is delivered to 6. Click OK and the files are created in
the first available support professional. E- that folder.
mailing an individual specialist directly is
7. Create a zipped folder out of the folder
not always a good idea, since that person
and submit it via the web submission
may not be available to answer your e-mail
form or follow the directions given you
in a timely manner.
by Technical Support.
Submitting Plans Telephone Support
If Chief Architect asks for a plan file to be
Our support team is committed to answering
submitted via e-mail, your plan is used
your questions as quickly as possible. There
internally to answer your question and is not
are times when we get more calls than
released to anyone outside of our office.
expected and you may have to wait a few
In some cases, you may need to submit a minutes before speaking to a technician.
plan to Technical Support for evaluation. If Your call is important to us and is answered
you are asked to submit a plan, follow these as quickly as possible in the order it was
steps. received.
Users of Chief Architect X1 Full version
1. Create a folder on your desktop with
should use the priority support nubmer listed
your name in the folder name.
under Help> About Chief Architect.
2. Open the Chief Architect plan or layout
file in question.
1022
Appendix B
What’s New in
New in X1
Version X1
Introduction
Welcome to Chief Architect X1 and thank you for your purchase. This appendix has been
written to help our upgrading customers make a smooth transition from earlier versions of
Chief Architect to Chief Architect X1. Read this carefully, using the checklist provided.
Following the checklist is a bullet list of features that have been added to X1 from version 10.
Before You Begin
Be sure to read this section before opening any plans created in earlier versions
of Chief Architect.
Before opening any plans created in earlier versions of Chief Architect, it is important to be
aware of some significant changes and the effect they may have on your plans. There are many
new features in Chief Architect Version X1 and many existing features have changed. Some of
these changes affect the way you use Chief Architect so it is very important to review them
carefully. We provide the following checklist of what you should do as an upgrade customer to
1023
help you migrate your plans to Chief Architect Version X1. More information about each of
these steps can be found after the checklist.
Getting Started Check List

1. Check for any available program updates.
2. Migrate your custom and/or third party library files.
3. Migrate your custom graphics files.
4. Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings.
5. Review the rest of the program preferences.
6. Migrate your custom template plan and layout files.
7. Setup your custom toolbar configurations.
8. Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes.
9. Watch the Animated Tour.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information.
1. Check for any available program updates - Program updates often contain many
improvements over the original release version and we highly recommend using the most
current version available. By the time you receive and install your copy of Chief Architect
Version X1, a program update may already be available. By default Chief Architect checks for
program updates each day when you launch the program. For information about changing this,
see “General Panel” on page 190. You can manually check for updates by selecting the menu
option Help> Download Program Updates. You can also check for program updates by going
directly to the Chief Architect Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com and navigating to the
program updates page. Note that you are only able to download an update if you have internet
access.
2. Migrate your custom and/or third party library files - The Chief Architect installer
should find any custom library files from versions 8, 9, or 10 and ask you if you want to copy
them into your Version X1 Libraries folder. If you install Version X1 on a different machine
than your previous version, the installer is not able to find your custom library files. If the
installer does not ask you to copy your old library files or if you decide that you only want to
1024
Before You Begin
bring some of them forward into Version X1, you can always migrate them forward manually.
New in X1
To manually migrate any library files to Version X1, you only need to copy the library files
(these will usually have the .alb file extension) from your previous Libraries folder into your
Version X1 Libraries folder using Windows Explorer. You should also copy over any textures
and images that are referenced by the .alb files. Avoid copying any of the library files installed
with a previous version of Chief Architect. These files are already updated for Version X1.
Library files installed with Chief Architect Version X1 are installed the Core Libraries folder.
You should not install or copy any of your custom libraries into the Core Libraries folder. More
information about transferring third party library files can be found under “Third Party
Libraries” on page 670.
3. Migrate your custom graphics files - If you have custom graphics files, including
textures, images or backdrops, that you were using in a previous version of Chief Architect,
you can copy them manually using Windows Explorer to use them in Version X1. Copy any
custom texture files from your previous Textures folder to your Version X1 Textures folder.
Copy any custom image files from your previous Images folder to your Version X1 Images
folder. Copy any custom backdrop files from your previous Backdrops folder to your Version
X1 Backdrops folder. We recommend that you keep all your custom graphics files in a
subfolder that has a unique name to keep them separate from the graphics files that are installed
with Chief Architect.We provide folders specifically for this purpose, called My Textures, My
Images, and My Backdrops. Texture and image files may not automatically show up in the
Library Browser in Version X1. Material and image objects are stored in the library. There are
several new tools available for creating material and image objects in your library, either one at
a time or as a whole group. For information about converting images, see “Creating Images” on
page 894. For information about converting textures and materials, see “Creating Materials” on
page 704.
4. Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files - We
provide several different preference settings that help you control how version 10.0 and earlier
legacy plans are migrated into Chief Architect Version X1. You may want to do some
experiments with these settings so that you fully understand how they affect your older plans
when they are read into Version X1.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts - Unlike versions 9.5 and ear-
lier, default text and dimension fonts can be set up on an individual plan basis. You
should set your Legacy Text Conversion font and your Legacy Dimension Conversion
fonts in your preferences before opening any old plans. Use the same settings here that
you had in your preferences for your previous version of Chief Architect so that your
text and dimensions will look the same. For more information, see “Font Panel” on
page 187.
a. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information - Page Setup information
can be done on an individual plan basis. Use the Page Setup preference for legacy
plans and layouts so that your plans and layouts are set up the same way they were in
1025
your previous version. Note: You should make sure you leave the scale for layouts at 1
to 1. For more information, see “Text & Page Setup Panel” on page 189.
a. Set your legacy layer conversion settings - Significant changes have been made to
improve the setup and control of layers. Preference settings have been provided to
control how your legacy plan layers are converted when you open a previous version
plan in Version X1. By default, layers should be converted into the new format so that
they more closely match the defaults that we provide in the template plans. You can
modify these settings so that your layers more closely match how they looked in your
previous version. For more information, see “Layers Panel” on page 195.
a. 5.Review the rest of the program preferences - Any changes that you made to pref-
erence settings in your previous version do not migrate into Chief Architect Version
X1. You should review all the program preference settings to make sure any settings
that differ from the system defaults are modified appropriately. If you ever need to
reinstall Chief Architect you should review the preference settings again. For more
information, see “Preferences Dialog” on page 183.
6. Migrate your custom template plan and layout files - By default, Chief Architect
Version X1 installs a template plan that is used for new plans. You may want to continue using
any custom template files that you used in your previous version. To do so, you can manually
migrate these files by copying them from your previous Templates folder to your Version X1
Templates folder using Windows Explorer. You should then open the template files you have
migrated by selecting File> Open Plan and review all the default settings, making changes
where appropriate. You may also want to review all the settings in the default template plan,
profile.plan, to make sure the settings are how you want them. We recommend that you do not
modify the default template plans that come with Chief Architect Version X1. You should
create your own custom template files using the File> Save Plan As Template feature. For
more information, see “Template Files” on page 167.
7. Setup your custom toolbar configurations - It is possible, but not recommended, to
migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Chief Architect Version X1.
Instead, we recommend that you select Tools> Customize Toolbars in Version X1 and setup
your custom toolbars the way you would like them.
8. Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes - Some of the
new features allow you to produce plans much more efficiently so it is to your advantage to
know all of the new features. Some of the existing features have been enhanced significantly
and you need to know how they work to take advantage of them. The following list contains
some of the features that have changed significantly that we feel are the most important for you
to know about. You should review these areas before starting a new project or bringing any
existing projects into Version X1. Included with your purchase of Chief Architect is the
Overview of What’s New in Version X1 video. Watching it will give you a summary of the
changes that have been made since version 10. The What’s New in Version X1 video series is
1026
New and Improved Features by Chapter
also available for purchase. These videos offer greater detail about the new features, tools, and
New in X1
program behavior introduced in version X1.
9. Watch the Animated Tour - The animated tour is included with your purchase of Chief
Architect. Watching it will help give you an overview of Chief Architect’s tools and features.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information - If you have additional questions
about the changes in Version X1, we have up to date information on our web site in the support
area. You can also post questions on the ChiefTalk web forum.

What’s New In Version X1 Training • New drop down toolbars available as
Video: Overview of What's New in Ver- preference. See “Appearance Panel” on
sion X1 page 184.
The following is a list of new and improved • Tools and Edit menus have been reorga-
features in Chief Architect Version X1. nized. See “Edit Menu” on page 29 and
Where possible, cross-references to “Tools Menu” on page 59.
additional information has been provided. • Added link to ChiefTalk from menu. See
“Help Menu” on page 68.
Installation • New look for many of Chief Architect’s
• Installer uses MSI technology instead of toolbar buttons. See “Chief Architect’s
Install Script. Tools” on page 24.
• New installation directory: • Fewer toolbars display by default. Tool-
“Chief Architect Inc> Chief Architect bars organized in order of importance.
X1.” See “Toolbar Configurations” on page
• Overview 22.
• New Startup Options dialog. See • New MEP, Kitchen and Bath, CAD, Plan
“Startup Options” on page 2. Detailing and All Tools toolbar configu-
rations. See “Toolbar Configurations” on
• Automatic check for video card driver page 22.
updates if customer is using a Microsoft
supplied driver or an OpenGL version • Select Objects is the active tool by
prior to 1.2. default when switching between toolbar
configurations.
Menus and • Check for Program Updates is automatic.
Toolbar Buttons
• Improved Toolbar Customization
dialog. See “Toolbar Customization Dia-
log” on page 18.
1027
Editing Objects • Pressing Shift key after clicking to move

an object enables slower movement.
• All snapping behaviors (Snap To: sub-
Pressing Ctrl key after clicking to move
menu) moved to Edit menu. See “Snap
object removes movement restrictions.
Behaviors” on page 82.
See “Moving Objects” on page 123.
• New editing capabilities for 5 button
• Improved magnify move edit behavior.
mouse. See “Using the Mouse” on page
See “Accurate Move” on page 125.
4.
• Corner snapping added to help place
• Edit Behaviors: Move , Concentric objects accurately. See “Aligning
, Resize , and Fillet moved to Objects” on page 126.
Edit menu. See “Edit Behaviors” on page
• Point to Point Move edit behavior
86.
properly enabled for cabinets, text, and
• Edit Settings: Edit Object Parts , most other objects. See “Point to Point
Object Snaps , Angle Snaps ,
• Ability to edit Walls, Stairs, Slabs, Coun-
Show Arc Centers , Grid Snaps , tertops, Polyline Solids, Roofs, Skylights,
Display Reference Grid , and Molding Polylines, Terrain, Terrain Fea-
tures, Roads and Sidewalks in 3D views.
Rotate/Resize About Current Point
moved to the Edit menu. See “Edit • Support for Select All function (Ctrl + A)
Menu” on page 29. in floor plan view and 3D views. See
“Select All” on page 94.
• Pressing ESC during object move aborts
move, leaving object selected. See • Marquee select can be used to add objects
“Using the Edit Handles” on page 96. to the selection set. See “Marquee Select”
on page 93.
• Improved marquee selection by object
type for walls, stairs, roof planes, terrain, • Clicking Copy/Paste accesses a sec-
and plants. See “Marquee Select” on ondary edit toolbar allowing you to per-
page 93. form advanced editing operations, Sticky
• Pressing Esc when placing an object can- Mode , Point to Point Move ,
cels the command. See “Clicking and
Reflect About Object , and Main
Dragging” on page 90.
• Many V10 (and previous) edit behavior Edit Mode , expanding on improved
involving Ctrl key and Shift keys now copy/paste editing. See “Copy/Paste” on
accessed using Alt + right click mouse page 137.
movement. See “Alternate” on page 87. • Double-click of Copy/Paste for multiple
• Right-click move of selected objects copies has been replaced with the Sticky
allows less movement. See “Alternate” Mode secondary edit button. See
on page 87. “Sticky Mode” on page 138.
1028
• Drag copy enabled for text and callouts, and Select Fence . See “Using a
New in X1
and soffits. See “Copy/Paste” on page Fence” on page 94.
137.
• Edit behaviors for wall opening objects:
• Multiple Copy edit button creates an doors, windows, bays, fireplaces. See
array of copies at intervals. See “Multiple “Editing Bay, Box and Bow Windows”
Copy” on page 139. on page 339.
• New Paste Hold Position command • Added Openings/Wall Hatching to

Delete Objects dialog. See “Delete
replaces V10 Hold Position edit button
and V10 and prior concentric copy Objects Dialog” on page 141.
behavior. See “Paste Hold Position” on • Group selecting and opening dissimilar
page 139. objects for specification opens Object
Specification dialog, allowing objects
• New Paste Special command allows to be moved to another layer. See “Speci-
copied items to be pasted in multiple for- fication Dialogs” on page 8.
mats. See “Paste Special” on page 139.
• Left click move keeps objects at allowed
• Copying and pasting a single object angles. Right click move (or Alt + left
leaves the pasted object selected. See click) is restricted to 90 degrees. See
“Paste” on page 137. “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
• Copy/Paste works with Edit Area • Can disable Move Object Using
Dimension dialog with Shift key down.
Tools . See “Using the Edit Toolbar” See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions”
on page 154. on page 804.
• Multiple copy added for many objects,
such as walls, doors, and windows. See • New behavior for Break Line edit
“Multiple Copy” on page 139. button. See “Break Line” on page 130.
• Unconnected lines and walls can now
• Make Parallel/Perpendicular works display four headed move pointer over
with Edit Area Tools . See “Using the center move edit handle. This allows you
Edit Toolbar” on page 154. to move the object any direction, not just
perpendicular to its length. See “Alter-
• Improved Edit Area functionality. nate” on page 87.
See “Edit Area Tools” on page 153.
• New 3D object snaps. See “Object
• Reflect About Line edit button replaced Snaps” on page 82.
by Reflect About Object and • Corner and edge edit handles disappear
enabled for most objects. See “Reflect as you zoom out from an object. See
About Object” on page 135. “Using the Edit Handles” on page 5.
• Select/Make Fence edit button split • Preferences dialog contains only glo-
bal preferences. Many plan-specific
into two edit buttons, Fence Select options appropriately moved elsewhere,
1029
such as the CAD Defaults dialog, and • Subtract enabled when multiple polylines
the Floor Defaults dialog. See or solids are selected. See “Union, Inter-
“Defaults & Preferences” on page 175. section, and Subtract” on page 146.
• Specify how the Marque Select works in • In the Transform/Replicate Object
the Edit panel of the Preferences dia- dialog, objects can be resized using frac-
log. See “Edit Panel” on page 201. tions. See “Transform/Replicate Object
• New Convert Arc/Circle to Polyline
edit button allows CAD circles and arcs • Method of straightening a spline has
to be converted into polylines and vice changed. See “Straighten Spline Seg-
versa. See “Convert Arc/Circle to Poly- ment” on page 118.
line” on page 132. • Circle editing has changed. See “Editing
• The polyline rotate edit handle is now Circles, Ovals and Ellipses” on page 118.
positioned relative to the selected edge, • Improved Lock Arc Center behavior.
allowing for more flexible editing behav- See “Using Lock Center” on page 102.
ior. • New Alternate Mode and Move Mode
• Resize edit handles for polylines move buttons provide access to concentric, cor-
when zooming in to maintain availability ner, fillet behavior edit functions. See
on screen. See “Using the Edit Handles” “Edit Behaviors” on page 86.
on page 96. • Added keyboard hints for edit behavior
• Edit Polyline Parts toggle button selectors. See “Edit Behaviors” on page
86.
renamed Edit Object Parts . Affects
editing of polylines, stair sections, walls, • Edit handle locations are now consistent
and other polyline based objects. See from object to object. See “Using the Edit
“Edit Object Parts” on page 93. Handles” on page 5.
• Multiple selected CAD objects now fol- • New selection behavior for wall hatch-
low Grid snapping rules. See “Grid ing. See “Hatch Wall” on page 236.
Snaps” on page 85. • Improved selectability of piers and pads.
• CAD Mode has been replaced with CAD See “Editing Piers and Pads” on page
toolbar configuration. Any CAD object 380.
can be drawn at anytime. See “Toolbar
• The two Make Block edit buttons
Configurations” on page 6.
(one for CAD objects, the other for archi-
• Select CAD Object button removed. tectural objects) have been replaced with
Select Objects is the default selec- Make CAD Block , Make Architec-
tion tool in all modes. See “Select
Objects” on page 92. tural Block , and Make Mulled Unit
. See “Architectural and CAD
Blocks” on page 121 and “Manually
Mulled Units” on page 332.
1030
• New behavior when converting CAD File Management
New in X1
lines. When you have finished converting
• Added Save Plan as Template. See
a CAD line or polyline, it remains
selected so you can open specification
dialog to edit it. The polyline object spec- • Can copy files from Windows Explorer
ification dialogs no longer open immedi- and paste them directly into Chief, as
ately following a polyline conversion. well as drag and drop.
See “Convert Polyline Dialog” on page • Recent File List shows up in the File
150. menu when a blank plan is opened.
• Name of Display Arc Centers changed • Items in the Project Browser now appear
to Show Arc Centers and Ends . See in alphabetical order. See “Project
“Show Arc Centers” on page 102. Browser” on page 165.
• Open correct directory when browsing
• Angle Snaps changed from a radio for plan or layout templates. See “Tem-
button to a checkbox. See “Angle Snaps” plate Files” on page 167.
on page 84.
• Plan Thumbnails can be saved regardless
• Move to Front of Group edit button of thumbnail preference setting. See
is available for group selected CAD “Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on page 161.
objects. See “Move to Front of Group” • Error classes and error log file imple-
on page 122. mented.
• New CAD Defaults button. See • When you save a version 10 plan in X1,
“CAD Defaults” on page 842. the program creates an archive with
“_v10” added to the name.
• Functionality of Center Object edit
button expanded to all objects. See “Cen- Defaults &
ter Object” on page 127. Preferences
• Objects can be snapped to other objects • Preferences dialog contains only glo-
on the reference floor. See “Reference bal preferences. Many plan-specific
Floor” on page 368. options appropriately moved elsewhere,
• New Enter Coordinates dialog allows such as the CAD Defaults dialog, and
you to enter absolute X and Y coordi- the Floor Defaults dialog. See “Prefer-
nates while editing an object. See “Enter- ences Dialog” on page 183, “CAD
ing Coordinates” on page 91. Defaults Dialog” on page 878, and “Floor
• Accurate Move slows down mouse
movement, not object movement. See • New Edit pane in Preferences dialog
“Accurate Move” on page 125. contains options for edit behaviors and
snap properties. See “Edit Panel” on page
201.
1031
• Improved ability to identify when multi- • Improved control of contextual menu

ple objects are selected by adding Selec- when editing objects using edit handles.
tion Fill Color option to Preferences • Some options on the Render panel if the
dialog. See “Colors Panel” on page 186. Preferences dialog are renamed. H/W
• Stair Sections Move Independently Backdrop is now Surface Backdrop;
moved from the stairs specification to the Use Muiltpass is changed to Use Trans-
Architectural pane of Preferences dia- parency.
log. See “Architectural Panel” on page
198. Layers
• New preference setting allows control of • New Layer Set Defaults dialog cen-
crosshairs in 3D views. Crosshairs on by tralizes layer set control and usage in
default. See “Edit Panel” on page 201. overviews, layouts, aerial views, plot
• New Edit Handle Tolerance setting plan, etc. See “Layer Set Defaults Dia-
improves the ability to select edit handles log” on page 225.
without changing the sizes. See “Edit • New Layer Set Management dialog
Panel” on page 201. improves control of layer sets. See
• Preferences dialog opens to last pane “Layer Set Management” on page 217.
accessed. • Display of objects in 3D views controlled
• Modify Name In All Layer Sets added by layer sets. View tools (such as framing
to Preferences. See “Layers Panel” on overviews) are no longer allowed to
page 195. affect the display of layers. See “Layer
Sets” on page 216.
• Status bar messages use current num
style setting for angles. • New Active Layer Set Control drop-
down box can be added to your toolbar
• All status bar preference settings grouped
for convenient access to layer display
together now on Appearance pane of
management. See “Active Layer Set
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance
Control” on page 218.
• 2D, 3D columns merged in the Layer
• Rotate Jump increment working for
Display Options dialog. Reference
Rotate About Object Center edit
column removed and replaced with new
behavior. See “Behaviors Panel” on page
layer set functionality. Color and Size
202.
columns now affect 3D views. See
• New intermediate defaults dialogs for “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
doors, schedules, cabinets, and walls. See 218.
“Default Settings” on page 176.
• Modify All Layer Sets checkbox in
• Show screen redraw time moved to Sta- Layer Display Options dialog is no
tus bar group. New slot in status bar. See longer preserved between sessions. See
“Appearance Panel” on page 184. “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
218.
1032
• Current cad layer is specified in the • Improved wall fill style control. See
New in X1
Layer Display Options dialog using a “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page
drop down list. See “Layer Display 251.
Options Dialog” on page 218. • Curved walls drawn using arc creation
• Placing an item on a locked or invisible modes. See “Drawing Curved Walls” on
layer prompts message to turn on the page 238.
layer. See “Displaying Objects” on page
221. • Change Line/Arc and Center
• Button added to Layer Display Option Object edit buttons enabled for
dialog gives direct access to line styles in walls. Also, select a wall and reverse the
the library. wall layers using the new Reverse Lay-
ers edit button. See “Using the Edit
Walls, Railings, Buttons” on page 244.
& Fencing • Paste Hold Position improved for walls.
• Walls can be drawn, selected, edited, and See “Using the Edit Buttons” on page
deleted in 3D views. See “Editing Walls” 244.
on page 242.
• Make Parallel / Perpendicular edit
• Improved ability to draw polygon rooms button now available for curved walls.
using the Regular Polygon Shaped See “Using the Edit Buttons” on page
Room tool. See “Polygon Shaped 244.
Room” on page 230. • New continuous wall drawing mode in
• New options in Wall Specification floor plan view can be accessed by right-
dialog Stop at Ceiling, Balloon Thru clicking the mouse or pressing the Alt
Ceiling and No Balloon Framing allow key. Available in Full version only. See
you to specify wall framing. See “Wall “Drawing Walls” on page 238.
Specification Dialog” on page 259. • New wall edit handles. Walls can be
• Added support for Double walls. See moved in any direction. Rotate edit han-
“General Tab” on page 260. dle allow walls to be rotated. Wall offset
edit handles removed, offset now auto-
• New Overhang setting for non-default
matically calculated. See “Using Edit
walls in Wall Specification dialog.
Handles” on page 242.
See “Wall Specification Dialog” on page
259. • Walls can be group selected with other
walls and other objects. See “Selecting
• Wall defaults have been improved and
reorganized. See “Wall/Railing/Fencing
Defaults” on page 274. • Deck Tools pulled out of Wall Tools
family. Includes Straight Deck Railing
• New General Wall Defaults button
and accelerator key. See “Wall/Railing/ , and Curved Deck Railing child
Fencing Defaults” on page 274.
1033
buttons. See “The Deck Tools” on page • Moved Retaining Wall tools from Build>
231. Walls menu to Terrain menu. See “Ter-
rain” on page 1039.
• Fencing Tools pulled out of Wall
Tools family. Includes Straight Fencing • Removed Alter Default Wall child but-
ton from wall tools family. Same func-
, and Curved Fencing child but- tionality available through Wall
tons. See “The Fencing Tools” on page Specification dialog as it always has
231. been.
• Break Wall and Hatch Wall
Rooms
removed from Straight Wall Tools
• Rooms can be selected in 3D views, dis-
and Curved Wall Tools families. See play fill color when selected. See “Select-
“Break Wall” on page 230 and “Hatch ing Rooms” on page 283.
Wall” on page 230.
• Deck planking orientation and overhang
• Added new wall types to profile plan: is controlled on the Deck tab of the
CBS (Concrete, Block, Stucco) and ICF Room Specification dialog. Deck
(Insulated Concrete Form). See “Wall framing will relocate appropriately.
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 251. Foundation floor must be present. See
• Wall layer widths can be specified in dec- “Decks” on page 288.
imal or fractional units. See “Wall Type
• Regular Polygon Shaped Deck tool
allows you to create decks with or with-
• New wall hatch selection behavior. See out railings. See “Decks” on page 288.
“Hatch Wall” on page 230.
• Wording changes regarding Pony Walls • New Straight Deck Edge and
in dialogs. See “Pony Wall Defaults” on Curved Deck Edge tools for creating
page 229. decks without railings. See “Decks” on
• Walls can be dimensioned from a center page 288.
point. See “Moving Walls Using Dimen- • Object selection color can be customized.
sions” on page 244. See “Colors Panel” on page 186.
• Walls display angle in status bar when • Floor and ceiling heights can be edited in
rotated using rotate edit handle. See 3D views. See “Selecting Rooms” on
“Editing Walls” on page 242. page 283.
• Walls do not produce 3D for air gap • Room Labels can be group selected and
material. edited. Initial room label size moved to
• Show Lower Pony Wall moved to Pony Room Label Defaults. See “Room
Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall Label Defaults” on page 838.
1034
• Exterior rooms display a bounding box “Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog”
New in X1
when selected. See “Selecting Rooms” on page 359.
on page 283. • Changed selection method for Bay/Box/
• Replaced “D” dynamic default with Bow Windows. See “Editing Bay, Box
Default checkbox. See “Room Specifica- and Bow Windows” on page 339.
tion Dialog” on page 296.
Multiple Floors
Doors and • Reference Display column removed from
Windows Layer Display Options dialog and
• Windows and Doors edit the same in both replaced with a Reference Layer Set.
2D and 3D views. See “Editing Doors” This allows for greater control of refer-
on page 309 and “Editing Windows” on ence display and for reference lines to be
page 336. displayed in print. See “Reference Dis-
play” on page 369.
• Multiple copy works for windows.
• Added a Define button to the Change
• Bay/Box/Bow Windows can be resized
Floor/Reference dialog to allow easy
using Transform/Replicate edit but- modification of Reference Layer set. See
ton. See “Transform/Replicate Object “Change Floor” on page 368.
• Can add/remove and navigate between
• New Double Wall options on Frame and floors in 3D views. See “Adding Floors”
Trim tab of Door Specification dialog on page 366.
and Window Specification dialog.
See “Door Specification Dialog” on page Foundations
315 and “Window Specification Dialog”
on page 343. • Added ability to edit wall footing heights
in 3D. See “Editing Foundations” on
• Soldier Course available for windows in page 376.
the Millwork library.
• Slab Thickness can be edited in 3D
• Can no longer edit window Height using views. See “Editing Foundations” on
middle edit handle in plan view. See page 376.
“Editing Windows” on page 336.
• Changed name of mudsill to “sill plate.”
• Lost ability to change “swing side” using See “Foundation Tab” on page 373.
edit handles for sliding doors. Change
• Text added to the Foundation
Opening/Hinge Side edit button Defaults dialog to alert customers that
replaces functionality. See “Changing the mudsill is included with Minimum
Door Swings” on page 312. Wall Height value. See “Foundation Tab”
• Bay Window Spec dialog renamed on page 373.
Bay/Box Window Spec dialog. See
1035
• New confirmation dialog when deleting • When roofs are group selected with other
foundation. See “Deleting Foundations” items, the Move edit handle is enabled.
on page 377. See “Editing Roof Planes” on page 402.
• Dormer boxes reside on their own layer,
Roofs not default CAD layer.
• Improved feedback during manual roof • Allow Low Roof Planes defaults to
plane creation. See “Drawing Roof being checked. See “Build Tab” on page
Planes” on page 393. 417.
• Can set Eave Fascia and Gable Fascia • Removed 20 Gable Line limit.
separately for each roof plane. See
• Build Roof dialog uses angle style set-
“Options Tab” on page 426.
ting for curved roof angle. See “Build
• Added curved eaves for dormers. See Roof Dialog” on page 416.
“Dormer Specification Dialog” on page
429. Stairs
• Ability to join roof planes and make roof
planes coplanar in 3D. See “Editing Roof • New Click Stairs child button. See
Planes” on page 402. “Click Stairs” on page 436.
• Improved edit handles for curved roof • The Shift key is no longer used to draw
planes in floor plan view and 3D views. down stairs. The same functionality has
See “Editing Curved Roof Planes” on been replaced with pressing the Alt key
page 405. and right clicking when drawing. See
“Drawing Stairs” on page 437.
• Auto Rebuild Roofs works for Roof
Baselines. See “Roof Baseline Polylines” • Lock Center edit button now avail-
on page 391. able for curved stairs. See “Using Lock
• New settings in Build Roof dialog, Center” on page 102.
Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls • The Ctrl key is no longer used to bend
and Same Height Eaves. See “Build straight stairs. The same functionality has
Tab” on page 417. been replaced with pressing the Alt key
• Shed dormers placed using the Auto Dor- and right clicking when using the end edit
mer tools use their own default roof pitch handle. See “Curved Stairs” on page 436.
of 3 in 12. See “Dormer Defaults” on • Added new options Extend Stringer
page 432. Top, Nosing at Top of Landing, and
• New Plan Check items for dormers. Riser Surface at Top Landing to
Staircase Specification dialog.
• Automatic Dormers now easier to place.
Reorganized existing options. Extend
• Options tab added to the Roof Plane Stringer Top is on by default. See “Stair-
Specification dialog. See “Roof Plane case Specification Dialog” on page 458.
1036
• Stair Sections Move Independently Framing
New in X1
added to Architectural pane of
• Build Framing dialog is available in
Preferences dialog. (See “Defaults &
3D views. See “Build Framing Dialog”
Preferences” on page 1031)
on page 475.
• New wrapped stairs. See “Wrapped
• Wall framing can be edited in 2D, 3D,
Stairs” on page 452.
and cross section views. See “Editing
• Stairs can be drawn, selected, and edited Framing” on page 494.
in 3D views. See “Editing Stairs” on page
• Posts and piers can be selected and edited
441.
without having the post or pier tool
• Objects now snap to reference floor. See active.
“Editing Stairs” on page 441.
• Build Framing dialog prompts you to
• Make Arc Tangent edit button now turn on appropriate framing layers if they
enabled for stairs. “Editing Stairs” on are turned off when you build framing.
page 441. See “Build Framing Dialog” on page
475.
• Chamfer and Fillet available for • Previous preference setting Fill New
stair landings. “Stair Landings” on page Framing Members has been moved to
443. new CAD Defaults dialog. See “CAD
• Settings on the Line Style tab can be set Defaults Dialog” on page 878.
for individual stair sections. See “Dis-
playing Stairs” on page 440. Trusses
• Added Fill Style tab to Staircase • Truss labels can no longer be group
Specification dialog. See “Staircase selected. See “Truss Labels” on page 506.
• Truss labels have their own layer. See
• Stair angle displays using the settings in “Truss Labels” on page 506.
the NumStyle dialog. See “Staircase
Specification Dialog” on page 458. Electrical
• Improved creation of Starter Treads • Can group select/marquee select and
move electrical objects. See “Editing
and Flared/Curved Stairs . See
Electrical Objects” on page 527.
“Flared Stairs and Curved Treads” on
page 448 and “Starter Treads” on page • New edit handles for electrical connec-
451. tions. See “Editing Electrical Objects” on
page 527.
• Stair tread lines display line weight cor-
rectly in floor plan view. See “Displaying • The process for removing an electrical
Stairs” on page 440. object from a circuit has changed. See
“Editing Electrical Objects” on page 527.
1037
• Electrical objects now have snap points. • Cabinet Toe Kick and Flat Sides options
See “Editing Electrical Objects” on page can be set independent of each other. See
527. “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page
• Improved electrical connections. Dedi- 565.
cated layer, new behavior, new edit han- • New Flat Back option for cabinets
dles. See “Editing Electrical Objects” on improves control of overhang on cabinet
page 527. backs. See “Cabinet Specification Dia-
• Edit box added to the Auto Intensity log” on page 565.
slider in the Electrical Service • Improved control of backsplash on cabi-
Specification dialog. See “Electrical nets. See “Cabinet Specification Dialog”
Service Specification Dialog” on page on page 565.
529. • Once placed in a plan, library cabinets
can be resized in all views using edit han-
Trim & Moldings dles. See “Editing Cabinets” on page 556.
• Added ability to place molding profiles in • Cabinet tops can be selected in 3D for
plan to edit. See “Place Molding Profile” editing. See “Editing Cabinets” on page
on page 540. 556.
• Improved wall corner and quoin editing. • Improved cabinet editing behaviors. See
See “Quoins” on page 537. “Editing Cabinets” on page 556.
• You can build custom symbol moldings. • Cabinets display temporary dimensions
See “Symbol Moldings” on page 540. when selected in floor plan view. The
temporary dimensions locate the nearest
Cabinets inside wall, cabinet or opening within 48
• New Cabinet Shelf Specification inches of the cabinet's centerline. See
dialog gives you automatic or manual “Editing Cabinets” on page 556.
ability to specify the number, depth, • Corner Width and Rounded options
thickness, and spacing of cabinet shelves. grouped together on General tab of
See “Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog” Cabinet Specification dialog. See
on page 577. “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page
• New hybrid Cabinet/Symbol objects. Can 565.
be opened for specification in the • Appliance Fill removed for Soffits,
Cabinet Symbol Specification dia- Shelves, Partitions. See “Shelf/Partition
logs. See “Create Symbol Wizard” on Specification Dialog” on page 578.
page 925. • Removed limitation of 7 inches for the
• Can adjust height placement of cabinet display of library doors. Set section
drawer hardware. See “Cabinet Specifi- height minimum for every section to 1/16
cation Dialog” on page 565. of an inch. See “Cabinet Specification
1038
• Reorganize Cabinet Specification Roads & Sidewalks
New in X1
dialogs. See “Cabinet Specification Dia-
• Road edit handles in new locations. See
log” on page 565.
“Editing Road Objects” on page 634.
Terrain Other Objects
• Terrain perimeter and terrain features can
be selected and edited in 3D views. See • New Primitive Tools parent button.
“Editing Terrain Objects” on page 597. Child buttons 3D Box , 3D Sphere
• Plant Chooser interface improved. See , 3D Cylinder , 3D Cone , and
“Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 608.
Polyline Solid (introduced in Version
• New Feature Spline child button 10) allow you to create 3D CAD objects
added to Terrain Feature Tools . See that can be selected, edited in 3D, and
“Terrain Feature Tools” on page 590. opened for specification. See “Primitive
• Terrain features can be drawn in 3D. See
“Terrain Feature Tools” on page 590. • Improved fireplace editing. Fireplaces
can be moved vertically along a wall and
• Added new Garden Bed Tools , deeper into a wall. See “Fireplaces” on
page 656.
Water Feature Tools , Stepping
Stone , and Terrain Wall & Curb Architectural Blocks
Tools . See “Terrain” on page 583. • You can resize individual items in archi-
tectural blocks without exploding the
• Feature Polyline now the first child
block first.
button in the Terrain Feature Tools . • Dimensions work inside architectural
See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 590. blocks.
• Feature Polyline renamed to Rect-
Libraries
angular Feature . Feature Closed
• CAD Details are organized in alphabeti-
Spline renamed to Spline Feature cal order. See “Project Browser” on page
. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 165.
590. • Style Attributes added to Library
• Terrain features now have thickness. Search dialog. This includes “Commer-
• Moved Retaining Wall tools from Build> cial” and “Asian” styles. See “Library
Walls menu to Terrain menu. See “Ter- Search Dialog” on page 692.
rain Wall and Curb Tools” on page 593. • Line styles are stored in the plan, not
Material.dat. Line Styles can now be
imported. Command available through
1039
the File> Import submenu. See “Line Mode, Material Painter Plan Mode. See
Styles” on page 688. “Material Painter” on page 708.
• Select a line style in the Library Browser • New stand-alone color chooser. See
to draw a straight line using that line “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 722.
style. • Global texture mapping replaced with
• Certain aspects of manufacturer specific improved texture mapping by object for
library symbols can be locked. panels, wall framing, moldings, win-
• Toilet pointer icon replaced with sink dows, and more.
icon when object from Interior Fixture • Can specify line weight for 2D patterns
category is selected for placement. on the Fill Style tab of various object
• Library Browser automatically scrolls specification dialogs. Can specify fill pat-
down when cursor reaches bottom. See tern line weight for 3D views in the
“The Library Browser” on page 670. Define Material dialog. See “Define
Material Dialog” on page 712.
• Text “Search complete with no matches”
displays when library search finds noth- • Select Materials dialog renamed to
ing. See “Library Search Dialog” on page Plan Materials. See “Plan Materials”
692. on page 711.
• Plan Materials dialog contains new In
New Library Content
Use column, replacing text **In Use**.
• Kitchen and Bath product content has See “Plan Materials” on page 711.
been integrated into Version X1.
• Added two sliders to the Define
• The Roof Designer’s product content has Material dialog. See “Define Material
been integrated into Version X1. Dialog” on page 712.
• The CAD Designer’s product content has
been integrated into Version X1. Zoom & View Tools
• The entire library has been updated with
• Pan Window tool accessible using
content to include the latest styles, colors,
the mouse button. Typical hand icon now
and objects.
displays when in use. Marquee select
• Manufacturer library content is now does not require Shift key to be
downloadable from the Chief Architect depressed. See “Panning the Display” on
web site, rather than being on disk. page 725.
• Reorganized Appliances and Fixtures • Aerial View uses the Aerial View Set
Libraries. layer set. See “Aerial View” on page 729.
• Materials
• Material Painter child buttons: Material Vector and Render Views
Painter Component Mode, Material • Enhanced vector views are available.
Painter Object Mode, Material Painter These enhanced views deliver better
Room Mode, Material Painter Floor quality but are slower. Select this option
1040
on the Appearance Panel of the tionality. See “Tilt Camera Tools” on
New in X1
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance page 739.
Panel” on page 184. • New mouse move camera hot keys offer
• Camera icons in floor plan view now dis- convenient access to existing functional-
play a rotate edit handle when selected. ity. See “Keyboard Camera Movements”
See “Editing a Camera in Floor Plan on page 740.
• Mouse Orbit Camera on by default
• Field of View setting also applies to Vec- for Vector views. See “Orbit Camera
tor Views. See “Field of View” on page Tools” on page 739.
740.
• Light Sources can be group selected. See
• 3D line weights for materials (in non- “Light Sources” on page 772.
scaled Vector Views) can be specified in
the Define Material dialog. See • Sliders added to 3D Settings dialog.
“Define Material Dialog” on page 712. See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 757.
• The 3D line weights for Surface Edge • New Version 10 Compatible Mapping
Lines can be controlled by object and by checkbox in 3D Settings dialog allows
layer in the 3D Settings dialog. This V10 users to override new object texture
improves control of Surface Edge Lines mapping behavior for legacy plans. See
and wall detail line weights in 3D views. “3D Settings Dialog” on page 757.
See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 757. • Solid fill maps to black in Color Off
• Line Styles for surface Edge Lines can be mode. See “Color On/Off” on page 743.
also be specified. See “3D Settings Dia- • Added progress dialog during 3D view
log” on page 757. generation.
• Door opening indicators display in Vector
• Added Save Camera button to 3D
Views. See “Displaying Vector Views”
menu. See “Saving 3D Views” on page
on page 742.
747.
• Selecting Rebuild 3D rebuilds the • Interface improved in the Advanced sec-
entire 3D model. See “Rebuild 3D” on tion of the Render tab of the Define
page 747. Materials dialog. See “Define Material
• All Camera movement tools available for Dialog” on page 712.
Render views. See “Moving a Camera in • Name of Render menu item changed to
3D Views” on page 737.
Render Current Vector View .
• Final View With Shadows tool • Implemented correct functionality for
available for render views. See “Preview checkbox Unless Opening in the
vs. Final Render View” on page 766. Camera Defaults dialog. See “Camera
• New Mouse-Tilt Camera button
offers convenient access to existing func-
1041
• Cosmetic changes to Sun Angle • Dimension lines can be edited like lines
Specification dialog. See “Sun Angle to ease dimensioning to plot plan corners.
Specification Dialog” on page 778. • Dimensions work inside architectural
• Improved functionality of CAD tools in blocks.
Cross Section/Elevation views. See
“Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views” Text, Callouts
on page 750. and Markers
• Many new text macros, including
Raytracing designer and customer information. See
• Raytracing is significantly faster. “Text Macros” on page 826.
• Added ability to lock aspect ratio of ray- • New leader line tool. See “Leader Line”
traced image. See “Raytrace Options Dia- on page 819.
log” on page 788. • Arrows now attach to almost anything.
• Raytrace settings preserved between ses- See “Text Arrows” on page 819.
sions. See “Raytrace Options Dialog” on • Arrows are deleted when the object they
page 788. are attached to is deleted.
• Name of Raytrace menu item changed to • Callout editing improved. See “Editing
Raytrace Current Render View . Callouts” on page 822.
• Point to Point Move enabled for sin-

Dimensions gle and group selected callouts. See
• Dimensions can be selected and rotated. “Editing Callouts” on page 822.
See “Editing Dimension Lines” on page • New edit handle for callouts makes creat-
801. ing arrows easier. See “Editing Callouts”
• Dimension lines snap to objects. See on page 822.
“Editing Dimension Lines” on page 801. • Callouts use same arrows as text. See
• Point Markers added when a dimension “Callouts” on page 821.
line becomes separated from the object it • Callouts can be copied and pasted. See
marks or is copied. “Editing Callouts” on page 822.
• Improved behavior for temporary dimen- • Text centers correctly on callout in fram-
sions. See “Display Temporary Dimen- ing and wall details.
sions” on page 800.
• Improved precision when placing text
• Dimension Defaults dialog cleaned objects.
up. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on
page 809. • CAD Objects
• More control of temporary dimensions • New ellipse tool draw a true ellipse. See
with openings. See “Display Temporary “Ellipses” on page 861.
1042
• New continuous CAD line drawing • Point Markers have label move handle
New in X1
mode, similar to continuous wall drawing and rotate edit handle. See “Point Tools”
mode. See “Line Tools” on page 846. on page 843.
• Plan Footprints can be created directly • Improved North Pointers. North pointer
from floor plan view, and their display can be resized in Transform/
can be controlled more easily. New Plan Replicate dialog. Multiple north point-
Footprint Specification dialog. See ers allowed in a plan. North pointers can
“Plot Plans and Plan Footprints” on page be copied and pasted. See “North
875. Pointer” on page 849.
• Plan Footprints can now be created in a • Show line length and angle works with
new CAD Detail window directly from multiple selected items.
plan view. See “Plot Plans and Plan Foot- • Library button added to Line Style tab for
prints” on page 875. CAD objects for accessing line styles
• Plan Footprints can now be given a fill saved to the library. See “Line Style Tab”
pattern. See “Plot Plans and Plan Foot- on page 851.
prints” on page 875. • “X” accelerator key for creating CAD
• CAD Polyline joints can now snap to circles changed to “K.”
Allowed Angles. See “Polylines” on page • CAD object specification dialogs worded
863. consistently. See “CAD Circle/Oval/
• Added Retain Aspect Ratio option for Ellipse Specification Dialog” on page
CAD blocks. See “CAD Block Specifica- 861.
tion Dialog” on page 872. • List of CAD details now appears alpha-
• Arc creation tools Free Form Arc , betically, not in order of creation. See
“CAD Detail Management Dialog” on
Start/End/On Arc , Center/Radius/ page 874.
End Arc , Start/Tangent/End Arc • Removed CAD> Special menu and menu
, and Arc About Center items.
removed from Arc tools and into Edit> • Menu item and toolbar button CAD
Arc Creation Modes menu. Arc creation Detail renamed to CAD Detail Man-
modes now apply to curved walls as well.
See “Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation agement . See “CAD Detail Manage-
Modes” on page 855. ment Dialog” on page 874.
• New ellipse CAD object. See “Circle • Input Arc dialog allows values to be
Tools” on page 860. entered in feet, not just inches. See “Input
Arc” on page 857.
• Splines display new edit handles when
edited. See “Splines” on page 868.
1043
Advanced • Image family of functions (Create

Design & Editing Image , Create Billboard Image ,
• House Wizard boxes update better when and Create Image Library ) moved
moving. See “House Wizard” on page from Tools menu to Build menu.
884.
• Interface improved in the Image
Specification dialog. See “Image
Pictures, Specification Dialog” on page 897.
Images, & Movies
• Export Windows Metafile (WMF)
• Plant Specification and Image renamed to Export Windows Metafile
Specification dialogs now contain X
(EMF) . See “Metafiles” on page 901.
and Y coordinates for accurate place-
ment. See “Image Specification Dialog” • Can now dimension to plants and images.
on page 897. This option is selected on the Locate
Objects tab of the dimension defaults.
• New built-in screen capture utility. See
“To create a screen capture” on page 900.
Import/Export
• New Import Metafile feature to • Support for DXF/DWG ellipse import.
complement existing Export Metafile See “Compatibility” on page 908.
. Removed support for WMF file • Support for DXF/DWG spline import.
extensions. See “Metafiles” on page 901. See “Compatibility” on page 908.
• New feature Copy Region As Picture • Added support for 3DS file types. See
allows you to define an area on “Importing 3D DWG, DXF, 3DS, and
screen, copy it to clipboard, and paste as OBJ Files” on page 916.
EMF or BMP in emails or other applica- • Added support for 3DS export. See
tions. See “Copy Region as Picture” on “Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format”
page 904. on page 922.
• New Metafile Specification dialog
displays preview and allows you to reset Create Symbol
original aspect ratio and determine reso- Wizard
lution. See “Metafile Specification Dia-
• Added support for 3DS file types. See
log” on page 903.
“Importing 3D Data” on page 926.
• Images can be copied and pasted directly
• Added ability to import 3D Solids
into Chief Architect.
from.dwg files. See “Importing 3D Data”
• Removed Convert WLK to AVI. on page 926.
• Picture File Box Specification dia- • Removed 32K surface limit on symbols.
log now displays image size in pixels.
• Added cabinet symbol snap points.
See “Picture File Box Specification Dia-
log” on page 893.
1044
Printing & • New Show Layout option in Send to
New in X1
Plotting Layout dialog switches you to the layout
file when a view is sent to layout. See
• Reference Floor can be displayed for “Send To Layout Dialog” on page 976.
printing. See “Display Options and Print-
ing” on page 950. • Use Layout Line Scaling is now selected
by default. See “Sending Views to Lay-
• Default Line Weight Scale changed to 1 = out” on page 975.
1/100 mm. Most default layer line
weights set at 18, with legacy plans using • Layout files can only be linked to .plan
initial line weights of 4. See “Page Setup files.
Dialog” on page 963. • Most values in Send to Layout dialog
are maintained between sessions. See
Layout “Sending Views to Layout” on page 975.
• Layer sets for layout views are stored
with the plan’s layer sets. See “Display- Schedules
ing Layout Views” on page 981. • Labels now have a move edit handle.
• Rendered and Raytraced images can now • Objects in schedules retain their number-
be sent directly to layout. See “Static ing when the plan changes. Added
Views” on page 979. renumber button. See “Using the Edit
• Edit Layout Lines now supports CAD Buttons” on page 993.
snaps rotate and middle line handle for • Added Label column to schedules, dis-
moving. See “Editing Layout Lines” on playing any custom labels assigned to
page 983. objects. See “Schedule Specification Dia-
• The 3D line weights for Surface Edge log” on page 995.
Lines can be controlled by object and by
layer in the 3D Settings dialog. This Materials Lists
improves control of Surface Edge Lines
• Terrain Features are included in the
and wall detail line weights in 3D views.
materials list. See “Materials Lists” on
See “Vector and Render Views” on page
page 1003.
1040.
• Library> Components menu item dis-
• Views can be sent to layout if a layout file
abled when no object is selected. See
is not currently open. See “Sending
Views to Layout” on page 975.
• Ability to restrict angles when editing a
view in layout. See “Editing Layout
Lines” on page 983.
• Improved control of line weights in views
sent to Layout. See “Sending Views to
Layout” on page 975.
1045
1046
Index
Numerics 3DS Files
Index
Export ............................................... 922
Import ............................................... 916
2D Block ............................................. 932
3D
Backdrop ........................................... 760
Box ................................................... 642 A
Box Specification Dialog ..................... 645
Data, Import ....................................... 926 Absolute Location
Generation, increase speed ................ 745 Move point ........................................ 845
Home Architect files ........................... 158 New line end ............................. 599 , 857
Menu .................................................. 48 New point ......................................... 844
Molding Polyline ................................. 542 Accelerator Keys ................................ 24
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog .. 546 Activate Camera ............................... 748
Origin ................................................ 930
Active Layer Set Control ................. 218
Remove 3D ........................................ 748
Remove 3D views .............................. 748 Adding
Settings Dialog .................................. 757 to the Library ..................................... 674
Surface, Delete .................................. 747 Extension Lines ................................. 802
Tab ................................................... 945 Floor Between Existing Floors ............ 367
Terrain ...................................... 583 , 629 Floors ............................................... 366
Tools ................................................. 735 Gable Over a Door ............................ 314
Images to the Library ......................... 897
3D Box Specification Dialog ............ 645
Layout Lines ..................................... 983
3D Cross Section Slider ................... 785 LIbrary .............................................. 674
3D Final View ..................................... 766 Molding Profile .................................. 539
3D Framing View ............................... 742 New Layout Lines .............................. 983
New Library ...................................... 674
3D Molding Polyline Specification
New Symbol ...................................... 675
Dialog .............................................. 546
Road Objects to the Library ............... 635
3D Roof Designer .............................. 402 Symbol ............................................. 675
3D View to the Library ..................................... 676
Generation, Speed up ........................ 745 Toolbar Buttons ................................... 18
Line Weights ...................................... 955 Adjust
3D Views ............................................. 697 Image Properties ............................... 790
Display .............................................. 742 Lights ............................................... 778
Display Terrain In ............................... 596 Material Definition ............................. 711
Panels ............................................... 759 Overviews ......................................... 743
Save ................................................. 747 View Angle ........................................ 743
3D Wall Designer ............................... 238 Wall Angle ........................................ 198
1057
Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 778 with Arrow ......................................... 858

Advanced Arch Tab............................................. 357
Deck Framing .................................... 289 Architectural...................................... 198
Layer Mapping .................................. 911
Architectural Block Specification
Render Tab ....................................... 720
Dialog .............................................. 667
Splines ............................................. 117
Architectural Blocks......................... 664
Aerial View ........................................ 729
Copy ................................................. 665
Aerial View Layer Set ....................... 731 Delete ............................................... 665
Alcove Roofs ..................................... 412 Displaying ......................................... 665
Align Edit ................................................... 666
Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 129 Explode ............................................. 666
Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 247 Library .............................................. 681
Roof Edges ....................................... 403 Move ................................................. 665
Stem Walls and Footings ................... 377 Selecting ........................................... 665
Text .................................................. 825 Architectural Blocks Library ........... 665
Walls ................................................ 246 Architectural Preferences................ 198
Walls between floors ......................... 261
Archive Files ..................................... 162
All Views Toolbars ............................. 18 Manage Auto Archives ....................... 163
Allowed Arcs .................................................... 856
Angles ................................................ 72 About center ...................................... 856
Angles Dialog .................................... 155 Aligning Centers ................................ 128
Wall Angles ....................................... 240 Change to lines ................................... 72
Alpha Channel................................... 718 Chord direction .................................. 857
Ambient Light ................................... 772 Creation Modes ................................. 855
Direction of bend ............................... 857
Angle Snapping .................................. 84
Draw using center and radius ............. 856
Angled dormer hole Length of arc ..................................... 857
see also Framing, Hole, Roofs ........... 484 Length of chord ................................. 857
Angled Front Cabinets ..................... 564 Lock Center ....................................... 102
Angles Make Arc Tangent ............................. 128
Allowed ............................................... 72 Radius .............................................. 856
Entered as bearings .......................... 849 Show Arc Centers .............................. 102
Sun Angle ......................................... 850 Start and End Points .......................... 202
Start direction .................................... 857
Angular Dimensions.......... 133 , 798 , 806
Tangent, make ............................ 74 , 247
Anti-aliasing ...................................... 211
Area
Appearance Panel ............................ 184 Living Area calculation ....................... 285
Appliances of a Polyline ...................................... 863
Built into cabinets .............................. 554 of Rooms .......................................... 286
Outlets, where placed ........................ 529 Arrange
Arc All ..................................................... 728
Creation Modes ................................. 855 icons ................................................. 728
Specification Dialog ........................... 858 Arrow
Tab ................................................... 859 Auto Positioning ................................ 820
Tools ................................................ 856 Defaults ............................................ 839
1058
Tab ................................................... 854 Background Color ............................ 186
Arrows Balusters ........................................... 268
Special use ........................................ 820 Definition .......................................... 436
Text Line With .................................... 819 Base Cabinets ................................... 552
Attach Cabinets ................................. 560 Base Specification Dialog ............... 516
Attenuatation ............................. 532 , 783 Baseline ..................................... 393 , 425
Attic Baseline (Roofs) ....................... 402 , 425
Retain attic wall ................................. 261
Baseline Dimensions ....................... 799
Index
Rooms ............................................... 284
Trusses ............................................. 503 Baseline Polylines (Roofs) .............. 391
Walls ......................................... 248 , 261 Editing .............................................. 391
Attributes Tab .................................... 833 Bay Window
see also Windows
Auto
Archive ...................................... 162 , 192 Bay Windows..................................... 328
Dormers, Edit ..................................... 407 Bay/Box Window Specification
Floating Dormer ................................. 398 Dialog.............................................. 359
Generate Sidewalks ........................... 634 Beam Specification Dialog .............. 498
Place Outlets ..................................... 285
Beams
Rebuild Floors & Ceilings ................... 416
Floor/Ceiling ..................................... 472
Rebuild Roofs .................................... 386
Roof ................................................. 471
Roof Returns ..................................... 400
Save Files ................................. 163 , 191 Bearing Line .............................. 472 , 488
Stairwell ............................................ 456 Behaviors Panel................................ 202
Auto Dormer....................................... 399 Birdsmouth ........................................ 425
Auto-Detailing .................................... 751 Bitmap Directories ........................... 193
Automatic Blind Cabinets .................................. 565
Exterior Dimensions ........................... 799 Blocked Doors and Windows .......... 315
Framing ............................................. 474
Blocking............................................. 473
Roof Styles ........................................ 386
Joist ................................................. 473
Roofs ................................................ 384
Roof ................................................. 473
Roofs vs. Manual Roofs ...................... 384
Sidewalks .......................................... 634 Bonus Libraries ................................ 670
Borders (Layout)............................... 973
Bow
B Front Cabinets .................................. 564
Window Specification ........................ 360
Backclipped Cross Section.............. 735 Windows ........................................... 329
Backdrop Box
3D ..................................................... 760 3D .................................................... 686
Add new ............................................ 897 Tools ................................................ 865
Create ............................................... 897 Windows ........................................... 329
Definition ........................................... 769 Break
Backdrops .......................................... 769 Line .................................................. 130
Line, complete ................................... 131
Backdrops Library ............................ 682
Line, partial ....................................... 130
1059
Wall .......................................... 230 , 236 Diagonal door .................................... 571

Break Line Dimension to corners/sides ................ 814
Button ................................................. 72 Displaying ......................................... 555
Door, glass ........................................ 571
Bridging ............................................. 473
Door, on back .................................... 571
Build Door/drawer style .............................. 559
Additional Floors ............................... 366 Edit Handles ...................................... 557
Foundation ................................ 367 , 372 End cabinets ..................................... 562
Framing Dialog .................................. 475 Flat sides .......................................... 571
House ............................................... 885 Front Tab .......................................... 569
Menu .................................................. 33 Full height ......................................... 552
New floor .......................................... 366 Glass doors ....................................... 571
Roof Dialog ....................................... 416 Island ................................................ 561
Terrain .............................................. 596 Labels ............................................... 555
Build Roof Dialog ............................. 416 Lazy Susan ....................................... 571
Built-in Fixtures Locating with dimensions ................... 812
Create .............................................. 696 Minimum Width .......................... 552 , 580
Delete ............................................... 696 Module Lines ..................................... 555
Moving, with Wall .............................. 562
Bumping/Pushing ............................. 124
Normal ...................................... 562 , 566
Buttons Opening Indicators ............................ 555
Edit Toolbar ........................................ 71 Outlet placement ............................... 529
Partition ............................................ 553
Peninsula radius ........................ 562 , 566
C Pilasters ............................................ 574
Radius end ................................ 562 , 566
Cabinet Resize Increment ............................... 580
Defaults ............................................ 580 Reverse Appliance ............................. 571
Designer ........................................... 551 Separation ........................................ 571
Doors and Drawers Library ................ 682 Shaped ............................................. 562
Modules Library ........................ 554 , 682 Shelves ............................................. 577
Shelf Specification Dialog .................. 577 Special shapes .......................... 562 , 566
Specification Dialog ........................... 565 Stile .................................................. 571
Tools ................................................ 552 Toe kick ............................................ 568
Cabinets............................................. 551 Width Increment ................................ 552
Angled front .............................. 562 , 566 CAD..................................................... 176
Attaching .......................................... 560 Align edges ......................................... 74
Backsplash ....................................... 567 Angle Snapping ................................... 84
Base Cabinet .................................... 552 Angles in degrees/ bearings ............... 879
Bevel ................................................ 571 Block .................................................. 74
Blind ................................................. 565 Box ................................................... 866
Built-in appliances ............................. 554 Box, Framing ..................................... 866
Corner .............................................. 562 Break Line button ................................ 72
Countertop ........................................ 567 Circle ................................................ 860
Countertop, custom ........................... 553 Circle about center ............................ 861
Defaults ............................................ 552 Convert to Terrain .............................. 628
Delete face items .............................. 571 Cross box .......................................... 866
1060
Current Layer ..................................... 869 CAD Detail from View....................... 875
Current Point ..................................... 845 CAD Details ....................................... 874
Delete Points ..................................... 845 Management Dialog ........................... 874
Detail from View ................................. 751 Sent to Layout ................................... 978
Dimensions, locate settings ................ 814 Truss Detail .............................. 505 , 875
Drawing Tools .................................... 842
CAD Menu ............................................ 55
Ellipses ............................................. 861
Explode CAD Block ............................ 870 CAD Objects
Extend Object(s) ................................ 143 Converting ........................................ 149
Fillet ............................................ 73 , 131 Displaying ......................................... 869
Index
Framing ............................................. 866 CAD Oval Specification Dialog ....... 861
Joist Direction Line ............................. 489 Calculate
Layout ............................................... 974 All Floors ............................................ 72
Line Length Format ............................ 879 Area, using polyline ......................... 1006
Line to Arc button ................................ 72 From All Floors ................................ 1005
Lines ................................................. 846 From Area ....................................... 1006
Make CAD Block ................................ 870 From Room ..................................... 1006
Make Parallel/Perp. ............................. 74 Materials on soffits ............................ 652
Menu .................................................. 55
Callout Specification Dialog ........... 834
Move to Front of Group ...................... 122
Ovals ................................................. 861 Callout Tab ........................................ 835
Panel ................................................. 199 Callouts.............................................. 821
Point, current ..................... 599 , 844 , 857 Height ............................................... 615
Point, move along line ........................ 846 Pointers and Arrows .......................... 821
Points, moving ................................... 845 Shape ............................................... 835
Polyline ............................................. 402 Size .................................................. 835
Polyline, rectangular (tool) .................. 865 Camera
Polylines ............................................ 863 Activating .......................................... 748
Resize ............................ 80 , 89 – 90 , 203 Change Settings ................................ 753
Rotate around .................................... 203 Clip Surfaces within ................... 753 – 757
Rotate items ...................................... 203 Create Views .................................... 736
Rotate Jump ...................................... 203 Defaults .................................... 176 , 755
Snap Properties ................................. 204 Degrees each rotate .................. 754 , 757
Tangent button .................................... 74 Height above floor ..................... 754 , 757
Temporary Points ............................... 845 Move Tools ....................................... 739
to Walls ..................................... 149 , 249 Orbit Tools ........................................ 739
Trim Object(s) .................................... 143 Remove Wall within ................... 753 , 756
CAD Block Restrict to room ................................. 758
Insert ................................................. 871 Save Cross Section/Elevation ............ 752
Management ...................................... 871 Specification Dialog ........................... 753
CAD Block Specification Dialog ...... 872 Tilt Tools ........................................... 739
Tools ................................................ 739
CAD Blocks ........................................ 870
Add to library ..................................... 870 Camera Specification Dialog........... 753
Custom libraries ................................. 870 Cascade ............................................. 726
Library ............................................... 683 Views ............................................... 726
CAD Box Specification Dialog ......... 867 Windows ........................................... 726
CAD Circle Specification Dialog ..... 861 Casing
1061
Ignore for opening resize ................... 181 ChiefTalk ............................................ 963

Suppress .......................................... 320 Child Buttons ...................................... 19
Tab ................................................... 351
Chimneys ........................................... 660
Cathedral Ceilings ............................ 293
Chord Direction, arc ......................... 857
Ceiling
Circles ................................................ 860
Framing .................................... 470 , 475
Aligning Centers ................................ 128
Height ............................................... 281
Circle about center ............................ 861
Materials ........................................... 281
Create ............................................... 860
Plane ........................................ 385 , 409
Draw using center and radius ............. 861
Plane Specification Dialog ................. 428
Edit ................................................... 860
Truss ................................................ 502
Ovals ................................................ 861
Ceiling Plane Specification
Clear the Terrain ............................... 596
Dialog.............................................. 428
Click Stairs ........................................ 436
Ceilings .............................................. 340
Automatic ......................................... 475 Client Information ............................. 167
Basement ......................................... 373 Client Information Dialog................. 840
Cathedral .......................................... 293 Close
Coffered ........................................... 294 Plans and Views ................................ 172
Dropped ............................................ 292 Program ............................................ 174
False ................................................ 292 Views ................................................ 731
Lowered ............................................ 292
Color
Over this room .................................. 299
Chooser ............................................ 722
Special ............................................. 292
Displaying images & pictures ............. 186
Tray .................................................. 294
Off/On ............................................... 743
Center Color Chooser
Doors ............................................... 311
Dialog ............................................... 722
Object button .................................... 127
eyedropper ........................................ 722
Sheet ................................................ 951
Color Palette........................................ 24
Change
Door Swings ..................................... 312 Colors ................................................. 186
Floor/Reference Dialog ...................... 368 Columns ............................................. 686
Layout Line Length ............................ 983 Materials List settings ........................ 206
Line to arc ......................................... 439 Tab, Materials List Display Options ... 1013
Line/Arc button .................................. 245 Tabs ................................................. 833
Materials in 3D Views ........................ 743 Components .............................. 666 , 678
Roof Pitch or Height Dialog ................ 404 and Master List Columns .................. 1009
Scale Dialog ..................................... 980 Dialog ............................................. 1014
View Panel Factors ........................... 745 Compound Raked Walls ................... 259
Wall Types for Pony Walls ................. 233
Concentric Resizing ........................... 88
Check
Plots ......................................... 948 , 953 Cone ........................................... 642 , 686
Spelling Dialog .................................. 829 Cone Specification Dialog ............... 648
Checklist, IRC ................................... 886 Configurations Tab ............................. 21
Chief Architect Connect
Serial number ..................................... 69 Electrical ........................................... 525
Version number ................................... 69 Walls ................................................ 240
1062
Contextual Menu ............................... 767 Cross Section/Elevation Views ........... 749
Contextual Menus ....................... 71 , 184 Doors ............................................... 308
Layers .............................................. 217
Contours Tab ..................................... 612
Layout Borders .................................. 973
Convert Materials for Raytracing ..................... 791
Arc/Circle to Polyline .......................... 132 Muntins ..................................... 338 , 404
CAD Lines to Terrain Data .................. 628 New CAD Detail Dialog ...................... 874
CAD Objects ...................................... 149 New Electrical Symbol ....................... 935
Polyline ..................................... 149 , 628 New Fixture ...................................... 935
Polyline Dialog ................................... 150
Index
New floor .......................................... 366
Polyline Solid to Solid ......................... 649 New layout ........................................ 159
Polyline to Spline ............................... 152 New plan .......................................... 159
Room Molding .................................... 542 Objects in 3D Views .......................... 746
Special Polylines into Polylines ........... 151 Plan Database File ............................ 169
Spline to Polyline ............................... 152 Plan Materials Library ........................ 704
Textures to Materials .......................... 704 Plant Image ...................................... 602
to Polyline Road/Sidewalk .................. 634 Polyline Solids .................................. 649
to Solid .............................................. 151 Raked Walls ...................................... 258
Coordinates......................................... 91 Raytrace View ................................... 787
Copy Render Views from Perspective Views 765
Architectural Blocks ........................... 665 Rooms Below Staircases ................... 457
Electrical Objects ............................... 527 Stairwell ............................................ 456
Floors ................................................ 368 Symbol Wizard .................................. 927
Folders and Library Objects ................ 677 Template Plan ................................... 168
Layers ............................................... 217 Windows ........................................... 331
Library List ........................................ 677 Wiring Schematics ............................. 525
Library Objects .................................. 698 Create Symbol Wizard...................... 927
Region as Picture ............................... 904 Cross Hair.................................. 192 , 201
Terrain .............................................. 597
Cross Section Lines ......................... 835
Trusses ............................................. 505
Views ................................................ 979 Cross Section Slider ........................ 785
Copy/Paste Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Main Edit Mode .................................. 138 Specification Dialog...................... 755
Sticky Mode ....................................... 138 Cross Section/Elevations ................ 735
Corner Create .............................................. 749
Boards .............................................. 536 Edit Truss Shape in ........................... 505
Windows ............................................ 330 Save ................................................. 752
Sent to Layout ................................... 978
Countertops, Edit Custom ............... 559
Cubes ................................................. 686
Create
Architectural Blocks ........................... 664 Culs-de-sac ............................... 632 , 634
Backdrops ......................................... 761 Curbs.................................................. 636
Bay, Box and Bow Windows Manually . 330 Current
Bench Seat ........................................ 340 CAD Layer ........................................ 869
CAD Block ......................................... 933 Floor ................................................. 368
CAD Blocks library ............................. 870 Floor, Delete ..................................... 367
CAD Details ....................................... 874 Page ................................................. 972
Camera Views ................................... 736
1063
Current Point..................................... 845 Door ......................................... 177 , 305

Curved Dormer ...................................... 177 , 432
Deck Edge ........................................ 231 Driveway ........................................... 178
Deck Railing ..................................... 231 Dynamic ............................................ 179
Roofs ................................................ 426 Electrical ........................................... 534
Stairs ................................................ 436 Fencing ............................. 179 , 229 , 274
Walls ................................................ 240 Floor ................................................. 364
Walls, Draw ...................................... 238 Foundation ........................................ 372
Framing .................................... 469 , 475
Custom
Layer Set .......................................... 225
Counter Tops .................................... 553
Layout ............................................... 990
Counter Tops, Editing ........................ 559
Marker .............................................. 178
Counterholes .................................... 554
Material ............................................. 721
Custom Countertop Specification Plan .................................................. 180
Dialog.............................................. 579 Railing ...................................... 229 , 274
Customize Reset ........................................ 179 , 182
Sheet Sizes Dialog ............................ 958 Road and Sidewalk ............................ 629
Toolbars ......................................... 7 , 18 Roof .................................................. 385
Cylinder ..................................... 642 , 686 Room ................................................ 280
Room Material ................................... 280
Cylinder Specification Dialog ......... 647
Schedule ........................................... 992
Sidewalk ........................................... 629
Text .......................................... 178 , 838
D Wall .......................................... 228 , 274
Window ..................................... 179 , 328
Dash, Add to dimensions ................ 810 Define
Deck Light Types ....................................... 777
Designer ........................................... 237 Line Weight ....................................... 954
Edges ............................................... 231 Material Dialog .................................. 712
Railing ...................................... 231 , 288 Delete ................................................. 677
Railing Defaults ................................. 229 3D Surface ........................................ 747
Decks ......................................... 231 , 288 Architectural Blocks ........................... 665
Framing .................................... 289 , 301 Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 698
Planking ................................... 289 , 301 CAD points ........................................ 845
Default Current Floor ..................................... 367
Origin Locations ................................ 930 Extension Lines ................................. 804
Settings ............................................ 176 Floors ............................................... 367
Wall Bottom Height ............................ 262 Foundation ................................ 377 – 378
Wall Top Height ................................ 262 Framing ............................................ 496
Gable Over Opening .......................... 415
Default Lights ................................... 773
Keyboard .......................................... 845
Defaults.............................................. 629 Layers ............................................... 217
Arrow ................................................ 839 Layout Views ..................................... 979
Cabinet ..................................... 552 , 580 Objects ............................................. 141
Callout .............................................. 178 Roof Planes .............................. 386 , 405
Camera ..................................... 176 , 755 Shadows ........................................... 777
DeckRailing ...................................... 229 Temporary Points .............................. 845
Dimension .......................... 176 , 796 , 809
1064
Terrain Data ...................................... 597 Items located .................................... 814
Tools from Toolbars ............................ 19 Line separation ................................. 812
Wall Hatching .................................... 236 Locate electrical ................................ 527
Designer Information ........................ 166 Locate Objects .................................. 812
Locate opening automatically ............. 812
Designer Information Dialog............ 839
Locate overall ................................... 812
Details Locating railings ................................ 261
CAD .................................................. 874 Main Wall Layer ................................ 813
Cross Section/Elevations .................... 750 Manual Reach ................................... 812
Truss ................................................. 505
Index
Metric ............................................... 810
Diamond style Minimum Interior Area ....................... 812
see Lites Minimum Number Size ............... 811 – 812
Dimension Move Extension Lines ........................ 803
Tab ................................................... 807 Move Objects Using .......................... 804
Tools ................................................. 797 Move Speed ...................................... 811
Moving Labels ................................... 801
Dimension Defaults ................... 176 , 796
Number height .......................... 811 – 812
CAD detail views ........................ 797 , 878
Number Size, individual dimension ..... 808
Cross section/elevation views ..... 797 , 878
Offset between lines .......................... 812
Dialog ................................................ 809
To openings ...................................... 813
Floor plan view .......................... 797 , 878
Overall .............................................. 812
Dimension Line Specification Point to point ..................................... 798
Dialog .............................................. 807 Print Size .......................................... 811
Dimension Lines Printing ............................................. 957
Display .............................................. 800 Reach, Automatic .............................. 811
Edit ................................................... 801 Reach, Manual .................................. 812
Edit Handles ...................................... 801 Screen size, minimum ............... 811 – 812
Dimensions ........................................ 908 Separation ........................................ 812
Angular .............................. 133 , 798 , 806 Temporary ........................................ 800
Automatic Reach ................................ 811 To electrical items ............................. 814
Automatic/Manual Toggle ................... 808 Units ................................................. 809
Cabinets ............................................ 812 Wall openings ................................... 812
To cabinets ................................ 813 – 814 Wall surfaces .................................... 812
To CAD ..................................... 813 – 814 To walls (surface, center, main layer) . 813
Customize individual .......................... 808 Directories ......................................... 192
Delete extension line .......................... 804 Display
Distance between .............................. 811 3D Views .......................................... 742
Edit ................................................... 801 Arc Centers and Ends ................ 240 , 879
To electrical items ...................... 813 – 814 Architectural Blocks ........................... 665
End to end ......................................... 797 Cabinets ........................................... 555
Extension Lines ................................. 802 CAD Objects ..................................... 869
Exterior ............................................. 799 Center of curved wall ......................... 240
Fireplace, suppress dimension ............ 658 Dimension Lines ................................ 800
Font .................................................. 816 Doors ............................................... 308
Imperial ............................................. 810 Drawing Groups ................................ 122
Inches only ........................................ 812 Drawing Sheet .................................. 951
Interior .............................................. 798 Electrical ........................................... 527
Interior, minimum area ....................... 812
1065
Foundations ...................................... 376 Frame ............................................... 319

Images ............................................. 896 Framing ............................................ 479
Layout Views .................................... 981 Gables Over ...................................... 415
Library Objects .................................. 697 Garage .............................................. 307
Line Angles ....................................... 200 Garage, panels .................................. 316
Line Length ....................................... 200 Handles ............................................ 323
Master List ...................................... 1008 Hardware .......................................... 323
Molding Polylines .............................. 543 Hinged Doors ............................ 307 , 312
Objects ............................................. 221 Hinges .............................................. 323
Options, Layout ................................. 982 In curved walls .................................. 318
Pointer CAD Coordinates ................... 185 Interior walls ...................................... 306
Pony Walls in Floor Plan View ............ 242 Labels ............................................... 308
Road Objects .................................... 633 Library 295 – 296 , 307 – 308 , 316 , 668 , 683
Roof Planes ...................................... 401 Lintels ............................................... 319
Room labels ...................................... 286 Lites ................................................. 320
Stairs ................................................ 440 Locks ................................................ 323
Temporary Dimensions ...................... 800 Muntin Width ..................................... 321
Terrain In 3D Views ........................... 596 Opening Indicators ............................ 309
Terrain in Floor Plan View .................. 596 Openings in railings ........................... 314
Text .................................................. 823 Plinth Blocks ..................................... 317
Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... 241 Pocket Doors ............................. 307 , 313
Windows ........................................... 335 Railing openings ................................ 234
Divided Lites see Lites Recessed .......................................... 317
Resizing ............................................ 309
Doll House View................................ 734
Sliding Doors ..................................... 313
Door Special casings ................................. 318
Defaults .................................... 177 , 305 Style ......................... 295 – 296 , 316 , 668
Specification Dialog ........................... 315 Swing, change ................................... 312
Tools ................................................ 306 Swing, changing for bifold .................. 313
Door Specification Dialog ............... 315 Swing, changing for pocket ................ 313
Doors Threshold lines .................................. 308
6-panel see Doors, Library Transoms .......................................... 314
Arched .............................................. 322 Type ......................... 295 – 296 , 316 , 668
Bifold Doors .............................. 307 , 313 Wrapped Openings ............................ 314
Blocked ............................................ 315 Doorways
Casing .............................................. 319 Adding a door .................................... 308
Casing, suppress .............................. 320 Openings (ISD) .......................... 943 – 944
Center .............................................. 311 Dormer Defaults ........................ 177 , 432
Change Opening/Hinge Side .............. 312
Dormer Specification Dialog ........... 429
Change Swing Side ........................... 313
Creating custom doors ....................... 308 Dormers ..................................... 398 , 410
Curved doors .................................... 318 Angled hole for framing ...................... 484
Displaying ......................................... 308 Auto Dormer ...................................... 399
Doorways .......................................... 307 Explode ............................................. 408
Doorways Library .............................. 684 Manually drawn ................................. 398
Double-swing .................................... 317 Over Windows and Doors, Gable ........ 415
Edit buttons ............................... 244 , 310 Windows in ........................................ 408
Exterior walls .................................... 306 Double
1066
Buffer Drawing ................................... 186
Buffered Printing ................................ 967 E
Truss see Trusses
Earth Data Tab .................................. 779
Walls ................................................. 248
Eaves
Draw
Boxed ....................................... 420 , 426
Arc About Center ............................... 856
Fascia .............................................. 483
Circle About Center ............................ 861
Fascia Width ..................................... 421
Curved Railing ................................... 238
Framing ............................................ 483
Curved wall ........................................ 238
Plumb Cut ......................................... 421
Index
Framing Members .............................. 493
Square cut ........................................ 421
Lines ................................................. 846
Roof Planes ....................................... 393 Edge Lines......................................... 930
Walls ................................................. 238 Edge Lines, Automatic..................... 930
Drawing Groups................................. 122 Edit
Drawing Sheet Architectural Blocks ........................... 666
Center ............................................... 951 Auto Dormers .................................... 407
Select ................................................ 951 Bay Box, and Bow Windows ............... 339
Show ................................................. 951 Behaviors ........................................... 86
Behaviors, Default ............................... 86
Driveway Defaults ............................. 178
Cabinet Door Style ............................ 559
Driveway Specification Dialog......... 637 Cabinets ........................................... 556
Driveways ................................... 631 , 634 Camera in floor plan view .................. 740
Drop Hip ............................................. 514 Components Dialog ......................... 1014
Curved Roof Planes .......................... 405
Drop Hip Truss see Trusses
Custom Countertops .......................... 559
DXF/DWG Dimension Lines ................................ 801
2D View ............................................. 919 Elevation Data ................................... 597
Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 912 Extension Lines ......................... 802 – 803
DXF Code .......................................... 922 Handle Size ...................................... 202
DXF vs. DWG .................................... 908 Handle Tolerance .............................. 202
Elevation Data, Import ........................ 627 in 3D View ........................................ 746
Export 3D .......................................... 921 in a 3D or Render View ...................... 746
Files .................................................. 623 Layout Lines ..................................... 983
Files, Export 2D ................................. 917 Layout Lines Dialog ........................... 984
Files, Import 2D ................................. 909 Libraries ........................................... 677
Import ................................................ 916 Master List ...................................... 1009
Layer mapping ................................... 911 Materials ........................................... 711
Layers, exporting ............................... 921 Materials in Render Views ................. 768
Line Type .......................................... 920 Materials Lists ................................. 1011
Dynamic Menu .................................................. 29
Defaults ........................................ 9 , 179 Objects in Render Views .................... 770
Print Preview ............................. 950 – 951 Panel ................................................ 201
Views ................................................ 977 Paper Size Dialog ............................. 959
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations ..... 380
Piers and Pads .................................. 380
Polyline Parts ...................................... 93
Primitives .......................................... 643
1067
Road Objects .................................... 634 Outlets .............................................. 524

Roof Baseline Polylines ..................... 391 Outlets, automatic ............................. 526
Roof Planes ...................................... 402 Service Specification Dialog ............... 529
Room Labels ..................................... 287 Switches ........................................... 525
Rooms .............................................. 290 Tools ................................................ 524
Terrain Features ................................ 597 Wiring ............................................... 525
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 597 Electrical Service Specification
Text .................................................. 824 Dialog .............................................. 529
Toolbar ................................................. 7
Elevation
Toolbar Buttons ................................... 71
Regions ............................................ 587
Truss Shape in Cross Section View .... 505
Splines .............................................. 587
Trusses ............................................ 504
Tab ................................................... 616
Walls ................................................ 242
Tools, Terrrain ................................... 585
Edit Area
Elevation Data ................................... 585
(All Floors) ........................................ 154
Edit ................................................... 597
(All Floors) Visible ............................. 154
Import DXF/DWG ............................... 627
Polyline as marquee .......................... 154
Tools ................................................ 153 Elevation Line Specification
Visible .............................................. 153 Dialog .............................................. 616
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................. 984 Elevation Lines and Splines ............ 597
Edit Type Elevation Point Specification
Resize ................................................ 90 Dialog .............................................. 613
Edit Types Elevation Points ........................ 585 , 597
Concentric .......................................... 88 Elevations
Fillet ................................................... 89 Create ............................................... 749
Move Corners ..................................... 87 Interior .............................................. 735
Resize .................................... 80 , 87 , 89 Ellipses .............................................. 861
Editing.......................................... 98 , 380 End Cabinets ..................................... 563
Electrical............................................ 177 End Truss see Trusses
Buttons ............................................. 524
End-to-End Dimensions ................... 797
Connections ...................................... 525
Defaults ............................................ 534 Energy Heel ....................................... 520
Deleting ............................................ 529 Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 901
Dimension to ..................................... 814 Enter
Displaying ......................................... 527 Coordinates ....................................... 849
General ............................................ 523 Coordinates Dialog .............................. 91
Labels .............................................. 527 Dimensions ......................................... 11
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 935
Error Messages ............................... 1020
Library ...................................... 526 , 684
Light ................................................. 524 Estimating Software ....................... 1016
Lights ............................................... 524 Exit Program...................................... 174
Locate, dimensions ........................... 527 Expand Room Polyline ..................... 295
Mode ................................................ 524
Expand/Collapse All ......................... 678
Moving Objects ................................. 527
Naming items .................................... 530 Explode
Options ............................................. 524 Architectural Block Button .................... 73
Architectural Blocks ........................... 666
1068
CAD Block ......................................... 870
CAD Block Button ............................... 73 F
Dormers ............................................ 408
F6 Key
Mulled Unit Button ............................... 73
Fill Window ....................................... 724
Export ................................................. 908
Fascia
2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 917
Top ................................................... 425
3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator ..... 922
3D DXF/DWG Model .......................... 921 Faster Rendering .............................. 771
3D Files ............................................. 922 Fence Designer ................................. 231
Index
All Floors ........................................... 917 Fence Select ........................................ 94
Current View ...................................... 917
Fencing ...................................... 231 , 237
Drawing File Dialog ............................ 918
EMF .................................................. 901 Fencing Defaults....................... 179 , 229
an Entire Plan .................................... 173 Field of View....................... 740 , 757 , 906
Layers Sets ....................................... 224 File
Layout Files ....................................... 989 Menu .................................................. 25
Materials ......................................... 1015 Menu, Recent File List ....................... 191
Materials List ......................... 1015 – 1016 Organization ..................................... 160
Picture Files ...................................... 892
Fill
Render View ...................................... 770
Polyline ............................................. 869
to POV-Ray ....................................... 794
Style Tab .......................................... 864
VRML Files ........................................ 905
Window ............................................. 724
Wall Definitions .................................. 255
Window Building Only ........................ 724
Windows Metafiles ............................. 901
Windows Metafiles Dialog ................... 901 Fillers ................................................. 564
WMF ................................................. 901 Fillet ..................................................... 89
Export Drawing File Dialog .............. 918 Button ................................................. 73
Two Lines ......................................... 131
Export Windows Metafiles Dialog ... 901
Fillet/Chamfer Dialog ....................... 131
Extend
Object(s) ........................................... 143 Filter Data .......................................... 625
Slope Downward ................................ 387 Final View ........................... 211 , 765 – 766
Extension Find Plan Wizard............................... 169
Lines, Editing ..................................... 802 Fire Box Tab ...................................... 659
Tab ................................................... 808 Fireplace .............................................. 72
Extensions Tab .................................. 815 Dimensions, suppress ....................... 658
Exterior Direction facing ................................. 656
Dimensions ........................................ 799 Hearth height .................................... 658
Fixtures Library .................................. 684 Interior wall ....................................... 656
Furnishings Library ............................ 685 Library .............................................. 659
Room types ....................................... 284 Masonry .................................... 656 , 960
The Exterior Room ............................. 284 No Fire Box ....................................... 659
Walls ......................................... 229 , 232 Prefabricated .................................... 659
External only ...................................... 813 Symbol ............................................. 659
Fireplace Specification Dialog........ 657
Fireplaces .......................................... 656
Chimneys .......................................... 660
1069
Foundations ...................................... 657 Floor/Ceiling

Freestanding ..................................... 657 Beam ................................................ 472
In walls ............................................. 656 Truss ................................................ 472
Types ............................................... 656 Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification
Fix Dialog .............................................. 521
Connections ...................................... 240 Floors
Roofs ................................................ 386 Adding .............................................. 366
Fixture/Furniture Resize .................. 181 Change Floor/Reference .................... 368
Fixtures Copying ............................................ 368
Built-in, create ................................... 696 Current Floor ............................. 365 , 368
Built-in, delete ................................... 696 Deleting ............................................ 367
Counter top ....................................... 935 Exchange With Floor Above ............... 367
Layer to Material Mapping .................. 935 Exchange With Floor Below ................ 367
Library .............................................. 696 Floor Up/ Floor Down ......................... 368
Lights ............................................... 524 FloorTabs .......................................... 475
Stand alone ...................................... 935 Insert New Floor ................................ 367
Wall .................................................. 935 Multiple ............................................. 365
Fixtures Library Reference Floor ......................... 365 , 368
Exterior ............................................. 684 Swap Floor/Reference ....................... 369
Interior .............................................. 685 Folders Panel .................................... 192
Flared Stairs ...................................... 448 Follow Terrain ........... 611 , 621 , 653 , 700
Flat Region ........................................ 589 Font
Flat Region Specification Dialog .... 616 Materials List ..................................... 187
Preferences ....................................... 187
Flip layers see Walls
Fonts .................................................. 818
Floating Auto Dormer ...................... 398 Blueprint ........................................... 818
Floor ........................................... 177 , 364 Dimensions ....................................... 816
Above Height .................................... 298 Footings ............................................. 373
and Ceiling Heights ........................... 281 Alignment .......................................... 377
and Ceiling Trusses ........................... 502 Centered on main layer ...................... 265
Camera ............................................. 734 Centered on wall ............................... 265
Defaults ............................................ 364 Height ............................................... 265
Export all ........................... 250 – 251 , 918 Stem wall .......................................... 377
Export current .................... 250 – 251 , 918 Stepped ............................................ 258
Framing .................................... 470 , 475 Width ................................................ 265
Height ............................................... 281
Height in rooms ................................. 297 Footprint, Plan .................................. 876
Insert ................................................ 367 Foundation......................................... 177
Materials ........................................... 281 Defaults ............................................ 372
New Floor Dialog ............................... 376 Tab ........................................... 264 , 373
Overview .................................. 734 , 742 Thickness .......................................... 265
Tools ................................................ 365 Walls ........................................ 230 , 232
Floor Plan Foundations
Drawing .............................................. 10 Alignment .......................................... 377
View ........................................... 12 , 944 and Room Specification ..................... 381
View Template .................................. 961 Build ................................................. 372
1070
Center footings (2 methods) ............... 265 Floor ......................................... 470 , 475
Delete ............................................... 377 Furring .............................................. 249
Display .............................................. 376 Headers ............................................ 481
Footing size ....................................... 265 Joining Platforms ............................... 490
Footings ............................................ 373 Joist Direction ................................... 489
Garage .............................................. 379 Keeping current ................................. 496
Monolithic Slab .................................. 374 Lap Joints ......................................... 475
Pier and Grade Beam ......................... 380 Layer ................................................ 254
Piers ................................................. 374 Lookouts ........................................... 483
Index
Piers specification .............................. 376 Manual vs. Automatic ........................ 470
Piers, add manually ............................ 380 Materials List .................................... 496
Piers, edit .......................................... 380 Mixing Trusses with Stick ................... 507
Room supplies floor ........................... 299 Overview .......................................... 742
Set up ............................................... 372 Plates, mitred .................................... 479
Slab at top of stem wall ...................... 374 Platforms .......................................... 475
Slab thickness ................................... 373 Posts ................................................ 482
Slab, monolithic ................................. 379 Reference Marker ...................... 472 , 486
Slab, normal ...................................... 379 Represented by single line ......... 493 , 879
Slabs, create two ways ....................... 379 Retain Wall Framing .......................... 496
Stem Wall .......................................... 373 Rim Joist ........................................... 475
Step markers ..................................... 374 Roof ......................................... 470 , 483
Turn wall into ..................................... 260 Specification Dialog ........................... 497
Types ................................................ 373 Tools ................................................ 471
Use Mesh .......................................... 376 Trimmers .......................................... 480
Walls ................................................. 265 Truss Spacing ................................... 486
Frame and Trim Tab .......................... 319 Trusses ............................................ 485
Trusses and rafters mix ..................... 474
Framing ...................................... 177 , 866
Wall Detail ........................................ 492
Automatic .......................................... 474
Wall Openings ................................... 479
Beams ............................................... 482
Walls ................................. 470 , 478 , 492
Bearing Line ...................................... 488
Walls and materials list ...................... 493
Build Framing Dialog .......................... 475
Walls frame thru ................................ 479
Butt Joints ......................................... 475
Walls, build ....................................... 478
CAD Box Tool .................................... 866
Window Sills ..................................... 481
Ceiling ....................................... 470 , 475
Windows ........................................... 479
Creating ............................................ 866
Cross Box .......................................... 866 Framing Specification Dialog ......... 497
Deck ................................................. 289 Frieze
Decks ................................................ 301 Molding ............................................. 543
Defaults ............................................. 469 Tab ................................................... 422
Defaults Dialog .................................. 475 From Line End, Move point ............. 846
Deleting ............................................. 496
Full
Details, Walls ..................................... 478
Gable Wall ................................ 263 , 387
Displaying .......................................... 493
Height Cabinets ................................ 552
Doors ................................................ 479
Overview .................................. 734 , 741
Dormer .............................................. 484
Editing ....................................... 494 , 866 Furnishings Library
End studs, rotate ................................ 479 Exterior ............................................. 685
Interior .............................................. 686
1071
Furniture .............................................. 72 Group Select........................................ 92

Stand alone ...................................... 686 Gutters ............................................... 421
Table item ......................................... 686 Remove ............................................ 418
Wall item ........................................... 686
Furring ............................................... 249
H
G Half walls see Railings, solid
Hand Rail Tab .................................... 272
Gable
Handles
Dormer Over Windows and Doors ...... 415
Straight Stairs ................................... 441
Over Door/Window ............................ 314
Roof Line .................................. 385 , 410 Handrail Tab ...................................... 466
Roofs ................................................390 Hardiness Zone Maps ....................... 595
Gable/Roof Line ................................ 385 Hardware ............................................ 764
Garage Library .............................................. 687
Door panels ...................................... 316 Lock Issues ..................................... 1019
Doors ............................................... 307 Hardware Tab
Garages for Cabinets ...................................... 573
Foundation ........................................ 379 for Doors ........................................... 323
Garden Bed Hatch
Kidney Shaped .................................. 592 Fill patterns ....................................... 865
Polyline ............................................. 592 Patterns ............................................ 869
Round ............................................... 592 Polyline ............................................. 869
Tools ................................................ 592 Wall .......................................... 230 , 236
General Headers .............................................. 481
Cabinet Defaults ................................ 580 Hearth
Preferences ...................................... 190 Depth ................................................ 658
Generate the Terrain ........................ 596 Height ............................................... 658
Geometric Shapes Library............... 686 Height
Basement ceiling ............................... 373
Getting Help ........................................ 15
Ceiling .............................................. 297
GFCI Outlets ...................................... 524 Floor ................................................. 297
Girder Trusses .................................. 515 Railings ............................................. 270
Glass House ...................................... 767 Help
View settings ..................................... 767 Display .................................................. 6
Glass House Options Dialog ........... 767 Menu .................................................. 68
Tips .................................................... 15
Glass, Stained ................................... 331
Help Database ................................... 963
Graphics Directories ........................ 193
High Shed/Gable ............................... 390
Grid Snapping ..................................... 85
Hill ...................................................... 589
Grids
Materials list reports .......................... 207 Hill / Valley Specification Dialog .... 617
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt Hip
see GFCI Outlets Roof .................................................. 390
1072
Truss ................................................. 511 Line Styles ........................................ 688
see also Trusses Picture Files ...................................... 890
Holes Terrain Data ...................................... 623
In slab ............................................... 379 Terrain Wizard .................................. 623
In slab with footing ............................. 379 Wall Definitions ................................. 256
In terrain ............................................ 591 Inches Only see Dimensions
Hot Keys .............................................. 24 Information
House Wizard ............................. 240 , 884 Client ................................................ 167
Edit rooms ......................................... 884 Designer ........................................... 166
Index
Multiple Floors ................................... 885 Project .............................................. 166
Hyperlink ............................................ 834 Input
Arc ................................................... 857
Line .................................................. 847
Point ................................................. 844
I Insert
Floor ................................................. 367
Icons
Floor Dialog ...................................... 367
Arrange ............................................. 728
Image ................................................. 72
Image Adustment Dialog .................. 790
Insulation........................................... 867
Image Specification Dialog .............. 897 Auto-Detailing ................................... 751
Images ................................................ 769 Show in Elevation .............................. 751
Add new ............................................ 897 Interior
Create ............................................... 897 Dimensions ....................................... 798
Definition ................................... 687 , 769 Fireplace, wall ................................... 656
Displaying .......................................... 896 Fixtures Library ................................. 685
Displaying in color .............................. 186 Furnishings Library ............................ 686
In Layout ........................................... 896 Room types ....................................... 284
Library ............................................... 687
Intersection ....................................... 147
Place ................................................. 896
Print .................................................. 770 Invisible Walls.................... 230 , 234 , 261
Printing .............................................. 967 IRC Checklist .................................... 886
Resizing ............................................ 896 Isometric View .......................... 734 , 743
Select from library ...................... 603 , 898
iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat .......... 254
Transparency Color ............................ 899
Images and Backdrops ..................... 769
Imperial
Measurements ................................... 810 J
Plans ................................................. 957
Join Roof Planes .............................. 403
see Units
Joist
Import ................................................. 916
Direction ........................................... 472
2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 909
Direction Line ............................ 474 , 489
3D Data ............................................. 926
3D FilesI ............................................ 916 Joist Direction Specification
Drawing Wizard ................................. 909 Dialog.............................................. 489
DXF/DWG Elevation Data ................... 627 Joists ......................................... 471 , 474
Layer Sets ......................................... 224 Automatically create .......................... 474
1073
Bearing Line ..................................... 488 Layer Set

Blocking ............................................ 473 Control, Active ................................... 218
Depth ............................................... 477 Defaults Dialog .................................. 225
Draw new, manually .......................... 471 Management Dialog ........................... 217
Framing Reference ............................ 476 Layer Set Defaults Dialog ................ 225
Orientation ........................................ 474
Layer Set Management Dialog ........ 217
see also Framing
Layer Sets .......................................... 216
Exporting .......................................... 224
Importing ........................................... 225
K Missing in Layout ............................... 988
Modify all .......................................... 216
Keyboard
Layers
Camera Movements .......................... 740
3D DWG/DXF Models ........................ 921
Commands ................................... 7 , 679
Adding new layers ............................. 221
Shortcuts ............................................ 24
Advanced Layer Mapping ................... 911
Kidney Shaped Colors ............................................... 220
Garden Bed ...................................... 592 Copy ................................................. 217
Terrain Feature ................................. 590 Create ............................................... 217
Kingpost ............................................ 519 Delete ............................................... 217
Kitchen Island ................................... 561 Dimension, individual ......................... 808
Knee Wall........................................... 387 DXF/DWG files .................................. 911
Export Layer Set ................................ 919
Floor Plan View Display ..................... 221
Layer Sets ......................................... 216
L Layout Views ..................................... 981
Locking ............................................. 222
Label Tab ........................................... 576 Mapping ............................................ 911
Labels Materials Lists ................................... 222
Cabinet ............................................. 555 Preferences ....................................... 195
Door ................................................. 308 Rename ............................................ 220
Electrical ........................................... 527 Reset Names .................................... 220
Room ................................................ 286 Layout
Trusses ............................................ 506 Adding CAD ...................................... 974
Window ............................................. 335 Adding Lines ..................................... 983
Landing .............................................. 443 Borders ............................................. 973
Custom Shapes ................................. 444 Borders, Filleted ................................ 974
Height ............................................... 444 Box Specification Dialog .................... 989
Locked .............................................. 445 CAD Details ...................................... 978
Unlocked .......................................... 444 Change line length ............................. 983
Landscape Designer ........................ 583 Change Pages ................................... 972
Copy files .......................................... 172
Layer
Create a New .................................... 159
Display Options Dialog ...................... 218
Cross Section/Elevations ................... 978
Painter Tool ...................................... 224
Defaults ............................................ 990
Tab ................................................... 223
Deleting Views .................................. 979
Layer Display Options Dialog ......... 218 Display contents ................................ 981
1074
Edit Layout Lines ............................... 983 Legacy Plans
Edit Vector Views ............................... 983 Page Setup ....................................... 189
Edit views .......................................... 981 Text Conversion ................................ 187
Export ............................................... 989 Length
Files Dialog ....................................... 987 Of arc ............................................... 857
Filleted border ................................... 974 Of chord ........................................... 857
Finding missing files ........................... 986
Libraries
Floor plan view .................................. 978
Cabinet Modules ............................... 554
Images .............................................. 896
Renaming ......................................... 677
Index
Layout Box Layers ............................. 981
Line color .......................................... 985 Library
Missing Files ...................................... 986 Add a new symbol ............................. 675
Missing Layer Sets ............................. 988 Add new library ................................. 674
Moving Views .................................... 980 Add to Library ................................... 676
Open View ................................. 971 , 980 Adding Objects .................................. 635
Page Display Options ......................... 982 Adding third party libraries ................. 675
Page Down ........................................ 972 Appliances ........................................ 696
Page Up ............................................ 972 Bonus Libraries ................................. 670
Page Zero ......................................... 973 Categories ........................................ 681
Prepare for ........................................ 971 Editing libraries ................................. 677
Print From ......................................... 952 Fireplaces ......................................... 659
Relink File ......................................... 987 Fixtures ............................................ 696
Rescale Views ................................... 980 Primitives .......................................... 686
Scale ................................................. 980 Third party libraries ................... 670 , 675
Selecting Views ................................. 979 Library Browser ................................ 670
Sending views to ................................ 975 Adding Items ..................................... 674
Template ........................................... 973 Categories ........................................ 681
Text ................................................... 974 Docking ............................................ 673
Title Blocks ........................................ 973 Panes ............................................... 670
View, contents ................................... 981 Preferences ...................................... 188
Layout Box Specification Dialog ..... 989 Library Categories
Layout Files Architectural Blocks ................... 665 , 681
Create ............................................... 971 Backdrops ......................................... 682
Dialog ................................................ 987 Cabinet Doors and Drawers ............... 682
Export ............................................... 989 Cabinet Modules ............................... 682
Open ................................................. 164 CAD Blocks ....................................... 683
Print .................................................. 988 Doors ....................................... 308 , 683
Save ................................................. 160 Doorways .................................. 307 , 684
Electrical ........................................... 684
Layout Files Dialog ........................... 987
Exterior Fixtures ................................ 684
Layout Links, Managing ................... 985 Exterior Furnishings .......................... 685
Layout Views Geometric Shapes ............................. 686
Copy ................................................. 979 Hardware .......................................... 687
Display .............................................. 981 Images ............................................. 687
Keeping views current ........................ 977 Interior Fixtures ................................. 685
Relinking ........................................... 986 Interior Furnishings ........................... 686
Left Button Definition .......................... 4 Line Styles ........................................ 688
1075
Materials ........................................... 688 Drop Off Rate ............................ 532 , 783

Millwork ............................................ 689 Fixtures ............................................. 524
Moldings and Profiles ........................ 689 Floor Number .................................... 783
My Libraries ...................................... 681 Height ............................................... 783
Plants ............................................... 689 Light Fixtures .................................... 773
Sprinklers ......................................... 690 Light Sources .................................... 772
Terrain ...................................... 596 , 691 Light Types ....................................... 773
Windows ........................................... 691 Sources ............................................ 772
Library Object Button Tilt Angle ........................................... 783
Specification Dialog .................... 696 Type ......................................... 531 , 782
Types ................................................ 773
Library Object Specification
Dialog.............................................. 699 Line
Color Tab .......................................... 985
Library Objects
Endcaps ............................................ 200
and the Materials List ........................ 699
Properties Panel ................................ 200
Copy ................................................. 698
Specification Dialog ........................... 850
Display ............................................. 697
Start and End Points .......................... 202
Move ................................................ 698
Style Tab .......................................... 851
Placing ............................................. 695
Styles, Library ................................... 688
Resize .............................................. 698
Tab ................................................... 851
Select ............................................... 698
Weight .............................. 185 , 948 , 954
Library Search Dialog ...................... 692 Weight Tab ........................................ 984
Include folders .................................. 693 Weights, Show .................................. 951
Keywords .......................................... 693 with Arrow ......................................... 849
Light Render Data............................. 525 Line Specification Dialog................. 850
Light Sources.................................... 772 Line Weight........................................ 186
Added Lights ..................................... 774
Lines ................................................... 846
Default Lights .................................... 773
Angles in bearings ............................. 879
Default Sun Light ............................... 775
Angles in degrees .............................. 879
Fixtures ............................................ 773
Change to arcs .................................... 72
Parallel Lights ................................... 777
Color, layout ...................................... 985
Point Lights ....................................... 777
Lengths ............................................. 879
Spot Lights ........................................ 777
Separation, dimensions ...................... 812
Sun Angles ....................................... 775
Lites
Light Specification Dialog ............... 781
Craftsman ......................................... 354
Lights Diamond ................................... 321 , 354
Added ............................................... 774 Normal ...................................... 321 , 354
Adjust ............................................... 778 Prairie ....................................... 321 , 354
Attenuated ................................ 532 , 783 Tab ................................................... 353
Auto Intensity ............................ 531 , 782
Living.................................................. 287
Casts Shadows ......................... 533 , 784
Color ........................................ 532 , 782 Living Area ........................................ 285
Connect to switch .............................. 525 Calculation ........................................ 287
Cut Off Angle ............................ 532 , 783 Delete label ....................................... 287
Defining Types .................................. 777 Label ................................................ 287
Dir Angle ................................... 532 , 783 Restore label ..................................... 287
Display sources ......................... 533 , 784 vs. Footprint ...................................... 287
1076
Load Specification Dialog ........................... 837
3D File .............................................. 929 Tab ................................................... 837
to Make Same Value .......................... 152 Marker Specification Dialog ............ 837
Locate Markers .............................................. 823
Openings Automatically ...................... 812 Framing reference ............................. 486
Roof Plane Intersections .................... 408 Types ............................................... 837
Lock Marquee Select ................................... 93
CAD layer .......................................... 220
Marriage Walls .................................. 248
Center ............................................... 102
Index
Center Arc ......................................... 102 Masonry
Control Handle Angle ......................... 118 Fireplace ........................................... 960
Roof planes ....................................... 418 Fireplaces ......................................... 656
Tread Width ....................................... 447 Stairs ................................................ 455
Lookouts ............................................ 483 Master List................................. 72 , 1007
Columns to display ............................ 208
Low Detail Mode ................................ 746
Displaying ....................................... 1008
Lowered Materials List .................................... 208
Ceiling ............................................... 340 Name of file ...................................... 208
Region .............................................. 589 Search ............................................ 1009
see also Materials List
Update from Master ......................... 1009
M Update to Master ............................. 1009
Master plan see Profile Plan
Macros ................................................ 826 Material .............................................. 177
Main Defaults ............................................ 721
Edit Mode .......................................... 138 Definition .......................................... 712
Layer ................................................. 254 Export Options Dialog ...................... 1015
Make Eyedropper ....................................... 709
Arc Tangent ............................... 128 , 247 Material Painter
CAD Block ......................................... 870 Modes .............................................. 708
Parallel Dialog ................................... 134 Tool .................................................. 708
Parallel/Perpendicular ................ 126 , 134 Materials ............................. 695 , 768 , 941
Parallel/Perpendicular button ............... 74 Add to Library ................................... 676
Room Molding Polyline Dialog ............ 295 and Raytracing .................................. 791
Room Polyline button .......................... 74 Applying with Material Tab ................. 710
Make Room Molding Polyline Calculating amounts .......................... 652
Dialog .............................................. 295 Categories ........................................ 715
Manage Color ................................................ 713
Auto Archives .................................... 163 Create New Material .......................... 704
Materials ........................................... 706 Create using Color Chooser ............... 722
Materials Lists ................................. 1015 Define for Materials List ..................... 706
Editing .............................................. 711
Manual
Floor and Ceiling ............................... 281
Dimensions ........................................ 797
in a Render View ............................... 768
Roofs ........................................ 384 , 393
Managing .......................................... 706
Marker Materials List .................................... 706
Defaults ............................................. 178
1077
OBJ files ........................................... 942 Metafiles............................................. 901

On Soffits .......................................... 652 Metric
Polyline ........................................... 1007 Dimensions ....................................... 810
Render properties ............................. 719 Plans ................................................ 957
Stained glass .................................... 331 see also Units
Tab ................................................... 710
Middle Mouse Button ................... 4 , 724
Textures ................................... 718 , 768
Walls ................................................ 281 Millwork, Library ............................... 689
see also Materials List Minimum
Materials List .................................. 1003 Alcove ............................................... 420
Calculate from All Floors ......... 1005 – 1006 Number Size ............................. 811 – 812
Calculate from Area ......................... 1006 Missing Layer Sets Dialog ............... 988
Calculate from Room ....................... 1006 Mixing Trusses with Stick
Categories ............................... 209 , 1012 Framing ........................................... 507
Columns to display ............................ 206
Model Maker
Display Options Dialog .................... 1012
Floor Plan, View Template ................. 961
Editing ............................................ 1011
Printing ............................................. 959
Estimating software ......................... 1016
Export ............................................. 1016 Modify
Font .................................................. 187 All Layer Sets .................................... 216
Framing .................................... 484 , 496 Name In All Layer Sets ...................... 195
Grid display on reports ...................... 207 Plan Database File ............................ 170
Library Objects .................................. 699 Molding .............................................. 279
Manage .......................................... 1015 3D Molding Line tool .......................... 542
Master List Preferences ..................... 208 3D molding polyline ........................... 542
Material, define ................................. 706 Changing profiles .............................. 543
Preferences ...................................... 206 Custom profiles ................................. 539
Report Style Preferences ................... 207 Door ................................................. 324
Roofs ................................................ 421 Frieze ............................................... 543
Selecting Categories ....................... 1007 Molding Line tool ............................... 541
Wall framing ...................................... 493 Molding Polyline tool .......................... 541
Working with ................................... 1004 Place Molding Profile ......................... 540
Materials List Display Options Polyline Specification Dialog .............. 544
Dialog............................................ 1012 Polylines ........................................... 539
Max Tread Contraction ............ 454 , 463 Molding Polyline Specification
Dialog .............................................. 544
Median................................................ 631
Moldings
Medians.............................................. 634
in Rooms ........................................... 302
Menus..................................................... 7 Symbol .............................................. 540
3D ...................................................... 48
Moldings and Profiles
Build ................................................... 33
Library..................................... 542 , 689
CAD ................................................... 55
Edit ..................................................... 29 Moldings Tab
Help ................................................... 68 for Cabinets ...................................... 575
Window ............................................... 66 for Doors ........................................... 324
for Molding Polylines .......................... 545
Mesh, Specify for foundation.......... 376
for Windows ...................................... 358
Metafile Size Dialog.......................... 901
1078
Monolithic Slab.................................. 374 Muntins
Monolithic Slab Foundations, Custom ............................................. 338
Rebuilding....................................... 378 Width ................................................ 321
Mouse Buttons, Using ......................... 4 My Libraries ...................................... 681
Move
CAD Points ........................................ 845
Corners .............................................. 87
N
Dimension Numbers ........................... 801 Name
Index
Electrical Objects ............................... 527 Of room for Plan Check ..................... 885
Extension Lines ................................. 803 New
Folders and Library Objects ................ 678 CAD Line Dialog ................................ 847
Library Objects .................................. 698 Floor Dialog ...................................... 376
Moving Speed .................................... 811 Layer Name Dialog ............................ 221
Object ............................................... 666 Plans Preferences ............................. 194
Object Using Dimensions Dialog ......... 804 Polygon Shaped Room ...................... 235
Point to Point ...................................... 75 Newels
Restrictions ....................................... 124 Definition .......................................... 436
Speed, Dimensions ............................ 811
Stairs ................................................ 441 Newels/Balusters Tab .............. 270 , 464
Text ........................................... 824 , 993 No Locate Wall .................................. 261
to be Coplanar ................................... 404 Normal style see Lites
To be Coplanar button ......................... 74 North Pointer..................................... 849
to Framing Reference ......................... 125
Number
to Front of Group ............................... 122
Height, dimensions ............................ 812
Views to a Different Page ................... 980
Style/Angle Style Dialog .................... 873
Walls and Railings ............................. 242
Walls with Cabinets Attached .............. 562
Windows ............................................ 336
Moving Objects O
Move Speed ...................................... 811
OBJ Files ................................... 916 , 942
Mulled Units ....................................... 944
in Floor Plan View .............................. 944 Object
in Materials Lists ................................ 347 Based Design ........................................ 3
Snapping .......................................... 204
Mulled Window Specification
Dialog .............................................. 347
Object Specification Dialog ............ 708
Multiple
Copy ................................................. 139 One Stretch Plane............................. 939
Floors, Reverse Plan .................... 66 , 136 One-Click Auto Dimension .............. 799
Objects .............................................. 698 One-Click Stairs................................ 436
Multiple Copy Dialog ........................ 140 Open
Multiple Select .................................... 92 3D Home Architect files ..................... 158
in Floor Plan View .............................. 242 Below ............................................... 285
Muntin Bars Different file types ............................. 164
see Lites Directory ........................................... 164
1079
Files from a different version .............. 164

Object ................................................... 8 P
Plan .................................................. 164
Page
Plan or Layout File ............................ 164
Down ................................................ 972
Symbol ..................................... 678 , 945
Up .................................................... 972
Template Files .................................. 167
Page Setup Dialog ............................ 963
Opening Tab ...................................... 946
Legacy Layouts ................................. 189
Openings ................................... 943 – 944 Legacy Plans ..................................... 189
Dimension locate ............................... 812
Pan
Dimensions to ................................... 814
Pan Window Tool .............................. 725
Doorways, create ...................... 943 – 944
the Display ........................................ 725
Headers ............................................ 481
Using the Keyboard ........................... 725
Ignore casing for resize ..................... 181
Using the Mouse ................................ 725
Windows, create ........................ 943 – 944
Using the Scroll Bars ......................... 725
Options Tab ....................................... 420
Paper
for 3D Settings .................................. 758
Orientation ........................................ 963
for Materials List Display options ...... 1013
Size .................................................. 971
for Soffits .......................................... 654
for Symbols ....................................... 946 Parallel Light ..................................... 777
for Windows ...................................... 345 see Lights ......................................... 774
Orthogonal Views ............................. 952 Parallel/Perpendicular........................ 74
Outlets ............................................... 524 Parent Buttons .................................... 19
Above cabinet ................................... 529 Partition ............................................. 553
Automatic ......................................... 526 Passthroughs .................................... 315
Dishwasher ....................................... 524
Paste................................................... 137
Exterior ............................................. 524
Hold Position ..................................... 139
For appliance .................................... 529
in Place ............................................. 138
GFCI ................................................ 524
Special .............................................. 139
Interior .............................................. 524
Joining .............................................. 525 Path to Master list ............................ 209
Manual ............................................. 524 Pattern Tab ........................................ 717
Place ................................................ 526 Patterns and Textures ...................... 705
Sink .................................................. 524
PDF Files............................................ 953
WP ................................................... 524
Peninsula Radius Cabinets ............. 564
Ovals .................................................. 861
Personal Tutor ................................ 1018
Overall Dimension ............................ 812
Perspective Views ............................ 734
Overhang ........................................... 402
Picture
Overview .......................................... 1 , 79
Copy Region as ................................. 904
Camera tools .................................... 739
Displaying in color ............................. 186
Create .............................................. 734
Save a Render View as ...................... 770
Direction Tools .................................. 744
Full ................................................... 734 Picture File Box Specification
Plan .................................................. 734 Dialog .............................................. 893
Picture Files
Export ............................................... 892
Import ............................................... 890
1080
Scale ................................................. 891 Plans
Piers Copy files .......................................... 172
and Pads ........................................... 380 New .................................................. 159
Automatic .......................................... 376 Open ................................................ 164
Beam, relationship ............................. 380 Save ................................................. 160
Creating automatically ........................ 376 Search .............................................. 168
Creating manually .............................. 380 Transfer ............................................ 172
Editing ............................................... 380 Plant
Foundation ........................................ 374 Chooser Dialog ................................. 608
Index
Move ................................................. 380 Encyclopedia .................................... 608
Resizing ............................................ 380 Image Specification Dialog ................. 602
Piers and Pads................................... 380 Specification Dialog ........................... 606
Tools ................................................ 594
Pitch ............................................ 388 , 425
Above Wall ........................................ 388 Plant Image Specification
Show as degrees ............................... 181 Dialog.............................................. 602
Place Plant Specification Dialog ............... 606
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 331 Plants, Library .................................. 689
Images .............................................. 896 Platform Holes .................................. 380
Library Object Button ......................... 696
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 317
Library Objects .................................. 695
Outlets .............................. 235 , 285 , 526 Plot Plan ............................................ 599
Soffits ................................................ 650 North pointer ..................................... 849
Switches ............................................ 525 Setback Lines ................................... 601
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 601
Plan ..................................................... 177
Database File .................................... 169 Plotters .............................................. 949
Defaults Dialog .................................. 181 Point
Drawing .............................................. 10 see also CAD point
Find Wizard ....................................... 169 Point Light ......................................... 777
Footprint ............................................ 876
Point Markers .................................... 844
Footprint Specification Dialog ............. 877
Materials Dialog ................................. 707 Point to Point Dimensions .............. 798
Save ................................................. 160 Pointer
Templates ......................................... 167 Coordinates .................................. 8 , 185
Thumbnail ......................................... 161 Cross Hair ................................. 192 , 201
Trace ................................................. 891 Points ................................................. 843
View ................................................... 12
Polygon
View Tab ........................................... 946
Shaped Deck ........................... 231 , 1034
Plan Check ......................................... 885 Shaped Room ................................... 230
and room labels ................................. 286
Polyline
Dialog ................................................ 886
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 542
Hold .................................................. 886
Area ................................................. 863
Restart .............................................. 886
Definition .......................................... 863
Plan Defaults...................................... 180 Edit Area ........................................... 154
Plan Export ........................................ 770 Garden Bed ...................................... 592
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog 877 Specification Dialog ........................... 863
Tab ................................................... 863
1081
Tool to create rectangular .................. 865 Render .............................................. 211

Polyline Solid .................................... 649 Report Style Panel ............................. 207
Convert to Solid ................................ 649 Reset preferences ............................. 214
Creating ............................................ 649 Sun Angle Panel ................................ 201
Specification Dialog ........................... 650 Text and Page Setup ......................... 189
Texture Filter ..................................... 213
Polyline Solid Specification
Time Tracker ..................................... 197
Dialog.............................................. 650
Unit Coversion Panel ......................... 195
Polyline Solids .................................. 649
Prepare for Layout ............................ 971
Polyline Specification Dialog.......... 863
Preview vs. Final Render View ........ 766
Polylines
Primitives
Fill patterns ....................................... 865
Box ................................................... 642
Molding Polyline tool ......................... 541
Cone ................................................. 642
Pond, Round ..................................... 592 Cylinder ............................................ 642
Pony Walls................................. 230 , 233 Editing .............................................. 643
Align upper and lower ........................ 277 Library .............................................. 686
Change wall types ............................. 233 Sphere .............................................. 642
Default height .................................... 277 Tools ................................................ 641
Display ............................................. 242 Print
Show lower wall ................................ 277 3D Views ........................................... 953
see also Railings, solid Across Multiple Pages ....................... 953
Post .................................................... 472 Center Sheet ..................................... 951
Post Specification Dialog ................ 499 Check Plots ............................... 948 , 953
Clear Printer Info ............................... 950
POV-Ray............................................. 794
Color or Black and White ................... 966
Prairie style Custom Sheet Size ............................ 959
see Lites Dialog ............................................... 965
Preferences ....................................... 678 Dimensions ....................................... 957
Appearance ...................................... 184 Directly from a View ........................... 952
Architectural Panel ............................ 198 Double-buffered printing ..................... 967
Behaviors Panel ................................ 202 Drivers .............................................. 949
CAD Panel ........................................ 199 from Layout ....................................... 952
CAD Snaps ....................................... 204 Image ....................................... 770 , 967
Categories Panel ....................... 208 – 209 Image Dialog ..................................... 967
Colors ............................................... 186 Layout Files ...................................... 988
Dialog ............................................... 183 Line Weights ..................................... 954
Edit Panel ......................................... 201 Line Weights and Scaling ................... 955
Folders Panel .................................... 192 Model .................................................. 28
Font .................................................. 187 Model Dialog ..................................... 960
General Panel ................................... 190 Options ............................................. 949
Global settings .................................. 183 Paper Size ........................................ 948
Layers Panel ..................................... 195 Perspective Views ............................. 953
Library Browser ................................. 188 Plotters ............................................. 949
Line Properties Panel ........................ 200 Preview ............................................. 951
Master List Panel .............................. 208 Printable Area ................................... 951
Materials List .................................... 206 Printing Scale .................................... 948
New Plans ........................................ 194 Problems ......................................... 1019
1082
Render Views .................................... 770 Radius of Tangent Curved Wall
Scale to Fit ........................................ 952 Dialog.............................................. 246
Services ............................................ 971 Rafter depth ...................................... 425
Setup ................................................ 971
Rafters ....................................... 471 , 474
Sheet Size ................................. 948 , 958
Automatically create .......................... 474
Terminology ....................................... 948
Bearing Line ...................................... 488
Text ................................................... 957
Blocking ............................................ 473
the Model .......................................... 959
Depth ....................................... 429 , 475
Tiled .................................................. 953
Depth, individual roof plane ............... 429
Index
to PDF File ........................................ 953
Framing Reference ............................ 484
To Scale ............................................ 952
Mixing with trusses ............................ 507
Troubleshooting ................................. 962
Trusses mix ...................................... 474
Print Dialog ........................................ 965
Railing
Print Image Dialog............................. 967 Defaults ............................................ 229
Print Model Dialog............................. 960 Tab ................................................... 267
Printed Size Input Dialog ................. 825 Railings ...................................... 230 , 233
Printer Setup...................................... 971 Balusters .................................. 268 , 270
Printers ............................................... 949 Change wall into railing ..................... 260
Select printer ..................................... 965 Connect walls ................................... 241
Set up ............................................... 971 Decks ............................................... 237
Exterior Materials .............................. 269
Priority Support ............................... 1021 Fix connections ................................. 240
Profile Plans ...................................... 167 Half walls .......................................... 268
Project Height defined ................................... 270
Browser ............................................. 165 Locate with dimensions ..................... 261
Information ........................................ 166 Moving .............................................. 242
Property lines .................................... 847 Newels ............................................. 270
North pointer ...................................... 849 No Rail ............................................. 268
No Shoe ........................................... 269
Proportional Resize ............... 80 , 89 – 90
Open rail type ................................... 268
Open with middle rail ......................... 268
Openings .......................................... 314
Q Partial ............................................... 453
Raise Shoe ....................................... 269
Quoin Specification Dialog .............. 538 Solid ................................................. 268
Quoins ................................................ 537 Stairs ................................................ 453
Type ................................................. 268
Raise
R Shoe ................................................. 269
Truss Off plate .................................. 520
Radiosity ............................................ 789 Raised / Lowered Region
Radius ......................................... 240 , 856 Specification Dialog...................... 617
End Cabinets ..................................... 563 Raised Region ................................... 589
of Tangent Curved Wall Dialog ........... 246 Raked Walls....................................... 242
Radius To .......................................... 262 Raytrace
1083
Aspect ratio ....................................... 788 Data Tab ........................................... 531

Create .............................................. 787 Daytime Ambient ............................... 773
Export to POV-Ray ............................ 794 Display light sources .................. 533 , 784
Faster raytracing ............................... 792 Export view ....................................... 770
Image Adustment Dialog .................... 790 Field of view ...................................... 757
Materials ........................................... 791 Floor Overview .......................... 764 , 787
Options Dialog .................................. 788 Full Overview .................................... 787
Quality .............................................. 793 Graphics card .................................... 764
Radiosity ........................................... 789 Interior Ambient ................................. 773
Tab ...................................................791 Light Fixtures .................................... 773
Window ............................................. 790 Light Sources .................................... 772
Raytrace Options Dialog.................. 788 Nighttime Ambient ............................. 773
Overviews ................................. 764 , 787
Raytrace View ................................... 787
Preferences ....................................... 211
Rebuild Save view ......................................... 770
3D .................................................... 747 Settings ............................................ 212
Monolithic Slab Foundations .............. 378 Tab ................................................... 719
Walls/Floors/Ceilings ............. 37 , 72 , 416 View Picture, Save ............................ 770
Recent File List ................................. 191 View, Edit in ...................................... 746
Recessed Door.................................. 317 View, Materials .................................. 768
View, Preview vs. Final ...................... 766
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 865
View, Print ........................................ 770
Reduce Gable .................................... 520
Render Data Tab ............................... 780
Reference
Render Full Overview ....................... 764
Display Options ................................. 370
Floor ................................................. 367 Render Tips and Tricks .................... 771
Floor Color ........................................ 186 Render Tools ..................................... 765
Grid .................................................. 182 Render Views .................................... 764
Refresh Library Browser ................. 677 Ediiting Objects in .............................. 770
Regular Polygon ............................... 865 Replace from Library
Relative Button ............................................... 680
to Current Point, new line end ............ 848 Dialog ............................................... 680
to Current Point, new point ................ 844 Report style
to Current point, polar, new point ....... 844 Grid display settings .......................... 207
to Itself, move point ........................... 846 Materials List ..................................... 207
to Previous Point, move point ............. 846 see also Materials List
Remove Rescale Layout Views ...................... 980
3D .............................................. 72 , 748 Reset
Backdrop .......................................... 761 Defaults .................................... 179 , 182
Manufacturer Lock ............................. 698 Preferences ....................................... 214
Muntins ............................................. 339
Reshape Text ............................. 824 , 993
Renaming Libraries .......................... 677
Resize
Render Components ...................................... 340
Added Lights ..................................... 774 Doors ................................................ 309
Ambient light ..................................... 772 Enable for symbols ............................ 181
Camera Field of View ................ 754 , 757 Factor ............................................... 891
1084
House using Exterior Dimensions ........ 805 Baseline Polylines ............................. 391
Ignore casing ..................................... 181 Baseline Specification Dialog ............. 422
Images .............................................. 896 Baselines ........................... 393 , 402 , 425
Library Objects .................................. 698 Baselines Polylines, Example Using ... 392
Picture ............................................... 892 Beams .............................................. 471
Stairs ................................................ 441 Defaults ............................................ 385
Stem Walls ........................................ 377 Framing ............................................ 470
Walls ................................................. 242 Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ...... 432
Windows ............................................ 336 Pitches in Degrees ............................ 433
Index
Restore Toolbars ................................ 24 Plane Specification Dialog ................. 424
Styles, Automatic .............................. 386
Restrictions
Tab ................................................... 263
Moving objects ................................... 124
Tools ................................................ 385
Retain Truss ........................................ 471 , 502
Attic wall ............................................ 261 Truss Details ..................................... 505
Wall Framing ............................. 261 , 496 Truss Specification Dialog ................. 518
Retaining Wall ................................... 593 Roof Baseline Specification
Reverse............................................... 136 Dialog.............................................. 422
Plan .................................................. 136 Roof Designer ................................... 383
Plan, Multiple Floors ............................ 66
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification
Wall layers ......................................... 275
Dialog.............................................. 432
Ridge Top, edit roofs ........................ 425
Roof Plane Specification
Right Button Definition ....................... 4
Dialog.............................................. 424
Rim Joist ............................................ 475
Roof Planes ............................... 385 , 393
Road .................................................... 178 Aligning ............................................ 403
and Sidewalk Defaults ........................ 629 Curved .............................................. 394
Defaults ............................................. 629 Delete ............................................... 405
Marking ............................................. 632 Display ............................................. 401
Marking Specification Dialog ............... 638 Edit ................................................... 402
Markings ............................................ 634 Edit Curved ....................................... 405
Polyline ............................................. 631 Intersections, Locate ......................... 408
Specification Dialog ........................... 635 Join .................................................. 403
Stripe ................................................ 632 Low roof planes ................................. 418
Road Marking Specification Move to be Coplanar ......................... 404
Dialog .............................................. 638 Raising/Lowering ............................... 404
Road Objects Roof Truss Specification Dialog..... 518
Different Types .................................. 630 Roofs .................................................. 962
Display .............................................. 633 2nd pitch ................................... 263 , 387
Edit ................................................... 634 Angled baselines ............................... 425
Select ................................................ 634 Auto Rebuild ............................. 386 , 418
Road Specification Dialog ............... 635 Auto Roof Return .............................. 264
Roads .................................................. 630 Automatic ......................................... 384
Curbs ................................................ 636 Automatic vs. Manual ........................ 384
Baseline ............................ 393 , 402 , 425
Roads and Road Polylines ............... 634
Baseline Polylines ............................. 391
Roof Birdsmouth ....................................... 425
1085
Boxed Eave ...................................... 426 Subgirders ........................................ 512

Build Roof Dialog .............................. 416 Trusses ............................................. 419
Curved .............................................. 426 Upslope Mark .................................... 402
Dormers ............................................ 398 Vertical Rafter Depth ......................... 425
Eave Fascia Width ............................ 421 Room
Energy Heel ...................................... 520 Defaults ............................................ 280
Extend slope downward ............. 263 , 387 Definition ................................... 280 , 288
Fascia top ......................................... 425 Label Defaults Dialog ......................... 838
Framing ............................................ 483 Material Defaults ............................... 280
Full gable wall ........................... 263 , 387 Molding Polylines .............................. 295
Gable ............................................... 390 Polylines ........................................... 295
Gambrel ............................................ 388 Specification Dialog ........................... 296
Gull Wing .......................................... 388
Room Label Defaults Dialog ............ 838
Gutters ..................................... 421 , 427
Half-hip ............................................. 388 Room Labels...................................... 286
High shed/gable ................. 263 , 387 , 390 Display .............................................. 286
Hip ................................................... 390 Edit ................................................... 287
Hip Trusses ...................................... 511 Interior room area .............................. 286
Hole for skylights ............................... 414 Interior room dimensions .................... 286
Ignore Top Floor ................................ 418 Room area ........................................ 286
Knee walls ................................ 263 , 387 Standard room area ........................... 286
Lock ................................................. 402 Room Specification Dialog .............. 296
Lock roof planes ................................ 418 Rooms
Mansard ........................................... 388 Area .................................................. 286
Manual ............................................. 393 Attic .................................................. 284
Materials Lists ................................... 421 Auto Place Outlets ............................. 285
Min. Alcove ....................................... 420 Below Stairs ...................................... 457
Over curved walls .............................. 256 Ceiling height .................................... 297
Over this room .................................. 299 Ceiling over ....................................... 299
Overhang .................................. 402 , 418 Edit buttons ....................................... 291
Pitch .......................... 263 , 387 – 388 , 425 Editing .............................................. 290
Plumb Cut Eaves ............................... 421 Exterior types .................................... 284
Rafter depth, individual roof plane ...... 429 Floor height ....................................... 297
Rafter tails ........................................ 426 Foundation floor definition .................. 299
Raise off plate ................................... 419 Interior .............................................. 284
Retain edits ............................... 418 , 427 Interior area ...................................... 286
Retain manually drawn planes ........... 418 Interior dimensions ............................ 286
Returns ............................................. 400 Living Area ........................................ 285
Ridge/top .......................................... 425 Moldings ........................................... 302
Roof Group ....................................... 298 Name for PlanCheck .......................... 885
Roof Plane ........................................ 385 Open Below ...................................... 285
Second pitch ..................................... 264 Polygon Shaped ................................ 235
Show all ridges .................................. 420 Roof over .......................................... 299
Show pitch as degrees .............. 181 , 425 Room Types ...................................... 284
Skylights ........................................... 414 Selecting ........................................... 283
Square Cut Eaves ............................. 421 Standard area ................................... 286
Step Down Hip .................................. 511 The Exterior Room ............................. 284
Story-and-a-half ................................ 387 Types ................................................ 284
1086
Rotate Schedules
CAD items ......................................... 203 Creating ............................................ 992
Jump ................................................. 203 Schematics, Wiring .......................... 525
Stairs ................................................ 441
Scissors Trusses .............................. 516
Text ........................................... 824 , 993
View .................................................. 135 Screen Capture Setup Dialog.......... 900
Rough Opening Scroll Bars......................................... 725
Doorways (ISD) ......................... 943 – 944 Search for Plans ............................... 168
Windows (ISD) ........................... 943 – 944 Section see Cross section
Index
Round Section/Elevation
Garden bed ....................................... 592 Views, Create ................................... 749
Pond ................................................. 592 Views, Detailing ................................ 750
Segment Angle at Curved Wall ....... 420
Select ................................................. 262
S All ....................................................... 94
S Markers ........................................... 374 Backdrop .......................................... 761
Same Blocked Units .................................... 332
Height Eaves ..................................... 419 Components ...................................... 665
Roof Height at External Wall ............... 419 Components of Blocked Units ............ 333
Wall Type .......................................... 245 Fence Select ....................................... 94
Same Wall Type ................................. 245 File ................................................... 624
Group, drag method ............................ 92
Sash and Frame Tab ......................... 348
Group, marquee method ...................... 92
Save Layer Dialog ...................................... 222
3D Views ........................................... 747 Layout Lines ..................................... 983
and Save As ...................................... 161 Layout Views .................................... 979
Bitmap ............................................... 736 Library Object Dialog ......................... 679
Cross Section/Elevation Cameras ....... 752 Library Objects .................................. 698
Plan .......................................... 160 – 161 Marquee ............................................. 93
Plan and Layout Files ......................... 160 Materials with the Material Tab .......... 710
Plan as Template ............................... 168 Multiple Objects .................................. 94
Plan Thumbnail .................................. 161 Next Object ......................................... 93
Render View Picture ........................... 770 Object Parts ........................................ 93
Section/Elevation Cameras ................. 752 Objects ............................................... 92
see also Autosave Objects button ..................................... 92
Scale Objects in 3D Views .......................... 746
Data .................................................. 626 Road Objects .................................... 634
Layout view ....................................... 980 Room ................................................ 283
Picture Files ...................................... 891 Same Type ....................................... 152
Printing to .......................................... 952 Same Type button ............................... 95
to Fit ................................................. 952 Selected Edge ..................................... 92
Schedule............................................. 178 Shift+Click .......................................... 94
Defaults ............................................. 992 Similar Objects .................................... 92
Specification Dialog ........................... 995 Similar Objects Dialog ....................... 152
Terrain Data ...................................... 597
Schedule Specification Dialog ........ 995
Walls, Railing, and Fences ................. 242
1087
Windows ........................................... 332 Defaults ............................................ 629

Selected Line Tab ............................. 864 Polyline ............................................. 633
Selection Fill Color........................... 187
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........ 639
Send
to Layout Dialog ................................ 976 Sidewalks, Auto Generate ............... 634
Views to layout .................................. 975 Site.......................................................... 3
Service Data Tab............................... 530 Sizing
Set Angular Dimension Symbols ............................................ 938
Dialog...................................... 133 , 806 Tab ................................................... 946
Settings, 3D ....................................... 757 Skylights .................................... 385 , 414
Setup Slab............................................. 379 , 381
Screen Capture ................................. 900 At top of stem wall ............................. 374
Tab ................................................... 810 Foundation ........................................ 373
Tab, Right Dide ................................. 811 Holes ................................................ 379
Monolithic ......................................... 374
Shadows ............................................ 776
Toolbar button ................................... 379
Shape
Slab Specification Dialog ................ 381
Tab ................................................... 355
Window ..................................... 355 , 943 Slabs................................................... 379
see also Windows and the Materials List ......................... 380
Shelf ................................................... 553 Sliding Doors..................................... 307
Shelf/Partition Specification Sloped Soffits.................................... 655
Dialog.............................................. 578 Snap Properties Preferences .......... 204
Shoe Soffit
None for railing ................................. 269 Defaults ............................................ 650
Raise for railing ................................. 269 Specification Dialog ........................... 653
Short Extensions ...................... 810 , 815 Soffit Specification Dialog............... 653
Shortcut Keys ................................. 7 , 24 Soffits ......................................... 553 , 650
Show Calculating Materials ......................... 652
0" ..................................................... 810 Place under ceiling ............................ 654
Dash in dimensions ........................... 810 Place under Roof ............................... 654
Dimensions, inches only .................... 812 Sloped ...................................... 654 – 655
Dimensions, metric ............................ 810 Sloped soffit ...................................... 654
Imperial dimensions .......................... 810 Special applications ........................... 651
Inches only, dimensions ..................... 812 Solid Fill ............................................. 869
Line Weights ..................................... 951 Solid Specification Dialog ............... 649
Lower Pony Wall in Plan View ............ 277 SpacePlanner Toolbar
Metric dimensions ............................. 810
Configuration ................................... 23
Pitch as degrees ............................... 181
Sheet ................................................ 951 Special
Short extensions ....................... 810 , 815 CAD Buttons ................................. 69 – 70
CAD Preferences ............................... 201
Show Arc Centers ............................. 102
Shaped Cabinets ............................... 562
Shutters ............................................. 353 Specification Dialogs
Sidewalk ............................................ 632 3D Box .............................................. 645
1088
3D Molding Polyline ........................... 546 Raised/Lowered Region ..................... 617
Arc .................................................... 858 Road ................................................ 635
Architectural Block ............................. 667 Road Marking .................................... 638
Bay/Box Window ................................ 359 Roof Baseline ................................... 422
Beam ................................................ 498 Roof Hole/Skylight ............................. 432
Bow Window ...................................... 360 Roof Plane ........................................ 424
Cabinet .............................................. 565 Room ................................................ 296
Cabinet Shelf ..................................... 577 Schedule .......................................... 995
CAD Box ........................................... 867 Shelf/Partition ................................... 578
Index
CAD Circle ......................................... 861 Sidewalk ........................................... 639
CAD Ellipse ....................................... 861 Slab .................................................. 381
CAD Oval .......................................... 861 Soffit ................................................. 653
Callout ............................................... 834 Solid ................................................. 649
Camera ............................................. 753 Sphere .............................................. 646
Ceiling Plane ..................................... 428 Sprinkler ........................................... 620
Cone ................................................. 648 Stair Landing ..................................... 467
Corner Boards ................................... 536 Staircase .......................................... 458
Cross Section/Elevation Camera ......... 755 Sun Angle ......................................... 778
Custom Countertop ............................ 579 Symbol ............................................. 945
Cylinder ............................................. 647 Terrain .............................................. 610
Dimension Line .................................. 807 Terrain Break .................................... 618
Door .................................................. 315 Terrain Feature ................................. 617
Dormer .............................................. 429 Terrain Path ...................................... 619
Driveway ........................................... 637 Text .................................................. 830
Electrical Service ............................... 529 Wall Hatch ........................................ 273
Elevation Line .................................... 616 Window ............................................. 343
Elevation Point ................................... 613 Speed
Fireplace ........................................... 657 3D views ........................................... 759
Flat Region ........................................ 616 Up 3D View Generation ..................... 745
Framing ............................................. 497
Spell Check ....................................... 828
Hill / Valley ........................................ 617
Joist Direction .................................... 489 Sphere ........................................ 642 , 686
Layout Box ........................................ 989 Sphere Specification Dialog ........... 646
Library Object .................................... 699 Spherical Backdrops ........................ 769
Library Object Button ......................... 696
Spiral Staircase ................................ 685
Light .................................................. 781
Line ................................................... 850 Spline Tab.......................................... 869
Marker ............................................... 837 Splines ............................................... 868
Molding Polyline ................................. 544 Advanced Splines .............................. 117
Mulled Window .................................. 347 Control Handles ................................ 117
Object ............................................... 708 Lock Control Handle Angle ................ 118
Plan Footprint .................................... 877 Split
Plant ................................................. 606 Levels ............................................... 283
Plant Image ....................................... 602 Walls ................................................ 236
Polyline ............................................. 863 Spot Light .......................................... 777
Polyline Solid ..................................... 650
Post .................................................. 499 Sprinkler
Quoins .............................................. 538 Designer ........................................... 594
1089
Specification Dialog ........................... 620 Railings ............................................. 453

Tools ................................................ 594 Reach Next Floor ............................... 459
Sprinkler Specification Dialog ........ 620 Resizing ............................................ 441
Rise angle ......................................... 460
Sprinklers Library............................. 690
Rooms Below .................................... 457
Stacked Windows ............................. 331 Rotating ............................................ 441
Stair Section width ..................................... 460
Designer ........................................... 435 Sections ............................................ 460
Landing Specification Dialog .............. 467 Solid Railings .................................... 454
Sections Move Independently ............ 198 Stairwell ............................................ 456
Tools ................................................ 436 Starter Treads ................................... 451
Stair Landing Specification Straight ............................................. 436
Dialog.............................................. 467 Stringers ........................................... 461
Stringers, steel .................................. 455
Staircase
Subsections ...................... 447 , 459 – 460
Symmetrically Flared ......................... 449
Spiral ................................................ 685
Terminology ...................................... 436
Staircase Specification Dialog ....... 458 Tread Width .............................. 447 , 460
Stairs Treads .............................................. 459
Align Curved Stairs ............................ 129 Treads, define ................................... 461
Auto Stairwell .................................... 456 Treads, retain number ........................ 461
Balusters .......................................... 464 Walk Line .................................. 447 , 462
Change Line/Arc ............................... 439 Winders .................................... 442 , 460
Change radius of curve ...................... 441 Wrapped ........................................... 452
Click ................................................. 436 Stairwell, Create................................ 456
Concrete ........................................... 455
Start Direction ................................... 857
Curved ...................................... 436 , 438
Curved Treads .................................. 450 Start House Wizard ........................... 884
Deck to ground .................................. 437 Startup Options..................................... 2
Direction ........................................... 437 Startup Options Dialog ........................ 2
Displaying ......................................... 440
Static Views ....................................... 977
Down ................................................ 437
Edit ................................................... 458 Status Bar ...................................... 8 , 185
Edit Handles ..................................... 441 Angle style ........................................ 873
Exterior Colors .................................. 463 Stem Walls ......................................... 373
Flare Radius ..................................... 449 Align ................................................. 377
Flared ............................................... 448 and Footings, Align ............................ 377
Landings ........................................... 443 Resize .............................................. 377
Large Stringer Base .......................... 462 Step Down Hip, Advantages and
Lock Tread Width ...................... 439 , 447 Disadvantages ............................... 515
Make Reach ...................................... 459
Step Foundation S Markers ............. 374
Masonry ............................................ 455
Max Tread Contraction ...................... 463 Stepping Stone Tools ....................... 593
Merge Sections ................................. 438 Stick Framing, Mixing with
Moving .............................................. 441 Trusses ........................................... 507
Newels ............................................. 464 Sticky Mode ....................................... 138
Open Underneath .............................. 462
Stop at Ceiling................................... 262
Partial Railings .................................. 453
1090
Story-and-a-half................................. 387 Dimensions ....................................... 938
Straight Edge lines ......................................... 930
Deck Edge ......................................... 231 Enable resize .................................... 181
Stairs ................................................ 436 Faces ....................................... 926 , 930
Insertion point ........................... 926 , 930
Stream ................................................ 592
Modify .............................................. 925
Stretch Zones .................................... 940 Moldings ........................................... 540
Structure Tab ............................. 299 , 378 Options ............................................. 935
Subcategories.................................. 1013 Origin ....................................... 926 , 930
Index
Reset origin ...................................... 930
Subfloor Thickness ........................... 477
Resize .............................................. 939
Subgirder Hip, Advantages and Sides ................................................926
Disadvantages ................................ 515 Sizing ...............................................938
Subgirders.......................................... 512 Specification Dialog ........................... 945
Subtract .............................................. 148 Stretch Planes ................................... 939
Stretch Zones ................................... 940
Sun
Surface normals ................................ 926
Shadows ........................................... 595
Surface Smoothing Angle .................. 930
Sun Angle ................................... 775 , 850
Symbol Specification Dialog ........... 945
Create ............................................... 775
Date .................................................. 779 Symbols
Delete Shadows ................................. 777 Sizing ............................................... 938
Render Data ...................................... 780 vs. Native Objects ............................. 698
Shadows ................................... 533 , 784 System Default Walls ....................... 251
Sun Angle Specification Dialog....... 778
Sunlight Toggle ................................. 766
Sunrooms ........................................... 684 T
Suppress Objects in 3D Views ........ 745
Tab Key ................................................ 93
Surface
Tabs
Backdrop ......................................... 1032
Changing .......................................... 833
Normals ............................................. 926
Columns ........................................... 833
Smoothing Angle ................................ 930
Text .................................................. 833
Swap
Take Off see Materials List
Views ................................................ 729
Work-Reference ................................. 369 Tangent
Curved walls ..................................... 247
Switch
Make arc, edit button ......................... 247
Create ............................................... 525
Make Tangent button ........................... 74
Current Floor/Reference Floor ............ 369
Double .............................................. 525 Technical Support ................. 1017 , 1023
In circuit ............................................ 525 Contact ........................................... 1021
Place ................................................. 525 E-mail ............................................. 1022
Three way ......................................... 526 Hardware Lock Issues ..................... 1019
Installation Issues ........................... 1019
Symbol
Priority ............................................ 1021
Automatic Edge Lines ........................ 930
Telephone ....................................... 1022
Boundary box .................................... 938
Web ................................................ 1021
Create ............................................... 925
1091
Template Plan ........................... 159 , 167 Contours ........................................... 612

Creating ............................................ 168 Elevation Lines/Splines ...................... 597
Temporary Elevation Points ................................ 585
Dimensions ....................................... 800 Generate Terrain ............................... 596
File Directories .................................. 193 Primary Contours ............................... 612
Sun Shadows .................................... 595
Terrain................................................ 617
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 584
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 597
Terrain Surface Quality ...................... 611
Break Specification Dialog ................. 618
Terrain Surface Smoothing ................. 611
Clear ................................................ 596
Triangle Size ..................................... 611
Copy ................................................. 597
Display in 3D View ............................ 596 Terrain Path Specification
Display in Floor Plan View ................. 596 Dialog .............................................. 619
Elevation Tools ................................. 585 Terrain Perimeter .............................. 584
Feature Tools .................................... 590 Edit ................................................... 597
Grow All Plants Dialog ....................... 594 Plot Plan ........................................... 601
Holes ................................................ 591 Terrain Specification Dialog............ 610
Library ...................................... 596 , 691
Text
Menu .................................................. 42
Align ................................................. 825
Modifier Tools ................................... 589
Arrows .............................................. 819
Properties, Clip ................................. 611
Auto Height, Width ............................. 833
Retaining Wall ................................... 589
Copy, Cut and Paste .......................... 825
Creating ............................................ 819
Sprinkler Tools .................................. 594
Defaults .................................... 178 , 838
Terrain Breaks .................................. 588
Displaying ......................................... 823
Toolbar Configuration ............ 22 – 23 , 584
Edit ................................................... 824
Wall and Curb Tools .......................... 593
Editing .............................................. 824
Terrain Break Specification Files ................................................. 623
Dialog.............................................. 618 Hyperlinks ......................................... 834
Terrain Data Justify ............................................... 825
Convert CAD Lines to ........................ 628 Layer ................................................ 823
Delete ............................................... 597 Layout ............................................... 974
Import ............................................... 623 Line With Arrow ................................. 819
Select ............................................... 597 Macros .............................................. 826
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ... Maximum Characters ......................... 819
617 Move ......................................... 824 , 993
Printed Size ...................................... 825
Terrain Features
Printing ............................................. 957
Clip ................................................... 617
Reshaping ................................. 824 , 993
Edit ................................................... 597
Special characters ............................. 828
Height ............................................... 617
Terrain Modeler Spell Check ....................................... 828
3D Views .......................................... 597 Tab Spacing .............................. 826 , 833
Add Elevation Data .................... 585 , 597 Tabbed Objects ................................. 826
Build Terrain ............................. 584 , 596 Tables ............................................... 826
Building Pad Elevation ....................... 611 With Arrow ........................................ 819
Clear Terrain ..................................... 596
Text Specification Dialog................. 830
Contour Line Smoothing .................... 612
1092
Texture Dimension ......................................... 797
Filters ................................................ 213 Door ................................................. 306
Tab ................................................... 718 Electrical ........................................... 524
Textures.............................................. 768 Floor ................................................. 365
Add new ............................................ 897 Framing ............................................ 471
Apply to items .................................... 718 Garden Bed ...................................... 592
Apply to materials .............................. 718 Menu .................................................. 59
Convert to Materials ........................... 704 Plant ................................................. 594
Create ............................................... 897 Primitives .......................................... 641
Index
Filters ................................................ 214 Render ............................................. 765
Mapping ............................................ 705 Roof ................................................. 385
View .................................................. 718 Slab .................................................. 379
Stair ................................................. 436
Third Party Libraries ......................... 670
Stepping Stone ................................. 593
Thumbnails Tab ..................................................... 18
Enable ............................................... 192 Terrain Wall and Curb ........................ 593
Save ................................................. 161 Vector View ...................................... 734
Size ................................................... 192 Wall .................................................. 229
Tiling Views........................................ 727 Water Feature ................................... 592
Time Zoom ................................................ 723
Log Dialog ......................................... 882 Transfer Plans................................... 172
Tracker .............................................. 881 Transform/Replicate Object
Tracker Preferences ........................... 197 Dialog.............................................. 145
Title Blocks ........................................ 974 Transom Window see Windows, stacked
Toe Kick Height/Depth ...................... 567 Transparency Color.......................... 899
Tool, Gable/Roof Line ....................... 410 Treads
Toolbar Lock width ........................................ 461
Configurations .................................... 22 Maintain Width .................................. 461
Tab .................................................... 20 Overhang .......................................... 463
Toolbars .......................................... 6 , 17 Retain number in section ................... 461
Add Tools ........................................... 18 Thickness ......................................... 463
All views ............................................. 18 Treatments Tab ................................. 357
Child Buttons ...................................... 19 Trim Objects ...................................... 143
Customize .......................................... 18
Trimmers............................................ 480
Delete Tools ....................................... 19
Edit .................................................... 71 Truss .................................................. 516
Edit toolbar ........................................... 7 Base ................................................. 507
Parent Buttons .................................... 19 Base Specification Dialog .................. 516
Restore .............................................. 24 Details ...................................... 505 , 875
Tool tips ............................................... 6 Spacing ............................................ 486
Tools Truss Base Specification
3D ..................................................... 735 Dialog.............................................. 516
Box ................................................... 865 Trusses ............................... 419 , 474 , 485
Cabinet .............................................. 552 Attic trusses ...................................... 503
CAD Drawing ..................................... 842 Bottom Chord ............................ 519 , 522
Complete List ...................................... 24 Ceiling trusses .................................. 502
1093
Copy ......................................... 502 , 505 Unit Conversions Panel ................... 195

Create .............................................. 502 Units
Details .............................................. 505 Changing .......................................... 811
Drop Hip truss .................... 515 , 520 , 522 Dimensions, show imperial ................. 810
Edit ................................................... 504 Dimensions, show metric ................... 810
End truss .................................. 519 , 522 Imperial ............................................. 811
Energy Heel ...................................... 520 Imperial dimensions ........................... 810
Floor and Ceiling ............................... 502 Metric ............................................... 811
Floor trusses ..................................... 502
Unrestricted Movement .................... 124
Floor/Ceiling ..................................... 472
Girder ............................................... 515 Untitled Plan
Hip ........................................... 511 – 515 see New Plan
Hip jack ............................................ 512 Update Templates ............................. 168
Hip Roofs .......................................... 511 Use
Hip systems, comparisons ................. 515 Framing Reference .................... 476 , 484
Jack ................................................. 512 Mesh ................................................. 376
Kingpost ........................................... 519 Transparency .................................. 1032
Labels .............................................. 506
Use Layout Line Scaling .................. 976
Laying out ......................................... 502
Locking ............................................. 521 User Specified Walls ........................ 251
Mixing with rafters ..................... 474 , 507
Raise off plate ................................... 520
Reduce gable .................................... 520
Require kingpost ............................... 522
V
Roof ......................................... 471 , 502 Valley .................................................. 589
Scissors ............................................ 516 Vector View Tools ............................. 734
Spacing ............................................ 486
Step Down Hip .......................... 511 , 515 Vertical Rafter Depth ........................ 518
Subgirders ................................ 512 , 515 View
Top Chord ................................. 519 , 522 Angle Dialog ...................................... 744
Truss Base ....................................... 507 to CAD .............................................. 875
Webbing ............................ 519 , 521 – 522 Views
Two Stretch Planes .......................... 940 Cascade ........................................... 726
Type Tab ............................................ 945 Dynamic ............................................ 977
Static ................................................ 977
Virtual Graph Paper .......................... 180
U Virtual Reality Modeling Language

see VRML
Undo Visual CAD Snaps ............................. 180
Files ................................................. 164 Volume, Materials ............................. 715
Preferences ...................................... 191 VRML .................................................. 905
Undo Zoom ....................................... 724 Export ............................................... 905
Union .................................................. 146 Images .............................................. 906
Unit Conversion Preferences .......... 195 Textures ............................................ 906
Use of Texture and Image Files .......... 906
1094
W Curved, center point ..........................
Curved, drawing ................................
240
238
Delete hatching ................................. 236
Walk Line .................................... 447 , 462
Dimensioning .................................... 254
Walkthrough Options Dialog ........... 904 Display surfaces only ......................... 241
Walkthroughs............................. 748 , 904 Double walls ..................................... 248
Playing .............................................. 905 Drawing ............................................ 238
Recording .......................................... 904 Edit Handles ..................................... 242
VRML ................................................ 905 Edit in 3D .......................................... 242
Index
Wall ............................................. 179 , 274 Editing .............................................. 242
Assemblies ........................................ 251 Exporting Definitions ......................... 255
Bridging ............................................. 866 Exterior and Interior ........................... 232
Cabinets ............................................ 552 Fill style line weight ........................... 253
Corner Specification Dialog ................ 536 Fix Connections ................................ 240
Defaults ............................................. 228 Flip layers ......................................... 275
Details ............................................... 875 Footing width and height .................... 265
Elevation ........................................... 735 Foundation ................................ 232 , 265
Framing ............................................. 470 Foundation thickness ......................... 265
Framing Details .................................. 478 Foundation wall ................................. 260
Framing Members, Drawing ................ 493 Framing ............................................ 478
Hatch Specification Dialog .................. 273 Framing Detail ................................... 492
Layer ................................................. 274 Framing Layer ................................... 254
Layer Fill Style ................................... 253 Furred Walls ..................................... 249
Railing/Fencing Defaults ..................... 274 Grid snapping ................................... 240
Specification Dialog ........................... 259 Hatching ........................................... 236
Tools ................................................. 229 Hatching line weight .......................... 273
Type Definitions Dialog ...................... 251 Heights ............................................. 244
Types Tab ......................................... 265 High Shed/Gable ............................... 263
Importing Definitions .......................... 256
Wall Corner Specification Dialog .... 536
Interior, fireplace in ........................... 656
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ...... 273 Invisible .................................... 234 , 261
Wall Specification Dialog ......... 259 , 387 Knee Wall ......................................... 263
for Pony Walls ................................... 266 Layer fill style .................................... 253
Wall Type Definitions Dialog ........... 251 Layers .............................................. 254
Main Layer ........................................ 254
Walls ...................................... 3 , 227 , 275
Marriage walls ................................... 248
Align pony walls ................................. 277
Materials ........................................... 281
Aligning ............................................. 246
Merging ............................................ 242
Aligning between floors .............. 247 , 261
Moving .............................................. 242
Aligning colinear ................................ 246
Multiple Select .................................. 242
Allowed Angles .................................. 240
No Locate ......................................... 261
Attic Walls ................................. 248 , 261
No Room Def .................................... 261
Centering footings (2 methods) ........... 265
Pony Wall ......................................... 233
Changing into railings ......................... 260
Pony wall height ................................ 277
Compound Raked .............................. 259
Raked ....................................... 242 , 258
Connecting ........................................ 240
Removing Breaks .............................. 241
Curved .............................................. 238
Resizing ........................................... 242
Curved, align between floors .............. 247
Resizing Using Dimensions ................ 805
1095
Retain attic wall ................................. 261 Corner .............................................. 330

Retain wall framing .................... 261 , 496 Creating custom windows ................... 331
Retaining Wall ........................... 589 , 593 Custom Muntins ................................. 338
Roofs over curved ............................. 256 Defining Openings (ISD) ............ 943 – 944
Room Def (invisible) .......................... 261 Displaying ......................................... 335
Same Wall Type button ...................... 245 Edit buttons ....................................... 337
Same Wall Type handles ................... 243 Framing ............................................ 479
Selecting .......................................... 242 Gables Over ...................................... 415
Show length when editing .................. 275 in Curved Walls ................................. 346
Show lower pony wall ........................ 277 Labels ............................................... 335
Solid Railings .................................... 268 Layers see Windows, Levels
Splitting ............................................236 Levels ............................................... 334
Stepped .................................... 242 , 258 Library ...................................... 329 , 691
System Default .................................. 251 Lites see Lites
User Specified .................................. 251 Match roof ......................................... 356
Wall Coverings .................................. 271 Moving .............................................. 336
Water Feature Tools ......................... 592 Mulled Units ...................................... 332
Muntins ............................................. 353
Web Support ................................... 1021
Opening Indicators ............................ 336
Webbing ............................................. 522 Recessed .......................................... 346
Wedge ................................................ 686 Resizing ............................................ 336
Winders ...................................... 442 , 460 Schedules ......................................... 992
Definition .......................................... 436 Selecting ........................................... 332
Max Tread Contraction ...................... 463 Shutters ............................................ 353
Stacked ............................................. 331
Window
Stained glass material ........................ 331
Defaults ............................................ 328
Standard ........................................... 328
Menu .................................................. 66
Window Levels .................................. 331
Types ............................................... 328 Windows Metafiles ............................ 901
Types, CAD Detail ............................. 874 Wiring Schematics, Creating........... 525
Window Defaults ............................... 179 WP Outlet ........................................... 524
Window Specification Dialog .......... 343 Wrapped
Windows Openings .......................................... 314
Arch top (ISD) ................................... 943 Stairs ................................................ 452
Bay & bow dimensions ....................... 339
Bay windows ..................................... 328
Bay, roof over ................................... 341
Bench Seat ....................................... 340
Z
Blocked ............................................ 315 Zoom
Blocked units .................................... 332 Fill Window ....................................... 724
Bow .................................................. 329 in Vector Views ................................. 745
Bow, roof over ................................... 341 Mouse wheel ..................................... 724
Box ................................................... 329 Tools ................................................ 723
Box, roof over ................................... 341 Undo ................................................. 724
Cascade ........................................... 726 Wheel Mouse ........................................ 5
Component ....................................... 328
Components ...................................... 339
1096

Chief Architect 11 Reference Manual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Chief Architect 11 Reference Manual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Chief Architect® X1

Professional Design & Drafting Software

Chief Architect, Inc.

Printed in the United States of America.

Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chapter 3: Editing Objects

Chapter 4: File Management

Project Browser ............................................................................... 165

Chapter 5: Defaults & Preferences

Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

The Fencing Tools ........................................................................... 231

Chapter 10: Windows

Window Defaults ............................................................................. 328

Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Chapter 12: Foundations

Chapter 13: Roofs

Locating Roof Plane Intersections ................................................. 408

Chapter 14: Stairs

Chapter 15: Framing

Chapter 16: Trusses

Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 502

Chapter 17: Electrical

Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Chapter 19: Cabinets

Chapter 20: Terrain

Terrain Configuration Button........................................................ 584

Chapter 21: Roads & Sidewalks

Chapter 22: Other Objects

Soffits ................................................................................................ 650

Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Chapter 24: Libraries

Library Object Specification Dialog.............................................. 699

Chapter 25: Materials

Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Chapter 28: Render Views

Render View Tools .......................................................................... 764

Chapter 29: Raytracing

Chapter 31: Text, Callouts and Markers

Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 837

Chapter 32: CAD Objects

Chapter 33: Advanced Design & Editing

Chapter 34: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Copy Region as Picture ................................................................... 904

Chapter 35: Importing and Exporting

Chapter 36: Create Symbol Wizard

Chapter 37: Printing & Plotting

Chapter 38: Layout

CAD and Text in Layout................................................................. 974

Chapter 39: Schedules

Chapter 40: Materials Lists

Appendix A: Technical Support Services

Appendix B: What’s New in Version X1

Chief Architect Full vs. Lite

• Choose Open Plan to work on an • Click Find Plan Wizard to search a

The Chief Architect Environment

Using the Mouse The Right button has several uses.

The Administration Configuration The Edit Toolbar

Customizable Toolbars Shortcut Keys

Contextual Menus You can access contextual menus by right-

Specification Dialogs edit button is usually not available. The

The Status Bar

Preferences and Defaults

To restore a value to the default, click to Template Plans

8. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional Add Structure and Details